Sonatrach - Training - Manual - Tuga - 5001pa

GE
Oil & Gas
GAS TURBINE MS5001PA

OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
TRAINING MANUAL
Customized for: SONATRACH (ALGERIA)

GE
Oil & Gas
GE Oil & Gas
Customer Training Job: 0621834
Customer : SONATRACH (ALGERIA)
This manual contains proprietary information of GE Oil & Gas – Nuovo Pignone
S.p.A. (“GE Oil & Gas”), and is furnished to its customers solely for customer
training courses purposes.
This manual shall not be reproduced in whole or in part nor shall its contents
be disclosed to any third party without the written approval of GE Oil & Gas.
The instructions and information contained in the manual do not purport to
cover all details or variations in equipment, or to provide for every possible
contingency to be met during installation, operation, and maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise that

are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purpose, the matter should
be referred to GE Oil & Gas.
Reviewed Verified Validate

Massimiliano Romizi Vito Antonio Tondolo Cesare Sordi
Manual Specialist Mechanical Customer Training
Instructor Leader Manager
04/15/2013 04/18/2013 04/19/2013
GE Oil & Gas

TRAINING MANUAL
INDEX
SEZ .1 MS5001PA
Operation & Maintenance
SEZ .2 MS5001PA
Job Drawings

GE
Oil & Gas
GE Oil & Gas

TRAINING MANUAL
INDEX
VOL .1 MS5001PA
Operation & Maintenance

GE
Oil & Gas
g GE Oil & Gas Volume I Nuovo Pignone
N.P. Job: 170.5713÷15
GAS TURBINE DESCRIPTION & OPERATION
GENERAL INDEX
CONTENTS SECT./PAR.
INTRODUCTION 1
GENERAL 1.1
GAS TURBINE UNITS 1.2
ENCLOSURE (COMPARTMENTS) 1.3
SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL 1.4
GAS TURBINE DATA SHEET 1.5
GAS TURBINE PERFORMANCE CURVES 1.6
GAS TURBINE DESCRIPTION 2
GENERAL 2.1
DETAIL ORIENTATION 2.2
GAS PATH DESCRIPTION 2.3
GENERAL LAYOUT AND MAIN WEIGHTS 2.4
BASE AND SUPPORTS 3
ACCESSORY SECTION 3.1
TURBINE SECTION 3.2
COMPRESSOR SECTION 4
GENERAL 4.1
COMPRESSOR ROTOR ASSEMBLY 4.2
"DNL"(DRY LOW NOx) COMBUSTION SYSTEM 5
GENERAL 5.1
MANUFACTURING FEATURE OF DLN SYSTEM COMPONENT 5.2
DLN SYSTEM OPERATION DESCRIPTION AND MODES 5.3
FLAME DETECTIONS 5.4
IGNITION SYSTEM 5.5
TURBINE SECTION 6
GENERAL 6.1
TURBINE STATOR 6.2
FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE 6.3
SECOND STAGE NOZZLE & DIAPHRAGM 6.4
TURBINE ROTOR ASSEMBLY 6.5
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-2
MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00

CONTENTS SECT./PAR.
TURBINE BUCKETS 6.6

BEARINGS 7
GENERAL 7.1
LUBRICATION 7.2
LUBRICANT SEALS 7.3
NO. 1 BEARING 7.4
NO. 2 BEARING 7.5
G.E. BEARING PUBLICATION 7.6
INLET & EXHAUST 8
GENERAL 8.1
AIR INLET SYSTEM 8.2
INLET COMPARTMENT 8.3
INLET DUCTING AND SILENCING 8.4
EXHAUST SYSTEM 8.5
EXHAUST PLENUM 8.6
EXHAUST EXPANSION JOINT 8.7
EXHAUST TRANSITION DUCT (FIRST) 8.8
EXHAUST SILENCER MODULE 8.9
EXHAUST TRANSITION DUCT (SECOND) 8.10
EXHAUST STACK 8.11
TURBINE AUXILIARY SYSTEM 9
GENERAL 9.1
ACCESSORY DRIVE 9.2
COUPLINGS 9.3
STARTING SYSTEM (ELECTRIC STARTING MOTOR) 10

GENERAL 10.1
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 10.2
START-UP FUNCTIONS AND SEQUENCES 10.3
TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY 10.4
HYDRAULIC RATCHET SYSTEM 10.5
RATCHET SYSTEM OPERATION 10.6
STARTING JAW CLUTCH 10.7
FUEL GAS SYSTEM 11
GENERAL 11.1
GAS STOP/RATIO AND CONTROL VALVE 11.3
GAS STRAINERS 11.4
PROTECTIVE DEVICES 11.5
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-3

CONTENTS SECT./PAR.
GAS FUEL SYSTEM "DLN" 11.6

LUBE OIL SYSTEM 12
GENERAL 12.1
LUBE OIL TANK AND PIPING 12.3
LUBE OIL PUMPS 12.4
VALVES 12.5
LUBE OIL TEMPERATURE CONTROL 12.6
OIL FILTERS 12.7
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 12.8
HYDROCARBON BASE LUBRICATING OIL 12.9
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR GAS TURBINE SOM 17366/4
LUBE OIL COOLER 12.10
LUBE OIL VAPOUR SEPARATOR 12.11
LUBE OIL PURIFIER 12.12
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 13
GENERAL 13.1
HYDRAULIC SUPPLY MANIFOLD 13.3
VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE ACTUATING SYSTEM 13.4
HYDRAULIC TRIP SUBSYSTEM 13.5
COOLING & SEALING AIR SYSTEM 14
GENERAL 14.1
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 15
GENERAL INFORMATION 15.1
SYSTEM OPERATION 15.3
VENTILATION SYSTEM 16
GENERAL 16.1
GAS DETECTION SYSTEM 16.2
WASHING SYSTEM 17
WASHING/RINSING TANK 17.2
ELECTRIC HEATER 17.3
SOLENOID VALVES 17.4
OPERATION 18
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-4

CONTENTS SECT./PAR.
OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITY 18.1

GENERAL OPERATING PRECAUTIONS 18.2
PREPARATIONS FOR NORMAL LOAD OPERATION 18.3
CHECKS PRIOR TO OPERATION 18.4
CHECKS DURING START UP AND INITIAL OPERATION 18.5
EQUIPMENT STORAGE 19
EQUIPMENTS ARRIVING AT SITE 19.1
STORAGE 19.2
GAS TURBINE AND ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT PRESERVATION 19.3
SAFETY INSTRUCTION (SOM 6607109/4) 20
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (SOM 6622436/-) 21
ANNUNCIATOR TROUBLESHOOTING CHART (GEK 107359) 21.1
INTERNATIONAL CONVERSION TABLES 22
STANDARD FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTING PHYLOSOPHY 23
(GEK 107551)
APPENDIX - REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-4

g GE Oil & Gas Nuovo Pignone
Introduction Section 1
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 1.1
GAS TURBINE UNITS 1.2
ENCLOSURE (COMPARTMENTS) 1.3
SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL 1.4
GAS TURBINE DATA SHEET 1.5
GAS TURBINE PERFORMANCE CURVES 1.6
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL
This manual has been prepared primarily for gas turbine operators and service
personnel and provides three essentials: operation, maintenance and parts in-
formation for the gas turbine package power plant. A distribution of text revi-
sions when necessitated will be made to all recipients of the service manual.
Turbine reliability is ensured by personnel who practice good operating and

maintenance procedures. It is of vital importance that station personnel, trained
or untrained in gas turbine operation, become thoroughly familiar with the in-
formation contained in this manual. Prior to turbine operation a sound program
of maintenance should be developed and instituted. Adherence to such a pro-
gram will result in reduced operating costs, fewer outages, and shorter periods
of downtime.
1.2 GAS TURBINE UNITS
The package power plant, as furnished for this installation, is comprised of the
single-shaft, heavy-duty gas turbine unit driving a synchronous generator, its
auxiliary equipment, required control equipment and those off-base auxiliaries
that are essential to overall operation.
Basically, the power plant requires only fuel and fuel connections, generator
breaker connections and a source of ac power to become operational.
Fuel and air are used by the gas turbine unit to produce the shaft horsepower
necessary to drive certain accessories and ultimately the driven load generator.
The turbine unit is composed of an axial-flow compressor, a multi-stage tur-
bine, support systems, combustion system components, and a starting device.
Both compressor and turbine are directly connected as an in-line, single-shaft
rotor supported by pressure lubricated bearings. The inlet end of the rotor shaft
is coupled to an accessory gear having integral shafts that normally drives the
main hydraulic pump, main lubrication pump, and may drive other system
pumps as required for a given installation.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

1.3 ENCLOSURES (COMPARTMENTS)
Gas turbine enclosures, referred to in this manual as compartments, are those

partitioned areas in which specific components of the overall power plant are
contained. These compartments are built for all-weather conditions and de-
signed for accessibility when performing maintenance. They are provided with
thermal and acoustical insulation and lighted for convenience.
Compartment construction includes removable panels, hinged doors, and a

thermally insulated roof section with welded frame structuring providing the
support for these parts. The panels are thermally insulated and held in place
with bolts. Doors are kept tightly closed by sturdy latches. Gaskets between
panels and framing maintain a weather-tight condition. Inspection and mainte-
nance are facilitated as the door panels allow easy access for station personnel
and the removable panels provide greater accessibility for major inspections
and servicing.
At this installation, lagged compartments are provided and enclose the acces-
sory components, the gas turbine unit, the load gear, the driven generator, and
the generator auxiliaries and switch gear. The in-line sequence of compart-
ments is broken by an inlet plenum between the accessory and turbine com-
partments and an exhaust plenum located between the turbine and generator
compartments. (Inlet and exhaust plenums are on the turbine base and are con-
sidered part of the turbine compartment).
Walkways, having access ladders and removable grating panels, are placed on
each side of the power plant extending from the control enclosure to the ex-
haust plenum.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-2

1.4 SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL
General
These warnings have been subdivided into three categories depending on the
type of information given and the problem evidenced, and in particular:
DEFINITIONS
! DANGER
THIS SYMBOL EVIDENCES A PROCEDURE, A PRECAUTION OR A CONDI-

TION WHICH, IF NOT OBSERVED, CAN CAUSE SEVERE, EVEN FATAL PER-
SONAL INJURY TO THE OPERATOR. THE TERM OPERATOR INDICATES A
PERSON OR PERSONS ASSIGNED TO THE INSTALLATION, OPERATION,
ADJUSTMENT, MAINTENANCE, CLEANING, OR REPAIR OF THE MA-
CHINES AND THEIR AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT.
! WARNING
THIS SYMBOL EVIDENCES A PROCEDURE, PRECAUTION OR CONDITION

WHICH, IF NOT OBSERVED, CAN CAUSE DAMAGE, EVEN SEVERE, TO THE
EQUIPMENT.
) NOTE
THIS SYMBOL EVIDENCES ONE OR MORE DATA NECESSARY TO PERSONNEL TO

CARRY OUT AN OPERATING OR MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE CORRECTLY.
This symbology has been used throughout the manual. The following subpara-
graphs present a list of general information concerning DANGER and WARN-
INGS which the operator must always keep in mind before operating on the
equipment.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-3

1.5 GAS TURBINE DATA SHEET
Please refer to gas turbine data sheet SOK 0928986 - in “Reference Drawings”
Volume.
1.6 GAS TURBINE PERFORMANCE CURVES

Please refer to gas turbine performance curves SOM 6623187 in “Reference
Drawings” Volume.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-4

Gas Turbine Description Section 2
GAS TURBINE DESCRIPTION
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 2.1
DETAIL ORIENTATION 2.2
GAS PATH DESCRIPTION 2.3
GENERAL LAYOUT AND MAIN WEIGHTS 2.4
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

2. GAS TURBINE DESCRIPTION
2.1 GENERAL
The MS5001 PA is a simple-cycle, single-shaft gas turbine with a ten combus-

tor reverse flow combustion system. The MS5001 gas turbine assembly con-
tains six major sections:
• Air inlet
• Compressor
• Combustion system
• Turbine
• Exhaust
• Support Systems
The descriptions in this manual apply directly to turbine Models N, P and R.

Model N and P turbines incorporate a larger compressor that delivers increased
air flow. The Model R turbine has a smaller air flow and normally does not
utilize variable inlet guide vanes, although a few R models do have variable
inlet guide vanes to allow adjustment of air flow during loaded operation.
Presented here is a functional description of each major gas turbine section as

air and combustion gases flow through the gas path from inlet to exhaust. The
location and functional relationships of these major sections are shown in Fig-
ures 2-1 and 2-2.
2.2 DETAIL ORIENTATION
Throughout this manual, reference is made to the forward and aft ends, and to
the right and left sides of the gas turbine and its components. By definition, the
air inlet of the gas turbine is the forward end, while the exhaust stack is the aft
end. The forward and aft ends of each component are determined in like man-
ner with respect to its orientation within the complete unit. The right and left
sides of the turbine or of a particular component are determined by standing in
line with the compressor and looking aft or downstream.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-1

2.3 GAS PATH DESCRIPTION
The gas path is the path by which gases flow through the gas turbine from the
air inlet through the compressor, combustion section and turbine, to the turbine
exhaust (see Figures 2-1 and 2-2).
When the turbine starting system is actuated and the clutch is engaged, ambient
air is drawn through the air inlet plenum assembly, filtered and compressed in
the axial-flow compressor. For pulsation protection during startup, the
10th-stage extraction valves are open and variable inlet guide vanes are in the
low flow startup position.
When the starting system has accelerated the rotor to ignition speed, the spark
plugs are energized and fuel is turned on. In the case of liquid fuel, equal
amounts are distributed to each combustor by an external flow divider. In the
case of gaseous fuel, the gas metering holes in the fuel nozzles control the dis-
tribution. The resulting fuel/air mixture is ignited in the chambers containing
spark plugs and flame propagates through the crossfire tubes to the rest of the
combustors. When all chambers are lit, as indicated by the flame detectors, the
startup sequence continues.
When the high-speed relay actuates at 95 percent speed, the 10th-stage extrac-
tion bleed valve closes automatically and the variable inlet guide vane actuator
energizes to open the inlet guide vanes to the normal turbine operating posi-
tion. Air from the compressor flows into the annular spaces between the outer
combustion casings and the combustion liners, and enters the combustion zone
through the combustion liners.
The hot gases from the combustion chambers flow through the ten separate
transition pieces. The gases then enter the two-stage turbine section of the ma-
chine. Both stages consist of a row of fixed nozzles followed by a row of rotat-
ing turbine buckets. In each nozzle row, the kinetic energy of the jet is in-
creased, with an associated pressure drop. In the following row of moving
buckets, a portion of the kinetic energy of the jet is absorbed as useful work on
the turbine rotor.
After passing through the 2nd-stage buckets, the gases are directed into the ex-
haust hood and diffuser which contain a series of turning vanes to turn the
gases from an axial direction to a radial direction, to minimize exhaust hood
losses. The gases then pass into the exhaust plenum and are introduced to at-
mosphere through the exhaust stack.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-2

Resultant shaft rotation is used either to turn a generator rotor for electrical
power production, or to drive a centrifugal compressor in industrial process
applications.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-3

Fig. 2-1 - Gas Turbine Package Flow Diagram
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-4

Fig. 2-2 - Major Sections of the MS5001 Gas Turbine Assembly
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-5

2.4 GENERAL LAYOUT AND MAIN WEIGHTS
For general layout see drawing at following page.

For further details and main dimensions please refer to “Turbogroup General
Arrangement” SOM 6622614, included in “Reference Drawings” Volume.
MAIN WEIGHTS
Denomination Weight
(kg)
Gas Turbine 31751
Inlet Plenum 1134
Exhaust Plenum 3629
Starting Means & Accessory Gear 9390
Base and Piping 30844
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-6

Fig. 2-3 - Turbogroup General Arrangement (SOM 6622614)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-7

Base and Supports Section 3
BASE AND SUPPORTS
CONTENTS SECT
ACCESSORY SECTION 3.1
TURBINE SECTION 3.2
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

Base and Supports Section 3
3. BASE AND SUPPORTS
3.1 ACCESSORY SECTION
The accessory section contains mechanical and electrical equipment necessary

for starting and operating the gas turbine. Several major components mounted
in the accessory section include the starting means, the torque converter and
the accessory drive gear.
Fabricated supports and mounting pads are welded to the upper surface of the
base for mounting the above equipment and other accessory components. Lift-
ing trunnions are provided on the sides of the base longitudinal I-beams to fa-
cilitate lifting and positioning the base assembly. Mounting pads are located on
the bottom surface of the I-beams for mounting of the base to the foundation.
3.2 TURBINE SECTION
The base upon which the gas turbine is mounted is a structural-steel fabrica-
tion. An oil dram channel is constructed along the web of the left longitudinal
I-beam. This channel extends from the oil tank to the aft end of the base, pro-
viding a passage for the lube oil feed header. The header carries lube oil to the
#2 bearing, load coupling, and driven equipment. Lube oil feed and dram con-
nections are made at the aft end of this dram channel, within a fabricated en-
closure. Finished pads on the bottom of the base facilitate its mounting on the
site foundation sub-sole plates.
The forward end of the gas turbine is supported by a flexible plate that is
bolted on N, P models to the base and bolted and dowelled to the air inlet cas-
ing. On each side of the turbine shell is a rigid support leg which is close-fitted
on a support trunnion. These supports maintain the axial location of the turbine
while the gib key maintains the lateral location.
A gib key is machined on the lower half of the turbine shell and is fitted and
bolted securely into a guide block which is welded to the turbine base. This ar-
rangement prevents lateral or rotational movement of the turbine, and also per-
mits radial movement due to thermal expansion.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-1

Compressor Section Section 4
COMPRESSOR SECTION
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 4.1
COMPRESSOR ROTOR ASSEMBLY 4.2
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

4. COMPRESSOR SECTION
4.1 GENERAL
The axial-flow compressor section consists of the compressor rotor and casing
(Figure 4-1), variable inlet guide vanes, and two rows of exit guide vanes.
In the compressor, air is confined to the space between the rotor and stator
where it is compressed in stages by an alternate series of rotating (rotor) and
stationary (stator) air-foil shaped blades. Rotor blades supply the force needed
to compress the air in each stage and the stator blades guide the air so that it
enters the following rotor stage at the proper angle. The compressed air exits
through the compressor discharge casing to the combustion chambers. Air is
also extracted from the compressor for turbine cooling and for bearing lube oil
sealing.
4.2 COMPRESSOR ROTOR ASSEMBLY
The compressor portion of the gas turbine rotor is an assembly of wheels, a

forward stub shaft, tie bolts, and the compressor rotor blades. (See Figure 4-1).
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-1

Fig. 4-1 - MS5001 Horizontally Split Casing
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-2

Each wheel and the wheel portion of the forward stub shaft has broached slots
around its periphery. Rotor blades are inserted into these slots and held in axial
position by spacer pieces which are in turn staked at each end of the slot. These
blades are airfoil shaped and are designed to compress air efficiently at high
blade tip velocities. The wheels and stub shafts are assembled to each other
with mating rabbets for concentricity control and are held together with tie
bolts. Selective positioning of the wheels is made during assembly to reduce
balance correction. After assembly, the rotor is dynamically balanced.
The forward stub shaft is machined to provide the thrust collar which carries
the forward and aft thrust loads, the journal for the No. 1 bearing, the sealing
surface for the No. 1 bearing oil seals as well as the compressor low-pressure
air seal.
4.2.1 Stator
The stator assembly encloses the compressor and turbine sections and is made
up of the inlet, forward, aft and discharge casings. All of these casings are split
horizontally to facilitate servicing.
4.2.2 Inlet Casing
The inlet section directs the flow of outside air from the air inlet equipment
into the compressor blading. This section contains the inlet guide vane assem-
bly, the No. 1 bearing assembly and the low pressure air seals. On Models N,
P, and some R compressors, the inlet guide vane angle can be adjusted by the
control system (see Fig. 4-2).
4.2.3 Forward Casing
The forward section of the compressor casing is downstream of the inlet sec-
tion. It contains the stator blading for stages 0 through 3. Bleed air from the 4th
rotor stage (between the 3rd and 4th stator stages) can be extracted through
four ports which are located about the aft section of the compressor casing.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-3

4.2.4 Aft Casing
The aft section, downstream of the forward section, contains the stator blading
for stages 4 through 9. Bleed air from the 10th rotor stage (between the 9th and
10th stator stages) can be extracted through four ports which are located in ax-
ial alignment with the ports used for 4th stage air extraction.
4.2.5 Discharge Casing
The discharge section of the compressor casing, downstream of the aft section,
contains the stator blading for stages 10 through 16, and exit guide vane stages
1 and 2. A radially enlarged (bulkhead) portion of this section provides the
mounting surface for the combustion chambers. Ten airfoil-shaped support
struts are spaced equidistant about the shaft surface of the bulkhead and angle
inward to support the inner case assembly (inner barrel). The space, between
the forward portion of the inner barrel and the discharge section outer shell,
forms an annular air path that the high pressure air passes through to enter the
combustion section. This area is designed to decelerate the air flow and in-
crease the static pressure of the combustion air supply (see Fig. 4-3 and 4-4).
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-4

Fig. 4-2 - Compressor Casing, Inlet Section
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-5

Fig. 4-3 - Compressor Discharge Casing (Typical)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-6

Fig. 4-4 - Compressor Discharge Casing (Typical)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-7

4.2.6 Blading
From the “0” through 7th stage, the stator blades have dovetail-shaped bases
that fit into semi-circular rings that fit in “T”-shaped grooves in the casing
wall. From the 8th stage aft, the stator blades have rectangular bases that fit
into “T”-shaped grooves in the compressor casing wail. Locking keys prevent
rotation of the blades. The rotor blades have dovetailed bases of a wide angle
design which fit into the matching dovetail slots in the wheel rims. The rotor
blades are peened in place.
4.2.7 Variable Inlet Guide Vanes
The variable inlet guide vanes (in conjunction with 10th stage air extraction)
permit fast, smooth acceleration of the turbine without compressor surge (pul-
sation). A hydraulic cylinder, mounted on a base cross member, actuates the
inlet guide vanes through a large ring gear and multiple small pinion gears. On
the gas turbines that do not have variable inlet guide vanes, a stationary ring of
inlet guide vanes is located at this stage.
4.2.8 Variable Guide Vane – NIC 05.01.SL REV.00 & TIL1068-2R1
(Please refer to the following GE publications, included in Appendix A).
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-8

DLN Combustion System Section 5
“DLN” (DRY LOW NOX) COMBUSTION SYSTEM
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 5.1
MANUFACTURING FEATURES OF DLN SYSTEM COMPONENTS 5.2
DLN SYSTEM OPERATION DESCRIPTION AND MODES 5.3
FLAME DETECTION 5.4
IGNITION SYSTEM 5.5
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

5. “DLN” (DRY LOW NOX) COMBUSTION SYSTEM
5.1 GENERAL
The combustion system is the revers flow type including 1 combustion cham-
bers, arranged around the peripheral zone of the axial compressor discharge ca-
sing.
This system includes the following components:
- Combustion chambers casing with relevant covers.
- Liners and covers.
- Primary fuel nozzles (no. 5 for each combustion chamber)
- Secondary fuel nozzles (no. 1 for each combustion chamber)
- Flame detectors with water cooling (no. 4 for each machine)
- Spark plugs and accessories
- Combustion chamber accessories:

• flow sleeves;
• crossfire tubes, etc.
- Water-feeding manifold for flame detectors cooling.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-1

5.2 MANUFACTURING FEATURES OF DLN SYSTEM COMPONENTS
The assembly liner/transition piece requires an additional support to be moun-

ted on the axial compressor discharge casing, on which suitable works must be
made in order to obtain the fixing seat.
The manufacturing features and the components’ material of the “DNL” sys-
tem are similar to those of the standard system.
In fact, liner cooling is made using the same methods as the standard system,
that is with the combination of “impingnment” and “film cooling”.
Gas pipes do not differ (for manufacturing features, material) from those of the
standard system.
The use of rigid or flexible pipes and their path depends on the room available
and on access and maintenance requirements of the combustion zones.
DNL system components are designed to have a life equal to that of standard
systems. This is improved by the fact that DNL systems have a more uniform
distribution of the temperature of exhaust gas and with temperature peaks lo-
wer than in the standard system. However, during the first period of operation,
a higher frequency of the inspections in the combustion section is expected as
precautionary measure.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-2

5.3 DLN SYSTEM OPERATION DESCRIPTION AND MODES
The combustor is of the two stages/premix type designed for natural gas and
able to work, in the two-stage configuration, with gas with high hydrogen
content.
The combustor includes the following four main components:
Fuel injection system (nozzles, etc.)
Liner
Venturi (Reduced section)
Central body (supporting the secondary burner).
These components are arranged so as to form two stages.
The first stage consists of 5 burners (primary) arranged in a ring, it is followed
by a first (lean) combustion zone that, above 40% of the load, becomes com-
bustion gas/air premix zone, thus without combustion.
In this operation mode, in the first stage, air and fuel are mixed so as to make a
lean and uniform mixture feeding the second stage.
The second stage consists of a central burner (secondary) having a (lean) mix-
ture combustion zone downstream. Similarly to standard combustion cham-
bers, this is followed by a diluition zone.
Venturi reduction avoids backfire in the premix zone when the system works in
the premix mode (above 40% of the load with flame in the zone where the se-
condary burner works only.).
During operation with natural gas, the DNL system works in four different
modes, as shown in Fig. 5-3:
Load Range
Primary Starting, acceleration, operation up to 20%

(fuel at the first stage only)
At stages (lean/lean combustion) 20% to approx. 40% (fuel at both stages)
Secondary At approx. 40%

(fuel at the second stage only)
Premix 40% to 100%

(fuel at both stages,flame in the second stage on-
ly)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-3

During gas starting and load outlet up to 20%, the 5 primary burners work on-
ly.
Between 20% and 40% of the load, also the secondary burner works, to which
approx. 30% of the fuel flows.
When the machine reaches 40% of the load, during a period of transient opera-
tion, the control system eliminates for a few seconds the flow of the combus-
tion gas to the primary burners causing the flame extinction (of course the
flame is not estinguished in the secondary burner). Immediately after, the
control system lets the fuel in the primary burners becoming simple ejectors on
the premix zone.
Thanks to the Venturi reduction, the flame cannot go back and this zone re-
mains a premix zone between 40% and 100% of the load (with bleed heating
system presetting). In this last operation phase the distribution of the combus-
tion gas is equal to approx. 83% of the capacity to the premix and to 17% to
the secondary burner, therefore, the combustion occurs with very low tempera-
ture peaks inside the flame and with very short “stay times”, so that NOx pro-
duction is strongly limited.
Arrangement and type of spark plugs and flame detectors of the DLN system
are different from the standard system.
Differently from the standard system, the spark plugs are of the non-retractable
type, because ignition it is not only necessary during starting but also on load
(e.g.: when restarting passing from premix operation to lean/lean stage opera-
tion).
Flame detectors are positioned in both the first stage of some combustion
chambers and the central body (supporting the secondary burner) in order to
monitor the second stage.
Crossfire tubes interconnect the primary zones (first stage) of the adjacent
combustion chambers, because the flame ignition occurs in this zone.
An operation with peak load is possible with a power value 3% higher than the
base value.
The gas turbine with “DLN” system is able to bear the complete load release
(opening of machine switch) operating a “full speed-no load”.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-4

5.4 FLAME DETECTION
Flame stability is monitored by the DLNx-1 system in order to control the

combustion process and protect the gas turbine hardware.
Four flame detectors are mounted in separated combustion chambers around

the gas turbine in order to detect the flame of the primary zone. Other four de-
tectors in separated combustion chambers have the specific purpose of detec-
ting the flame in the secondary zone. Signals coming from these flame detec-
tors are processed by a control logic and are used for different control and pro-
tection functions including the determination of the DLNx-1 combustion mode.
5.5 IGNITION SYSTEM
Two spark plugs placed in different combustion chambers are used to ignite the
fuel in the heater primary zone. These two spark plugs are activated during
starting to ignite the fuel and during certain changes of DLNx-1 phases reques-
ting the re-ignition of the primary combustion zone. The flame is propagate in
the combustion chambers not equipped with spark plugs by means of flow
sleeves interconnecting the primary zones of the adjacent combustion cham-
bers around the gas turbine. The flame is introduced in the secondary zone of
the combustion chambers igniting the fuel second capacity coming from the
primary zone.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-5

Fig. 5-1 - “DLN” combustion chamber assembly
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-6

Fig. 5-2 - Turbine DLN heater (dry low Nox)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-7

Fig. 5-3 - Operation of the two-stage DLN heater
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-8

Fig. 5-4 - Combustion chamber lay-out
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-9

Turbine Section Section 6
TURBINE SECTION
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 6.1
TURBINE STATOR 6.2
FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE 6.3
SECOND STAGE NOZZLE & DIAPHRAGM 6.4
TURBINE ROTOR ASSEMBLY 6.5
TURBINE BUCKETS 6.6
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

6. TURBINE SECTION
6.1 GENERAL
In the turbine section, high temperature gases from the combustion section are
converted to aft horse-power. The power required to drive the load package
and the compressor is provided by the two-stage turbine rotor. The first-stage,
or high pressure wheel, and the second-stage, or low pressure wheel, are bolted
together to make up a single unit through which the first and second stage noz-
zles direct the flow of combustion gases. These components, with associated
air seals and deflectors, are contained within the turbine shell.
6.2 TURBINE STATOR
The forward section of the turbine shell forms the casing for the aft end of the
compressor discharge and combustion sections. The aft section of the turbine
shell forms the casing for the first and second-stage nozzles and the shrouds for
the first and second-stage turbine rotors.
Compressor fourth-stage extraction air is piped to cool the shell and then dis-
charged at the aft end of the shell to cool the aft surface of the second-stage
turbine wheel.
6.3 FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE
The first-stage nozzle assembly, shown in Figure 6-1, consists of airfoil-shaped

partitions between an inner and outer sidewall. The nozzle assembly is divided
into segments, with the segments fixed in a retaining ring assembly secured in
the turbine shell by clamps.
The nozzle ring and partitions are cooled by compressor discharge air which is
bled from the combustion chamber transition space. The nozzle partitions are
hollow with bleed holes drilled in the trailing edge for cooling. The cooling air
circulates about the sidewalls of the retaining ring into the hollow nozzle parti-
tions and out the bleed holes into the gas path.
The design of the nozzle supporting arrangement permits removal of the lower
half of the nozzle assembly without removing the rotor assembly.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-1

6.4 SECOND STAGE NOZZLE AND DIAPHRAGM
The second stage nozzle and diaphragm assembly is located between the first
and second stage turbine wheels. The assembly has hollow airfoil-shaped parti-
tions between an inner and outer sidewall which direct the gas flow into the
second stage turbine buckets. The nozzle assembly is divided into segments,
with segments fixed and located in tongue and groove fits in the first and sec-
ond stage turbine stator shrouds. The nozzle segments are spaced and located
circumferentially by locating pins through the turbine shell that engage the
outer sidewall of the segments.
The diaphragm assembly extends inward from the nozzle inner sidewall to the
turbine rotor and divides the space between the two wheels into the high and
low pressure turbine areas. The diaphragm assembly contains the wheel cool-
ing air deflectors and interstage seal teeth that provide the inner seal between
the first aft and second forward wheelspaces.
The diaphragm assembly is divided into the same number of segments as the
second stage nozzle. The diaphragm segments are fixed and located by tongue
and groove fits in the nozzle segment inner sidewall. Axial pins prevent
circumferential movement of the diaphragm segments.
Wheelspace cooling air is introduced into the top and bottom of the turbine
casing and is routed through the second stage nozzle hollow partitions, through
the hollow diaphragm segments, and into the first aft wheelspace. From there it
cascades through the first aft wheelspace air deflector and the interstage seal to
cool the second forward wheelspace. The segment-to-segment abutting sur-
faces contain seal keys to minimize leakage.
6.5 TURBINE ROTOR ASSEMBLY
The turbine rotor assembly consists of the turbine-to-compressor portion of the

distance piece and the first and second-stage turbine wheels and buckets.
The turbine wheels are forged of alloy steel. The second-stage wheel is forged
with a stub shaft on which the journal and sealing surface is machined for the
No. 2 bearing and its oil seal. At the stub aft end is a flange to couple the shaft
to the driven device.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-2

The individual components of the turbine rotor assembly are pre-balanced and
assembled so that the complete rotor assembly will require a minimum of cor-
rection.
The turbine rotor assembly is bolted to the pre-balanced compressor rotor as-
sembly. This complete rotor assembly is again dynamically balanced with any
required corrections carefully distributed to compensate for internal bending
moments.
6.6 TURBINE BUCKETS
Turbine buckets are assembled in the wheels in axial, firtree-shaped dovetails.

The buckets have integral cover plates, and axial and radial seal pins reduce
stage leakage. The long shank bucket design provides stress equalization and
decreases dovetail temperature.
The buckets are retained in place by a twist lock, with the head staked in place.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-3

Fig. 6-1 - Turbine Nozzle and Buckets Arrangement
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-4

Bearings Section 7
BEARINGS
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 7.1
LUBRICATION 7.2
LUBRICANT SEALS 7.3
NO. 1 BEARING 7.4
NO. 2 BEARING 7.5
G.E. BEARING PUBLICATION 7.6
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

Bearings Section 7
7. BEARINGS
7.1 GENERAL
The gas turbine unit contains two main journal bearings used to support the gas
turbine rotor. The unit also includes thrust bearings to maintain the rotor-to-
stator axial position. These bearings and seals are incorporated in two
housings: one at the inlet and one in the exhaust frame.
These main bearings are pressure-lubricated by fluid supplied from the main
lubricating system. The fluid flows through branch lines to an inlet in each
bearing housing.
Bearing N°: Class Type
BEARING #1 Journal Elliptical

ACTIVE (loaded) #1 Thrust Tilting Pads
INACTIVE (unloaded) #1 Thrust Tilting Pads
BEARING #2 Journal Elliptical
Sketches of typical and thrust bearing configurations are shown in Figure 7-1
(A and B).
7.2 LUBRICATION
The two main turbine bearings are pressure-lubricated with fluid supplied by
the lubricating fluid reservoir and interconnected tanks and piping. Lubricant
feed piping, where practical, is run within the fluid reservoir drain line, or drain
channels, as a protective measure. This procedure is referred to as double
piping and its rationale is that in case of a pipeline leak, lubricating fluid will
not be sprayed on nearby equipment, thus eliminating a potential safety hazard.
When lubricating fluid enters the housing inlet, it flows into an annulus around
the bearing liner. From the annulus, the fluid flows through machined holes in
the liner to the bearing face. The lubricating fluid is prevented from escaping
along the turbine shaft by the use of lubricant seals.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-1

Bearings Section 7
7.3 LUBRICANT SEALS
Lubricating fluid on the surface of the turbine shaft is prevented from being
spun along the shaft by seals in each of the bearing housings. These labyrinth
packings of deflectors, or teeth, are assembled at the bearing assemblies where
fluid control is required. A smooth surface is machined on the shaft and seals
are assembled so that only a small clearance exists between the seal deflector
and the shaft.
Seals are designed with double rows of packing and an annular space between
them.
Pressurized sealing air is admitted into this space and prevents lubricating fluid
from spreading along the shaft. Some of this air returns with the fluid to the
main lubricating fluid reservoir and is vented through a lube vent.
7.4 NO. 1 BEARING
The No. 1 bearing subassembly is located in the center of the inlet casing
assembly and contains three bearings:
1) active (loaded) thrust bearing

2) inactive (unloaded) thrust bearing
3) journal bearing.
Additionally, it contains one "running type" ring seal, two labyrinth seals, and
a housing where the components are installed. The components are keyed to
the housing to prevent rotation. The bottom part of the housing is a part of the
inlet casing. The top of the housing is a separate casting, flanged and bolted to
the bottom half.
The labyrinth seals at each end of the housing are pressurized with air
extracted from the compressor. The "running type" ring seal at the forward end
of the thrust bearing cavity contains the lubricant and limits entrance of air into
the cavity.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-2

Bearings Section 7
7.5 NO. 2 BEARING
The No. 2 bearing subassembly is centerline supported and located inside the
exhaust frame inner tunnel. This support includes ears at the horizontal and a
gib key at the bottom centerline. This permits relative growth resulting from
temperature differences while the bearing remains centered in the exhaust
frame.
The assembly includes an elliptical liner, labyrinth seals and a bearing housing
with separate bearing liner retaining strap bolted to the lower half of the
housing. These components are keyed to prevent rotation. The labyrinth seals
at each end of the housing are pressurized with air extracted from the
compressor.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-3

Bearings Section 7
A. Journal Bearing
B. Thrust Bearing
Fig. 7-1 - Journal and Thrust Bearings
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-4

Bearings Section 7
7.6 G.E. BEARING PUBLICATION (TYPICAL DESCRIPTION)
Please refer to the following GE Publications, included in Appendix A:
- Thrust Bearing for Combustion Gas Turbines GEI-41018

Tilting Pad Equalizing and Non-Equalizing Type
- Thrust Bearing for Combustion Gas Turbines GEI-41019

Taper-Land and Flat-land Types
- Journal Bearing for Combustion Gas Turbines GEI-41020

Elliptical and Three-Lobe Types
- Journal Bearing for Combustion Gas Turbines GEK-28100

Tilting Pad Type
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-5

Inlet and Exhaust Section 8
INLET & EXHAUST
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 8.1
AIR INLET SYSTEM 8.2
INLET COMPARTMENT 8.3
INLET DUCTING AND SILENCING 8.4
EXHAUST SYSTEM 8.5
EXHAUST PLENUM 8.6
EXHAUST EXPANSION JOINT 8.7
EXHAUST TRANSITION DUCT (FIRST) 8.8
EXHAUST SILENCER MODULE 8.9
EXHAUST TRANSITION DUCT (SECOND) 8.10
EXHAUST STACK 8.11
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

8. INLET AND EXHAUST
8.1 GENERAL
Gas turbine performance and reliability are a function of the quality and
cleanliness of the air entering the inlet to the turbine. Therefore, for most effi-
cient operation, it is necessary to treat the atmospheric air entering the turbine
by filtering out contaminants. It is the function of the air inlet system with its
specially designed equipment and ducting to modify the quality of the air under
various temperature, humidity, and contamination situations to make it more
suitable for use by the gas turbine.
Hot exhaust gases produced by combustion in the turbine are cooled and at-
tenuated in the exhaust system ducting before being released to atmosphere.
These exhaust emissions respect certain environmental standards of cleanliness
and acoustic levels depending on site location.
The noise generated during gas turbine operation is attenuated by devices built
into the inlet and exhaust sections which dissipate or reduce the acoustical en-
ergy to an acceptable level.
8.2 AIR INLET SYSTEM
The air inlet system consists of an integrated, high efficiency self cleaning fil-
ter house, support structure, inlet ducting system with acoustical silencer, trash
screens, and an inlet plenum leading to the compressor section of the turbine.
The elevated ducting and filter house arrangement provides a compact system
and minimizes pickup of dust concentrations found near the ground level.
All external and internal surface areas of the inlet system are coated with a pro-
tective inorganic zinc primer with epoxy overcoat, stainless steel or hot dipped
galvanized for corrosion protection.
The general arrangement of the inlet compartment with respect to the gas tur-
bine inlet plenum is shown on the mechanical outline drawing in the "Refer-
ence Drawings " Volume.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-1

8.3 INLET COMPARTMENT
The inlet filtration compartment is provided with weather hoods for filter ele-
ment protection. The filter system consists of numerous single-stage, high-
efficiency, moisture resistant element pairs mounted on vertical grid plates.
The filter elements are contained within a light gauge sheet-metal enclosure
which has been specially designed for proper air flow management and
weather protection. The filter elements are connected to a common clean air
plenum which terminates in an outlet flange which connects to the inlet ducting
system.
The reverse-pulse type self-cleaning system is initiated either manually or

when the filter elements become laden with dust and the pressure drop across
the filter media reaches a predetermined value (as measured by a differential
pressure switch). The elements are cleaned in a specific order, controlled by an
automatic sequencer.
The sequencer operates a series of solenoid-operated valves, each of which

controls the cleaning of a small number of filters. Each valve releases a brief
pulse of high pressure air. This pulse shocks the filters, causing a momentary
reverse flow, disturbing the filter cake. Accumulated dust breaks loose and
falls into triangular shaped hoppers. The cleaning cycle continues until enough
dust is removed for the compartment pressure drop to reach the lower differen-
tial pressure switch set-point. Details of the theory, operation and maintenance
of the inlet filtration equipment are contained in the manufacturer’s operation
and maintenance manual included in this section.
8.4 INLET DUCTING AND SILENCING
The inlet ductwork system contains the compressor noise silencing, and con-
nects the inlet compartment with the compressor inlet plenum. It consists of an
acoustically lined transition duct, lined ninety degree elbow (with trash
screen), and eight feet of parallel baffle silencing and unlined ducting with a
flexible joint to complete the air flow path to the filter house.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-2

The inlet silencer consists of an acoustically lined duct which contains silenc-
ing baffles constructed of a low-density insulating material that is encapsulated
by perforated, stainless steel sheet-metal. The acoustic lining in the walls of the
silencer duct and the walls of the ducting downstream of the silencer are of
similar construction. The vertical-parallel baffle configuration was specifically
designed to eliminate the fundamental compressor tone, and attenuate noise at
other frequencies as well.
There is a stationary stainless steel trash screen within the elbow which can be
accessed for cleaning and inspection through a removable access panel.
8.5 EXHAUST SYSTEM
The exhaust system is that portion of the turbine in which the gases used to
power the turbine wheels are redirected through the exhaust plenum and the si-
lencer modules, into the exhaust stack and released to atmosphere. The exhaust
system includes the exhaust plenum outlet expansion joint, transition duct, si-
lencer modules, transition duct, and the exhaust stack. Exhaust temperature
thermocouples are mounted in the aft wall of the exhaust plenum to sense ex-
haust temperatures and input these values to the MARK VI TMR control
system.
8.6 EXHAUST PLENUM
The exhaust plenum is the beginning of the exhaust duct, receiving the gas
flow from the exhaust diffuser. It consists of a box, open at each side and at the
top, which is welded to an extension of the turbine base. The exhaust plenum is
connected to the exhaust frame assembly with flex-plate expansion joints. The
open sides and top of the plenum are covered with a wrapper whose purpose is
to enlarge the plenum volume and force the exhaust gases to one side and into
the exhaust ducting. The wrapper is supported by the foundation mounted ped-
estals.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-3

8.7 EXHAUST EXPANSION JOINT
The exhaust system expansion joint compensates for the thermal expansion of
the exhaust ductwork system. The expansion joint is located between the ex-
haust plenum and the exhaust transition duct.
8.8 EXHAUST TRANSITION DUCT (FIRST)
The transition duct is a horizontal section of ductwork which is located down-

stream of the first expansion joint. The first transition duct in the ductwork sys-
tem provides an enlarging flowpath from the exhaust plenum to the silencer
modules.
8.9 EXHAUST SILENCER MODULE
The exhaust silencer module for this exhaust system is located in the horizontal
duct run just downstream of the transition duct. The exhaust silencer module is
acoustically designed to attenuate the sound of the exhaust gases. This is done
using a parallel batt silencer concept. This arrangement of silencing media pro-
vides for maximum required attenuation of both low and high frequency sound
to meet site requirements.
8.10 EXHAUST TRANSITION DUCT (SECOND)
The transition duct is a horizontal section of ductwork which is located down-

stream of the silencer modules. The second transition duct in the ductwork sys-
tem provides a decreasing flowpath from the silencer modules to the exhaust
stack inlet.
8.11 EXHAUST STACK
The exhaust stack is designed to release exhaust gases to atmosphere well

above the machine baseline and at a proper plume velocity for optimal disper-
sion of exhaust gas particles. The exhaust stack is a round piece of vertical
ductwork which is self supporting from the machine baseline.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-4

Turbine Support Systems Section 9
TURBINE SUPPORT SYSTEM
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 9.1
ACCESSORY DRIVE 9.2
COUPLINGS 9.3
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

9. TURBINE SUPPORT SYSTEMS
9.1 GENERAL
Most of the mechanical and electrical auxiliary equipment necessary for start-
ing and operating the gas turbine is contained in the accessory section.
There are many systems involved in the operation of the turbine that are de-
scribed in detail in the Control and Protection text, as well as the Support Sys-
tem text. Several of these systems have accessory devices, or mechanisms, lo-
cated in the accessory section; these may include the starting, fuel, lubrication,
hydraulic, cooling water, and atomizing air systems. Several major components
include the starting means, the torque converter and the accessory drive gear.
Besides being the main link between the starting system drive components and
the gas turbine, the accessory drive gear is the gear reduction unit connected
directly to the turbine for driving several of the accessory devices of the gas
turbine support systems. These systems and their devices are described in de-
tail in subsequent paragraphs of this section.
A pressure gauge and switch cabinet located at the forward edge of the acces-
sory section, contains panel mounted gauges and switches used with the sys-
tems mentioned above.
Mounted on the deck of the accessory section are both accessory drive gear
and starting device together with additional accessory components.
Lifting trunnions are installed on the base and mounting pads are provided on
the bottom surface of the base longitudinal 1-beanis to facilitate mounting of
the base assembly to the foundation.
9.2 ACCESSORY DRIVE
The accessory drive gear, located at the compressor end of the gas turbine, is a
gearing assembly coupled directly through a flexible coupling to the turbine ro-
tor. Its function is to drive each gas turbine accessory at its proper speed and to
connect and disconnect the turbine from its starting device. In addition it con-
tains the system main lube oil pump and the turbine overspeed trip bolt and
mechanism.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 9-1

Contained within the gear casing are the gear trains which provide the proper
gear reductions to drive the accessory devices at the required speed, with the
correct torque values. The starting clutch assembly is mounted forward on the
horizontal joint of the main gear shaft and is used to connect the starting device
to the gas turbine. See Figure 9-1.
Fig. 9-1 - Accessory Drive Gear Assembly
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 9-2

Accessories driven by the gear may include: the main lube oil pump, the main
hydraulic supply pump, the liquid fuel pump, the water pump, and the main at-
omizing air compressor. Lubrication of the gear is from the turbine’s pressur-
ized bearing header supply.
A high-pressure turbine overspeed trip capable of mechanically dumping the

oil in the trip circuits, is mounted on the exterior casing of the gear. This de-
vice can shut the turbine down when the speed exceeds the design speed. The
overspeed bolt which actuates the trip upon overspeed is installed in the main
shaft.
9.2.1 Description
For ease of maintenance and inspection, the gear casing is split at the horizon-
tal plane into an upper and lower section. Interconnected shafts are arranged in
a parallel axis in the lower casing. With the exception of the lube oil pump
shaft, all the shaft centerlines are located on the horizontal joint of the casing.
The gear consists of four parallel axis, interconnected shafts arranged in a cas-
ing which provides for the various driven accessories. With the exception of
the lube oil pump and hydraulic supply pump shaft, all the shaft centerlines are
located on the horizontal joint of the accessory drive casing. See Figures 9-2
and 9-3. Numbers are assigned to the various shafts and the rpm of each shaft
and the load horsepower are shown in the design data which follows this text.
The gear casing is made of cast iron and split at the horizontal joint to facilitate
assembly. The lower half casing has a closed bottom with openings for lube oil
pump suction and discharge lines and casing dram line.
All of the shafts are connected together by single helical gears which are
shrunk to the shafts after the teeth are cut. It is possible, in some instances to
remove individual gears which may have been damaged in service, and to re-
place them with new gears. This operation, however should be performed at
the factory so that the required precision may be maintained.
All of the shafts located on the horizontal joint are contained in babbitt-lined
steel-backed journal bearings with integral thrust faces which are split on the
horizontal joint of the casing. The thrust faces of the bearings maintain the
shafts in their proper axial location and the necessary thrust clearance is pre-set
at the factory. The shafts which are not on the horizontal joint are contained in
babbitt-lined, steel-backed, non-split bushings with integral thrust faces. Their
thrust clearance is pre-set at the factory.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 9-3

The main lubricating oil pump is located on the inboard wall of the lower-half
casing of the accessory drive gear and is described in the Lubrication System
section.
A starting clutch assembly is located at the outboard end of the main gear shaft
on the horizontal joint of the casing and is used to connect the starting device
to the gas turbine input shaft. The clutch automatically becomes disengaged
when the gas turbine reaches a speed at which it is self-sustaining.
Fig. 9-2 - Cutaway View of Accessory Drive Gear with No. 4

Shaft and Main Lube Pump Shown
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 9-4

Fig. 9-3 - Cutaway View of Accessory Drive Gear Showing No. 1

Shaft (with Clutch) and No. 2 Shaft (with Water Pump Shown Inboard)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 9-5

9.3 COUPLING
Flexible diaphragm couplings are installed on the gas turbine to:
a) connect two rotating shafts (torque transmission);
b) compensate for parallel and/or angular misalignment;
c) compensate for axial movements of the shafts so that neither exerts an ex-
cessive thrust on the other.
The couplings used on this turbine connect the accessory drive gear to the tur-
bine shaft and the turbine rotor to the load equipment.
For detailed operating and maintenance information covering the couplings,

please refer to the supplier’s publications included in “Auxiliary Equipment &
Instrumentation” Volume.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 9-6

Starting System Section 10
STARTING SYSTEM (ELECTRIC STARTING MOTOR)
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 10.1
START-UP FUNCTIONS AND SEQUENCES 10.3
TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY 10.4
HYDRAULIC RATCHET SYSTEM 10.5
RATCHET SYSTEM OPERATION 10.6
STARTING JAW CLUTCH 10.7
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

10. STARTING SYSTEM (ELECTRIC STARTING MOTOR)
10.1 GENERAL
Before the gas turbine can be fired and started, it must be rotated or cranked by
accessory equipment. An electric induction motor, operating through a torque
converter, provides the cranking torque and speed required to start up the turbine.
The starting system components also permit slow-speed rotation of the turbine for
cooling-down purposes after shutdown.
The components of the electric motor starting system include: an induction motor,
a torque converter with ratcheting mechanism, a starting jaw clutch and a hydrau-
lic ratchet system (See Fig. 10-1).
In addition, several supplementary components are required for sequencing and

operating the turbine starting system. These are detailed in the following system
functional description.
10.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
During the starting sequence, the electric starting motor, the torque converter, the
output gear and the starting clutch drive the gas turbine through the accessory
gear. The starting clutch assembly and the clutch engaging cylinders are mounted
on the accessory gear assembly. A flexible coupling permanently couples the ac-
cessory gear with the turbine compressor shaft.
The torque converter transmits the electric motor output torque to the gas turbine
accessory gear through a reversing gear. The torque converter input shaftdrives
the charge pump, which supplies turbine lube oil to the torque converter.
Initially, the charge pump receives oil for the torque converter charge pump from
the lube oil header. The charge pump, after building up the lube oil operating
pressure, draws the oil from the turbine lube oil tank through a filter.
A spring-loaded check valve, installed in the discharge line of the lube oil header,
maintains a positive oil pressure on the charge pump during operation. Oil returns
to the turbine lube oil tank through drains.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 10-1

10.3 START-UP FUNCTIONS AND SEQUENCES
The starting system provides both cranking and turning power during the gas tur-
bine startup and shutdown cycles. In the starting cycle, the starting equipment ac-
complishes three primary functions: it sets the gas turbine rolling (breakaway
from standstill); it accelerates the gas turbine to firing speed; finally, it further ac-
celerates it to self -sustaining speed (a speed at which the gas turbine develops net
positive power output).
When the electric starting motor is energized, its output torque starts from zero
and increases as the torque converter is filled with oil by the charge pump. The
torque converter output is directly proportional to the difference between input
and output speeds (maximum slip). The torque converter and reversing gear speed
ratios were picked to crank the gas turbine at firing speed. When pressurized, the
converter demands power from the motor and supplies power to the gas turbine
through the starting clutch. The ratchet system may supplement the breakaway
torque. The self-sustaining ratchet device, mounted on the reversing gear, starts
when it receives pressure oil from the hydraulic self-sequencing control valve
module. This oil at higher pressure flows from the hydraulic ratchet pump through
a filter to the self-sequencing module.
10.4 TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY
This assembly includes the torque converter, the hydraulic ratchet mechanism and
an output gear unit. Pressurized oil from the converter loop lubricates the gear
unit and the clutch in the ratchet mechanism. Drain oil from the assembly returns
to the lube oil reservoir by gravity. The converter loop drains during shutdown to
unload the converter for engine startup.
The torque converter consists of a driven pump rotor that supplies oil to a hydrau-
lic turbine connected with the input shaft of the output gear. The pump rotor re-
quires rated motor horsepower at rated speed, independent of the output load. The
power absorption of the pump rotor varies as the cube of the input speed.
The hydraulic ratchet mechanism is a rack-pinion rotary actuator connected with

the input shaft of the output gear through a roller-ramp type one-way clutch. The
output gear unit connects the ratchet mechanism and the output side of the torque
converter with the starting clutch.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 10-2

10.5 HYDRAULIC RATCHET SYSTEM
The components of the ratchet system include: a rotary actuator/one-way clutch

mechanism in the torque converter assembly; a control valve module; a pump as-
sembly; a relief valve and filters.
In the system, the valve module controls the starting clutch engagement and the
hydraulic self-sequencing operation of the rotary actuator. The module includes
one ON/OFF solenoid valve, one modulating backpressure valve that maintains
adequate pressure to the clutch engaging cylinders, two pilot operated valves that
control the flow to the rotary actuator, and one limit switch.
The hydraulic ratchet pump assembly is made up of a D.C. motor 88 CR-1, driv-
ing the pump. This assembly pumps lube oil from the unit bearing header to the
inlets of the relief valve and to the control valve module.
10.6 RATCHET SYSTEM OPERATION
With the pump in operation and solenoid valve energized, oil from the lubrication
system reaches the starting clutch. This causes the ratchet mechanism to operate
continuously as the hydraulic self-sequencing control automatically shifts the oil
flow between forward and reset strokes of the ratchet mechanism.
The electronic control panel automatically sequences the unit cooling down proc-
ess. Once every three minutes, the ratchet mechanism is operated through one
complete cycle. The cycle terminates in the forward stroke position to lock the
clutch in engaged position.
The action of the ratchet system normally serves to achieve breakaway of the unit
rotor system during the unit startup sequence. With the starting system at maxi-
mum power, the D.C. motor and the solenoid valve are energized for continuous
operation until breakaway is achieved. If breakaway is not achieved within three
minutes, the ratchet system is de-energized.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 10-3

10.7 STARTING JAW CLUTCH
A starting clutch connects the output shaft of the torque converter assembly to the
main shaft of the accessory gear. Hydraulic cylinders engage the clutch (oil sup-
plied by the ratchet control valve module); return springs in the cylinders disen-
gage it.
A torque generated in the torque converter and/or ratchet mechanism maintains

the clutch engaged. Because of the one-way clutch in the ratchet mechanism, it is
not possible to turn the sliding clutch hub backwards except during a reset stroke
of the ratchet mechanism.
The system is designed to maintain the clutch engaged at all times, except when
the gas turbine is running.
A starting clutch solenoid valve actuates two parallel, horizontally oriented hy-
draulic cylinders. These move the sliding clutch into engagement with the station-
ary clutch hub. When the gas turbine reaches a predetermined speed, the solenoid
valve is de-energized by the 33HR-1 speed relay and dumps the hydraulic oil to
drain.
! WARNING
THE JAW CLUTCH WILL BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY ANY ATTEMPTED EN-

GAGEMENT WITH THE SLIDING HUB TURNING.
BEFORE ANY CONTROL DEVICE IN THE STARTING SYSTEM, RATCHET SYS-
TEM, AND/OR CLUTCH SYSTEM IS DISARMED AND/OR ELECTRICALLY BY-
PASSED, THE CLUTCH MECHANISM SHOULD BE DISENGAGED AND LOCKED
OUT OF ENGAGEMENT BY CLUTCH DISENGAGEMENT VALVE.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 10-4

Fig. 10-1 - Starting System Schematic Diagram

(SOM 5105840 – Sh. 1/1)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 10-5

Fuel Gas System Section 11
FUEL GAS SYSTEM
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 11.1
GAS STOP/RATIO AND CONTROL VALVE 11.3
GAS STRAINERS 11.4
PROTECTIVE DEVICES 11.5
GAS FUEL SYSTEM "DLN" 11.6
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

11. GAS FUEL SYSTEM
11.1 GENERAL
The gas fuel system is designed to deliver gas fuel to the turbine combustion
chambers at the proper pressure and flow rates to meet all of the starting, ac-
celeration and loading requirements of gas turbine operation.
The major component of a gas fuel system is the gas stop/ratio and control
valve assembly located in the accessory area. Associated with this gas valve is
the vent valve , control servovalves, pressure gauges and the distribution pip-
ing to the combustion fuel nozzles. See the schematic piping diagram.
The following major components comprise the gas fuel system:
a. Gas fuel strainer.
b. Gas stop ratio valve and control valve (SRV, GCV).
c. Fuel gas low pressure alarm switch (PI-8).
d. Pressure gauges.
e. Gas fuel vent valve (20VG-1).
f. Gas fuel control oil trip valve (20FG-1).
g. Stop ratio valve-control servovalve (90SR).
h. Gas control valve-control servovalve (65GC).
i. Gas valve control LVDTs (96GC-1/2).
j. Pressure transmitters (96FG-2A/B/C).
k. Stop - Ratio/valve L.V.D.T. (96SR-1/2)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 11-1

Gas fuel is first cleaned by passing through a strainer as it comes from the sup-
ply piping, prior to flowing through the gas valve and into the gas manifold
piping. The gas fuel is metered and controlled by the gas valve (gas stop ratio
and control valve) to supply the required flow to the gas turbine combustion
system.
The fuel gas stop ratio and control valve consists of two independent valves (a
stop ratio valve and a control valve) combined into one housing assembly.
Both the gas stop ratio valve and the gas control valve are single-action, elec-
trohydraulically operated.
The fuel gas control valve is activated by a SPEEDTRONIC control signal to

admit the proper amount of fuel required by the turbine for a given load or
speed. The fuel gas stop ratio valve is used to shut off fuel flow to the turbine
whenever required. It also controls the pressure ahead of the fuel gas control
valve. This enables the gas control valve to control fuel flow over the wide
range required under turbine starting and operating conditions.
11.3 GAS STOP/RATIO AND CONTROL VALVE (SRV-GCV)
The gas control valve (GCV-1) part of the gas/stop ratio and control valve pro-
vides a fuel gas metering function to the turbine in accordance with its speed
and load requirements. The position of the gas control valve (hence fuel gas
flow to the turbine) is a linear function of a fuel stroke reference voltage (FSR)
generated by the SPPEDTRONIC control. The control voltage generated acts
to shift the electrohydraulic servovalve to admit oil to or release it from the hy-
draulic cylinder to position the gas control valve so that the fuel gas flow is
that which is required for a given turbine speed and load situation.
The gas stop ratio valve (SRV-1) is similar to the gas control valve. Its plug,
however, has a steeper taper to provide the high gain necessary to maintain
good pressure control. The ratio function of the stop ratio valve provides a
regulated inlet pressure for the control valve as a function of turbine speed.
The SPEEDTRONIC pressure control loop generates a position signal to posi-
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 11-2

tion the stop ratio valve by means of a servovalve controlled hydraulic cylinder
to provide required intervalve pressure.
The gas stop ratio valve functions in the fuel gas system to provide a positive
fuel shutoff when required by either normal or emergency conditions. A gas
fuel trip valve is operated by trip oil pressure acting on the piston end of a
spool. When the trip oil pressure is normal the gas fuel trip valve is held in a
position that allows hydraulic oil to flow between the control servovalve and
the hydraulic cylinder. In this position normal control of the stop ratio valve is
allowed. In event of a drop in trip oil pressure below a predetermined limit, a
spring in the trip valve shifts the spool to interrupt the flow path of oil between
the control servovalve and the hydraulic cylinder. Hydraulic oil is dumped and
the stop ratio valve closes, shutting off fuel gas flow to the turbine.
11.4 GAS STRAINERS
A fuel gas strainer is installed upstream of the turbine base fuel inlet connec-
tion point, to facilitate site maintenance requirements. Connection of the fuel
gas supply is made at the purchaser’s connection in the supply line ahead of the
gas strainer. Foreign particles that may be in the incoming fuel gas are re-
moved by the strainer. A blow-down connection on the bottom of the strainer
body provides for periodic cleaning of the strainer screen. Frequency of clean-
ing will depend on the quality of the fuel gas being used. The strainer should
be cleaned shortly after full turbine load has been attained for the first time and
after any disassembly of the purchaser’s fuel gas line.
11.5 PROTECTION DEVICES
11.5.1 Fuel Gas Vent Valve (20 VG-1)
A solenoid-operated valve 20VG-1, is installed in the vent piping

from the casing of the combination gas stop/speed ratio and gas con-
trol valve. When the turbine is shutdown, any fuel gas that might ac-
cumulate in the compartment between the stop/speed ratio and control
valve, vents to atmosphere through the piping.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 11-3

11.5.2 Low Fuel Gas Pressure Switch (PI-8)
A low fuel gas alarm pressure switch PI-8, installed in the gas piping
ahead of the gas stop/speed ratio and control valve assembly, provides
alarm protection should the gas pressure drop below the switch set-
ting. An alarm will be indicated on the annunciator panel in the con-
trol center Fuel Gas Vent Valve (20VG-1).
A solenoid-operated valve 20VG-1, is installed in the vent piping

from the casing of the combination gas stop/speed ratio and gas con-
trol valve. When the turbine is shut down, any fuel gas that might ac-
cumulate in the compartment between the stop/speed ratio and control
valve, vents to flare through the piping.
11.5.3 Pressure Transmitter (96FG)
Pressure transmitters, 96FG-2A/B/C, are installed in the fuel system

on the gas fuel discharge side of the stop/speed ratio valve, to provide
the operational pressure feedback signal to the SPEEDTRONIC con-
trol system.
11.5.4 Pressure Gauges
Three pressure gauges are provided in the fuel gas piping. The up-
stream gauge measures the pressure of fuel gas entering the stop/speed
ratio valve; the intermediate gauge measures the pressure as it leaves
the valve and the downstream gauge measures pressure of the gas
leaving the gas control valve flowing to the gas manifold.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 11-4

11.6 GAS FUEL SYSTEM "DLN"
On DLN , applications fuel is split between two different zones of the combus-
tor, primary and secondary. This fuel split is a function of combustion refer-
ence temperature and is scheduled to obtain optimum NOx and CO emissions.
The MARK V Control schedules split based on DLN Mode, which is a func-
tion of combustion reference temperature and flame position in the combustor.
This system DOES NOT require a transfer purge system (see Fig. 11-1)
11.6.1 Primary Mode - A mode where the fuel splitter valve. (VGS-3) is set
to 100% position or full primary, and all the fuel is entering the pri-
mary nozzles with combustion occurring in the primary combustion
zone. This mode is typically from ignition through 1500F, combus-
tion reference temperature).
11.6.2 Lean-lean Mode - In this mode the fuel splitter valve has moved to an
intermediate position, passing fuel into both the primary and secon-
dary combustion zones, with combustion occurring in both zones.
The split can vary from 50-70% primary. Lean-lean is an intermedi-
ate mode between primary and secondary transfer mode and typically
is from 1500F to 1850F combustion reference temperature.
11.6.3 Secondary Transfer Mode - In this mode the splitter valve moves to
full secondary, thus passing all fuel into the secondary combustion
zone, via the secondary nozzles. The primary zone flames out due to
lack of fuel, and all combustion occurs in the secondary zone. This
mode follows lean-lean mode prior to premix and typically occurs at
1850F.
11.6.4 Premix Transfer Mode - In this mode the fuel splitter valve refer-
ence integrates from 0% primary up to the premix destination split,
typically near 80%, primary. This is a transitionary mode between
secondary transfer and premix steady state. Fuel is being admitted
into the primary and secondary combustion zone through the primary,
& secondary nozzles with combustion occurring only in the secondary
zone.
11.6.5 Premix Steady State - This is the optimal mode of operation for a
DLN turbine with the lowest NOx and CO obtainable. In this mode
fuel is entering both the primary and secondary zones through the pri-
mary and secondary fuel nozzles, with combustion occurring only in
the secondary zone. Approximately 80%, of the fuel is "premixing" in
the primary zone before combustion occurs in the secondary combus-
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 11-5

tion zone downstream of the venturi. This mode is active after premix
transfer through base load and picks up near 1900F combustion refer-
ence temperature.
11.6.6 Extended lean-lean - This mode is active when flame is present in

both primary and secondary zones and the combustion reference tem-
perature is above the setpoint for secondary transfer. In this mode
NOx and CO emissions are not in compliance unless water or steam
abatement is used. This mode typically occurs when flame is reestab-
lished in the primary zone, such as during fuel transfers, combustion
problems, or not successfully transfering into premix steady state
mode. This mode can also be operator selected when premix mode is
not desirable due to other NOx abatement methods or power augmen-
tation from water or steam injection.
11.6.7 DLN Load Rejection Recovery - This mode is active in the event of
a sudden cut back in fuel command (FSR), such as breaker open when
in premix transfer or premix steady state mode. This mode moves the
splitter valve to an intermediate position until primary flame is de-
tected, then fully transitions to primary mode, as would be called for
by the combustion reference temperature. Recovery mode is necessary
to reestablish flame in the primary zone before completely transition-
ing fuel flow to primary only.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 11-6

FIG. 11-1 – COMBUSTIBLE GAS SYSTEM (DLN)
Schematic diagram of fuel gas system is shown in Fig. 11-1A and Fig. 11-1B.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 11-7

Fig. 11-1A - Fuel Gas System Schematic Diagram

(SOM 5105810/1 – Sh. 1/2
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 11-8

Fig. 11-1B - Fuel Gas Scrubber Schematic Diagram

(SOM 5105810/1 – Sh. 2/2)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 11-9

Lubrication System Section 12
LUBE OIL SYSTEM
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 12.1
LUBE OIL TANK AND PIPING 12.3
LUBE OIL PUMPS 12.4
VALVES 12.5
LUBE OIL TEMPERATURE CONTROL 12.6
OIL FILTERS 12.7
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 12.8
HYDROCARBON BASE LUBRICATING OIL 12.9

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR GAS TURBINE SOM 17366/4
LUBE OIL COOLER(S) 12.10
LUBE OIL VAPOUR SEPARATOR 12.11
LUBE OIL PURIFIER 12.13
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

12. LUBRICATION SYSTEM
12.1 GENERAL
The lubricating requirements for the gas turbine power plant are furnished by a
common forced-feed lubrication system. This lubrication system, complete
with tank, pumps, cooler, filters, valves and various control and protection de-
vices, furnishes normal lubrication and absorption of heat rejection load of the
gas turbine. Lubricating fluid is circulated to the three main turbine bearings,
generator bearings, and to the turbine accessory gear. Additionally, a portion of
the pressurized fluid is diverted and filtered again for use by hydraulic control
devices as control fluid and as a supply to other systems.
Refer to “Lubricating Oil Recommendations for Gas Turbines with Bearing

Ambients above 260°C” in section 13.9 of this manual for the lubricating oil
requirements.
The lubrication system is designed to provide an ample supply of filtered lubri-

cant at the proper temperature and pressure for operation of the turbine and its
associated equipment. The lubrication system including all major components
is shown in the system schematic diagram.
Major system components include:
1. Lube reservoir in the accessory base.
2. Main lube pump PL-1 (shaft driven from the accessory gear).
3. Auxiliary lube pump PL-2.
4. Emergency lube pump PL-3.
5. Pressure relief valve VR-1 in the main pump discharge.
6. Lube oil coolers (HXL-2)
7. Lube oil filters (FL-1A/B)
8. Bearing header pressure regulator VPR-2.
9. Trip oil supply filters
10. Oil vapour separator (PDS-1).
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-1

For turbine starting, a maximum of 800 SSU is specified for reliable operation
of the control system and for bearing lubrication
Lubricating fluid for the main, the auxiliary and the emergency pumps is sup-
plied from the reservoir, while lubricating fluid used for control is supplied
from the bearing header. This lubricant must be regulated to the proper, prede-
termined pressure to meet the requirements of the main bearings and the acces-
sory lube system, as well as the hydraulic control and trip circuits. Regulating
devices are shown on the Lube System Schematic Diagram. All lubricating
fluid is filtered and cooled before being piped to the bearing header.
For more details, please refer to Fig. 12-1, 12-2, 12-3, 12-4, 12-5.
The system is a closed loop, forced feed system. Pumps draw lube oil from the
oil tank and force it under pressure through the heat exchangers, oil filters and
the bearing header to the bearings. Pressure, regulated at “1.7 Bar” for the
bearing header, is discharged from the pumps. All lubricant pumped from the
lube reservoir to the bearing header flows through the lube fluid heat ex-
changer to remove excess heat and then through the cartridge type filter pro-
viding 12-micron filtration. After lubricating the bearings the lubricant flows
back through various drain lines to the lube reservoir. Protection devices are
incorporated into lube systems, where necessary to protect the equipment
against low lubricant supply, low lubricant pressure and high lubricant tem-
perature. The protective devices sound an alarm or shut the unit down if any of
the above conditions occur.
12.3 LUBE OIL TANK AND PIPING
The lube oil tank is fabricated as an integral part of the accessory base, in the
area under the accessory section. Installed in the tank and mounted on its
cover are the lube oil pumps, lube oil filters and the various control and protec-
tive devices. A manhole with a bolted-on cover provides access to the tank in-
terior. An oil tank fill connection is provided on either side, near the tank bot-
tom.
Welded fabrications of seamless, stainless steel pipe compose most of the lube
oil piping. Gaskets prevent leakage at the bolted flanges of this piping. When-
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-2

ever possible, the lube oil feed piping is contained within the oil tank or drain
headers.
A pipe, connected to a flanged opening in the drain channel near the aft end of
the base, provides a vent to atmosphere for the complete lube oil system.
All lubricant pumped by the main or aux. lube oil pump to the lube oil header
flows through a water cooler or to an oil/air cooler to remove excess heat and
then through a cartridge type filter providing 12-micron absolute filtration. The
lubricant pumped by the emergency pump bypasses the cooler.
An oil level transmitter (96QL-1), included in the main tank (TL-1), generate
an alarm when the lube oil level falls under the minimum operative level.
Temperature readings of the lube oil feed header are taken from the thermome-
ter installed in the header. There is also a thermocouple in the bearing. Bearing
oil drain temperatures are measured by thermocouples in the drains. Dia-
phragm-operated regulating valve VPR-2 set at 1.75 kg/cm² g, installed before
the lube fluid heat exchanger, maintains design pressure. Capacity of the sys-
tem including tank, piping and system components is approximately 9420 lt.
12.3.1 Drains
The drain points of the lube oil system are shown on the Schematic Piping Dia-
gram, and the Purchaser’s Connection Outline and Notes, contained in the
“Reference Drawings” Volume.
12.3.2 Flow sights
Flow sights are present in the bearing and coupling drains to allow visual
check of the oil flow. Check the oil flow when the lube oil pumps are started
prior to every turbine startup.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-3

12.4 LUBE OIL PUMPS
The lubrication system uses three lube oil pumps:

a. The main lube supply pump PL-1 is a positive displacement type pump
and driven by the accessory gear.
b. The auxiliary lube supply pump PL-2 driven by a vertical A.C. motor
88QA.
c. The emergency lube supply pump PL-3 driven by a vertical D.C. motor
88QE.
Both the auxiliary and emergency pumps are mounted on the oil tank cover.
The output of each one of the pumps at rated speed together with motor ratings
are included in the Device Summary of this manual. Functional information
concerning the pumps is included in the following paragraphs.
12.4.1 Main Lube Oil Pump (Accessory Gear Driven)
The main lube oil pump is a positive displacement pump, located on the base
of the accessory gear; it is driven by a splined quill shaft connected with the
lower drive gear. One backpressure valve VPR-2 limits the output of this
pump to the lube oil system . The pressure setting of VPR-2 is given on the
Device Summary. Further information on the pump is included in the "Auxil-
iary Equipment and Instrumentation Publication" volume.
12.4.2 Auxiliary Lube Oil Pump (AC Motor Driven)
The auxiliary centrifugal lube pump provides pressure during the starting and
stopping sequences of the gas turbine, when the main pump cannot supply suf-
ficient pressure for safe operation.
When ac power is available during the turbine starting and stopping sequences,
system lube pressure is supplied by the auxiliary supply pump driven by A.C.
motor 88QA during the time that the main shaft-driven pump is at a speed in-
sufficient to develop operating pressure.
At turbine startup, the ac pump starts automatically when the master control
switch on the turbine control panel is turned to the START position. It contin-
ues to operate until the turbine reaches approximately 95 percent of operational
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-4

speed. At this point, the pump shuts down and system pressure is supplied by
the shaft-driven, main lube pump.
On turbine shutdown, the A.C. motor-driven auxiliary pump starts after the
14HSX relay contact drops out. This occurs when turbine speed drops to a
value of between 75 and 90 percent of operational speed. The pump continues
to operate throughout the shutdown and cooldown period and runs until the op-
erator transmits a second stop signal by turning the master control switch on
the turbine control panel to the STOP position, a second time.
Low lube oil pressure transmitters 96QT-2A control the auxiliary lube oil
pump. These pressure transmitters also signal alarm conditions in addition to
the start function. Start signals from this transmitters cause the auxiliary lube
oil pump to run under low lube oil pressure conditions as happens during
startup or shutdown of the gas turbine. At this time, the main pump, driven by
the accessory gear, does not supply sufficient pressure.
During the turbine starting sequence, the auxiliary lube oil pump starts on re-
ceiving the start signal. The control circuit is operated through the normally
closed contacts of the 96QT-2A/2B/2C pressure transmitters.
The pump will run until the turbine reaches operating speed, even though the
lube oil header is at rated pressure and the pressure transmitters contacts has
opened. If operating speed is reached and proper lube oil pressure is not estab-
lished in the system, the pump will continue to run (through the contacts of the
complete sequence check relay).
When the turbine shutdown sequence is on and the control system timer is on
as well, pressure transmitters 96QT-2A/2B/2C will signal the auxiliary pump
to start running. This happens when the lube oil header pressure falls to the
point at which the contacts of the switch or of the transmitter are set to close.
The pump will continue to run (if A.C. power is available) throughout the cool
down period, during which time the control system timer will be in charge of
operation.
12.4.3 Emergency Lube Oil Pump (DC Motor Driven)
The emergency centrifugal lube oil pump intervenes to supply lube oil to the
main bearing header during an emergency shutdown, in the event that the aux-
iliary pump has been forced out of service or is unable to maintain adequate
lube oil pressure.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-5

The emergency pump is used only during turbine shutdown, since the pump
size and the drive motor are incapable of supplying adequate lube oil for nor-
mal turbine operation.
If A.C. power is not available during the turbine starting and stopping se-
quences, system lube fluid pressure is supplied by the emergency lube supply
pump driven by a D.C. motor (88QE) energized by a pressure switch. The
pump operates until the turbine reaches approximately 40 percent speed. It will
continue to operate after 40 percent speed is reached if the system pres-
sure has not reached the pressure setting of the pressure switch.
The emergency lube pump supplies lube fluid to the main bearing header dur-
ing an emergency shutdown in the event that the auxiliary pump has been
forced out of service, or is unable to maintain adequate lube pressure.
This pump is started automatically by the action of pressure transmitters

96QT-2A/2B/2C, whenever the lube oil pressure in the main bearing header
falls below the pressure setting. If the main or auxiliary lube oil pumps should
resume operation, the emergency pump will be stopped (automatically) by
96QT-2A/2B/2C, when the lube oil header pressure exceeds the setting of the
switch. Should the auxiliary pump fail during the shutdown sequence because
of an A.C. power failure or any other cause, the emergency lube oil pump will
be started automatically by action of the low lube oil pressure pressure trans-
mitters 96QT-2A/2B/2C. The emergency lube oil pump will continue to run
until the high-pressure shaft comes to rest. The emergency pump will then be
controlled by the control system timer and operated through a cool down pe-
riod.
The emergency pump can be tested for correct start, independent of the relating
control pressure switches, while the lube oil system is operating normally on
the main or auxiliary pump.
12.4.3.1 Cool down Period
On units with automatic control, the control circuits are arranged so that the
A.C. auxiliary lube oil pump will automatically continue operation after tur-
bine shutdown for a ten-hour cool down period. If A.C. power is not available
after shutdown, the D.C. emergency lube oil pump will operate automatically,
cycling 30 seconds on and 3 minutes off, until a time of 100 minutes on has
been accumulated (total cycle time of ten hours).
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-6

12.5 VALVES
This system uses various types of valves that regulate pressure and control the
flow of lube oil. Please refer to the “Instrument List- Reference Drawings”
Volume, which reports the valve symbols, settings and descriptions.
12.5.1 Check valves
Check valves are present in the discharge piping from each of the lube oil
pumps. They are also installed in the discharge piping of auxiliary and emer-
gency pumps to prevent lube oil from being circulated back to the oil tank
through the standby centrifugal pump
The check valve mounted in the discharge piping of the main shaft-driven gear
pump prevents loss of auxiliary pump pressure to the lube oil system in case of
gear pump failure. The gear pump check valve also contains an orifice, which
regulates the flow of lubricating oil to the pump gears during the cranking se-
quence, when the lube oil pressure is being supplied by the auxiliary pump.
12.5.2 Test valve - low lube oil pressure - auxiliary pump start
A test valve, mounted on the gauge cabinet, serves to test the automatic startup
of the auxiliary lube oil pump through the signals generated by the low lube oil
alarm/pump start pressure s transmitters 96QT-2A/2B/2C while the unit is op-
erating normally on the main lube oil pump. By opening the test valve, lube oil
pressure falls to the setting of the pressure switch and the auxiliary lube oil
pump should start. The annunciator should indicate a condition of ”Auxiliary
Lube Oil Pump Running”. When closing the test valve, the pump continues to
run (through the contacts of the complete sequence check relay) until manual
shutdown. After completing this test, reset the annunciator.
12.5.3 Test valve - low lube oil pressure/emergency pump start
A test valve, mounted on the gauge cabinet, serves to check automatic startup
of the emergency lube oil pump by pressure transmitters 96QT-2A (start the
pump), which signal a bearing header alarm. It is possible to run this test while
the unit is operating normally on the main lube oil pump or when the turbine is
operating or shut down and the auxiliary AC pump is supplying pressure to the
lube oil system.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-7

The pressure transmitters with bleed valves are installed after an orifice in the
pressure transmitter a piping connected with the bearing lube oil header.
The gauge provides a means of checking the pressure points at which the
switches operate to indicate a condition of low lubricating fluid pressure on the
C.R.T. and to start the emergency lube supply pump. If the pressure is indi-
cated on setting of relative switch, a condition of low lubricant pressure is indi-
cated on the C.R.T.. Further opening of the test valve will reduce pressure in
the test line to the pressure setting of the switch which starts the emergency
lube pump. A Signal drop indicates either a low pressure condition or that the
emergency lube supply pump is running. A low lubricating fluid pressure indi-
cation should occur before the pump begins operating.
When the test valve is closed and the lube pressure returns to normal, the emer-
gency lube supply pump should stop as a result of restoration of pressure on
the switch.
A check valve is placed in the discharge piping of the auxiliary and emergency
lube pumps to prevent fluid from being circulated to the oil tank through these
centrifugal pumps when the main pump is operating.
) NOTE
WHEN TESTS ARE COMPLETED, THE C.R.T. SHOULD BE RESET.
12.5.4 Regulating valve VPR-2 - lube oil header pressure regulation
A diaphragm-operated regulating valve VPR-2 maintains the lube oil pressure

in the main oil header at approximately 1.72 Bar. This valve is installed in the
lube oil discharge line from the oil filters, downstream of the test orifice. The
valve diaphragm, connected with the lube header, actuates the valve as re-
quired to maintain the specified system pressure level.
A bypass orifice is also present in the body of regulating valve VPR-2, to per-
mit limited valve travel and damped regulatory control. Moreover, it ensures
oil flow to the header in the event of malfunction and closure of the VPR-2
valve.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-8

12.6 LUBE OIL TEMPERATURE CONTROL
12.6.1 Standby heaters
During standby periods, immersion heaters 23QT-1/2/3/4, installed in the oil

tank, maintain the lubricant at the proper viscosity for turbine startup.
Temperature switches 49QT-1/2/3/4 switch off the heaters (for setting values,
refer to the Instrument List in volume "Reference Drawings and Special
Tools”).
The A.C. motor driven auxiliary lube oil pump always operates during standby
heating periods to circulate the oil in the system. The heater control circuitry is
shown on the MK VI "Sequencing Diagram", supplied beforehand, and tem-
perature control settings are noted in the Instrument List included in the “Ref-
erence Drawings”.
12.7 OIL FILTERS
12.7.1 Main Oil Filter (FL-1A/B)
A 12-micron, absolute inorganic fiber filter installed in the lube system just af-
ter the lube oil cooler, filtrates all lube oil. Two (dual) filters with a transfer
valve, installed between the filters, direct the oil flow through either filter and
into the lube oil header.
Dual filters are arranged side by side in the tank. They are connected with the
pump discharge header through a manual transfer valve. Only one filter at a
time is in service; thus, it is possible to clean, inspect and service the second
one without interrupting oil flow or shutting down the gas turbine.
By means of the manually operated, worm-driven transfer valve, you can put
into service one filter and you can take out the second one, without interrupting
the oil flow to the main lube oil header.
It would be advisable to change filters before the differential pressure gauge

indicates a differential pressure of "1,7 Bar"; differential pressure switch
96QQ-1 provide an alarm.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-9

The transfer of operation from one filter to the other should be accomplished as
follows:
1. Open the filler valve and fill the stand-by filter until a solid oil flow can be
seen in the flow sight in the filter vent pipe. This will indicate a "filled"
condition.
2. Operate the transfer valve with a wrench to bring the stand-by filter into ser-
vice.
3. Close the filler valve
Filter elements should be changed when differential pressure drops to valve of

1.7 bar.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-10

12.8 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
12.8.1 Oil Pressure
Pressure transmitters 96QT-2A/2B/2C, detect low lubricating fluid pressure.

They respond when the line pressure drops to a specified value. Pressure trans-
mitters 96QT-2A/2B/2C, installed in the lubricant header piping. Will generate
an alarm and start the auxiliary pump or initiate a trip with two out of three
logic if the lubricant pressure drops below its predetermined setting.
12.8.2 Oil Temperature
Temperature switches are installed in the lubricating fluid header piping. They
generate an alarm and start the lube oil cooler auxiliary fan or initiate a trip
with two out of three logic if the temperature of the lubricant to the bearings
exceed the preset limit.
12.8.3 Oil level gauge and alarm
Displacer type liquid level switches are mounted on the lube oil reservoir. Re-
fer to the Instrument list for the maximum and minimum lube oil levels. If the
lube oil level falls below a minimum set point or rises above a maximum set
point, an alarm will occur.
A reflex type level gauge is mounted on the side of the reservoir for local level
indication.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-11

12.9 HYDROCARBON BASE LUBRICATING OIL RECOMMENDATIONS

FOR GAS TURBINE
Please refer to relevant document SOM 17366/4 included in Appendix

“Reference Publications”
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-12

12.10 LUBE OIL COOLER(S)
The lube oil flowing to the turbine lube oil header and to the driven machines
must have a temperature that guarantees its correct viscosity.
For this purpose, the lube oil system includes a water/oil cooler or an air/oil
cooler.
The lube oil is sent to the cooler installed downstream of the pump and
upstream of the lube oil filters.
The water/oil cooler may have either one or two bodies arranged in parallel
and utilizing a continuous flow transfer valve. This feature permits either
cooler to be cut out of service for inspection or maintenance without interrupt-
ing oil flow to the machines. The air/oil cooler is a finned tube heat exchanger
provided with electric motor driven fans.
12.10.1 Temperature regulating valve (VTR-1)
A temperature regulating valve (VTR-1) controls the lube oil flow through the
off-base cooling unit. This valve is installed in the feed line to the cooling
unit. Valve actuation is controlled by lube oil header temperature to maintain
the lube oil temperature at a predetermined value.
During turbine start-up, this valve allows all oil to by-pass the cooler.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-13

12.11 OIL VAPOUR SEPARATOR
The vapours produced from heated oil are extremely dangerous, both if emitted
into the atmosphere and if induced into the oil circuit, as they are considered
highly inflammable. For this reason, a vapour separator is used in order to
condense the volatile particles of oil, which, by the action of the gravity force,
fall back into the oil casing.
The system is composed substantially of the following elements:
Electric motor 88QV-1;
Centrifugal fan QV-1;
Level gauges;
Differential pressure gauge.
Electric motor heater 23QV-1
For more information on technical characteristics and maintenance of the oil
vapour separator console, please refer to “Auxiliary Equipment and Instrumen-
tation Publications” Volume.
12.12 OIL PURIFIER TROLLEY
The lube oil purifier system is composed by two purifier, the first is mounted
on the auxiliary skid and the second one is mounted on a trolley.
The two skid are egual and are composed mainly by the following components:
- Oil purifier pump

- Oil purifier vacuum pump
- Oil purifier pumps motor
- Oil purifier inlet and outlet filters
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-14

Fig. 12-1 - Lube Oil Skid Schematic Diagram

(SOM 5105831 – Sh. 1/2)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-15

Fig. 12-2 - Turbine Base Plate Lube Oil System Schematic Diagram System
(SOM 5105831 – Sh. 2/2)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-16

Fig. 12-3 - Oil Mist Eliminator Schematic Diagram

(SOM 5105834 - Sh 1/1)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-17

Fig. 12-4 - Lube Oil Air Cooler Schematic Diagram

(SOM 5105836 – Sh 1/1)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-18

Fig. 12-5 - Mineral Oil System

(SOM 5105832 – Sh. 1/2)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-19

Fig. 12-6 - Mineral Oil Purifier

(SOM 5105832 – Sh. 2/2)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 12-20

Hydraulic System Section 13
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 13.1
HYDRAULIC SUPPLY MANIFOLD 13.3
VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE ACTUATING SYSTEM 13.4
HYDRAULIC TRIP SUBSYSTEM 13.5
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

13. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
13.1 GENERAL
The primary functions of the hydraulic system are to provide hydraulic fluid
under required high pressure to: the hydraulic supply manifold assembly,
ratchet/clutch assemblies, fuel gas system and variable inlet guide vane assem-
bly.
Functionally, the hydraulic supply system comprises two separate systems
whose only common points is the lube oil system, which is used as a supply
source for hydraulic fluid. One system includes the hydraulic supply pump,
hydraulic supply manifold, fuel control servovalves and the variable inlet guide
vane actuator. The other system, which is described in detail in the Starting
Means Section, includes the ratchet pump assembly and the ratchet assembly.
Low pressure trip control oil (OLT), obtained from the gas turbine lube system
is utilized for hydraulic operation of the gas turbine protective trip devices.
The major system components include the main hydraulic supply pump PH-1,
the system filter(s) FH1- 1/2, a transfer valve, the hydraulic supply manifold
assembly and the inlet guide vane control valves and actuator.
The system schematic diagram is represented in Fig. 13-1.
Regulated, filtered lube oil from the bearing header of the gas turbine is used
as the high pressure fluid necessary to meet the hydraulic system requirements.
A variable displacement type pump, driven by a shaft of the accessory gear, is

the primary pump PH-1 of this high pressure oil.
Hydraulic oil, pressurized by the main hydraulic pump, is controlled by pres-

sure compensator VPR3-1, built into the pump. The action of the compensator
varies the stroke of the pump to maintain a set pressure at the pump discharge.
When the main pump is operating and it fails to maintain adequate pressure,
the condition will be sensed by pressure switch 96HQ-1. This switch also
initiates an annunciator alarm to indicate low hydraulic supply pressure.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 13-1

A test valve, direct reading gauge, and manual spring-loaded, isolation shut-off
valve are installed at a common connection point with 96HQ-1 for periodic in-
spection and maintenance purposes.
By the main pump hydraulic fluid is pumped to the hydraulic manifold an as-
sembly designed to provide a means of interconnecting a number of small com-
ponents.
Contained within the assembly there are one relief valve one air bleed valve,
and one check valve. Relief valve VR-21 protects the main hydraulic pump
circuit from damage in case of a failure of the main pump pressure compensa-
tor VPR-3-1.
The pump circuit contains a check valve, downstream of its relief valve, which
keeps the hydraulic lines full when the turbine is shutdown. The air bleed
valves vent any air present in the pump discharge lines.
Lube fluid suction flow to the hydraulic pump comes from the turbine bearing
header; this fluid having been filtered previously.
From a single output connection of the manifold assembly the fluid is piped
through system filter FH-1A or FH-1B, to become a high pressure control
fluid.
This high pressure control fluid is piped to control components in the fuel sys-
tem that admit or shutoff fuel or to control the operation of the inlet guide
vanes.
The hydraulic supply system filters prevent contaminants and other wear parti-
cles of the pump from entering the devices of the inlet guide vane system and
the fuel control servovalves.
Each filter is a 5 micron absolute, pleated paper filter. Only one filter is in ser-
vice at any time during system operation. A manual transfer valve permits
changeover to the second filter without interrupting system operation.
Differential gauges are provided to indicate oil pressure across the filters.
When a gauge indicates a low pressure of 5 bar g, the filter cartridge should be
replaced.
The manually operated transfer valve allows filter replacement while the ma-
chine is running under load.
Before operating the transfer valve, the filter which is not in use must be filled
with oil and brought to pressure equilibrium with the filter in use.
This is accomplished by slowly opening the needle valve in the "fill" line be-
tween the filters.
The valve in the vent line should be cracked open to allow any entrapped air to
escape and then tightly closed.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 13-2

After allowing a few minutes for pressure equalization, the transfer valve may
be operated.
This feature permits machine operation with one filter while the other is being
serviced or replaced.
13.3 HYDRAULIC SUPPLY MANIFOLD
The hydraulic supply manifold as stated above, receives high pressure oil from
the accessory gear driven main hydraulic pump. The hydraulic oil is controlled
by a pressure compensator VPR3-1 built into the pump. The action of the com-
pensator varies the stroke of the pump to maintain set pressure at the pump dis-
charge.
Relief valve VR-21 is provided as a back up to this control.
When system pressure reaches the correct setting, and a steady flow of hydrau-
lic oil is established, the valve closes automatically.
From the hydraulic manifold, through a check valve and filter, oil is supplied
as the control oil to the fuel system and the inlet guide vane system.
13.4 VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE ACTUATING SYSTEM
In order to prevent possible pulsation in the gas turbine during acceleration and
deceleration, variable inlet guide vanes are installed in the shaft end of the tur-
bine’s inlet casing. The variable vanes, in conjunction with control of the tenth-
stage compressor bleed air (see Air Systems), permit rapid and smooth turbine
starts and shutdowns without compressor surge.
The variable inlet guide vane actuating system includes the inlet guide vane so-
lenoid valve 90TV-1, guide vane actuator control valve VC-1, position trans-
mitters 96TV-1, 96TV-2 and hydraulic actuating cylinder.
The manifold controls the flow, (to sump or to line) and regulates the pressure
of the hydraulic fluid. The output of the manifold is fed through a filter and
channeled to the inlet guide vane solenoid valve 90TV-1.
Actuation of the 90TV-1 valve supplies hydraulic pressure to operate the vari-
able inlet guide vane actuator.
The speed of the actuator is governed by temperature and pressure compen-

sated flow control valve VC-1.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 13-3

When the 90TV-1 valve is energized, the guide vanes are opened to permit
maximum air flow through the turbine compressor. When the valve is deener-
gized, the vanes are closed and the air flow through the turbine is minimized.
The rotatable shaft of each individual inlet guide vane extends through the
compressor casing and is geared to a circumferential inlet guide vane contro1
ring on the compressor. Rotation of this control ring varies the chord angle of
each individual inlet guide vane in the compressor. Thus, the inlet air flow of
the turbine changes as a function of the inlet guide vane angle position. A lin-
ear electrohydraulic actuator is connected to the control ring through a con-
necting link.
The startup and shutdown logic sequence control requires that the inlet guide
vane control ring be at the closed position before the turbine is fired and re-
main in this closed position until the turbine is at speed. The pickup of the
high-speed relay 14HS energizes the turbine compressor inlet guide vane sole-
noid valve 90TV-1 which actuates a hydraulic cylinder to open the vanes to
their normal operating position for loading. Similarly, the shutdown and trip
logic sequence requires that the inlet guide vanes be returned to their closed
position when the turbine is tripped and when the 14HS relay drops out in the
decelerating cycle. Two position transmitters 96TV-1 and 96TV-2 are installed
on the inlet guide vane control ring to indicate through the turbine control
panel when the guide vanes are in a closed position. Thus, the inlet guide vanes
are operated with the same permissive sequence as the tenth-stage compressor
bleed valves, which are also required for pulsation protection of the turbine.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 13-4

! WARNING
UNDER NO CIRCURNSTANCES SHOULD THE TURBINE BE STARTED IF THE

INLET GUIDE VANES ARE NOT IN THE CLOSED POSITION BEFORE FIRING.
SIRNIIARLY, THE INLET GUIDE VANES MUST BE IN THEIR CLOSED POSI-
TION BEFORE THE TURBINE DECELERATES TO OR BELOW THE SPEED
SPECIFIED IN THE CONTROL SPECIFICATION.
) NOTE
FOR DETAILED INFORMATION PERTAINING TO THE INSTALLATION, MAINTE-

NANCE AND OPERATION OF THE EQUIPMENT DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION,
REFER TO THE EQUIPMENT PUBLICATIONS SECTION OF THIS MANUAL. REFER
TO THE CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS-CONTROL SYSTEM SETTINGS AND OPERAT-
ING SEQUENCES FOR THE SPECIFIED SETTINGS OF THE INLET GUIDE VANE
POSITION AND THE LIMIT SWITCHES. FOR THE ELECTRICAL CONTROL CIR-
CUITRY AND LOGIC SEQUENCE OF THE HYDRAULIC SUPPLIY SYSTEM, REFER
TO THE PREVIOUSLY FURNISHED TURBINE ELEMENTARY DIAGRAM.
13.5 HYDRAULIC TRIP SUBSYSTEM
The low pressure trip circuit control oil (OLT) is supplied by the lube oil sys-
tem. The lube oil system connects to the low pressure trip circuit through an
orifice, supplying (OLT) oil to the manual emergency and turbine overspeed
trip devices. From this point, (OLT) is supplied to the turbine fuel systems
through a parallel check valve/orifice piping system and solenoid stop valves.
Operation of the solenoid valves permits use of the fuel systems for turbine op-
eration and turbine trip action when required. The system also provides a direct
connection to the overspeed alarm device for turbine shutdown whenever an
overspeed condition occurs.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 13-5

Fig. 13-1 - Lube Hydraulic, Ratchet & Control Oil Base

(SOM 5105830 – Sh. 1/1)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 13-6

Cooling and Sealing Air System Section 14
COOLING & SEALING AIR SYSTEM
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 14.1
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

14. COOLING AND SEALING AIR SYSTEM
14.1 GENERAL
Air obtained from the gas turbines axial-flow compressor is used for cooling
the various parts of the turbine section and for pressurizing the bearing oil seals
in the gas turbine. This cooling and sealing air provides air flow to certain in-
ternal and external turbine parts to prevent excessive temperature buildup in
these parts during normal operation and for sealing the turbine bearings.
The parts of the turbine section which are cooled by air consist of: the first and
second-stage turbine wheel forward and aft faces, the first and second-stage
nozzles, the turbine shell, and support struts. The combustion chamber liners,
transition pieces, and the combustion casing, are designed to utilize compressor
discharge air for effective cooling of these parts.
Cooling and sealing air system is represented in Fig. 14-1.
Air obtained from the axial-flow compressor used in the turbine cooling and
bearing sealing functions includes fourth and tenth-stage extraction air, com-
pressor high-pressure seal leakage air, and compressor discharge air.
14.2.1 Fourth-Stage Extraction Air
Fourth-stage air is piped externally through orifices through the turbine shell
and support struts to the aft surface of the second-stage wheel. This air cools
the portion of the shell surrounding the first and second-stage nozzles and tur-
bine wheels and also cools the support struts which are in the hot gas exhaust
stream.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 14-1

14.2.2 Tenth-Stage Extraction Air
Tenth-stage air is piped externally through the compressor bleed valves,

VA2-1 and VA2-2, to the exhaust plenum. Limit switches 33CB-1 and -2 are
provided on each valve to give an indication of valve position.
Tenth-stage air is also fed through the second-stage nozzle partitions for cool-
ing the shaft surface of the first-stage turbine wheel, and the forward surface of
the second-stage turbine wheel.
A portion of the tenth-stage air is used at the number one and the number two
bearing assemblies to provide an air pressure seal for bearing lube oil. Before
the sealing air is piped to these bearing areas, it is first routed through a cen-
trifugal dirt separator which removes foreign matter injurious to the bearings.
Cleaning of the separator is accomplished by a continuous blow-down orifice.
14.2.3 Compressor High Pressure Seal Leakage Air
Compressor high pressure seal leakage air is channeled internally to the for-
ward surface of the first-stage turbine wheel. This air flow provides a source of
cooling air for the first-stage wheel and is exited into the exhaust hot gas path.
14.2.4 Compressor Discharge Air
Compressor discharge air is directed internally through the partitions of the

first-stage nozzle as cooling air, and exits through bleed holes located in the
trailing edge of the partitions into the exhaust hot gas path. This air is also
piped externally through a filter and air control solenoid valve 20CB-1 to the
actuating pistons of the bleed valves.
At turbine startup valve 20CB-1, which is deenergized, prevents the compres-

sor discharge air from actuating the pistons of the compressor bleed valves; the
bleed valves are open, and tenth-stage air is vented to the exhaust plenum (and
aid in the elimination of compressor surge).
When the generator breaker is closed, a signal from the control system ener-
gizes valve 20CB-1. Compressor discharge air is then routed to the bleed valve
actuators to close the valves and stop compressor bleed to the exhaust plenum.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 14-2

When gas turbines burn oil as a fuel, they utilize compressor discharge air to
activate the control piston of the false start drain valve in the fuel oil system.
The turbines also require atomizing of the fuel oil and use compressor dis-
charge air as the source of atomizing air. An auxiliary air compressor, driven
by the turbine starting device, supplies the atomizing air supply during startup
when the turbine speed level is low and the main pump, driven by the acces-
sory gear, cannot supply the required air.
Pressure transmitter provide a compressor discharge feedback signal utilized

by the turbine control system.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 14-3

Fig. 14-1 - Cooling and Sealing Air System Schematic Diagram

(SOM 510583 – sh 1/10)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 14-4

Fire Protection System Section 15
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
CONTENTS SECT
SYSTEM OPERATION 15.3
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

15 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
15.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
The carbon dioxide fire protection system used for the gas turbine unit extin-
guishes fires by reducing the oxygen content of the air in the compartment
from an atmospheric normal of 2l% to below the level necessary to support
combustion (normally 15%). To reduce the oxygen content, a quantity of car-
bon dioxide (CO2) equal to or greater than 34% of the compartment volume is
discharged into the compartment in one minute and, recognizing the reflash po-
tential of combustibles exposed to high temperature metal, an extended dis-
charge is provided to maintain an extinguishing concentration for a prolonged
period to minimize potential reflash conditions. The fire protection system de-
sign conforms to the requirements specified in NFPA Pamphlet 12- Standard
on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems.
The fire protection system is comprised of a distribution system of piping for

the delivery of CO2 from a bank of high-pressure bottles to the required gas
turbine compartments in the event of a fire. This bank of high-pressure cylin-
ders is located on an Off-Base skid and maintains saturated liquid carbon diox-
ide at a storage pressure of 23,5 Bar.
The fire protection system control panel is mounted in the Off-Base cabinet,
where the CO2 high-pressure cylinders are located. The interconnecting field
piping, which is usually supplied by the installer, delivers the CO2 from the
turbine control room to the gas turbine compartments, where it connects to the
piping that distributes the CO2 into the compartments through nozzle orifices.
Two separate distribution systems are used: an initial discharge and an ex-
tended discharge. Within a few seconds after actuation, sufficient CO2 flows
from the initial discharge system into the gas turbine compartments to rapidity
build up an extinguishing concentration (normally 34%). A CO2 concentration
(usually 30%) is then maintained by the gradual addition of more CO2 from the
extended discharge system compensating for compartment leakage. Carbon di-
oxide flow rate is controlled by the size of the orifices in the discharge nozzles
in each compartment for both the initial and extended discharge systems. The
orifices for the initial discharge system permit a rapid discharge of CO2 to
quickly build up an extinguishing concentration.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 15-1

Orifices for the extended discharge system are smaller and permit a relatively
slow discharge rate to maintain an extinguishing concentration over a pro-
longed period of time (based on the turbine frame size’s emergency roll down
and cool down periods) to minimize the likelihood of a fire re-igniting.
) NOTE
IF THE CARBON DIOXIDE SYSTEM IS TO BE EFFECTIVE, THE COMPARTMENT

PANELS MUST BE IN PLACE AND THE COMPARTMENT DOORS CLOSED. THERE IS
SUFFICIENT CO2 IN THE SYSTEM TO COMPENSATE FOR LEAKAGE THROUGH
VENTILATION OPENINGS, WHICH ARE CLOSED BY GRAVITY DAMPERS, OR CO2
PRESSURE OPERATED DAMPERS (WHICH MUST BE MANUALLY RESET) AND UN-
AVOIDABLE CRACKS IN THE PACKAGE LAGGING. THERE IS NOT ENOUGH TO
ALLOW FOR UNCONTROLLED ESCAPE OF CO2 THROUGH OPEN PANELS OR
DOORS.
! WARNING
CARBON DIOXIDE, IN A CONCENTRATION SUFFICIENT TO EXTINGUISH

FIRE, CREATES AN ATMOSPHERE THAT WILL NOT SUPPORT LIFE. IT IS EX-
TREMELY HAZARDOUS TO ENTER THE COMPARTMENTS AFTER THE CO2
SYSTEM HAS BEEN DISCHARGED. ANYONE RENDERED UNCONSCIOUS BY
CO2 SHOULD BE RESCUED AS QUICKLY AS POSSIBLE AND REVIVED
IMRNEDIATELY WITH ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION. THE EXTENT AND TYPE
OF SAFEGUARDS AND PERSONNEL WARNINGS THAT MAY BE NECESSARY
RNUST BE DESIGNED TO MEET THE PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS OF EACH
SITUATION. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT PERSONNEL BE ADEQUATELY
TRAINED AS TO THE PROPER ACTION TO TAKE IN CASE OFSUCH AN EMER-
GENCY.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 15-2

15.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
To gain a better understanding of the fire protection system, a brief description

of its operation and distinctive features is provided in the following paragraphs.
The System Schematic Diagram is represented in Fig. 15-1.
) NOTE
THIS UNIT HAS ONE ZONE OF FIRE PROTECTION, CONSISTING OF AN INITIAL

AND AN EXTENDED DISCHARGE.
The main components of the fire fighting system are:

a. Bottles containing the extinguishing agent (CO2) for the quick discharge
and extended discharge
b. solenoid valves 45CR-3/4/5/6 for the discharge actuation (signal from the
Fire & Gas Control System)
c. ultraviolet flame detectors
d. heat rise detectors
Pilot-operated selector valves located in the CO2 discharge manifold are

opened when the solenoid valves are energized. The solenoids are automati-
cally actuated by an electric signal from heat-sensitive fire detectors which are
strategically located in the various compartments of the gas turbine unit. Initial
Discharge Pilot Valve Assemblies, when actuated, will pressurize all remain-
ing pressure operated discharge heads on both the Initial and Extended Dis-
charge cylinders.
Should a fire occur in one of the protected turbine compartments, the contacts
of one of the heat-sensitive four detectors 45FT-1, 45FT-2, 45FT-3 and 45FT-4
for Turbine, 45FA-1, 45FA-2, 45FA-3, 45FA-4 for Accessory Compartment
and 45FT-5,45FT-6 for Gear/Coupling Compartment will dose and complete
an electrical circuit that energizes and opens solenoid valves 45CR-3/4/5/6.
Actuation of these valves allows CO2 to flow from the bank of high-pressure
cylinders into the initial and extended discharge of the piping distribution sys-
tem and into the different comprised compartments of the Unit.
Carbon dioxide flow rate is controlled by the size of the orifices in the dis-
charge nozzles in each compartment for both the initial and extended discharge
systems. The orifices for the initial discharge system permit a rapid discharge
of CO2 to quickly build up an extinguishing concentration. Orifices for the ex-
tended discharge system are smaller and permit a relatively slow discharge rate
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 15-3

to maintain an extinguishing concentration over a prolonged period of time. By

maintaining the extinguishing concentration the likelihood of a fire reigniting
is minimized.
Manual release switches mounted on the enclosure external walls of the pro-
tected zones for remote lockout of CO2 discharge. These devices are equipped
with a pin, which must be pulled before the push button can be depressed to ac-
tivate the system and discharge the CO2. Actuation of the system, either auto-
matically or manually, will trip the turbine to shut off, shut down the ventila-
tion system, and cause the discharge of CO2.
For installation, inspection, and maintenance of the fire protection system, re-
fer to the vendor instructions.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 15-4

Fig. 15-1 - Fire Detection Fire Fighting System Schematic Diagram

(SOM 5105890 – sh 1/2)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 16-5

Fig. 15-2 - Fire Fighting Pacage System Schematic Diagram

(SOM 5105881 – sh 2/2)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 16-6

Ventilation System Section 16
VENTILATION SYSTEM
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 16.1
GAS DETECTION SYSTEM 16.2
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

16. VENTILATION SYSTEM
16.1 GENERAL
The air inlet system consists of an elevated air inlet compartment and inlet ducting
with silencing provisions connected to the turbine inlet plenum. This system com-
bines the function of filtering and silencing the inlet air with the function of di-
recting air into the gas generator.
Inlet air enters the inlet compartment and flows through the parallel overhead
ducting, with built-in acoustic silencers and thrash screens to the inlet plenum and
then into gas generator.
The inlet compartment of Filter House an all-weather enclosure, is located on a

raised support structure, removed from the gas turbine. The air inlet ductwork
connects Filter House to the inlet plenum. It includes a silencer section and an ex-
pansion joint.
Silencing is provided by the use of horizontal baffles, consisting of acoustically

perforated sheets of encapsulated low-density insulating material. The horizontal
parallel baffles design are specifically tuned to eliminate the fundamental com-
pressor tone as well as attenuating the noise of other frequencies.
The Filter House is located off base and connects to the inlet ducting. This filter is
a high velocity type.
The filtration unit is required to provide adequate protection for the turbine unit
against the environmental conditions existing at the turbine site. To ensure that
this protection is maintained, proper filtration maintenance is required.
The exhaust duct has a circular section insulated to avoid the heat dissipation. The
silencer operates in horizontal position and is supported from the upper side.
The accessory, turbine and load coupling compartments are pressurized and
cooled by ventilation fans (FNVF1/2) installed in the pressurized and cooled ven-
tilation ducting after the inlet filter compartment.
The ventilation system consists of two separate fans driven by their respective
motors [88BA-1/2]; one fan provides ventilating air during normal turbine opera-
tion. The other operates as a stand-by fan and starts when, for any reason, the
temperature inside the turbine compartment increases and reaches the set point of
the RTD. For more details, please refer to Figures 16-1 and 16-2.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 16-1

The ventilating air exits from the turbine and coupling compartments through the
upper opening of each compartment.
Two types of dampers are foreseen for the safety of the ventilation system:
a) gravity dampers, positioned in the filter chamber, held open by the fans of
the ventilation system;
b) manual dampers, positioned on the inlet/outlet ducts of the ventilation sys-

tem; they are closed automatically by the fire fighting system, by the pres-
sure of the CO2 discharge.
16.2 GAS DETECTION SYSTEM
Three gas detectors are provided on the Gas Turbine.

These are located inside the turbine compartment.
Two set points are provided on each gas detector (set on the control of each gas
detector, located on the UCP), one for 30% LEL (alarm indication on Mark VI
CRT ) and one for 60% of LEL (trip executed by Mark VI panel).
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 16-2

Fig. 16-1 - Turbine Inlet & Filtration System Schematic Diagram

(SOM 5105871 – sh 1/1)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 16-3

Fig. 16-2 - Ventilation System Schematic Diagram

(SOM 5105880 – sh 1/1)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 16-4

Washing System Section 17
WASHING SYSTEM
CONTENTS SECT
WASHING/RINSING TANK 17.2
ELECTRIC HEATER 17.3
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

17. GAS TURBINE ON/OFF-LINE WASHING SYSTEM
17.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
The water washing skid is permanently connected to the gas turbine water
wash OFF or ON line connection and is controlled through a control station
depending on which one has to be performed.
The on/off line washing system is substantially composed by:
a. Wash water tank TW-1.
b. Washing air supply filter.
c. Electric heater 23TW-1.
d. Solenoid valve 20TW-1/2.
The off-line washing system simplified diagram is shown in Fig. 17-1.
Wash water detergent is pumped from the detergent tank by means of a cen-
trifugal submerged pump.
Fore more details refer to supplier instructions manuals.
17.2 WASHING/RINSING TANK
The washing water tank with a capacity of 1000 lt, is equipped with a 100
mesh filter, air vent, level indicator, pressure gauges and valves.
17.3 ELECTRIC HEATER
The wash water tank is provided with an electric heater (23TW-1) that main-
tains water temperature between 65°C and 80°C.
It has a power of 14 kW to permit a short heating time.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 17-1

Fig. 17-1 - Combined On/Off Washing Trolley

(SOM 5105894 – sh 1/1)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 17-2

Operation Section 18
OPERATION
CONTENTS SECT
OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITY 18.1
GENERAL OPERATING PRECAUTIONS 18.2
PREPARATIONS FOR NORMAL LOAD OPERATION 18.3
CHECKS PRIOR TO OPERATION 18.4
CHECKS DURING START UP AND INITIAL OPERATION 18.5
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

18. OPERATION
18.1 OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITY
It is essential that the turbine operators be familiar with: the information contained
in the following operation text, the Control Specification drawing (consult the
Control System Settings drawing for the index of Control Specification drawings),
the Piping Schematic drawings including the Instrument List, the SPEEDTRONIC
Elementary, the location and use of SPEEDTRONIC panel mounted indicators
and devices.
The operator must also be aware of the power plant devices which are tied into the
gas turbine mechanically and electrically and could affect normal operation.
No starts should be attempted whether on a new turbine of a newly overhauled
turbine until the following conditions have been met:
1. Requirements listed under CHECKS PRIOR TO OPERATION have been

met.
2. Functionally check the control systems for proper operation before re-
starting.
3. All GENERAL OPERATING PRECAUTIONS have been noted.
It is extremely important that gas turbine operators establish proper operating

practices. We emphasize adherence to the following:
1. Respond to Annunciator Indicators - Investigate and correct the cause of the

abnormal condition. This is particularly true for the protection systems, such
as low oil pressure, overtemperature, vibration, over-speed etc.
2. Check of Control Systems - After any type of control maintenance is

completed, whether repair or replacement of parts, functionally check con-
trol systems for proper operation. This should be done prior to re-start of the
turbine. It should not be assumed that reassembly, "as taken apart" is ade-
quate without the functional test.
3. Monitor Exhaust Temperature During All Phases of Startup - The operator

is alerted to the following:
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-1

! WARNING
OVERTEMPERATURE CAN DAMAGE THE TURBINE HOT GAS PATH PARTS.
Monitor exhaust temperature for proper control upon first startup and after any
turbine maintenance is performed. Trip the turbine if the exhaust temperature ex-
ceeds the normal trip level, or increases at an unusual rate. A particularly critical
period for overtemperature damage to occur is during the startup phase before the
turbine reaches governing speed. At this time air flow is low and the turbine is
unable to accelerate away from excess fuel.
18.2 GENERAL OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
18.2.1 Temperature Limits
Refer to the Control Specifications for actual exhaust temperature control settings.
It is important to define a "baseline value" of exhaust temperature spread with

which to compare future data. This baseline data is established during steady state
operation after each of the following conditions:
a. Initial startup of unit

b. Before and after a planned shutdown
c. Before and after planned maintenance
An important point regarding the evaluation of exhaust temperature spreads is not

necessarily the magnitude of the spread, but the change in spread over a period of
time. The accurate recording and plotting of exhaust temperatures daily can indi-
cate a developing problem. On the MS5001 units, an average spread of
7°C ± 1.6°C is expected. If exhaust temperature spread exceeds 26°C or a 1.6°C
change from the baseline data, corrective action should be taken.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-2

The following turbine wheelspace temperatures indicate the absolute maximum

values permissible during operation:
First Stage Forward Alarm (°C) Trip (°C)

TT-WS1FO-2-3 427 457
TT-WS1AO-2-3 427 457
First Stage Afterward
TT-WS1AO-2 427 457
TT-WS1AO-3 427 457
Second Stage Forward
TT-WS2FO-2-3 427 457
TT-WS2AO-1-2 427 457
Second Stage Afterward
TT-WS2AO-2 427 457
TT-WS2AO-3 427 457
The thermocouples, identified together with their nomenclature, are on the In-
strument List. The wheelspace temperature readings should be the average read-
ing of at least two thermocouples which are located nearly diametrically opposite
each other in the wheelspace. If there is a good reason to doubt the reading of a
thermocouple, the reading should be rejected. A reading from another thermocou-
ple should be taken (if more than two thermocouples are installed). The faulty
thermocouple should be replaced at the earliest convenience.
When the average temperature in any wheelspace is higher then the temperature
limit set forth in the table, it is an indication of trouble. High wheelspace tempera-
ture may be caused by any of the following faults:
1. Restriction in cooling air lines

2. Wear of turbine seals
3. Excessive distortion of the turbine stator
4. Improper positioning of thermocouple
5. Malfunctioning combustion system
6. Leakage in external piping
7. Excessive distortion of exhaust inner diffuser
Check wheelspace temperatures very closely on initial startup. If consistently

high, and a check of the external cooling air circuits reveals nothing, it is permis-
sible to increase the size of the cooling air orifices slightly. Consult with a Nuovo
Pignone field representative and obtain his recommendations as to the size that an
orifice should be increased.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-3

After a turbine overhaul, all orifices should be changed back to their original size,
assuming that all turbine clearances are returned to normal and all leakage paths
are corrected.
! WARNING
WHEELSPACE TEMPERATURES ARE READ ON THE TURBINE CONTROL

PANEL CRT. TEMPERATURES IN EXCESS OF THE MAXIMUM ARE POTEN-
TIALLY HARMFUL TO TURBINE HOT-GAS-PATH PARTS OVER A PRO-
LONGED PERIOD OF TIME. EXCESSIVE TEMPERATURES ARE ANNUNCI-
ATED BUT WILL NOT CAUSE THE TURBINE TO TRIP. HIGH WHEELSPACE
TEMPERATURE READINGS MUST BE REPORTED TO THE NUOVO PIG-
NONE TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.
18.2.2 Pressure Limits
Refer to the Instrument List for actual pressure switch settings. Lube oil pressure
in the bearing feed header is a nominal value of 1.7 barg (25 psig). The turbine
will trip at 0.96 barg (14 psig). Pressure variations between these values will re-
sult from entrapped particulate matter within the lube oil filtering system.
18.2.3 Vibration Limits
The maximum overall vibration velocity of the gas turbine should never exceed
1.0 inch per second in either the vertical or horizontal direction. Corrective action
should be initiated when the vibration levels exceed 12.7 mm per second as indi-
cated on the SPEEDTRONIC panel CRT.
If doubt exists regarding the accuracy of the reading or if more accurate and spe-
cific vibration readings are desired a vibration check is recommended using vibra-
tion test equipment. If a displacement meter is used for taking the vibration read-
ings, use Vibration Analysis Form GL-139 to find the velocity component of the
readings taken at a given speed (or frequency).
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-4

18.2.4 Load Limit
The maximum load capability of the gas turbine is given in the control specifica-
tion.
For the upper limits of generator capability, refer to the Reactive Capability Curve
in the operations section of GENERATOR MANUAL Volume.
Overloading of Gas Turbine - Facts Involved and Policy
It is Nuovo Pignone practice to design and build into gas turbines margins of
safety to permit meeting the contract commitments and to secure long life and
trouble-free operation.
So that maximum trouble-free operation can be secured, Nuovo Pignone designs

into these machines more than ample margins on turbine bucket thermal and dy-
namic stresses, compressor and turbine wheel stresses, generator ventilation, cool-
ers, etc. As a result, these machines are designed somewhat better than strictly
necessary, but Nuovo Pignone believes that such margins of design are required,
considering the great importance of reliability of these turbines to our customers
and to the electrical industry.
It cannot be said, therefore, that these machines cannot be safely operated beyond
the load limits. Such operation, however, always encroaches upon the design mar-
gins of the machines with a consequent reduction in reliability and increased
maintenance. Accordingly, any malfunction that occurs as a result of operation
beyond contract limits cannot be the responsibility of the Nuovo Pignone.
The fact that a generator operates at temperature rises below the Standards does
not mean that it can be properly run with full safety up to these values by over-
loading beyond the nameplate rating. These standards were primarily set up for
the protection of insulation from thermal deterioration on small machines.
The imbedded temperature detectors of the stator register a lower temperature
than the copper because of the temperature drop through the insulation from the
copper to the outside of the insulation, where the temperature detectors are lo-
cated. There are also conditions of conductor expansion, insulation stress, etc.,
which impose limitations. These factors have been anticipated in the "Vee" curves
and reactive capability curves which indicate recommended values consistent with
good operating practice.
The "Vee" curves and reactive capability curves form part of the operating in-
structions for the generator and it is considered unwise to exceed the values given.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-5

The gas turbine-generator sets may require gearing between the gas turbine and
the generator.
Where a reduction (or speed-increasing) gear is required between the gas turbine
and generator, the gear is rated at the maximum capability of the gas turbine, or
the maximum kVA capability of the generator, whichever is less. If the gas-
turbine generator set is operated beyond the maximum rating of the gear, the gear
will also be overloaded with corresponding increased maintenance and reduced
length of life.
The gas turbines are designed mechanically so that within prescribed limits ad-
vantage can be taken of the increased capability over nameplate rating, which is
available at lower ambient temperatures, (because of increased air density), with-
out exceeding the maximum allowable turbine inlet temperature.
When the ambient temperature is lower than that at which the load limit of the gas
turbine is reached, the load must not be permitted to exceed that limit.
Under these conditions, the gas turbine will operate at this load with a lower tur-
bine inlet temperature and the design stresses on the load coupling and turbine
shaft will not be exceeded.
If the turbine is overloaded so that the turbine exhaust temperature schedule is not
followed for reasons of malfunctioning or improper setting of the exhaust tem-
perature control system, the maximum allowable turbine inlet temperature or the
maximum allowable exhaust temperature, or both, will be exceeded and will re-
sult in a corresponding increase in maintenance and, in extreme cases, might re-
sult in failure of the turbine parts.
The exhaust temperature control system senses the turbine exhaust temperature
and introduces proper bias to limit the fuel flow so that neither the maximum al-
lowable turbine inlet temperature nor the maximum allowable turbine exhaust
temperature is exceeded.
18.2.5 Fire Protection System Operating Precautions
The fire protection system, when actuated, will cause several functions to occur in
addition to actuating the media discharge system. The turbine will trip, an audible
alarm will sound, and the alarm message will be displayed on the CRT. The venti-
lation openings in the compartments will close, by a pressure-operated latch and
the damper in the turbine shell cooling discharge will be actuated.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-6

The annunciator audible alarm may be silenced by actuating the alarm SILENCE
switch. The alarm message can be cleared from the ALARM list on the CRT after
the ACKNOWLEDGE DISPLAY FUNCTION switch and the ALARM RESET
switch are actuated only after the situation causing the alarm has been corrected.
The fire protection system must be replenished and reset before it can automati-
cally react to another fire. Reset must be made after each activation of the fire
protection system which includes an initial discharge followed by an extended
discharge period of the fire protection media.
Fire protection system reset is accomplished by resetting the pressure switch lo-
cated on the fire protection system.
Ventilation dampers, automatically closed by a signal received from the fire pro-
tection system, must be reopened manually in all compartments before restarting
the turbine.
! WARNING
FAILURE TO REOPEN COMPARTMENT VENTILATION DAMPERS WILL SE-

VERELY SHORTEN THE SERVICE LIFE OF MAJOR ACCESSORY EQUIP-
MENT.
Failure to reopen the load coupling compartment dampers will materially reduce
the performance of the generator.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-7

18.2.6 Combustion System Operating Precautions
! WARNING
SUDDEN EMISSION OF BLACK SMOKE MAY INDICATE A POSSIBILITY OF

OUTER CASING FAILURE OR OTHER SERIOUS COMBUSTION PROBLEMS. IN
SUCH AN EVENT.
A. IMMEDIATELY SHUTDOWN THE TURBINE.

B. ALLOW NO PERSONNEL INSIDE THE TURBINE COMPARTMENT UN-
TIL TURBINE IS SHUTDOWN.
C. CAUTION ALL PERSONNEL AGAINST STANDING IN FRONT OF ACCESS
DOOR OPENINGS INTO PRESSURIZED COMPARTMENTS.
D. PERFORM A COMPLETE COMBUSTION SYSTEM INSPECTION.
To reduce the possibility of combustion outer casing failure, the operator should
adhere to the following:
1. During operation, exhaust temperatures are monitored by the SPEED-

TRONIC control system. The temperature spread is compared to al-
lowable spreads with alarms and/or protective trips resulting if the al-
lowable spread limits are exceeded.
2. After a trip from 75% load or above, observe the exhaust on startup for
black or abnormal smoke and scan the exhaust thermocouples for unusually
high spreads. Record temperature spread during a normal startup to obtain
base line signature for comparison. Excessive tripping should be investi-
gated and eliminated.
3. Adhere to recommended inspection intervals on combustion liners, transi-

tion pieces and fuel nozzles.
Operating a turbine with non operational exhaust thermocouples increases the risk
of turbine overfiring and prevents diagnosis of combustion problems by use of
temperature differential readings.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-8

To prevent above described malfunctions the operator should keep the number of
non-operational exhaust thermocouples to a maximum of two but non more than
one of any three adjacent thermocouples.
! WARNING
OPERATION OF THE GAS TURBINE WITH A SINGLE FAULTY THERMOCOU-

PLE SHOULD NOT BE NEGLECTED, AS EVEN ONE FAULTY THERMOCOUPLE
WILL INCREASE THE RISK OF AN INVALID "COMBUSTION ALARM" AND/OR
"TRIP".
THE UNIT SHOULD NOT BE SHUT DOWN JUST FOR REPLACEMENT OF A
SINGLE FAULTY THERMOCOUPLE. HOWEVER, EVERY EFFORT SHOULD BE
MADE TO REPLACE THE FAULTY THERMOCOUPLES WHEN THE MACHINE
IS DOWN FOR ANY REASON.
Adherence to the above criteria and early preventive maintenance should reduce
distortions of the control and protection functions and the number of unnecessary
turbine trips.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-9

18.2.7 Cooldown/Shutdown Precautions
! WARNING
IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN IN WHICH INTERNAL DAM-

AGE OF ANY ROTATING EQUIPMENT IS SUSPECTED, DO NOT TURN THE
ROTOR AFTER SHUTDOWN.
MAINTAIN LUBE OIL PUMP OPERATION, SINCE LACK OF CIRCULATING
LUBE OIL FOLLOWING A HOT SHUT DOWN WILL RESULT IN RISING BEAR-
ING TEMPERATURES WHICH CAN RESULT IN DAMAGED BEARING SUR-
FACES. IF THE MALFUNCTION THAT CAUSED THE SHUTDOWN CAN BE
QUICKLY REPAIRED, OR IF A CHECK REVEALS NO INTERNAL DAMAGE AF-
FECTING THE ROTATING PARTS, REINSTATE THE COOLDOWN CYCLE.
If there is an emergency shutdown and the turbine is not turned with the ratchet,
the following factors should be noted:
a. Within 15 minutes, maximum, following turbine shutdown, the gas turbine

may be started without cooldown rotation. Use the normal starting proce-
dure.
b. Between 15 minutes and 48 hours after shutdown a restart should not be

attempted unless the gas turbine has been turned with the ratchet from one
to two hours.
c. If the unit has been shut down and not turned at all, it must be shut down for
approximately 48 hours before it can be restarted without danger of shaft
bow.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-10

! WARNING
WHERE THE GAS TURBINE HAS NOT BEEN ON RATCHET OPERATION AFTER
SHUTDOWN AND A RESTART IS ATTEMPTED, AS UNDER CONDITIONS (A)
AND (C) ABOVE, THE OPERATOR SHOULD MAINTAIN A CONSTANT
CHECK ON VIBRATION VELOCITY AS THE UNIT IS BROUGHT UP TO ITS RA-
TED SPEED.
IF THE VIBRATION VELOCITY EXCEEDS ONE INCH PER SECOND AT ANY
SPEED, THE UNIT SHOULD BE SHUT DOWN AND ROTATED WITH THE HY-
DRAULIC RATCHET OF A LEAST ONE HOUR BEFORE A SECOND STARTING
ATTEMPT IS MADE.
IF SEIZURE OCCURS DURING THE RATCHET OPERATION OF THE GAS TUR-
BINE, THE TURBINE SHOULD BE SHUT DOWN AND REMAIN IDLE FOR AT
LEAST 30 HOURS, OR UNTIL THE ROTOR IS FREE. THE TURBINE MAY BE
ROTATED AT ANY TIME DURING THE 30 HOUR PERIOD IF IT IS FREE; HOW-
EVER, AUDIBLE CHECKS SHOULD BE MADE FOR RUBS.
) NOTE
THE VIBRATION VELOCITY MUST BE MEASURED AT POINTS NEAR THE GAS TUR-
BINE BEARING CAPS.
18.3 PREPARATIONS FOR NORMAL LOAD OPERATION
18.3.1 Standby Power Requirements
Standby ac power is required to insure the immediate startup capability of particu-

lar turbine equipment and related control systems when the start signal is given.
Functions identified by asterisk are also necessary for unit protection and should
not be turned off except for maintenance work on that particular function:
1. Heating and circulating turbine lube oil at low ambient temperatures to

maintain proper oil viscosity.
*2. Control panel heating.
*3. Generator heating.
4. Lube oil pumps. Auxiliary pump should be run at periodic intervals to pre-
vent rust formation in the lube oil system.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-11

5. Where fuel heaters are furnished to heat and circulate fuel oil at low ambi-
ent temperatures to maintain proper fuel oil viscosity.
6. Compartment heating.
*7. Operation of control compartment air conditioner during periods of high
ambient temperature to maintain electrical equipment insulation within de-
sign temperature limits.
*8. Battery charging where applicable.
9. Heating diesel engine cooling water to assure quick starting capability. (Ap-
plicable to diesel engine starting only).
* If supplied.
18.4 CHECKS PRIOR TO OPERATION
The following checks are to be made before attempting to operate a new tur-
bine or an overhauled turbine. It is assumed that the turbine has been assem-
bled correctly, is in alignment and that calibration of the SPEEDTRONIC sys-
tem has been performed per the Control Specifications.
A standby inspection of the turbine should be performed with the lube oil
pump operating and emphasis on the following areas:
1. Check that all piping and turbine connections are securely fastened and
that all blinds have been removed. Most tube fittings incorporate a stop
collar which insures proper torquing of the fittings at initial fitting make
up and at reassembly.
These collars fit between the body of the fitting and the nut and contact in
tightening of the fitting. The stop collar is similar to a washer and can be
rotated freely on unassembled fittings. During initial assembly of a fitting
with a stop collar, tighten the nut until it bottoms on the collar. The fitting
has to be sufficiently tightened until the collar cannot be rotated by hand.
This is the inspection for a proper fitting assembly. For each remake of the
fitting, the nut should again be tightened until the collar cannot be rotated.
2. Inlet and exhaust plenums and associated ducting are clean and rid of all
foreign objects. All access doors are secure.
3. Where fuel, air or lube oil filters have been replaced check that all cov-
ers are intact and tight.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-12

4. Verify that the lube oil tank is within the operating level and if the tank
has been drained that it has been refilled with recommended quality and
quantity of lube oil. If lube oil flushing has been conducted verify that all
filters have been replaced and any blinds if used, removed.
5. Check operation of auxiliary and emergency equipment, such as lube oil

pumps, water pumps, fuel forwarding pumps, etc. Check for obvious
leakage, abnormal vibration (maximum 3 mils), noise of overheating.
6. Check lube oil piping for obvious leakage. Also using provided oil flow
sights, check visually that oil is flowing from the bearing drains. The
turbine should not be started unless flow is visible at each flow sight.
7. Check condition of all thermocouples and/or resistance temperature de-

tectors (RTD's) on the CRT. Reading should be approximately am-
bient temperature.
8. Check spark plugs for proper arcing
! WARNING
DO NOT TEST SPARK PLUGS WHERE EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE IS PRE-

SENT.
If the arc occurs anywhere other than directly across the gap at the tips of
the electrodes, or if by blowing on the arc it can be moved from this point,
the plug should be cleaned, the tip clearance adjusted or if necessary, re-
placed. Verify the retracting piston for free operation.
9. Devices requiring manual lubrication are to be properly serviced.
10. Determine that the cooling water system has been properly flushed
and filled with the recommended coolant.
Any fine powdery rust, which might form in the piping during short time
exposure to atmosphere, can be tolerated. If there is evidence of a scaly
rust, the cooling system should be power flushed until all scale is removed.
If necessary to use a chemical cleaner, most automobile cooling system
cleaners are acceptable and will not damage the carbon and rubber parts of
the pump mechanical seals or rubber parts in the piping.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-13

! WARNING
DO NOT CHANGE FROM ONE TYPE ANTIFREEZE TO ANOTHER, WITHOUT

FIRST FLUSHING THE COOLING SYSTEM VERY THOROUGHLY.
INHIBITORS USED MAY NOT BE COMPATIBLE AND CAN CAUSE FORMATION
OF GUMS, IN ADDITION TO DESTROYING EFFECTIVENESS AS AN INHIBI-
TOR. CONSULT THE ANTIFREEZE VENDOR FOR SPECIFIC RECOMMENDA-
TIONS.
Ensure that following the water system refill that water system piping, primar-
ily pumps and flexible couplings do not leak. It is wise not to add any corro-
sion inhibitors until after the water system is found to be leak free.
11. Turbines having a diesel engine starting means should have the engine
tested using the diesel test pushbutton in the accessory compartment.
12. The use of radio transmitting equipment in the vicinity of the control pan-
els is not recommended. Prohibiting such use will assure that no extrane-
ous signals are introduced into the control system that might influence the
normal operation of the equipment.
13. Check the Cooling and Sealing Air Piping against the assembly drawing
and piping schematic, that all orifice plates between flanges or in orifice
unions are of designated size and in designated positions.
14. At this time all annunciated ground faults should be cleared. It is recom-
mended that units not be operated when a ground fault is indicated. Imme-
diate action should be taken to locate all grounds and correct the problems.
18.5 CHECKS DURING START UP AND INITIAL OPERATION
The following is a list of important checks to be made on a new or newly over-

hauled turbine with the OPERATION SELECTOR switch in various modes.
The Control Specifications - Operating Sequences should be reviewed prior to
operating the turbine.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-14

! WARNING
WHERE AN ELECTRIC MOTOR IS USED AS THE STARTING MEANS REFER

TO THE CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS IN REGARD TO MAXIMUM OPERATING
TIME.
When a unit has been overhauled those parts or components that have been re-
moved and taken apart for inspection/repair should be critically monitored dur-
ing unit startup and operation. This inspection should include: leakage check,
vibration, unusual noise, overheating, lubrication.
Crank
1. Listen for rubbing noises in the turbine compartment and in the reduc-
tion gear compartment especially in the load tunnel area. A soundscope or
some other listening type device is suggested.
Shutdown and investigate if unusual noise occurs.
2. Check for unusual vibration.
3. Inspect for water system leakage.
Fire
1. Bleed fuel oil filters, if appropriate, then check entire fuel system and the
area immediately around the fuel nozzle for leaks. In particular check for
leaks at the following points:
Turbine Compartment
a. Fuel piping/tubing to fuel nozzle
b. Fuel check valves
c. Atomizing air manifold and associated piping (when used)
d. Gas manifold and associated piping (when used)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-15

Accessory Compartment
a. Flow divider (when used)
b. Fuel and water pumps
c. Filter covers and drains
! WARNING
ELIMINATION OF FUEL LEAKAGE IN THE TURBINE COMPARTMENT IS OF

EXTREME IMPORTANCE AS A FIRE PREVENTATIVE MEASURE.
2. Use mirrors to view the sight ports in the combustion chambers to visually
check that each chamber is fired, that the flame is steady and that the
flame zone is centered within the liner. In addition, assure that the cross fire
tube end is not glowing.
Plug and stake sight ports once satisfactory flame conditions are obtained.
3. Monitor the turbine control panel readings for unusual exhaust thermo-
couple temperature, wheel-space temperature, lube oil drain temperature,
highest to lowest exhaust temperature spreads and "hot spots" i.e. com-
bustion chamber(s) burning hotter than all the others.
4. Listen for unusual noises and rubbing.
5. Monitor for excessive vibration.
Automatic, remote
Permit the gas turbine to operate for a 30 to 60 minute period in a full speed,
no load condition. This time period allows for uniform and stabilized heating
of the parts and fluids.
Test and checks listed below are to supplement those recorded in Control
Specification - Control System Adjustments. Record all data for future com-
parison and investigation.
1. Continue monitoring for unusual rubbing noises and shutdown immediately

if noise persists.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-16

2. Monitor lube oil tank, header and bearing drain temperatures continually
during the heating period. Refer to the Schematic Piping Diagram -
Summary Sheets for temperature guidelines. Adjust VTRs if required.
3. At this time a thorough vibration check is recommended, using vibra-

tion test equipment such as IRD equipment (IRD Mechanalysis, Inc.) or
equivalent with filtered or unfiltered readings.
It is suggested that horizontal, vertical and axial data be recorded for the:
accessory gear (when used) forward and aft sides
all accessible bearing covers on the turbine
turbine forward compressor casing
turbine support legs
reduction gear (when used) forward and aft sides, gear and pinion bearing
covers on the load equipment
4. Check and record wheelspace, exhaust and control thermocouples for proper
indication on the CRT.
5. Flame detector operation should be tested per the Control Specification -

Control System Adjustments.
6. Utilize all planned shutdowns in testing the Electronic and Mechanical

Overspeed Trip System per the Control Specifications - Control System
Adjustments. Refer to Special Operations section of this text.
7. Monitor CRT display data for proper operation.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 18-17

Equipment Storage Section 19
EQUIPMENT STORAGE
CONTENTS SECT
EQUIPMENTS ARRIVING AT SITE 19.1
STORAGE 19.2
GAS TURBINE AND ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT PRESERVATION 19.3
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

19. EQUIPMENT STORAGE
19.1 EQUIPMENTS ARRIVING AT SITE
1) Verify the number and dimension of the arriving equipments and check the
preservation conditions.
2) Check for any damages or defects, and in positive case notify the Site Re-
sponsible. Take a picture of everything damaged.
3) Put the damaged material in a separate place.
4) Store the material in Warehouse and record the location.
5) Turbocompressor package skids normally are discharged from the trans-

port means and immediately installed on proper foundations completed
with the required shim packs.
19.2 STORAGE
All material arriving at site will be stored in right condition and in appropriate
and codified place.
The heavy equipments installed directly in the final location will be protected
by the adverse conditions using suitable coverings.
If the storage time is short it is advisable to keep the equipments temporary

protected by the shipping packing until the beginning of erection activities.
Particularly for the turbine package, the internal parts are already protected in
factory, before shipping. in the mentioned way the mentioned units are pro-
tected for a term of six months, if the time of storage will be longer is neces-
sary to provide again to a further protection after an inspection of Nuovo Pig-
none personnel.
For turbine packaged with the enclosure installed on the base is enough to
maintain the doors closed installing inside some heater to avoid the condensa-
tion formation.
For turbine oil reservoir and internal pipes the protection is performed by oil
with an additive anti rust. Before shipping the reservoir will be filled by an
adequate quantity of oil + additive.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 19-1

The control and electrical boards will be stored in a clean, close and, if possi-
ble, air conditioned ambient, to prevent condensation that may damage the
electronic components and circuits. if not possible the boards will be protected
by a breathable covers.
Piping may be stored externally without specific protection for a period of six
months; if the storage time is longer it. They must be stored under a shed. The
piping will be normally shipped with the external surface painted and plugged
at the extremities.
19.3 GAS TURBINE AND ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT PRESERVATION
Please refer to relevant document GEK 28156 included in appendix

“Reference Publications”.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 19-2

Safety Instructions Section 20
20. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Please refer to the following turbogenerator safety instructions
SOM 6607109/4
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 20-1

Control System Functional Description Section 21
21. CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (SOM 5461188)

(REFER TO "REFERENCE DRAWING" VOLUME)
21.1 ANNUNCIATOR TROUBLESHOOTING CHART (GEK 107359)

(REFER TO "UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM" VOLUME)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 21-1

International Conversion Tables Section 22
22. INTERNATIONAL CONVERSION TABLES
Category To convert from To Multiply by +

2 2
ACCELERATION Ft/sec ...................................... meter/sec ........................... 3.048 E-01
In/sec2 ...................................... meterlsec2 ........................... 2.540 E-02
AREA Ft2 ............................................ meter2 .................................. 9.290 E-02
In2 ............................................ meter2 .................................. 6.452 E-04
TORQUE Dyne cm................................... newton meter....................... 1.000 E-07
kiIogram-force-meter................ newton meter....................... 9.807 E+00
Ib-force inch ............................. newton meter....................... 1.130 E-01
Ibf foot...................................... newton meter....................... 1.356 E+00
ozf-foot..................................... newton meter....................... 7.062 E-03
TORQUE/LENGTH Ibf ft/in......................................newton m/m......................... 5.338 E+01
Ibf in/in .....................................newton m/m......................... 4.448 E+00
ELECTRICITY amp hr...................................... coulomb............................... 3.600 E+03
and faraday (chem)......................... coulomb............................... 9.650 E+04
MAGNETISM gauss ....................................... tesla..................................... 1.000 E-04
gilbert ....................................... amp-turn.............................. 7.958 E-01
maxwell.................................... weber................................... 1.000 E-08
oersted..................................... amp/meter ........................... 7.958 E+01
unit pole ................................... weber...................................1.257 E-07
ENERGY Btu*.......................................... joule..................................... 1.054 E+03
(Includes Work) ft Ib-force.................................. joule.....................................1.356 E+00
kilowatt hr................................. joule.....................................3.600 E+06
watt sec.................................... joule..................................... 1.000 E+00
ft poundal ................................. joule.....................................4.214 E-02
FORCE kg-force.................................... newton................................. 9.807 E+00
oz-force.................................... newton................................. 2.780 E-01
Ib-force..................................... newton................................. 4.448 E+00
poundal .................................... newton................................. 1.383 E-01
FORCE/LENGTH Ib-force/in................................. newton/meter....................... 1.751 E+02
Ib-force/ft.................................. newton/meter....................... 1.459 E+01
HEAT Btu* in/sec ft2 deg F ................. watt/meter K ........................ 5.189 E+02
Btu* in/hr ft2 deg F.................... water/meter K ...................... 1.441 E-01
Btu* /ft2........................................................joule/meter2 ...................................... 1.135 E+04
Btu* /hr ft2 deg E ...................... joule/kg K ............................ 5.674 E-00
Btu*/lbm deg F ......................... joule/kg K ............................ 4.184 E+03
Btu*/sec ft2 deg F ..................... watt/meter2 K ....................... 2.043 E+04
cal/cm2 ........................................................joule/meter2 ...................................... 4.184 E+04
cal/cm2 sec............................... watt/meter2........................................ 4.184 E+04
cal/cm sec deg C ..................... watt/meter K ........................ 4.184 E+02
cal*/g........................................ joule/kg................................ 4.184 E+03
cal*/g deg C ............................. joule/kg K ............................ 4.184 E+03
LENGTH foot........................................... meter ................................... 3.048 E-01
inch .......................................... meter ................................... 2.540 E-02
foot........................................... millimeter (mm).................... 3.048 E÷02
inch .......................................... millimeter (mm).................... 25.40 E+00
+E Indicates the power of 10 by which the number must be multiplied, i.e., 4.047E+03 = 4.047 x 10³.
*Thermochemical
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 22-1

International Conversion Tables Section 22
Category To convert from To Multiply by +

MASS oz mass (av) ............................ kilogram...............................2.835 E-02
Ib-mass (av)............................. kilogram...............................4.536 E-01
ton (2000 Ibm) ......................... kilogram............................... 9.072 E+02
3 3
MASSNOLUME Ibm/ft ...................................... kilogram/meter ................... 1.602 E+01
(Includes Density) Ibm/in ...................................... kìlogram/meter3 ................... 2.768 E+04
3
oz-mass (av)/in3 ....................... kilogram/meter3 ................... 1.730 E+03

lb-mass (av)/gal ....................... kilogram/meter3 ................... 1.198 E+02
g/cm3........................................ kilogram/meter3 ................... 1.000 E+03
POWER Btu*/sec ................................... watt...................................... 1.054 E+03
Btu*/min ................................... watt...................................... 1.757 E+01
Btu*/hr...................................... watt...................................... 2.929 E-01
CaI*/sec ................................... watt...................................... 4.184 E+00
CaI*/min ................................... watt...................................... 6.973 E-02
ft lb force/hr.............................. watt...................................... 3.766 E-04
ft Ib force/min ........................... watt......................................2.260 E-02
ft Ib force/sec ........................... watt...................................... 1.356 E+00
hp (elec)................................... watt...................................... 7.460 E+02
PRESSURE atm (760 Torr).......................... pascal.................................. 1.013 E+05
(Force/Area) bar ...........................................pascal..................................1.000 E+05
dyne/cm2 .................................. pascal..................................1.000 E-01
gram (force)/cm2 ...................... pascal..................................9.807 E+01
in of Hg (60 F).......................... pascal..................................3.377 E+03
in of water (60 F)...................... pascal..................................2.488 E+02
Ib-force/ft2 ................................ pascal..................................4.788 E+01
Ibf/ft2 ........................................ kg/m2 ................................... 4.882 E+00
lbf/in2 (psi)................................pascal..................................6.895 E+03
lbf/in2 ........................................ kg/cm2 ................................. 7.037 E-02
Torr (mm Hg, 0 C).................... pascal.................................. 1.333 E+02
TEMPERATURE degree Celsius (°C).................. degree Kelvin (K)................. TK = tC + 273.15
degree Farenheit (°F)............... degree Celsius .................... tC = (tF - 32)/1.8
degree Celsius ......................... degree Farenheit ................. tF = (tc 1.8)+32
VELOCITY ft/hr .......................................... meter/sec ............................ 8.467 E-05
(lncludes Speed) ft/min ........................................ meter/sec ............................ 5.080 E-03
ft/sec ........................................ meter/sec ............................3.048 E-01
in/sec ....................................... meter/sec ............................2.540 E-02
VISCOSITY ft2/sec....................................... meter2/sec ........................... 9.290 E-02
lbm/ft sec .................................pascal-sec ........................... 1.488 E+00
lbf sec/ft2 .................................. pascal-sec ...........................4.788 E+01
3 3
VOLUME ft ............................................. meter .................................. 2.832 E-02
(lncludes Capacity) gallon (US)............................... meter3 .................................. 3.785 E-03
inch3 ......................................... meter3 .................................. 1.639 E-05
liter ...........................................meter3 .................................. 1.000 E-03
oz (US fluid) ............................. meter3 .................................. 2.957 E-05
3 3
VOLUME ft /min....................................... meter /sec ........................... 4.719 E-04
(lncludes Capacity) ft3/sec....................................... meter3/sec ........................... 2.832 E-02
in3/min...................................... meter3/sec ........................... 2.731 E-07
gal/min ..................................... meter3/sec ........................... 6.309 E-05
*Thermochemical
+E Indicates the power of 10 by which the number must be multiplied, i.e., 4.047E+03 = 4.047 x 10³.
*Thermochemical
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 22-2

Annunciator Troubleshooting Chart Section 23
23. STANDARD FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTING PHILOSOPHY

(GEK 107551)
Please refer to relevant document GEK 107551 included in Appendix

“REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS”.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 23-1

g GE Oil & Gas Volume II Nuovo Pignone
N.P. Job: 170.5713÷15
INDEX
CONTENTS SECT./PAR.
INTRODUCTION 1
General 1.1
STANDARD PRACTICES 2
General 2.1
MAINTENANCE CRITERIA 3
Maintenance criteria 3.1

Maintenance planning 3.2
Construction features and maintenance flexibility 3.4
Standard maintenance schedule 3.5
Calculation examples 3.6
Maintenance inspections 3.7
Spare parts planning 3.8
SCHEDULE TURBINE MAINTENANCE 4
Running Inspection 4.1

Housekeeping 4.2
Data recording 4.3
Special Inspections 4.4
Inspection Procedure 4.5
COMBUSTION INSPECTION 5
Disassembly 5.1
Inspection Procedure 5.2
Reassembly 5.3
HOT GAS PATH INSPCTION 6
Disassembly 6.1
Inspection 6.2
Reassembly 6.3
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-2

CONTENTS SECT./PAR.
MAJOR INSPECTION 7
In-service turbine wheel inspection 7.1

Disassembly 7.2
Reassembly 7.3
AUXILIARY & CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 8
General 8.1
Periodic inspection schedule 8.2
Inspection and maintenance procedures 8.3
TECHNICAL INFORMATION LETTER 9
Variable Inlet Guide Vane (Inner Bushing Inspection) TIL 1068-2 9.1
Installation of Combustion System Gaskets TIL 1069-3 9.2
Repair Criteria for all Gas Turbine Cast Segmented Turbine TIL 1108-3 9.3
Nozzle
Variable Inlet Guide Vane Inspection Thrust Washer Corrosion TIL 1132-2 9.4
Off-Line Compressor Wash Effluent TIL 1137-3 9.5
Cold-Weather on-line Compressor Wash TIL 1153-3 9.6
Precaution for Working in or near the Turbine Compartment or TIL 1159-2 9.7
Fuel Handling System of an Operating Gas Turbine
Off-line Compressor Water Washing Precautions TIL 1179-2 9.8
Procedure for Removal or Replacement of Shrouded Buckets TIL 1215-3 9.9
9th Stage Stator Casing Hook Fit (Extraction Slot) Cracking TIL 1304-3 9.10
PRESERVATION OF GAS TURBINE 10
PRESERVATION OF THE GAS TURBINE FOR SHIPMENT 10.1
PRESERVATION OF THE GAS TURBINE AND AUXILIARY 10.2

EQUIPMENT AFTER SHIPMENT
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-3

CONTENTS SECT./PAR.
LUBE OIL SYSTEM 11
ENVIROMENTAL IMPACT 11.1
DISMISSION 11.2
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-3

Section 1
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 1.1
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

Section 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL
Operation of the combustion gas turbine, as of any rotating power equip-

ment, must include a planned program of periodic inspection, with accom-
panying repair and replacement of parts as necessary, to ensure the maxi-
mum availability and reliability of the unit.
The object of this section is defined as follows:
1. To aid the user in becoming familiar with the unit by separating the in-
spections according to specific systems and, where appropriate, describ-
ing briefly the reason for the inspection and the action to be taken.
2. To identify those components and parts that should be periodically exam-

ined between the initial start up tests and the designated inspection.
3. Inspection intervals herein are based on engineering judgment and ex-

perience gained with gas turbine units. The actual time interval estab-
lished for any particular gas turbine should be based on the user's operat-
ing experience and on ambient conditions, such as humidity, dust, and
corrosive atmosphere.
Prior to scheduled inspections or taking operating data, clean the compressor

cleaning procedure in the Standard Practices, section 2 of this maintenance
instruction. Before and after any inspection a complete set of operating data
including vibration readings should be taken and recorded for reference.
A record of the inspections made and the maintenance work performed will
be most valuable in helping to establish a good maintenance program for the
gas turbine unit(s). It is expected that the maintenance program will start
with minor work, and increase in magnitude over a period of time to a major
overhaul, and then repeat the cycle. The performance of inspections can be
optimized to reduce unit outage time and maintenance cost for a particular
mode of operation, and still maintain maximum availability and reliability of
the unit.
011-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

Standard Practices Section 2
STANDARD PRACTICES
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 2.1
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

2. STANDARD PRACTICES
2.1 GENERAL
At all times when performing work on a Gas Turbine the following general
practices should be observed:
1. Keep complete records on field inspection reports
2. Remove and isolate electrical power from all systems/circuits upon

which work is to be performed
3. Provide an alternate means of fire protection when the Gas Turbine's fire
protection system has been disabled
4. Purge the turbine of potentially hazardous fumes, before opening casings,

by operating the unit at crank for 5 minutes, with all fuel shut off and
purged. Use extreme care to isolate and vent gas fuel systems
5. Clean all removed parts and fasteners and store in separate containers,
tagged to simplify reassembly.
(See Gas Turbine Cleaning in this section for cleaning methods)
6. Use penetrating oil prior to bolt removal
7. Protect all casing flanges from rust and mechanical damage after re-
moval. Grease, layout dye or commercial rust inhibitors will retard flange
rusting and plywood, masonite, or equal will prevent mechanical damage
8. Deburr mating surfaces and eliminate flange face high spots before as-
sembling any casings.
Carborundum stones and flat mill files are effective for these tasks.
9. Cover all open pipe and tubing. Do not stuff rags in pipes. Sheet metal
or plywood are effective covers for large pipes and duct tape will protect
tubing.
10. Never use pipe wrenches or pliers on tube fittings.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-1

11. Do not reuse gaskets - unless specifically instructed to do so in the pro-

cedures.
12. Match mark piping, fuel nozzles, couplings and casings to assist in
proper orientation during re-assembly.
13. Observe the following general precautions when the unit is undergoing
major inspection, maintenance checks and taking clearance readings.
A. Axial readings must be taken with the rotor positioned upstream

(toward the compressor inlet) in contact with the active face of the
thrust bearing. Any pressure applied in moving the rotor forward
should be released prior to taking rotor position or clearance meas-
urements.
B. Parallel bars and feeler stock, when used with proper attention to
detail, provide good measurements.
In order to obtain proper measurement accuracy, the total thickness
of the parallel bar and feeler stock must be measured with a mi-
crometer.
C. Snap gages may be used to obtain measurements when proper at-

tention is applied to the gage orientation. Snap gages used on
bevel surfaces will result in inaccurate readings.
D. The use of taper gages is not recommended because the pointed

end of the gage often "bottoms" on an internal curved surface be-
fore an accurate reading can be obtained. This gage should not be
used to take radial clearances.
E. Never rotate the unit rotor when the unit is undergoing inspection
and maintenance checks without adhering to the below listed pre-
cautions.
1. Thrust bearing must be fully assembled in unit.
2. Lubricant from unit lube system should be applied to jour-

nals.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-2

3. Check close clearance areas for potential interference and

foreign object damage
14. To properly tighten new Swagelock stop-collar fittings, snug the nut by
hand after cleaning threads. Then tighten the nut until the stop-collar just
stops turning.
15. Anti-Seize Compound
A. Anti-seize compound shall be applied on all rotor and stator bolting

threads, dowels, rabbets and sliding fits (internal and external).
External bolting threads for mounting associated equipment pipe

flanges, ductwork etc. Also apply on vertical flange faces of the
top halves of outer casings that may be subject to removal for
maintenance.
) NOTE
THIS USAGE MUST BE RESTRICTED TO A THIN FILM SUCH THAT THE COM-
POUND IS NOT FORCED INTO THE INNER GAS PATH. SHOULD THIS OCCUR, IT
MUST, WHERE POSSIBLE, BE CAREFULLY REMOVED.
B. Do not apply anti-seize compound to pipe threads or bolting

threads internal to oil or water tanks.
) NOTE
THIS USAGE MUST BE RESTRICTED TO A THIN FILM SUCH THAT THE COM-
POUND IS NOT FORCED INTO THE INNER GAS PATH. SHOULD THIS OCCUR, IT
MUST, WHERE POSSIBLE, CAREFULLY REMOVED.
16. Sealing Compound
A. Tefloc Sealant X9366 is to be used on all threaded connections to

cast iron castings, after control air filters and in areas over 500F.
Apply to the male threads so that the first thread is free of any com-
pound.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-3

B. Tefloc Sealant X9366 shall be used on all pipe thread joints. The
pipe thread must be clean and free of foreign material before apply-
ing Tefloc Sealant X9366 per instructions on container.
17. Joint Compound
A. Joint compound shall not be used on machined joints except as fol-

lows:
1. For compressor and turbine casings apply Perfect Seal only

on the surface of horizontal joint and only for a distance of
one (1) inch on both sides of the four (4) way joint. The Per-
fect Seal shall not be applied on the surface of the vertical
joint.
2. Instant Seal Locktite Plastic Gasket shall be used on all

bolted oil to air joints (vertical and horizontal' that are not
gasketed and on plug openings.
This includes, but is not limited to, bearing housings, con-
tinuously lubricated coupling guards and stationary oil seals.
Instant Seal Locktite Plastic Gasket shall not be used on ver-

tical joints of non-bolted stationary oil seals.
B. Joint compound shall not be used on sheet metal joints except as

follows:
1. Gasket tape used between exhaust skin, or plenum joints

shall be coated on both sides with Perfect Seal.
2. RTV-102 silicone rubber adhesive sealant shall be used be-

tween non-gasketed joints of inlet hoods or plenums. It shall
be applied as a continuous bead of minimum of .25 wide and
shall be tangent to the outboard edges of the flange bolt
holes.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-4

18. Piping Flanges
Pipe flanges must not be forced into alignment. If flanges cannot be

brought to within 1/8" of parallel by hand, the piping should be reformed
or replaced. When the flanges are parallel with a new gasket in place, in-
sert the bolts by hand. Do not pry on the flanges. Use antiseize com-
pound on the bolts. Tighten the bolts in three stages on alternately oppo-
site bolts.
19. Bolt and stud torquing
A. Before torquing, remove foreign matter from bolt, nut and bolting
surface
B. Apply anti-seize compound to bolt and nut threads and bearing sur-
faces.
C. Tighten bolt/or nut to be sure threads are free, then back off until
free from surface. Snug against surface and torque to values shown
in Table 2-1.
D. When using impact wrenches, torque to values in Table 2-1.
20. Classification of Joints
A. All classes of joints (oil tight, air tight and for frame rigidity) with
metal to metal contact shall have their bolt or stud elongation de-
termined by micrometer measurements, torque wrench or by head
rotation. See Table 2-1.
B. All gasket joints shall have their bolt and stud elongation deter-
mined by micrometer measurements or torque wrench. See Tables
2-1.
C. To insure air tight joints there must be a 50% contact over the criti-
cal area. Burrs and high sposts must be removed before assembly.
D. To insure an oil tight joint, a line of continuous contact, with 0.25

inch minimum width, must be maintained, in addition to 50% con-
tact over the critical area. The 50% contact must be equally dis-
tributed over the critical area. See Table 2-1.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-5

TABLE 2.1
TORQUE VALUES
Diameter threads Material ASTM A437B4B Material ASTM A196B16
(kg m) (kg m)
# 8 - 32 0.150 ÷ 0.170 0.140 ÷ 0.150
# 10 - 32 0.195 ÷ 0.220 0.170 ÷ 0.195
1/4 - 20 0.700 ÷ 0.830 0.550 ÷ 0.700
3/8 - 16 2.35 ÷ 2.65 1.90 ÷ 2.15
1/2 - 13 5.65 ÷ 6.35 4.50 ÷ 5.15
5/8 - 11 9.40 ÷ 10.50 8.30 ÷ 9.40
3/4 - 10 20.25 ÷ 22.80 17.85 ÷ 20.40
7/8 - 9 27.50 ÷ 30.50 23.50 ÷ 27.50
1-8 48.00 ÷ 54.50 41.50 ÷ 48.00
1 1/4 - 8 89.50 ÷ 101.00 78.00 ÷ 89.50
1 1/2 - 8 162 ÷ 182 142 ÷ 162
1 3/4 - 8 231 ÷ 400
2-8 351 ÷ 400
2 1/4 - 8 525 ÷ 576
2 1/2 - 8 700 ÷ 798
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-6

Maintenance Criteria Section 3
MAINTENANCE CRITERIA
CONTENTS SECT
MAINTENANCE CRITERIA 3.1
MAINTENANCE PLANNING 3.2
CONSTRUCTION FEATURES AND MAINTENANCE FLEXIBILITY 3.4
STANDARD MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 3.5
CALCULATION EXAMPLES 3.6
MAINTENANCE INSPECTIONS 3.7
SPARE PARTS PLANNING 3.8
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

3.1 MAINTENANCE CRITERIA
Maintenance costs and equipment’s availability are two of the most important pa-
rameters for the productivity and profit of a production Plant.
Gas turbine influence on the above parameters is very significant, and therefore it is
necessary to issue a maintenance program based on the following milestones:
Plant production specific characteristics and priorities
Average personnel trade skill
Nuovo Pignone maintenance recommendations, based on:
- Frequency and type of scheduled inspections
- Spare parts planning
- Control of gas turbine operation and life affecting factors
The Plant production characteristics and priorities vary in function of the process
and installation features. A compromise between gas turbine maintenance and pro-
duction requirements should be analysed case by case.
Average personnel trade skill is also varying from site to site. Customer should find
the optimum compromise between in house manpower and NUOVO PIGNONE’s
specialist’s intervention, depending on the level of maintenance action to be carried
out.
The maintenance recommendations as per point 3 above will be described in the

following paragraphs, while recommended specific and detailed maintenance ac-
tivities are described in the specific section of the Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-1

3.2 MAINTENANCE PLANNING
The major scope of maintenance planning is to reduce the Plant out of production
time to the minimum.
In order to issue the optimum planning, the following factors should be taken in to
consideration:
Peculiar characteristics of the production Plant
Ambient conditions
Type of service (continuous, intermittent, peak load, etc.)
Type of fuel
Loss of production costs due to the turbine shutdown time for inspec-
tion/overhauling
Manpower local capabilities
Nuovo Pignone maintenance recommendations
The critical gas turbine parts that require particular care are hot gas path parts
(combustion, stator and rotor blades, etc.).
Auxiliaries maintenance planning is established in conjunction with gas turbine en-

gine scheduling and procedures requirements.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-2

3.3 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES AND MAINTENANCE FLEXIBILITY
MS5001 gas turbine is designed and manufactured to withstand severe duty and to
be maintained on site, with off-site specialised Service Shops repair required only
on some of the hot gas path components.
To facilitate the above task, the following major construction features are designed:
Horizontally split casings for easy access to the internal parts.
Stator blades can be slid circumferentially with upper half casings removed, with-
out rotor removal.
All turbine rotor blades are normally moment-weighed and distributed circumferen-
tially on the turbine wheel by computer charting program, so that no site balance is
generally required in case of blade substitution.
Borescope inspection capability.
The following sketch shows a schematic picture of how it is possible to access the
inside hot gas parts while gas turbine is in stand-by condition, without opening up-
per casings.
BORESCOPE
BORESCOPE ACCESS PORT BORESCOPE ACCESS PORT
Fig. M.C. 1 Borescope inspection schematic view
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-3

The access is possible through holes located in the inspection stations. Figure 8.1
shows an example of inspection ports located near the first stage stator and rotor
blades.
The borescope inspection allows the operator to have a good overview of the blade
status and a good feedback to decide to anticipate or to delay a scheduled overhaul.
Detailed location of borescope inspection openings is given in the relevant Section

of the operating and instruction manual.
After borescope inspection, the relevant port plugs must be reassembled and gas
turbine can be started-up again.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-4

3.4 MAJOR FACTORS INFLUENCING MAINTENANCE AND EQUIPMENT

LIFE
The life of gas turbine hot gas path components depends from the operating condi-
tions.
Nuovo Pignone has defined a reference optimum gas turbine operating conditions,
for which the life of hot gas path components is maximum.
Under these reference conditions the recommended intervals between maintenance

inspection and/or overhaul are also the maximum.
These reference conditions are:
Operation with natural gas fuel
Continuous operation at base load
No steam no water injection
Under the above condition, the parts life is theoretically 100% of the design and the
recommended maintenance inspection intervals are equal to the maximum.
For different operating conditions, higher maintenance factors must be applied.

which correspond to reduced intervals between inspections and overhauling.
For instance, a maintenance factor equal to 2 means that the scheduled inspection
or overhaul should be carried out two times more frequently than the standard in-
tervals obtained with the above reference operating condition, and so on.
The following paragraphs will describe the criteria used to define the maintenance
factors, necessary to determine the interval between inspection and to issue the
relevant maintenance planning for the MS5001 gas turbine for operating conditions
equal or different from the reference ones.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-5

3.4.1 Hours and starts evaluating methods
Gas turbine components are subjected to the following two categories of

stresses, which determine the component life and affect maintenance factor
value:
Continuous duty
Cyclic duty
The following table shows the typical stresses of the two categories:
TABLE M.C.1 POTENTIAL FAILURES MODES FOR HOT GAS

PATH COMPONENTS
Continuous duty Cyclic duty

Rupture Thermal/mechanical fatigue
Creep LCF (Low Cycle Fatigue)
HCF (High Cycle Fatigue) Wear
Corrosion FOD
Oxidation
Erosion
Wear/rubs
FOD
Interactions of these two mechanisms have been considered in the design

criteria, but considering the substantial difference in type of stresses genera-
tion, gas turbine maintenance requirements are based on independent counts
of starts and hours.
The dominant criterion between operating hours and starts, whichever is

more limiting, is taken into account to establish the relevant Maintenance
for the case.
A graphical display of this criterion is shown in figure M.C. 2. In this figure,

the inspection interval recommendations are defined by the rectangle estab-
lished by the starts and hours criteria. The figure represents the rectangle in-
dicating the inspection intervals required for combustion inspection. The
same criteria are used, with different intervals, for major inspection.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-6

800
Starts/year b
400
c
250
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Operating hours (thousands)
Fig. M.C.2 Maintenance interval criterion
Figure M.C.2 refers to the hot gas path inspection criteria rectangle, for
which, for continuous service application, under the above mentioned refer-
ence optimum gas turbine operating conditions, the recommended inspec-
tion interval is 24000 operating hours, while for an intermittent service with
high start-up number, the recommended inspection interval is 1200 starts.
Line b of Figure M.C.2 represents an example of a unit running for 4000

hours/year, with 400 starts/year. The line intersects the upper side of the
rectangle, which means that the inspection interval should be made on the
basis of the starts criterion, i.e. every 800 starts.
Line c of Figure M.C.2 represents an example of a unit running for 8000

hours/year, with 250 starts/year. The line intersects the right side of the rec-
tangle, which means that the inspection should be made on the basis of the
operating hours criterion, i.e. every 12000 operating hours.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-7

3.4.2 Maintenance factors
At the beginning of Chapter 4, the reference optimum conditions under

which the hot parts life is maximum have been defined. Under these condi-
tions, the relevant inspection intervals are maximum for operating hour
based and for n° of starts based criteria.
This paragraph describes the influence of a number of operating factors dif-
ferent from the reference ones on the inspection intervals requirements and
the way to take them into account.
In fact, for operating conditions different from the reference optimum,

higher maintenance factors must be applied. which correspond to reduced
intervals between inspections and overhauling.
For instance, an hours factor equal to 1,5 means that the scheduled inspec-
tion or overhaul should be carried out two times more frequently (in terms
of operating hours) while a starts factor equal to 2, means that the scheduled
inspection or overhaul should be carried out two times more frequently (in
terms of n° of starts) than the standard intervals relevant to the reference
conditions indicated in the top of the above table.
As a consequence, the rectangle sides of figure M.C.2 relevant to operating

hours and n° of starts will be reduced accordingly (see Figure M.C.3)
800
Starts Factor =2
Starts/year
400
Hours Factor= 1,5
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Fig. M.C.3 Effect of maintenance factors on the rectangle crite-

rion
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-8

Of course, the same rule applies for the rectangle relevant to the major in-
spection.
The following paragraphs will describe the criteria used to define the main-
tenance factors, called currently M.F., necessary to determine the interval
between inspections and to issue the relevant maintenance planning.
3.4.2.1 Hours factors
Liquid fuel
Liquid fuel combustion generally releases a higher amount of radiant

energy if compared with natural gas fuel, which results in a subse-
quent reduction of combustion hardware life. Furthermore possible
presence of traces of corrosive elements such as sodium, potassium,
vanadium and lead can accelerate hot corrosion phenomena on tur-
bine buckets and nozzles.
• Affected components: combustion and hot gas path parts.

Maint. Factor
Residual
Distillates
Heavy Light Natural gas
Fuel - % of hydrogen by weight in hydrocarbons
For current application the following maintenance factors should be

considered:
Natural gas M.F. = 1
Distillate #2 M.F. = 1.5
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-9

Gas fuel containing hydrogen
Hydrogen is very “reactive” fuel; therefore higher thermal effects

may be expected on fuel nozzles and combustion liners (note: start-
up with gas containing high amount of hydrogen is not allowed for
safety reasons therefore the start-up is performed with a different
fuel).
Affected components: combustion parts
Maintenance factor: 1,2
Inlet air
Airborne contaminant such as dust, salt and oil mist can cause: ero-
sion, corrosion and fouling in compressor blades. Sodium salt pre-
sent in marine environment may contribute to hot gas path parts cor-
rosion. Effects of contaminants contained in fuel are added to those
of inlet air contaminants.
In order to avoid the above problem a suitable air filtering system

must be installed and properly maintained.
Operating load
In general output power is related to firing temperature and therefore

influences hot parts life. Creep phenomena are not linear therefore
peak load operation will reduce greatly buckets life while reduced
load operation will have little beneficial effect.
It must be also considered that in heat recovery applications or re-

generative units, the control is made in such way to maintain maxi-
mum exhaust temperature at partial load also.
For these units firing temperature do not decrease significantly until

load is reduced below approximately 80% of rated power.
• Maintenance Factor for peak load operation = 6. (See figure

M.C.4)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-10

MAINT. FACTOR
PEAK LOAD
FIRING TEMPERATURE VARIATION WITH INCREASING LOAD
Fig. M.C.4 Maintenance factor versus load
Steam injection
Steam increases heat transfer coefficients of hot gas with subsequent

increase of hot parts metal temperatures.
Impact on parts life is related to the type of exhaust temperature con-

trol curve adopted on the gas turbine. Using the standard control
curve (the same of non steam injection application) due to the modi-
fied hot gas properties, the firing temperature will result lower.
This counters the effect of the higher heat transfer on parts life. Such
way to control the machine is called dry control and is the practice
normally used.
Control curve can be raised to maintain the firing temperature con-

stant (wet control); this results in additional unit output but decreases
parts life.
Maintenance factor may be calculated with the following procedure:
M.F. = K + M x I
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-11

Where:
I = Percent steam injection referenced to the inlet air flow
M=0 K=1 for dry control and I < 2,2%
M = 0,18 K = 0,6 for dry control and I > 2,2%
Affected components: combustion and hot gas path parts
Water injection
Water injection impacts turbine blades and nozzles life with the
same mechanism of the steam injection. It may also increase com-
bustion pulsation level.
• Maintenance Factor = TBD.
3.4.2.2 Starts factors
Liquid fuel
Start up with liquid fuel normally causes higher thermal effects if

compared to natural gas fuel.
• Maintenance Factor for start up with distillate #2 = 1.5
Start up sequence
Light-off, acceleration, loading all produces hot gas temperature

changes with subsequent transient thermal mechanical fatigue in
combustion parts, hot gas path parts and also in the rotor structural
components (turbine wheels, spacers, etc.).
The standard start-up and loading sequence is designed to minimize

this effect. Faster sequences greatly reduce parts life.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-12

Non standard start-up and loading conditions are: emergency

start-up where the unit is brought from standstill to full load
with a sequence faster than the standard one and fast loading
start-up where unit is brought from standstill to full speed no
load with the normal sequence and then submitted to fast load.
• Affected components: combustion, hot gas path parts and rotor

structural components (i.e. affects major inspection inter-
val/rotor life as well).
• Maintenance Factor for emergency start up = 20
• Maintenance Factor for fast loading start up = 2
) NOTE
UNFIRED START-UP IS NOT CONSIDERED.

Sudden load changes
Sudden changes in load (i.e. step loading and load rejection) produce
thermal gradients and therefore affect parts life

Each load step and each load rejection must be converted in an

equivalent number of start stop/cycles as shown by the following fig-
ures.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-13

LOAD STEP
5
Maint. Factor
0 20 40 60 80 100
% Load
Emergency shut down
Emergency shut downs (trip from load) impact parts life and mainte-
nance intervals. This relates to the increased strain range that is as-
sociated to these events if compared to normal shut down sequence
in which firing temperature is gradually decreased.

Each emergency shut-

8
down must be converted
in an equivalent num-
Maint. Factor
6 ber of start/stop cycles

as shown by the follow-
ing figure
4
2
) NOTE
FOR TRIPS DURING

START-UP ACCEL-
0 20 40 60 80 100 ERATION M.F. =2
% Load
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-14

3.5 STANDARD MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
BORESCOPE INSPECTION
ANNUALLY OR AT COMBUSTION INSPECTION WHICHEVER COMES FIRST
The intervals listed hereafter for combustion, hot gas path parts and major inspec-
tions are referred to operation with: natural gas fuel, normal start/stop and load-
ing/unloading sequence. Combustion inspection intervals are valid for non-DLN
units.
COMBUSTION INSPECTION
FIRED HOURS
12000*
STARTS 800
H.G.P. INSPECTION
FIRED HOURS Eliminated**
24000**
STARTS 1200
MAJOR INSPECTION
FIRED HOURS 48000
STARTS 2400
* Liners inspection
** Two combustion intervals for unit operated with heavy or residual fuels.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-15

To take into account the actual operating conditions, the following maintenance
factors must be considered (whichever applicable).
Start factors
• Start up with liquid fuel
• Start up sequence
• Sudden load changes
• Emergency shut downs
Hour’s factors
• Fuel
• Steam injection
• Water injection
• Operating load
To evaluate maintenance requirements apply all start factors to the above baseline
start intervals and all hours’ factors to the baseline hour’s intervals.
Whichever start or hours limit is first reached determines the maintenance interval.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-16

3.6 CALCULATION EXAMPLES
The following calculation will show how the operator can determine the mainte-
nance factor to be applied for specific operating application. The above table will
be used for determining the applicable factor for both operating hours and n° of
starts criteria.
Plant operating data
Natural gas operation for 6000 hours/year
Distillate operation for 1000 hours/year
Steam injection with dry control and I = 2,5 %
100 normal starts/year
10 starts after trip from 100% of the load
Using the rules described in CHAPT. 4, the relevant maintenance factors MFhours to
be applied for the criterion of hours based intervals are the following:
M.F. for natural gas operation hours = 1
M.F. for distillate operation hours = 1,5
M.F. for above steam injection rate and control = 0,6 + 0,18 x 2,5 = 1,05
And the relevant resultant Maintenance Factor to obtain the hour based inspection
intervals becomes:
MFhours =1,05 x [(6000 x 1) + (1000 x 1,5)] / (6000 + 1000) = 1,125
Therefore, for example, the major overhaul should be carried out every
48000/1,125 = 42666 hours, that means every 42666/(6000+1000) = ~ 6 years.
The same considerations could be done for combustion inspection.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-17

Looking to the operating data, however, the high number of starts per year should
suggest the operator to check whether the criterion of number of starts based inter-
vals is more severe. The relevant Mfstart maintenance factor will be applied to cor-
rect the standard starts intervals shown in the table, as follows:
MFstart = [100 + 8 x (10) ] / (100 + 10) = 1,64
Therefore, for example, the above major overhaul should be carried out, according
this criterion, every 2400/1,64 ∼ 1460 starts, that means every 1460/(100+10) =13,3
years.
All the above means that the criterion of the operating hours interval is more severe
than the one based on the number of starts, so that the recommended maintenance
schedule is as follows:
Combustion inspection interval = 12000/1,125 = 10670 operating hours
Combustion & trans. piece interval = 24000/1,125= 21330 operating hours
Major inspection interval = 48000/1,125 = 42666 operating hours
The same result is obtained using the criterion of the rectangle, by reducing the top
horizontal side by the hour’s factor (1,125) and the right vertical side by the starts
factor (1,64). The rectangle side dimensions becomes (for the same major inspec-
tion example as above):
Hours side: 48000/1,125= 42666 operating hours
Starts side: 2400/1,64 = 1460 starts
Total operating hours /year (6000 + 1000) = 7000
Total starts/year (100 + 10) = 110
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-18

1460
Starts/year
110
0 7 10 20 30 42666

Fig. M.C.5
The line c of figure M.C.5 intersects the right side of the rectangle, which confirms
that the operating hours based limiting criterion is the more severe and should be
applied.
Of course, in case of Plant operation with very high number of starts, for which the
line would intersects the top side of the rectangle, the starts interval criterion in-
stead of operating hours criterion would apply for maintenance planning schedule.
As an additional investigation, in all cases, the borescope inspection carried out in

case of unscheduled shut-downs can give other interesting information regarding
the possibility to delay a scheduled inspection or to anticipate it, depending on the
status of the hot gas path components.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-19

3.7 MAINTENANCE INSPECTIONS
As anticipated in the previous paragraphs, gas turbine system critical parts need to
be inspected to prevent future large damages and to allow operation profit.
To issue a consistent and reliable maintenance program, the following three types
of inspections are recommended:
• Stand-by inspections
• Running inspections
• Shutdown inspections
3.7.1 Stand-by inspections
They are required when the engine is not in operation. During this period of
time, the following items should be checked:
Lube oil system components
Fuel system components
Intake system and filters
Instrumentation settings and repairs/substitutions
Emergency batteries status
Fluids levels (oils, water, etc.)
Other auxiliaries in general
Borescope inspection for all the internal parts
In case of long period stand-by, some periodic start up attempt should be

done, to be sure that the unit can start without problems when required.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-20

3.7.2 Running inspections
The running inspections are performed during start-up and while the unit is
operating.
This inspection indicates the general condition of the gas turbine unit and its
associated equipment.
The registrations of the data and operating parameters obtained can be used
to further plan the maintenance of the unit.
During unit running, the records of the most important functional parame-
ters will give a good operation trend of the system.
This will help eventual future troubleshooting activities.
The following table shows a typical checklist of the major gas turbine pa-
rameters recorded. In addition, the control panel systems include the neces-
sary software to record the history of some of the most critical gas turbine
parameters.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-21

TABLE M.C.3 RUNNING INSPECTION TYPICAL PARAMETERS
Parameter Unit
Speed RPM
Load KW
N° of start-up
N° of operating hours
Ambient pressure mbar
Temperatures °C
Ambient °C
Axial compressor discharge °C
Turbine exhaust (average) °C
Turbine exhaust (each thermocouple) °C
Lube oil header °C
Lube oil tank °C
Lube oil discharge from bearings °C
Bearings metal temperature °C
Pressures bar(g)
Axial compressor discharge bar(g)
Lube oil pumps delivery bar(g)
Control oil pumps delivery bar(g)
Lube oil header bar(g)
Cooling water bar(g)
Fuel bar(g)
Filters media ∆p (bar(g))
Vibrations mm/sec. - µm.
Start-up time Minutes
Coast down time Minutes
From the combination of some of the above parameters it is possible to for-

mulate a status of gas turbine engine performance and reliability.
For example, by checking the variation of the load versus exhaust tempera-
ture and compressor discharge pressure under the same conditions recorded
previously, the operator is able to determine a possible turbine performances
decrease, and the necessity to carry out a compressor washing.
Similarly, if the shaft vibration level increases, the operator will check im-
mediately whether the relevant spare bearing is available in the plant store
and, if necessary, to buy it immediately in order to save time in case of fu-
ture substitution for failure.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-22

The same consideration should be done in case of bearing temperature in-

crease.
All the up to dated control systems can be equipped with an optional trend
monitoring computer aided system that automatically takes into account the
trending functions for all the critical parameters and gives the necessary
suggestions and corrective actions to be undertaken.
The system is based on the continuous comparison between the “new and
clean” engine condition and the real time engine behaviour, through specific
algorithms for each parameters combination.
3.7.3 Shut-down inspections
They are defined as :
• Combustion system inspections
• Hot gas path parts inspections (see CHAPT. 5 description for involved
hot gas parts)
• Major inspection/overhaul
Chapter 4 gives the Maintenance Factors calculation criteria and Chapter 5

gives the standard inspection time intervals in function of the operating
characteristics of the unit.
This paragraph will describe all the major activities related to the three
above inspection levels, the types of troubles that can be found and the nec-
essary repair and/or substitution activities.
3.7.3.1 Combustion inspection
The combustion inspection area is shown in figure M.C.6. During

this inspection the status of the following components should be
verified and all necessary repair/substitution is carried out :
• Fuel nozzles
• Combustion chamber components
• Transition pieces
• Spark plugs
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-23

• Flame detectors
The inspection is carried out by dismantling previously the fuel pip-

ing upstream the combustion system, and combustion chamber cov-
ers, to remove the combustors.
The inspection of fuel nozzles is necessary to clean up them from in-

ternal combustion residual carbon deposits and to repair cracks, as
well as for the combustion chamber.
Normally, cracks inspection is carried out using dye penetrant fluids

sprayed on the components surface.
Flame detectors are checked for eventual electrical damage and car-
bon deposits on the optical surface.
Fig. M.C.6 Combustion inspection
For further details of combustion inspection, see Section 5.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-24

3.7.3.2 Hot gas path parts inspection
The hot gas path parts inspections area is shown in figure M.C.7.
During this inspection the status of the following gas turbine section
components should be verified and all necessary repair/substitution
is carried out in case of natural gas or light distillate fuel operation:
• Combustion liners
• Transition pieces
Fig. M.C.7 Hot gas path parts inspection
In case of heavy or residual fuels, H.G.P inspection intervals become the same as the com-
bustion liners, as described in Chapter 5. This is caused by the more severe corrosion, oxi-
dation and thermal stress of the parts coming from the combustion of these fuels.
For further details of H.G.P. inspection, see Section 6.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-25

3.7.3.3 Major inspection
The major inspection/overhaul area is shown in figure M.C.8. Dur-

ing this inspection the status of the following components should be
verified and all necessary repair/substitution is carried out:
Fig. M.C.8 Major inspection
The scope of the major inspection consists of the overall turbounit

check, including the following:
• Combustion
• Hot gas path parts section
• Axial compressor rotor and stator parts
• Intake system
• Exhaust system
• Gearboxes
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-26

• Bearings and couplings
• Driven engine
Other specific auxiliaries of the plant (water or steam injection

equipment, etc.)
To carry out the above inspections it is necessary to fully open the

upper half of gas turbine casings and to remove rotors.
During this inspection it of a major importance to verify the status of

axial compressor fouling, to decide the future compressor on line
and off-line washing schedule, in order to optimise gas turbine per-
formances and operating costs.
For further details of major inspection, see Section 7.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-27

3.8 SPARE PARTS PLANNING
In the previous paragraphs a description of the major maintenance scopes, inspec-

tion and repair/substitution activities has been given.
However, for good maintenance planning and operating economical results it is

very important to consider the gas turbine system tear-down time required to ac-
complish all the maintenance actions.
For the above, a good spare parts planning will reduce the waiting time during the
turbounit reassembly sequence.
It is evident that, under some conditions, the turbounit out of service time would be
unacceptable, in case of some critical parts substitution requirements.
For the above, it is imperative to decide a consistent spare parts procurement pro-
gram, to have all the necessary critical parts spares available at the plant site since
the beginning of any scheduled maintenance inspection.
The spare parts availability can be obtained in two ways:
By ordering the critical parts together to the main equipment purchase order, as
suggested by the NUOVO PIGNONE’s experience, in function of the plant’s op-
eration level.
By issuing a mutual Customer -to- NUOVO PIGNONE After Sales Assistance con-
tract which includes spare parts availability in the NUOVO PIGNONE’s warehouse
at any time during the turbine operating life. This type of contracts is variable case
by case and has different levels of costs, in function of the required level of service.
The choice of the most convenient solution depends on the plant profitability calcu-
lation results, which should include the following parameters:
Daily loss of profit in case of turbounit out of operation
Similar plants feedback experience
Overall operating hours of the same gas turbine model club
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-28

3.8.1 Manpower planning and time
The determination of the manpower and the relevant times required to carry
out the three levels of inspections depend on the following assumptions:
Intervention with or without the assistance of the NUOVO PIGNONE su-

pervision
All the critical spare parts available at the plant site
Repair times are in parallel to the substitution activities
All the necessary standard and NUOVO PIGNONE’s recommended special

tooling available
Normal skill customer’s personnel
Scheduled inspection
The average crew size and the number of 8 hour shifts can vary in function
of the level of the process, and could be increased if necessary. NUOVO
PIGNONE specialists can give all the necessary assistance to optimise the
manpower activities.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-29

Scheduled Turbine Maintenance Section 4
SCHEDULED TURBINE MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS SECT
RUNNING INSPECTION 4.1
HOUSEKEEPING 4.2
DATA RECORDING 4.3
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 4.4
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 4.5
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

4. SCHEDULED TURBINE MAINTENANCE
4.1 RUNNING INSPECTIONS
Running inspections consist of observations made while a unit is in service.

The turbine should be observed on a programmed schedule which should be
established as part of the unit maintenance program consistent with the op-
erator's requirements.
4.2 HOUSEKEEPING
In addition to the detailed maintenance procedures which follow, the daily

(or short-term) observation of Gas Turbine operation and appearance must
be considered. The following checklist will provide assistance when estab-
lishing routine maintenance programs for gas turbines.
4.2.1 Control cab
! DANGER
OBSERVE ALL SAFETY NOTICES AND PRECAUTIONS WHEN OCCUPYING

THE UNIT CONTROL CAB.
1. Check the condition of turbine generator control panel and motor

control center lamps.
) NOTE
REPLACEMENT OF BULBS WHILE UNIT IS OPERATING COULD RESULT IN INAD-

VERTANT UNIT SHUTDOWN.
2. Observe that all instruments are functional and readable; clean

glass faces when dirty, and replace broken glasses.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-1

3. Periodically check the filter element in the compartment air condi-

tioner; clean it as necessary.
4. Inspect for evidence of loose or chafing wires, and schedule correc-

tive action, if required.
5. Clean the floor.
6. Note battery charger output level.
4.2.2 Turbine Compartment
! DANGER
OBSERVE ALL SAFETY NOTICES WHEN OCCUPYING THE TURBINE COM-

PARTMENT.
1. Observe both ac and dc compartment lighting systems. Replace

burned out bulbs.
2. Inspect the following items for leakage of air, exhaust, lube oil,
fuel or water.
a. Fuel oil tubing (not applicable)
b. Atomizing air piping (not applicable)
c. 4-way joints
d. Turbine legs
e. Horizontal joints
f. Vertical joints
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-2

g. Combustion chambers
h. Exhaust flex seals
3. Inspect the compartment for cleanliness. Remove any dirt, rags, or

other debris, wipe up oil, fuel and water spills.
4. Note any loose or vibrating fittings, piping or accessory compo-

nents, and schedule corrective action if required.
4.2.3 Accessory compartment
1. Observe ac and dc compartment lighting. Replace burned out

bulbs.
2. Inspect the following items for leakage
a. Fuel oil piping
b. Fuel oil filters
c. Fuel oil pump
d. Torque converter
e. Lube oil filter
f. Accessory gear box
g. Gauge panel
h. Hydraulic manifold
i. Hydraulic filters
3. Note the condition of the gauge panel; clean dirty instruments,

schedule repair of damaged gauges, check calibration if gauges do
not show reasonable values for shutdown.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-3

4. Clean the floor of dirt, water, oil and other debris. Locate source of
spills.
5. Note loose or vibrating piping conduit, or other fittings, and sched-

ule repairs if necessary.
6. Check faces of clutch for cleanliness or possible damage. Clean or

schedule maintenance as appropriate.
7. Inspect for evidence of overheating of accessory components (such

as paint discoloration), and schedule maintenance inspection or test
of suspect components.
4.2.4 Off-base systems
1. Note loose or vibrating piping, conduit, or fittings. Schedule main-

tenance action if required.
2. Clean the floors of dirt, water, fuel, or lubricating oil spills. Dis-
pose of rags and other debris.
4.2.5 General
1. Check door seals for deterioration. Schedule replacement as re-

quired.
2. Observe shutdown oil levels for the turbine, atomizing air com-
pressor, atomizing air booster compressor and turning gear. Note
discrepancies, investigate cause, and refill all components to proper
oil levels as required.
4.3 DATA RECORDING
Operating data should be recorded to permit an evaluation of equipment per-

formance and maintenance requirements. Typical data includes load, ex-
haust temperature, vibration, fuel flow and pressure, exhaust temperature
control and variation, and startup time.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-4

The vibration level of the unit should be observed and recorded. Minor
changes in vibration level will occur with changes in operating conditions.
However, major changes in the vibration level or a continuously increasing
trend to increase warrants corrective action.
The fuel system should be observed for general fuel flow versus load rela-
tionship. Fuel pressures through the system should be observed. Changes in
fuel pressure may indicate that fuel nozzle passages are plugged (dirty) or
that fuel metering elements are damaged or out of calibration.
The variation in turbine exhaust temperature should be measured. An in-

crease in temperature spread indicates combustion system deterioration or
fuel distribution problems. If this is not corrected, reduced life of down-
stream parts can be expected.
One of the most important control functions to be observed is the exhaust

temperature control system, and its backup over-temperature trip circuitry.
Routine verification of the operation and calibration of these systems will
minimize wear on the hot gas path parts.
Startup time (when the gas turbine is new) is an excellent reference to which
subsequent operating parameters can be compared and evaluated. A curve
of starting parameters of speed, fuel FSR signal, exhaust temperature, and
critical sequence benchmarks versus time from the initial start signal provide
a good indication of the accuracy of the control system, fuel system, fuel
nozzles, ignition, and combustion system. Deviations from normal condi-
tions help pinpoint impending trouble, changes in calibration, or damaged
components.
Operating data should be recorded to permit an evaluation of the equipment

performance and maintenance requirements. Data should be recorded after
the gas turbine has reached steady-state at each load condition. Steady-state
is defined as no more than a 5°F change in wheel space temperature for a 15-
minutes interval.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-5

4.4 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
4.4.1 Borescope inspections
General
The gas turbine incorporates provisions in both turbine and compres-

sor casings for visual inspection of an intermediate compressor rotor
stage or stages, first and second stage turbine buckets and nozzle par-
titions by means of the optical borescope.
These provisions, consisting of radially aligned holes through the cas-

ings and internal stationary turbine shrouds, are designed to allow the
penetration of an optical borescope into the gas or air-flow path re-
gions of a non-operating gas turbine. Optical borescopes are utilized
to provide visual inspection of the rotating and stationary parts with-
out removing the upper compressor and turbine casings.
Areas of inspection
In the hands of a qualified technician, the borescope allows rapid in-

spection of the following areas with minimum outage time, man-
power, and loss of production.
1. Turbine section
2. Axial flow compressor
3. Combustion system.
) NOTE
THE COMBUSTION SYSTEM MAY BE EXAMINED BY REMOVING THE FUEL NOZ-

ZLES TO GAIN ACCESS.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-6

Table 4-1 lists the inspection criteria for these areas of inspection.
Table 4-2 lists the access hole location and number of holes in each
location.
Figure 4-1 locates the borescope access holes for the various loca-
tions.
Equipment required
A rigid borescope with high-quality rigid lens system plus a flexible

fiber bundle to introduce light at the borescope tip from an external
light projector is the basic equipment needed for visual inspection of
the turbine and compressor. The combustion system including the
transition pieces can only be inspected using a flexible fiber-optic bor-
escope. See Figures 4-2 and 4-3.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-7

TABLE 4-1
MS5001
INSPECTION CRITERIA
ACCESS AREA INSPECT FOR
Compressor blades Foreign object damage

Dirt build up
Corrosion
Tip erosion
Trailing edge thinning
Stator blade root erosion
Tip clearance
Combustion Carbon build up

(Liner & transition piece) Hot spots
Cracking
Bulging
Wear
Missing metal or TBC
Turbine nozzles Foreign object damage

Corrosion
Blocked cooling holes
Cracks
Trailing edge bowing
Erosion
Burning
Turbine buckets Foreign object damage

Corrosion
Blisters
Erosion
Cracks
Tip clearance
Missing metal
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-8

TABLE 4-2
MS5001
BORESCOPE ACCESS HOLE LOCATION
ACCESS LOCATION INSPECTION AREA NUMBER OF HOLES
Compressor Case Thirteenth Stage 1

Rotor & Stator
Turbine Casing First-Stage Nozzle 4

Trailing Edge &
First Stage Buckets
Leading Edge
Turbine Casing First-Stage Buckets 1

Trailing Edge
Turbine Casing Second-Stage Nozzle 4

Trailing Edge &
Second Stage Buckets
Leading Edge
**Fuel Nozzles Liners, Transition 10

Mounting Hole Pieces & First Stage
Nozzle Leading Edge
Use Flexible Fiber Optic Boroscope Only
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-9

A qualified technician using this equipment can make visual observa-

tion and record the observed details.
Additional auxiliary equipment desirable to supplement the basic

equipment includes a borescope support mount or fixture, camera at-
tachments, camera, and a television camera with recording capability
and playback monitor. See Figures 4-4 and 4-5.
Service support for borescope inspections
Your Nuovo Pignone Field Service Representative can quote and sup-
ply technicians and equipment to assist in setting up a program for
monitoring machine condition.
Such service support also includes engineering evaluation of data and

correlation of data with other units in similar application.
4.5 INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Preparation of Gas Turbine for borescope inspection.
a. The gas turbine must be shut down and the turbine wheelspace
temperatures no greater than 180°F (82°C) before the borescope is
inserted.
) NOTE
EXPOSURE OF THE BORESCOPE TO HIGHER TEMPERATURES MAY PERMA-

NENTLY DAMAGE THE INTERNAL GLASS FIBER BUNDLE.
b. For the location of borescope inspection access holes, see Figure

4-1. If a normal borescope inspection is to be done, remove the
closing plugs only from those access holes (marked B.S. on turbine
cases) which are defined as Primary Inspection Access-normal In-
spection. See Figure 4-1.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-10

) NOTE
ALL CASING HOLES ON THE MS5001 HAVE AN INNER PLUG BENEATH THE
THREADED PLUG IN THE CASINGS. BOTH PLUGS MUST BE REMOVED TO GAIN
ACCESS.
ENSURE THAT INNER PLUGS ARE CORRECTLY REPLACED AFTER COMPLETING
INSPECTION.
c. When inspecting compressor blades and turbine buckets, it is nec-

essary to rotate the rotor incrementally to bring each bucket into
the field of view of the borescope. This can be achieved by using
the hydraulic ratchet.
! WARNING
A LUBE OIL SUPPLY TO THE ROTOR BEARINGS MUST BE MAINTAINED DUR-

ING THE BORESCOPE INSPECTION.
d. A "zero" datum should be established for the rotor by marking the

load coupling. This will provide the necessary reference to deter-
mine one revolution or intermediate angular positions.
e. With the access holes open the borescope can now be inserted, the
light switched ON and the light intensity adjusted. It is recom-
mended that the inspection commence with the compressor and
proceed through each turbine stage.
f. The procedure should consist of visually inspecting all visible sta-

tionary parts (compressor stators and turbine nozzles) and each
bucket/blade at each visible stage from root to tip including plat-
forms and tip seals. For inspection criteria see Table 4.1.
) NOTE
FOR PURPOSES OF PHYSICAL ORIENTATION THE OBJECTIVE LENS AT THE BOR-

ESCOPE TIP IS DISPLACED 180 DEGREES FROM THE LIGHT CONNECTOR BE-
NEATH THE EYEPIECE.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-11

g. Upon completion of the inspection, ensure that all sealing plugs at

borescope access holes are replaced and tightened.
h. If the turbine internal parts are abnormally dirty (ingested dirt or oil
vapors) the turbine should be cleaned before proceeding with the
borescope inspection. For compressor cleaning, see section 2,
Standard Practices, Gas Turbine Compressor Cleaning in this Ser-
vice Manual.
) NOTE
YOUR NUOVO PIGNONE FIELD SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE CAN SUPPLY BOR-

ESCOPE TECHNICIANS IF ASSISTANCE IS NEEDED IN OPERATION OF THE BOR-
ESCOPE EQUIPMENT.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-12

MS5001 BORESCOPE INSPECTION ACCESS
LEGEND
L/E = LEADING EDGE
T/E = TRAILING EDGE
INSP. = INSPECTION
Fig. 4-1 - BORESCOPE ACCESS HOLES LOCATION
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-13

Fig. 4-2 - RIGID BORESCOPE
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-14

Fig. 4-3 - FLEXIBLE BORESCOPE
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-15

Fig. 4-4 - SCOPE SUPPORT FIXTURE
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-16

Fig. 4-5 - TV MONITOR PRESENTATION
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-17

Combustion Inspection Section 5
COMBUSTION INSPECTION
CONTENTS SECT
DISASSEMBLY 5.1
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 5.2
REASSEMBLY 5.3
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

5. COMBUSTION INSPECTION
(Figures 5-1)
! WARNING
BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH A COMBUSTION INSPECTION, ENSURE THAT

THE GAS TURBINE IS TAGGED OUT; HALON SYSTEM IS DEACTIVATED, LIQ-
UID FUEL SYSTEM IS PURGED, DEACTIVATED, AND/OR GAS SUPPLY IS
BLANKED OFF. SEE SECTION 2, STANDARD PRACTICES, IN THIS INSPEC-
TION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION.
) NOTE
YOUR CONFIGURATION INCLUDE ONLY FUEL GAS.
5.1 DISASSEMBLY
5.1.1 Operation 1. Remove liquid fuel lines
1. Identify and tag each fuel line so it will be reassembled to the

same combustion casing from which it was removed.
2. Prior to loosening and/or removal of tube fittings, non-

destructively matchmark the nut and the fitting body. This
matchmark should be different from any other previously placed
on these fitting parts.
) NOTE
ON NEW SWAGELOK FITTINGS, A STOP COLLAR IS INCORPORATED BETWEEN

THE NUT AND THE FITTING BODY. MATCHMARKING IS NOT REQUIRED FOR
FITTINGS HAVING THE STOP COLLARS. SEE FIG. 5-3.
3. Disconnect the fuel lines from the fuel check valves and from the
fuel supply fittings. Hold the fittings steady with a backup
wrench to prevent twisting the fitting on the tube. See Fig. 5-2.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-1

! WARNING
DO NOT USE PIPE WRENCHES OR ADJUSTABLE WRENCHES WHICH WILL

RESULT IN FITTING DAMAGE.
A. ALWAYS USE OPEN-END, OR TUBING BOX WRENCHES.
B. CAP THE OPEN END OF THE FUEL LINES TO PREVENT ENTRY OF DIRT,
INSECTS, OR OTHER CONTAMINANTS.
! WARNING
DO NOT USE IMPROPER SIZE CAPS OR RAGS TO COVER PIPE OPENINGS,

THEY MAY BE ACCIDENTALLY PUSHED INSIDE THE TUBING.
4. If applicable, liquid fuel purge and water injection lines will have
to be removed. Follow the same procedures as stated above.
) NOTE
WHEN FUEL PURGE LINES ARE CLAMPED TO THE ATOMIZING AIR LINES, IT IS
ADVISABLE TO LEAVE THE CLAMPS INTACT AND REMOVE BOTH LINES TO-
GETHER.
5. Disconnect false start drain line from No. 5 combustion casing.
5.1.2 Operation 2. Remove atomizing air lines
1. Identify, tag and nondestructively matchmark each piping pigtail

with the combustion casing number before removing
! WARNING
SUPPORT THE ATOMIZING AIR MANIFOLD SO THAT AS THE FUEL NOZZLES

ARE DISCONNECTED, THE WEIGHT OF THE MANIFOLD IS NOT ON THE
LAST FUEL NOZZLE TO BE DISCONNECTED.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-2

2. Disconnect flange at fuel nozzle assembly. See Fig. 5-4.
3. Disconnect flange at atomizing air manifold ring & remove pip-

ing. See Fig 5-4.
4. Disassemble atomizing air manifold ring and remove.
5. Clean all flange faces and cover all pipe openings. Clean all nuts
and bolts and discard old gaskets. Bag bolts, nuts and identify
for reassembly.
! WARNING

THEY MAY BE ACCIDENTALLY PUSHED INSIDE THE PIPING.
5.1.3 Operation 3. Remove gas fuel lines
1. Identify, tag, and nondestructively matchmark each piping pigtail

for combustion casing number before removing.
2. Disconnect flanges at fuel nozzle assemblies. See Fig. 5-5.
! WARNING
SUPPORT THE GAS MANIFOLD SO THAT AS THE FUEL NOZZLES ARE DIS-
CONNECTED, THE WEIGHT OF THE MANIFOLD IS NOT ON THE LAST FUEL
NOZZLE TO BE DISCONNECTED.
3. Disconnect flanges at gas manifold, and remove piping pigtails.

See Fig. 5-5.
4. Disassemble gas manifold ring and remove.
5. Clean all flange faces and cover all pipe openings. Clean all nuts,
bolts and discard old gaskets. Bag bolts, nuts and identify for re-
assembly.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-3

5.1.4 Operation 4. Remove Liquid Fuel Check Valves
) NOTE
ON DUAL FUEL UNITS, REMOVE PURGE LINE CHECK VALVES ALSO.
1. Identify, and tag each check valve for later reinstallation to the
fuel nozzle from which it was removed.
2. Remove the check valve by placing a wrench on the hex flats

nearest the fuel nozzle. Securely hold the fuel nozzle fitting to
prevent twisting the fuel tube when removing the check valve.
3. Cap the open ends of both the check valves and the fuel nozzles
to prevent entry of foreign material.
! WARNING

THEY MAY BE ACCIDENTALLY PUSHED INSIDE THE OPENINGS.
Operation 5. Remove Fuel Nozzles
1. Unbolt fuel nozzle assemblies from combustion casing cover.

Discard old gaskets.
2. Identify and tag nozzles so they can be replaced on the same

combustion casing covers from which they were removed.
3. Remove old anti-seize compound from bolts, and clean all raised
face flanges. Bag bolts and identify for reassembly.
4. Be careful not to damage fuel nozzles when handling. Place as-

semblies on wood or heavy cardboard, and wrap in plastic bags to
keep dirt out.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-4

5.1.5 Operation 6. Remove Flame Detectors & Spark Plugs
1. Lock out power supply to spark plugs and flame detectors.(On

SPEEDTRONIC units pull flame-detector cards out of the panel.)
This prevents any possibility of energizing the flame detectors or
spark plugs.
2. Remove enclosure screens on flame detectors.
3. Disconnect wiring to flame detector.
4. Unbolt collar around flame-detector stem which prevents turbine

compartment air from entering the flame-detector enclosure box.
5. Unbolt flame-detector flange; remove probe from chamber.

See Fig. 5-6.
6. Disconnect spark plug leads
7. Unbolt spark plug assembly from combustion casing flange.

See Fig. 5-7.
8. Lift spark pliers out.
! WARNING
HANDLE CAREFULLY TO PREVENT BREAKING THE INTERNAL CERAMIC

PARTS
9. Remove old anti-seize compound on all bolts, bag and identify

for reassemble. Clean matching flange surfaces. Discard old gas-
kets.
5.1.6 Operation 7. Remove Combustion Casing Covers
1. Identify combustion casing covers according to location. See

Fig. 5-8.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-5

2. Remove the fourteen 5/8th-inch bolts and the two 3/4-inch bolts
holding the cover in place.
! WARNING
THE 3/4 INCH BOLTS HAVE A SIGNIFICANTLY TIGHTER FIT AND ARE USED
TO POSITION THE COVER TO THE COMBUSTION CASING. BY REMOVING
THESE BOLTS, THE COVER CAN BE HELD IN A RELATIVELY CENTRALIZED
POSITION AND BY PULLING IT STRAIGHT BACK, MINIMIZE ANY POSSIBLE
DAMAGE DUE TO BUMPING OF COMPONENTS.
THE COVER CAN BE HANDLED BY ONE MAN, HOWEVER, IT IS ADVISABLE

TO USE TWO MEN FOR SAFETY REASONS.
3. Remove the covers from combustion casings. Covers 5 and 6 can

be left in the turbine base until needed for reassemble.
4. Remove and discard the flexitalic gasket. Do not re-use.
5. Remove old anti-seize compound on all bolts, bag and identify

for reassemble. Clean mating flange surfaces. Bag bolts and nuts
and identify for reassembly.
5.1.7 Operation 8. Remove Crossfire Tube Retainers, Crossfire Tubes

& Combustion Liners
! WARNING
REFER TO SECTION 2, STANDARD PRACTICES, IN THIS INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION FOR MARKING OF NICKEL-BASE ALLOYS.
1. Remove and tag all crossfire tube retainers according to combus-

tion casing position. See Fig. 5-8.
2. To remove a combustion liner push both crossfire tubes into the

adjacent casing until they are clear of the combustion liner.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-6

3. Pull liner straight out. (Each liner weighs approximately 40

pounds). Place liners on piece of plywood to prevent damage and
keep foreign objects out.
! WARNING
EXERCISE CARE WHEN REMOVING COMBUSTION LINERS TO ENSURE AFT

SPRING SEALS DO NOT SNAG THE LINER STOPS IN COMBUSTION CASING.
4. Tag and identify each liner according to combustion casing loca-

tion.
5. Remove both crossfire tubes through the empty casing. Tag and
identify each crossfire tube with respect to its combustion casing
location and orientation.
6. Remove the remaining combustion liners and crossfire tubes in

the same manner, tagging and identifying each for combustion
casing location.
) NOTE
IF TRANSITION PIECES ARE NOT TO BE INSPECTED, GO TO OPERATION 21. IF

TRANSITION PIECES ARE TO BE INSPECTED, CONTINUE WITH OPERATION 9.
5.1.8 Operation 9. Remove Turbine Compartment Side Panels & Roof
1. Remove turbine compartment side panels to gain access to tur-

bine compartment. Store panels and/or doors in an upright posi-
tion in a protected area.
2. On those units with outdoor lighting attached to the roof, discon-

nect the wiring at the nearest pull box not physically-mounted on
the turbine roof. Pull the wiring out of the conduit and disassem-
ble the rigid conduit so that it can be removed as part of the roof.
Cover all opened junction boxes and conduits to prevent entry of
water and/or dirt.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-7

3. Disconnect HALON piping and any other piping which may in-
terfere with roof removal.
4. Unbolt the roof from the sidewalk frames.
5. Attach four eyebolts to roof section at threaded receptacles pro-

vided on top.
6. Attach four equal length cables or two equal length cables and
two comealongs to chainfall connected to crane.
7. Check to ensure the roof is mechanically free to be lifted, and

carefully lift with chainfalls until clear.
8. Set the roof section on appropriate cribbing on the ground.
9. Clean all nuts and bolts of old anti-seize compound.
10. Clean all flange gasket sealing surfaces.
5.1.9 Operation 10. Remove Outer Combustion Casings
) NOTE
THE COMBUSTION CASING AFT FLANGE BOLTS CAN BEST BE REMOVED USING
AN IMPACT WRENCH AND A LONG EXTENSION TO REACH BETWEEN AND BE-
HIND THE COMBUSTION CASINGS.
1. Identify each combustion easing to be removed as to location.
2. Starting with the No. 10 combustion casing, rig the easing to the
lifting means to support the weight. Unbolt the casing from the
compressor discharge casing bulkhead.
3. Carefully, using the rigging attached, work the combustion casing

outward until the aft flange clears the transition piece. Lift the
casing clear of the unit.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-8

4. Set and block the outer casing on wood or heavy cardboard so

that no damage is done to the aft flow sleeve.
5. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 for combustion casings 1, 2, 3, 9, 8 and 7.
6. Rig No. 4 combustion casing to the lifting means. Attach a

comealong to the casing to act as a restraint to keep the casing
from swinging when it clears the compressor discharge casing
bulkhead.
7. Unbolt the casing from the compressor discharge bulkhead and

using the rigging attached, carefully work the combustion casing
forward and outward. Lift the casing clear of the unit.

9. Repeat steps 6, 7 and 8 for combustion casings Nos. 5 and 6.
10. Remove and discard all used gaskets.
11. Clean all hardware and mating flange surfaces. Bag and identify
bolting for reassembly.
5.1.10 Operation 11. Remove Wheelspace Thermocouples
1. Tag four thermocouples that are in the upper or lower half of the
turbine casing using the same code as stamped on the casing in
order to replace them in the same location at reassembly.
2. Disconnect the thermocouples from the compression fittings on

the shell; remove all tube clips that hold them down in the turbine
compartment.
3. Pull thermocouples carefully through the hole in the base T

beam, coil them up and secure them to the '1' beam web near the
junction boxes JB No. 18A and JB No. 18B where they will be
protected from damage.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-9

4. It is also necessary to remove the four compression fittings and

associated outer guide tubes from the turbine casing so that they
are not damaged in subsequent second-stage nozzle segment re-
moval. Tag these fittings for location for later reassembly.
5.1.11 Operation 12. Remove Upper And Lower-Half Cooling & Sealing
Air Piping
1. Disconnect (20CB-1) tubing air connection at the compressor

bleed valves (VAB-2 and VAB-1) actuating cylinders and re-
move the conduit and wiring from the valves limit switches
(33CB-1 and -2).
2. Support the 10th stage extraction lines and remove the 'U' bracket
that supports the valves actuating cylinder.
3. Loosen the clamps on the 10th stage extraction valve joint bel-
lows.
4. Unbolt and remove the 4th stage cooling and sealing air lines
from the compressor and turbine casings.
5. Identify all orifices and piping removed for location.
6. Unbolt the 10th stage extraction line from the compressor casing.
7. Remove the upper and lower sections of the 10th stage extraction
piping by sliding it out of the expansion slip joint and lift it clear
of the turbine compartment.
8. Identify and tag all orifices and piping removed for location.
9. Tape all open pipe ends and cover openings on the compressor
and turbine casings.
5.1.12 Operation 13. Remove Forward Exhaust Flex Seals
1. Apply liquid penetrant (Plus-Gas Formula 'A' or equivalent) to

bolts.
2. Identify and/or tag upper-half flex seals and clamp segments as to

location.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-10

3. Remove clamp segment bolts, clamp segments and upper-half

flex seals.
5.1.13 Operation 14. Take Opening Compressor & Turbine Rotor Posi-
tioning Checks
) NOTE
ROTOR POSITIONING CHECKS MUST BE DONE WITH ALL CASINGS BOLTED IN

PLACE AND UNIT SUPPORTED ON ITS OWN SUPPORTS.
! WARNING
DO NOT CONFUSE CLEARANCEOMETER HOLES AND PROBE HOLES.

CLEARANCEOMETER HOLES ARE TOO SMALL FOR A DERM MICROMETER.
USE PROBE HOLES FOR TAKING TIP CLEARANCES ON TURBINE AND COM-
PRESSOR.
1. Using random first-stage compressor blades, take feeler clearance

checks at six points: top centerline, bottom centerline, and above
and below the horizontal joint on each side. Record clearances
on Inspection Field Report.
) NOTE
IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO USE THE HYDRAULIC RATCHET TO POSITION A RAN-

DOM BLADE TIP BELOW THE PROBE HOLES FOR THE 11TH AND 15TH STAGE
COMPRESSOR FOR ROTOR POSITIONING CHECKS.
2. The 11th stage compressor holes (four total) are located 3.875
inches aft from the forward face of the compressor discharge cas-
ing forward flange, and the hole plugs are 3_15' off top and bot-
tom vertical centerline and 10_45' above horizontal joint.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-11

3. The 15th stage compressor probe holes (four total) are located
16.40 inches aft from the forward face of the compressor dis-
charge casing forward flange, and the hole plugs are 10_ off top
and bottom vertical centerline and 10_40' above horizontal joint.
4. Compressor tip clearances at the 11th and 15th stages are taken
after removing the aforementioned plugs. A stamped number
next to the plug counterbores indicates the thickness of the casing
from the bottom of the counterbore to the inside diameter of the
casing. Record clearances on Inspection Field Report. Compres-
sor rotor tip clearances can be taken as follows:
Remove plug and place an adapter into the machined counterbore

of the casing. The adapter will allow the base of the depth mi-
crometer to rest squarely on the casing, thereby allowing the mi-
crometer rod to penetrate the probe hole accurately.
) NOTE
THE ADAPTOR CAN BE MADE FROM A PIECE OF 0.75-INCH DIAMETER PIPE AP-
PROXIMATELY TWO INCHES LONG. THE ENDS OF THE PIPE FACES SHOULD BE
PARALLEL WITHIN .0005-INCH. SEE FIG. 5-9.
Take the depth micrometer and measure to the top of the blade.
This measurement will be the distance from the blade tip to the
top of the adaptor. Add the adaptor length to the thickness
stamped on the turbine casing. Subtract this measurement from
the depth micrometer measurement reading. The result is tip
clearance. See Fig. 5-9.
! WARNING
DO NOT ROTATE THE ROTOR WITH ANY PROBE STICKING INTO THE BLADE
PATH.
5. The first-stage turbine clearances are to be taken with feelers

through the first-stage nozzle with the combustion transition
pieces removed.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-12

6. The second-stage turbine clearances are to be taken with feelers.

Access the aft side of the second-stage buckets by cutting a 15 x
17 inch oval hole in the exhaust diffuser outer wall. Record six-
point cheeks on the Inspection Field Report.
5.1.14 Operation 15. Disconnect Wiring & Conduit in Turbine Com-

partment Area (Remove only if it will interfere with turbine area
work)
1. Disconnect the electrical leads for the ac/dc lighting at the pull-
box above turbine casing.
2. Pull wiring from conduit and tag for identification.
3. Tag and remove sections of conduit as needed to provide access

to turbine work.
5.1.15 Operation 16. Establish Solid Foundation & Place Mechanical

Support Jacks Under Turbine Casing
! WARNING
DO NOT USE HYDRAULIC JACKS.
) NOTE
THE MECHANICAL SUPPORT JACKS MUST BE ESTABLISHED ON SOLID FOUNDA-

TION WHEN SUPPORTING THE TURBINE CASING.
Do not install the mechanical support jacks on the transaxial 'I'

beam on the floor of the turbine base without first packing shims
solidly between the 'I'-beam and the concrete base pad at each lo-
cation.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-13

Cutouts can be made to the base floorplate next to the '1'-beam

mechanical support jack location so access can be gained to pack
shims solidly underneath the T-beam and the concrete base pad.
Floorplate cutouts can be fabricated from the 1/8-inch plate to

cover the access hole after the mechanical support jacks are re-
moved.
Mechanical screw jack support blocks can be fabricated using

schedule 'B', 5/16-inch wall by 3-inch minimum diameter pip-
ing cut to length required to support the jack.
See Fig. 5-11.
1. Install mechanical support jack at the bottom centerline between

the compressor discharge casing and the forward turbine casing
vertical flanges. See Fig. 5-10, Jack position 4, and 5-11.

the turbine aft casing and the forward exhaust casing vertical
flanges. See Fig. 5-10, Jack position 5, and 5-11.
3. Set up two dial indicators, one on each side of the turbine from
stationary points (i.e.: turbine enclosure beam) to the turbine cas-
ing to measure upward deflection of the casings.
4. Use the mechanical support jacks to obtain 0.002 to 0.004 inch

upward deflection of the casing as measured with dial indicators.
) NOTE
JACK SUPPORT PIPES SHOULD HAVE LATERAL BRACING IN CASE OF LOADING

CHANGES.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-14

! WARNING
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES REMOVE THE MECHANICAL SUPPORT JACKS

TILL THE UPPER-HALF CASING HAS BEEN REINSTALLED AND BOLTED UP.
IF, FOR ANY REASON DURING THE HOT GAS PATH INSPECTION, THE COM-
PRESSOR CASINGS HAVE TO BE REMOVED, MAKE ABSOLUTELY SURE THAT
THE MECHANICAL SUPPORT JACKS ARE INSTALLED UNDER THE INLET
BELL AND FLANGES OF THE COMPRESSOR CASINGS AND THAT THEY SUP-
PORT THE VIGV RING. USE THE JACKS TO OBTAIN 0.002 - 0.004 INCH UP-
WARD DEFLECTION BEFORE REMOVING ANY UPPER-HALF COMPRESSOR
CASINGS. SEE FIGS. 5-10, JACK POSITIONS 1, 2 & 3, & 5-11.
5.1.16 Operation 17. Remove Turbine Casing Bolts & Upper-Half First
Stage Nozzle Eccentric Pin
1. Unbolt the upper-half circumferential bolting between the turbine

casing and exhaust frame.
2. Repeat this operation between the turbine casing and the com-
pressor discharge casing.
3. Remove the horizontal joint bolting and body-bound bolting.

(Remove horizontal joint body-bound bolts by driving them up-
ward).
4. Mark body-bound bolts for replacement in the same holes.
5. Remove upper-half, 1st-stage nozzle eccentric pin near top verti-

cal centerline of the turbine casing. Stamp pin to identify it as
the 1st stage pin.
6. Remove the borescope plugs in the first and second-stage nozzle

area prior to turbine easing removal. There are four plugs in the
first-stage nozzle and five in the second-stage nozzle. The one
odd plug is 46 degrees above the left horizontal joint (looking
downstream), 10.84 inches from the aft casing flange. There are
a total of nine plugs that must be removed
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-15

7. Identify and tap plugs.
8. Clean all removed bolting of old anti-seize compound.
5.1.17 Operation 18. Remove Upper-Half Turbine Casing
1. Remove access door and frame from the forward wall of the ex-
haust transition duct. See Fig. 5-12.
2. Use a restraining cable with an attached snatch block or shackle

and run it through the lift bracket that is welded to the transition
duct.
3. Mount a roller bracket on the forward wall of the plenum as

shown in Fig. 5-12.
4. Tap out jackbolt holes to clean out the threads. Lubricate and in-
stall guide pins and jackbolts.
) NOTE
A QUANTITY OF FOUR 1.75-INCH 8-THREAD JACKBOLTS WILL BE REQUIRED

TWO WILL BE USED TO PROVIDE PLUGGING OF THE LOWER-HALF HOLES AND
THE OTHER TWO TO PERFORM THE JACKING FUNCTION ON THE UPPER-HALF.
CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO AVOID THE BOLTS CROSSING THE HORIZONTAL
SPLIT.
! WARNING
DO NOT BREAK LOOSE THE UPPER-HALF TURBINE CASING BY PULLING

WITH A CRANE. EXTENSIVE DAMAGE CAN BE DONE TO TURBINE BUCKETS,
TURBINE NOZZLES AND TURBINE CASING.
5. Rig cables, chainfalls, and comealongs as follows to lift the tur-

bine casing level. Refer to Fig. 5-12.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-16

) NOTE
THE UPPER-HALF TURBINE CASING WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 4,430 POUNDS

(2,013.6 KILOGRAMS) AND SHOULD BE RIGGED ACCORDINGLY.
a. Position the crane hook above the forward wall of the exhaust
duct and centered on the unit.
b. Hang a 5-ton chainfall off the crane hook, using a suitable

shackle.
c. Hang a 20-foot cable and hook from the chainfall to extend

from the wall of the plenum. Run the cable through the snatch
block.
d. Attach two cables of equal length to the forward turbine casing

flange lifting provisions. Attach opposite end of lifting cables
to the 20-foot cable hook.
e. Attach shorter cable and 1-1/2 or 2-ton comealongs to the ca-

ble hook and to each rear lifting trunnion on the turbine cas-
ing. (The cable hook must be kept close to the turbine casing
to allow sufficient lift).
f. Adjust rear comealongs to pull lift point closer to the centre of

gravity which is 15.14 inches from aft flange. Do not take any
strain on rigging at this time. Take up on restraining table.
g. Jack the turbine casing free 2 to 5 inches, maintaining a meas-

ured equal lift side to side and front to back. Readjust the cen-
tre of gravity point as noted in Step “f” above.
) NOTE
USE A LEVEL ON TOP FLAT PORTION OF TURBINE CASING WHILE ADJUSTING

REAR COMEALONGS. ONCE CASING IS LEVEL, ALL FURTHER LIFTING SHOULD
BE DONE USING CHAINFALL AT UPPER CRANE HOOK. SEE FIG. 5-12.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-17

h. Slowly take up strain and load with 5-ton chainfall while re-
straining the lifting cable axially toward exhaust plenum.
Continue to measure the joint gap during this operation. If
measurements indicate turbine casing is sticking, stop lifting,
determine and correct reason for sticking and equalize the
joint gaps.
i. Continue lifting and restraining the turbine casing with the 5

ton chainfall and restraining cable until casing is clear of tur-
bine buckets, seals etc.
! WARNING
EXERCISE EXTREME CARE WHEN LIFTING THE TURBINE CASING. DO NOT

ALLOW THE TURBINE CASING TO SWING AND HIT THE TURBINE BUCKETS.
) NOTE
A MINIMUM LIFT OF 25-INCHES IS REQUIRED FOR THE SECOND-STAGE DIA-

PHRAGM SEAL TEETH TO CLEAR THE FIRST-STAGE BUCKET TIPS.
j. Ensure turbine casing is free by easing off on the restraining

cable and taking up on the chainfall. Allow the turbine casing
to drift forward over the first-stage buckets.
) NOTE
A MINIMUM LIFT OF 50 INCHES IS REQUIRED FOR THE DIAPHRAGM SEAL

TEETH TO CLEAR THE DISCHARGE CASING VERTICAL FLANGE.
k. Attach a tag line to the turbine casing and continue lifting cas-
ing with chainfall until casing is clear of the discharge casing
vertical flange. Once casing is centered under the crane hook,
release all restraints, slowly raise turbine casing by boom and
cable while turning to clear conduit runs, lagging supports,
piping etc.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-18

l. Carefully swing turbine casing clear of unit and set the casing
on suitable blocking on its forward vertical flange for easier
cleaning and inspection.
m. Clean all bolting and flanges of old anti-seize and sealing com-
pound.
5.1.18 Operation 19. Unbolt & Remove Upper-Half Transition Pieces
1. Remove side seal bolts, side seals, aft bracket bolts and lock-
plates (Nos.10, 1, 2, 9 and 8 transition pieces in sequence) from
the upperhalf, first-stage nozzle retaining ring. Discard all lock-
plates and bolts.
) NOTE
UNBOLT THE TRANSITION PIECE FROM THE NOZZLE RETAINING RING AND RE-
MOVE THE END SEAL KEY FROM BETWEEN THE ENDS OF THE ADJACENT TRAN-
SITION PIECES. A SHOULDER BOLT IS BOLTED TO A SPACER BLOCK ON THE
NOZZLE RETAINING RING OVER THE END SEAL KEY TO KEEP THE END SEAL IN
PLACE BETWEEN THE TRANSITION PIECES. REMOVE THE SHOULDER BOLT SO
THAT THE END SEAL CAN BE REMOVED.
SEE FIG. 5-13.
2. Push each transition piece clear of the first-stage nozzle and re-
move through the compressor casing opening, lift clear of the
unit and set on plywood or heavy cardboard in a laydown area.
3. Identify each transition piece. according to combustion casing lo-

cation as it is removed.
! WARNING

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION FOR PROPER MARKING AND IDENTIFYING
TURBINE COMPONENTS.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-19

5.1.19 Operation 20. Unbolt & Remove Lower-Half Transition Pieces
plates (Nos. 3, 7, 4, 5 and 6 transition pieces in sequence) from
the lowerhalf. first-stage nozzle retaining ring. Discard all lock-
plates and bolts.
) NOTE
3. Identify each transition piece according to combustion casing lo-

! WARNING

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION FOR PROPER MARKING AND IDENTEFYING
TURBINE COMPONENTS.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-20

5.2 INSPECTION PROCEDURES
5.2.1 Operation 21. Pressure Test Fuel Oil Check Valves
1. Apply 1000 psi oil pressure, against flow direction, to each check
valve to ensure against back-flow leakage.
2. If 1000 psi oil source is not available, use 80 to 100 psi air pres-
sure and submerge check valve under water to check for leakage.
3. Replace any defective check valves.
5.2.2 Operation 22. Fuel Nozzle Inspection
! WARNING
THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE MUST BE OBSERVED FOR ALL FUEL NOZZLE

DISASSEMBLY, CLEANING, INSPECTION, REASSEMBLY, TESTING AND REIN-
STALLATION:
GENERAL
This procedure details the tooling, fixtures, disassembly, inspec-

tion, reassembly and the requirements for testing the reassembled
fuel nozzles prior to returning to service.
If the customer/user does not have the capability of performing

these tests, the nozzles should be returned to Gas Turbine Divi-
sion or qualified Gas Turbine repair facility for inspection, reas-
sembly and testing.
Your local NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field Service represen-

tative can assist you in the returned material procedures to return
the fuel nozzles to the Gas Turbine Division or qualified Gas
Turbine repair facility.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-21

Perform fuel nozzle pressure test prior to disassembly. Check for

leaking fuel gaskets and/or cracked fuel tube. Bubbles from the
atomizing air pipe or from the fuel tube collar interface indicate
faulty gasket and/or cracked fuel tube. The pressure test is rec-
ommended prior to disassembly because a visual inspection may
not disclose faults in these components.
Fuel Nozzle Disassembly (After Pressure Test)
1. Remove the lockwire securing the outer gas swirl tip to the fuel
nozzle body. On water injection nozzles also remove the lock-
wire from the individual water spray nozzles (if applicable).
) NOTE
LATER FUEL NOZZLE ASSEMBLIES USE A LOCKPLATE INSTEAD OF SAFETY

WIRE. DISCARD THE LOCKPLATE UPON DISASSEMBLY.
2. Non-destructively matchmark the outer gas swirl tip to each fuel

nozzle body, to prevent mixing similar parts at reassembly. See
Fig. 5-14.
! WARNING
THE REMOVAL OF PARTS FROM THE FUEL NOZZLE BODY SHOULD BE

DONE WITH EXTREME CARE. SMALL NICKS, SCRATCHES OR OTHER DAM-
AGE TO THE FLOW SURFACES AND ORIFICES CAN ALTER THE NOZZLE
FLOW PATTERN AND RESULT IN UNDESIRABLE COMBUSTION CHARACTER-
ISTICS. THE PARTS SHOULD BE PLACED IN CLEAN CONTAINERS AND NOT
PLACED ON STEEL WORK BENCHES OR SURFACES WHERE THE PARTS MAY
BE DAMAGED (WIRE BASKETS ARE ACCEPTABLE CONTAINERS). SEE FIG. 5-
15.
3. Using a suitable crowfoot hex tool or socket, remove the outer

gas swirl tip from the fuel nozzle body.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-22

4. Using a suitable crowfoot or socket wrench, remove the nozzle

cap from the fuel nozzle body.
5. Using the special socket wrench, remove the transition piece as-
sembly from the nozzle body.
6. Remove and discard the gasket which seals between the nozzle
body and the transition piece assembly. Use care in removing the
gasket so as not to nick or scrape the gasket sealing surface.
7. Record any abnormalities or defects found during disassembly on

the Inspection Field Report.
) NOTE
IF THE TRANSITION PIECE ASSEMBLIES ARE TO BE RETURNED TO A NUOVO

PIGNONE COMPANY FACILITY FOR CLEANING, INSPECTION, RECONDITIONING
AND CALIBRATION, MAKE SURE THAT EACH ASSEMBLY IS WRAPPED SEPA-
RATELY IN SUITABLE PACKAGING MATERIAL TO ENSURE PROTECTION AGAINST
DAMAGE DURING SHIPPING, AND IDENTIFICATION FOR TURBINE NUMBER AND
CUSTOMER LOCATION IS MARKED ON EACH PACKAGE. USE INSPECTION FIELD
REPORT.
8. Remove the retainer from the transition piece using a suitable

straight hex wrench. Do not tap on the end surfaces of the inner
tip to free the pilot as this may upset the critical dimensions of
the swirl slots on the end surface of the pilot. See Fig. 5-14.
9. Using a wooden dowel or a brass rod small enough to go through

the oil orifice, softly tap the pilot out of the back of the inner tip,
exercising caution to prevent damaging the swirl slots of the pilot
or the orifice of the inner tip.
10. Record any abnormalities or defects found during disassembly of

the transition piece on Inspection Field Report.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-23

Fuel Nozzle Cleaning and Inspection (After Disassembly)
) NOTE
THE LENGTH OF TIME REQUIRED TO THOROUGHLY CLEAN THE FUEL NOZZLES

WILL LARGELY DEPEND UPON THE FUEL USED, TURBINE RUNNING TIME, AND
THE TYPE OF CLEANER USED. THE FOLLOWING METHOD IS THE RECOM-
MENDED APPROACH FOR CLEANING FUEL NOZZLE COMPONENTS.
1. Inspect parts for major carbon buildup and for plugged slots ori-
fices prior to cleaning. If there has been a fuel oil leak into t at-
omizing air passages, the oil and carbon deposits must removed
from the body. This condition must be corrected be further tur-
bine operation. Record findings on Field Inspect Report.
2. Large pieces of face carbon which can be picked or rubbed off w

the fingers may be removed. This will shorten the time required
the cleaning tank. (Fig. 5.16 shows a typical cleaning and rinsing
facility)
! WARNING
DO NOT USE METALLIC SCRAPERS, PEN KNIVES, WIRE BRUSHES TO RE-

MOVE CARBON FROM METERING PASSAGES.
3. Immerse the parts in a clean solution like those suggested in Ta-

ble 5-1, and allow them to soak at the solution temperature rec-
ommended by the supplier until clean. Follow manufacturers in-
structions for use, the temperature required, a the safety precau-
tions to be observed.
! DANGER
CLEANING SOLUTIONS ARE EXTREMELY CAUSTIC. WEAR PROTECTIVE

CLOTHING, GLOVES AND FACE SHIELD TO PREVENT CONTACT WITH
SKIN OR EYES. SOLUTION CONTACTS SKIN OR EYES, IRRIGATE THOR-
OUGHLY WITH CLEAN WATER AND IMMEDIATE OBTAIN MEDICAL AID.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-24

4. Remove the parts from the cleaning solution, and spray with wa-
ter and steam to knock off loosened carbon.
5. Rinse the parts, and coat them with either clean fuel oil or light
machine oil.
6. Visually inspect all parts, keeping in mind that the contact sur-
faces of the fuel nozzle parts are machined to a fine finish so the
flow rates of fuel oil, injection water and atomizing air through
the nozzle assembly will be within specified limits. When in-
specting parts, ascertain that there are no dents, burrs and nicks
on any surfaces which will result in an interference on reassem-
bly, or affect fuel flow. Special attention should be given to the
condition of the swirl slots in the fuel nozzle pilot, and the sur-
faces with which the nozzle ring are in contact. If the swirl slots
show any indication of crushing galling or erosion, or if the sur-
faces with which they are in contact are not flat and smooth, the
parts must be replaced. The above inspection applies also to wa-
ter injection spray nozzles.
! WARNING
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMACHINE DAMAGED PARTS. THIS CAN CAUSE IR-

REGULAR FUEL FLOW, ERRATIC COMBUSTION SYSTEM OPERATION, AND
SUBSEQUENT TURBINE DAMAGE.
7. Inspect the outer gas swirl tip and inner fuel nozzle cap for nicks,
scratches, dents and unusual wear. Record findings on Inspection
Field Report.
8. Complete additional data requested on Inspection Field Report

and forward to your NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field Service
Representative.
Fuel Nozzle Reassembly
1. New parts are frequently plastic coated, be sure that all plastic
material is removed before reassembling the fuel nozzle. Ascer-
tain that no plastic material remains lodged on inside surfaces.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-25

2. DO NOT use Teflon tape or liquid sealant anywhere in the fuel

nozzle assembly.
3. Ascertain that all gaskets are new NEVER REUSE AN OLD

GASKET.
4. Use FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound on all threaded parts.
5. During reassembly of the fuel nozzle use the torque values speci-
fied on the fuel nozzle assembly drawing.
6. Use a torque wrench with a range from zero to approximately 20

percent above the maximum torque required for assembly. The
accuracy should be within + 5%.
7. Hold the transition piece lightly, but firmly, in a vise, using two
soft metal blocks of sufficient width and depth to grip the hex of
the transition piece housing in the vise jaws. See Fig. 5-14.
8. Insert the swirl chamber and pilot into the transition piece body,
making sure all parts bottom properly against their seats. See
Fig. 5-14.
9. Wipe anti-seize compound lightly on the internal transition piece

threads and the retainer piece threads.
10. Screw the retainer into the transition piece. Using a straight hex
wrench, socket, and torque wrench, torque the retainer to the
value specified on the fuel nozzle assembly drawing in the Parts
List and Drawings Volume of this Service Manual. See Fig. 5-14.
11. Using a suitable holding fixture, secure the fuel nozzle body in a
vertical position (bore side up).
12. Wire anti-seize compound lightly on the external threads of the

transition piece assembly and on the corresponding threads in the
fuel nozzle body.
13. Carefully install a new gasket into the fuel nozzle body, making
sure that it is seated against the retaining seat in the fuel nozzle
body.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-26

TABLE 5-1
RECOMMENDED CLEANING COMPOUNDS
COMPOUND MANUFACTURER
Lix Diesel Klean, Heavy Lix Corporation

716 East 85th Street
Kansas City, Missouri
*Turco 4008 Turco Products Inc.

6135 South Central
Avenue Los Angeles,
California
Bendix Metal Clene Bendix Products

South Bend, Indiana
Oakite Solution Oakite Products Inc.

50 Valley Road
Berkeley Heights,
New Jersey
* Where extremely tenacious deposits are encountered, the manufacturer recommends a

1/2 hour presoak in Turco Super Carb.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-27

14. Screw the transition piece assembly into the fuel nozzle body fin-
ger-tight. Using the special socket wrench, and a torque wrench,
torque the transition piece assembly to the value specified on the
fuel nozzle assembly drawing. Torque the assembly only once.
! WARNING
NEVER LOOSEN OR RETORQUE THE ASSEMBLY WITHOUT REPLACING THE

GASKET.
15. Check the integrity of the transition assembly installation by

pressure testing to the pressure specified on the applicable fuel
nozzle assembly drawing. Leaks in the transition piece assembly
indicate a faulty gasket.
16. Reinstall the fuel nozzle body in the holding fixture, this time in a
vertical position with the bore side up.
17. Wipe anti-seize compound lightly on the threads of the inner fuel
nozzle cap and on the corresponding threads in the fuel nozzle
body.
18. Screw the inner fuel nozzle cap into the fuel nozzle body. Using
a suitable crowfoot or socket wrench and a torque wrench, torque
the inner cap to the value specified on the fuel nozzle assembly
drawing.
19. Wipe anti-seize compound lightly on the threads of the outer gas
swirl tip and on the corresponding threads in the fuel nozzle
body. Install new lockplate.
20. Screw the outer gas swirl tip into the fuel nozzle body. Using a
suitable crowfoot wrench and a torque wrench, torque the outer
gas swirl plate and gas tip to the value specified on the fuel noz-
zle assembly drawing. Fuel nozzle lockplate must be locked into
the nozzle body and outer swirl tip 0.150 inch minimum lock the
lockplate. See Fig. 5-17.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-28

21. On water injection-type nozzle bodies, install the water injection

spray nozzles and torque to the value specified on the fuel nozzle
assembly drawing in the Parts List and Drawings Volume of this
Service Manual. Water spray nozzles must be tack welded.
Fuel Nozzle Testing
! WARNING
THE FUEL NOZZLE MUST PASS THE FOLLOWING PRESSURE, AIR FLOW,
WATER FLOW, FUEL FLOW AND FUEL GAS TESTS TO ENSURE INTEGRITY
OF ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION BEFORE BEING RETURNED TO SERVICE OR
STORAGE.
1. Fuel Nozzle Atomizing Air Flow Cheek
a. The air flow through the nozzle cannot be adjusted. Burrs,

nicks, or dents on mating surfaces, over-torquing of the outer
tip, and plugged passages will adversely affect air flow.
b. Install the fuel nozzle assembly in the test fixture as illustrated

in Fig. 5-18.
c. Test for air flow in accordance with the requirements on the

fuel nozzle assembly drawing in the Parts Lists and Drawings
Volume of this service manual.
d. Low air flow indicates plugged swirl holes. Excess air flow in-
dicates air leaks caused by burrs or dirt between mating sur-
faces, or erosion beyond acceptable limits, of assembled parts.
2. Fuel Nozzle Liquid Fuel Flow and Spray Pattern Check
a. Install the fuel nozzle assembly in the test fixture (See Fig.
5-18).
b. Check for a symmetrical spray pattern of the fuel nozzle as-

sembly.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-29

c. Check the fuel flow through the fuel nozzle in accordance with
the requirements specified on the fuel nozzle assembly draw-
ing in the Parts Lists and Drawings Volume of this Service
Manual.
d. Excess (rich) fuel flow indicates that the exit orifice and/or the
pilot slots and holes may be too large, or improper pilot as-
sembly, allowing too much oil to pass by the pilot. Low (lean)
fuel flow indicates that the holes and slots in the nozzle may be
plugged or contain burrs which restrict flow.
3. Fuel Nozzle Gas Flow Check
) NOTE
THIS CHECK MAY BE DONE AT THE TURBINE SITE IF THE PROPER FACILITIES
ARE AVAILABLE. IF THEY ARE NOT AVAILABLE, THIS CHECK CAN BE DONE AT
AN APPROVED GAS TURBINE FACILITY. DETAILS OF A FIELD TEST RIG ARE DE-
SCRIBED IN FIG. 5-18.
a. Install each fuel nozzle assembly in the test fixture as shown in

Fig. 5-18.
b. Flow air at two different absolute pressure ratios through each

nozzle in the turbine set.
c. From the data, calculate an effective gas nozzle area for each
nozzle at both pressure ratios.
d. An acceptable set of gas fuel nozzles must have effective gas

flow areas that vary no more than 5% from the largest gas flow
area to the smallest.
e. Nozzles can have reduced effective areas due to foreign mate-

rial in the gas passages or a misassembly that blocks a passage.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-30

f. Nozzles can have increased effective areas as a result of ero-

sion, rounding of the sharp inlet edges of the gas tip holes, or
leakage. Leakage shall be checked as shown in Fig. 5-18 dur-
ing flow checks.
g. If a set of gas nozzles for a turbine does not meet the effective
area values in 3.d., disassembly and replacement of gas swirl
tips on the largest and/or smallest assemblies may be done.
h. It should be noted that the field flow checking procedure gives

relative values only. After one or more nozzles have been dis-
assembled and reassembled, all the nozzles in the set must be
flow-checked again to determine if the area criterion has been
met.
Fuel Nozzle Storage
1. Serviceable fuel nozzles should be stored as complete assemblies

in separate containers designed to prevent damage to nozzles dur-
ing storage. If the fuel nozzles are to be stored for an indefinite
time, it is recommended that they be stored in a corrosion-free
atmosphere.
5.2.2 Operation 23. Inspect Combustion Liners
1. Record combustion liner inspection on Field Inspection Report.
) NOTE
HI-TECH COMBUSTION CAP AND LINER ASSEMBLIES MADE WITH THERMAL

BARRIER COATING TO IMPROVE OPERATING LIFE WILL REQUIRE THAT REPAIRS
TO THE LOUVERED LINER SLEEVE BE DONE AT AN APPROVED FACILITY ABLE
TO RECOAT THE THERMAL BARRIER COATING (TBC). EMPHASIS OF THIS IN-
SPECTION WILL BE TO DETERMINE WHICH ASSEMBLIES CAN BE USED AS IS AND
WHICH REQUIRE SCRAPPING AND/OR REPAIR AT AN APPROVED FACILITY. DE-
TERIORATION LESS THAN ALLOWABLE LIMITS INDICATES THAT REUSE MAY BE
CONSIDERED PROVIDING PAST OPERATING HISTORY AND CONDITIONS IN RE-
LATION TO FUTURE OPERATIONS EXPECTED HAVE BEEN EVALUATED.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-31

2. Inspect Louver Cooled Liners. See Fig. 5.19
a. Table 5-2 is a guide to aid in decision making on reuse, repair

or discarding of louvered cooled combustion liners.
b. Checking and attempting to resize louvers may not be done on

liners with TBC because the coating will interfere with the
measurements and reworking will damage the coating.
c. Liner caps may be left loose (0.015 inch maximum looseness)

as long as all rivets are intact. The end clearance between cap
and liner is not critical.
d. Worn crossfire tube collars may be replaced if 50% of parent

metal thickness is gone. It is recommended that this be done at
an approved facility because of the fixturing requirements of
this operation.
e. Inspect for body cracks using a bright light and a ten power
magnifying glass.
! WARNING
DO NOT RED DYE OR FLUORESCENT PENETRANT INSPECT (ZYGLO) THE

LOUVER AREAS. ERRONEOUS RESULTS WILL OCCUR DUE TO MANUFAC-
TURING TECHNIQUES.
f. Inspect the liner stops, seam welds and spring seal spot welds
for cracks. These areas should be fluorescent penetrant
checked (Zyglo preferred).
g. Inspect the spring seals by measuring the diameter of the

spring seal ring with a 'PI' tape.
The diameter should be 11.12 to 11.16 inches. This dimension
is critical.
h. Inspect spring seals for bent leaves. Figure 15.20 shows the
spring seals and areas of inspection.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-32

i. If individual leaves are damaged during liner removal they can

be straightened providing the leaf curvature height is similar to
adjacent leaves and the "PI" tape dimension is satisfied.
j. If any spring seals are reshaped they should be liquid penetrant

checked to assure there are no cracks.
k. Inspect the spring seal leaves for wear. Note the size of the tri-
angular wear patches where the high point of the seal contacts
the inside of the transition piece.
l. Spring seals should be checked for following defects. (A).

Cracks emitting from the hole at the end of a slot or (B) spot
weld cracks. See Fig. 5-20. The defects stated above, Items g
through k are cause for liner rejection. Spring seals must be re-
placed by qualified NUOVO PIGNONE Company Gas Tur-
bine repair facility.
5.2.3 Operation 24. Inspect Crossfire Tubes & Retainers
1. Inspect crossfire tubes for evidence of distortion weld cracks,

missing metal, burn-through and wear. Inspect the rings for
cracks where welded to the tube. Use Table 5-3 for inspection
criteria.
2. Inspect crossfire tube retainers for wear or spalling of hard facing

and evidence of bending. Use Table 5-3 for inspection criteria.
3. Report inspection findings on Inspection Field Report.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-33

Table 5-2 INSPECTION CRITERIA
Hi-Tech Louvered Cap and Liner Assembly
INSPECTION LIMIT DISPOSITION
CAP ASSEMBLY
1. Distortion due to over heat- Local bulge 1/8" or more. Replace.*

ing on liner, cowl or inner
cone.
Local bulge less than 1/8". Reuse.
2. Loss of material on liner None. Replace.

cowl or inner cap.
3. Cracking of louvered cap

cone.
a. Axial cracks be tween Up to 1/8" long, one per Reuse.
louvers. ligament.
1/4" long or more. Replace.
b. Louver end cracks. Up to 1/8" long on up to 50% Reuse.

of louvers.
c. Louver to louver cracks. Up to 3 per row, separated by Reuse.

5 uncracked ligaments.
d. Louver to louver crack None acceptable. Replace.

adjacent to row to row
crack.
* “Replace” does not mean part must be scrapped - this part can be repaired by a qualified
NUOVO PIGNONE Company repair facility.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-34

Table 5-2 INSPECTION CRITERIA (Cont’d)
4. Cap assembly loose in liner. Up to .0 1 5 " axial move- Reuse.

ment.
5. Fuel Nozzle Collar Wear. Up to 1/16" oversize on dia. Reuse.
LINER ASSEMBLY
6. Cracking of liner sleeve.
a. Axial crack be tween lou- Up to 1/8" long, any number. Reuse.

vers.
1/4" long or more. Replace.
b. Cracks, louver toward UP to 1/4" of hole diameter Reuse.

hole or hole toward lou- long.
ver.
c. Louver to louver cracks in Up to 3 cracks per separated Reuse.

same row by 5 uncracked louvers.
d. Louver to louver and row Cracks that form three sides Replace.
to adjacent cracks in com- of a rectangle.
bination.
7. Mechanical distortion of Liner sleeve 1/8" or more Round out and reuse.
liner due to rough handling. out-of round at seal end.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-35

8. Spring seals on liner.
a. Flattened by rough han- Individual leaves below Straighten seal leaves,

dling. drawing diameter of seal liquid penetrant check.
Reuse if not cracked.
b. Cracks in spring seals. Replace.
c. Loss of elasticity in Diameter below drawing Replace.

spring seals. minimum when measured
with PI tape.
d. Broken spot welds. Less than 1/3 total spot welds Reuse.
broken in scattered pattern.
4 adjacent welds broken. Replace.
Spot welds broken on each

side of joint.
e. Wear of seal leaves. Triangular wear patterns on Replace.

leaves touch.
9. Crossfire Tube Collars on

Liner.
a. Wear of collar. 50% loss of original thick- Replace.

ness.
b. Burning of collar. --- Replace.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-36

c. Cracks in collar. --- Replace.
10. Loss of thermal barrier coat- 1/4 square inch, approx. 1/2" Reuse.
ing in louvered section of x 1/2" or smaller, any num-
liner sleeve. ber.
11. Loss of TBC downstream of Reuse.

liner louver pattern.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-37

5.2.4 Operation 25. Inspect Transition Pieces
1. Clean, inspect and fluorescent penetrant test each of the follow-

ing areas on the transition pieces. Fluorescent penetrant test the
aft (rectangular) body end for a six-inch length on both inside and
outside surfaces. See Table 5-4 and Fig. 5-21.
a. Aft side seal slots for wear cracks and distortion.
b. Body for weld cracks, body cracks, out of roundness, corrosion

and deposits.
c. Aft bracket for weld and body cracks.
d. Aft transition piece body corners for weld or body cracks.
e. Forward support bracket for weld or body crack and wear.
f. Floating seal retainers for weld or retainer cracks and wear.
g. Floating seals for wear, cracks and radial movement.
2. Record all inspection findings on Inspection Field Report.
3. Repair welding procedures.
) NOTE
REPAIR WELDING PROCEDURES WILL NOT BE DESCRIBED EXCEPT TO NOTE

THAT GTAW (GAS TUNGSTEN ARC WELDING) IS THE ONLY WELD REPAIR PRO-
CEDURE ALLOWED ON MS-5001 TRANSITION PIECES. IT IS GENERALLY REC-
OMMENDED THAT TRANSITION PIECES REQUIRING REPAIRS BE SENT TO A
QUALIFIED NUOVO PIGNONE COMPANY GAS TURBINE REPAIR FACILITY.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-38

5.2.5 Operation 26. Inspect Combustion Casings
1. Make a visual inspection of the liner stop blocks, crossfire tube

retainer stops and radiation shields. Inspect for cracks, missing
pieces, corrosion and signs of overheating.
2. Inspect inside and outside of combustion casing and cover for
cracks, bulging, buckling, signs of overheating, and corrosion.
3. Inspect all cover sight port glass for cracks. Replace cracked
sight port glass with new assembly.
4. Inspect each combustion casing for foreign objects.
5. Report condition and findings on Inspection Field Report.
5.2.6 Operation 27. Inspect & Test Spark Plugs
) NOTE
THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS THAT THE ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS, CERAMIC CORE

AND CERAMIC ROD (TERMINAL EXTENSION) MAY BE FOUND DAMAGED DURING
DISASSEMBLY OF SPARK PLUG TIP, OR BROKEN WHILE HANDLING. THERE-
FORE, SPARE PARTS SHOULD ALWAYS BE AVAILABLE FOR THIS ACTIVITY.
1. Inspect the spark plug assembly for binding, galling, arcing,

tip/piston weld cracks, cracks, ceramic insulator cracks and dam-
age threads on electrical lead connection. See Table 5-5 for in-
spection criteria. See Fig. 5-22.
2. Check the movement of spark plug piston by pulling on the lead

end of the piston.
! WARNING
DO NOT PULL ON THE SPARK PLUG LEAD AT ANY TIME.
If any binding exists, the cylinder assembly must be disassembled

and the binding eliminated.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-39

TABLE 5-3
INSPECTION LIMITS CROSSFIRE TUBES AND RETAINERS
! WARNING
THE INSPECTION CRITERIA IN THIS TABLE 5-3 APPLIES TO NUOVO PIG-

NONE SUPPLIED CROSSFIRE TUBES AND RETAINERS ONLY.
INSPECT MAX. ACCEPTABLE DISPOSITION (FOR

LIMITS) PARTS BEYOND MAX.
LIMITS)
l. Bum through; missing metal None Replace
2. Distortion None Replace
3. Weld cracks None Replace
4. Wear 50% of original mate- Replace

rial
5. Spalling of hard face None Replace
Crossfire tube retainers
1. Wear 50% of original mate- Replace

rial
2. Spalling of hard Face None Replace
3. Evidence of bending None Straighten
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-40

TABLE 5-4
**MS-5001 FLOATING SEAL TRANSITION PIECE INSPECTION LIMITS
! WARNING

NONE SUPPLIED TRANSITION PIECES ONLY.

LIMITS)
Aft side seal slots

1. Wear 0.030" deep *Replace
2. Cracks None *Replace
Body
1. Body or weld cracks 0.250" long *Replace
2. Out-of-roundness 0.080" from original *Replace

contour
3. Corrosion 0.030" reduction. *Replace

Original mat'l thick
4. Deposits 0.030" thick *Replace
* "Replace" does not mean part must be scrapped; part can be repaired by a qualified
Nuovo Pignone repair facility.
** If fixed seal and or unstiffened transition pieces are still in use, contact your Nuovo
Pignone Field Service Representative for inspection and repair requirements.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-41

TABLE 5-4
MS 5001 FLOATING SEAL TRANSITION PIECE INSPECTION LIMITS (cont'd)

LIMITS)
Aft bracket
1. Weld or body cracks 0.250" long. Inside and *Replace
outside surface
Aft picture frame/body corners

1. Weld or body cracks None *Replace
Forward support brackets

1. Weld or body cracks 0.250" long. Inside and *Replace
outside surface
2. Wear (Engagement surf.) 0.060" from original *Replace

thick
Floating seal retainers

1. Weld or retainer cracks None *Replace
2. Wear 50% of original mat'l *Replace
Floating Seals
1. Wear 50% of original mat'l *Replace
2. Cracks None *Replace
3. Radial movement 0.080" min. from nom. *Replace

dim.
* "Replace" does not mean part must be scrapped; part can be repaired by a qualified
Nuovo Pignone repair facility.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-42

To disassemble the cylinder assembly, remove the four nuts and

lockwashers from the top of the cylinder; then remove the top of
the cylinder.
! WARNING
TAKE CARE NOT TO LOSE OR DAMAGE THE NICKEL SEALING RINGS AT THE
TOP AND BOTTOM OF THE CYLINDER. REMOVE THE SPRING AND PULL THE
PISTON ASSEMBLY OUT.
Remove all foreign material, such as dirt, chips from the cylinder
and piston assemblies. Remove all oxidation and galling marks
and correct the cause of galling. Spark plug parts are shown in
Figure 5-22.
3. Disassemble the spark plug piston assembly by removing the tack

welds from the spark plug shell and piston rod hex sections and
unscrewing the spark plug shell. The ceramic core and ceramic
rod (terminal extension) should be disassembled to inspect the
electrical components completely.
! WARNING
CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN REMOVING THE TERMINAL EXTENSION

(CERAMIC ROD) FROM THE CORE ASSEMBLY TO AVOID BREAKAGE OF THE
CORE ASSEMBLY'S CERAMIC SHELL.
) NOTE
ON LATER VINTAGE SPARK PLUGS THE PISTON ASSEMBLY IS ONE UNIT AND HAS
A RETAINING NUT WHICH THREADS ONTO THE TOP PORTION OF THE PISTON
ASSEMBLY AND A TAB IS WELDED BETWEEN THE RETAINING NUT AND PISTON
ASSEMBLY. THIS TAB MUST BE REMOVED TO DISASSEMBLE THE PISTON AS-
SEMBLY. SEE FIG. 5-23.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-43

4. Reassemble the spark plug as follows:
a. Install new nickel washers on either side of the ceramic core.

The nickel washer on the ceramic core end may have remained
in the shell during disassembly. Similarly the nickel washer on
the ceramic rod side of the ceramic core may have remained in
the shoulder provided for it in the piston rod. They should be
removed and discarded.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-44

TABLE 5-5
SPARK PLUG INSPECTION LIMITS
! WARNING

NONE SUPPLIED SPARK PLUGS ONLY.

LIMITS)
Spark plug
1. Binding None Disassemble and clean
2. Galling None Polish with fine abrasive

cloth
3. Ceramic insul. crack None Replace
4. Bad threads on electrical connec- None Replace

tion
5. Test firing does not spark gap None Replace insulator or termi-
nal extension
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-45

b. Check to ensure that the nickel washers are assembled to con-

form with the contours of the ceramic core.
c. Assemble the ceramic rod (terminal extension) into the piston

rod.
! WARNING
EXERCISE CARE INSERTING THE TERMINAL EXTENSION TO PREVENT

BREAKAGE.
d. Assemble the ceramic core into the shell and screw the shell
into the piston rod hand tight, center the core electrode and ad-
just the tip to insure gaps of 0.085 - 0.095 inch exist between
the center and side electrodes.
e. Torque the shell to 55-65 ft. lbs. and check the gap between
the shell hex section and the piston rod hex section, this gap
should be between 0.085 and 0.135 inch. Any dimension out-
side this range indicates a probable misassembly and requires a
recheck of the spark plug assembly. See Figure 5.22.
f. Check the cylinder seal gaskets to be sure there are no high

spots. Assemble a gasket to the spark plug cylinder bottom
flange and install the cylinder, piston assembly and spring.
Mount a gasket in the cylinder top flange and install the flange
on the four tie rods. Assemble lockwashers and nuts to the tie
rods. After checking to make sure the nickel seals are seated,
torque the four nuts to 60-89 ft. lbs. using a crisscross tighten-
ing sequence.
Upon completion of assembly, check the spark plug for freedom

of movement (binding) by pulling on the lead end of the piston
and working the assembly in and out several times. The total
stroke should be 2.50 inches.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-46

! WARNING
EXERCISE CARE IN MAKING THIS CHECK, DO NOT LET THE PISTON ROD
ASSEMBLY SLAM BACK FROM THE FULL RETRACTED POSITION.
5. Prior to installing the spark plug assembly to the unit, test the
spark plug as follows: reconnect the spark-plug lead, with the
spark plug out of the turbine, but with its body resting against the
turbine casing (or other grounded metal). Make sure the elec-
trode end of the spark plug is not grounded.
! DANGER
DO NOT TEST SPARK PLUGS IN OR NEAR AN AREA WITH EXPLOSIVE AT-

MOSPHERE. BE CAREFUL OF HIGH VOLTAGE.
6. Energize the ignition circuit and check the spark of the spark plug
for approximately two minutes. If heating occurs at the shell-
piston rod joint, this indicates arcing between the core and ce-
ramic-rod contact. This can be remedied by disassembly of the
sparkplug tip, and cleaning of the core electrical contact. If arc-
ing does not occur at the tip of the electrodes; clean the elec-
trodes and reset the electrode gaps at 0.085 to 0.095 inch between
center and side electrodes. Gaps on either side of the center elec-
trode must be within 0.010 inch of each other, check voltage to
the ignition transformer, and check ignitor lead voltage. Discon-
nect the lead from the ignitor, and arc to ground.
) NOTE
BE SURE THAT THE TIP OF THE LEAD IS WITHIN ONE-HALF INCH OF GROUND
BEFORE IGNITION VOLTAGE IS APPLIED.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-47

7. If no arcing occurs between the lead tip and ground, the trans-
former or the lead are shorted and should be replaced. If arcing
occurs, the ignitor is faulty and should be examined for an open
circuit, short circuit or failure of the terminal extension. A short
circuit can be checked by checking the continuity between the
center electrode and ground. The terminal extension can be visu-
ally inspected for signs of distress.
8. After the spark plug has been successfully test-fired, disconnect

the ignition lead and weld the shell to the piston rod with 1/4 inch
welds along every other flat of the hex section of the shell Figure
5-23. Use a GTAW welding process with a Filler ER308. In
situations where GTAW welding is not available, stick weld with
weld electrode E308-15, E308-16. Allow the welded section to
reach ambient temperature and grind away any weld surface
which extends beyond the outside diameter (OD) of the piston
rod. Check the clearance between the welds and mounting plate
hole by pushing on the shell end of the spark plug until the spark
plug is fully retracted. The welds should not cause any restriction
in the retraction or extending of the spark plug. Retest the spark
plug for sparking with ignition voltage. If the sparking does not
occur, grind or lathe away welds and repeat test procedure.
9. On later vintage spark plugs the piston assembly is one unit and
has a retaining nut which threads onto the top portion of the pis-
ton assembly. If the spark plug is of this vintage weld a tab be-
tween the retaining nut and piston assembly as shown in Fig. 5-
23. The tab material should be AISI chrome nickel steel, bright
annealed, its dimensions should be .060" x .250" x .500". Use
GATW welding process with Filler ER308. In situations where
GTAW welding is not available, stick weld with Weld Electrode
E308-15, E308-16. Upon completion of welding the tab on the
spark plug, check to ensure there is no restriction in the retraction
or extending of the spark plug. Retest the spark plug with igni-
tion voltage.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-48

5.2.7 Operation 28. Inspect & Test Flame Detectors (Ultraviolet Flame
Detectors <Honeywell> No Speedtronic Cards)
) NOTE
THE FLAME DETECTOR TUBE IS CONTAINED IN THE FLAME SENSOR SUBAS-

SEMBLY. COMBINED WITH THE BODY AND WINDOW SUBASSEMBLY, THE TWO
SUBASSEMBLIES FORM THE ULTRAVIOLET FLAME SENSOR. EITHER OF THESE
SUBASSEMBLIES ARE FIELD REPLACEABLE, BUT NEITHER SUBASSEMBLY IS
FIELD REPAIRABLE (EXCEPT FOR CLEANING) AND MUST BE RETURNED TO
MANUFACTURER FOR REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT.
1. Clean the scanner lenses. Reconnect flame detector wiring and

energize the control panel. With power on the control panel
cheek that FL-1A and FL-1B indicating lights are out.
! WARNING
SENSOR IS POLARITY SENSITIVE AND WILL BE DAMAGED IF CONNECTED

WITH REVERSE POLARITY. BLACK LEAD OF SENSOR IS POSITIVE.
2. Using an ultraviolet source at the sensor assure that each flame

detector picks up and drops out when ultraviolet source is placed
in front of the sensor and removed.
) NOTE
A HIGH LEVEL OF ULTRAVIOLET IS DEFINED AS A MATCH OR CANDLE AT A DIS-

TANCE OF LESS THAN TWO INCHES. THE UNIT HOWEVER, SHOULD BE CAPABLE
OF DETECTING A MATCH OR CANDLE AT APPROXIMATELY EIGHTEEN INCHES.
5.2.8 Operation 29. Take Turbine Rotor Float (Thrust Clearance)
1. The maximum total fore and aft movement of the rotor without
distorting any of the rotor or bearing mounts is usually 14 to 20
mils.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-49

) NOTE
THE TURBINE ROTOR SHOULD BE AGAINST THE ACTIVE THRUST BEARING BUT
NOT LOADED TO DEFLECT THE BEARING OR CASINGS WHEN THE INDICATOR IS
READ.
2. The rotor float is measured by mounting a dial indicator on the

Number I bearing housing to be able to read axial movement of
the turbine rotor.
3. Use a wedge-type remote pump hydraulic jack. Place the wedge

between the second-stage diaphragm and the face of the second
stage turbine wheel. See Fig. 5-24.
) NOTE
DO NOT JACK AGAINST BUCKET. DO NOT DAMAGE SEAL TEETH.
4. Jack rotor carefully aft, toward load gear, and at the same time
note movement of rotor with dial indicator located No. 1 bearing
housing. The rotor will move suddenly, accompanied by a solid
bump. This is not unusual. Release the jack loading and read the
dial indicator.
5. Set the dial indicator back to zero reading and reposition the hy-
draulic jack wedge between the second-stage diaphragm and the
face of the first-stage turbine wheel. See Fig. 5-24. Carefully jack
the rotor forward. Again the rotor will move suddenly with a
bump. Release the jack loading and read the dial indicator. Re-
cord the axial movement on Inspection Field Report. Repeat steps
3, 4 and 5 three times to assure repeatibility.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-50

5.2.9 Operation 30. Take Turbine Clearance Checks
1. It is suggested that turbine clearances be taken under the guid-

ance of your NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field Service Repre-
sentative. The need to monitor the internal gas turbine clearances
closely is critical. On every removal of the turbine casing, the in-
ternal clearances called for on the Inspection Field Report should
be determined. Any clearances not within specified tolerances, as
indicated on the Unit Clearance Diagram in the Reference Draw-
ings Section of this Service Manual, should be reported before
any parts are removed to the NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field
Service Representative in case rechecks are needed. The data will
be compared to the unit’s original clearance data so that a deter-
mination for corrective action, if any, can be made.
) NOTE
THE USE OF PROPER TOOLS FOR TAKING CLEARANCE MEASUREMENTS IS AN

IMPORTANT FACTOR IN OBTAINING CORRECT READINGS. SEE STANDARD PRAC-
TICES, SECTION 2, IN THIS INSPECTION MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION.
! WARNING
STRING TIE ALL HAND TOOLS TO THE WRIST TO AVOID LOSS IN THE TUR-
BINE.
2. Left and Right Side (Definition)
The left side of the unit by definition is the left hand side when
the observer is facing the compressor inlet and looking down-
stream (direction of air flow) toward the generator load coupling
end.
3. Turbine Rotor Clearances
a. The rotor must be positioned upstream against the active thrust

bearing but not loaded. Any pressure applied in moving the ro-
tor forward for the float check should be released at this time.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-51

b. Prepare for and take clearances around the first-stage nozzle.

Apply a downstream load not to exceed 2,000 pounds on the
first-stage nozzle outer sidewall, both sides, to assure that the
nozzle is seated downstream against the first-stage shrouds,
and the first-stage shrouds are seated downstream against the
turbine casing.
) NOTE
1. DO NOT WEDGE OTHER NOZZLE SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH FIRST-STAGE

NOZZLE.
2. UNLOAD EACH STAGE AFTER CLEARANCES ARE TAKEN ON THAT STAGE.
3. WEDGE NOZZLES AND DIAPHRAGMS AFT WITH HARDWOOD WEDGES. THE

WEDGES SHOULD BE FASTENED TOGETHER WITH A CHAIN, CABLE OR
ROPE SO THEY WILL NOT DROP INTO THE TURBINE. SEE FIGS. 5-25 AND 5-
26.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-52

5.3 REASSEMBLY
5.3.1 Operation 31. Install Turbine Casing Upper-Half for Roundness

& Turbine Bucket Tip Clearance Cheek.
) NOTE
BEFORE REINSTALLING TURBINE FIRST- AND SECOND-STAGE NOZZLES AND

TRANSITION PIECES, IT IS BEST TO RECORD AND REVIEW TURBINE ROUNDNESS
AND TIP CLEARANCES. THIS DATA MUST BE OBTAINED IF THE TURBINE HAS
BEEN UPRATED WITH ADVANCED TECHNOLOGY COMPONENTS OR IF ANY
BUCKETS OR STATIONARY SHROUDS HAVE BEEN REPLACED.
In order to do this, the upper-half of the turbine shell must be bolted

on with the stationary shrouds assembled.
1. Perform Operations 17 and 18 in the reverse sequence and only

install horizontal joint bolts and body-bound bolts.
! WARNING
USE GUIDE PINS, RESTRAINING CABLE & SNATCH BLOCK. TAKE GREAT
CARE NOT TO DAMAGE BUCKET TIPS.
2. Using feeler gauge, check and record the radial tip clearances of
the first- and second-stage turbine buckets. Make the measure-
ment at each end of every stationary shroud block.
3. Take the concentricity readings, record them all on the Inspection

Field Report, and report them to your NUOVO PIGNONE Com-
pany Field Service Rep. for evaluation and disposition.
5.3.2 Operation 32. Remove Turbine Casing Upper-Half
1. Remove horizontal joint bolts and body-bound bolts.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-53

2. Perform Operations 10 and 11 in the correct sequence to remove

the turbine easing in preparation for final assembly.
! WARNING
USE GUIDE PINS, RESTRAINING CABLE & SNATCH BLOCK. TAKE GREAT
CARE NOT TO DAMAGE BUCKET TIPS.
5.3.3 Operation 33. Recheck Turbine Clearances
1. Refer to Hot Gas Path Disassembly Operation 14 for taking tur-

bine clearances procedure.
2. Record all turbine clearances called for on Inspection Field Re-

port for both first- and second-stage nozzles and turbine rotor.
3. Compare data with unit Clearance Diagram in the Reference

Drawings Section of the unit service manual.
4. Report any discrepancies to your NUOVO PIGNONE Company

Field Service Representative so that corrective action, if neces-
sary, can be made before proceeding with any further reassembly
of the turbine.
5.3.4 Operation 34. Install Lower-Half Transition Pieces into Position
1. Check to be sure that the packing strips have been properly as-
sembled into the circumferential grooves around the outer and the
inner sidewalls of the first-stage nozzle.
2. Reassemble the lower-half transition pieces to the lower-half,

first stage nozzle (Nos. 3. 4, 55 6 and 7). Start with the bottom
transition piece, No. 5, and work up. Install side seals and new
shoulder bolts. Torque bolts to 32 to 37 foot-pounds.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-54

3. Check to see that the transition piece, forward brackets are square
with the support brackets in the compressor discharge casing
bulkhead. See Fig. 5-27.
4. Lightly coat the new shoulder-bolts with Fel-Pro C-102 anti-seize

compound. Install new aft bracket shoulder bolts, with new lock-
ing plates and torque the bolts to 60 to 68 foot-pounds using the
procedure described overleaf.
a. Tap the forward edge of transition piece (top, bottom, left and
right) with a rawhide mallet to seat the transition piece to the
first-stage nozzle. Repeat process until repeated torquing and
tapping produces no torque change, and there is no gap be-
tween the retaining ring and the transition piece mounting
bracket. Lock the aft bracket shoulder bolt with a new lock-
plate. Bend the lockplate a minimum of two tabs to lock the
shoulder bolt securely.
! WARNING
ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND SHOULD BE USED ONLY ON THE BOLTING IN THE

COMBUSTION SYSTEM. DO NOT USE ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND IN ANY
PLACES WHERE IT COULD GET INTO THE HOT GAS PATH.
5.3.5 Operation 35. Install Upper-Half Transition Pieces Into Position
2. Reassemble the upper-half transition pieces to the upper-half,

first stage nozzle (Nos. l, 2, 8, 9 and 10). Start with the two tran-
sition pieces located just above the horizontal joint (Nos. 2 and 8)
and work up. Install side seals and new shoulder bolts. Torque
bolts to 32 to 37 foot-pounds.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-55

3. Check to see that the transition piece forward brackets are square
with the support bracket in the compressor discharge easing bulk-
head. See Fig. 5-27.
4. Lightly coat the shoulder bolts with Fel-Pro C-102 anti-seize

compound. Install the aft bracket shoulder bolts, with new lock-
procedure described overleaf.
Tap the forward edge of transition piece (top, bottom left and
tapping produces no torque change, and there is no gap between
the retaining ring and the transition piece mounting bracket.
Lock the aft bracket shoulder bolt with a new locking plate.
Bend the lockplate a minimum of two tabs to lock the shoulder
bolt securely.
! WARNING

COMBUSTION SYSTEM. DO NOT USE ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND IN ANYAREAS
WHERE IT COULD GET INTO THE HOT GAS PATH.
5.3.6 Operation 36. Install Upper-Half Turbine Casing
1. Rig cables, chainfalls and comealongs as follows to lift the tur-

bine casing level.
) NOTE

2. Hang a 5-ton chainfall off the crane hook using a suitable

shackle.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-56

3. Hang a 20-foot cable and hook from the chainfall to extend the
full height of a vertical stack.

duct.
5. Mount a roller bracket on the forward wall of the plenum.
6. Attach two cables of equal length to the forward turbine casing

flange lifting provisions. Attach opposite end of lifting cables to
the 20-foot cable hook.
7. Attach shorter cables and 1-1/2 or 2-ton comealongs to the hook

and to each rear lifting trunnion on the turbine casing. (Keep the
cable hook close to the turbine casing to allow sufficient lift).
8. Lift the turbine casing off of its forward vertical flange and with
the chainfall and comealongs, reposition the casing and set it on
its horizontal joint flange using suitable blocking to protect the
horizontal joint flange.
9. Flat file and clean the horizontal and vertical joint flanges on the
turbine casing, compressor discharge casing, and exhaust hood
casing. Coat the compressor discharge casing and exhaust hood
casing with a light film of anti-seize compound.
! WARNING
ONLY A THIN FILM OF ANTI-SEIZE IS TO BE USED OR IT WILL INTERFERE

WITH PULLING JOINTS TOGETHER AND ACT AS A GASKET.
DO NOT GET ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND ON OR INTO THE HOT GAS COMPO-
NENTS.
10. Inspect and check the lower-half turbine casing for cleanliness
and security of all items and secure no foreign objects can enter
during the reassembly of the top-half turbine casing.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-57

11. Adjust the rear comealongs to pull the lift point closer to the cen-
tre of gravity, which is 15.14 inches from the aft flange.
) NOTE
USE A LEVEL ON THE TOP FLAT PORTION OF THE TURBINE CASING WHILE AD-
JUSTING THE REAR COMEALONGS. ONCE THE CASING IS LEVEL, ALL FURTHER
LIFTING SHOULD BE DONE USING THE CRANE AND CHAINFALL.
12. Install a tag line on the turbine casing and lift the casing over the
turbine. Using the rigging and tag line, lower and guide the cas-
ing as close to position as possible over the lower-half turbine
casing.
13. With the casing centered over the turbine, attach the snatch block
and restraining cable and pull the turbine casing against the ex-
haust hood flange. Insert guide pins in the body-bound stud hole
locations and start lowering the casing into place using the 5-ton
chainfall.
) NOTE
IF GUIDE PINS ARE NOT AVAILABLE, THEY CAN BE FABRICATED USING PIPE OR
ROD 30 INCHES LONG MACHINED .010 INCHES LOOSE TO FIT THE BODYBOUND
BOLT HOLES. WELD A STOP PLATE AT THE TOP.
14. Lower the turbine casing utilizing the guide pins provided, mak-
ing sure the horizontal joint sealing strips at the second-stage
joints are in position.
) NOTE
MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE UPPER- AND LOWER-HALF TURBINE NOZZLE SEG-
MENTS ARE LOADED IN THE SAME DIRECTION TO AVOID MISMATCH AT THE
HORIZONTAL JOINT SEALS.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-58

15. Continue lowering the casing using the chainfall while keeping
the horizontal joint gaps equal on both sides and fore and aft by
adjusting the rear comealongs. Lower the casing to within 3 to 4
inches of the lower casing joint. Recheck joint gap and adjust if
necessary.
Apply Perfect Seal on the surface of the horizontal joint and only
for a distance of one-inch on both sides of the four-way joint. Do
not apply Perfect Seal to the surface of the vertical joint.
16. Lower the upper casing into final position using the chainfall.
5.3.7 Operation 37. Install Turbine Casing Bolts
) NOTE
APPLY FEL-PRO C-102 ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND TO ALL BOLTS AND AXIAL PINS
BEFORE INSTALLING.
1. Install all bolts hand tight, including body-bound bolts.
2. Tighten and torque the horizontal joint bolts starting at the mid-
point and working alternately to the ends. See Fig. 5-28.
3. Alternately tighten and torque all the vertical volts, working

down each side from the top vertical centerline. Work both the aft
and forward flanges simultaneously.
) NOTE
IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO REMOVE THE HORIZONTAL JOINT BOLTS NEXT TO

THE VERTICAL JOINT SO THE VERTICAL JOINT BOLTS CAN BE TIGHTENED. RE-
PLACE THE HORIZONTAL JOINT BOLTS, TIGHTEN AND TORQUE THE BOLTS.
4. On turbines with borescope access ports, reinstall the borescope

access plugs and retainers in the first- and second-stage turbine
areas.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-59

5.3.8 Operation 38. Install Upper-Half, First- & Second-Stage Nozzle

Eccentric Pins
1. An eccentric pin is to be fitted to the first-stage nozzle after the

nozzle has been installed and properly positioned. If the nozzle
was not replaced and no adjustments were made to achieve
proper clearance, the eccentric pin should set properly without
any adjustments. However, if the nozzle was replaced or ad-
justed, the following procedure is to be used:
a. Cut the old retaining strap from the top of the eccentric pin
heads and grind both surfaces smooth.
b. Install the eccentric pins into the casing to their full depth,
carefully as not to disturb the lateral centering of the nozzle.
c. Coat top portion of the pins with Dykem Blue.
d. Coat the top and sides of the retaining straps with Dykem
Blue.
e. Place the straps, coated side up, on top the eccentric pins and
bolt up with the two bolting strap bolts.
) NOTE
APPLY A LIGHT COAT OF FEL-PRO C-102 ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND TO THE BOLT

THREADS.
f. Scribe a mark on the heads of the pins along with both sides of
the retaining straps.
g. Scribe two transverse marks across the tops and down the sides
of the retaining strap and continuing across the heads of the
pin.
h. Remove the retaining strap bolts, strap and eccentric pin.
i. Hold the pin in a vice, reposition the strap on the pin head,
aligning the scribe marks, and weld the strap to the pin head
per instructions on Fig. 5-29.
j. Lightly coat the eccentric pin with Fel-Pro C-102 anti-seize
compound and reinstall it in the casing.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-60

k. Install the retaining strap bolts and properly tighten. See Fig.
5-30.
5.3.9 Operation 39. Assemble Exhaust Plenum Upper-Half Forward

Flex Seals & Clamp Segments
1. Check to see that the flex seal joint groove is clean and free of
burrs.
2. Assemble the flex seals and gaskets into position, making sure
the gasket and flex seal joints do not coincide.
3. Apply Fel-Pro C-102 anti-seize compound to the clamp segment

bolts, assemble clamp segments and bolts. Torque bolts to proper
tightness.
5.3.10 Operation 40. Remove Mechanical Support Jacks & Jack Sup-
ports from underneath Unit Casing
! WARNING
MECHANICAL SUPPORT JACKS ARE NOT TO BE REMOVED UNTIL ALL UP-

PER CASINGS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED AND BOLTED UP.
1. Place two dial indicators (one on each side of the turbine casing)
at the horizontal joint near the area that the jacks are supporting.
Attach dial indicators to turbine enclosure frame and set to indi-
cate on turbine casing. Set dial indicators to read zero.
2. Release the jacks and observe whether turbine casing has low-
ered.
3. If turbine casing moved downward when the support jacks were
released, remove the support jacks and shim supports from under
the turbine.
4. If turbine casing did not move downward when support jacks
were released, contact your NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field
Service Representative for disposition and corrective action.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-61

5.3.11 Operation 41. Take Closing Compressor & Turbine Rotor Posi-
tioning Checks
) NOTE

! WARNING
DO NOT CONFUSE CLEARANCEOMETER HOLES WITH PROBE HOLES.

CLEARANCEOMETER HOLES ARE TOO SMALL FOR A DEPTH MICROMETER.
PRESSOR.

cheeks at six-points: top centerline, bottom centerline, and above
and below the horizontal joint on each side. Record clearances
) NOTE

2. The 11th stage compressor holes (four total) are located 3.875
inches aft from the forward face of the compressor discharge cas-
ing forward flange.
3. The 15th stage compressor probe holes (four total) are located
16.40 inches aft from the forward face of the compressor dis-
charge casing forward flange.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-62

by removing the plugs located at follows. The 11th stage plug is
3- 15' off top and bottom vertical centerline and 10 - 45' above
horizontal joint; 15th stage plug is 10- off top and bottom vertical
centerline and 10-40' above horizontal joint. A stamped number
casing. Record clearances on Inspection Field Report. Compres-
sor or tip clearances can be taken as follows:
a. Remove plug and place an adaptor into the machined counter-

bore of the casing. The adaptor will allow the base of the
depth micrometer to rest squarely on the casing, thereby allow-
ing the micrometer rod to penetrate the probe hole accurately.
) NOTE
Take the depth micrometer and measure to the top of the blade.
! WARNING
PATH.
5. Omit the first-stage turbine six-point checks at the reassembly

stage.
6. The second-stage turbine six-point checks are to be taken with

feelers.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-63

7. Take the concentricity readings as shown on the Inspection Field

Report readings to your NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field Ser-
vice Representative for evaluation and disposition.
8. Any access hole cut in the exhaust diffuser should have a cover
welded on to provide a smooth gas path.
5.3.12 Operation 42. Install Upper & Lower 4th- & 10th-Stage Cooling
& Sealing Air Lines & Extraction Valves
1. On reassembly of piping, use new gaskets on all gasketed joints.
2. Assemble all 4th- and 10-stage piping removed, carefully replac-

ing all orifices in their location whence they were removed at dis-
assembly.
) NOTE
IF THE LOCATION IDENTIFICATION OF THE ORIFICES IS LOST, REFER TO THE

COOLING AND SEALING AIR PIPING DIAGRAM IN THE REFERENCE DRAWINGS
SECTION OF THE SERVICE MANUAL FOR THE LOCATION AND SIZE OF ORIFICE
REQUIRED.
3. Reconnect the (20CB-1) tubing air lines to the bleed valve actua-
tor cylinder, reinstall the 'V' brackets and clamping rings to both
valves.
5.3.13 Operation 43. Install Wheelspace Thermocouples
1. Install four compression fittings and outer guide tubes in the

same locations they were removed from. Be sure they engage the
guide tubes attached to the second-stage nozzle segments.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-64

) NOTE
THE REMOVABLE-TYPE THERMOCOUPLES ARE LOCATED IN SEGMENTS 9 AND

12 IN THE SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE. SOME FIELD UPGRADE UNITS HAVE THESE
THERMOCOUPLES LOCATED IN SEGMENTS 2 AND 5. THERE ARE TWO THERMO-
COUPLES PER SEGMENT.
Refer to the second-stage nozzle arrangement drawings in the

Parts Lists and Drawings Volume of this Service Manual for de-
tails if needed.
2. Prior to installing the wheelspace thermocouples, test the thermo-

couples to ensure they are operational. This can be done by ap-
plying a small amount of heat to the tip and reading the output on
a temperature meter.
) NOTE
THE ASSEMBLED LENGTH OF THE ENGAGED PORTION OF THE THERMOCOU-

PLE IS STAMPED ON THE TURBINE CASING ADJACENT TO THE THERMOCOUPLE
TUBING INSTALLATION HOLE. THIS DIMENSION MAY BE USED FOR REFERENCE
WHEN INSTALLING THE THERMOCOUPLES. THE REFERENCE DIMENSION IS
FROM THE TOP SWAGELOK FERRELL TO THE TIP OF THE THERMOCOUPLE.
3. Install the wheelspace thermocouples through the installation tub-

ing in the turbine casing into the second-stage nozzle segments.
5.3.14 Operation 44. Install Outer Combustion Casings
1. Starting with the No. 5 combustion casing, insert new flexitalic

gasket in the groove face of the combustion casing.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-65

) NOTE
A SMALL AMOUNT OF PERFECT SEAL OR EQUIVALENT SHOULD BE APPLIED TO

HOLD THE GASKET IN PLACE DURING ASSEMBLY. DO NOT USE PRESSURE SEN-
SITIVE TAPE TO HOLD GASKET IN PLACE, LEAKS MAY OCCUR AS THE TAPE DE-
TERIORATES.
2. Rig the combustion casing and slide into position. Coat the
threads on the bolts with Fel-Pro C-102 anti-seize compound and
bolt the combustion casing in place.
3. Tighten bolts 180 degrees apart, and work around the bolt circle
in this manner.
4. Install new gaskets on the crossfire tube flanges of the combus-

tion casing.
5. Install combustion casing Nos. 4 & 6, 7 & 8, 3 & 2, and 1 & 9

per steps 1, 2, 3 and 4.
6. Tighten crossfire tube flange bolts at the same time as combus-

tion casing bolts to keep combustion casings in alignment.
7. Install No. 10 combustion casing per steps 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6.
5.3.15 Operation 45. Install Combustion Liners & Crossfire Tubes
) NOTE
COMBUSTION LINERS ARE NOT ALL INTERCHANGEABLE, SINCE SOME LINERS

CONTAIN LOCATION HOLES FOR SPARK PLUGS AND FLAME DETECTORS.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-66

1. Starting with No. 5 combustion liner, assemble the combustion

liner into combustion outer casing No. 5, making sure the spring
seals (hula skirt) engages the transition piece properly, and the
liner engages the forward liner stops inside of the combustion
casing. See Fig. 5-31.
2. Install the crossfire tubes from the adjacent combustion outer cas-
ings into combustion liner No. 5.
3. Assemble combustion liner No. 4 into No. 4 combustion outer

casing.
4. Slide the crossfire tube into position between Combustion Liners

4 and 5 and slide the crossfire tube retainers over the crossfire
tube retainer guides on the inner forward wall of the combustion
easing up to and under the collar on the crossfire tube. See Fig. 5-
32.
! WARNING
CROSSFIRE TUBES MUST NOT BIND IN THE COLLARS ON THE COMBUSTION

LINER SLEEVES.
5. Continue reassembly of the remaining combustion liners, cross-

fire tubes and crossfire tube retainers per steps 1, 2, 3 and 4
above.
5.3.16 Operation 46. Install Flame Detectors & Spark Plugs

1. Install new gasket, assemble flame detector bodies with the valve
handles in an upright position to combustion casings from which
they were removed on disassembly.
2. Lightly coat bolts with Fel-Pro C- 102 anti-seize compound and

bolt up flame detector bodies to outer combustion casing flanges.
3. Reassemble flame detectors to flame detector bodies and recon-

nect wiring to flame detectors.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-67

4. Replace enclosure screens on flame detectors.
5. Reconnect power supply to flame detectors.
6. Install new gaskets and assemble spark plugs and sealers to outer
combustion casings from which they were removed.
7. Lightly coat bolts with Fel-Pro C- 102 anti-seize compound and

bolt up spark plugs.
) NOTE
CENTRE THE SPARK PLUG PISTON ELECTRODE ASSEMBLY WITHIN .020 INCH OF
THE COMBUSTION LINER HOLES' CENTERLINE.
8. Check electrode assembly for binding and correct if necessary.
9. Reconnect spark plug leads.
! WARNING
DO NOT ALLOW PISTON/ELECTRODE ASSEMBLY TO IMPACT WITHIN THE

UNIT WHEN MAKING THE ABOVE CHECK.
5.3.17 Operation 47. Install Combustion Casing Covers
1. Install new combustion casing cover gasket.
) NOTE
APPLYING A SMALL AMOUNT OF “PERFECT SEAL” ON THE GASKET IN A FEW

PLACES WILL KEEP THE GASKET IN PLACE DURING COVER REASSEMBLY.
2. Lightly coat cover bolts with Fel-Pro C-102 anti-seize compound.
3. Inspect inside the combustion casing for foreign objects and se-
curity of all parts.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-68

4. Assemble the combustion casing cover with the two 3/4-inch

bolts and nuts used for positioning, then install the remaining
fourteen 5/8-inch bolts and nuts.
5. Assemble the remaining covers per steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 above.
) NOTE
ON SOME OF THE EARLIER UNITS THERE ARE NO 3/4-INCH BOLTS. IT IS THEN

NECESSARY TO REINSTALL THE FUEL NOZZLE ASSEMBLY BEFORE TIGHTENING
COVER BOLTS IN ORDER TO OBTAIN PROPER POSITIONING.
5.3.18 Operation 48. Install Fuel Nozzles
1. Install new gasket on fuel nozzle assembly and place fuel nozzle
on combustion casing cover from which it was removed.
! WARNING
DO NOT IMPACT FUEL NOZZLE ON LINER DURING THIS OPERATION. EN-

SURE FUEL NOZZLE ENTERS OPENING IN CAP.
2. Lightly coat all bolting with Fel-Pro C-102 anti-seize compound.
3. Position fuel nozzle assembly on cover and bolt up fuel nozzle.
) NOTE
IF FUEL NOZZLE BOLTING FLANGE TO COMBUSTION CASING IS A FOUR-HOLE

BOLTING FLANGE, THEN LOCKPLATES ARE REQUIRED. INSTALL LOCKPLATES
AND BEND TABS TO LOCK BOLTS.
4. Keep fuel nozzle atomizing air and or fuel line nozzle connection
covered until the atomizing air and/or fuel lines to the fuel noz-
zles are connected.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-69

) NOTE
ON DUAL FUEL UNITS INSTALL PURGE LINE CHECK VALVES ALSO.
5.3.19 Operation 49. Install Fuel Check Valves
1. Lightly coat the male pipe threads of outlet ends of the check
valves with Tefloc Sealant X9366 so that the first thread is free
of any sealant.
! WARNING
IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT THAT SEALANT DOES NOT EXTEND OVER

THE END OF THE THREADS.
2. Assemble the check valves to the liquid fuel inlet fittings of the
fuel nozzle assemblies. Each check valve is to be reinstalled on
the same fuel nozzle from which it was removed at disassembly.
3. Tighten the cheek valves by applying wrench to the hex flat near-
est the fuel nozzle. Securely hold the fuel nozzle fitting to pre-
vent twisting the fuel tube when installing the check valve.
5.3.20 Operation 50. Install Atomizing Air Manifold
1. Remove protective covers from atomizing air manifold piping

and ensure that dirt and foreign objects have not entered the pip-
ing.
2. Install the atomizing air manifold using new gaskets.
3. Lightly coat all bolting with Fel-Pro C-102 antiseize compound,

install and torque bolting.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-70

) NOTE
DURING ASSEMBLY OF FLANGES, PARALLELISM BETWEEN FLANGES MUST BE

MAINTAINED. IF PIPING IS NOT STRAIN-FREE WITHIN 0. 125-INCH, IT MUST BE
CORRECTED OR REPLACED.
5.3.21 Operation 51. Install Fuel Gas Manifold
1. Remove protective covers from fuel gas manifold piping and en-
sure that dirt and foreign objects have not entered the piping.
2. Install the fuel gas manifold using new gaskets.
3. Lightly coat all bolting with Fel-Pro C-102 anti-seize compound,

install and torque bolting.
) NOTE

MAINTAINED. IF PIPING IS NOT STRAIN-FREE WITHIN 0.125-INCH, IT MUST BE
5.3.22 Operation 52. Install Liquid Fuel Lines
1. Remove protective caps from free ends of fuel lines, and ensure
that dirt and foreign objects have not entered the tubing.
2. Reinstall the fuel lines to the same combustion casings from

which they were removed at disassembly.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-71

) NOTE
THE END OF THE TUBE WITH ITS PRESWAGED FERRULES MUST BE INSERTED
INTO THE FITTING BODY UNTIL THE FRONT FERRULE SEATS IN THE FITTING
Tighten the nut by hand, then, using a wrench, continue tighten-

ing the nut until the collar cannot be rotated by hand.
3. Where applicable, install liquid fuel purge lines also at this time.
! WARNING
WHEN TIGHTENING FITTINGS, HOLD THE FITTING BODY STEADY WITH A

BACK-UP WRENCH AND MAKE SURE THE TUBING IS SEATED INTO THE
BODY. USE OPEN-END WRENCHES OR TUBING BOX WRENCHES. NEVER USE
ADJUSTABLE WRENCHES OR PIPE WRENCHES AS FITTING DAMAGE WILL
RESULT.
4. Reconnect the false start drain line to No. 5 combustion casing.
5.3.23 Operation 53. Install Atomizing Air Lines to Fuel Nozzles
1. Lightly coat all bolts with Fel-Pro C-102 anti-seize compound.
2. Position the atomizing air line between the atomizing air ring
manifold and the fuel nozzle assembly. Install new gaskets. Do
not force flanges during mating except as noted.
) NOTE

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-72

3. Install all bolts finger-tight and snug bolts up with wrench.
4. Torque all bolts using a crisscross bolt tightening sequence.
5.3.24 Operation 54. Install Gas Fuel Lines
1. Check to ensure no foreign objects have entered the piping.
2. Install new gaskets and bolts into the flanges, use Fel-Pro C-102
anti-seize compound on all bolts.
) NOTE

3. Install all bolts finger-tight and snug up bolts with a wrench.
4. Torque all bolts using a crisscross bolt tightening sequence.
5.3.25 Operation 55. Install Turbine Compartment Roof & Side Panels
1. Reassemble side panel vertical beams if any were previously re-

moved at disassembly.
) NOTE
IF THE VERTICAL SIDE BEAMS WERE CUT OFF WITH A TORCH, THEY CAN BE RE-
INSTALLED USING DOUBLET PLATES AND NUTS AND BOLTS TO FACILITATE FU-
TURE DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY.
2. Apply new gaskets or caulking seal to roof section where needed.
3. Rig turbine roof to lift it level.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-73

4. Position over turbine compartment with crane and lower into

place using the chainfalls.
5. Apply Fel-Pro C-102 anti-seize compound to bolts and install all

bolts.
6. Install all wiring and conduit, piping brackets, etc., removed at

disassembly.
7. Install doors and side panels.
5.3.26 Operation 56. Clean-up, Visual Inspection, Prestart/Startup

Checks
1. Clean up all fuel oil, lube oil and water spills.
2. Make visual inspection of the unit as follows:
a. Check that all removed piping has been replaced.
b. Check that all removed conduit has been replaced and electri-
cal connections made. Confirm function of all devices rein-
stalled.
c. Correct any lube, fuel, and water leaks observed.
d. Inspect inlet and exhaust plenums and secure shut.
3. Reconnect power to all systems disabled at start of the job. Re-

arm the Halon 1301 system.
4. Perform precranking checks as follows:
a. Record all panel counter readings.
b. Check operation of the cool-down/emergency lube oil pump.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-74

c. Make visual inspection to see if oil is flowing from bearing

drains.
d. Check operation of auxiliary hydraulic pump.
e. Block out excitation and generator breaker equipment (if ap-

plicable).
f. Place unit on ratchet and observe for leaks, rubs and control
deficiencies.
g. Cheek to ensure fuel pump is primed (if applicable).
h. Check atomizing air compressor.
5. Crank the unit and perform the following checks:
a. Observe pick-up RPM of speed sensors versus time.
b. Inspect for casing air leaks.
c. Observe and record vibration channel outputs.
d. Observe and record crank speed.
e. Check starting means for proper operation.
f. Listen for rubbing noises.
g. Check temperature of lube oil in bearing drains or at the bear-

ing header and tank.
h. Observe all panel pressure gauge readings for abnormalities.
i. Trip unit using the emergency trip, and listen for abnormal
noises from gas turbine and associated equipment during
coast-down.
j. Observe proper drop-out RPM of speed sensors.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-75

6. Initiate a start and perform the following zero to full-speed, no-

load checks:
a. Observe applicable firing check parameters, relay sequences,

exhaust temperature, vibration and speed.
b. Check spark plugs and flame detectors.
c. Observe and record acceleration rates.
d. Record full set of vibration readings.
e. Observe and record temperature suppression set point.
f. Note and record pick-up time of all appropriate electrical

speed relays.
g. Adjust full speed no-load RPM to specifications.
h. Check digital set point.
i. Take a complete set of running data. See Running Inspections,

Section 4, in this maintenance instruction.
j. Check for air, oil, fuel, gas and water leaks.
7. Perform load checks (if applicable).
a. Take full set of load data.
b. Check for air oil, fuel, gas and water leaks.
8. Observe normal unloading and shutdown procedures as follows:
a. Note and record coast-down time.
b. Listen for abnormal noises from gas turbine, and associated

equipment, during coast-down.
c. Observe unit vibration readings during coast-down.
d. Complete preparation of all inspection, start-up and operating

data reports.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-76

Fig. 5-1 - TYPICAL COMBUSTION SYSTEM
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-77

Fig. 5-2 - REMOVAL OF LIQUID FUEL LINES
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-78

Fig. 5-3 - TYPICAL SWAGELOCK FITTINGS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-79

Fig. 5-4 - REMOVAL OF ATOMIZING AIR LINES
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-80

Fig. 5-5 - REMOVAL OF GAS FUEL LINES
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-81

Fig. 5-6 - REMOVAL OF FLAME DETECTOR
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-82

Fig. 5-7 - REMOVAL OF SPARK PLUG
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-83

Fig. 5-8 - NUMBERING OF COMBUSTION COMPONENTS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-84

Fig. 5-9 - ROTOR POSITION PROBE
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-85

Fig. 5-10 - CORRECT POSITION FOR MECHANICAL SCREW JACKS

UNDER TURBINE CASING
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-86

Fig. 5-11 - TYPICAL SCREW JACK RESTING ON METAL SUPPORT
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-87

Fig. 5-12 - RIGGING FOR REMOVAL OF UPPER-HALF TURBINE CASING,

APPLICABLE TO UNITS WITH VERTICAL EXHAUST STACK
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-88

Fig. 5-13 - TRANSITION PIECE & FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE ARRANGEMENT
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-89

Fig. 5-14 - TYPICAL DUAL FUEL NOZZLE WITH ATOMIZING AIR
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-90

Fig. 5-15 - FUEL NOZZLE CLEANING, PARTS BASKET
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-91

Fig. 5-16 - FUEL NOZZLE CLEANING & RINSING TANK
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-92

Fig. 5-17 - APPLICATION OF LOCKPLATE
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-93

Fig. 5-18 - FUEL NOZZLE TYPICAL FLOW & SPRAY PATTERN SETUP
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-94

Fig. 5-19 - TYPICAL LOVER-COOLED COMBUSTION LINER
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-95

Fig. 5-20 - COMBUSTION LINER SPRING SEAL (HULA SKIRT)

INSPECTION AREAS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-96

Fig. 5-21 - TRANSITION PIECE INSPECTION AREA LOCATIONS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-97

Fig. 5-22 - SPARK PLUG ASSEMBLY
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-98

Fig. 5-23 - SPARK PLUG SHELL WELD & RETAINING NUT TAB WELD
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-99

Fig. 5-24 - JACK POSITION FOR MOVING ROTOR AXIALLY
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-100

Fig. 5-25 - FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE & SHROUD WEDGED IN DIRECTION

OF GAS FLOW FOR CLEARANCE CHECK
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-101

Fig. 5-26 - TYPICAL SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE & DIAPHRAGM

WEDGED IN DIRECTION OF GAS FLOW FOR CLEARANCE CHECKS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-102

Fig. 5-27 - PLACEMENT OF TRANSITION PIECES IN COMPRESSOR

DISCHARGE CASING “F” CLAMPS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-103

Fig. 5-28 - TYPICAL BOLT TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-104

Fig. 5-29 - RETAINING STRAP WELDED TO HEAD

OF ECCENTRIC PIN
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-105

Fig. 5-30 - ECCENTRIC PIN HELD BY MEANS OF BOLTS

THROUGH HOLES IN RETAINING STRAP
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-106

Fig. 5-31 - COMBUSTION LINER & CASING DETAILS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-107

Fig. 5-32 - CROSSFIRE TUBE ASSEMBLY
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 5-108

Hot Gas Path Inspection Section 6
HOT GAS PATH INSPECTION
CONTENTS SECT
DISASSEMBLY 6.1
INSPECTION 6.2
REASSEMBLY 6.3
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

6. HOT GAS PATH INSPECTION
! WARNING
BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH A HOT GAS PATH INSPECTION, ENSURE THAT

THE GAS TURBINE ELECTRICAL POWER IS TAGGED OUT, CO2 SYSTEM IS
DEACTIVATED, GAS FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM IS BLANKED OFF AND/OR LIQ-
UID FUEL SYSTEM IS PURGED AND DEACTIVATED.
6.1 DISASSEMBLY


nect the wiring at the nearest pull box not physically mounted on
ble the rigid conduit so that it can be removed as part of the roof.
water and/or dirt.
3. Disconnect CO2 piping and any other piping which may interfere
with roof removal.
4. Unbolt the roof from the sidewall frames.
5. Attach four eye bolts to roof section at threaded receptacles pro-

vided on top.
6. Attach four equal length cables or two equal length cables, and
two comealongs, to chainfall connected to crane.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-1


6.1.2 Operation 2. Perform Combustion Inspection Disassembly Op-

erations 1 to 8
1. Remove liquid fuel lines.
2. Remove atomizing air lines and atomizing air manifold.
3. Remove gas fuel lines and gas fuel manifold (if applicable).
4. Remove liquid fuel check valves.
5. Remove fuel nozzles.
6. Remove flame detectors and spark plugs.
7. Remove combustion casing covers.
8. Remove crossfire tube retainers, crossfire tubes and combustion

liners.
) NOTE
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-2

1. Identify each combustion casing to be removed as to location.

See Fig. 6- 1.
2. Starting with No. 10 combustion casing, rig the casing to the lift-
ing means to support the weight. Unbolt the casing from the com-
pressor discharge casing bulkhead.

outward. Lift the casing clear of the unit.

that no damage is done.
5. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 for combustion casings 1, 2, 3, 9, 8 and 7.
6. Rig number 4 combustion casing to the lifting means. Attach a

bulkhead.
7. Unbolt the casing from the compressor discharge bulkhead and

using the rigging attached, carefully work the combustion casing

that no damage is done.
9. Repeat steps 6, 7 and 8 for combustion casings Nos. 5 and 6.
turbine casing, using the same code as stamped on the casing, in
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-3


the shell and remove all tube clips that hold down the thermo-
couples in the turbine compartment.
3. Pull the thermocouples carefully through the hole in the base 'I'
beam, and coil them up and secure them to the 'I' beam web near
the junction boxes, JB No. 18A and JB No. 18B, where they will
be protected from damage.

moval. Tag these fittings for location for later assembly.
6.1.5 Operation 5. Remove Upper- & Lower-Half Cooling & Sealing

Air Piping.
1. Disconnect (20CB-1) tubing air connections at the compressor

bleed valves (VAB-2 & VAB-1) actuating cylinders and remove
the conduit and wiring from the valves limit switches (33CB-1
&-2).
2. Support the 10th stage extraction lines and remove the "U" brack-
ets that support the valves actuating cylinders.
lows.
5. Identify and tag for location all orifices and piping.
piping by sliding them out of the expansion slip joint and lift
them clear of the turbine compartment.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-4

8. Identify and tag for location all orifices and piping removed.
1. Apply liquid penetrant (plus-gas formula 'A' or equivalent) to

bolts.
2. Identify and/or tag upper-half flex seals & clamp segments by lo-
cation.
3. Remove clamp segment bolts, clamp segments & upper-half flex

seals.
6.1.7 Operation 7. Take Initial Compressor & Turbine Rotor Position-

ing Checks
) NOTE

PLACE AND UNIT SUPPORTED ON ITS OWN.
! WARNING

PRESSOR.

and below the horizontal joint on each side. Record clearances on
Inspection Field Report.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-5

) NOTE
IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO USE HYDRAULIC RATCHETS TO POSITION A RANDOM

BLADE TIP BELOW PROBE HOLES FOR THE 11TH AND 15TH STAGES FOR ROTOR
POSITIONING CHECKS.
2. The 11th stage probe holes (four in total) are located 3.875 inches
aft from the forward face of the compressor discharge casing for-
ward flange.
3. The 15th stage probe holes (four in total) are located 16.40 inches
aft from the forward face of the compressor discharge casing for-
ward flange.
by removing the plugs located as follows:
11th Stage - At 3° 15' off top and bottom vertical centerline, and
10° 45' above horizontal joint.
15th Stage - At 10° off top and bottom vertical centerline, and
A stamped number next to the plug counterbores indicates the

thickness of the casing from the bottom of the counterbore to the
inside diameter of the casing. Record clearances on Inspection
Field Report. Compressor rotor tip clearances can be taken as fol-
lows:
Remove plug and place an adaptor into the machined counterbore

of the casing. The adaptor will allow the base of the depth mi-
crometer rod to penetrate the probe hole accurately
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-6

) NOTE
Take the depth micrometer and measure to the tip of the blade.
! WARNING
PATH.
5. The first-stage turbine clearances are to be taken with feelers

through the first-stage nozzle, with the combustion transition
pieces removed.
6. The second-stage turbine clearances are to be taken with feelers.

Access the aft side of the second-stage buckets by cutting a 15 x
17-inch oval hole in the exhaust diffuser outer wall.
6.1.8 Operation 8. Disconnect Wiring & Conduit in Turbine Com-

partment Area (Remove only if it will interfere with turbine area
work.)
1. Disconnect the electrical leads for the AC/DC lighting at the pull-
box above turbine casing.
2. Pull wiring from conduit and tag for identification.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-7

3. Tag and remove sections of conduit as needed to provide access

to turbine work.
6.1.9 Operation 9, Establish Solid Foundation & Place Mechanical

Support Jacks under Turbine Casing.
! WARNING
DO NOT USE HYDRAULIC JACKS.
) NOTE

TION WHEN SUPPORTING THE TURBINE CASING. DO NOT INSTALL THE ME-
CHANICAL SUPPORT JACKS ON THE TRANSAXIAL 'I' BEAM ON THE FLOOR OF
THE TURBINE BASE WITHOUT FIRST PACKING SHIMS SOLIDLY BETWEEN THE 'I'
BEAM AND THE CONCRETE BASE PAD AT EACH LOCATION.
) NOTE
CUTOUTS CAN BE MADE TO THE BASE FLOORPLATE NEXT TO THE 'I' BEAM ME-
CHANICAL SUPPORT JACK LOCATION SO ACCESS CAN BE GAINED TO SOLIDLY
PACK SHIMS UNDERNEATH THE 'I' BEAM AND THE CONCRETE BASE PAD.
FLOORPLATE CUTOUTS CAN BE FABRICATED FROM 1/8-INCH PLATE TO COVER
THE ACCESS HOLE AFTER THE MECHANICAL SUPPORT JACKS ARE REMOVED.
1. Mechanical screw jack support blocks can be fabricated using

Schedule 'B', 5/16-inch by 3-inch minimum diameter, piping cut
to length required to support the jack. See Fig. 6-4. 1.
Install mechanical support jack at the bottom centerline between
vertical flanges. See Figs. 6-3 (Jack - position 4) and 6-4.

the turbine aft casing and the forward exhaust casing vertical
flanges. See Figs. 6-3 (Jack - position 5) and 6-4.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-8

stationary points (i.e., turbine enclosure beam) to the turbine cas-
ing to measure upward deflection of the casings.
4. Use mechanical support jacks to obtain 0.002 to 0.004-inch up-

ward deflection of the casing as measured with dial indicators.
Jack support pipes should have lateral bracing in case loading
changes.
! WARNING
DO NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES REMOVE MECHANICAL SUPPORT

JACKS UNTIL UPPER-HALF CASING HAS BEEN REINSTALLED AND BOLTED
UP.
IF FOR ANY REASON DURING HOT GAS PATH INSPECTION COMPRESSOR

CASINGS HAVE TO BE REMOVED, MAKE ABSOLUTELY SURE THAT ME-
CHANICAL SUPPORT JACKS ARE INSTALLED UNDER INLET BELL AND
FLANGES OF COMPRESSOR CASINGS AND SUPPORT THE VIGV RING. USE
JACKS TO OBTAIN .002 TO .004-INCH UPWARD DEFLECTION BEFORE RE-
MOVING ANY UPPER-HALF COMPRESSOR CASINGS. SEE FIGS. 6-3 (JACK
POSITIONS 1. 2 & 3) AND 6-4.


casing and the compressor discharge casing.

(Horizontal joint body-bound bolts are removed by driving them
upward.)
4. Mark body-bound bolts for replacement in same holes.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-9

5. Remove upper half first-stage nozzle eccentric pin at the top ver-
tical centerline of the turbine casing in the 4th stage cooling air
connection.
6. Remove the borescope plugs in the first-and second-stage nozzle

area prior to turbine casing removal. There are four plugs in the
odd plug is 46° above the left horizontal joint (looking down-
stream) and 10.84 inches from the aft casing flange. There are a
total of nine plugs that must be removed.
7. Identify and tag plugs.
haust transition duct.

duct.
) NOTE
A QUANTITY OF FOUR, 1.75-INCH, 8-THREAD JACKBOLTS WILL BE REQUIRED.

TWO WILL BE USED TO PROVIDE PLUGGING OF THE LOWER HALF HOLES AND
THE OTHER TWO TO PERFORM THE JACKING FUNCTION ON THE UPPER-HALF.
SPLIT.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-10

! WARNING

TURBINE NOZZLES AND TURBINE CASING.

bine casing level.
) NOTE

(2013.6 KILOGRAMS) AND SHOULD BE RIGGED ACCORDINGLY.
b. Hang a 5-ton chainfall off the crane hook using a suitable

shackle.

down the wall of the plenum. Run the cable through the snatch
block.

e. Attach shorter cables and 1-1/2 or 2-ton comealongs to the ca-

ble hook and to each rear-lifting trunnion on the turbine cas-
ing. (The cable hook must be kept close to the turbine casing to
allow sufficient lift.)
f. Adjust the rear comealongs to pull the lift point closer to the
center of gravity, which is 15.14 inches from the aft- flange.
Do not take any strain on the rigging at this time. Take up on
the restraining cable.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-11

g. Jack the turbine casing free 2 to 5 inches, maintaining a meas-

ured equal lift side to side and front to back. Readjust the cen-
ter of gravity point as noted in step “f”.
) NOTE
LIFTING SHOULD BE DONE USING THE CHAINFALL AT THE UPPER CRANE
HOOK.
h. Slowly take up strain and load with a 5-ton chainfall while re-
straining lifting cable axially toward exhaust plenum. Con-
tinue to measure joint gap during this operation. If measure-
ments indicate turbine casing is sticking, stop lifting, deter-
mine and correct reason for sticking and equalize joint gaps.
i. Continue lifting and restraining the turbine casing with the 5

ton chainfall and restraining cable until casing is clear of tur-
bine buckets, seals, etc.
! WARNING
EXERCISE EXTREME CARE LIFTING TURBINE CASING. DO NOT ALLOW IT

TO SWING AND HIT THE TURBINE BUCKETS.
) NOTE
A MINIMUM LIFT OF 25 INCHES IS REQUIRED FOR THE SECOND-STAGE DIA-

j. Ensure turbine casing is free and slowly, by easing off on the

restraining cable and taking up on the chainfall, allow the tur-
bine casing to drift forward over the first-stage buckets.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-12

) NOTE
A MINIMUM LIFT OF 50 INCHES IS REQUIRED FOR THE DIAPHRAGM SEAL

TEETH TO CLEAR THE DISCHARGE CASING VERTICAL FLANGE.
k. Attach a tag line to the turbine casing and continue lifting casing
with chainfall until casing is clear of the discharge casing vertical
flange. Once casing is centered under the crane hook, release all
restraints, slowly raise turbine casing by boom and cable while
turning to clear conduit runs, lagging supports, pipings etc.
l. Carefully swing turbine casing clear of unit and set the casing on
suitable blocking on its forward vertical flange for easier cleaning
and inspection.
m. Clean all bolting and flanges of old anti-seize compound.
plates (Nos. 10, 1, 2, 9 and 8 and transition pieces in sequence)
from the upper-half, first-stage nozzle retaining ring. Discard all
lockplates and bolts.
) NOTE
THAT THE END SEAL CAN BE REMOVED. SEE FIG. 6-5.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-13


! WARNING

TURBINE COMPONENTS.
6.1.13 Operation 13. Remove Upper-Half First-Stage Nozzle
1. Unbolt and remove the 'L' seal clamping ring, discard the lock-
plates.
2. Remove the horizontal joint bolts, lockplates and clamps from the
first-stage nozzle. Discard the lockplates. Identify and tag the
horizontal clamps and bolts.
3. Rig cables and chainfall to lift the first-stage nozzle level.
4 Loosen the overlapped sealing strips at the horizontal joint areas.
5. Using the chainfall and crane, carefully lift the upper-half nozzle
assembly clear of the unit and place on suitable cribbing.
! WARNING
PAY CAREFUL ATTENTION TO THE 'L' SEALS AT THE HORIZONTAL JOINTS

TO ENSURE THE SEALS SLIDE OUT OF THE SUPPORT RING WHEN LIFTING
THE UPPER-HALF NOZZLE.
WHEN LIFTING THE UPPER-HALF FIRST-STAGE NOZZLES, THE 'L' SEAL

SEGMENTS MAY SLIDE OUT OF THEIR GROOVES. STEPS SHOULD BE TAKEN
TO SECURE THE SEALS IN PLACE OR REMOVE THEM AS THE NOZZLE IS BE-
ING LIFTED.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-14

6. Clean all bolts, clean 'L' seal area and check for and remove any
burrs on the groove and tongue edges.
6.1.14 Operation 14. Remove Upper-Half First-Stage Nozzle Support

Ring.
1 Apply penetrating fluid (Plus-Gas Formula 'A') or equivalent to

the nozzle support ring horizontal joint and to the horizontal joint
bolts. Do this well in advance of disassembly if possible.
2. Remove horizontal joint dowels.
3. Rig to lift the support ring upper-half using 1/4-inch wire rope
sling, clevis, eyebolt and chainfall. Assemble the eyebolt at the
top centre, assemble the wire rope and clevis and hook on the
chainfall.
4. Using an impact wrench and long extension, loosen and remove

the two horizontal joint bolts.
5. Use metal wedges at the horizontal joints to separate upper and

lower halves.
! WARNING
WHEN LIFTING, THE SUPPORT RING SHOULD BE CONTROLLED TO PRE-

VENT IT FROM SWINGING INTO THE FIRST-STAGE BUCKETS.
6. Using chainfall and crane, lift the support ring clear of the unit
and set on suitable wood blocking for cleaning and inspection.
Clean all mating joint surfaces and clean all bolts and dowel pins.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-15

6.1.15 Operation 15. Unbolt & Remove Lower-Half Transition Pieces
the lower half, first-stage nozzle retaining ring. Discard all lock-
plates and bolts.
) NOTE
unit and set on plywood or heavy cardboard in a lay-down area.
3. Identify each transition piece according to combustion easing lo-

! WARNING
REFER TO SECTION 2. STANDARD PRACTICES, IN THIS INSPECTION AND

TURBINE COMPONENTS
1. The maximum total fore and aft movement of rotor without dis-
torting any rotor or bearing mounts is usually 14 to 20 mils.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-16

) NOTE
READ.
2. Rotor float is measured by mounting a dial indicator on No. 1

bearing housing to be able to read axial movement of turbine ro-
tor.

) NOTE
DO NOT JACK AGAINST BUCKETS. DO NOT DAMAGE SEAL TEETH.
4. Jack rotor carefully aft, toward load gear, and at the same time
note movement of rotor with dial indicator located on No. 1 bear-
ing housing. The rotor will move suddenly, accompanied by a
solid 'bump'; this is not unusual. Release the jack loading and
read the dial indicator.
5. Set the dial indicator back to zero reading and reposition the hy-
draulic jack wedge between the second-stage diaphragm and the
face of the first-stage turbine wheel. See Fig. 6-6. Carefully jack
the rotor forward. Again, the rotor will move suddenly with a
bump. Release the back loading and read the dial indicator. Re-
cord the axial movement on Inspection Field Report. Repeat
steps 3, 4 and 5 three times to assure repeatability.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-17


sentative. The need to monitor closely the internal gas turbine
clearances is critical. On every removal of the turbine casing, the
internal clearances called for on Inspection Field Report should
be determined. Any clearances not within specified tolerances, as
indicated on the Unit Clearance Diagram in the Reference Draw-
ing Section of this service manual, should be reported before any
parts are removed to the NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field
Service Representative in case 'rechecks' are needed. The data
will be compared to the unit's original clearance data so that a de-
termination for corrective action, if any, can be made.
) NOTE

IMPORTANT FACTOR IN OBTAINING CORRECT READINGS. SEE STANDARD PRAC-
TICES, SECTION 2, IN THIS INSPECTION MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
! WARNING
BINE.
2. Left & Right Side (Definition)
The left side of the unit, by definition, is the left-hand side when
stream (direction of air flow) toward the generator load coupling
end.

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-18

b. Prepare for and take clearances around the first-stage nozzle.

Apply a down-stream load not to exceed 2,000 pounds on the
first-stage nozzle outer sidewall, both sides, to assure that the
nozzle is seated downstream against the first-stage shrouds,
and the first-stage shrouds are seated downstream against the
turbine casing.
) NOTE
1. DO NOT WEDGE OUTER NOZZLES SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH FIRST-STAGE

NOZZLE.
c. Wedge nozzles and diaphragms aft with hardwood wedges.

The wedges should be fastened together with a chain, cable or
rope so they will not drop into turbine. (Figs. 6-7 & 6-8.)
6.1.18 Operation 18. Remove Lower-Half First-Stage Nozzle Eccentric

Pin
1. Unbolt retaining strap bolts from turbine casing and remove ec-
centric pin.
) NOTE
IF PIN IS HARD TO REMOVE, APPLY PENETRATING FLUID (PLUS-GAS FORMULA

'A') OR EQUIVALENT IN ORDER TO REMOVE THE PIN.
6.1.19 Operation 19. Remove Lower-Half First-Stage Nozzle
) NOTE
REFER TO FIGS. 6-9 THROUGH 6-13.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-19

1. Remove the two outer support clamps, one on either side of the
turbine, which hold the nozzle assembly to the first-stage turbine
wheel shroud assembly. The support clamp is retained by a stud
and nut installed in a shroud segment.
2. Remove the lower-half 'L' seal clamping ring from the first-stage
nozzle support ring assembly. Discard all lockplates.
3. Install 3/4-inch eyebolts in nozzle assembly horizontal flanges,

one in each side, and rig cable slings and chainfalls to eyebolts.
Lift nozzle assembly sufficiently to remove horizontal clamps.
! WARNING
THESE CLAMPS ARE GROUND DURING FACTORY ASSEMBLY OF THE TUR-

BINE TO OBTAIN A PROPER ALIGNMENT OF NOZZLE WITH ASSOCIATED
PARTS. BE SURE TO MARK CLAMPS FOR PROPER REASSEMBLY IN TURBINE.
4. Start rolling out nozzle lower-half assembly & retaining ring as-
sembly by taking up on one cable and letting out the other, mov-
ing crane as necessary to lead lower nozzle assembly around ro-
tor.
5. Remove 'L' seal segments as lower-half nozzle is rolled out.
) NOTE
FOUR LIFT BARS ARE WELDED ACROSS OUTER WALL OF LOWER-HALF OF RE-
TAINING RING, TWO ON EITHER SIDE OF VERTICAL CENTRELINE & DISPOSED
ABOUT 15° AND 45°.
6. When nozzle and retaining ring assembly has been rolled out
about 45°, attach a 1/4-inch steel lifting cable to first lift bar.
Continue to roll out nozzle and retaining ring assembly taking
new hitches on lifting bars as they appear, until assembly is out
of turbine casing.
7. Lift nozzle half off turbine, and place on appropriate cribbing.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-20

6.1.20 Operation 20. Remove Lower-Half Second-Stage Nozzle Radial

Retaining Pins
) NOTE
THE SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE RADIAL RETAINING PINS ARE HELD IN POSITION

BY PLATES SECURED TO THE TURBINE CASING BY HEX BOLTS WITH LOCK-
PLATES.
1. Remove the holding plates which position the radial second-stage

nozzle retaining pins. Remove the retaining pins; if pins are not
stamped as to location, stamp them upon removal.
6.1.21 Operation 21. Remove Lower-Half Second-Stage Nozzle Seg-

ments (See Figs. 6-14 & 6-15)
1. Each nozzle segment can be removed from the turbine easing by

rolling it out individually on its outer sidewall forward and aft
hook fits. Each diaphragm segment is removed, along with its ad-
jacent nozzle segment as one piece. Mark each segment per num-
bering sequence.
! WARNING
AT ALL POINTS WHERE THE SEGMENT AND PULLING CABLE COME IN CON-
TACT, THERE SHOULD BE AMPLE PADDING TO DISTRIBUTE THE LOAD AND
PROTECT THE PARTITION SURFACES. WOOD, RUBBER OR PADDED STEEL
PLATES CAN BE USED.
EXCESSIVE SHOCK AND VIBRATION SHOULD BE AVOIDED. ATTACH CA-

BLING TO THE CENTRE NOZZLE PARTITION IF POSSIBLE. A MAXIMUM
FORCE OF 2,000 POUNDS SHOULD NOT BE EXCEEDED.
RECHECK THAT ALL BORESCOPE AND THERMOCOUPLE FITTINGS ARE RE-

MOVED
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-21

2. Tooling required for nozzle segment removal are: pulley assem-

bly, one-ton come along and 0.375-inch wire rope or fiber sling.
) NOTE
PAY PARTICULAR ATTENTION TO THE NOZZLE AND DIAPHRAGM FORWARD, AFT

AND RADIAL SEALS BETWEEN EACH SEGMENT WHEN ROLLING THE NOZZLE
SEGMENT OUT. KEEP EACH SET OF SEALS WITH ITS RESPECTIVE NOZZLE SEG-
MENTS ON A PIECE OF PLYWOOD OR EQUIVALENT IN A PROTECTED AREA.
COVER THE REMOVED SEGMENTS TO PROTECT THEM FROM THE ENVIRON-
MENT.
3. Attach cable to Nozzle Segment 14 and remove the segment us-

ing a one-ton comealong attached to the overhead crane.
4. Attach cable to Nozzle Segment 13 and remove.
5. Install pulley assembly in Retaining Pin Hole 14. Pass cable

through pulley and attach to -Nozzle Segment 12. Pull nozzle
segment to position vacated by Nozzle Segment 13. Remove
pulley assembly and remove Nozzle Segment 12 as above.

through pulley and attach to Nozzle Segment 11. Pull Nozzle
Segment 11 to position vacated by Nozzle Segment 12. Move
pulley to Pin Hole 14 and remove Nozzle Segment 11 as above.

through pulley and attach to Nozzle Segment 10. Pull nozzle seg-
ment to position vacated by Nozzle Segment 13. Move pulley as-
sembly to Pin Hole 15 and then to Pin Hole 16 and remove Noz-
zle Segment 12 as above.
8. Move to other side of unit and remove Segments 8 and 10 in

same manner as described above.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-22

6.1.22 Operation 22. Remove Upper-Half Second-Stage Nozzle Radial

Retaining Pins
) NOTE
THE SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE RADIAL PINS ARE SECURED IN POSITION BY

PLATES SECURED TO THE TURBINE CASING BY HEX HEAD BOLTS WITH LOCK-
PLATES.
The retaining pins are drilled and tapped so that a bolt can be screwed
into the head and a puller can be used to extract the retaining pins.
1. Remove the holding plates which secure the second-stage nozzle

radial retaining pins and remove the retaining pins. If pins are
not stamped for location, stamp them.
6.1.23 Operation 23. Remove Upper-Half Second-Stage Nozzle Seg-

ments
1. Each nozzle segment can be removed from the turbine casing by

'rolling' it out individually on its outer sidewall forward and aft
hook fits. Each diaphragm segment is removed along with its ad-
bering sequence.
) NOTE
THE TURBINE CASING SHOULD BE ON ITS FORWARD VERTICAL FLANGE FOR

NOZZLE SEGMENT REMOVAL.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-23

! WARNING
PLATES CAN BE USED.

MOVED.
2. Tools required for nozzle removal are: pulley assembly, one-ton

comealong, and 0.375-inch diameter wire rope or fibre sling.
3. Commence by attaching the cable to the nozzle segment closest

to the horizontal joint. Remove the nozzle segment using a one-
ton comealong.
4. Attach a one-ton comealong to a suitable support point. Continue

on the remaining nozzle segments and remove in a similar man-
ner, as described per operation 21, Steps 3 through 8.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-24

6.2 INSPECTION
6.2.1 Operation 24. Perform Combustion Inspection Procedure Inspec-

tion Operation Nos. 11 Through 16 & Operation Nos. 18 & 19
) NOTE
REFER TO COMBUSTION INSPECTION, SECTION 5, OF THIS SERVICE MANUAL

FOR INSPECTION PROCEDURES FOR THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS.
11. Pressure test fuel oil check valves.
12. Fuel nozzle inspection.
13. Inspect combustion liners.
14. Inspect crossfire tubes and retainers.
15. Inspect transition pieces.
16. Inspect combustion outer casings.
17. Inspect and test spark plugs.
18. Inspect and test flame detectors.
6.2.2 Operation 25. Inspect First- & Second-Stage Turbine Buckets
! WARNING
EACH TIME UPPER-HALF TURBINE CASING IS REMOVED, TURBINE BUCK-

ETS SHOULD BE CAREFULLY EXAMINED. SUCH EXAMINATION CAN RE-
DUCE THE RISK OF MAJOR DAMAGE FROM THE FAILURE OF A PREVI-
OUSLY DAMAGED BUCKET; AT THE SAME TIME, JUDGMENT IS NECESSARY
TO AVOID REPLACING ADEQUATE BUCKETS. THE RECOMMENDATIONS
CONTAINED HEREIN ARE INTENDED TO HELP IN MAKING THIS JUDGMENT,
AND THE CRITERIA FOR CONTINUED SERVICE OR REPAIR OF BUCKETS ARE
FURNISHED AS A SERVICE TO THE CUSTOMER.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-25

! WARNING
THERE IS GREAT VARIANCE IN CUSTOMER PRACTICES RELATING TO OP-

ERATION AND MAINTENANCE, WITH ACCOMPANYING VARIATION IN IN-
FLUENCE UPON SATISFACTORY OPERATION OF GAS TURBINE COMPO-
NENTS. NUOVO PIGNONE COMPANY HAS LITTLE KNOWLEDGE OF OR NO
CONTROL OVER THESE PRACTICES. ACCORDINGLY, RESPONSIBILITY FOR
DECISIONS AS TO CONTINUED USAGE OR REPLACEMENT OF BUCKETS
MUST REST SOLELY WITH EACH CUSTOMER.
) NOTE
THE RESULT OF BUCKET INSPECTIONS SHOULD BE DOCUMENTED ALONG

WITH THE INFORMATION ON UNIT OPERATION AND FUELS. THE INSPECTION
REPORTING FORMS SHOULD BE USED TO RECORD AND COMMUNICATE TO
NUOVO PIGNONE COMPANY THE EXACT LOCATION AND TYPE OF ABNORMAL-
ITY OBSERVED.
These bucket inspection records will be filed for each particular tur-
bine and used as a basis for present and future recommendations.
All records and questions arising on the subject should be communi-
cated to your NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field Service Represen-
tative.
! WARNING
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN BUCKETS PRIOR TO INSPECTION
1. Visually inspect vane section, platform and dovetail areas, using

a ten power (10X) glass, examine critical area of vane section
(root fillets, top 25% of tip including squealer tips and shrouds,
and trailing edges). Any suspected cracks should be locally
cleaned using “paddlewheel” polishing discs to prepare surface
area for ZL22A fluorescent penetrant testing. Surface tempera-
tures during polishing operations should not exceed 100°F or
ambient temperature, whichever is the greater. High temperature
will cause metal to yield and flow covering defects so they can-
not be detected.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-26

2. Inspect first-stage buckets using the following inspection criteria.
) NOTE
BUCKETS CAN CONTINUE TO BE USED 'AS IS' IF THEY MEET THE FOLLOWING
INSPECTION CRITERIA.
a. Radial tip cracks are less than 0.375-inch long or local bent
sections, associated with radial tip cracks, are less than 0.375
inch long.
b. Missing sections of the airfoil wall are within an area of 0.188-

inch x 0.188-inch or smaller with associated cracks less than
0.125-inch long and located at least 0.500-inch from the junc-
tion of the hollow tip and the solid portion of the airfoil trailing
edge. This description holds true for one such missing section
per bucket. See Fig. 6-16.
c. Dents are permissible providing they are less than 0.90-inch

deep and the dent must contain no cracks.
3. Repair of buckets; depending on the type of foreign object dam-

age, buckets can be hand reworked or weld repaired providing
the following criteria are met.
! WARNING
DUE TO SENSITIVE METALLURGICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF BUCKET AL-

LOY, IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT ANY CLEANING, WELD REPAIR
OR REWORK BE PERFORMED TO APPROVED PROCESS SPECIFICATION, BY A
QUALIFIED REPRESENTATIVE OF THE NUOVO PIGNONE COMPANY.
a. Hand rework or blending can be done on dent-produced cracks

provided the depth does not exceed limits as set in paragraph
2.c.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-27

! WARNING
ALL FIRST-STAGE BUCKETS HAVE A CORROSION RESISTANT PROTECTIVE

COATING. REWORK OF COATED BUCKETS IS ALLOWED, BUT IT SHOULD BE
HELD TO A MINIMUM SO THAT NO MORE COATING IS REMOVED THAN AB-
SOLUTELY NECESSARY TO AFFECT THE REPAIR.
THE COATING IS ONLY 0.002-INCH THICK AND EXTREME CARE MUST BE

TAKEN TO AVOID DAMAGING IT WHEN CLEANING, REPAIRING, OR HAN-
DLING COATED BUCKETS. COATED BUCKETS MUST BE CLEANED WITH
ALUMINUM OXIDE 240 GRIT AT AN OPERATING PRESSURE OF 40 PSI MAXI-
MUM.
b. Weld repair is limited to regions of very low stress where a

failure or parent metal cracking would result in minimum con-
sequential damage. Weld repair is done only to improve aero-
dynamic performance. The bucket area considered safe for
weld is at least 0.250 inch of the airfoil tip.
In addition, with the exception of the junction of the hollow

core and solid portion of the trailing edge, weld repair may be
permitted in limited section(s) of the tip to 0.375-inch in from
the tip. See Fig. 6-17 for details.
Within the scope of above limitations, weld repair is recom-

mended if following conditions are found:
· Loss of airfoil tips of an entire row of buckets is in excess

of 0.010-inch but less than 0.250-inch.
· Loss of tip sections with area larger than 0.035-square inch

but less than 0.060-square inch.
· Cracks extending radially more than 0.375-inch but less

than 0.750-inch. See Fig. 6-17 for details.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-28

4. Inspect first-stage buckets for corrosion and erosion. Limits for

corrosion and erosion are defined as follows:
a. 10% of maximum airfoil thickness.
b. Flattened nose radius.
c. One-half of trailing edge thickness.
5. Any first-.stage bucket(s) not meeting criteria as described in

Parts 1, 2, 3 and 4 should be replaced.
Second-Stage Buckets
1. Inspection and repair criteria for second-stage shrouded tip buck-

ets is as follows:
a. The second-stage bucket involves no weld repair. The repair

is limited to grinding and blending. When reworking buckets
by grinding, care should be exercised to avoid overheating.
Also before performing ZL-22A fluorescent penetrant inspec-
tion, the buckets should be polished with fine grit emery paper.
2. Repair Emits for second-stage shrouded tip buckets is as follows:
a. The dimensions given are intended to be used as a guide for

hand tool rework of buckets having foreign object damage.
Table 6-1 lists the allowable limits for the repair of foreign ob-
ject damage at or near the leading edge of the buckets.
Fig. 6-18 defines the dimensions used in Table 6-1.
b. Missing Metal - Missing material in the second-stage buckets

is acceptable if the airfoil can be contoured to the same limits
as crack repair.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-29

TABLE 6-1
REPAIR DIMENSIONS MATRIX
SECOND-STAGE BUCKET
MS-5001
A .5 Maximum
R1 1.5/0.75
R2 2.0/1.0
D .3 Maximum*
R3 .5t
E .06 Maximum
R4 1.0/0.5
* D must be reduced to 2/3 of indicated maximum value when B is between root and
pitch and proportionately smaller when B is less than R2 minimum.
) NOTE
SEE FIGURE 6-18, ALSO.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-30

c. Dents - Dents are acceptable, as long as the dent is not located

in the bucket root fillet (interface between airfoil and platform)
or in the shroud fillet (interface between airfoil and shroud).
Dents containing cracks or those located in the shroud filet are

repairable. Repairable dents should be hand polished to re-
move foreign material in the area of the dent, and fluorescent
penetrant inspected for cracks. Blend smooth all dents.
d. Corrosion - Corrosion on second-stage buckets to a depth of

more than 0.025-inch has not been observed. Such a condition
is acceptable. If a more serious corrosion is noted, the observa-
tions should be reported to your NUOVO PIGNONE Company
Field Service Representative.
Shroud Tip Rework
1. Rework and metal removal is allowed in the cross-hatched areas.

No rework is permitted which penetrates below the centre sec-
tion. See Fig. 6-19.
6.2.3 Operation 26. Inspect First- & Second-Stage Turbine Shrouds
1. Visually check the shroud’s segments and hook fits for deposits,
corrosion, erosion (pitting), cracks and nicks or dents.
2. Visually inspect the shroud seals for distortion, rubs, wear and
missing pieces. See Fig. 6-20.
) NOTE
THE SHROUDS DO NOT HAVE TO BE DISASSEMBLED FROM THE TURBINE CAS-

ING FOR THIS INSPECTION.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-31

6.2.4 Operation 27. Make First-Stage Nozzle Ellipticity Checks
) NOTE
ELLIPTICITY IS THE CONDITION OF DEVIATION FROM A CIRCULAR FORM.

MEASUREMENT OF THE FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE IS TO DETERMINE THE AMOUNT
OF DEVIATION, OR 'OUT OF ROUNDNESS' OF THE NOZZLE ASSEMBLY WHEN IT
IS MEASURED OUT OF THE UNIT. ELLIPTICITY CAN BE MEASURED ON FIRST-
STAGE NOZZLE SINCE SEGMENTS ARE HELD IN PLACE BY A RETAINING RING
AND ARE REMOVED AS AN ASSEMBLED UNIT IN BOTH THE UPPER AND LOWER
HALVES.
Assistance from your NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field Service

Representative in obtaining ellipticity readings is recommended.
1. Bolt upper and lower halves of first-stage nozzle firmly together.

Set nozzle on a reasonable level surface and take ellipticity.
The maximum allowable difference is normally 0.100 inch.

Check with your NUOVO PIGNONE Field Service Representa-
tive for disposition above 0.100 inch.
6.2.5 Operation 28. Inspect First- & Second-Stage Nozzles
) NOTE
THE FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE MAY BECOME AVAILABLE FOR PARTIAL OR COM-

PLETE INSPECTION AT LESS THAN HOT GAS PATH INSPECTION INTERVALS BE-
CAUSE OF OTHER INSPECTION OR MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS. IT IS IM-
PORTANT THAT THESE INSPECTION RESULTS BE ACCURATELY INTERPRETED,
EVALUATED, AND RECORDED TO MINIMIZE OPERATOR'S MAINTENANCE EX-
PENSE WHILE PROVIDING HIGH RELIABILITY.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-32

! WARNING
EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN GRIT BLASTING NOZZLE

SEGMENTS SO NO GRIT WILL ENTER THE NOZZLE PARTITION COOLING
HOLES. USING AN AIR PRESSURE OF 40 PSIG OR LESS, WORK THE BLAST-
ING NOZZLE IN THE DIRECTION OF NORMAL HOT GAS FLOW PATH ACROSS
THE NOZZLE PARTITION. NORMAL HOT GAS PATH FLOW IS LEADING EDGE
TO TRAILING EDGE. DO NOT DWELL IN ONE AREA AS EXCESSIVE AMOUNTS
OF METAL MAY BE REMOVED.
1. Clean nozzle by blasting with aluminum oxide 220 grit or finer.

Air blast nozzles TCF assure removal of all blasting grit from
surfaces and openings. Fluorescent penetrant (Zyglo) check for
cracks, inspect for foreign object damage, erosion, corrosion and
cracks. Refer to Section 2, Standard Practices, Gas Turbine
Cleaning section of this Service Manual.
Nozzle Cracking
Nozzles experience several thermal gradients during starting as

well as high temperatures during loading operation. Such condi-
tions frequently cause nozzle cracking and, in fact, cracking is
expected. With certain exceptions, this cracking does not impair
the efficiency of the mechanical integrity of the nozzle. Figs. 6-
21 through 6-25 display typical cracking patterns. The cracks
shown are acceptable and do not require immediate repair. If un-
certainty arises in regard to any cracks, such as types not repre-
sented by Figs. 6-21 through 6-25, contact your NUOVO PIG-
NONE Company Field Service Representative for disposition.
Obtain specific advice prior to making repairs when nozzle con-
dition is considered beyond established limits.
Although to date we have found very few cracks that could im-
pair the mechanical integrity, they can exist. -The inspector
should be alert for the following which may require immediate
disposition (i.e. repair or scrap):
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-33

1. Open cracks in critical areas: Open cracks can permit inges-

tion of hot gases. An open crack is defined as a crack suffi-
ciently open to pass a 0.005-inch feeler gauge and having a
length of 1.0 inch or more. The critical areas are certain re-
gions of the vane and inner sidewalls and are shown in Fig.
6-26.
2. Cracks that could cause part breakout: Cracks whose orienta-

tion and growth rate are such as to raise questions of the dis-
lodgment of significant portions of the nozzle must be evalu-
ated. See Figs. 6-27 and 6-28 for more details.
3. Continuous fillet cracks on one vane side: Cracks such as this

can cause airfoil separation. See Fig. 6-28 for further details.
4. Corrosion or Erosion of Nozzles:
a. The allowable amount of vane region removal is 50% of

the wall thickness.
b. Sufficient trailing edge material must be maintained to

prevent nozzle cooling hole exposure.
c. Area and harmonic checks must be performed where sig-

nificant material removal has occurred.
5. Nozzle Foreign Object Damage
) NOTE
NOZZLES CAN BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY FOREIGN OBJECTS IN THE GAS

STREAM. THIS DAMAGE CAN IMPAIR THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY AND AERO-
DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE OF THE NOZZLE. SUCH DAMAGE SHOULD BE EVALU-
ATED BY THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA:
a. All tears and breaks must be evaluated by the same crite-

ria given for cracks.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-34

b. Raised metal must be blended to the adjacent surface

contours.
c. Nicks and chips must not exceed 50% of the wall thick-
ness.
d. Any damage affecting the throat opening, i.e. bending of

trailing edges, pieces missing, is cause for having an area
check performed for harmonic analysis.
6. Recommendations
a. First-stage nozzles should not be removed for repair ex-

cept at normal hot gas path inspection intervals unless
the above guidelines have been exceeded.
b. If the nozzle is removed earlier than hot gas path inspec-

tion interval for other reasons, all cracks, damage, etc.,
should be carefully mapped using proper non-destructive
test procedures and reported to your NUOVO PIGNONE
Company Field Service Representative.
c. At all other times that the nozzle becomes partially or

wholly accessible, the nozzle should be inspected as
completely as possible using appropriate techniques and
results reported to your NUOVO PIGNONE Company
Field Representative.
d. All inspections should be reported using the Inspection

Field Report. It should be noted that extreme care should
be used to ensure accuracy. False indications can occur
when accessibility is limited. Such false indications
could result in major expense and lost time if not scruti-
nized and properly interpreted. Record condition of noz-
zles on Inspection Field Report.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-35

6.2.6 Operation 29. Inspect Second-Stage Nozzle Diaphragm
1. Clean nozzle assembly by blasting with aluminum oxide 220 grit

or finer as detailed in Section 2, Standard Practices, Gas Turbine
Cleaning section in this Service Manual.
2. Check for cracks using fluorescent penetrant. Zyglo ZL22A is

preferred. Record findings on Inspection Field Report.
3. Make a visual inspection for foreign object damage, burning, cor-

rosion, erosion, and excessive deposit build-up. report findings
) NOTE
EACH DIAPHRAGM SEGMENT IS NORMALLY REMOVED ALONG WITH THE NOZ-

ZLE SEGMENT. THE DIAPHRAGM SEGMENTS ARE NOT NORMALLY SEPARATED
IN THE FIELD TO MAKE CHECKS.
4. Make a visual inspection of all diaphragm seal teeth, first-stage

aft wheelspace seals, second-stage aft wheelspace seals. See Fig.
6-29.
5. Inspect diaphragm teeth as follows: Observe the worst rubbed

tooth and measure its tooth height. Compare this measurement to
the height of the tooth on the diaphragm segment previously posi-
tioned at the horizontal joint where the tolerance of the gap IPL
and IPH is known. Then see if the gaps are within the minimum
specified allowance for the worst diaphragm tooth condition.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-36

6.3 REASSEMBLY
6.3.1 Operation 30. Install Turbine Casing Upper-Half for Roundness

& Turbine Bucket Tip clearance Cheek
) NOTE

TRANSITION PIECES, IT IS ADVANTAGEOUS TO RECORD AND REVIEW TURBINE
ROUNDNESS AND TIP CLEARANCES. THIS INFORMATION MUST BE OBTAINED IF
THE TURBINE HAS BEEN UPRATED WITH ADVANCED TECHNOLOGY COMPO-
NENTS OR IF ANY BUCKETS OR STATIONARY SHROUDS HAVE BEEN REPLACED.
In order to accomplish this, it is necessary to bolt on the upper half of

the turbine shell with the stationary shrouds assembled.

! WARNING
BE SURE TO USE GUIDE PINS AND RESTRAINING CABLE AND SNATCH

BLOCK. EXERCISE EXTREME CARE SO THAT BUCKET TIPS ARE NOT DAM-
AGED.
ment at each end of every stationary shroud block
3. Take the concentricity readings as shown on Inspection Field Re-

port Record all readings on the inspection form. Report readings
to your NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field Service Representa-
tive for evaluation and disposition.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-37

6.3.2 Operation 31. Remove Turbine Casing Upper Half

the turbine easing in preparation for final assembly.
! WARNING
BE SURE TO USE GUIDE PINS AND RESTRAINING CABLE AND SNATCH

BLOCK AND EXERCISE EXTREME CARE SO THAT BUCKET TIPS ARE NOT
DAMAGED.
6.3.3 Operation 32. Inspect Combustion System Components Per

Combustion Inspection Operations 11 Through 16,18 & 19
) NOTE
REFER TO COMBUSTION INSPECTION, SECTION 5 OF THIS MAINTENANCE IN-

STRUCTION FOR INSPECTION PROCEDURES FOR THE FOLLOWING OPERA-
TIONS.
11. Test Fuel Check Valves.
12. Inspect Fuel Nozzles.
13. Inspect Combustion Liners.
14. Inspect Crossfire Tubes and Retainers.
15. Inspect Transition Pieces.
16. Inspect Combustion Chambers, Covers and Sight ports.
18. Inspect and Test Spark Plugs.
19. Inspect and Test Flame Detectors.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-38

6.3.4 Operation 33. Install Lower-Half Second-Stage Nozzle Segments

& Radial Retaining Pins
) NOTE
THIS OPERATION ASSUMES THAT THE DIAPHRAGM AND NOZZLE SEGMENTS

ARE BEING INSTALLED AS ONE ASSEMBLY.
1. Thoroughly clean the hook fits. Buffing the nozzle hook fits may
be helpful prior to applying anti-seize compound. Apply a light
coating of anti-seize compound.
! WARNING
USE OF ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND MUST BE RESTRICTED TO A THIN FILM

SUCH THAT THE COMPOUND IS NOT FORCED INTO THE INNER GAS PATH.
SHOULD THIS OCCUR, IT MUST -BE CAREFULLY REMOVED.
2. Install nozzle sidewall forward and aft seals into nozzle segment
in accordance with the Second-Stage Nozzle Arrangement draw-
ing, in the Parts Lists and Drawings Volume of this Service Man-
ual.
Ensure that the forward seals are bottomed out and that the ends
of the aft seals are in contact with the forward seals.
3. Assemble the diaphragm axial seal strip with the notch facing
out; then assemble the two radial seal strips with the notches fac-
ing in. Appropriately stake these seals. See Fig. 6-29.
) NOTE
DO NOT STAKE THE FORWARD OR AFT SEALS AT THE HORIZONTAL JOINT. THEY
ARE PINNED IN PLACE.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-39

4. Lift the nozzle and diaphragm segment onto its hook fit and slide
it down to its proper position. Install nozzle segments from each
horizontal joint to the center of the casing. For those nozzle seg-
ments with thermocouple tubes protruding, ensure that enough
clearance is available to allow the segments to be rolled in with-
out damaging the tubes. Each segment and diaphragm weighs ap-
proximately 35 pounds.
) NOTE
NOZZLE SEGMENT RADIAL LOCATING PINS SHOULD BE INSTALLED AFTER

EACH SEGMENT IS MOVED INTO POSITION.
5. Apply a light coat of anti-seize compound to all radial retaining

pins.
6. Install the retaining pins as each nozzle segment is installed.

Where pins are secured in place by holding plates, lockplates are
to be used to lock the hex head bolts.
6.3.5 Operation 34. Install Upper-Half Second-Stage Nozzle Segments

) NOTE

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-40

! WARNING

SHOULD THIS OCCUR, IT MUST BE CAREFULLY REMOVED.
2. Install the nozzle sidewall forward and aft seals into the nozzle
segment in accordance with the Second-Stage Nozzle Arrange-
ment drawing, in the Parts Lists and Drawings Volume of this
Service Manual.
out; then assemble the two radial seal strips with the notches fac-
ing in. Appropriately stake these seals. See Fig. 6-30.
) NOTE
DO NOT STAKE THE FORWARD OR AFT SEALS AT THE HORIZONTAL JOINT. THEY
ARE PINNED IN PLACE.
horizontal joint to the center of the casing. For those nozzle seg-
ments with thermocouple tubes protruding, ensure that enough
clearance is available to allow the segments to be rolled in with-
out damaging the tubes. Each segment and diaphragm weighs ap-
proximately 35 pounds.
) NOTE
NOZZLE SEGMENT RADIAL LOCATING PINS SHOULD BE INSTALLED AFTER

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-41


pins.

to be used to lock the hex head bolts.
6.3.6 Operation 35. Place Lower-Half Transition Pieces Into Combus-

tion Casings
) NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE APPLIES ONLY IF THE UPPER HALF OF THE TURBINE CASING
HAS BEEN REMOVED AND THE LOWER-HALF COMBUSTION CASINGS ARE STILL
IN PLACE.
1. Place transition pieces (Nos. 5, 4, 6, 3 and 7 in sequence) into

their respective combustion casings. Slide them as far back into
the combustion casing as possible.
) NOTE
TRANSITION PIECES MUST BE IN THEIR COMBUSTION CASING BEFORE INSTALL-

ING THE LOWER HALF OF THE FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE.
6.3.7 Operation 36. Install Lower-Half First-Stage Nozzle Assembly
) NOTE
IF A NEW OR REMANUFACTURED FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE IS TO BE REINSTALLED,

IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT ASSISTANCE BE OBTAINED FROM YOUR NUOVO
PIGNONE COMPANY FIELD SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE TO POSITION THE FIRST-
STAGE NOZZLE PROPERLY AND TAKE CLEARANCE CHECKS.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-42

1. Coat all bolts, dowels, pins and mating parts, including seals,
with a light coating of FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound.
) NOTE
IF APPLICABLE TO THE NOZZLE ASSEMBLY, CHECK TO ENSURE THAT WHEEL-

SPACE THERMOCOUPLES ARE PROPERLY IDENTIFIED FOR LOCATION PRIOR TO
INSTALLING THE NOZZLE.
2. Thread a shoulder eyebolt into the centre bolt hole in each of the
nozzle horizontal joint flanges. (One eyebolt for each end of the
nozzle.) These will be needed after the first-stage nozzle half is
partially installed.
3. To reinstall the first-stage nozzle, lower half which was removed

and proceed as follows:
a. Using cables, slings and chainfalls attached to the lifting bars

on the back of the nozzle retaining ring, rig to lift the nozzle
half, inverted (ends pointed down), over the turbine casing.
b. Check to be sure all mating surfaces are clean, free of burrs, or

upset metal, and lightly coated with FEL-PRO C- 102 an-
tiseize.
c. Begin rolling the nozzle lower-half assembly into the turbine,

casing by letting out on one chainfall and taking up on the
other, moving the crane as necessary to lead the assembly
around the rotor.
d. When the nozzle half has been rolled in about 45°, change the
attaching location of the lowest cable sling to the next lift bar
welded across the back of the nozzle retaining ring.
e. Continue rolling in nozzle half until its horizontal joint sur-

faces are perpendicular. At this point, it will be necessary to
pull nozzle the rest of the way around by attaching a cable
sling to eyebolt placed in leading end cable and letting out on
following cable.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-43

f. By the time nozzle half horizontal joints are oriented in hori-

zontal plane, both cable slings will be attached to eyebolts pre-
viously installed in horizontal bolts holes. With chainfalls at-
tached to cable slings, lift nozzle slightly and install horizontal
joint clamps under flanges.
) NOTE
BE SURE HORIZONTAL JOINT CLAMPS ARE REPLACED IN THEIR ORIGINAL PO-

SITIONS. THESE CLAMPS ARE GROUND AT FACTORY ASSEMBLY OF THE TUR-
BINE TO OBTAIN PROPER CLEARANCES.
g. Lower nozzle half onto horizontal joint clamps and remove

lifting slings, chainfalls and eyebolts.
h. Install two outer support clamps to first-stage shroud. Use

FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound on bolting (Fig. 6-30).
i. Reassemble 'L' seals to lower-half nozzle assembly.
) NOTE
ENSURE THAT 'L' SEAL JOINTS ARE STAGGERED AT LEAST 1.00 TO 0.750-INCH
FROM NOZZLE SEGMENT JOINTS.
j. Assemble 'L' seal clamping ring, lower half, after checking that
seal ring groove is clean and there are no burrs on tongue, or in
groove. Install new lockplates and bolts. Torque bolts to
proper thickness. Bend lockplates to lock bolting.
k. Assemble two thickness of packing around circumference of

inner-sidewall groove and two thickness around outersidewall
groove. Lengths of packing should span 180'. Packing joints
should not coincide with joints of nozzle segments. The two
layers should be staggered.
l. Install first-stage forward wheelspace thermocouples to lower-

half turbine casing.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-44

6.3.8 Operation 37. Install First-Stage Lower-Half Eccentric Pin
1. The eccentric pin is to be fitted to the first-stage nozzle lower

half after the nozzle has been assembled and properly positioned.
If the nozzle was not replaced and no adjustments were made to
achieve proper clearance, the eccentric pin should seat properly
without any adjustments. However, if the nozzle was replaced or
adjusted, the following procedure is to be used:
head and grind both surfaces smooth.
b. Install the eccentric pin into the turbine casing to its full depth,
carefully so as not to disturb the lateral centering of the noz-
zles.
d. Coat the top and sides of the retaining straps with Dykem
Blue.
e. Place the strap, coated side up, on top of the eccentric pin and
) NOTE

THREADS.
f. Scribe a mark on the head of the pin along both sides of the re-
taining strap.
g. Scribe two transverse marks across the top and down the side
of the retaining strap and continuing across the head of the pin.
per instructions in Fig. 6-3 1.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-45

j. Lightly coat the eccentric pin with FEL-PRO C-102 antiseize

compound and reinstall it in the shell.
k. Install the retaining strap bolts and torque bolts to proper tight-
ness. See Fig. 6-32.
1 Refer to Hot Gas Path Disassembly Operation 17 for taking tur-

2. Record all turbine clearances on Inspection Field Report for both

first- and second-stage nozzles and turbine rotor.

Drawings section of the Unit Service Manual.
4. Report any discrepancies to your NUOVO PIGNONE Company

Field Service Representative so that corrective action, if neces-
sary, can be made before proceeding with any further reassembly
of the turbine.
6.3.10 Operation 39 Install Lower-Half Transition Pieces Into Position
2. Reassemble the lower-half transition pieces to the lower-half first

stage nozzle (Nos. 3. 4, 59 6 and 7). Start with the bottom transi-
tion piece, No. 5, and work up. Install side seals and new shoul-
der bolts. Torque bolts to 32 to 37 foot-pounds.
bulkhead. See Fig. 6-33.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-46

4. Lightly coat the new shoulder bolts with FEL-PRO C-102 an-
tiseize compound. Install new aft bracket shoulder bolts, with
new locking plates and torque the bolts to 60 to 80 foot-pounds
using the following procedure:
bracket. Lock the aft bracket shoulder bolt with a new lock
plate. Bend a lockplate a minimum of two tabs to lock the
shoulder bolt securely. See Fig. 6-34.
! WARNING

6.3.11 Operation 40. Place Upper-Half Transition Pieces Into Combus-

tion Casings
) NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE APPLIES ONLY IF UPPER HALF OF TURBINE CASING HAS

BEEN REMOVED AND UPPER-HALF COMBUSTION CASINGS ARE STILL IN PLACE.
1. Place transition pieces (Nos. 8, 2, 1, 9 and 10, in sequence) into

their respective combustion casings. Slide them as far back into
) NOTE

ING THE UPPER HALF OF THE FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-47

6.3.12 Operation 41. Install Upper-Half First-Stage Nozzle
1. Coat all mating surfaces with a light coating of FEL-PRO C-102

anti-seize compound.
) NOTE
IF APPLICABLE TO THE NOZZLE ASSEMBLY, CHECK TO ENSURE THE WHEEL-

SPACE THERMOCOUPLES ARE PROPERLY IDENTIFIED, PRIOR TO INSTALLING
THE NOZZLE.
2. Install 'L' seals to the upper half, first stage nozzle assembly.
) NOTE
A LIGHT PEEN MARK WILL HOLD THE SEALS IN PLACE DURING ASSEMBLY.
3. Using chainfalls and slings, rig to lift the nozzle assembly (two
ends pointing down) and level.
4. Carefully lower the upper half of the nozzle assembly onto the
lower half. Check to ensure that seal strips are in place in the in-
ner and outer sidewall grooves.
5. Install the upper-half horizontal joint clamps, bolts and torque

bolts to proper tightness.
) NOTE
MAKE SURE THAT THE HORIZONTAL JOINT CLAMPS ARE INSTALLED ON THE
SAME SIDES FROM WHICH THEY WERE REMOVED, USE FEL-PRO C-102 AN-
TISEIZE COMPOUND ON BOLTING AND DOWELS.
6. Assemble the 'L' seal clamping ring using new lockplates and
bolts. Torque bolts to proper tightness and bend-lockplate tabs to
lock the bolts (minimum two taps per bolt).
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-48

7. If installing a new or remanufactured nozzle assembly, dimen-

sions 1N1 and 1N2 will have to be checked and recorded on In-
spection Field Report. (Refer to the Clearance Diagram in the
Reference Drawings Section in the unit service manual for spe-
cific dimensions.)
) NOTE
IF DISCREPANCIES EXIST IN ANY OF THE DIMENSIONS MEASURED, CONTACT

YOUR NUOVO PIGNONE COMPANY FIELD SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE.
8. Assemble two thicknesses of packing around the circumference

of outer and inner sidewall grooves. Lengths of packing should
span approximately 180°. Packing joints should not coincide with
joints of nozzle segments. Each of the two layers should be stag-
gered.
2. Reassemble upper-half transition pieces to the upper half, first

stage nozzle (Nos. 1, 2, 8, 9 and 10). Start with the two transition
pieces located just above the horizontal joint (Nos. 2 and 8), and
work up. Install side seals and new shoulder bolts. Torque bolts
to 32 to 37 foot-pounds.
with the support bracket in the compressor discharge casing bulk-
head. See Fig. 6-33.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-49

4. Lightly coat the shoulder bolts with FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize

compound. Install the aft bracket shoulder bolts, with new lock-
ing plates and torque the bolts to 60 to 68 foot-pounds, using the
following procedure:
bracket. Lock the aft bracket shoulder bolt with a new locking
plate. Bend the lockplate a minimum of two tabs to lock the
shoulder bolt securely. See Fig. 6-34.
! WARNING

COMBUSTION SYSTEM. DO NOT USE ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND IN ANY AREAS
WHERE IT COULD GET INTO THE HOT GAS PATH.

bine casings level.
) NOTE


shackle.
full height of a vertical stack.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-50


and run it through lift bracket that is welded to the transition duct.
6. Attach two cables of equal length to the forward turbine casing

the 20-foot cable hook.
7. Attach shorter cables and 1-1/2 or 2-ton comealongs to the cable

hook and to each rear lifting trunnion on the turbine casing. (The
cable hook must be kept close to the turbine casing to allow suf-
ficient lift.)
8. Lift the turbine casing off of its forward vertical flange and with
the chainfal and comealongs, reposition the casing and set it on
its horizontal joint flange using suitable blocking to protect the
horizontal joint flange.
turbine casing compressor discharge case, and exhaust hood cas-
ing. Coat the compressor discharge casing and exhaust hood cas-
ing with a light film of anti-seize compound.
! WARNING

WITH PULLING JOINTS TOGETHER AND ACT AS A GASKET.
DO NOT GET ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND ON OR INTO THE HOT GAS COMPO-
NENTS.
and security of all items and ensure no foreign objects can enter
ter of gravity, which is 15.14 inches from the aft flange.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-51

) NOTE
12. Install a tag line on the turbine casing and lift over the turbine.
Using the rigging and tag line, lower and guide the casing as
close to position as possible over the lower-half turbine casing.
13. With the easing centered over the turbine, attach the snatch block
chainfall.
) NOTE
ROD 30 INCHES LONG MACHINED .010-INCH LOOSE TO FIT THE BODY-BOUND
! WARNING
DO NOT ALLOW THE TURBINE CASING TO SWING AND HIT THE TURBINE
BUCKETS WHILE IT IS BEING LOWERED INTO POSITION.
) NOTE
MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE UPPER AND LOWER-HALF TURBINE NOZZLE SEG-
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-52

necessary.
for a distance of 1 inch on both sides of the four-way joint. Do
) NOTE
BEFORE INSTALLING.
1. Install all bolts hand-tight, including body-bound bolts.
3. Alternately tighten and torque all the vertical bolts, working

down each side from the top vertical centerline. Work both the aft
and forward flanges simultaneously.
) NOTE

PLACE THE HORIZONTAL JOINT BOLTS, TIGHTEN AND TORQUE THE BOLTS.
4. On turbines with borescope access ports, reinstall the borescope

areas.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-53

6.3.16 Operation 45, Install Upper-Half, First-Stage Nozzle Eccentric

Pin
1. An eccentric pin is to be fitted to the first-stage nozzle after the

nozzle has been installed and properly positioned. If the nozzle
was not replaced and no adjustments were made to achieve
proper clearance, the eccentric pin should seat properly without
any adjustments. However, if the nozzle was replaced or ad-
justed, the following procedure is to be used:
b. Carefully install the eccentric pin into the casing to their full
depth so as not to disturb the lateral centering of the nozzle.
c. Coat top portion of the pin with Dykem Blue.
d. Coat the top and sides of the retaining strap with Dykem Blue.
) NOTE

THREADS.
f. Scribe a mark on the head of the pin along both sides of the re-
taining strap.
of the retaining strap and continuing across the head of the pin.
per instructions in Fig. 6-3 1.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-54

j. Lightly coat the eccentric pin with FEL-PRO C- 102 antiseize

compound and reinstall it in the shell.
k. Install the retaining strap bolts and torque bolts to proper tight-
ness. See Fig. 6-32.
6.3.17 Operation 46. Assemble Exhaust Plenum Upper-Half Forward

Flex Seals & Clamp Segments
1. Check to see that the flex seal joint groove is clean and free of
burrs.
2. Assemble the flex seals and gaskets into position, making sure
the gasket and flex seal joints do not coincide.
3. Apply FEL-PRO C- 102 anti-seize compound to the clamp seg-

ment bolts, assemble clamp segments and bolts. Torque bolts to
proper tightness.
6.3.18 Operation 47. Remove Mechanical Support Jacks & Jack Sup-
ports From Underneath Unit Casing
! WARNING

PER CASINGS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED AND BOLTED UP.
Attach dial indicators to turbine enclosure forme and set to indi-
2. Release the jacks, and observe whether turbine casing has low-
ered.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-55

3. If turbine casing moved downward when the support jacks were

released, remove the support jacks and shim supports from under
the turbine.
4. If turbine casing did not move downward when support jacks

were released, contact your NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field
Service Representative for disposition and corrective action.
6.3.19 Operation 48. Take Closing Compressor & Turbine Rotor Posi-
tioning Checks
) NOTE

! WARNING

PRESSOR.

and below the horizontal joint on either side. Record clearances
) NOTE

2. The 11th stage compressor probe holes (four in total) are located
3.875 inches aft from the compressor discharge casing forward
flange face.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-56

3. The 15th stage compressor probe holes (four in total) are located
16.40 inches aft from the compressor discharge casing forward
flange face.
by removing the plugs located as follows:
11th Stage - At 3° 15’ off top and bottom vertical centerline, and
15th Stage.-.At 10° off top and bottom vertical centerline, and
A stamped number next to the plug counterbores indicates the

thickness of the casing from the bottom of the counterbore to the
inside diameter of the casing. Record clearances on Inspection
Field Report. Compressor rotor tip clearances can be taken as fol-
lows:
Remove plug and place an adaptor into the machined counterbore

of the casing. The adaptor will allow the base of the depth mi-
crometer rod to penetrate the probe hole accurately.
) NOTE
PROXIMATELY 2 INCHES LONG. THE ENDS OF THE PIPE FACES SHOULD BE
Take the depth micrometer and measure to the tip of the blade.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-57

! WARNING
PATH.
5. Omit the first-stage turbine six-point checks at this reassembly

stage.
6. The second-stage turbine six-point checks are to be taken with

feelers.
7. Take the concentricity readings on Inspection Field Report. Re-

cord all readings on this form. Report readings to your NUOVO
PIGNONE Company Field Service Representative.
8. Any access hole cut in the exhaust diffuser should have a cover
welded on to provide a smooth gas path.
6.3.20 Operation 49, Install Upper & Lower 4th & 10th Stage Cooling &
Sealing Air Lines & Extraction Valves
2. Assemble all 4th and 10th stage piping removed, being careful to
replace all orifices in their location from where they were re-
) NOTE
IN EVENT THAT THE LOCATION IDENTIFICATION OF THE ORIFICES IS LOST, RE-

FER TO THE COOLING AND SEALING AIR PIPING DIAGRAM IN THE REFERENCE
DRAWINGS SECTION OF THE SERVICE MANUAL FOR THE LOCATION AND SIZE
OF ORIFICE REQUIRED.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-58

3. Reconnect the (20CB-1) tubing air lines to the bleed valve actua-
tor cylinder, reinstall the 'U' brackets and clamping rings to both
valves.

) NOTE

12 IN THE SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE. SOME FIELD UPGRADE UNITS HAVE THESE
THERMOCOUPLES LOCATED IN SEGMENTS 2 AND 5. THERE ARE TWO THERMO-
COUPLES PER SEGMENT.

Parts List and Drawings Volume of this service manual for de-
tails if needed.

) NOTE

PLE IS STAMPED ON THE TURBINE CASING ADJACENT TO THE THERMOCOUPLE
TUBING INSTALLATION HOLE. THIS DIMENSION MAY BE USED FOR REFERENCE
WHEN INSTALLING THE THERMOCOUPLE.

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-59

6.3.22 Operation 51. Install Combustion System Components
1. Refer to Operations 22 through 31 in Section 5, Combustion In-

spection - Reassembly Procedure in this maintenance instruction.
These reassembly operations are:
a. Install combustion liners and crossfire tubes.
b. Install flame detectors and spark plugs.
c. Install combustion casing covers.
d. Install fuel nozzles.
e. Install fuel check valves.
f. Install atomizing air manifold.
g. Install gas fuel manifold.
h. Install liquid fuel lines.
i. Install atomizing air lines to fuel nozzles.
j. Install gas fuel lines to fuel nozzle.

) NOTE
INSTALLED USING DOUBLER PLATES AND NUTS AND BOLTS TO FACILITATE FU-
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-60


5. Apply FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound to bolts and install

all bolts.
6. Install all wiring and conduit, piping brackets, etc., removed at

disassembly.
6.3.24 Operation 53. Clean-Up, Visual Inspection, Prestart/Startup

Checks
1. Clean up all fuel oil, lube oil, and water spills.
b. Check that all removed conduit has been replaced, and electri-
cal connections made. Confirm function of all devices rein-
stalled.
c. Correct any lube, fuel and water leaks observed.
d. Inspect inlet and exhaust plenums, and secure shut.

arm the Halon system.
b. Check operation of the cool-down/emergency lube oil pump.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-61

5. Initiate a start, and perform the following zero to full speed, no

load checks.
a. Observe applicable firing check parameters, spark plugs, flame

detectors, relay sequences, exhaust temperature, vibration and
speed.
b. Observe and record acceleration rates.
c. Record full set of vibration readings.
d. Observe and record temperature suppression setpoint.
e. Note and record pickup time of all appropriate electrical speed

relays.
f. Adjust full speed, no load rpm to specifications.
g. Check digital setpoint.
h. Take a complete set of running data. See Running Inspections,

Section 4, in this maintenance instruction.
i. Check for air, oil, fuel, gas and water leaks.
b. Check for air, oil, fuel, gas and water leaks.

drains.
e. Block out excitation and generator breaker equipment.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-62

f. Place unit on ratchet and observe for leaks, rubs, and control
deficiencies.
g. Check to ensure fuel pump is primed.
h. Check atomizing air compressor (if applicable).
a. Observe pickup rpm of speed sensors versus time.
c. Observe and record vibration channel inputs.
g. Observe all panel pressure gauge readings for abnormalities.
h. Trip unit using the emergency trip, and listen for abnormal
coast-down.
i. Observe proper drop-out rpm of speed sensors.
8. Observe normal unloading and shutdown as follows:
a. Note and record coast-down time.
b. Listen for abnormal noises from gas turbine and associated

equipment during coast-down.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-63

c. Observe unit vibration readings during coast-down.
d. Complete preparation of all inspection, startup and operating

data reports.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-64

•
LOCATION AND NUMBER MAY VARY.
Fig. 6-1 - NUMBERING OF COMBUSTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-65

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-66

Fig. 6-3 - CORRECT POSITION FOR MECHANICAL SCREW

JACKS UNDER TURBINE CASING
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-67

Fig. 6-4 - TYPICAL SCREW JACK RESTING ON METAL

SUPPORT BLOCK
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-68

Fig. 6-5 - TRANSITION PIECE & FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE ARRANGEMENT
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-69

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-70

Fig. 6-7 - FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE & SHROUD WEDGED IN DIRECTION

OF GAS FLOW FOR CLEARANCE CHECKS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-71

Fig. 6-8 - TYPICAL SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE AND DIAPHRAGM

WEDGED IN DIRECTION OF GAS FLOW FOR CLEARANCE CHECKS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-72

Fig. 6-9 - FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE CLAMPS & SUPPORT ARRANGEMENT
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-73

Fig. 6-10 - REMOVAL LOWER-HALF FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE (a)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-74

Fig. 6-11 - REMOVAL LOWER-HALF FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE (b)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-75

Fig. 6-12 - REMOVAL LOWER-HALF FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE (c)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-76

Fig. 6-13 - REMOVAL LOWER-HALF FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE (d)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-77

Fig. 6-14 - SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE SEGMENTS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-78

Fig. 6-15 - REMOVAL OF SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE AND

DIAPHRAGM ASSEMBLY (a)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-79


DIAPHRAGM ASSEMBLY (b)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-80


DIAPHRAGM ASSEMBLY (c)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-81


DIAPHRAGM ASSEMBLY (d)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-82

Fig. 6-16 - MISSING METAL NO REPAIR CRITERIA FIRST-STAGE

BUCKET
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-83

Fig. 6-17 - WELD REPAIR CRITERIA FIRST-STAGE BUCKET
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-84

Fig. 6-18 - REPAIR DIMENSION CRITERIA SECOND-STAGE

SHROUDED TIP BUCKET
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-85

Fig. 6-19 - SHROUD TIP REWORK LIMITS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-86

Fig. 6-20 - FIRST- & SECOND-STAGE TURBINE SHROUDS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-87

Fig. 6-21 - NOZZLE SIDEWALL CRACKS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-88

Fig. 6-22 - NOZZLE SIDEWALL CRACKS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-89

Fig. 6-23 - NOZZLE PARTITION FILLET CRACKS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-90

Fig. 6-24 - NOZZLE PARTITION FILLET CRACKS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-91

Fig. 6-25 - NOZZLE SIDEWALL SURFACE CRACKS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-92

Fig. 6-26 - UNACCEPTABLE CRACKS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-93

Fig. 6-27 - UNACCEPTABLE CRACK PROPAGATION
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-94

Fig. 6-28 - UNACCEPTABLE CRACK PROPAGATION
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-95

Fig. 6-29 - SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE SEALS & RADIAL

RETAINING PINS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-96

Fig. 6-30 - FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE CLAMPS

& SUPPORT ARRANGEMENTS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-97

Fig. 6-31 - RETAINING STRAP WELDED TO HEAD

OF ECCENTRIC PIN
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-98

Fig. 6-32 - ECCENTRIC PIN HELD BY MEANS OF BOLTS

THROUGH HOLES IN RETAINING STRAP
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-99

Fig. 6-33 - PLACEMENT OF TRANSITION PIECES IN COMPRESSOR

DISCHARGE CASING “F” CLAMPS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-100

Fig. 6-34 - BOLT & LOCKING PLATE TRANSITION PIECE

TO NOZZLE
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-101

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 6-102

Major Inspection Section 7
MAJOR INSPECTION
CONTENTS SECT
IN-SERVICE TURBINE WHEEL INSPECTION 7.1
DISASSEMBLY 7.2
REASSEMBLY 7.3
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

7. MAJOR INSPECTION
! WARNING
BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH A MAJOR INSPECTION ENSURE THAT THE GAS

TURBINE ELECTRICAL POWER IS TAGGED OUT, CO2 SYSTEM IS DEACTI-
VATED, LIQUID FUEL SYSTEM IS PURGED, DEACTIVATED AND/OR THE GAS
SUPPLY IS BLANKED OFF.
7.1 IN-SERVICE TURBINE WHEEL INSPECTION
If unit rotor has accumulated over 2,000 starts or eight years of service, an in-
service turbine wheel inspection should be performed during the major in-
spection of the unit. Refer to Section 4, Scheduled Turbine Maintenance,
Special Inspection, in this inspection and maintenance instruction for back-
ground, recommendations and procedure.
) NOTE
PERFORM ALIGNMENT CHECKS BEFORE ANY UNIT DISASSEMBLY IS BEGUN.
It is suggested that you obtain assistance from your NUOVO PIGNONE

Field Service Representative when performing alignment checks.
7.2 DISASSEMBLY
7.2.1 Operation 1. Remove Accessory Coupling Guard
1. For removal of accessory coupling guard of the horizontal

splitline expansion joint configuration, proceed as follows:
a. Remove horizontal joint bolts from coupling guard.
b. Remove the upper half vertical joint bolts from the turbine end
of the guard.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-1

c. Remove the aft vertical expansion joint bolting from the ex-
pansion joint.
d. Manufacture jacking bolts to collapse the expansion joint in

the following manner:
1. Weld two 3/8-inch nuts to the forward side of the aft flange.
Place the nuts 180Ø apart horizontally between vertical
flange bolts in order not to interfere with bolt removal.
! WARNING
PROTECT BELLOWS AREA FROM ACCIDENTAL ARCING DURING WELDING

OF NUTS TO EXPANSION JOINT FLANGES.
2. Weld the nuts so a 3/8-inch section of all-thread rod can be

screwed into them extending horizontally forward from the
aft vertical flange past the forward vertical flange of the ex-
pansion joint.
3. Weld two 3/4-inch nuts to the edge of the expansion joint

forward flange so that the 3/8-inch all-thread rods will pass
through them. They will act as bushings so the expansion
joint can be collapsed when nuts are placed on the free end
of the all-thread rods and tightened. See Fig. 7-1.
e. Remove the expansion joint forward vertical bolting.
f. Tighten the jacking bolts equally to collapse the expansion

joint only enough to remove the coupling guard upper half.
! WARNING
DO NOT COLLAPSE THE EXPANSION JOINT MORE THAN .500 INCH.
g. Lift off the upper-half coupling guard.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-2

h. Disconnect the oil feed and drain lines to the oil spray nozzles.
Cap or cover all open oil lines.
i. Remove the lower-half vertical coupling guard bolts at the tur-

bine end and remove the lower-half coupling guard. ]be expan-
sion joint should be supported until the lower-half coupling
guard is removed.
j. Move the expansion joint aft to expose the accessory coupling

bolts. Gently rest the expansion joint assembly on the acces-
sory coupling shaft.
k. Clean all flange joint faces and remove old anti-seize com-
pound from the bolts.
l. Discard all used gaskets.
2. For removal of accessory coupling guards other than horizontal

splitline expansion joint configuration, proceed as follows:
a. Tag and/or matchmark both ends of the coupling guard and top
and bottom halves, if applicable.
b. Remove the vertical and horizontal bolts.
c. Lift off the coupling guard, being careful not to damage the
flange face surfaces.
d. Clean old anti-seize compound from bolts and joint flange

faces.
7.2.2 Operation 2. Remove Load Coupling Guard
1 For removal of load coupling guards of the horizontal splitline

expansion joint configuration, proceed as follows:
a. Remove the horizontal joint bolts from the coupling guard.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-3

b. Remove upper-half vertical joint bolts from the load gear end
of the coupling guard.
c. Manufacture jacking bolts to collapse expansion joint in the

following manner:
1. Weld two 3/8-inch nuts to forward side of aft vertical

flange. Place the nuts 180Ø apart horizontally between ver-
tical flange bolts in order not to interfere with bolt removal.
! WARNING
PROTECT BELLOWS AREA FROM ACCIDENTAL ARCING DURING WELDING

OF NUTS TO EXPANSION JOINT FLANGES.
2. Weld the nuts so a 3/8-inch section of all-thread rod can be

screwed into them extending horizontally forward from the
aft vertical flange past the forward vertical flange of the ex-
pansion joint.
3. Weld two 3/4-inch nuts to the edge of the expansion joint

forward flange so that the 3/8-inch all-thread rods will pass
through them. They will act as bushings so the expansion
joint can be collapsed when nuts are placed on the free end
of the all-thread rods and tightened. See Fig. 7-1.
4. Before tightening the all-thread jacking bolts to collapse the

expansion joint, remove all of the expansion joint forward
vertical flange bolts.
5. Tighten the jacking bolts equally to collapse the expansion

joint only enough to remove the coupling guard upper half.
! WARNING
DO NOT COLLAPSE EXPANSION JOINT MORE THAN .500 INCH.
d. Lift off the coupling guard upper half.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-4

e. Remove the remaining coupling guard bolts to remove the

lower half of the coupling guard.
f. Remove the bolts from the No. 2 bearing upper-half aft hous-
ing, vertical and horizontal flanges. Remove the aft bearing
housing upper half.
g. Support the expansion joint and move the assembly aft and
gently rest the assembly on the load coupling shaft.
h. Clean all flange joint faces and remove old anti-seize com-
pound from bolts.
i. Discard all gaskets
2. For removal of load coupling guards without horizontal splitline,

proceed as follows:
a. Remove the bolts from the No. 2 bearing upper-half aft bearing
housing, vertical and horizontal flanges. Remove the aft bear-
ing housing upper half.
b. Remove the bolts from the load gear coupling flanges. Remove
the load gear coupling housing upper half.
c. Remove and cap the oil lines and spray nozzles.
d. Rig the coupling guard, using a nylon webbing sling, chainfall,

and turnbuckles as required to slide and lift the coupling guard
carefully out of the bearing housing and load gear coupling
housing lower halves.
e. Remove the bolts from the load gear coupling housing lower
half and remove lower half housing.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-5

) NOTE
THE COUPLING GUARD WILL REMAIN AROUND THE COUPLING SHAFT. IT WILL
BE REMOVED FROM THE TURBINE ALONG WITH THE LOAD COUPLING SHAFT.
f. Clean all bolts and mating flange surfaces.
7.2.3 Operation 3. Remove Load Coupling, Inspect & Check Alignment
1. Matchmark the turbine shaft to the coupling sleeve, both cou-

pling sleeves to coupling hubs and the load gear shaft to coupling
sleeve.
2. Set up dial indicators to measure axially from coupling shaft to

coupling sleeve. Move shaft axially and note the end float. End
float should be 0.13 to 0.062-inch. Record on Inspection Field
Report.
3. Set up two dial indicators to measure radially from top centerline

of the coupling shaft to both coupling sleeves. Raise the cou-
pling shaft within the sleeves and note the radial movement. ra-
dial movement should not exceed 0.005 inch maximum. Record
! WARNING
EXCESSIVE FORCE IS NOT REQUIRED TO LIFT THE COUPLING WITHIN ITS

SLEEVES. THE COUPLING SHAFT AND HUBS WEIGH APPROXIMATELY 350
POUNDS. DO NOT PRY AGAINST THE RETURN PIPING UNDER THE COU-
PLING ASSEMBLY. PROTECT THE COUPLING WHILE LIFTING WITH A
WOODEN BLOCK OR PADDING AT THE LEFT POINT.
4. Rig the coupling to support the load of the coupling using nylon
webbing slings, chainfalls and turnbacks as required. Take up on
the rigging to support the weight of the coupling shaft prior to
removing the bolting.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-6

) NOTE
MARK AND IDENTIFY COUPLING BOLTS AND NUTS FOR REINSTALLATION IN

SAME POSITION AS FOUND. USE THE SPECIAL ADAPTOR EXTENSION BAR. AND
RATCHET TO REMOVE LOAD COUPLING BOLTS.
5. Remove the bolts and separate the halves of the coupling flanges
with jack bolts. The coupling sleeves can be controlled while
jacking them apart by leaving two of the coupling bolts with the
nuts loose but still in place 180° apart in each coupling flange.
6. Take up on the lift rigging to accept the full weight of the cou-
pling and remove the last four bolts and proceed as follows:
a. Raise the load gear end of the coupling by taking up on the

chain fall. Slide the coupling out of the tunnel.
b. When the coupling shaft is out far enough to permit, rerig to a

single nylon webbing sling around the middle of the coupling
and attach to a chainfall on the crane hook. Remove the origi-
nal two nylon slings, chainfall and turnbuckle.
c. Carefully lift the load coupling clear of the unit so no damage

is done to the flange faces. Set the coupling in a laydown area
on a piece of plywood or heavy cardboard.
7. Clean all nuts, bolts and flange faces. Bag the nuts and bolts and
store with the load coupling.
8. Inspect the load coupling and record findings on Inspection Field

Report.
) NOTE
CLEAN THE COUPLING AND SHAFT.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-7

a. Inspect for general condition as founds.
b. Inspect teeth condition for excessive wear, galling, fretting,

pitting or broken teeth.
It is suggested that assistance be obtained from your NUOVO

PIGNONE Company Field Service Representative when per-
forming alignment checks.
9. Attach the alignment fixture and dial indicators to the turbine

shaft and check the turbine to load gear alignment. Refer to the
Instructions and Data Alignment-Field, in the Reference Draw-
ings Section of the service manual for alignment specifications.
Record alignment on Inspection Field Report.


nect the wiring at the nearest pull box not physically mounted on
ble the rigid conduit so that it can be removed as part of the roof
water and/or dirt.
3. Disconnect Halon 1301 piping and any other piping which may
interfere with roof removal.
4. Unbolt the roof from the sidewall frames.
5. Attach four eyebolts to roof section at threaded receptacles pro-

vided on top.
6. Attach four equal length cables, or two equal length cables and
two comealongs, to chainfall connected to crane.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-8


7.2.5 Operation 5. Perform Combustion Inspection Disassembly Op-

erations 1 Through 8
1. Remove liquid fuel lines.
2. Remove atomizing air lines and atomizing air manifold.
3. Remove gas fuel lines and gas fuel manifold (if applicable).
4. Remove liquid fuel check valves.
5. Remove fuel nozzles.
6. Remove flame detectors and spark plugs.
7. Remove combustion casing covers.
8. Remove crossfire tube retainers, crossfire tubes and combustion

liners.
) NOTE
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-9

1. Identify each combustion casing to be removed as to location.
2. Starting with the No. 10 combustion casing, rig the casing to the
lifting means to support the weight. Unbolt the casing from the
compressor discharge casing bulkhead.

4. Set and block the outer casing on wood or heavy cardboard in the
laydown area.
5. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 for Combustion Casings 1, 2, 3, 9, 8 and

7.
6. Rig No. 4 combustion casing to the lifting means. Attach a

bulkhead.
7. Unbolt the casing from the compressor discharge and using the
rigging attached, carefully work the combustion casing outward.
Lift the casing clear of the unit.

9. Repeat setps 6, 7 and 8 for combustion casings Nos. 5 and 6.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-10

turbine casing. Use the same code as stamped on the casing in

the shell and remove all tube clips that hold down the thermo-
couples in the turbine compartment.
3. Pull the thermocouples carefully through the hole in the base 'I'
beam and coil them up and secure them to the 'I' beam web near
the junction boxes JB No. 18A and JB No. 18B, where they will
be protected from damage.

moval. Tag these fittings for location for later reassembly.
7.2.8 Operation 8. Remove Upper- & Lower-Half Cooling & Sealing

Air Piping
1. Disconnect (20CB-1) tubing air connection at the compressor

bleed valves (VAB-2 & VAB-1) actuating cylinders and remove
the conduit and wiring from the valves limit switches (33CB-l &
-2).
2. Support the 10th stage extraction lines and remove the 'U' bracket
that supports the valves actuating cylinder.
lows.
5. Identify all orifices and piping removed for location.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-11

piping by sliding it out of the expansion slip joint and lift it clear
of the turbine compartment.
8. Identify and tag all orifices and piping removed for location.
7.2.9 Operation 9. Remove Exhaust Aft Flex Seals & Turning Vane
Bolts

bolts.
2. Identify and/or tag flex seals and clamp segments as to location.
3. Remove clamp segment bolts, clamp segments and flex seals.
4. Remove the vertical turning vane bolts between the inner drum
and exhaust frame mating flanges.
) NOTE
TURBINE VANE BOLTING IS ACCESSIBLE THROUGH LOAD COUPLING TUNNEL.
5. Remove gasket from vertical joints and discard.
6. Clean all vertical joint flanges, flex seal joint faces and seal
grooves.
7. Remove old anti-seize compound from bolts.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-12


bolts.
2. Identify and/or tag upper-half flex seals and clamp segments as to

location.
3. Remove clamp segment bolts, clamp segments and upper-half

seals.
4. Clean flex seal joint faces and grooves.
5. Clean off all old anti-seize compound from the bolts.
7.2.11 Operation 11. Slide Turning Vanes Into Load Gear Compartment
1. Rig the turning vanes using a long choker wrapped around the
balance point using chainfalls attached to lift means.
2. Remove the vertical and horizontal section of oil return pipe and
Dresser couplings (or boots) with oil feed line inside. Cap all
open ends of piping.
3. Lift the turning vane section and slide it back into the load com-
partment, approximately one foot.
4. Place turning vane section on crib made from 2 x 6-inch planks.

Rest the turning vane section onto the cribbing.
5. Tie off the upper section of the turning vane to the top rear of the
exhaust plenum.
6. Clean all joint faces of old gasket material and/or joint com-
pound.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-13

7.2.12 Operation 12. Take Opening Rotor Positioning Cheeks
) NOTE
IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT TO TAKE OPENING ROTOR POSITIONING CHECKS

ACCURATELY SINCE THE CHECKS GIVE A DATA BASE FOR THE ROTOR-TO-
STATOR RELATIONSHIP. THESE FIGURES CAN BE COMPARED TO THE COM-
PRESSOR AND TURBINE CLEARANCES AND ALSO COMPARED TO THE CLOSING
POSITIONING CHECKS AFTER THE UPPER-HALF CASINGS HAVE BEEN RE-
PLACED.
Opening rotor positioning checks must be done with all casings bolted
in place and the unit supported on its own supports.
1. Remove the access cover to gain entry to the inlet plenum. Mark
one blade of the '0' stage compressor rotor, and using the marked
blade, rotate the rotor to take clearance checks at six points: top
centerline, bottom centerline, and above and below the horizontal
joints on each side. Record readings on Inspection Field Report.
) NOTE
A LEATHER STRAP WRENCH, 'PEE-VEE BAR', WRAPPED AROUND THE FLANGE

OF THE ACCESSORY COUPLING SHAFT IS ONE MEANS USED TO ROTATE THE
UNIT FOR POSITIONING CHECKS. ROTATE THE UNIT COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
LOOKING IN THE DIRECTION OF THE UNIT FLOW.
Another means of rotating the rotor for positioning checks is to

bolt an adaptor plate to the turbine end coupling flange. Using a
deep socket, I-inch drive ratchet, extension handle with lift eye
welded on and a come along. Using the come along attached to
the steel beam in the exhaust plenum and the other end to ratchet
handle eye hook, the unit can be rotated as required for position-
ing checks. See Fig. 7-2.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-14

2. Compressor casing probe hole provisions exist so that the com-

pressor rotor tip clearances can be taken on the 7th, 11th and 15th
stage compressor. Record compressor tip clearances for 7th, 11th
and 15th stages on Inspection Field Report.
) NOTE
DEPENDENT ON UNIT CONFIGURATION, PROBE HOLES MAY BE LOCATED AT

THE 7TH, 11TH AND 15TH STAGES OR THE 7TH AND 15TH STAGES OR THE 11TH
AND 15TH STAGES. TAKE CLEARANCE READINGS ACCORDING TO YOUR UNIT
CONFIGURATION.
3. Compressor tip clearances at the 7th, 11th and 15th stages are
taken by removing the plugs located 10o off top and bottom cen-
terline and 10o above each horizontal joint. A stamped number
casing.
a. Remove the plug and place an adaptor into the machine coun-
terbore of the casing. The adaptor will allow the base of the
depth micrometer to rest squarely on the casing, thereby allow-
ing the micrometer rod to penetrate the probe hole accurately.
) NOTE
PROXIMATELY 2-INCHES LONG. THE ENDS OF THE PIPE FACES SHOULD BE
b. Take depth micrometer and measure to tip of blade. The meas-

urement will be the distance from blade tip to top of adaptor.
Add adaptor length to the thickness stamped on compressor
casing. Subtract this measurement from depth micrometer
reading. The result is tip clearance. See Fig. 7-3.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-15

! WARNING
PATH.
4. Turbine rotor positioning checks are made by reading second-

stage turbine buckets to second-stage turbine shrouds position.
Readings are taken at the top and bottom centerlines, 45° above
and below horizontal joints on left and right sides and just above
and below each horizontal joint. Record readings on Inspection
Field Report.
a. Enter the exhaust plenum area and mark two buckets at the top
centerline of the unit. Install the dial indicator fixture firmly
between two turbine buckets.
) NOTE
AFTER A FIXTURE IS MOUNTED BETWEEN BUCKET, CHECK TO ENSURE THAT

ALL BUCKET ROCK HAS BEEN TAKEN UP. ERRONEOUS READINGS WILL OCCUR
IF BUCKETS CAN ROCK DURING POSITIONING CHECKS.
b. Mount a dial indicator on fixture to indicate at center of

shroud.
7.2.13 Operation 13. Remove Accessory Coupling, Inspect & Check

Alignment
1. Matchmark accessory gear shaft to coupling sleeve, both cou-

pling sleeves to coupling hubs, and turbine shaft to coupling
sleeves. See Fig. 7-4.
2. Set up dial indicator to measure axially from the coupling shaft to

a coupling sleeve. Move the shaft axially by hand and note end
float. End float for continuous lubricated couplings should be .87
to .66 inch, and for oil-filled couplings should be a minimum of
.644 inch.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-16

3. Set up two dial indicators to measure radially from the top center-
line of the coupling shaft to both coupling sleeves. Raise the
coupling shaft within the sleeves and note the radial movement.
Radial movement should not exceed 0.005 inch maximum. Re-
cord radial reading on Inspection Field Report.
! WARNING
EXCESSIVE FORCE IS NOT REQUIRED TO LIFT THE COUPLING WITHIN ITS

SLEEVES. THE COUPLING AND HUB ASSEMBLY WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY
165 POUNDS.
) NOTE
MARK AND IDENTIFY COUPLING BOLTS AND NUTS FOR REINSTALLATION IN

SAME POSITION AS FOUND.
If coupling is of the oil-filled type, drain the oil from the coupling
prior to removing the bolting. Rotate the shaft to orient the fill
holes vertically, remove the fill plugs and catch the oil in a clean
container for later inspection.
4. Rig coupling shaft using nylon web slings and chainfall on crane
hook. Remove bolts and nuts and separate halves of the coupling
flanges.
5. Carefully lift out the accessory coupling and place coupling in a

clean laydown area.
6. Clean all bolts, nuts and flange faces. Bag the bolts and nuts and
store with coupling.
7. Inspect the accessory coupling and record findings on Inspection

Field Report.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-17

) NOTE
CLEAN COUPLING TEETH AND SHAFT BEFORE INSPECTION.
a. Inspect for general condition as found.
b. Inspect teeth condition for excessive wear, galling, pitting,

fretting, or broken teeth.
c. Inspect condition of seals, if oil-filled coupling.
d. Inspect condition of oil. If oil-filled, look for metal particles,

sludge, evidence of overheating, etc.
) NOTE
IT IS SUGGESTED THAT ASSISTANCE BE OBTAINED FROM YOUR NUOVO PIG-

NONE COMPANY FIELD SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE. WHEN PERFORMING
ALIGNMENT CHECKS.
8. Attach the alignment fixture and dial indicators to the accessory

gear shaft and check the accessory gear to turbine alignment. See
Fig. 7-5. Refer to the Instructions 'Alignment' in the Reference
Drawings Section of the Service Manual for alignment specifica-
tions. Record alignment readings on Inspection Field Report.
7.2.14 Operation 14. Establish Solid Foundation & Install Mechanical

Support Jacks Under Compressor & Turbine Casings
) NOTE

TION WHEN SUPPORTING THE COMPRESSOR AND TURBINE CASINGS. DO NOT
INSTALL THE MECHANICAL SUPPORT JACKS ON THE TRANSAXIAL 'I' BEAM ON
THE FLOOR OF THE TURBINE BASE WITHOUT FIRST PACKING SHIMS SOLIDLY
BETWEEN THE 'I' BEAM AND THE CONCRETE BASE PAD AT EACH LOCATION.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-18

Cutouts can be made to the base floorplate next to the 'I' beam me-
chanical support jack locations, so access can be gained to pack shims
solidly underneath the 'I' beam and the concrete base pad. Floorplate
cutouts can be fabricated from 1/8-inch plate to cover the access hole
after the mechanical support jacks are removed.
Mechanical screw jack support blocks can be fabricated using sched-

ule 'B', 5/16 inch by 3 inch minimum diameter piping cut to length re-
quired to support the jack. See Fig. 7-7.

vertical flanges. See Figs. 7-6, Jack pos. 4, and 7-7.

the aft turbine casing and the forward exhaust casing vertical
flanges. See Fig. 7-6, Jack pos. 5.

the compressor discharge casing and the aft compressor casing
vertical flanges. See Fig. 7-6, Jack pos. 3.

the aft compressor casing and the forward compressor casing ver-
tical flanges. See Fig. 7-6, Jack pos. 2.
5. Install mechanical support jack at the bottom centerline of the

inlet casing forward bell. See Fig. 7-6, Jack pos. 1.
) NOTE
JACK SUPPORT PIPES SHOULD HAVE LATERAL BRACING IN CASE OF LOADING

CHANGE.
6. Adjust VIGV ring support bolts just snug against the lower half
of the VIGV ring to prevent it from dropping down. See Fig. 7-8.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-19

stationary points, i.e. turbine enclosure frame, to the turbine cas-
ing to measure upward deflection of the casings as measured with
dial indicators.
8. Use the mechanical support jacks to obtain 0.002 to 0.004 inch

upward deflection of the casings as measured with dial indicators.
! WARNING
DO NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES REMOVE THE MECHANICAL SUP-

PORT JACKS UNTIL THE UPPER-HALF CASINGS HAVE BEEN REINSTALLED
AND BOLTED UP.
7.2.15 Operation 15. Remove Forward Compressor Casing Bolts
1. Remove horizontal and vertical joint bolts.
2. Remove the body-bound bolts by driving them upwards; a step in

lower casing prevents them from being driven downward.
3. Identify the body-bound bolts for location.
4. Clean old anti-seize compound from bolts and nuts.
5. Bag up bolts and nuts, mark and identify for reassembly.
7.2.16 Operation 16. Remove upper-half inlet plenum
1. Remove the space heaters, wiring, conduit and piping from the
compartment wall of the inlet plenum.
2. Remove all upper-half bolting.
3. Rig inlet plenum with chainfalls to lift level using eyebolts in-
serted into lifting lugs on inlet plenum roof.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-20

4. Lift inlet plenum, upper half, with chainfalls until it is clear of all
mating flange joints, then lift clear of the unit with the crane.
5. Clean old joint compound from flanges and clean anti-seize com-
pound from bolting.
6. Bag bolting and identify for reassembly.
7. Discard all used gasketing.


casing and the compressor discharge casing.

(Horizontal joint body-bound bolts are removed by driving them
upward.)
4. Mark body-bound bolts for replacement in same holes.
5. Remove upper-half first-stage nozzle eccentric pin near the top

vertical centerline of the turbine casing. Stamp the pin to identify
it as the top first-stage pin.
6. Remove the borescope plugs in the first- and second-stage nozzle

area prior to turbine casing removal. There are four plugs in the
odd plug is 46' above the left horizontal joint (looking down-
stream), 10.84 inches from the aft casing flange.
There are a total of nine plugs that must be removed.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-21

7. Identify and tag plugs.
7.2.18 Operation 18. Remove Exhaust Hood Bolts & Lift Into Stack
1. Apply liquid penetrant (Plus-Gas Formula 'A' or equivalent) to all

bolts.
2. Enter the exhaust plenum and remove the horizontal joint bolting
insulation shields.
3. Remove the inner and outer flange horizontal joint bolts of the
exhaust hood.
4. Rig to lift the exhaust hood. See Figure 7-9.
5. With the lifting rig attached, breakaway the upper half from the
lower exhaust hood using jack bolts in the holes provided in the
outer flange for this purpose.
6. Lift the hood vertically until it clears the air baffle which is
trapped between the seal of No. 2 bearing and the hood.
7. When clear of the air baffle, the hood can be warped aft and lifted
into the exhaust stack using chainfalls and comealong. Secure
hood in the exhaust stack.
8. Clean all joint faces and discard all gasketing.
haust transition duct.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-22


duct.
) NOTE
A QUANTITY OF FOUR 1.75 INCH 8-THREAD JACKBOLTS WILL BE REQUIRED.

TWO WILL BE USED TO PROVIDE PLUGGING OF THE LOWER-HALF HOLES AND
THE OTHER TWO TO PERFORM THE JACKING FUNCTION ON THE UPPER HALF.
SPLIT.
! WARNING

TURBINE NOZZLES, AND TURBINE CASING.

bine casing level.
) NOTE

b. Hang a 5-ton chainfall off the crane hood using a suitable

shackle.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-23


down the wall of the plenum. Run the cable through the snatch
block.

e. Attach shorter cables and 1-1/2 or 2-ton comealongs to the ca-

ble hook and to each rear-lifting trunnion on the turbine cas-
ing. (The cable hook must be kept close to the turbine casing to
allow sufficient lift.)
f. Adjust the rear comealongs to pull the lift point closer to the
center of gravity, which is 15.14 inches from the aft flange.
Do not take any strain on the rigging at this time. Take up on
the restraining cable.
Jack the turbine casing free 2 to 5-inches, maintaining a meas-

ured equal lift side-to-side and front-to-back. Readjust the
center of gravity point as noted in step 'f above.
) NOTE
USE A LEVEL ON TOP FLAT PORTION OF TURBINE CASING WHILE ADJUSTING

REAR COMEALONGS. ONCE CASING IS LEVEL, ALL FURTHER LIFTING SHOULD
BE DONE USING CHAINFALLS AT UPPER CRANE HOOK.
h. Slowly take up strain and load with 5-ton chainfall while re-
straining lifting cable axially toward exhaust plenum. Keep
measuring the joint gap during this operation. If measure-
ments show turbine casing is sticking, stop lifting, determine
and correct reason for sticking; equalize joint gaps.
i. Keep lifting and restraining turbine casing with 5-ton chainfall

and restraining cable until casing is clear of turbine buckets,
seals etc.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-24

! WARNING
TAKE GREAT CARE IN LIFTING TURBINE CASING. DO NOT LET IT SWING

AND HIT TURBINE BUCKETS
) NOTE
A MINIMUM LIFT OF 25 INCHES IS REQUIRED FOR THE SECOND-STAGE DIA-

j. Ensure turbine casing is free and slowly by easing off on re-

straining cable and taking up on chainfall, allow turbine casing
to drift forward over the first-stage buckets.
) NOTE
A MINIMUM LIFT OF 50 INCHES IS REQUIRED FOR DIAPHRAGM SEAL TEETH TO

CLEAR DISCHARGE CASING VERTICAL FLANGE.
k. Attach a tag line to turbine casing and keep lifting casing with
chainfall until casing is clear of discharge casing vertical
flange. Once casing is centered under crane hook, release all
restraints, slowly raise casing by boom and cable while turning
to clear conduit runs, lagging supports, piping etc.
l. Gently swing turbine casing clear of unit and set on proper

blocking on its forward vertical flange to facilitate cleaning
and inspection.
m. Clean all bolting and flanges of old anti-seize and sealing com-
pound.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-25

the upper-half, first-stage nozzle retaining ring. Discard all lock-
plates and bolts.
) NOTE
THAT THE END SEAL CAN BE REMOVED. SEE FIG. 7-10.

! WARNING

TURBINE COMPONENTS.
7.2.21 Operation 21. Remove Upper-Half, First-Stage Nozzle
1. Unbolt and remove the 'L' seal clamping ring. Discard the lock-
plates.
2. Remove the horizontal joint bolts, lockplates and clamps from the
first-stage nozzle. Discard the lockplates. Identify and tag the
horizontal clamps and bolts.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-26

3. Rig cables and chainfall to lift the first-stage nozzle level.
4. Loosen the overlapped sealing strips at the horizontal joint area.
5. Using the chainfall and crane, carefully lift the upper-half nozzle
assembly clear of the unit and place on suitable cribbing.
! WARNING
PAY CAREFUL ATTENTION TO THE 'L' SEALS AT THE HORIZONTAL JOINTS

TO ENSURE THE SEALS SLIDE OUT OF THE SUPPORT RING WHEN LIFTING
THE UPPER-HALF NOZZLE.
WHEN LIFTING THE UPPER-HALF FIRST-STAGE NOZZLES, THE 'L' SEAL

SEGMENTS MAY SLIDE OUT OF THEIR GROOVE. STEPS SHOULD BE TAKEN
TO SECURE THE SEALS IN PLACE OR REMOVE THEM AS THE NOZZLE IS BE-
ING LIFTED.
6. Clean all bolts, clean 'L' seal area and check for and remove any
burrs on the groove and tongue edges.
7.2.22 Operation 22. Remove Compressor Discharge & Aft Compressor

Casing Bolts
1. Remove horizontal and vertical joint bolts and install guide pins.
2. The inner compressor discharge casing (inner barrel) is bolted at

the horizontal joint. These bolts cannot be removed until the
compressor discharge casing is removed - they are inaccessible.
Therefore, the inner compressor discharge casing upper-half must

be free from the compressor discharge casing. Remove the three
socket head bolts located in the vertical flange slightly forward
from the junction of the bulkhead struts carrying the aft barrel
and first-stage nozzle support ring. See Fig. 7-11.
3. Clean anti-seize compound from all bolts and identify bolting for
reassembly.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-27

7.2.23 Operation 23. Remove Upper-Half Forward Compressor Casing
! WARNING
THE FORWARD COMPRESSOR CASING MUST BE REMOVED FIRST, SINCE IT

LOCKS THE ADJACENT CASINGS IN PLACE.
1. Rig lifting cables and chainfalls to lift the casing level. See Fig.
7-12.
2. Place guide pins in the casing horizontal joints.
3. Coat jack bolt threads and tips with FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize
compound. Install jack bolts and tighten to initially break the
upper-half casing clear of the horizontal joint.
4. After jacking the casing up the full length of the jack bolts, lift
with the chainfalls to clear the compressor rotor blades.
5. When the casing has cleared the rotor, use the crane to lift the
casing clear of the unit.
! WARNING
DO NOT LET THE CASING SWING AGAINST THE VERTICAL FLANGE SUR-
FACES OR THE COMPRESSOR ROTOR BLADING
6. Set the compressor casing in a vertical position on suitable wood

blocking for easier inspection of the blades.
7. Clear off the compressor casing flanges and all bolting of all joint
compound. Identify bolting for later reassembly.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-28

7.2.24 Operation 24. Remove Upper-Half Compressor Discharge & Aft

Compressor Casings
1. Rig cables and chainfalls to lift the casing level. See Fig. 7-13.
2. Apply FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize to jack bolt threads and guide

pins. Install jack bolts and guide pins.
3. Jack the casing up at least 3 inches with the jacking bolts.
) NOTE
MAKE SURE THE CASING REMAINS LEVEL AT ALL TIMES WHEN JACKING WITH
THE JACK BOLTS.
4. Lift upper-half compressor discharge and aft compressor casing

assembly clear of rotor blades and vertical flanges with chain-
falls, before using crane to lift clear of the unit.
! WARNING
DO NOT LET THE CASINGS SWING AGAINST THE VERTICAL FLANGES OR

THE COMPRESSOR ROTOR BLADING WHEN LIFTING.
5. Set the casing on suitable wood blocking and turn on end to a

vertical position and properly supported for easier cleaning and
inspection.
6. Clean off the compressor casing flanges and all bolting of all
joint compound. Identify bolting for later reassembly.
7.2.25 Operation 25. Remove Upper-Half Inner Compressor Discharge

Casing
1. Remove horizontal joint bolts from inner compressor discharge

casing.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-29

2. Rig and lift the upper-half inner compressor discharge casing

clear of the unit and set on suitable wood blocking for inspection.
3. Clean off the casing flanges and all bolting. Identify bolting for
later reassembly.
7.2.26 Operation 26. Remove Upper-Half, First-Stage Nozzle Support

Ring
1. Apply penetrant fluid (Plus-Gas Formula 'A') or equivalent to the

nozzle support ring horizontal joint and to the horizontal joint
bolts. Do this well in advance of disassembly if possible.
2. Remove horizontal joint dowels.
3. Rig to lift the support ring upper-half using 1/4-inch wire rope
using clevis, eyebolt and chainfall. Assemble the eyebolt at the
top center. Assemble the wire rope and clevis and hook on the
chainfall.
4. Using an impact wrench and long extension, loosen and remove

the two horizontal joint bolts.
5. Matchmark and remove shim.
6. Use metal wedges at the horizontal joints to separate upper and

lower halves.
! WARNING
WHEN LIFTING, THE SUPPORT RING SHOULD BE CONTROLLED TO PRE-

VENT THE SUPPORT RING FROM SWINGING INTO THE FIRST-STAGE BUCK-
ETS.
7. Using chainfall and crane, lift the support ring clear of the unit
and set on suitable wood blocking for cleaning and inspection.
Clean all mating joint surfaces and clean all bolts and dowel pins.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-30

7.2.27 Operation 27. Remove Upper-Half Inlet Casing
1. Remove the upper-half inlet guide vane gear cover bolts and gear
covers with the gear and rack aligned per drawing. Add match-
marks to the gear and gear rack prior to any further disassembly
to verify present alignment of the gears to the gear rack.
2. Adjust VIGV ring support bolts just snug against the lower-half
of. the VIGV ring to prevent it from dropping down and disen-
gaging from the VIGV gears. If this was not done, see Operation
14, Item 6. See Fig. 7-8.
3. Remove the actuating ring horizontal joint bolts, clamps and

bodybound bolts.
4. Remove upper-half inlet casing vertical and horizontal joint bolts.
5. Remove the six socket head bolts in the air passage of the casing
(three on each side).
6. Remove the horizontal flange body-bound bolts. Mark and iden-

tify the bolts for position removal.
7. Insert guide pins in preparation for lifting.
8. Rig, using chainfalls, to lift the upper-half inlet casing straight

up. Prior to lifting, make sure the inlet guide vane gears are
blocked so they cannot rotate, which can sometimes cause out-of-
alignment of the inlet guide vanes. Wooden wedges can be used
to prevent gear rotation. See Fig. 7-14.
! WARNING
THE UPPER-HALF INLET CASING CANNOT BE LIFTED STRAIGHT UP UNLESS

THE FORWARD COMPRESSOR CASING HAS BEEN REMOVED. A RABBET FIT
EXISTS BETWEEN THE VERTICAL JOINT OF THE TWO CASINGS
9. Use the chainfall to separate the casing initially at the horizontal

joint. Do not use the crane to break the horizontal joint.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-31

! WARNING
DO NOT LIFT THE UPPER-HALF INLET CASING BY USING THE INLET TIE
BARS.
10. Lift the casing clear of the unit with the crane. and set on suitable
wooden blocking in a horizontal position for inspection.
! WARNING
DO NOT LET THE INLET CASING SWING AGAINST THE COMPRESSOR ROTOR
OR VERTICAL JOINT FLANGES WHEN LIFTING CLEAR OF THE UNIT.
11. Remove old anti-seize and joint compound from the bolting and
casing flanges. Identify all bolting for reassembly when needed.
1. The maximum total fore and aft movement of the rotor without
distorting any of the rotor or bearing mounts is usually 14 to 20
mils.
) NOTE
READ.
2. The rotor float is measured by mounting a dial indicator on the

No. 1 bearing housing to be able to read axial movement of the
turbine rotor.

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-32

) NOTE
DO NOT JACK AGAINST BUCKET. DO NOT DAMAGE SEAL TEETH.
4. Jack rotor carefully aft toward load gear, and at the same time
note the movement of rotor with the dial indicator located on the
No. 1 bearing housing. The rotor will move suddenly, accompa-
nied by a solid 'bump'. This is not unusual. Release the jack load-
ing and read the dial indicator.
5. Set the dial indicator -back to the zero reading and reposition the
hydraulic jack wedge between the second-stage diaphragm and
the face of the first-stage turbine wheel. See Fig. 7-15. Carefully
jack the rotor forward. Again, the rotor will move suddenly with
a bump. Release the jack loading and read the dial indicator.
Record the axial movement on Inspection Field Report. Repeat
steps 3, 4 and 5 three times to assure repeatability.

sentative. The need to monitor the internal gas turbine clearances
closely is critical. On every removal of the turbine casing, the in-
ternal clearances called for the on Inspection Field Report should
be determined.
Any clearances not within specified tolerances as indicated on the

'Unit Clearance Diagram' in the Reference Drawings section of
this service manual, should be reported to the NUOVO PIG-
NONE Company Field Service Representative in case 'rechecks'
are needed. The data will be compared to the unit's original
clearance data so that a determination for corrective action, if
any, can be made.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-33

) NOTE

IMPORTANT FACTOR IN OBTAINING CURRENT READINGS. SEE STANDARD PRAC-
TICES, SECTION 2, IN THIS INSPECTION MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION.
! WARNING
BINE.
2. Left & Right Side (Definition)
The left side of the unit by definition is the left-hand side when
stream (direction of air flow).

b. Prepare for and take clearances around first-stage nozzle. Ap-

ply a downstream load not to exceed 2,000 pounds on first-
stage nozzle outer sidewall, both sides, to assure nozzle is
seated downstream against first-stage shrouds, and first stage
shrouds are seated downstream against turbine casing.
) NOTE
1. DO NOT WEDGE OTHER NOZZLES SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH FIRST-STAGE

NOZZLE.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-34

c. Wedge nozzles and diaphragms aft with hardwood wedges,

Which must be fastened together with a chain, cable or rope,
so they won't drop into turbine. See Figs. 7-16 and 7-17.
7.2.30 Operation 30. Take Compressor Clearance Checks
1. We suggest that compressor clearances be taken under the guid-

ance of your NUOVO PIGNONE Field Service Representative.
The need to monitor internal gas turbine clearance closely is criti-
cal. On every removal of compressor casings, the internal clear-
ances called for on the Inspection Field Report should be deter-
mined.
Any clearances not within specified tolerances, as indicated on

the Unit Clearance Diagram in the Reference Drawings Section
of the unit service manual, should be reported before any parts
are removed to the NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field Service
Representative in case 'rechecks' are needed. The data will be
compared to the unit's original clearance data so that a determina-
tion for corrective action, if any, can be made.
2. Compressor clearances are measured with the compressor rotor in

the full forward position against the forward thrust face. Record
) NOTE
USE FEELER GAUGES ONLY WHEN TAKING BLADE TIP CLEARANCES. TAPER
GAUGES ARE NOT TO BE USED SINCE THEY MAY BOTTOM ALONG THE CASING
CURVATURE GIVING ERRONEOUS READINGS.
3. Take compressor clearance readings as follows:
a. All 17 compressor stator blade tip clearances.
b. All 17 compressor rotor blade tip clearances.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-35

c. Take the exit guide vane stator blade clearances.
d. Take the compressor rotor leak off (high pressure seal) and ax-
ial position clearances.
7.2.31 Operation 31, Unbolt & Remove Lower-Half Transition Pieces
1. Remove side seal bolts, side seals, aft bracket bolts and lockplate
s (Nos. 3, 7, 4, 5 and 6 transition pieces in sequence) from the
lowerhalf, first-stage nozzle retaining ring. Discard all lockplates
and bolts.
) NOTE
move through the compressor casing opening. Lift clear of the

! WARNING
REFER TO SECTION 2. STANDARD PRACTICES, IN THIS INSPECTION AND

TURBINE COMPONENTS.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-36

7.2.32 Operation 32. Remove Lower-Half, First-Stage Nozzle Eccentric

Pin
1. Unbolt retaining strap bolts from turbine casing and remove ec-
centric pin.
) NOTE
IF PIN IS HARD TO REMOVE, APPLY PENETRATION FLUID (PLUS-GAS FORMULA

'A') OR EQUIVALENT IN ORDER TO REMOVE THE PIN.
2. Tag and identify pin for location, if not already stamped.
3. Clean all anti-seize compound from pin and bolts.
7.2.33 Remove Lower-Half, First-Stage Nozzle
) NOTE
REFER TO FIGS. 7-18 THROUGH 7-23.
1. Remove the two outer support clamps, one on either side of the
turbine, which hold the nozzle assembly to the first-stage turbine
wheel shroud assembly. The support clamp is retained by a stud
and nut installed in a shroud segment.
2. Remove the lower-half 'L' seal clamping ring from the first-stage
nozzle support ring assembly. Discard all lockplates.
3. Install 3/4-inch eyebolts in nozzle assembly horizontal flanges,

one in each side, and rig cable slings and chainfalls to eyebolts.
Lift nozzle assembly sufficiently to remove horizontal clamps.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-37

! WARNING
THESE CLAMPS ARE GROUND DURING FACTORY ASSEMBLY OF THE TUR-

BINE TO OBTAIN PROPER ALIGNMENT OF NOZZLE WITH ASSOCIATED
PARTS. BE SURE TO MARK CLAMPS FOR PROPER REASSEMBLY IN THE TUR-
BINE.
4. Start rolling out nozzle lower-half assembly and retaining ring

assembly by taking up on one cable and letting out the other.
Move crane as necessary to lead lower nozzle assembly around
rotor.
5. Remove 'L' seal segments as nozzle lower-half is rolled out.
) NOTE
FOUR LIFT BARS ARE WELDED ACROSS THE OUTER WALL OF LOWER-HALF OF
THE RETAINING RING, TWO ON EITHER SIDE OF THE VERTICAL CENTERLINE
AND DISPOSED ABOUT 15 AND 45 DEGREES.
6. When the nozzle and retaining ring assembly has been rolled out
about 45 degrees, attach a 1/4-inch steel lifting cable to the first
lift bar. Continue to roll out the nozzle and retaining ring assem-
bly, taking new hitches on the lifting bars as they appear, until
the assembly is out of the turbine casing.
7. Lift nozzle half off the turbine and place on appropriate cribbing.
7.2.34 Operation 34. Remove Lower-Half Second-Stage Nozzle Radial

Retaining Pins
) NOTE
THE SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE RADIAL RETAINING PINS ARE HELD IN POSITION

BY PLATES SECURED TO THE TURBINE CASING BY HEX BOLTS WITH LOCK-
PLATES.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-38

1. Remove the holding plates which position the radial second-stage

nozzle retaining pins. Remove the retaining pins. If pins are not
stamped as to location, stamp them upon removal.
7.2.35 Operation 35, Remove Lower-Half, Second-Stage Nozzle Seg-

ments (See Figs. 7-24 & 7-25)

rolling it out individually on its outer sidewall forward and aft
bering sequence.
! WARNING
PLATES CAN BE USED.
EXCESSIVE SHOCK AND VIBRATION SHOULD BE AVOIDED. ATTACH CA-

BLING TO THE CENTER NOZZLE PARTITION IF POSSIBLE. A MAXIMUM
FORCE OF 2,000 POUNDS SHOULD NOT BE EXCEEDED.

MOVED.
2. Tooling required for nozzle segment removal are: pulley assem-

bly, one-ton comealong, and 0.375-inch wire rope or fiber sling.
) NOTE
PAY PARTICULAR ATTENTION TO THE NOZZLE AND DIAPHRAGM FORWARD, AFT

AND RADIAL SEALS BETWEEN EACH SEGMENT WHEN ROLLING THE NOZZLE
SEGMENT OUT. KEEP EACH SET OF SEALS WITH ITS RESPECTIVE SEGMENT.
PLACE THE REMOVED NOZZLE SEGMENTS ON A PIECE OF PLYWOOD OR
EQUIVALENT IN A PROTECTED AREA. COVER THE REMOVED SEGMENTS TO
PROTECT THEM FROM THE ENVIRONMENT.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-39

3. Attach cable to Nozzle Segment 14 and remove the segment us-

ing a one-ton comealong attached to the overhead crane.
4. Attach cable to Nozzle Segment 13 and remove.

through pulley and attach to Nozzle Segment 12. Pull nozzle seg-
ment to position vacated by Nozzle Segment 13. Remove pulley
assembly and remove Nozzle Segment 13.
6. Install pullet assembly in Retaining Pin Hole 13. Pass cable

through pulley and attach to Nozzle Segment 11. Pull Nozzle
Segment 11 to position vacated by Nozzle Segment 12. Move
pull to Pin Hole 14 and remove Nozzle Segment 11 as above.
7. Install pull assembly in retaining Pin Hole 12. Pass cable through
pulley and attach to Nozzle Segment 10. Pull nozzle segment to
position vacated by Nozzle Segment 13. Move pulley assembly
to Pin Hole 15 and then to Pin Hole 16 and remove Nozzle Seg-
ment 12 as above.
8. Move to other side of unit and remove Segments 8, 9 and 10 in

same manner as described above.
7.2.36 Operation 36. Remove Upper-Half Second-Stage Nozzle Radial

Retaining Pins
) NOTE
THE SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE RADIAL RETAINING PINS ARE SECURED IN POSI-

TION BY PLATES SECURED TO THE TURBINE CASING BY HEXHEAD BOLTS WITH
LOCKPLATES.
The retaining pins are drilled and tapped so that a bolt can be screwed
into the head and a puller can be used to extract retaining pins.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-40

1. Remove the holding plates which secure the second-stage nozzle

radial retaining pins and remove the retaining pins. If pins are
not stamped for location, stamp them.
7.2.37 Operation 37. Remove Upper-Half Second-Stage Nozzle Segments

trolling' it out individually on its outer sidewall forward and aft
jacent nozzle segment as one piece. Mark each segment per
numbering sequence.
) NOTE
THE TURBINE CASING SHOULD BE ON ITS FORWARD VERTICAL FLANGE FOR

NOZZLE SEGMENT REMOVAL.
! WARNING
PLATES ARE USED.

MOVED.
2. Tools required for nozzle removal are: pulley assembly, one-ton

comealong, and 0.375-inch diameter wire rope or fiber sling.
3. Commence by attaching the cable to the nozzle segment closest

to the horizontal joint. Remove the nozzle segment using a one-
ton comealong.
4. Attach the one-ton comealong to a suitable support point. Con-

tinue on the remaining nozzle segments and remove in a similar
manner, as described per Operation 34, steps 3 through 8.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-41

7.2.38 Operation 38. Perform Combustion Inspection Procedure Inspec-

tion Operations Nos. 11 Through 16 & Operation Nos. 18 & 19
) NOTE
REFER TO COMBUSTION INSPECTION, SECTION 5, OF THIS SERVICE MANUAL

FOR INSPECTION PROCEDURES FOR THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS.
11. Pressure test fuel oil check valves.
16. Inspect combustion outer casings.
7.2.39 Operation 39. Remove First-Stage Turbine Buckets
) NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TURBINE BUCKET REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

OPERATIONS BE DONE BY QUALIFIED BUCKET PERSONNEL FROM NUOVO PIG-
NONE COMPANY APPARATUS SERVICE SHOP.
1. Rotate the wheel through at least one full revolution and examine
the bucket dovetail ends and the wheel dovetail posts for evi-
dence of previous identification markings.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-42

If no markings are present, select a bucket and, using either a Vi-

bropeen marker or a low-stress dot stamp, mark a numeral 1 on
end of bucket and a numeral I on wheel dovetail post to its left.
Mark a numeral 2 on wheel dovetail post to right of No. 1 bucket
and a numeral 2 on dovetail of next bucket to the right.
See Fig. 7-26.
) NOTE
NO FURTHER STAMPING OTHER THAN THE 1 AND THE 2 SHOULD BE DONE ON

WHEEL. TWIST LOCKS DO NOT HAVE TO BE MATCHMARKED FOR REASSEMBLY.
2. Rotate twist locks using a 0.375-inch or smaller blunt-nosed

chisel, which should have a groove ground parallel with the cut-
ting edge to make a cup-shape for prying up staked corners of
twist lockhead.
Then, using the chisel with light blows from a hammer, it is pos-
sible to rotate the head of the twist lock (180°) from its original
position into the unlock position. Repeat this procedure until all
twist locks are rotated to the release position. See Fig. 7-27.
) NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THIS PROCEDURE BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED

BUCKET PERSONNEL FROM THE NUOVO PIGNONE COMPANY APPARATUS SER-
VICE SHOP.
3. As each twist lock is rotated, remove the bucket which it was se-
curing, the horizontal and radial seal pin between the buckets,
and the twist lock.
) NOTE
THE BUCKETS MUST BE CONSECUTIVELY NUMBERED USING A LOW-STRESS

DOT STAMP OR VIBROPEEN MARKER AS THEY ARE REMOVED OR PRIOR TO RE-
MOVAL. DO NOT STAMP OR VIBROPEEN THE NUMBERS ON THE AIRFOIL SEC-
TION.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-43

! WARNING
DO NOT MARK THE TURBINE BUCKETS WITH ANY COMPOUND CONTAINING

LEAD OR GRAPHITE.
4. Inventory all parts after removal to assure that there are: 120 ra-
dial and horizontal pins; 120 twist locks; 120 first-stage buckets;
and that none have been misplaced.
7.2.40 Operation 40. Remove Lower-Half Second-Stage Turbine

Shrouds
) NOTE
WITH THE TURBINE ROTOR IN PLACE, THE SECOND-STAGE LOWER-HALF TUR-

BINE SHROUDS MUST BE REMOVED IN ORDER TO REMOVE THE SECOND-STAGE
SHROUDED TIP BUCKETS. THE UPPER-HALF SECOND-STAGE SHROUDS ARE
REMOVED ALONG WITH THE UPPER-HALF TURBINE CASING.
1. Starting at the horizontal joint shroud, every other shroud is held

in place by a dowel pin which is assembled into place from the
outside of the turbine casing. A pipe plug secures the dowel pin
in place. Apply a liberal amount of penetrating fluid (Plus-Gas
Formula 'A') or equivalent to the plugs, dowel pins, and shrouds
early to allow ample time to soak in.
2. There are a total of eight pipe plugs and dowel pins holding the
fifteen lower-half shroud blocks in place. Remove pipe plugs.
One method of removing plugs and preventing rounding off of
the plug head is to use a 3/8-inch drive socket and turn it around
using the 3/8-inch drive end on the plug and either a piece of hex
bar or an Allen wrench to drive the socket.
3. Remove dowel pins by threading a hardened all-thread puller into

the end of each dowel pin and tap dowel outwards. Tapping on
shroud block with a rawhide mallet will help to loosen dowel pin.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-44

4. After the pins have been removed, slide the shroud blocks along
the machine groove and remove them at the horizontal joint.
Identify each shroud block for location as it is removed.
7.2.41 Operation 41. Remove Second-Stage Shrouded Tip Buckets
) NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TURBINE BUCKET REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

OPERATIONS BE DONE BY QUALIFIED BUCKET PERSONNEL FROM THE NUOVO
PIGNONE COMPANY APPARATUS SERVICE SHOPS.
1. Mark turbine wheel and buckets if they have not previously been
marked, with low-stress dot stamps. Mark wheel dovetail post to
the left of selected bucket with a numeral 1 and dovetail post to
the right with a numeral 2; this will give the sequence for reas-
sembly.
No further stamping other than the 1 and 2 should be done on the

turbine wheel. Mark the selected bucket with the numeral 1 and
the bucket to its right with a numeral 2 after removal.
2. Buckets must also be consecutively marked with a low-stress

stamp or a Vibropeen marker. See Fig. 7-26.
! WARNING
DO NOT MARK ON TURBINE BUCKETS WITH ANY COMPOUND CONTAINING

LEAD OR GRAPHITE. SEE SECTION 2, STANDARD PRACTICES IN THIS IN-
SPECTION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION FOR APPROVED MARKERS.
3. Rotate the twist locks using a 0.375-inch or smaller blunt-nosed

chisel. The chisel should have a groove ground parallel with the
cutting edge to make a cup-shape edge for prying up the staked
corners of the twist lockhead.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-45

Then, using the chisel with light blows from the hammer, it is
possible to rotate the head of the twist lock (180°) from its origi-
nal position into the unlock position. Repeat this procedure until
all twist locks are rotated to the release position.
See Fig. 7-27.
) NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THIS PROCEDURE BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED

BUCKET PERSONNEL FROM THE NUOVO PIGNONE COMPANY APPARATUS SER-
VICE SHOP.
4. Individual buckets cannot be removed initially due to the inter-

locking 'Z' shroud banding. To disassemble, all twist locks must
be released and fixed in position by using tape.
) NOTE
SMALL STRIPS OF DUCT TAPE OR MASKING TAPE MAY BE USED TO HOLD TWIST
LOCK IN THE UNLOCKED POSITION WHILE WORKING WITH THE BUCKET RE-
MOVAL PROCESS.
5. Using a rawhide or nylon-headed mallet and proceeding around

the wheel, drive the whole row out of the wheel dovetail slots, lit-
tle by-little until only 3/8 inch of the bucket dovetails remain in
the wheel. Then, by manipulation, each bucket in the row can be
removed one at a time along with its horizontal pin and twist
lock.
Mark all buckets for reassembly into the wheel in the same posi-
tion from which they are removed. Ale buckets are moment
weighed and assembled at initial assembly to minimize dynamic
imbalance.
6. Inventory all parts after removal to assure there are 90 horizontal

pins and turbine buckets and none have been misplaced.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-46

7.2.42 Operation 42. Remove Upper-Half No. 2 Bearing Housing
) NOTE
UNITS WITH PROXIMITY PROBES AND/OR LOW AMBIENT ROTORS HAVE THE
BEARING LINER UPPER AND LOWER HALVES LOOSELY RETAINED BY TWO
BOLTS AND A LOCKPLATE AT EACH HORIZONTAL JOINT. TO REMOVE THE LIN-
ERS, LOOSEN LOCKPLATES AND REMOVE THE BOLTS. DISCARD THE LOCK-
PLATES AND USE NEW LOCK-PLATES AT REASSEMBLY.
1. Remove horizontal joint bolts and dowels.
2. Attach rail beam inside of exhaust stack if unit has a vertical

stack.
3. Attach eyebolts to housing and rig cables and chainfall to lift

housing.
4. Install jackbolts to jack loose the horizontal joint faces initially.
5. Using chainfall, carefully lift bearing housing straight up to clear

turbine rotor.
6. Move the bearing housing upper half clear of the unit and set on a
suitable blocking. Exercise care so that the seals are not dam-
aged.
7. Clean all bolts, dowels and flange joints. Identify and bag hard-
ware for reassembly when needed.
8. Cover the open bearing housing.
7.2.43 Operation 43. Remove Upper-Half No. 1 Bearing Housing
1. Remove horizontal joint bolts from bearing housing and from aft
air and oil seals. Remove dowels.
2. Disconnect magnetic pickups and remove magnetic pickup ring.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-47

3. Attach eyebolts to housing and rig cables and chainfall to lift

housing. See Fig. 7-28.
4. Install jackbolts to jack loose the horizontal joint initially.
5. Using chainfall, carefully lift bearing housing straight up to clear

compressor shaft.
6. Move the bearing housing upper half clear of the unit and set on a
suitable blocking. Exercise care so that seals are not damaged.
7. Clean all bolts, dowels and flange joints. Identify and bag hard-
ware for reassembly when needed.
8. Cover the open bearing housing.
7.2.44 Operation 44. Inspect No. l Bearing
1. Inspect and record all number one bearing seal clearances. Com-
pare reading with the unit clearance diagram. Record clearances
) NOTE
IT IS NOT UNUSUAL TO EXPECT SLIGHT RUBBING OF THE SEAL TEETH. HEAVY

RUBBING USUALLY IS AN INDICATION OF HIGHER THAN NORMAL ROTOR VI-
BRATION. IN THIS CASE, CLOSER INSPECTION OF THE SEAL CAVITIES AND
FORWARD COMPRESSOR WHEEL FOR THE PRESENCE OF OIL SHOULD BE PER-
FORMED.
If the presence of oil is noted on the compressor and can be at-

tributed to leakage past the seals, new seals must be installed. If
the seal clearances are within tolerance and oil leakage has oc-
curred, the sealing air supply and bearing seal drain holes must
be checked for proper drainage.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-48

Clearances which are only one or two mils out of tolerance with
all visual inspections normal (no oil leakage), do not require seal
replacements. Rubbed seal teeth should be dressed by scraping
and filed to restore the sealing teeth edges.
2. Lift out both halves of thrust bearing and bearing pads. Identify
and tag parts for reassembly. See Fig. 7-29.
! WARNING
DO NOT ROTATE UNIT WITH THRUST BEARING REMOVED. DOING THIS CAN
CAUSE DAMAGE TO COMPRESSOR ROTOR AND STATOR BLADES.
3. Unbolt and lift off upper-half bearing liner.
4. Support rotor with a suitable shaft support arrangement and in-

stall a dial indicator to measure lift. Jack rotor upward just
enough to release pressure on lower-half bearing liner. Do not
exceed 0.010 inch lift. See Fig. 7-30.
! WARNING
TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS TO ASSURE THAT SHAFT IS NOT DAM-

AGED BY JACK WHEN LIFTING.
5. Roll out the lower-half bearing liner.
6. Inspect journal bearing surface for cracks, wiped babbitt, scoring,

foreign material, pitting, spalling, and excessive or abnormal
wear patterns. Record findings on Inspection Field Report.
7. Cracked and chipped babbitt is caused by either excessive ma-

chine vibration or misalignment. This type of damage can be re-
paired either by rebabbitting the entire bearing or by puddling the
defective zone. In the case of puddling, it is necessary to remove
all babbitt within 0.5 inch of the cracked or chipped area.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-49

If the chipped babbitt zone extends to the steel surface, it will be

necessary to tin the steel (with pure tin) prior to puddling where
the damage has extended into the babbitt. If the steel interface
exposes more than 15% of the area, puddle repair should not be
attempted. In this case the whole bearing must be rebabbitted by
a qualified NUOVO PIGNONE Company Apparatus Service
Shop per NUOVO PIGNONE process specifications. It is appar-
ent, of course, that cause of damage within the unit must be
eliminated to prevent further cracking and chipping.
8. Some scratching will always occur on babbitted bearing surfaces

during normal operation because of impurities which accumulate
in the lubricating oil system. Scratches that are less than 0.001
inch deep and less than one inch long are acceptable and require
no further attention. Deeper scratches are cause for concern, par-
ticularly if they run in the axial direction and occur in the high
pressure zone (lower half) of the bearing liner. Scratches that are
in the range of 0.001 to 0.005 inch deep, but less than one inch
long, may be repaired on site.
Any foreign particles embedded in the scratch should first be re-

moved. Scratches deeper than 0.005 inch should be repaired in
an approved NUOVO PIGNONE Company Repair Facility.
9. If bearing liner has experienced excessive temperatures, the bab-

bitt will show evidence of smears and wiping. If wiped area is
less than 5% of liner lower-half area, the bearing may be reused
after repair of wiped surface. Larger wiped areas must be re-
paired by an approved NUOVO PIGNONE Company Repair Fa-
cility.
Before replacing the liner, the cause of the wipe must be deter-
mined and corrected. Some typical causes are the following:
a. Oil supply blockage;
b. Inadequate oil flow;
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-50

c. Tight journal clearances;
d. Shaft n-misalignment.
10. Most journal bearings develop polished areas during low-speed

cranking or coast-down conditions. The polished area is usually
found at the bottom centerline of the bearing liner and should ex-
tend along the entire length of the bearing. This type of pattern is
normal, and should not be cause for any alarm. If, however, the
polished area is found only on one edge of the liner, or if it ap-
pears on the liner upper half, a problem is indicated which must
be corrected to prevent eventual bearing wipe.
11. Measure journal diameter at two planes, fore and aft. Record
these dimensions and the general condition of the journals on In-
spection Field Report.
Roundness and taper are two of the most critical dimensions as-
sociated with a bearing journal. These dimensions are established
with a four-point check taken in the vertical and horizontal planes
(at 90 degrees to one another) at both the forward and aft edge of
the journal. If the journal diameter is 0.002 inch or more outside
of its drawing tolerance and, if the liner-to-journal clearance falls
outside of the drawing tolerances, it may be necessary to
remachine the journal.
Standard undersize dimensions have been established for journal

diameter. These are shown in Table 7-1. It should be noted that
whenever a journal is remachined, the rotor must be rebalanced.
Journal tapers that fall outside of the specified drawing tolerances
may be also require remachining and rebalancing.
12. Journal surfaces that have been scratched, pitted or scraped to

depths of 0.001 inch or less are acceptable for use. Deeper im-
perfections in the range of 0.001 to 0.005 inch must be restored
by strapping. This is done with a long, narrow strip of 200 grit
emergy cloth.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-51

The strap is first soaked in kerosene and abraded against a steel

surface to remove the sharper edges of the abrasive material. It
must be then wrapped around the journal at least two times and
then pulled back and forth in a manner which produces a circum-
ferential polishing action. This can best be accomplished by two
men, one on each end of the strap. The amount of metal removed
from the journal must not exceed 0.002 inch on the diameter.
Scratches deeper than 0.005 inch require remachining and subse-

quent rebalancing of the rotor. A gas turbine's sensitivity to jour-
nal flat spots or out-of-roundness should be considered carefully,
for these imperfections may result in significant rotor vibrations.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-52

TABLE 7-1
STANDARD BEARING DIAMETERS
Journal lst 2nd 3rd

Diameter Diametral Diametral Diametral
Range Undersizing Undersizing Undersizing
(In) (In) (In) (In)
0-4 0.010 0.020 0.030
4-8 0.020 0.040 0.060
8 -15 0.030 0.060 0.090
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-53

13 Clamp bearing liner halves together and make a six-point check

for inside diameter. Record all bearing liner measurements and
condition on Inspection Field Report. See Fig. 7.31.
) NOTE
REFER TO THE UNIT CLEARANCE DIAGRAM IN THE REFERENCE DRAWING SEC-

TION IN THE UNIT SERVICE MANUAL FOR ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES.
14. Inspect thrust bearing surfaces for cracks, wiped babbitt, scoring,
foreign material, pitting, spalling and excessive or abnormal wear
patterns. Report findings on Inspection Field Report.
15. Just as with journal bearings, the babbitt surfaces of the thrust
bearings must be inspected for cracks, chips, scratches, and wip-
ing. Cracks or chips must be repaired by either rebabbitting the
entire bearing or by puddling the defective zone. If puddling is
employed, all babbitt within 0.5-inch radius of the defective zone
must be removed prior to resurfacing.
This type of damage is caused by axial vibration in the gas tur-

bine, by poor babbitt bonding, or by excessive babbitt tempera-
tures. These conditions must be corrected before the turbine is
placed back in operation.
16 A small amount of scratching will always occur because of impu-

rities which collect in the oil system. Scratches that are less than
0.001 inch deep and less than one inch long are acceptable with-
out further consideration. Scratches that are in the range of 0.001
to 0.005 inch deep should be blended out with a scraper after re-
moving all raised metal and embedded dirt particles. Deeper
scratches must be repaired by scraping the babbitt surface.
Abrasives such as emergy cloth should not be used. In the case

of tilting pad, self-equalizing bearings, each pad can be inde-
pendently scraped. In the case of tilting pad, non-equalizing bear-
ings, tapered land bearings, or flat land bearings, it is necessary
to scrape all pads or lands equally when scraping any one of
them.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-54

17. Babbitt wipes that occur in an area representing 10% or less of

the respective pad or land area can be repaired by scraping, just
as in the case of babbitt scratches. Wiping that extends over lar-
ger areas must be repaired by rebabbitting the pad or land by a
qualified NUOVO PIGNONE Company Apparatus Service Shop
per Company specifications.
It will be necessary, of course, to determine the cause of the wip-

ing prior to reinstalling the bearing. Some typical causes are the
following:
a. Blockage in the oil supply lines.
b. Inadequate oil flow or pressure.
c. Excessive thrust loads.
d. Tight axial clearances between active and inactive thrust bear-

ings.
e. Misalignment between the bearing and the thrust runner. (Ta-

pered and flat land bearings are particularly sensitive to mis-
alignment.)
10. Place the thrust bearing face up on a surface plate. With a dial in-
dicator referenced to the surface plate and zeroed on one corner
of a land, move the indicator to the other three corners of the land
and record the indicator readings. Perform this check on four
lands 90 degrees apart.
If measured taper falls outside of drawing tolerances, the bearing

must be returned to a NUOVO PIGNONE Service Shop to
achieve the desired surface. Do not handscrape taper land bear-
ings.
Inspect thrust runner for galling, pitting, scoring and excessive

wear.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-55

a. Face Runout - To prevent axial rotor vibration it is necessary

that the thrust runner face be perpendicular to the rotor bearing
journals. In a unit that has run successfully in the field, the as-
sumption can be made that the face runouts are acceptable and
additional measurements are not required.
b. Runner Surface - The runner surface should be inspected for

scratches and gouges. Scratches that are less than 0.001 inch
deep can be ignored. Scratches that are in the range of 0.001 to
0.005 inch deep should be repaired by 'stoning'. This is done
with a carborundum stone of 180 grit.
The stone should first be soaked in kerosene, wiped clean, and

rubbed against a steel surface to remove its sharp edges. It
should then be redipped in kerosene and floated against the
thrust runner surface to remove the scratches and gouges.
For small areas, 180 grit emergy cloth soaked in kerosene can
be employed. Scratches deeper than 0.005 inch require
remachining. If this is done, it is necessary to take runout
checks to ensure perpendicularity between the thrust face and
the bearing journals. It is also necessary to replace the thrust
shim to obtain correct axial clearances.
19 Record thrust bearing condition on Inspection Field Report.
20. Coat the lower-half No. 1 bearing liner to be installed with clean
turbine oil used in the unit lube system and set the liner on the
journal. Roll the bearing liner carefully into the lower half of the
bearing housing. Restrain the liner from falling into the lower
half.
! WARNING
TO AVOID DELETERIOUS EFFECTS, USE OF ADDITIVES WITH GAS TURBINE

LUBRICANT OR IN AREAS WETTED BY THE LUBRICANT SHOULD BE LIM-
ITED TO THOSE APPROVED BY THE FLUID SUPPLIER OR FLUID SYSTEMS
ENGINEERING OF THE TURBINE BUSINESS OPERATION, NUOVO PIGNONE.
IF THERE ARE ANY QUESTIONS OR DOUBTS ABOUT A MATERIAL, CONTACT
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-56

21. With the lower-half No. 1 bearing liner installed and positioned,
carefully release the rotor support fixture and gently lower the ro-
tor journal to rest on the lower bearing liner.
22. Recover the No. 1 bearing housing to protect the bearing journal
and keep foreign matter out of the housing.
7.2.45 Operation 45. Inspect No. 2 Bearing
1. Inspect and record all No .2 bearing seal clearances. Compare

readings with the unit clearance diagram. Record clearances on
Inspection Field Report.
2. Remove oil deflector and inspect for rubbing.
3. Unbolt and lift off upper-half bearing liner.
4. Support the rotor with a suitable shaft support arrangement and

install a dial indicator to measure lift. Jack the rotor upward just
enough to release pressure on lower-half bearing liner. Do not
exceed 0.010 inch lift. See Fig. 7-30.
! WARNING
TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS TO ASSURE THAT THE SHAFT IS NOT

DAMAGED BY THE JACKING MEANS WHEN LIFTING.
5. Roll out the lower-half bearing liner.
6. Inspect bearing surface for cracks, wiped babbit, scoring, foreign

material, spalling, pitting and excessive or abnormal wear pat-
terns as described in Operation 44, steps 7, 8, 9, 10 and 13.
7. Inspect the bearing journal for galling, scoring, pitting and exces-
sive or abnormal wear as described in Operation 44, steps 11 and
12.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-57

8. Record liner and journal conditions and dimensions on Inspection

Field Report. Refer to the Unit Clearance Diagram in the Refer-
ence Drawing Section of the service manual for tolerances.
9. Coat the lower-half No. 2 bearing liner to be installed with clean

turbine oil used in the unit lube system and set the liner on the ro-
tor journal. Roll the bearing liner carefully into the lower half of
the bearing housing. Restrain the liner from falling into the lower
half.
10. With the lower-half No. 2 bearing liner installed and positioned,
carefully release the rotor support fixture and lower the rotor
journal to rest on the lower bearing liner.
11. Recover the bearing housing to protect the bearing journal and
keep foreign matter out of the housing.
7.2.46 Operation 46. Clean & Inspect Compressor Rotor, Stator Blad-
ing, Inlet guide Vanes, & Compressor & Turbine Casings
1. Cleaning of the compressor casing parts and rotor can be accom-

plished with the rotor assembly either installed or removed.
! WARNING
THE THRUST BEARING MUST BE INSTALLED IF THE UNIT IS ROTATED

WHEN CLEANING THE COMPRESSOR. TAKE PRECAUTIONS TO KEEP THE
BEARING AREA PROTECTED DURING CLEANING.
a. The process described overleaf may be used for casing clean-

ing with the compressor rotor installed. Choice of the process
depends on equipment availability and kind of deposits in the
machine.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-58

! WARNING
THE 4TH AND 10TH STAGE EXTRACTION AIR PIPING MUST BE REMOVED OR
BLIND FLANGED TO PREVENT INGESTION OF CLEANING MATERIAL AND
CONTAMINANTS.
1. Solvent Cleaning - Useful for removing organic contami-

nants such as oils and greases. The solvent should be Petro-
leum Spirits, GE No. 1500 thinner, or Multicleaner No. 44,
applied by spray, or with a well saturated clean cloth, fol-
lowed by wiping with another clean cloth.
2. Steam Cleaning - Can be used for removing grease and oil

and water soluble contaminants. Spray the parts thoroughly
using an inhibitor such as Turco Cold Spray to minimize
subsequent rusting and to leave a thin protective film on the
assembly after drying. Dry the parts with an air blast.
2. Rotor removal may be required for cleaning if fouling/deposits

on the compressor cannot be successfully removed in place. The
following process in addition to the two above processes may be
used.
a. Shell-Blasting - Useful mostly for removing relatively soft, dry

deposits. The rotor parts must be dry before attempting shell-
blast cleaning. Oily deposits or residue must also have been
removed from the rotor. The 0.010 to 0.015-inch gap between
each rotor stage must be covered with adhesive tape to keep
out the cleaning media.
3. Inspect the inlet guide vanes carefully for deposits, erosion (thin-
ning of trailing edges and rounding of leading and trailing tip cor-
ners), or corrosion pitting.
4. Liquid penetrant check the inlet guide vanes for cracks in the
blade root and vane.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-59

5. If any blade deposits are found, two samples should be collected

and sent to a testing laboratory for analysis. The analysis is im-
portant to the overall inspection.
6. Cheek for presence of oil on the guide vanes or any part of the
casing. If any oil is found, this could indicate porosity and seep-
age in the bearing support area and must be corrected to prevent
compressor fouling.
) NOTE
FOR CORRECTIVE ACTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE, CONTACT YOUR NUOVO

PIGNONE COMPANY FIELD SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE.
7. Record inlet guide vane inspection on Inspection Field Report.
8. Make a visual check for compressor blade tip rubs, cracks, corro-
sion, deposits, erosion and foreign object damage. Use Table 7-2
and Figs. 7-32 through 7-35 for inspection and repair criteria.
) NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT YOUR NUOVO PIGNONE COMPANY FIELD SERVICE

REPRESENTATIVE SUPERVISE THE INSPECTION OF THE COMPRESSOR COMPO-
NENTS AND ANY REPAIRS OR REPLACEMENT OF BLADING BE DONE BY NUOVO
PIGNONE COMPANY APPARATUS SERVICE SHOP.
7.2.47 Operation 47. Remove Unit Rotor
) NOTE
ROTOR SHOULD BE REMOVED ONLY IF ROTOR OR BLADING DAMAGE CANNOT

BE REPAIRED IN PLACE. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT YOUR NUOVO PIGNONE
FIELD SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE SUPERVISE RIGGING AND REMOVAL OF UNIT
ROTOR. ROTOR WEIGHT IS 19,800 POUNDS (8,981 KILOGRAMS).
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-60

1. Before lifting the rotor, the first-stage nozzle support ring lower-
half must be shifted forward to eliminate the first-stage bucket
wheelspace seal overlap.
2. Loosen bolts holding lower half of support ring in place. Match-

mark and slide out support ring shim segments. Tighten two
bolts to pull support ring forward to unlap bucket wheelspace
seal.
3. Build or have available a suitable 'A' frame rotor stand or ship-

ping skid with padded 'V' blocks to receive the rotor. See Fig. 7-
36 for rotor lift and laydown planes and Fig. 7-37 for rotor di-
mensions.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-61

TABLE 7-2
COMPRESSOR BLADING INSPECTION AND REPAIR CRITERIA
BLADE CONDITION ALLOWABLE LIMITS CORRECTIVE

ACTION
Bends
1. Blades bent Up to 10% of the airfoil height Cold straighten above
from the tip and less than 25% pitch line and dye pene-
of the chord length trant inspect. Replace if
bent below pitch line.
Hot straightening is NOT
allowed. See Figure 7.32
2. Tips bent Up to 15% of vane length along Cold straighten and dye
tip and a maximum of 60 de- penetrant inspect.
grees deflection. See Figure
7.35
3. Bent airfoil Not acceptable Replace
Cracks
1. Blade fatigue crack in No allowable limits Replace cranked blade
any area of blade
2. Blade cracks due to No allowable limits Replace cranked blade

foreign object damage
any area of blade
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-62

TABLE 7-2
COMPRESSOR BLADING INSPECTION AND REPAIR CRITERIA (cont’d)

ACTION
EROSION AND CORROSION
Corrosion
1. Evidenced by general Loss of 10% of cross sectional Replace blade

wasting and pitting. area or pit marks 0.015 inch
Knife edges at leading deep or greater
and trailing edges.
Erosion
Evidenced by loss of Loss of 10% of cross sectional Replace blade
blade contour. Knife area or an unacceptable loss of
edge conditions performance.
NICKS AND DENTS

Foreign Object Dam-
age
1. Small nicks or dents 0.050 inch diameter or less by Should be left alone, no
around leading edge 0.020 inch deep action necessary
Dents Stages 1 Through 4*
1. Dents in area around One dent D in depth and diame- Blend out to original con-
leading edge of blade ter of 5 times D. Max. allowable tour and polish to a 32
above and below pitch D equal to 0.160 inch. See finish or better. Dye
line Figgs. 7.32 and 7.33 penetrant inspect.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-63

TABLE 7-2

ACTION
NICKS AND DENTS (cont'd)
2. Dents in area of trailing One dent D in depth and diame- Radius the edge and pol-
edge above and below ter of 5 times D. Max. allowable ish to a 32 finish or bet-
pitch line D equal to 0.160 inch. See Figgs ter. Dye penetrant in-
7.33 and 7.34 spect. See Fig. 7.34
3. Dents in both lead not Combination of condition not Blend out and radius the
to exceed D equal to exceed D equal to 0.160 inch edge. Dye penetrant in-
edge above and 0.080 inch below the spect. See Figgs. 7.33
pitch line and 7.34.
4. Dents in vane section Two 0.040 inch deep above the Polish smooth to remove
other than leading and pitch line roughness, remove as lit-
trailing edge tle metal as possible. Dye
penetrant inspect
*For Stages 5 through 7 use

75% of dimension criteria, i.e.,
0.160 inch becomes 0.120 inch.
For Stages 8 through final stage

use 50% of dimensional criteria.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-64

TABLE 7-2

ACTION
NICKS AND DENTS (cont'd)
Airfoil Damage
1. Dents and nicks on the Dents and nicks located above Acceptable, however to
leading and trailing the pitch line and having a sur- ensure smooth air flow,
edge face area of less than 0.020 inch the high metal should be
per inch of blade chord and less blended and dye pene-
than 0.050 inch deep. trant inspected
Airfoil Root Damage

1. Dents, nicks or tears in Not acceptable Replace
the airfoil root section
including the fillet ra-
dius. See Figure 7.32
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-65

4. Build padded angle iron brackets 24 inches high to guide the ro-
tor to prevent lateral or fore and aft movement. These can be
bolted in place utilizing the casing horizontal joint bolt holes.
5. Prepare or have available an '1' beam lifting fixture to allow a ny-

lon cable sling to be attached vertically just forward of the first
stage turbine wheel and another just forward of the first-stage
compressor wheel. See Figs. 7-36 and 7-37.
6. Use a 15-ton chainfall from lifting fixture up to overhead crane

hook.
7. The centre of gravity of the fully assembled rotor only is 8 feet 2

inches aft of the face of the speed-indicating rotor. Use a level on
the rotor distance piece and keep the rotor level at all times while
it is supported by the crane.
8. Remove the inductor alternator rotor from the forward compres-

sor stub shaft if necessary so that rotor can be rotated laterally to
clear the inlet plenum angles and exhaust transition duct during
removal.
9. With all of the lifting gear and guides in place and checked, care-
fully take up the slack with the chainfall and slowly lift the rotor
off the bearings.
10. Use plastic guards or wrap the journals and thrust faces immedi-
ately to prevent dings on these surfaces.
11. Attach tag lines to control the rotor as it comes up off the guide
brackets. The rotor will have to be swung to clear the transition
duct above the exhaust plenum.
12. Place the rotor in the rotor stand.
! WARNING
DO NOT ALLOW BLADING TO CONTACT OR BUMP ANYTHING DURING THE

LIFT. DO NOT DROP THE LIFTING FIXTURE ON THE BLADING.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-66

7.2.48 Operation 48. Inspect First- & Second-Stage Turbine Buckets &
Wheel Dovetails
! WARNING
EACH TIME THE UPPER-HALF TURBINE CASING IS REMOVED, THE TUR-

BINE BUCKETS SHOULD BE CAREFULLY EXAMINED. SUCH EXAMINATION
CAN REDUCE THE RISK OF MAJOR DAMAGE FROM THE FAILURE OF A
PREVIOUSLY DAMAGED BUCKET. AT THE SAME TIME, JUDGMENT IS NEC-
ESSARY TO AVOID REPLACEMENT OF ADEQUATE BUCKETS. THE RECOM-
MENDATIONS CONTAINED HEREIN ARE INTENDED TO HELP IN MAKING
THIS JUDGMENT, AND THE CRITERIA FOR CONTINUED SERVICE OR REPAIR
OF BUCKETS ARE FURNISHED AS A SERVICE TO THE CUSTOMER.
THERE IS A GREAT VARIANCE IN CUSTOMER PRACTICES RELATING TO OP-

ERATION AND MAINTENANCE, WITH ACCOMPANYING VARIATION IN IN-
FLUENCE UPON SATISFACTORY OPERATION OF GAS TURBINE COMPO-
NENTS. NUOVO PIGNONE COMPANY HAS LITTLE KNOWLEDGE OF OR NO
CONTROL OVER THESE PRACTICES. ACCORDINGLY, THE RESPONSIBILITY
FOR DECISIONS AS TO CONTINUED USAGE OR REPLACEMENT OF BUCKETS
MUST REMAIN SOLELY WITH EACH CUSTOMER.
1. The result of a bucket inspection should be documented along

with the relative information on unit operation and fuels. The in-
spection reporting forms should be used to record and communi-
cate to NUOVO PIGNONE the exact location and type of ab-
normality observed.
These bucket inspection records will be filed for each particular

turbine and used as a basis for present and future recommenda-
tions. All records and questions arising on the subject should be
communicated to your NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field Ser-
vice Representative.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-67

2. Clean buckets with aluminium oxide 240 grit at an operating

pressure of 40 psi maximum. Dovetails should not be grit blasted
and must be masked during this operation.
3. Upon completion of grit blasting, remove masking tape from

dovetails of turbine buckets and clean the dovetails using a stiff
bristle fiber brush or hand-held wire brush (non-rotary type).
4. Clean all airfoils and dovetails with fluorescent penetrant Zyglo

ZL-22A.
5. Inspect first-stage buckets using the following inspection criteria.
) NOTE
BUCKETS CAN CONTINUE TO BE USED AS IS IF THEY MEET THE FOLLOWING IN-

SPECTION CRITERIA.
a. Radial tip cracks are less than 0.375 inch long or local bent
sections associated with radial tip cracks are less than 0.375
inch long.
b. Missing sections of the airfoil wall are within an area or 0.188

inch by 1.088 inch or smaller. with associated cracks less than
0.125 inch long and located at least 0.500 inch from the junc-
tion of the hollow tip and the solid portion of the airfoil trailing
edge. This description holds true for one such missing section
per bucket. See Fig. 7-38.
c. Dents are permissible providing they are less than 0.90 inch
deep, and the dent must contain no cracks.
6. Repair of buckets; depending on the type of foreign object dam-

age, buckets can be hand reworked or weld repaired providing
the criteria described overleaf are met.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-68

! WARNING
DUE TO SENSITIVE METALLURGICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE BUCKET

ALLOY, IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT ANY CLEANING, WELD RE-
PAIR OR REWORK BE PERFORMED TO THE APPROVED PROCESS SPECIFI-
CATION BY A QUALIFIED REPRESENTATIVE OF NUOVO PIGNONE.
a. Hand rework or blending can be done on dent-produced cracks

provided the depth does not exceed limits as set in Para-
graph 5-c above.
! WARNING
ALL FIRST-STAGE BUCKETS HAVE A CORROSION-RESISTANCE, PROTEC-

TIVE COATING. REWORK OF COATED BUCKETS IS ALLOWED, BUT IT
SHOULD BE HELD TO A MINIMUM SO THAT NO MORE COATING IS RE-
MOVED THAN ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY TO EFFECT THE REPAIR.
THE COATING IS ONLY .002 INCH THICK AND EXTREME CARE MUST BE
TAKEN TO AVOID DAMAGING IT WHEN CLEANING, REPAIRING, OR HAN-
DLING COATED BUCKETS. COATED BUCKETS MUST BE CLEANED WITH
ALUMINIUM OXIDE 240 GRIT AT AN OPERATING PRESSURE OF 40 PSI.
b. Weld repair is limited to regions of very low stress where a

failure or parent metal cracking would result in minimal con-
sequential damage. Weld repair is done only to improve
aerodynamic performance. The bucket area considered safe for
weld is the last 0.250 inch of the airfoil tip.
In addition, with exception of the junction of the hollow core

and solid portion of the trailing edge, weld repair may be per-
mitted in limited section(s) of the tip to 0.375 inch in from the
tip. See Fig. 7-39 for details.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-69

Within the scope of the above limitations, weld repair is rec-

ommended if the following conditions are found:
1. Loss of airfoil tips of an entire row of buckets is in excess

of 0.010 inch but less than 0.250 inch.
2. Loss of tip sections with area larger than 0.035 square inch
but less than 0.060 square inch.
3. Cracks extending radially more than 0.375 inch but less

than 0.750 inch. See Fig. 7-39 for details.
7. Inspect first-stage buckets for corrosion and erosion. Limits for

corrosion and erosion are defined as follows:
a. 10% of maximum airfoil thickness.
b. Flattened nose radius.
c. One-half of trailing edges thickness.
8. Any first-stage bucket(s) not meeting criteria as described in

Parts 1, 2, 3 and 4 should be replaced.
9. Second-Stage Buckets
Inspection and repair criteria for second-stage shrouded tip buck-

ets is as follows:
a. The second-stage bucket involves no weld repair. 'Re repair is

limited to grinding and blending. When reworking buckets by
grinding, care should be exercised to avoid overheating. Also
before performing ZL-22A fluorescent penetrant inspection,
the buckets should be polished with fine grit emergy paper.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-70

10. Repair limits for second-stage shrouded tip buckets is as follows:
a. The dimensions given are intended to be used as a guide for

hand tool rework of buckets having foreign object damage.
Table 7-3 lists the allowable limits for the repair of foreign ob-
ject damage at or near the leading edge of the buckets. Fig. 7-
40 defines the dimensions used in Table 7-3.
b. Missing Metal - Missing material in the second-stage buckets

is acceptable if the airfoil can be contoured to the same limits
as the crack repair.
c. Dents - Dents are acceptable as long as dent is not located in

bucket root fillet (interface between airfoil and platform) or in
shroud fillet (interface between airfoil and shroud).
Dents containing cracks or those located in shroud fillet are re-

pairable. Repairable dents should be hand-polished to remove
foreign material in area of dent, and fluorescent penetrant in-
spected for cracks. Blend smooth all dents.
d. Corrosion - Corrosion on second-stage buckets to a depth of

more than 0.025 inches has not been observed. Such a condi-
tion is acceptable. If a more serious corrosion is noted, the ob-
servations should be reported to your NUOVO PIGNONE
Company Field Service Representative.
Shroud Tip Rework
11. Rework and metal removal is allowed in the cross-hatched areas.

No rework is permitted which penetrates below the center sec-
tion. See Fig. 7-41.
) NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT ANY BUCKET REWORK BE DONE BY A QUALIFIED

NUOVO PIGNONE COMPANY APPARATUS SERVICE BUSINESS DIVISION SHOP. IN
ALL CASES, THE BUCKET REWORK AREA MUST BE CLEANED AND FLUORES-
CENT PENETRANT INSPECTED WITH ZYGLO ZL-22A WHEN REWORK IS COM-
PLETED.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-71

TABLE 7-3
REPAIR DIMENSIONS MATRIX
SECOND-STAGE BUCKET
MS-5001
A .5 Maximum
R1 1.5/0.75
R2 2.0/1.0
D .3 Maximum*
R3 .5t
E .06 Maximum
R4 1.0/0.5
* D must be reduced to 2/3 of indicated maximum value when B is between root and
pitch and proportionately smaller when B is less than R2 minimum.
) NOTE
SEE FIGURE 7-40, ALSO.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-72

12. Clean the turbine wheel dovetails by using a stiff bristle fiber
brush or a hand-held wire brush (non-rotary type). Check the
turbine wheel dovetails with fluorescent penetrant Zyglo ZL-22A
and pay particular attention to the roots and ends of each dove-
tail.
) NOTE
WASH TURBINE BUCKETS AND TURBINE WHEEL DOVETAIL AREAS TO ENSURE
REMOVAL OF DEVELOPING OIL AND POWDER.
7.2.49 Operation 49. Inspect First- & Second-Stage Turbine Shrouds
1. Visually inspect the shroud segments for deposits, corrosion, ero-

sion (pitting), cracks and nicks or dents. See Fig. 7-42.
2. Inspect the second-stage shroud seals for distortion, rubs, wear

and missing pieces.
) NOTE
THE LOWER-HALF, SECOND-STAGE SHROUDS WERE REMOVED FOR BUCKET

REMOVAL. THE REMAINING FIRST- AND SECOND-STAGE SHROUD CAN BE IN-
SPECTED IN PLACE AND NEED NOT BE DISASSEMBLED FROM THE TURBINE
CASING FOR INSPECTION.
7.2.50 Operation 50. Make First-Stage Nozzle Ellipticity Checks
) NOTE
ELLIPTICITY IS THE CONDITION OF DEVIATION FROM A CIRCULAR FORM.

MEASUREMENT OF THE FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE IS TO DETERMINE THE AMOUNT
OF DEVIATION OR THE 'OUT-OF-ROUNDNESS' OF THE NOZZLE ASSEMBLY WHEN
IT IS MEASURED OUT OF THE UNIT. ELLIPTICITY CAN BE MEASURED ON THE
FIRST STAGE NOZZLE SINCE THE SEGMENTS ARE HELD IN PLACE BY A RETAIN-
ING RING AND ARE REMOVED AS AN ASSEMBLED UNIT IN BOTH THE UPPER
AND LOWER HALVES.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-73

Assistance from your NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field Service

Representative in obtaining ellipticity readings is recommended.
1. Bolt the upper and lower halves of the first-stage nozzle firmly
together. Set nozzle on a reasonably level surface and take ellip-
ticity checks. The maximum allowable difference is normally
0.100 inch. Check with your NUOVO PIGNONE Company
Field Service Representative for disposition above 0. 1 00 inch.
7.2.51 Operation 51. Inspect First- & Second-Stage Nozzles
) NOTE
THE FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE MAY BECOME AVAILABLE FOR PARTIAL OR COM-

PLETE INSPECTION AT LESS THAN HOT GAS PATH INSPECTION INTERVALS BE-
CAUSE OF OTHER INSPECTION OR MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS. IT IS IM-
PORTANT THAT THESE INSPECTION RESULTS BE ACCURATELY INTERPRETED,
EVALUATED AND RECORDED TO MINIMIZE OPERATOR'S MAINTENANCE EX-
PENSE WHILE PROVIDING HIGH RELIABILITY.
! WARNING
EXTREME CARE MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN GRIT BLASTING NOZZLE

SEGMENTS SO NO GRIT WELL ENTER THE NOZZLE PARTITION COOLING
HOLES. USING AN AIR PRESSURE OF 40 PSIG OR LESS, WORK THE BLASTING
NOZZLE IN THE DIRECTION OF NORMAL HOT GAS FLOW PATH ACROSS THE
NOZZLE PARTITION. NORMAL HOT GAS PATH FLOW IS LEADING EDGE TO
TRAILING EDGE. DO NOT DWELL IN ONE AREA AS EXCESSIVE AMOUNTS
OF METAL MAY BE REMOVED.
1. Clean nozzle by blasting with aluminium oxide 220 grit or finer.

Air blast nozzles to assure removal of all blasting grit from sur-
faces and openings. Fluorescent penetrant (Zyglo) check for
cracks, inspect for foreign object damage, erosion, corrosion and
cracks. Refer to Section 2, Standard Practices, Gas Turbine
Cleaning Section of this service manual. Record findings on In-
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-74

Nozzle Cracking
Nozzles experience several thermal gradients during starting as

well as high temperatures during loading operation. Such condi-
tions frequently cause nozzle cracking and, in fact, cracking is
expected. With certain exceptions, this cracking does not impair
the efficiency or the mechanical integrity of the nozzle. (See
Chapter 6, Paragraph 6.2.8, and Figs. 6-21 through 6-28).
If uncertainty arises in regard to any cracks, contact your

NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field Service Representative for
disposition. Obtain specific advice prior to making repairs when
nozzle condition is considered beyond established limits.
Although to date we have found very few cracks that could im-
pair the mechanical integrity, they can exist. The inspector
should be alert for the following which may require immediate
disposition (i.e. repair or scrap):
1. Open cracks in critical areas: Open cracks can permit ingestion

of hot gases. An open crack is defined as a crack sufficiently
open to pass a 0.005-inch feeler gauge and having a length of
1.0 inch or more. The critical areas are certain regions of the
vane and inner sidewalls.
2. Cracks that could cause part breakout: Cracks whose orienta-

tion and growth rate are such as to raise questions of the dis-
lodgment of significant portions of the nozzle must be evalu-
ated. -
3. Continuous fillet cracks on one vane side: Cracks such as this

can cause airfoil separation.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-75

4. Corrosion or Erosion of Nozzles:
a. The allowable amount of vane region removal is 50% of

the wall thickness.
b. Sufficient trailing edge material must be maintained to

prevent nozzle cooling hole exposure.
c. Area and harmonic checks must be performed where sig-

nificant material removal has occurred.
5. Nozzle foreign object damage:
) NOTE
NOZZLES CAN BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY FOREIGN OBJECTS IN THE GAS

STREAM. THIS DAMAGE CAN IMPAIR THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY AND AERO-
DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE OF THE NOZZLE. SUCH DAMAGE SHOULD BE
EVALUATED BY THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA:
a. All tears and breaks must be evaluated by the same criteria

given for cracks.
b. Raised metal must be blended to the adjacent surface con-

tours.
c. Nicks and chips must not exceed 50% of the wall thick-
ness.
d. Any damage affecting the throat opening (i.e. bending of

trailing edges, pieces missing) is cause for having an area
check performed for harmonic analysis.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-76

6. Recommendations:
a. First-stage nozzles should not be removed for repair ex-

cept at normal major inspection intervals unless the above
guidelines have been exceeded.
b. If the nozzle is removed earlier than major inspection in-

terval for other reasons, all cracks, damage etc., should be
carefully mapped using proper nondestructive test proce-
dures and reported to your NUOVO PIGNONE Company
Field Service Representative.
c. At all other times that the nozzle becomes partially or

wholly accessible, the nozzle should be inspected as com-
pletely as possible using appropriate techniques and re-
sults reported to your NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field
Service Representative.
d. All inspections should be reported on the Field Inspection

Report. It should be noted that extreme care should be
used to ensure accuracy. False indications can occur
when accessibility is limited. Such false indications could
result in major expense and lost time if not scrutinized and
properly interpreted. Record condition of nozzles on In-
7.2.52 Operation 52. Inspect Second-Stage Nozzle Diaphragms
1. Clean nozzle assembly by blasting with aluminium oxide 220 grit

or finer as detailed in Section 2, Standard Practices, Gas Turbine
Cleaning Section in this service manual.
2. Check for cracks using fluorescent penetrant. Zyglo ZL22A is

preferred. Record findings on Inspection Field Report.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-77

3. Make a visual inspection for foreign object damage, burning, cor-

rosion, erosion, and excessive deposit buildup. Report findings
) NOTE
EACH DIAPHRAGM SEGMENT IS NORMALLY REMOVED ALONG WITH THE NOZ-

ZLE SEGMENT. THE DIAPHRAGM SEGMENTS ARE NOT NORMALLY SEPARATED
IN THE FIELD TO MAKE CHECKS.
4. Make a visual inspection of all diaphragm seal teeth, first-stage

aft wheelspace seals, second-stage forward wheelspace seals.
5. Note the condition on Inspection Field Report.
6. Inspect diaphragm teeth as follows:
Observe the worst rubbed tooth and measure its tooth height.
Compare this measurement to the height of the tooth on the dia-
phragm segment previously positioned at the horizontal joint
where the tolerance of the gap IPL and IPH is known. Then see
if the gaps are within the minimum specified allowance for the
worst diaphragm tooth condition.
7.2.53 Operation 53. Perform Combustion Inspection Operation Nos.

11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18 and 19
) NOTE
REFER TO SECTION 5 OF THIS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION

FOR THE FOLLOWING INSPECTION OPERATIONS:
1. Test fuel check valves.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-78

6. Inspect combustion casings.
7.2.54 Operation 54. Install Unit Rotor (If Applicable)
1. Using all of the procedures, tools and cautions of Operation 47,

install the rotor.
! WARNING
MAKE SURE JOURNAL SURFACES AND THRUST SURFACES ARE SPOTLESSLY

CLEAN BEFORE LOWERING ROTOR INTO LINERS. THE JOURNALS SHOULD
BE COATED WITH CLEAN TURBINE OIL.
7.2.55 Operation 55. Assemble No. l Bearing, Thrust-Bearing, Deflector

& Upper-Half Bearing Housing
1. With the lower-half bearing liner in place and journal resting on

the bearing liner, use a feeler gauge or Plasti-gauge to check the
bearing liner alignment for parallelism with the rotor journal.
! WARNING
IF A FEELER GAUGE IS USED, EXTREME CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO KEEP

FROM SCRATCHING THE ROTOR JOURNAL OR BEARING LINER.
2. Coat rotor journal and upper-half bearing liner with turbine oil.
3. Place upper-half bearing liner on the journal.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-79

4. Apply turbine oil to the thrust bearing face and thrust runner.
5. Install thrust bearing assembly.
6. Install oil ring seal using new lockplates.
7. Install lower-half oil deflector and air seal.
8. Recheck and record bearing seal clearances. Refer to Clearance

Diagram in the Reference Drawing Section of the unit service
manual. Record clearances on Inspection Field Report.
9. Inspect lower-half bearing housing for cleanliness and the hori-

zontal joint faces.
10. Apply coating Instant Seal Loctite Plastic Gasket to the horizon-
tal joint faces.
11. Coat all bolting and dowels with FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize
compound.
12. Rig upper-half bearing housing using chainfall. Lift upper-half

housing and lower into place over lower-half bearing housing.
! WARNING
CAREFULLY LOWER THE UPPER-HALF HOUSING INTO PLACE. CHECK TO

ASSURE THE HOUSING FITS OVER THRUST BEARING ASSEMBLY PROPERLY.
THE TOP CENTERLINE THRUST BEARING KEY MUST FIT INTO THE SLOT IN
THE UPPER-HALF BEARING HOUSING.
13. Install dowel pins and bolts.
14. Torque bolts to proper tightness in proper sequence.

See Fig. 7-43.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-80

) NOTE
REFER TO SECTION 2, STANDARD PRACTICES, IN THIS INSPECTION AND MAIN-

TENANCE INSTRUCTION FOR TORQUE TABLES AND VALUES.
15. Apply Instant Seal Loctite to the mounting flange and reassemble
the magnetic pickup ring.
16. Check the gap of the magnetic pickups; it should be set at .045 to
.055 inch.
17. Reconnect magnetic pickup connections.
7.2.56 Operation 56. Assemble No. 2 Bearing, Deflector & Upper-Half

Bearing Housing
1. The lower-half bearing liner should in place and the rotor journal
resting on the bearing liner.
2. Install oil deflector and air baffle in the following manner:
a. Roll lower-half deflector and baffle assembly into place.

Make sure all three adjusting screws are backed off in the
housing. Wrap 0.004 inch shimstock around shaft at all three
seal lands. Adjust only the bottom screw until contact is felt
between seal teeth and shimstock. When contact is made, it
will be impossible to pull out the shimstock.
b. Remove shimstock (it is necessary to back off lower screw

less than 20 degrees to obtain proper clearance on the lower
shaft). Pull out the shimstock and adjust tight and left clear-
ance using right and left set screws only.
c. Apply coating Instant Seal Loctite Plastic Gasket to the hori-

zontal joint of the deflector. Bolt upper half to the lowerhalf
deflector. Torque bolts to proper values.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-81

d. Check top clearance at innermost tooth. Clearance should be

0.006 to 0.009 inch. Refer to the Clearance Diagram in the
Reference Drawing Section of the unit service manual. Re-
cord clearance on Inspection Field Report.
3. Coat rotor journal and upper-half bearing liner with turbine oil
and lower the upper-half bearing liner onto the journal.
4. Recheck and record all seal clearances on Inspection Field Re-

port.
5. Inspect lower-half bearing housing for cleanliness and the hori-

zontal joint faces.
6. Apply coating Instant Seal Loctite Plastic Gasket to the horizon-

tal joint faces.
7. Coat all bolting and dowels with FEL-PRO C- 102 anti-seize

compound.
8. Rig upper-half bearing housing using chainfall. Lift upper-half

housing and lower into place over lower-half housing.
9. Install dowel pins and bolts.
10. Torque bolts to proper tightness in proper sequence.

See Fig. 7-43.
11. The top adjusting screw should be tightened down until it barely
contacts the seal.
7.2.57 Operation 57. Install Second-Stage Shrouded Tip Buckets
) NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED TURBINE BUCKET INSTALLATION BE DONE BY QUALIFIED

BUCKET PERSONNEL FROM NUOVO PIGNONE COMPANY APPARATUS SERVICE
SHOP.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-82

1. Some twist locks can be turned end for end in their original posi-
tion if they have not been previously turned. Twist locks may be
staked on each end ONCE ONLY. If both ends have been previ-
ously staked, or if they contain cracks or missing pieces at either
end, they should not be reused and new twist locks must be in-
stalled.
) NOTE
IF A NEW SET OF TURBINE BUCKETS IS TO BE INSTALLED, IT IS RECOMMENDED

THAT NEW TWIST LOCKS BE INSTALLED WITH THE NEW BUCKETS.
2. Install and tape the twist locks in the bottom of the bucket dove-
tails in the wheel. Starting with the No. 1 bucket, insert the
bucket into the No. 1 dovetail position of the wheel, just far
enough to maintain itself within the dovetail (approximately 3/8
inch).
Install the No. 2 bucket and horizontal seal pin into No. 2 dove-
tail position of the wheel by the same amount while at the same
time engaging the interlocking ends of the tip shroud 'Z' section
with the first bucket. Install the remaining buckets, horizontal
seal pins in sequence in the same manner.
The last bucket and horizontal seal pin to be installed will require
spreading the adjacent buckets to properly engage the interlock-
ing shrouds at the tip.
3. Using a rawhide or nylon headed mallet, carefully work around

the turbine wheel tapping bucket a slight amount each time until
all buckets are in place. Rotate the twist locks to the locking po-
sition. (Flat side of twist lock towards the wheel centre as shown
in Fig. 7-44). Using special staking tool, place staking tool over
twist lock head and lightly rap with a mallet. Check that the
twist-lock stacking is correct.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-83

) NOTE
ROTATE TWIST LOCKS AND CAREFULLY STAKE BOTH CORNERS INTO THE LOCK-
ING GROOVE. STAKING SHOULD BE DONE GRADUALLY TO AVOID CRACKING OR
SHEARING. SPECIAL CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO PROTECT WHEEL FACES NEAR
DOVETAILS. NICKS, GOUGES ETC., ARE NOT PERMITTED.
4. After properly staking all bucket twist locks, penetrant dye check
for cracks at the staked area of the twist lock. If any cracks are
found, the twist lock must be replaced.
7.2.58 Operation 58. Install Lower-Half Second-Stage Turbine Wheel

Shrouds
1 Apply a coating of FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound to the

turbine shroud machined grooves in the lower-half turbine casing
and also coat the dowel pins and pipe plugs with anti-seize.
2. Position each shroud block in the turbine casing groove and slide
into the turbine casing. Align the shroud block with dowel hole
in the turbine casing and insert the dowel pin, making sure it en-
ters the shroud hole. Install pipe plug and tighten. See Fig. 7-45.
) NOTE
THERE ARE FIFTEEN SHROUD BLOCKS IN THE LOWER-HALF CASING. EVERY

OTHER SHROUD IS HELD IN PLACE BY A DOWEL PIN AND PIPE PLUG. (TOTAL
OF EIGHT DOWELS AND PLUGS IN BOTTOM HALF).
7.2.59 Operation 59. Install First-Stage Buckets
1. Some twist locks can be turned end for end in their original posi-
tion if they have not been previously turned. Twist locks may be
staked on each end ONCE ONLY. If both ends have been previ-
ously staked, or if they contain cracks, or missing pieces at either
end, they should not be reused and new twist locks must be in-
stalled.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-84

) NOTE
IF A NEW SET OF TURBINE BUCKETS IS TO BE INSTALLED, IT IS RECOMMENDED

THAT NEW TWIST LOCKS BE INSTALLED WITH THE NEW BUCKETS.
2. Assemble a twist lock and the No. 1 bucket between Dovetail Po-
sition 1 and 2. Assemble a twist lock, bucket and horizontal and
radial seal pin to the bucket in each dovetail slot in the wheel. Be
extremely careful to replace the buckets in the same wheel dove-
tail from which they were originally removed.
3. Upon completion of installation of all twist locks, buckets and

horizontal and radial seal pins, rotate all of the twist locks to the
locking position (flat side of twist lock toward wheel centre) and
stake the twist locks with special staking tool. Place the staking
tool over the head of the twist lock and rap lightly with a mallet.
Using a special go/no-go gauge, check that the twist lock stack-
ing is correct. No-go shows adequate stacking.
4. After properly staking all twist locks, penetrant dye check for
cracks at the staked area of the twist locks; if any cracks are
found the twist lock must be replaced.
7.2.60 Operation 60. Recheck Rotor Float & Compressor Clearances
1 Refer to Operation 28 for rotor thrust clearance check and Opera-

tion 30 for compressor clearance check in this Major Inspection
Procedure.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-85

7.3 REASSEMBLY
7.3.1. Operation 61. Install Turbine Casing Upper-Half For Roundness

& Turbine Bucket Tip Clearance Check
) NOTE

TRANSITION PIECES, IT IS ADVANTAGEOUS TO RECORD AND REVIEW TURBINE
ROUNDNESS AND TIP CLEARANCE. THIS INFORMATION MUST BE OBTAINED IF
THE TURBINE HAS BEEN UPROOTED WITH ADVANCED TECHNOLOGY COMPO-
NENTS OR IF ANY BUCKETS OR STATIONARY SHROUDS HAVE BEEN REPLACED.
In order to accomplish this, it is necessary to bolt on the upper-half of

the turbine shell with the stationary shrouds assembled.

! WARNING
BE SURE TO USE GUIDE PINS, RESTRAINING CABLE AND SNATCH BLOCK,

AND EXERCISE EXTREME CARE SO THAT BUCKET TIPS ARE NOT DAMAGED.
ment at each end of every stationary shroud block.
3. Take the concentricity readings as shown on Inspection Field Re-

port. Record all readings on the inspection form. Report readings
to your NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field Service Representa-
tive for evaluation and disposition.
7.3.2 Operation 62. Remove Turbine Casing Upper-Half
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-86


the turbine casing in preparation for final assembly.
! WARNING
BE SURE TO USE GUIDE PINS, RESTRAINING CABLE AND SNATCH BLOCK,

AND EXERCISE EXTREME CARE SO THAT BUCKET TIPS ARE NOT DAMAGED.
7.3.3. Operation 63. Install first-stage nozzle support ring lower-half

shim
) NOTE
COMPLETE THIS OPERATION IF THE LOWER-HALF SHIM WAS REMOVED FOR

ROTOR REMOVAL (SEE OPERATION 47).
1. Loosen bolts holding support ring against discharge casing.
2. Slide in the notched support ring shim and line up match marks.
3. Set dowels and tighten bolts per torque instructions in Section 2

of these maintenance instructions.
4. Recheck and record first-stage forward wheelspace clearances.
7.3.4 Operation 64. Install lower-Half, Second-Stage Nozzle Segments

) NOTE

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-87

! WARNING

ment Drawing in the Parts Lists and Drawings Volume of this
service manual.
out. Then assemble the two radial seal strips with the notches
facing in. Appropriately stake these seals. See Fig. 7-46.
) NOTE
DO NOT STAKE THE FORWARD AND AFT SEALS AT THE HORIZONTAL JOINT.
THEY ARE PINNED IN PLACE.
horizontal joint to the centre of the casing.
For those nozzle segments with thermocouple tubes protruding,

ensure that enough clearance is available to allow the segments to
be rolled in without damaging the tubes.
Each segment and diaphragm weighs approximately 35 pounds.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-88

) NOTE
NOZZLE SEGMENT RADIAL-LOCATING PINS SHOULD BE INSTALLED AFTER


pins.

to be used to lock the hexhead bolts.
7.3.5 Operation 65. Install Upper-Half, Second-Stage Nozzle Segments

) NOTE

! WARNING

ment Drawing in the Parts Lists and Drawings Volume of this
service manual.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-89

out. Then assemble the two radial seal strips with the notches
facing in. Appropriately stake these seals. See Fig. 7-46.
) NOTE
DO NOT STAKE THE FORWARD AND AFT SEALS AT THE HORIZONTAL JOINT.
THEY ARE PINNED IN PLACE.
horizontal joint to the centre of the casing.
For those nozzle segments with thermocouple tubes protruding,

ensure that enough clearance is available to allow the segments to
be rolled in without damaging the tubes.
Each segment and diaphragm weighs approximately 35 pounds.
) NOTE
NOZZLE SEGMENT RADIAL-LOCATING PINS SHOULD BE INSTALLED AFTER


pins.

to be used to lock the hexhead bolts.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-90

7.3.6 Operation 66. Place Lower-Half Transition Pieces Into Combus-

tion Casings
) NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE APPLIES ONLY IF THE UPPER-HALF OF THE TURBINE CASING

HAS BEEN REMOVED AND THE LOWER-HALF COMBUSTION CASINGS ARE STILL
IN PLACE.
1. Place transition pieces (Nos. 5, 4, 6, 3 and 7 in sequence) into

their respective combustion casings, Slide them as far back into
) NOTE

ING THE LOWER-HALF OF THE FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE.
7.3.7 Operation 67. Install lower-Half First-Stage Nozzle Assembly
) NOTE
IF A NEW OR REMANUFACTURED FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE IS TO BE REINSTALLED,

IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT ASSISTANCE BE OBTAINED FROM YOUR NUOVO
PIGNONE COMPANY FIELD SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE TO POSITION THE FIRST-
STAGE NOZZLE PROPERLY AND TAKE CLEARANCE CHECKS.
1. Coat all bolts, dowels, pins and mating parts, including seals,
with a light coating of FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound.
) NOTE

SPACE THERMOCOUPLES ARE PROPERLY IDENTIFIED FOR LOCATION PRIOR TO
INSTALLING THE NOZZLE.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-91

2. Thread a shoulder eyebolt into the centre bolt hole in each of the
nozzle horizontal joint flanges. (One eyebolt for each end of the
nozzle.) These will be needed after the first-stage nozzle half if
partially installed.
3. To reinstall the first-stage nozzle, lower half which was removed

and proceed as follows:
a. Using cables, slings and chainfalls attached to the lifting bars

on the back of the nozzle retaining ring, rig to lift the nozzle
half, inverted (ends pointed down), over the turbine casing.
b. Check to be sure all mating surfaces are clean, free of burrs,

or upset metal, and lightly coated with FEL-PRO C- 102 an-
tiseize compound.
c. Begin rolling the nozzle lower-half assembly into the turbine

casing by letting out on one chainfall and taking up on the
other, moving the crane as necessary to lead the assembly
around the rotor.
d. When the nozzle half has been rolled in about 45 degrees,

change the attaching location of the lowest cable sling to the
next lift bar welded across the back of the nozzle retaining
ring.
e. Continue rolling in the nozzle half until its horizontal joint

surfaces are perpendicular. At this point, it will be necessary
to pull the nozzle the rest of the way around by attaching a
cable sling to the eyebolt placed in the leading end flange.
Continue the roll in process by taking up on the leading end
cable and letting out on the following cable.
f. By the time nozzle the half horizontal joints are oriented in

the horizontal plane, both cable slings will be attached to the
eyebolts previously installed in the horizontal bolt holes.
With chainfalls attached to cable slings, lift nozzle slightly
and install horizontal joint clamps under flanges.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-92

) NOTE
BE SURE THE HORIZONTAL JOINT CLAMPS ARE REPLACED IN THEIR ORIGINAL

POSITIONS. THESE CLAMPS ARE GROUND AT FACTORY ASSEMBLY OF THE TUR-
BINE TO OBTAIN PROPER CLEARANCES.
g. Lower the nozzle half onto the horizontal joint clamps and
remove the lifting slings, chainfalls and eyebolts.
h. Install the two outer support clamps to the first-stage shroud.

Use FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound on the bolting.
i. Reassemble the 'L' seals to the lower-half nozzle assembly.
) NOTE
ENSURE THAT THE 'L' SEAL JOINTS ARE STAGGERED AT LEAST 1.00 TO .750 INCH
FROM THE NOZZLE SEGMENT JOINTS.
j. Assemble the 'L' seal clamping ring, lower half, after check-
ing that the seal ring groove is clean and that there are no
burrs on the tongue or in the groove. Install new lockplates
and bolts. Torque bolts to proper tightness. Bend lockplates
to lock bolting.
k. Assemble two thicknesses of packing around the circumfer-

ence of the inner-sidewall groove and two thicknesses around
the outer-sidewall groove. Lengths of packing should span I
80 degrees. Packing joints should not coincide with joints of
nozzle segments. The two layers should be staggered. Refer
to the First-Stage Nozzle Arrangement Drawing in the Refer-
ence Drawings Section of the service manual.
l. Install first-stage forward wheel-space thermocouples to

lower-half turbine casing.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-93

7.3.8 Operation 68. Install First-Stage Lower-Half Eccentric Pin
1. The eccentric pin is to be fitted to the first-stage nozzle lower-

half after the nozzle has been assembled and properly positioned.
If the nozzle was not replaced and no adjustments were made to
achieve proper clearance, the eccentric pin should seat properly
without any adjustments. However, if the nozzle was replaced or
adjusted, the following procedure is to be used:
b. Install the eccentric pin into the turbine casing to its full
depth - carefully, so as not to disturb the lateral centering of
the nozzles.
c. Coat top portion of the pins with DYKEM BLUE.
d. Coat the top and sides of the retaining straps with DYKEM
BLUE.
) NOTE
APPLY A LIGHT COAT OF FEL-PRO C- 102 ANTI- SEIZE COMPOUND TO THE

BOLTS THREADS.
f. Scribe a mark on the head of the pin along both sides of the
retaining strap.
of the retaining strap and continuing across the head of the
pin.
h. Remove the retaining strap bolts, scrap, and eccentric pin.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-94

aligning the scribe marks, and weld the strap to the pin head.
j. Lightly coat the eccentric pin with FEL-PRO C-102 anti-

seize compound and reinstall it in the shell.
k. Install the retaining strap bolts and torque bolts to proper

tightness.
1. Refer to Hot Gas Path disassembly Operation 14 for taking tur-

2. Record all turbine clearances on drawing for both first- and sec-
ond stage nozzles and turbine rotor.

Drawings Section of the unit service manual.
4. Report any discrepancies to your NUOVO PIGNONE Field Ser-

vice Representative so that corrective action, if necessary, can be
made before proceeding with any further reassembly of the tur-
bine.
7.3.10 Operation 70. Install Lower-Half Transition Pieces Into Position
2. Reassemble the lower-half transition pieces to the lower-half first

stage nozzle (Nos. 3. 4. 5, 6 and 7). Start with the bottom transi-
tion piece, No. 5, and work up. Install side seals and new shoul-
der bolts. Torque bolts to 32 to 37 foot pounds.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-95

bulkhead.
4. Lightly coat the new shoulder bolts with FEL-PRO C- 102 an-
tiseize compound. Install new aft bracket shoulder bolts, with
new locking plates and torque the bolts to 60 to 68 foot-pounds
using the following procedure:
tapping produces no torque change and there is no gap be-
bracket.
Lock the aft bracket shoulder bolt with a new lock plate.
Bend the lockplate a minimum of two tabs to lock the shoul-
der bolt securely.
! WARNING

7.3.11 Operation 71. Install Inner Compressor Discharge Casing Upper

Half
1. Rig to lift the inner compressor discharge casing.
2. Clean the upper and lower-half horizontal joint flanges and the
vertical flanges on the upper half.
3. Lift into position and set the upper-half onto the lower half. Ap-
ply coating FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound to bolts. In-
stall bolts and torque to proper tightness.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-96

7.3.12 Operation 72. Install Upper-Half Compressor Discharge & Aft

Compressor Casings
) NOTE
PRIOR TO ASSEMBLY OF THE UPPER-HALF CASINGS, VISUALLY INSPECT THE

LOWER-HALF CASING TO VERIFY THAT NO FOREIGN OBJECTS OR DEBRIS IS
LEFT IN THE TURBINE.
1. Rig cables and chainfall to compressor discharge casing and turn

to horizontal position on cribbing.
2. Rig cables and chainfall to lift casing level. Refer to Weights and
Centre of Gravity Drawing in the Reference Drawings Section of
the service manual for rigging requirements and weights.
3. Install guide pins at horizontal joint.
4. Inspect joint flanges for cleanliness. Apply Perfect Seal joint

compound to the horizontal joint flange and FEL-PRO C-102 an-
tiseize compound to vertical joint flange. Remove the jackbolt if
they are still installed.
5. Carefully lower casing down on guide pins, with chainfalls only,

to mate the horizontal joint faces.
! WARNING
DO NOT LET THE CASING SWING AND CONTACT EITHER COMPRESSOR

BLADING OR VERTICAL JOINT FACES WHEN LOWERING DOWN TO THE
GUIDE PINS.
6. With the casing down in contact with horizontal joint, remove

guide pins. Apply FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound to
bolts. Install bolting and torque to proper tightness.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-97

7. Reinstall the three axial angular socket head bolts holding the in-
ner compressor discharge case to the compressor discharge cas-
ing. Torque bolts to proper tightness.
) NOTE
IF APPLICABLE TO UNIT, INSTALL THERMOCOUPLE PLUG LOCATED IN UPPER

HALF COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE CASING BEHIND THE AFT END OF THE NO. 8
COMBUSTION CASING.
7.3.13 Operation 73. Install Upper-Half First-Stage Nozzle Support

Ring
1. Rig, using eyebolt on top centre and chainfall, to lift nozzle sup-
port ring upper-half.
2. Check that all mating surfaces are clean and free from burrs or
upset metal.
3. Apply FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound to dowels and bolt-

ing.
4. Lift upper-half support ring over the lower-half and carefully

lower into place using the chainfall for the last 8 to 10 inches.
5. Install shim.
6. Install and torque the horizontal bolts.
7. Remove all lift rigging.
7.3.14 Operation 74. Install Upper-Half First-Stage Nozzle
1. Coat with mating surfaces with a light coating of FEL-PRO C-

102 anti-seize compound.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-98

) NOTE

SPACE THERMOCOUPLES ARE PROPERLY IDENTIFIED PRIOR TO INSTALLING
THE NOZZLE.
2. Install 'L' seals to the upper-half, first-stage nozzle assembly.
) NOTE
A LIGHT PEEN MARK WILL HOLD THE SEALS IN PLACE DURING ASSEMBLY.
3. Using chainfalls and slings, rig to lift the nozzle assembly (two
ends pointing down) and level.
4. Carefully lower the upper half of the nozzle assembly onto the
lower half. Check to ensure the seal strips are in place in the in-
ner and outer sidewall grooves.
5. Install the upper-half horizontal joint clamps, bolts, and torque

bolts to proper tightness.
) NOTE
MAKE SURE THAT THE HORIZONTAL JOINT CLAMPS ARE INSTALLED ON THE
SAME SIDES FROM WHICH THEY WERE REMOVED. USE FEL-CRO C-102 AN-
TISEIZE COMPOUND ON BOLTING AND DOWELS.
6. Assemble the 'L' seal clamping ring using new lockplates and
bolts. Torque bolts to proper tightness and bend lockplate tabs to
lock the bolts (minimum two tabs per bolt).
7. If installing a new or remanufactured nozzle assembly, dimen-

sions 1N1 and 1N2 will have to be checked and recorded on In-
spection Field Report. (Refer to the Clearance Diagram in the
Reference Drawings Section in the unit service manual for speci-
fied dimensions.)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-99

) NOTE
IF DISCREPANCIES EXIST IN ANY OF THE DIMENSIONS MEASURED, CONTACT

8. Assemble two thicknesses of packing around the circumferential

of outer and inner sidewall grooves. Lengths of packing should
span approximately 180 degrees. Packing joints should not coin-
cide with joints of nozzle segments. Each of the two layers
should be staggered.
2. Reassemble the upper-half transition pieces to the upper half,

first stage nozzle (Nos. 1, 2, 8, 9 and 10). Start with the two tran-
sition pieces located just above the horizontal joint (Nos. 2 and 8)
and work up. Install side seals and new shoulder bolts. Torque
bolts to 32 to 37 foot-pounds.
with the support bracket in the compressor discharge casing bulk-
head.
4. Lightly coat the shoulder bolts with FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize

compound. Install the aft bracket shoulder bolts with new lock-
following procedure:
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-100

a. Tap the forward edge of transition piece (top, bottom left, and
tapping produces no torque change and there is no gap be-
bracket. Lock the aft bracket shoulder bolt with a new lock-
ing plate. Bend the lockplate a minimum of two tabs to lock
the shoulder bolt securely.
7.3.16 Operation 76. Install Upper-Half Inlet Casing
1. Apply RTV 102 joint sealant to the horizontal joint and FEL-
PRO C-102 anti- seize compound to the vertical joints.
2. Rig to lift inlet casing level, using chainfalls. See Fig. 7-14.
3. Using guide pins, lift into position over lower-half casing.
! WARNING
DO NOT LET UPPER-HALF CASING SWING AGAINST COMPRESSOR ROTOR

WHEN LIFTING INTO POSITION.
4. Lower the upper-half inlet onto the lower-half using the chain-
falls.
5. Coat all body-bound bolts and bolts with FEL-PRO C-102 an-
tiseize compound.
6. Install all body-bound bolts in positions marked and all bolts

hand tight.
) NOTE
BE SURE TO INSTALL THE SIX ALLEN-HEAD BOLTS (THREE ON EACH SIDE) IN

THE AIR PASSAGE OF THE INLET CASING.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-101

7. Torque the horizontal joint bolts starting at the mid-point of the

flange and working alternately to the ends on both horizontal
joints simultaneously.
8. Verify that the rack and gears have not disengaged during the dis-
assembly and reassembly operations. See Fig. 7-47.
9. Reconnect the upper and lower halves of the rack assembly.
10. Release the support screws that held the rack during assembly.
11. Remove any other blocking on the VIGV assembly.
12. Replace the rack and gear covers.
13. Install and torque actuating ring body-bound bolts, clamps and
horizontal joint bolts.
14. Release the supports and/or blocking from underneath the actuat-
ing ring.
15. Install gear covers and cover bolting.
7.3.17 Operation 77. Install Forward Compressor Casing
1. Rig to lift forward compressor casing level using chainfalls. See

Fig. 7-12.
2. Cheek all joints for cleanliness and apply Perfect Seal joint com-
pound to the horizontal joints and FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize
compound to vertical joints.
3. Place guide pins in lower casing horizontal joint flanges.
4. Use crane to position upper-half casing above lower-half casing.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-102

5. Using chainfalls, carefully lower upper-half casing into position

directly over lower-half mating flange and continue to lower onto
guide pins.
! WARNING
DO NOT LET UPPER-HALF CASING SWING AND CONTACT ANY PORTION OF

ROTOR, BLADES OR VERTICAL JOINT SURFACES.
6. Lower casing until horizontal joints are in contact.
7. Coat all body-bound bolts and bolting with FEL-PRO C-102 an-
tiseize compound.
8. Remove guide pins, install body-bound bolts and bolting hand

tight.
9. Torque the horizontal joint bolts starting at the mid-point of the

horizontal flange and work alternately to the ends on both hori-
zontal joint flanges simultaneously. See Fig. 7-48.
10. Alternately torque all the vertical joint bolts, working down each
side from the top vertical centerline.
! WARNING
USE ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND ONLY ON BOLTING IN THE COMBUSTION SYS-

TEM. DO NOT USE IT IN ANY AREAS WHERE IT COULD GET INTO THE HOT
GAS PATH.

bine casing level.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-103

) NOTE


shackle.
full length of a vertical stack.

and run it through the lift bracket welded to the transition duct.
6. Attach two cables of equal length to forward turbine casing

20-foot cable hook.
7. Attach shorter cables and 1-1/2 or 2-ton comealongs to cable

hook and to each rear-lifting trunnion on turbine casing. (Cable
hook must be kept close to turbine casing to allow sufficient lift.)
8. Lift turbine casing off its forward vertical flange and with chain-
fall and comealongs, re-position casing and set it on its horizontal
joint flange using suitable blocking to protect horizontal joint
flange.
turbine casing, compressor discharge casing and exhaust hood
casing. Coat the compressor discharge casing and exhaust hood
casing with a light film of anti-seize compound.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-104

! WARNING

WITH PULLING JOINTS TOGETHER AND ACT AS A GASKET. DO NOT GET
ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND ON OR INTO THE HOT GAS COMPONENTS.
and security of all items and ensure no foreign objects can enter
ter of gravity, which is 15.14 inches from the aft flange.
) NOTE
12. Install a tag line on the turbine casing and lift the casing over the
turbine. Using the rigging and tag line, lower and guide the cas-
ing as close to position as possible over the lower-half turbine
casing.
13. With the casing centered over the turbine, attach the snatch block
chainfall.
) NOTE
ROD 30 INCHES LONG MACHINED .010 INCHES LOOSE TO FIT THE BODYBOUND
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-105

! WARNING
DO NOT ALLOW THE TURBINE CASING TO SWING AND HIT THE TURBINE
BUCKETS WHILE IT IS BEING LOWERED INTO POSITION.
) NOTE
MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE UPPER- AND LOWER-HALF TURBINE NOZZLE SEG-
necessary.
for a distance of one inch on both sides of the four-way joint. Do
) NOTE
BEFORE INSTALLING.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-106

1. Install all bolts and hand-tighten, including body-bound bolts.
3. Alternately tighten and torque all the vertical bolts, working

down each side from the top vertical centerline. Work both the
aft and forward flanges simultaneously.
) NOTE

PLACE THE HORIZONTAL JOINT BOLTS. TIGHTEN AND TORQUE THE BOLTS.
4. On turbine with borescope access ports, reinstall the borescope

areas.
7.3.20 Operation 80. Install Upper-Half First-Stage Nozzle Eccentric

Pin
1. An eccentric pin is to be fitted to the first-stage nozzle after noz-

zle has been installed and properly positioned. If the nozzle was
not replaced and no adjustments were made to achieve proper
clearance, the eccentric pin should seat properly without any ad-
justments. However, if the nozzle was replaced or adjusted, the
following procedure is to be used:
a. Cut the old retaining strap from top of eccentric pin heads
and grind both surfaces smooth.
b. Install eccentric pins into casing to their full-depth carefully

so as not to disturb the lateral centering of the nozzle.
d. Coat top and sides of retaining straps with Dykem Blue.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-107

e. Place straps, coated side up, on top of eccentric pins and bolt
up with the two bolting strap bolts.
) NOTE

THREADS.
f. Scribe a mark on pin heads along both retaining strap sides.
g. Scribe two transverse marks across tops and down sides of

retaining strap and continuing across head of pin.
h. Remove retaining strap bolts, strap, and eccentric pin.
i. Hold pin in a vice, reposition strap on pin head aligning

scribe marks, and weld strap to pin head.
j. Lightly coat eccentric pin with FEL-PRO C- 102 anti-seize

compound and reinstall it in the casing.
k. Install retaining strap bolts and tighten properly.
7.3.21 Operation 81. Install Exhaust Hood & Bolts
1. Check the horizontal and vertical joint flanges for cleanliness.
2. Assemble new gaskets to the horizontal joint flanges.
3. Rig to lower the exhaust hood, using chainfalls and carefully

lower into position, checking to see that it is fitting over the No. 2
bearing air baffle correctly.
4. Apply FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound to bolts. Install

bolts and torque to proper tightness.
5. Install horizontal joint insulation shields, and bolt in place. In-

stall bolts and torque to proper tightness.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-108

7.3.22 Operation 82. Install Upper-Half Inlet Plenum
1. Rig inlet plenum to lift using chainfalls.
2. Apply RTV 102 joint compound, assemble new gaskets to mating

flanges.
3. Lift upper-half inlet plenum into position over lower-half and

lower to within six inches with the crane.
) NOTE
EXERCISE CARE TO PREVENT THE PLENUM FROM SWINGING AND DAMAGING

THE MATING FLANGE SURFACES.
4. Lower the plenum into final position using the chainfalls.
5. Apply FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound to the bolting and

install the horizontal and vertical bolts.
6. Reinstall the space heaters, conduit, wiring, and piping on the

inlet compartment wall.
7.3.23 Operation 83. Remove Mechanical Support Jacks From Under-

neath Unit Casings
! WARNING

PER CASINGS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED AND ALL BOLTS TORQUED.
Attach dial indicators to turbine enclosure frame and set to indi-
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-109

2. Release support jacks, and observe whether turbine casing has

lowered.
3. If turbine casing moved downward when support jacks were re-

leased, remove support jacks and shim supports from under tur-
bine.
4. If turbine casing did not move downward when jacks were re-
leased, proceed as follows:
a. Enter exhaust plenum area and mount dial indicator fixture

and dial indicator to second-stage turbine buckets as de-
scribed in Operation 12 of this major inspection instruction.
b. Check second-stage turbine bucket to second-stage turbine

shrouds runout per Operation 12 of this major inspection in-
struction.
c. If runout taken between bucket and shrouds is greater than

.040 FIR, this runout should be analyzed along with original
second-stage shroud runout and second-stage bucket half cas-
ing clearance checks to see if turbine casing should be
rounded out.
) NOTE
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT YOU CONTACT YOUR NUOVO PIGNONE FIELD SER-

VICE REPRESENTATIVE FOR AID IN DETERMINING IF ROUNDING OUT TURBINE
CASING IS NECESSARY AND TO ASSIST IN THE OPERATION IF NEEDED.
d. If rounding out turbine casino is required due to under mini-

mum drawing clearances, the following procedure should be
followed:
1. Re-establish the jack under the exhaust hood to turbine

casing vertical flange.
2. Release turbine support feet bolting approximately two

turns.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-110

3. Release, by one turn, all vertical joint bolts on turbine

casing to exhaust hood vertical flange, upper-half sec-
tion.
4. Release by half a turn, five bolts on each side counting

from horizontal joint of same flange, lower half.
5. Actuate jack to raise turbine until shim packs under sup-

port feet can be disturbed, indicating that load is being
carried by jack.
6. Retorque turbine casing horizontal joint bolts.
7. Torque all vertical joint bolting, starting at top vertical

centerline, working down both sides simultaneously.
8. Release support jack and allow turbine to set on its sup-

ports.
9. Retorque support hold down bolts.
10. Recheck second-stage bucket to turbine shroud runouts.
7.3.24 Operation 84. Recheck Accessory Gear To Turbine Alignment
1. Recheck turbine to accessory gear alignment and compare to the

alignment readings taken at disassembly.
2. Refer to disassembly Operation No. 10, step 8, of this major in-

spection procedure for instructions.
3. Record final alignment readings on Inspection Field Report.
7.3.25 Operation 85. Install Accessory Coupling
1. Rig the coupling using nylon webbing slings and a chainfall on

the crane hook. Lift into position making sure that the coupling
assembly is properly oriented end for end, and that the hub-to
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-111

sleeve, sleeve-to-turbine shaft and the coupling sleeve-to-

accessory gear shaft matchmarks are all aligned.
) NOTE
COUPLING FACES MUST BE CLEAN AND FREE OF BURRS. WHERE APPLICABLE,

'O' RINGS SHOULD BE REPLACED WHEN REASSEMBLING COUPLINGS.
2. Grease packed couplings:
) NOTE
HAND-PACK THE HUB AND SLEEVE GEAR TEETH WITH GREASE. ANY GREASE
LEFT OVER (FROM THE SPECIFIED AMOUNT) AFTER PACKING THE GEAR TEETH
SHOULD BE PACKED BETWEEN THE HUB FACES NEAR THE AXIAL CENTERLINE.
IT WILL BE FORCED INTO THE GEAR TEETH BY CENTRIFUGAL FORCE ONCE
THE SHAFT HAS BEEN OPERATED AT FULL SPEED.
! WARNING
DO NOT USE MORE THAN THE SPECIFIED AMOUNT OF GREASE AT EACH

END OF THE COUPLING SHAFT. CENTRIFUGAL FORCE EXERTED DURING
OPERATION WILL FORCE THE EXCESS GREASE OUT PAST THE GREASE
SEALS.
a. Lightly coat all seals prior to assembly.
b. Coat the coupling bolts with FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize com-

pound. Install the coupling bolts and nuts in the same posi-
tion as originally found. Tighten the nuts lightly around the
coupling. Final torquing should be done two nuts at a time,
then torque two nuts 180 degrees opposite. After all nuts
have been torqued, they should be rechecked. Coupling bolts
and nuts should be torqued to 129 to 147 foot-pounds. See
Fig. 7-49.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-112

c. Set up dial indicators and recheck the coupling end float and
radial clearance. End float should be .380 to .90 inch and ra-
dial clearance should be .005 inch or less. Record final read-
ings on Inspection Field Report.
3. Oil-filled couplings:
a. Lubricate all seals with coupling oil prior to assembly of cou-

pling.
b. Lubricate coupling bolts with FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize

compound. Install the coupling bolts and nuts in the same
position as originally found.
Tighten the nuts lightly around the coupling. Final torquing

should be done two nuts at a time, then torque two nuts 180
degrees opposite. After all nuts have been torqued, they
should be rechecked.
Coupling bolts (nuts) should be torqued to 129 to 147 foot-

pounds. See Fig. 7-49.
c. Set up dial indicators and recheck coupling end float and ra-
dial clearance. End float should be .880 to .644 inch and ra-
dial clearance should be .005 inch or less. Record final read-
ings on Inspection Field Report.
d. Remove both of the fill plugs from each end of the coupling.
Rotate the coupling shaft so that the open fill hole is oriented
45 degrees above the horizontal and the drain hole is 45 de-
grees below horizontal. Fill each end of the coupling until
overflow occurs through the drain hole with lubricant. Install
the fill and drain plugs. See Fig. 7-50.
) NOTE
THE OIL SHOULD BE HEATED TO APPROXIMATELY 100'F BEFORE POURING IT

INTO THE COUPLING FILL HOLE.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-113

4. Continuous lubricated couplings:
a. Lubricate coupling bolts with FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize

compound. Install coupling bolts and nuts in same position
as originally found. Tighten nuts lightly around coupling.
Final torque should be done two nuts at a time, then torque
two nuts 180 degrees opposite. After all nuts have been
torqued, they should be rechecked. Coupling bolts (nuts)
should be torqued to 129 to 147 foot-pounds. See Fig. 7-49.
b. Set up dial indicators and recheck coupling end float and ra-
dial clearance. End float should be .870.870-.660 inch and
radial clearance should be .005 inch or less. Record final
readings on Inspection Field Report.
7.3.26 Operation 86. Take Final Rotor Positioning Checks
) NOTE
ALL ROTOR POSITIONING CHECKS SHOULD BE SUBMITTED TO YOUR NUOVO

PIGNONE COMPANY FIELD SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE FOR EVALUATION. ALL
FINAL READINGS MUST BE WITHIN TOLERANCES AS SPECIFIED ON THE CLEAR-
ANCE DIAGRAM IN THE REFERENCE DRAWING SECTION OF THE SERVICE MAN-
UAL.
1. Refer to Operation 12 of this major inspection procedure for rotor

positioning checks.
2. Record final compressor and turbine rotor position on Inspection

Field Report.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-114

7.3.27 Operation 87. Install Exhaust Turning Vanes
) NOTE
ROTOR POSITIONING CHECKS ON THE SECOND-STAGE TURBINE BUCKETS

SHOULD BE COMPLETED AND ACCEPTABLE BEFORE REINSTALLING THE EX-
HAUST TURNING VANES.
1. Place new gaskets on forward faces of vertical flange joint.
2. Place long choker around middle of turning vane section, new

balance point and lift clear of temporary support blocks. Remove
support blocks.
3. Remove temporary tieback lines used to tie turning vane section

to aft exhaust plenum roof.
4. Carefully move exhaust turning vane section forward to mate

with vertical joint flanges.
5. Apply FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound to all bolts. Install

bolts and torque to proper tightness.
6. Remove oil feed and drain piping protective cover. Install all
vertical and horizontal feed and drain pipes and dresser cou-
plings.
! WARNING
REWELD LOCK TABS ON OIL FEED LINE UNION CONNECTIONS BEFORE

MAKING UP THE DRESSER COUPLING. TAKE PROPER PRECAUTIONS TO AS-
SURE THAT WELD SLAG DOES NOT ENTER OIL PIPING WHEN WELDING
LOCK TABS ONTO THE UNIONS.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-115

7.3.28 Operation 88. Assemble Exhaust Plenum Aft Flex Seals
1. Check to see that the joint seal faces and grooves have been
cleaned.
2. Apply FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound to bolts.
3. Assemble flex seals and gaskets in place and install bolting. See
Fig. 7-51.
) NOTE
STAGGER THE GASKET JOINTS SO THAT THEY DO NOT COINCIDE WITH FLEX
SEAL PLATE JOINTS.
4. Torque all bolts to proper tightness.
7.3.29 Operation 89. Assemble Exhaust Plenum Forward Flex Seals
) NOTE
ON SOME EARLIER MODEL TURBINES, THE ONE FLEX SEAL LOCATED AT AP-
PROXIMATELY 10 O'CLOCK POSITION HAS PIPING WELDED TO IT. INSTALL THE
FLEX SEAL AND PIPING AND RECONNECT THE PIPING FLANGE TO THE MATING
FLANGE INSIDE THE EXHAUST PLENUM.
1. Check to see that the joint seal faces and grooves have been
cleaned.
2. Apply FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound to bolts.
3. Assemble flex seals and gaskets in place and install bolting.
) NOTE
STAGGER THE GASKET JOINTS SO THAT THEY DO NOT COINCIDE WITH FLEX
SEAL PLATE JOINTS.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-116

4. Torque all bolts to proper tightness.
7.3.30 Operation 90. Install Outer Combustion Casings 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,

9 & 10
1. Starting with No. 5 combustion casing, position new gasket to the

compressor discharge casing mounting flange.
) NOTE
A FEW DABS OF SEMI-PASTE SCALING COMPOUND APPLIED TO THE GASKET

WILL HOLD IT IN POSITION DURING ASSEMBLY OF THE OUTER COMBUSTION
CASING.
2. Rig the casing and lift into position. Coat bolts with FEL-PRO
C102 anti-seize compound and install bolts.
3. Torque bolts 180 degrees apart and work around bolt circle in
this manner.
4. Install new gasket into No. 4 combustion casing position.
5. Rig and lift into position. Coat bolts with FEL-PRO C-102 an-
tiseize compound and install bolts.
6. Install new crossfire tube flange gasket.
7. Coat crossfire tube flange bolts with FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize

compound and install bolts.
8. Torque the outer combustion casing and crossfire tube flange

bolts simultaneously. Torque the bolts 180 degrees apart and
work around the bolt circles in this manner.
9. Repeat steps 4 through 8 for Combustion Casings 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 1,

9 and 10.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-117

7.3.31 Operation 91. Perform Combustion Inspection Reassembly Op-

erations Nos. 22 Through 31
) NOTE
REFER TO SECTION 5, COMBUSTION INSPECTION, IN THIS INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FOR THE FOLLOWING REASSEMBLY OPERATIONS.
1. Install combustion liners and crossfire tubes.
2. Install flame detectors and spark plugs.
3. Install combustion casing covers.
4. Install fuel nozzles.
5. Install fuel check valves.
6. Install atomizing air manifold.
7. Install fuel gas manifold.
8. Install liquid fuel lines.
9. Install atomizing air lines to fuel nozzles.
10. Install gas lines to fuel nozzles.
7.3.32 Operation 92. Install Cooling & Scaling Air Piping
2. Assemble all 4th and 10th stage piping removed being careful to
replace all orifices in their location from which they were re-
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-118

) NOTE
IN THE EVENT THAT HE LOCATION IDENTIFICATION OF THE ORIFICES IS LOST,

REFER TO THE COOLING AND SEALING AIR PIPING DIAGRAM IN THE REFER-
ENCE DRAWING SECTION OF THE SERVICE MANUAL FOR THE LOCATION AND
SIZE OF ORIFICE REQUIRED.
3. Reconnect the (20CB) tubing air lines to the bleed valve actuator
cylinders. Reinstall the 'U' brackets and clamping rings to both
valves.
7.3.33 Operation 93. Check Turbine To Load Gear Alignment
1. Recheck turbine to load gear alignment and compare to the align-

ment readings taken at disassembly.
2. Refer to disassembly operation No. 5, step 9, of this major in-

spection procedure for instructions.
3. Record final alignment readings on Inspection Field Report.
7.3.34 Operation 94. Install Load Coupling
1. Rig the load coupling using a nylon webbing choker placed

evenly to balance the coupling. Using a chainfall, attach to the
lifting means.
) NOTE
MAKE SURE THE COUPLING SLEEVES ARE PROPERLY ORIENTED ON THE COU-
PLING SHAFT BY ALIGNING THE MATCHMARKS AND THE COUPLING EXPANSION
JOINT IS IN PLACE OVER THE COUPLING BEFORE MOVING THE COUPLING INTO
PLACE.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-119

2. Move the coupling as close to its final position as possible and

rerig as necessary using chainfalls and nylon webbing chokers to
move the coupling into final position.
! WARNING
USE EXTREME CARE WHEN MOVING THE COUPLING INTO POSITION. DO

NOT BUMP THE COUPLING FLANGE FACES.
3. Align the turbine coupling flange matchmarks to the coupling

sleeve matchmarks and the load gear coupling flange matchmarks
to the coupling sleeve matchmarks.
) NOTE
APPLY A LIGHT COAT OF FEL-PRO C-102 ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND TO THE RAB-

BET FITS OF THE COUPLING FLANGES.
4. Apply FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound to the coupling

bolts and nut threads and install bolts back into their original po-
sitions.
5. Tighten all bolts and nuts lightly before final torquing.
! WARNING
THE TORQUING PROCEDURE IS CRITICAL AND SHOULD BE DONE CARE-

FULLY AND ACCURATELY.
6. Final torque two nuts at a time, then torque two nuts 180 degrees
opposite.
7. Torque the nuts to the specified values called for in the Instruc-
tion and Data, Alignment Field Drawing in the Reference Draw-
ing Section of the service manual. After all nuts have been
torqued they should be rechecked.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-120

8. Check the coupling end float. End float should be l 3 to .062

inch. Record final reading on Inspection Field Report.
7.3.35 Operation 95. Install Load Coupling Guard
1. Check that all flange and joint faces have been cleaned.
2. Apply Instant Seal Loctite joint compound to flange and joint

faces and FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound to all bolting.
) NOTE
IF GASKETS ARE USED AT THE LOAD GEAR AND TURBINE END, THEY SHOULD
BE NEW GASKETS. ALSO, THE SPLIT ON THE GASKET MUST BE AS CLOSE TO THE
TOP OF THE GUARD AS POSSIBLE.
3. Install No. 2 bearing housing aft cover, expansion joint, lower-

half coupling guard.
4. Reconnect oil feed spray nozzles and adjust the spray nozzles.
See Fig. 7-52.
! WARNING
THE OIL SPRAY PATTERN MUST BE OBSERVED AND ADJUSTED IF NECES-

SARY BEFORE INSTALLING UPPER HALF COUPLING GUARD.
5. Install upper-half coupling guard and bolt the horizontal and ver-
tical flanges.
6. Torque all bolts to proper tightness in proper sequence by alter-

nately tightening diametrically opposite bolts.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-121

7.3.36 Operation 96. Install Accessory Coupling Guard
1. Check that all flange and joint faces have been cleaned.
2. Apply Instant Seal Loctite joint compound to flange and joint

faces and FEL-PRO C-102 anti-seize compound to all bolting.
) NOTE
IF GASKETS ARE USED ON THE ACCESSORY GEAR AND TURBINE END, THEY
SHOULD BE NEW GASKETS AND THE SPLIT ON THE GASKET MUST BE AS CLOSE
TO THE TOP OF THE GUARD AS POSSIBLE.
3. For installation of coupling guards with oil or grease-filled cou-

plings, proceed as follows:
a. Lift the aft guard into position and bolt loosely to the No. 1
bearing housing.
b. Lift the forward guard into position and bolt loosely to the
accessory gear housing.
c. Align as necessary and torque all bolts.
4. For installation of coupling guards with continuous oil spray lu-

brication, proceed as follows:
a. Install the vertical flange bolts in the expansion joint at the

accessory gear housing. Do not tighten.
b. Lift the lower-half coupling guard into position and bolt to

the expansion joint and No. 1 bearing housing.
c. Reconnect the oil feed spray nozzles and adjust the spray
nozzles. See Fig. 7-52.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-122

! WARNING
THE OIL SPRAY PATTERN MUST BE OBSERVED AND ADJUSTED AS NECES-

SARY BEFORE INSTALLING UPPER-HALF COUPLING GUARD.
d. Install upper-half coupling guard and bolt the horizontal and

vertical flanges.
e. Torque all bolts in proper sequence by alternately tightening

diametrically opposite bolts.

) NOTE

12 IN THE SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE.
Some field upgrade units have these thermocouples located in

Segments 2 and 5. There are two thermocouples per segment.

Parts List and Drawings Volume of this service manual for de-
tails if needed.

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-123

) NOTE

PLE IS STAMPED ON THE TURBINE EASING ADJACENT TO THE THERMOCOUPLE
TUBING INSULATION HOLE.
This dimension may be used for reference when installing the

thermocouples. The reference dimension is from the top
swagelok ferrell to the tip of the thermocouple.


) NOTE
INSTALLED USING DOUBLER PLATES AND NUTS AND BOLTS TO FACILITATE FU-

5. Apply FEL-PRO C-102 anti seize compound to all bolts and in-
stall.
6. Install all wiring and conduit, piping brackets etc., removed at

disassembly.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-124

7.3.39 Operation 99. Clean-up, Visual Inspection, Prestart/Startup

Checks
1. Clean up all fuel oil, lube oil and water spills.
b. Check that all removed conduit has been replaced and elec-
trical connections made. Confirm function of all devices
reinstalled.
c. Correct any lube, fuel and water leaks observed.
d. Inspect inlet and exhaust plenums, and secure shut.

arm the Halon 1301 system.
b. Check operation of the cooldown/emergency lube oil pump.

drains.
e. Block out excitation and generator breaker equipment.
f. Place unit on ratchet and observe for leak, rubs and control
deficiencies.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-125

g. Check to ensure fuel pump is primed.
h. Check atomizing air compressor (if applicable).
a. Observe pickup RPM of speed sensors versus time.
c. Observe and record vibration channel outputs.
g. Check temperature of lube oil in bearing drains or at the bear-

ing header and tank.
h. Observe all panel pressure gauge readings for abnormalities.
i. Trip unit using the emergency trip and listen for abnormal
coastdown.
j. Observe proper dropout RPM of speed sensors.
6. Initiate a start, and perform the following zero to full speed, no

load checks:
a. Observe applicable firing check parameters, spark plugs,

flame detectors, relay sequences, exhaust temperature, vibra-
tion and speed.
b. Observe and record acceleration rates.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-126

c. Record full set of vibration readings.
d. Observe and record temperature suppression setpoint.
e. Note and record pickup time of all appropriate electrical

speed relays.
f. Adjust full-speed, no-load RPM to specifications.
g. Check digital setpoint.
h. Take a complete set of running data. See Running Inspec-

tions, Section 4, in this maintenance instruction.
i. Check for air, oil, fuel, gas and water leaks.
b. Check for air, oil, fuel, gas and water leaks.
8. Observe normal unloading and shutdown as follows:
a. Note and record coastdown time.
b. Listen for abnormal noises from gas turbine and associated

equipment during coastdown.
c. Observe unit vibration readings during coastdown.
d. Complete preparation of all inspection, startup and operating

data reports.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-127

Fig. 7-1 - JACKBOLT FABRICATION FOR COUPLING

GUARD EXPANSION JOINT
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-128

Fig. 7-2 - ROTOR TURNING FIXTURE (TYPICAL)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-129

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-130

Fig. 7-4 - TYPICAL DIAL INDICATORS SETUP TO TAKE RADIAL

CLEARANCES & MATCHMARKING COUPLINGS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-131

Fig. 7-5 - TYPICAL ALIGNMENT FIXTURE & DIAL INDICATORS

SETUP FOR ALIGNMENT CHECKS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-132

Fig. 7-6 - LOCATION FOR MECHANICAL SCREW JACKS

UNDER CASING
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-133

Fig. 7-7 - TYPICAL SCREW JACK RESTING

ON SUPPORT BLOCK
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-134

Fig. 7-8 - VIGV RING SUPPORT BOLTS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-135

Fig. 7-9 - RIGGING TO REMOVE EXHAUST FRAME UPPER HALF

(2,900 POUNDS)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-136

Fig. 7-10 - TRANSITION PIECE & FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE

ARRANGEMENT
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-137

Fig. 7-11 - ALLEN-HEAD BOLTS IN INNER-COMPRESSOR

DISCHARGE CASING
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-138

Fig. 7-12 - CABLE RIGGING TO LIFT FORWARD COMPRESSOR CASING
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-139

COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE CASING & AFT COMP CASING

UPPER-HALF 5420 LBS
NOTE: CABLES MUST NOT RIDE ON COMBUSTION CHAMBERS WHEN LIFTING
Fig. 7-13 - CABLE RIGGING FOR UPPER HALF COMPRESSOR

DISCHARGE CASING & AFT COMPRESSOR
LIFTED AS ONE UNIT
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-140

Fig. 7-14 - LIFTING ARRANGEMENT FOR INLET CASING
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-141

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-142

Fig. 7-16 - FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE AND SHROUD WEDGED IN

DIRECTION OF GAS FLOW FOR CLEARANCE CHECKS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-143

Fig. 7-17 - TYPICAL SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE & DIAPHRAGM WEDGED

IN DIRECTION OF GAS FLOW FOR CLEARANCE CHECKS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-144

Fig. 7-18 - FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE CLAMPS

& SUPPORT ARRANGEMENT
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-145

Fig. 7-19 - REMOVAL LOWER-HALF FIRST-STAGE NOZZLE
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-146

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-147

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-148

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-149

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-150

Fig. 7-24 - SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE SEGMENTS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-151

Fig. 7-25 - REMOVAL OF SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE

& DIAPHRAGM ASSEMBLY
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-152

Fig. 7-26 - IDENTIFICATION OF WHEEL & DOVETAIL POST PRIOR

TO DISASSEMBLY
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-153

Fig. 7-27 - TWIST LOCKS IN BOTH LOCKED & UNLOCKED POSITIONS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-154

Fig. 7-28 - CABLE LIFTING ARRANGEMENT No. 1

BEARING HOUSING UPPER HALF
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-155

Fig. 7-29 - REMOVAL OF THRUST BEARING AND PADS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-156

Fig. 7-30 - TYPICAL SHAFT JACK FOR REMOVAL

OF LOWER-HALF BEARING LINER
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-157

Fig. 7-31 - MEASURING DIAMETER OF No. 1 BEARING
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-158

Fig. 7-32 - TYPICAL COMPRESSOR BLADE SHOWING

AREAS OF DAMAGE
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-159

Fig. 7-33 - DENT IN LEADING EDGE OF BLADE
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-160

Fig. 7-34 - DENT IN TRAILING EDGE OF BLADE
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-161

Fig. 7-35 - COLD STRAIGHTENING OF TIP DAMAGE
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-162

Fig. 7-36 - ROTOR LIFT AND LAYDOWN PLANES
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-163

Fig. 7-37 - WEIGHT & CENTER OF GRAVITY MS-5001/P/AT ROTOR
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-164

Fig. 7-38 - MISSING METAL NO REPAIR CRITERIA FOR

FIRST-STAGE BUCKET
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-165

A. 0.250” DEEP AREA, AROUND ENTIRE AIRFOIL TIP, IS SAFE FOR WELD
REPAIR.
B. WITH EXCEPTION OF THE SHADED AREAS SHOWN ABOVE, LIMITED

AREAS AROUND AIRFOIL CAN BE WELD-REPAIRED TO 0.375" DEPTH.
C. MAXIMUM SAFE WELD REPAIR LIMIT AT THE PLANE, CROSSING THE

JUNCTION TO HOLLOW & SOLID PORTIONS OF THE TRAILING EDGE, IS
0,250" DEEP.
D. RADIAL CRACK, EXTENDING MORE THAN 0.375" BUT LESS THAN 0.750”,
CAN BE WELD-REPAIRED.
Fig. 7-39 - WELD REPAIR CRITERIA FIRST-STAGE BUCKET
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-166

Fig. 7-40 - REPAIR DIMENSION CRITERIA SECOND-STAGE

SHROUDED TIP BUCKET
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-167

Fig. 7-41 - SHROUD TIP REWORK LIMITS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-168

Fig. 7-42 - FIRST- & SECOND-STAGE SHROUD SEGMENTS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-169

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-170

Fig. 7-44 - TWIST LOCKS IN LOCKED & UNLOCKED POSITIONS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-171

Fig. 7-45 - SHROUDS ASSEMBLED IN TURBINE CASING
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-172

Fig. 7-46 - SECOND-STAGE NOZZLE SEALS & RADIAL

RETAINING PINS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-173

Fig. 7-47 - INLET GUIDE VANE GEARS ALIGNED TO GEAR RACK
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-174

Fig. 7-48 - BOLT TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-175


FOR COUPLING BOLTS
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-176

Fig. 7-50 - ORIENTATION OF COUPLING

FOR ADDING LUBRICANT
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-177

Fig. 7-51 - EXHAUST AFT FLEX SEAL INSTALLATION DETAIL
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-178

Fig. 7-52 - PROPER ADJUSTMENT OF OIL SPRAY NOZZLES

AT COUPLING
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 7-179

Auxiliary and Controls Systems Maintenance Section 8
AUXILIARY & CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS SECT
GENERAL 8.1
PERIODIC INSPECTION SCHEDULE 8.2
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 8.3
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

8. AUXILIARY AND CONTROLS SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE
8.1 GENERAL
The maintenance procedures recommended in this section apply to a typical

package power plant installation and do not pertain to any particular plant
equipment model.
This section is subdivided into two subsections: the Periodic Inspection

Schedule followed by Inspection and Maintenance Procedures. Although
the subjects in each follow the same general order, not every item listed in
the Inspection Schedule is mentioned in the Maintenance Procedures. Only
those items which require special care, or which are not covered by manu-
facturer's instructions, are covered in the text portion.
Standard maintenance items, such as gauges, switches, valves, filters, etc.,

have been grouped under one heading in each subsection. Following this,
the items have been grouped by system and major equipment categories.
In the Periodic Inspection Schedule, the "Inspect" column lists all the sys-
tems, components and devices on the gas turbine and generator that require
inspection. In the "What to Inspect For" column, particular points of each
item of inspection are listed as possible defective conditions that should be
looked for and corrected.
For temperature and pressure settings, flow rates, calibration data, etc., plus
detailed information on the inspection and maintenance of any device listed
herein, the reader should also refer to the following documents in this Ser-
vice Manual:
1. Schematic Piping Diagram (P&ID)

2. Diagram Device Summary
3. Equipment Publications
The "Reference" column, in the Inspection Schedule, refers to those pages in

the text which provide detailed inspection information on the device, assem-
bly, or system under inspection.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-1

The "Inspection Frequencies and Turbine Status" column specifies, by

means of abbreviations, how often a device or assembly should be inspected
and whether or not the turbine can be operating at the time of inspection the
left-hand letters designate the frequency and the right specifies the turbine
status. Following is a list of abbreviations used:
D Daily Inspection
W Weekly Inspection
M Monthly Inspection
Q Quarterly Inspection
SA Semiannual Inspection
CI Combustion Inspection
A Annual Inspection
HGP Hot Gas Path Inspection
Maj Major Overhaul Inspection
Yrs Years
O Turbine Operating
S Turbine Shutdown
The recommended inspection frequencies and turbine statuses, specified in

this column, are representative of an average power plant installation and in-
clude both peaking and continuous operating stations. They are not intended
to cover all variations of equipment supplied and may depend upon station
environment. (In some cases, a shutdown may be recommended solely as a
precaution against possible injury to maintenance personnel, because the lo-
cation of the component or device is in a hazardous area).
It is our intent that these instructions, with the help of a Nuovo Pignone
Field Service Representative, be used as an aid in the preparation of an indi-
vidual maintenance program for each purchaser.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-2

8.2 PERIODIC INSPECTION SCHEDULE
INSPECTION WHAT TO INSPECT INSPECTION DOCUMENT

FOR FREQUENCY & OR PAGE
TURBINE STATUS REF.
STANDARD MAINTENANCE ITEMS
INSTRUMENTATION
Pressure Switches Damage D-O 3-31

and Gauges
Reading in Error D-O
Calibration A-S
Thermometers Damage D-O 3-31

(Dial Type)
Reading in Error D-O
Calibration A-S
Flow meter Leaking Seams & D-O 3-31

Joints
Calibration A-S
Vibration Stable Reading D-O 3-32

Detectors
Mounting Security A-S
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-3


TURBINE STATUS REF.
INSTRUMENTATION (Cont'd)
Liquid Level Reading in Error D-O 3-32

Indicators
High & Low Actuation
Point A-S
Speedtronic Damage D-O 3-32

meters
Zero Reading M-S
Calibration A-S
CONTROL DEVICES
Temperature Calibration Pickup A-S 3-33

Switches & Dropout Setting
Thermostats Calibration Setting A-S 3-33
Pressure Regulating Packing Leakage M-O 3-33

Valves (VPRs)
Incorrect Setting D-O
Temperature Regulating Packing Leakage M-O 3-34

Valves (VTRs)
Incorrect Setting D-O
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-4


TURBINE STATUS REF.
HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
Relief Valves Chattering & M-O 3-35

Leakage
Settings A-S
Solenoid Valves Leakage M-O 3-36
Improper Operation A-S
Orifices Erosion or Corrosion A-S 3-36
Plugging, Orifice
Deterioration A-S
Sharp Edges or
Irregular Chamfer A-S
Check Valves Leakage SA-S 3-36
Corrosion 3 Yrs. S
Strainers, Dirt, Scale SA-S

Gas/Liquid
Filters, Lube 1.5 barg D-O 3-36

& Fuel (22 psi) Maximum ∆P
Leaking Seams & Joints M-O 3-37
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-5


TURBINE STATUS REF.
HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
Filters, Lube Dirty Element SA-S or 3-37

& Fuel As Required
Hydraulic Supply 5 barg D-O 3-38

Filter (72 psi) Maximum ∆P
Leaking Seams & Joints M-O
Dirty Element SA-S
Air Filters Moisture Accumulation. M-O 3-38

(Air Extraction Valve)
Dirty Filter SA-S
HEATING COOLING & VENTILATION (If used)
Air Conditioners Dirty Filter W-O/S 3-39
Improper Thermostat W-O/S

Setting
Dirty Condenser Coil A-O/S
Space heaters Improper Operation A-O 3-39
Dirty Heating Elements,

Blades & Louvers A-S
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-6


TURBINE STATUS REF.
HEATING, COOLING & VENTILATION
Space Heaters Improper Thermostat A-O 3-39

Setting
Accessory & Turbine Excessive Fan Wheel A-S 3-39

Compartment Vent Fans Wear
Vibration A-O
Cleanliness A-S
Mounting Security A-S

of Hardware etc.
MOTORS, MOTORS & PUMP COUPLINGS
Motors Excessive Vibration A-O 3-39
Dirty Louvers & Screens A-O 3-40
Loose Mounting Bolts & A-S

Electrical Connections
Dirty Windings, Collec- A-S

tor
Rings, Commutator, A-S
Brush
Rigging A-S
Brush Condition A-S
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-7


TURBINE STATUS REF.
MOTORS, MOTOR & PUMP COUPLINGS
Motor & pump Loose Belts & A-S 3-40

couplings Grease Plugs
Evidence of Wear A-S
SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE ITEMS
LUBE SYSTEM
Lube Oil Pumps Excessive Noise M-O 3-40
Wearing Clearance MAJ-S
Thrust Bearing Wear MAJ-S
Bearing Seal Wear MAJ-S
Lube Oil Tank Peeling Paint A-S 3-41
Loose Hardware Fittings MAJ-S

on Internal piping &
Tubing
Loose or Missing MAJ-S

Hardware on Pipe
Hangers & Clumps
Loose Hardware at MAJ-S

Pump
Intakes
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-8


TURBINE STATUS REF.
SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Lube Oil Tank Presence of Sludge & MAJ-S 3-41

Unusual Foreign Matter
in Bottom of Tank
Lube Oil Properties Irregular Physical M-S/O 3-41

Properties of Lubricant
Sample Taken From
Tanks and Presence Of
Contaminants
FUEL GAS SYSTEM
Fuel Gas Stop Ratio Gas Leakage At Stem, M-O 3-41

& Control Valve Packing Leak-Off Or
Vent
Hydraulic Cylinder Rod M-O

Seal Leakage
Rough Operation SA-S
Improper Operation Of SA-S

Trip Relay
Damage Control MAJ-S

Surfaces Of Valve
Plug & Seat
Trip Action with Loss of SA-S

Hydraulic Trip Oil
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-9


TURBINE STATUS REF.
LIQUID FUEL FORWARDING SYSTEM (If used)
Centrifugal Pump Improper Discharge M-O

Pressure
Unusual or Excessive M-O

Noise
Bound or Rubbing M-O

Shaft
Excessive Vibration M-O

Loose Shaft Fit
Oil Leakage at M-O

Casing Joint
Dirty Internal Seal A-S

Oil Line & Fittings
Fuel Oil Heater & Defective Circuitry A-O

Temperature Switches
(23FH-26FH) Defective Heating
Element A-O
Improper Fuel Oil

Temperature Switch
Setting A-O
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-10


TURBINE STATUS REF.
LIQUID FUEL FORWARDING SYSTEM (If used)
Fuel Forwarding Excessive Vibration M-O

Pipe
Leaking Pipes &
Joints M-O
Broken Supports M-O
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
Fuel Oil Stop Valve External Leaks D-O 3-42
Rough Operation SA-O
Sluggish Movement SA-S

Open/Close
Trip Action with SA-S

Loss of Hydraulic
Trip Oil
Main Fuel Pump Leaking Shaft 3-42

Seal
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-11


TURBINE STATUS REF.
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
Flow Divider Leakage, Abnormal M-O 3-43

Noise
Discharge Pressure D-O

Differential
Speed Pickups A-O

Secure
Fuel Nozzle Selector Improper Stem M-O 3-43

Valve Operation
Leakage at M-O
Connections
False Start Incorrect Sequencing A-O 3-43

Drain Valve During Startup &
Shutdown
Improper Operation A-O

of Valve Actuator
Air & Oil Leaks D-O
Worn Diaphragm in A-S

Valve Actuator
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-12


TURBINE STATUS REF.
SPEEDTRONIC
Control Loop Flow Unstable D-O Control Specs.,

Hot Starts, control system
Over-temperature adjustment &
control Specs.
Calibration FSR A-S Operating

instructions &
Versus Fuel Flow sequences
LVDT’s
SA-S
Electronic Trip
Actuation of 20FL
SA-S
Check 20FL for Proper
Null Bias
FVDT Feedback at A-O

Firing Speed Versus
FSR
FUEL GAS SYSTEM
Fuel Gas Stop Ratio Gas Leakage at Stem, M-O 3-41

& Control Valve Packing Leak Off or
Vent
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-13


TURBINE STATUS REF.
SPEEDTRONIC
Control Loop Valve Unstable, Slow D-O Control

movement, stroke out Specifications,
of Specification, P2 in Control System
error Adjustments and
Control
Specifications,
Calibration, FSR (Fuel Operating

Stroke Reference) Instructions and
Sequence
Gas Control Valve A-S
Speed Versus P2 Speed A-S

Ratio Valve, P2 Trans-
ducer calibration
LVDTs Calibration A-S
Electronic Trip Action SA-S

of
20FG
Check 20FG for Proper SA-S

Null Bias
HIGH PRESSURE CONTROL OIL SYSTEM HYDRAULIC SUPPLY
Main hydraulic Excessive Vibration or M-O 3-43

supply pump Unusual Noise
(Shaft-Driven) Improper Discharge
Pressure D-O
Relief Valve Leaking A-O
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-14


TURBINE STATUS REF.
HIGH PRESSURE CONTROL OIL SYSTEM HYDRAULIC SUPPLY (Cont'd)
Main hydraulic Leakage at Shaft & M-O 3-43

supply pump Mounting Flanges
Auxiliary Hydraulic Low Discharge Pressure A-S 3-44

Supply Pump Leakage Around Shaft
&
(If Used) Mounting Flanges M-O
Excessive Vibration or M-O

Unusual Noise
Hydraulic Supply Connections Loose or A-S 3-44

Manifold Leaking
Air Bleed Valves Improper Air Bleed A-S 3-44

Valve
Operation
Hydraulic System Leaking Pipe

Piping Connections
(Regenerator Unit) A-S
(All Other Units) HGP-S
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-15


TURBINE STATUS REF.
INLET GUIDE VANE CONTROL SYSTEM
Operation & Inlet Guide Vanes Control

Calibration Proper Operation D-O Specifications,
control System
Adjustments and
Control
Specifications.
Calibration A-S Operating
Instructions and
90TV Trip Servovalve Sequences
for Null Bias A-S
Check Trip Action of

Inlet Guide Vanes with SA-S
Loss of Hydraulic Trip
Oil
Check Operation &

Sequencing of
Compressor
Bleed Valves SA-S
Leakage in the System M-O
COOLING AND SEALING AIR SYSTEM
Piping Orifice Plates A-S 3-45

Orifice Unions A-S
Leakage D-O
Loose Hardware,
Hangers and Clamps M-O
Vibration M-O
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-16


TURBINE STATUS REF.
COOLING AND SEALING AIR SYSTEM
Compressor Bleed 3-45
Valve Sluggish Movement

Open/Close SA-S
Leakage M-O
Compressor Discharge Calibration A-S 3-45

Pressure Transmitter
ATOMIZING AIR SYSTEM
Atomizing Air Com- Improper Absolute 3-46

pressor
(Shaft-Driven On-Base) Pressure Ratio D-O
Failing Oil Seal M-O

or
Atomizing Air Compr. Presence of Oil or

(Motor-Driven Off- Vapor at Vent D-O
Base)
Excessive Noise, A-S

Cylinder Discoloration,
Hot Spots or
Scorched Paint
Improper Startup to A-S

Main Compr. Transfer
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-17


TURBINE STATUS REF.
ATOMIZING AIR SYSTEM (Cont'd)
Starting Atomizing Air Belt Loose or Worn A-S 3-47

Compr. (On or Off
Base)
Seal Leaking A-S
Compr. Air Filter Dirty Filter M-O
Signs of Moisture D-O
Atomizing Air Air Leaks on Air Side A-O

Precooler 3-49
Water Leaks on A-O
Tube Side
Drop in Pressure A-O
Performance Reduction M-O
Scale, Sludge, A-O

Deposits
Plugging of Leaking Maj-S

Tubes
Air Separators Plugged Blowdown A-O 3-50

Lines
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-18


TURBINE STATUS REF.
STARTING SYSTEM
Starting Diesel See Maintenance 90 Starts or

Procedure in the Once a Year
Starting Equipment
Section of the Auxiliary
Service Manual
Starting Motor Presence of Dirt, Oil A-S 3-51

and Grease
Obstructed Louver A-S
Openings
Starting Turbine Refer to the Inspection,

Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
Procedures in the
Starting Equipment
Section of the Service
Manual
Starting Clutch Improper Clearance of SA-S 3-51

Clutch Jaws at Engaged
& Disengaged Positions
Improper Operation of SA-S

Limit Switch
Worn Clutch Jaws A-S
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-19


TURBINE STATUS REF.
STARTING SYSTEM
Torque Converter External Oil Leaks at D-O 3-52

Shaft Seals, Bolted
Flanges, Cover Plates
Tubing Connections Leakage, Wear, Chafing Q-O 3-52

& Hydraulic Hoses & Abrasions
Ratchet System Oil Leakage D-O 3-52

Dirt in Commutator A-S
Faulty Pump A-S
Accessory Gear Train Gears Pitted, Scored A-S 3-52

Galled
Broken Teeth & Gear Maj-S
Wear
OVERSPEED PROTECTION (MECHANICAL)
Hydraulic Trip System Improper Trip Oil M-O 3-52

Pressure
Overspeed Trip Quick Positive Trip & M-S 3-53

Assembly Smooth Reset Action
Indication of Switch M-S

Arcing
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-20


TURBINE STATUS REF.
OVERSPEED PROTECTION (MECHANICAL)
Oversp. Trip Ass. Leaking Control Oil M-S 3-53

Seal
& Flange Gasket
Overspeed Bolt Low/High Turbine Trip *A-O 3-53

Assembly Speed Not to Exceed 3-54
Normal Trip out per 3-55
Control Specification 3-56
by More than 1.0% 3-57
Quick Positive Trip *A-S

Action
Improper Clearance btw. *A-S

Trigger & Bolt with the
Overspeed Trip Assem-
bly
in the Reset Position
Severe Brinelling & *A-S

Mushrooming of the
Bolt End
* Test annually on turbines which are operated for peaking or intermittent service. On
units operating continuously, the test should be run at each scheduled shutdown, or af-
ter any major overhaul, or after an extended shutdown of more than two months (unless
otherwise specified in the unit Control Specifications in the Service Manual).
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-21


TURBINE STATUS REF.
SPEEDTRONIC CONTROL
Power Supply Improper 5,12,12,28 Control

& + 50 Voltages. Refer Specifications,
to Unit Control Control System
Specifications for Adjustments
Appropriate Voltages and Control
for
Given Unit System A-S Specifications,
Operating
Grounds D-O Instructions and
Sequences
Startup Control Loop Improper FSR D-O Control

During Startup Specifications,
Firing, Warm-up, Min. A-S Control System
and Max. FSR's Adjustments
Meet Limits of and Control
Control Specifications Specifications,
Operating
Instructions and
Sequences
Speed Sensors Speed Relays Pickup M-O Same as above

& Relays & Drop Out Properly
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-22


TURBINE STATUS REF.
SPEEDTRONIC CONTROL
Speed Sensors Speed Detection Circuits A-S Same as above

& Relays Calibrated to Control
Specifications
Speed/Load Calibrate to Control A-S Same as above

Control Loop Specifications
Temperature Control Exhaust Temperature on Control

Control Curve for W-O Specifications,
Control Specifications Control System
Excessive Spread btw. D-O Adjustments
Exhaust Thermocouples and Control
Specifications,
Excessive Wheelspace Operating
Thermocouple Temp. Instructions and
Sequences
Calibration to Control A-S
Specifications
PCD Transducer A-S

(96 CD) Calibration
Thermocouple Grounds A-S

& Open Circuits
Over-temperature Calibration of Alarm A-S Control

Protection & Trip Points to Control System Adj. Specifications,
Specifications Control system
Adjustment and
Control specific.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-23


TURBINE STATUS REF.
SPEEDTRONIC CONTROL
Thermocouple Grounds
& Open Circuits A-S
Vibration Protection Calibration of Alarm A-S Same as above

system & Trip Settings
Flame Detection & Dirty, Damaged or CI-S 3-59

Protection System Defective Scanner Lens 3-60
Control
High or Low Input Specifications,
Voltage Control
System Adj.
Loose Terminals CI-S
Improper Operation A-S

& Sequencing
Overspeed Low/High Turbine A-O 3-60

Protection (Electronic) Electronic Trip Speed Control
Not to Exceed Normal Specifications,
(Trip Out by More than Control System
1.0%) Adjustments
and Control
Calibration of Electronic A-S Specifications,
Trip System Operating
Instructions and
Improper Magnetic Sequences
Pickups
Clearance Settings A-S
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-24


TURBINE STATUS REF.
WATER INJECTION SYSTEM
Systems Maintenance Calibration A-S

Electronic Circuits Control Specs.
Calibration of A-S Water Inject.

Control Valve Circuits System Inject.
Calibration of Flow- A-S

meter Circuits
Check Flowmeter 3 yrs - S

Accuracy
Check Control Valve A-S

for Leakage
Check Stop Valve A-S

Operation
Check Stop Valve A-S

for Leakage
Check Forwarding M-O

Pump
Oil Level
Check that Water Flow D-O

is per Control Specs.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-25


TURBINE STATUS REF.
WATER INJECTION SYSTEM
Systems Maintenance Check Accumulator A-S

Precharge
Check Water Spray A-S

Nozzles for Plugging
& Spray Pattern
SPEEDTRONIC PANELS
Power Supply Corrosion or A-S 3-61

Discoloration
Due to Heat 3-62
Dirty Page Area A-S
Damaged Wiring or
Connections A-S
Dirty Circuit Boards A-S
Dirty Card Guides A-S
Cards Plugged in A-S

Properly
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-26


TURBINE STATUS REF.
SPEEDTRONIC PANELS
Relay Contacts Contacts Dirty or Worn A-S 3-63
Reduced Contact A-S 3-64

Pressure
Deformed Contacts A-S
Contacts arcing A-S

Excessively
Speedtronic Control Panels Dirty, Dusty or A-S 3-65

Panels Greasy
STATION AUXILIARIES & SERVICE
Battery Improper Specific 3-66

Gravity at Pilot Cell M-S
Low Electrolyte Level M-S

at Pilot Cell
Loose & Dirty M-S

Connections
Damaged Containers M-S

& Cell Covers
Faulty Sealing or M-S

Missing
Vent Plugs
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-27


TURBINE STATUS REF.
STATION AUXILIARIES & SERVICE
Battery Improper Specific

Gravity & Low
Electrolyte at Any One A-S
Cell
Battery Charger Dirty Charger A-S 3-67

3-68
Voltmeter Out of SA-S
Calibration
Faulty Capacitors & SA-S

Diodes
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
Main Bus Insulators Dirty Bus Insulators A-S 3-68

& Barriers
Main Vertical Bus Joints Loose Connections A-S

and Main Bus Supports
Magnetic Contactors Dirty Contactors & A-S 3-68

& Starters Starters
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-28


TURBINE STATUS REF.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (Cont'd)
Magnetic Contactors Loose Connections A-S 3-68

& Starters
Contacts Welded A-S
Together, Worn &
Arcing
Magnetic Relays Dirt, Dust, Oil, Grease A-S 3-69
General Purpose Damaged Arc Chute A-S 3-69

Contactors
Improper Arcing Horn A-S
Clearances
Improper Armature A-S

Spring Adjustment
Weak Contact Pressure A-S
INLET SYSTEMS
Inlet Screen Obstructions M-O 3-69
Inertial Separators Fans Operating M-O 3-69

Cleanliness
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-29


TURBINE STATUS REF.
INLET SYSTEMS
Media Prefilters Pressure Drop W-O 3-70
Rips or Tears M-S
High Efficiency Pressure Drop W-O 3-71

Media Filters Rips or Tears
Bypass Door Proper Seal M-O 3-72
Limit Switch Operation A-S
Inlet Compartment Sealing A-S 3-73

Inlet Ductwork &
Silencers Cleanliness A-S
Entrapped Material A-S
Refer to the Manufacturer's Manual for

Operation & Maintenance of Filter
House, on Auxiliaries Manual.
Inlet Guide Vanes Corrosion Pitting A-S 3-73
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-30

8.3 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
8.3.1 Standard maintenance items
Pressure switches and gauges
The setting of these pressure switches and calibration of the gauges

can be checked either with a dead weight tester, or with a regulated
source of clean, dry, compressed air and an accurate pressure gauge.
The use of air pressure is generally more convenient and is recom-
mended whenever the air pressure is sufficient to check the specified
switch setting and gauge calibration. To avoid the possibility of oil
contamination, it is preferable that air actuated switches and gauges
not be tested with the dead weight tester.
Thermometer (dial type)
To calibrate a dial-type stem thermometer, immerse the sensor a mini-

mum of two inches in an agitated bath maintained at a temperature be-
tween 1/2 and 3/4 of its full-scale reading or near the maximum tem-
perature normally registered by that particular thermometer, if known.
By means of an external adjusting screw, rotate the thermometer dial
face until the pointer registers the correct temperature. The bath tem-
perature must be monitored by a thermal sensing device known to be
accurate.
Flowmeter
The + 1.5% accuracy of the flowmeter should be checked and cali-

brated by the manufacturer or a qualified facility.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-31

Vibration detectors
Monitor the vibration levels during operation. Ensure each vibration

detector is functional. Vibration levels may be monitored directly on
the turbine panel. The meter scale may be changed from 1.5 inches
per second full scale to 0.3 inches per second full scale by depressing
"CHANNEL SELECTOR" pushbutton.
Physically check the mounting security of each vibration detector and
detector leads.
Refer to the Control Specifications and Control System Adjustments

for complete operational checks.
Liquid level indicators
When the tank is drained of liquid, check that the linkages are free
from binding and the float is in good condition. Make sure the high
and low level switches are set within the limits specified on the Sche-
matic Piping Diagram.
Speedtronic meters
Unless a competent instrument mechanic is available, it is recom-

mended that the instrument be returned to the manufacturer, or a labo-
ratory, for calibration and for repairs.
In general, instruments should be on “zero” when the unit is shut

down. Whenever possible, corrections should be made with the “zero”
adjustment. If a pointer cannot be zeroed, it is probably bent, or the
“zero” adjuster crank arm is out of the regular slot.
Inspect for sticking, or jerky pointers. The most common causes of
sticking (or jerkiness) are dirt on the scale, pointer touching glass, dirt
in a gap of moving element or damping magnet, or damaged bearing.
Correct as necessary.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-32

8.3.2 Control devices
Temperature switches
Temperature switches are pre-tested, set, and locked in the factory. if

trouble is experienced in the field, new pre-tested and set switches
should be ordered. Faulty switches should be returned to Nuovo Pig-
none for evaluation. These switches should not be tested, adjusted, or
reset in the field unless a special Fenwal Test Kit, model 80001-0, is
available, since the settings require close tolerances. The arrow on the
head of the thermoswitch unit indicates the direction to turn the ad-
justing screw for increased temperature setting. One complete turn of
the adjusting screw equals approximately 100°F.
Thermostats
To check the accuracy of the space heater thermostats in the turbine,

accessory and control compartments, compare the setting of the ther-
mostat with the temperature shown on an accurate thermometer. If
there is a discrepancy of more than five degrees, the thermostat should
be repaired, or replaced.
Pressure regulating valves (VPRs)
Pressure regulating valves are of two types - pressure reducing and

backpressure regulated. Except in a few instances, a line-mounted
pressure gauge is available very close to the valve to check and/or set
the control pressure required for that particular valve. Backpressure-
regulated valves are preset at the factory and should require no ad-
justment for normal operation. In most applications, the valve stem is
exposed to view, so valve movement can be checked visually or with
a dial indicator. For valves that do not have an exposed stem, the
valve setting is best accomplished with the valve removed from the
stem. On some valves, it is possible to use an external pressure
source, preferably dry air, to check the valve setting during shutdown
of the machine. Valve travel is checked with a dial indicator inserted
through a removable cover on the valve opposite the side where the
valve yoke (top-works) is located.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-33

If the valve is not operating properly, remove it and bench-check it

for:
a. Sensing line restrictions

b. Ruptured diaphragm
c. Valve body obstruction
d. Bent or binding valve stem
e. Broken spring
Refer to the Schematic Piping Diagram or Device Summary for the

proper setting of the valve. It is recommended that valve diaphragms
and stem packings be replaced every five years, unless operating ex-
perience indicates that more frequent replacement is necessary.
Temperature regulating valves (VTRs)
The temperature control valves (VTRs) are used to regulate the cool-
ing water flow to the lube oil heat exchanger and atomizing air pre-
cooler.
The temperature control point of these valves is preset and should re-
quire no adjustment for normal operation. The control point is set to
control the bearing header lube oil temperature and the atomizing air
pre-cooler discharge air temperature. The temperatures are specified
on the Device Summary of the Schematic piping Diagram for each
system. These temperatures should be maintained during normal op-
eration; however, on hot days, the temperature may be exceeded. An
alarm will sound if the temperatures are exceeded. If the alarm
sounds, check the following:
a. VTR valve fully open.
b. Adequate coolant flow going through the lube oil heat exchanger,
atomizing air pre-cooler and coolant-to-air heat exchanger.
c. Proper mixtures of ethylene glycol in water.
d. Proper air flow through coolant-to-air heat exchangers.
e. Plugged heat exchanger surfaces.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-34

The valve proportional band is defined as that temperature difference

in the controlled fluid (sensed by the bulb) which is required to fully
stroke the valve. If the actual valve proportional band varies mark-
edly from that given on the valve nameplate, the valve sensing ele-
ment may have been improperly assembled into its well or have an
improper charge of sensing fluid.
The element could be defective, or there may be too much friction in
the valve mechanism. Sensing bulbs are marked "TOP" or "UP" and
must be assembled properly. If it is noted that the valve proportional
band increases with time, the sensing element probably has a small
pinhole leak and should be replaced. If the temperature sensing sys-
tem must be replaced, the valve can be cranked open mechanically
and the temperature sensing probe, capillary tube, and diaphragm in
the valve bonnet can be replaced without having to shut off the cool-
ing water or shut down the turbine.
) NOTE
IF SENSING BULB IS REMOVED FOR ANY REASON, MAKE SURE THE BULB TEM-
PERATURE WELL IS FILLED WITH HEAT TRANSFER COMPOUND PRIOR TO REIN-
STALLING THE SENSING BULB.
Valve stem packing nuts should be tightened just enough to stop water
leaks. The valve manufacturer generally states that if the packing nut
is hand tightened, enough force is applied to stop water leakage. Use
of excessive force causes friction between the valve stem and packing.
This results in erratic operation.
It is recommended that the valve stem packing be replaced every five

years unless operating experience indicates the advisability of more
frequent replacement.
8.3.3 Hydraulic/mechanical equipment
Relief valves
Spring-loaded relief valves protect the system component, or pumps

from overpressure. Adjustment of the valve setting is accomplished
by an adjusting screw.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-35

Turning the screw into the valve body increases the spring force
(raises opening pressure). The relief valve is set to open at the pres-
sure specified on the Device Summary Schematic piping Diagram.
Annually, all the relief valves listed should be removed and bench-
tested against the settings listed on the Device Summary.
Solenoid valves
If any oil leakage is observed, replace the "O" ring seals. Energize the
solenoid and check valve operation (a metallic click should be heard
and in some cases, the valve travel can be seen).
Sluggish valve operation, or excessive leakage can result from dirt.

Therefore, periodic disassembly and cleaning of all solenoid valves is
desirable when improper operation or leakage is evident.
Check valves, orifices & orifice check valves
During a shutdown period, the system has to be drained and the valves
and orifices have to be removed to check for evidence of erosion, cor-
rosion or component deterioration. Check the orifices for plugging,
size and sharpness of the hole. Check the valve seat for leakage.
Check the condition of the seals, "O" rings, or gaskets, and replace
them if there is any indication of wear.
Lube oil filters
The lube oil system filters should be changed once a year, regardless
of the pressure drop. The pressure drops must be checked under tur-
bine operating conditions, with the lubricant at normal operating tem-
perature, and at rated flow through the filter. In most gas turbine lube
systems, the main lube filter, which filters the lubricant to the main
bearing header, can be checked for clogging by the pressure drop in-
dication. Here, the pressure downstream from the filter is maintained
by a pressure regulating valve, and the difference in the pressures
shown on the gauges before and after the filter will provide a reliable
indication of the filter condition.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-36

The condition of other filters in the lube system, such as the control
fluid filter or hydraulic control pump filter, cannot be determined as
reliably by the pressure drop indication since the flow through these
filters may be very low under steady-state conditions.
It is unlikely, however, that these low-flow filters will foul before the
recommended annual change out of the filter element.
On gas turbines that are expected to run continuously over long peri-
ods of time, dual filter arrangements, with a transfer valve, are usually
incorporated into the lube system to facilitate the servicing of the fil-
ters without turbine shutdown. Systems with single filter arrange-
ments require that the turbine be shut down to service the filter.
Fuel oil filters
Replace the cartridges of the main (low pressure) fuel oil filter when
the pressure differential reaches 20 PSI, or every 12 months, which-
ever occurs first. Follow the procedure listed below:
a. Close the inlet and outlet valves.
b. Open the drain and vent valves. (Drain filter thoroughly before re-
moving cartridges).
c. Remove the cover and the old filter cartridges. insert new car-
tridges.
d. Install a new cover gasket if the old one is hard or damaged
e. Install the cover and close the drain valve.
f. Tighten the eyebolt nuts or cap screws to the required value as

specified in the Standard Practices section of the Service Manual.
(Periodically clean and oil the eyebolts, if they are used).
g. Open the inlet and outlet valves.
h. Leave the vent valve open to release air, but close when oil ap-
pears.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-37

Hydraulic supply filters
The hydraulic supply system filter should be changed when the pres-
sure drop across the filter is 5.5 Bar, or once a year, regardless of the
pressure drop.
The pressure drop must be checked under turbine operating condi-

tions, with the hydraulic fluid at operating temperature and at rated
flow can be assumed to be realized during maximum transient condi-
tions, such as at the instant of hydraulic trip out of the gas turbine.
Under steady-state conditions, there will be only a small flow through
the filter and any differential pressure indicated on the system gauge
will probably be small and not a true indication of the condition of the
filter. It is unlikely, however, that these low-flow filters will foul be-
fore the recommended annual change out of the filter cartridge.
On gas turbines that are expected to run continuously over long peri-
ods of time, dual-filter arrangements, with a transfer valve, are usually
incorporated into the hydraulic supply system to facilitate servicing of
the filters without turbine shutdown. Systems with single filter ar-
rangements require that the turbine be shut down to service the filters.
Air filters (Air Extraction Valve)
Open the filter petcock and drain off all moisture accumulation. If the
amount of moisture appears to be excessive, it is suggested that the
petcock can be left cracked open for a continuous bleed or the fre-
quency of the blowdown inspection be increased.
The filter should be opened up on a scheduled basis and inspected.

Clean the Poro-Stone tube in any oil solvent and blow out clean and
dry. Clean the inside of the filter housing.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-38

8.3.4 Heating, cooling & ventilation
Air conditioners
Clean dust and dirt from the condenser and evaporative coils. Clean
condensate drip pan. Wash or replace the air filter.
Functionally check the operation of the thermostat and air conditioner.
Space heaters
Check electrical continuity and verify proper operation of the space

heaters. Clean dust from the thermostats, heating elements and fan
blades.
Accessory & turbine compartment vent fans
Check fan wheel for buildup of foreign material or excessive wear

from abrasion. Both can cause vibration and create a serious safety
hazard. Any buildup of foreign material should be removed. If wheel
shows excessive wear, replace it immediately.
Check all set screws and bolts for tightness, and mounting security.
8.3.5 Motors, motors & pump couplings
DC motors
Inspect to see if the brush orientation markings on the side of the

brush yoke and bearing bracket are aligned. If the brushes are not
properly orientated, it could affect the speed of the motor and cause
excessive sparking. Check the indicator marker on the brush pigtails
for evidence of brush wear. If the marker reaches the top of the brush
holder box, the brush is worn to the point where it should be dis-
carded. These checks can be made after removing the bearing bracket
louvered cover.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-39

Also check the commutator at this time for cleanliness and wear.
Check the commutator for roughness while running. This is done by
placing a fiber stick against the brushes and feeling to see if it jumps
during rotation. Check the insulation and windings for contamination,
mechanical defects and temperature defects.
Check the insulation integrity for electrical resistance.

Check the vibration of the motor while coupled to the pump. The vi-
bration should not exceed 3 mils.
AC motors
Examine the collector rings, brushes, brush holders and studs for
cleanliness and wear. Collector rings should maintain their polished
surface. Brushes should move freely within their holders, but set
firmly in contact with the collector rings. Be sure the pigtail conduc-
tors are securely fastened to the brush holders. Check the insulation
for cleanliness and wear.
Check the vibration of the motor while it is coupled to the pump. The
vibration should not exceed 3 mils. Check the cooling passages and
louvers of the motor to make sure they are clean, undamaged and un-
obstructed.
8.3.6 Systems maintenance items
Lube system
Lube oil pumps
Check the lube oil pumps for excessive vibration. Check the thrust
bearings and bearing seal for wear. Check the clearance of the wear
ring. If wear has increased this clearance to 0.016", the wear ring
should be replaced.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-40

Lube oil tank
Check the internal tubing and piping of the lube oil tank for peeling of
paint and loose fittings. Check the pipe hangers for loose or missing
hardware. Carefully inspect each pump intake screen (especially on
the main pump) for foreign material and loose hardware. Check the
sludge removed from the bottom of the tank for the presence of un-
usual material. Make sure the inside of the tank is thoroughly clean
before refilling.
Lube oil properties
For instructions on determining lube oil physical properties and peri-

odic sampling and testing, refer to the Lube Oil System text in the
Service Manual.
8.3.7 Fuel gas system
General notes
Fuel gas piping failures may cause a fire or explosion if an ignition

source is present, or failure of the machine to operate.
Fuel gas stop ratio & control valve
Check for excessive gas leakage at the valve stems, packing leakoff
and vent lines.
Check the zero effective stroke position of the control valve. To do

this, apply a pry bar (three to five foot-pounds) to the arm that is
clamped to the control stem. Push up on the valve stem making sure it
contacts the valve. The travel pointer on the guide post should point
to zero.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-41

If it is suspected that the valve leaks, check the seating surfaces for
damage or foreign material. Contact between the valve and seat must
be checked with the stem in place. Check the rod seals and wipers of
the hydraulic cylinders for leakage and replace them if worn. Check
the gas pre-charge pressure of the accumulator and correct it if re-
quired.
Check the trip relay for cleanliness and freedom of operation. A small
amount of dirt can cause the relay to stick. Disassemble and clean if
necessary. If the movable core on the LVDT appears to be mis-
aligned with the stationary coil and is rubbing the coil, realign it.
For additional information on the fuel gas stop ratio and control valve,
refer to the Service Manual under the Fuel System tab.
Fuel oil system
General notes
Fuel oil system leakage may result in a fire or explosion if an ignition

source is present. Ignition sources may be hot surfaces (about 450°F
or hotter) sparks or open flame. The fuel oil piping around the com-
bustion casings, the atomizing air system, and the starting diesel en-
gine exhaust are particularly vulnerable.
Fuel oil stop valves
Check the connections at the fuel oil and trip circuits oil lines for evi-
dence of leaking. Check the valve stem for signs of stickiness, slug-
gishness, or failure to move within the time cycles specified in the
Control Specifications. For detailed instructions, refer to the service
manual under the 'Fuel System' tab.
Main fuel pump
Check the shaft of the main fuel pump for leakage of the seal and re-
place it if necessary. On universal pump units (Roper Pumps), check
the calibration of the fuel pump bypass valve. On Denison Pumps,
check the calibration of the fuel pump stroke, in accordance with the
information in the Control Specifications.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-42

Flow divider
Check the flow divider for unusual noises and external leaks. Check
the output pressure of the flow divider, in accordance with the instruc-
tions in the Control Specifications. Check the fuel flow divider start-
ing motor for cleanliness, dryness and proper operation. Vacuum out
ventilating openings and windings occasionally.
Fuel nozzle selector valve
Check the tubing connections around the fuel nozzle selector valve as-
sembly for excessive leakage. Tighten fittings if necessary. Check
the valve for smooth operation of the stem by turning the selector to
all positions. Check for secure mounting of valve.
False start drain valve
Check for proper operation of the valve during startup and shutdown.
The valve should not be venting while the turbine is operating. The
valve should start to close at between 19 and 22 psig and fully close at
between 29 and 32 psig. Check the fuel oil and compressor discharge
piping and tubing connections for leakage of oil and air. Check the
condition of the diaphragm in the valve actuator annually and replace
if worn.
8.3.8 High pressure control oil system - hydraulic supply
Main hydraulic supply pump (shaft-driven)
Visually inspect the pump for seal leakage at the shaft and mounting
flange. Check the pump for noise and vibration. Check the inlet and
discharge connections for leakage and/or loose connections.
To assure trouble free pump operation and a trouble free hydraulic

system, it is important to maintain the system in a clean condition.
Sludge, water, dirt or contaminants of any kind are potential for trou-
ble.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-43

Auxiliary hydraulic supply pump
Maintenance is limited to the pump operations which do not require a

complete system or pump teardown; such as for leaks or sticky valves.
First, tighten all screw or fittings around the leakage area. If the pump
still leaks, it may be necessary to replace a gasket, or "O" ring.
If the pump does not operate properly, or if there is evidence of dam-

age, it should be overhauled in accordance with the instructions in the
Service Manual under the "Hydraulic Supply System" tab.
Before reassembly, make sure that all parts are clean and free from
lint or other foreign matter. All parts must be washed in cleaning
fluid,
such as Stoddard solvent (or equivalent). All "O" rings and gaskets
should be clean and carefully examined for cuts and other damage.
Replace all damaged parts.
Hydraulic supply manifold
Leakage problems on the manifold will generally result from damaged

"O" rings between the components and the manifold plate. Care must
be used in resetting a part to the manifold to avoid pinching or other-
wise damaging the seals.
All tubing connections and device connections should also be checked

for leakage. The manifold should be cleaned and wiped down. This
will help in detecting any further leakage problems.
Air bleed valve(s)
The air bleed valve(s) should automatically bleed any air present in
the discharge lines as the pump is started. As soon as the system
reaches 35 PSI and a steady stream of oil is present, the valve should
close.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-44

8.3.9 Cooling and sealing air system
General notes
Loss of cooling air to various parts of the machine may cause hot
wheel spaces, insufficient casing cooling or reduction in bearing seal-
ing air pressure. Small leaks or restrictions may result in loss of ma-
chine performance or reduction in life of nozzle, buckets and wheels.
Large leaks or restrictions may result in complete machine failure and,
in case of sealing air, bearing oil leaks and fire if an ignition source is
present.
Piping system
Using the Cooling and Sealing Air piping Schematic as a guide, check
that all orifice-flange-plates are in their respective locations. If not al-
ready done, it may be wise to identify the orifice size on the tab of the
plate and locate the tab in the most convenient and accessible location
for viewing when assembled. When union orifices are used, verify
that the orifice is in position in the union by the tab protruding
through the hole.
Compressor bleed valve (VAB-1 and VAB-2)
These valves should operate freely with no evidence of sticking.

Where sticking is evident, lubricate the spring and inner cylinder of
the air actuator of the valve with a spray lubricant WD40 or an
equivalent high temperature, anti-seize lubricant on a planned shut-
down.
Remove the air connection from the valve, spray the lubricant into the
actuator and exercise the valve several times.
Compressor discharge pressure transmitter (96 CD-1)
Check that the transmitter is calibrated within the limits described in

the Control Specifications.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-45

8.3.10 Atomizing Air System
General Notes
Atomizing air system leakage may result in loss of machine perform-

ance, improper combustion and smoky exhaust. Large leaks may
cause a machine to shut down. Large leaks may cause a back-flow of
combustion products or unburned fuel from the combustor particularly
if near the combustion chambers. Large leaks may cause fire or ex-
plosion if an ignition source is present.
Atomizing Air Compressor (On or Off-Base)
The atomizing air system is required during liquid fuel operation to

provide sufficient pressure in the air atomizing chamber of the fuel
nozzle body to maintain the ratio of atomizing air pressure (psia) to
compressor discharge pressure (psia) at approximately 1.35 or greater
over the full operating range of the turbine.
Increasing pressure ratio trends may be caused by dirty air passages in

the fuel nozzles. Decreasing pressure ratio trends may be traced to
leaks in the system or to a malfunctioning atomizing air compressor.
When a dual-fuel machine is operating on gas fuel, the atomizing air

manifold pressure (psia) should be slightly higher than the compressor
discharge pressure (psia) for a ratio of approximately 1.15. For in-
creasing and decreasing pressure trends refer to the previous para-
graph.
If it is determined that overheating, low pressure ratio, excessive gear

or rotor noise, failing oil seal, cylinder discoloration, or scorched paint
are caused by a malfunctioning atomizing air compressor, remove the
compressor from the turbine and replace it with a new or recondi-
tioned unit.
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE THE COMPRESSOR IN THE FIELD.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-46

Consult your NUOVO PIGNONE Company Field Service Represen-

tative for the disposition of a malfunctioning compressor. Atomizing
air compressors should be returned for factory preventive maintenance
on a schedule recommended by the NUOVO PIGNONE Company
Field Service Representative or, as determined by the user's own oper-
ating experience. Excessive gear or rotor noise is usually due to mis-
alignment or foreign matter. The visual rotor inspection can be made
through the air inlet or outlet connection, or through the pipe plug in
the side of the compressor.
Starting (Booster) Atomizing Air Compressor
Starting (booster) atomizing air compressor (CA2) is a compact, ro-

tary lobe type axial-flow compressor. The meshing of two screw-type
rotors synchronized by timing gears provides controlled compression
of the air for maximum efficiency and pulsation-free discharge.
Compressor efficiency and durability depend on the quality of main-

tenance it receives. Maintenance must be done regularly and with
care.
For any major service requiring disassembly, contact the NUOVO
PIGNONE Company Field Service Representative. The compressor
should not be disassembled in the field unless it is performed by a
qualified factory representative.
Lubrication - Discharge End
Gears and gear-end bearings are oil splash lubricated. Filling the gear
case with the amount of oil shown will bring the oil level to about half
covering the sight glass. Add more oil if necessary to bring the level
to half of the sight glass. Do not overfill. Keep sight glass clean. DO
NOT OPERATE BLOWER UNLESS OIL SHOWS IN THE SIGHT
GLASS.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-47

Use any good heavy-duty motor oil with foam depressant and oxida-
tion inhibitor.
Temperature Viscosity
10 TO 32°F 417-510 SUS ISO-V6100

32 TO 90°F 625-765 SUS ISO-V6150
Above 90°F 918-1122 SUS ISO-V6220
Check gear case oil level daily. Change oil every 100 to 1000 hours
of operation or more often if dust and moisture conditions are severe.
Gear case should be flushed with clean solvent every four oil changes.
ALWAYS USE CLEAN CONTAINERS FOR OIL & SOLVENT.
Gear case oil capacity is 2-1/4 quarts.
Lubricant - Inlet End
Inlet end bearings are grease lubricated at the factory. Regrease bear-
ings every 250 hours of operation. Use a good grade of high-
temperature ball bearing grease suitable for bearing operating tem-
peratures to 300°F.
A zerk fitting is located in the bearing carrier for each bearing and a
pressure relief fitting is located on each bearing cover. These fittings
should be cleaned of all dirt and foreign material before lubricating
bearings. With pressure or hand gun, fill bearing cavity with grease
until it begins to come out of grease relief fitting.
Early models do not have zerk fittings for grease gun lubrication. On
these blowers, remove bearing covers, remove old grease and repack
every 250 hours of operation.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-48

Air Filters & Filter Silencers
Servicing the air filters is one of the most important maintenance op-
erations to be performed to ensure long compressor life. Servicing fre-
quency must be established by the user depending on dirt and mois-
ture conditions, as well as type of filter used. After compressor is put
into operation, inspect the filter frequently to establish regular mainte-
nance intervals.
Daily maintenance is not uncommon in extremely dirty environments.
Periodic Service
1. Check pressure or vacuum gauges for accuracy.
2. Check relief valve for setting and operation.
3. Inspect check valve seat for wear.
Bearing Carrier Vent Holes
There are two vent holes in each bearing carrier. Each hole connects
the space between the shaft air seal and the lip-type bearing oil seal
with the atmosphere. The vent bleeds the controlled leakage of air
from the shaft air seal to atmosphere. More air will bleed through the
discharge end holes since the discharge end is at a higher pressure
than the inlet end. Inspect vent holes for obstruction by foreign mate-
rial. Plugged vents may cause pressurization of oil sump and blow oil
through the oil sump breather-filter.
Atomizing Air Pre-Cooler
Exchangers, subject to fouling (scale, sludge deposits, etc.) should be

cleaned periodically, depending on specific conditions. A light sludge
or scale coating on either side of the tube greatly reduces its effective-
ness. A marked increase in pressure drop and/or reduction in perform-
ance usually indicates cleaning is necessary.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-49

Neglecting to keep tubes clean may resulting random tube plugging.

Consequently, overheating, or cooling, of the plugged tubes, as com-
pared to surrounding tubes, will cause physical damage and leakage,
due to the differential thermal expansion of the metals.
If a pre-cooler tube should develop a leak, it may possible to plug the

tube in the pre-cooler and continue using the bundle. Consult NUOVO
PIGNONE Company for information concerning how many tubes
may be plugged in a given pre-cooler and still have the pre-cooler per-
form satisfactory in gas turbine service. The tapered plug material
which is selected should be compatible with the pre-cooler bundle ma-
terial.
Stainless steel plugs are compatible with stainless steel pre-cooler
tubes. Brass plugs are recommended for 90-10 copper-nickel tubes or
for brass tubes or for admiralty metal tubes. These plugs are installed
in the leaking tube at the sheet using a nylon or rawhide hammer to
prevent inadvertent damage.
Water coolers should be checked for water to air side leakage every
three months.
Air Separators
Check the air separator blowdown lines for plugging by disconnecting

the lines at the air separator and blowing air through the lines. Check
the low point drain and make sure this line is open also.
8.3.11 Starting system
Starting motor
The interior and exterior of the motor should be kept free from dirt,
oil, and grease. Oily vapor, debris or dust may build up and block off
ventilation, leading to overheating of the windings. Conducting dust
shortens creepage distance, penetrates windings, and causes short cir-
cuits and grounds. Hard, sharp dust roughens insulation and shortens
its useful life as the dust is driven past vulnerable surfaces by ventila-
tion air. Cast-iron dust is a vicious enemy of insulation because it is
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-50

magnetic and is agitated by stray magnetic fields. Light, compara-

tively harmless, dust can be blown out with lox-pressure, dry air.
Grit, iron dust, carbon and copper dust should be removed by suction.
Vacuum-hose tops, for either pressure or suction, should not be made
of metal.
To obtain long life and satisfactory operation, the insulated windings

should be kept reasonably clean from dirt, oil , metal particles, and
other contaminants. A variety of satisfactory and acceptable methods
are available for keeping the equipment clean. The choice of the
method will depend on time, availability of equipment, and the insu-
lation system.
Starting clutch
Visually inspect the spline and clutch jaws for signs of uneven wear,
nicks, burrs, or other physical damage. Inspect the hydraulic cylinders
or leakage.
Inspect the linkage, pins and hardware for security. Check the clear-
ances of the clutch jaws in the engaged and disengaged positions.
Check the limit switch to see that the switch is operating at the proper
setting.
Torque converter
Check torque converter unloading solenoid valve 20TU plunger for

freeness of operation. Apply silicon grease to plunger rod.
Ratchet system
Check ratchet pump motor (88HR) for cleanliness of commutator and

brush condition. Check relief valve setting (VRS-1) and obvious oil
leakage of external piping. Ratchet pump should show no signs of
overheating.
Accessory gear train
Through the various inspection openings, visually inspect the gears

for pitting, scoring, galling or broken teeth. On scheduled major in-
spections, remove the accessory gear case cover and check the condi-
tion of the gears and bearings.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-51

8.3.12 Overspeed protection system (mechanical)
Hydraulic trip system
The hydraulic trip system oil pressure may indicate maintenance

needs.
a. Turbine operating on single fuel should maintain a steady pressure

level. An indication of a decay in the pressure level could mean a
leak in the hydraulic trip system, or at the stop valve.
b. Turbines operating on dual fuel should have the pressure and type
of fuel recorded. Pressure levels with the same fuel should remain
steady. Levels can be significantly different between gas and liq-
uid fuels.
Overspeed trip assembly
Check the overspeed trip assembly for quick and positive trip action
and smooth reset capability. Manually trip and reset the device
monthly. In addition, the complete overspeed protection system
should be tested annually as required by the Turbine Control Specifi-
cation. For detailed instructions of the complete system check, see the
paragraph below under Overspeed Bolt Assembly.
! WARNING
THE GAS TURBINE SHOULD NOT BE PLACED IN SERVICE UNLESS THE

OVERSPEED BOLT, THE OVERSPEED TRIP ASSEMBLY, FUEL STOP VALVES
AND OTHER SHUTDOWN DEVICES ARE IN A RELIABLE CONDITION.
The overspeed trip assembly should not be disassembled for inspec-

tion as long as there is no external evidence of wear restricted move-
ment, oil leakage, corrosion, or damaged, missing, or improperly as-
sembled parts.
Check the circuits of the overspeed trip switch for electrical continu-
ity. Test the dielectric with a "megger" from the switch terminals to
the ground connections. Manually check the switch operation near the
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-52

center of the trip travel. If the internal parts of the switch are defec-
tive, the switch must be replaced.
Replace the trigger if it is chipped, cracked, or if the strike surface is

indented. An indentation indicates insufficient hardness. Check the
clearance between the trip rod and the trigger, in accordance with the
overspeed trip assembly drawing in the Parts Lists and Drawings vol-
ume of the Service Manual.
The latch surfaces of the pilot valve and trigger should be inspected
for excessive wear. The actual surface in contact should be between
0.025 and 0.065 inch. A slight chamfer on the pilot valve can be tol-
erated, provided the actual surface engagement is within the above
limits.
With the overspeed trip mechanism tripped and the trigger against its
stop, check that the trip rod end of the trigger clears the shaft by at
least 0.25 inch.
Any condition of the overspeed trip assembly which may affect the
operation of the device and cannot be rectified, should be referred to
the Nuovo Pignone Field Service Representative for disposition.
Overspeed bolt assembly (high and low pressure turbines)
) NOTE
INHIBIT THE ELECTRONIC OVERSPEED SYSTEM PRIOR TO THIS TEST.
To test the complete overspeed protection system, carefully overspeed

the turbine to establish the proper condition for an actual trip. Note
the turbine speed at which the trip occurs. (The shaft overspeed
should be checked using a speed indicating device which is known to
be accurate within one-half percent of the true shaft speed). This
overspeed test should be performed annually on turbines which are
operated for peaking, or intermittent service. On units operating con-
tinuously, the test should be run at each scheduled shutdown, or after
any major overhaul, or after an extended shutdown of more than two
months (unless otherwise specified in the Control Specification).
If trip does not occur within the limits in the Control Specification, the
bolt should be lightly oiled with a light weight machine oil, stroked by
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-53

manually depressing the plunger several times through its stroke lim-
its, and retested. The overspeed bolt should then trip three successive
times within one percent of nominal trip speed and with one percent
repeatability (unless otherwise defined in the Control Specification).
) NOTE
DO NOT EXCEED THE MAXIMUM SEARCH SPEED DEFINED IN THE CONTROL

SPECIFICATION
Do not keep the turbine in service unless it is known that the over-
speed bolt, overspeed trip assembly, fuel stop valves and other shut-
down devices are reliable.
If trip does not occur within acceptable limits, adjust the bolt accord-
ing to the instructions below. If three successive trips do not occur
within acceptable repeatability limits, the bolt should be replaced.
At least three overspeed trips should be made after any disassembly,
or readjustment of the overspeed bolt. This is to assure that the bolt
was not damaged or contaminated during reassembly.
) NOTE
THE TURBINE SHOULD BE OPERATED FOR AT LEAST 30 MINUTES, AT RATED

SPEED, BEFORE CHECKING THE FINAL OVERSPEED BOLT SETTINGS. OPERAT-
ING THE TURBINE MAY CAUSE THE ACTUAL TRIP SPEED TO BE HIGHER OR
LOWER THAN THE "COLD" TRIP SPEED, DEPENDING UPON CONTRIBUTING
FACTORS, SUCH AS TEMPERATURE OR VIBRATION.
When speed counters are used, the counting and display time must be
rapid enough to match the increase in turbine speed. Otherwise, the
acceleration in turbine speed must be at a slow enough rate to give
successive speed readings on the counter to within 5 rpm of the pre-
ceding readings.
The procedure for testing an overspeed trip is as follows:
1. Bring the gas turbine shaft speed up to the trip speed slowly.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-54

! WARNING
DO NOT ALLOW THE TURBINE OVERSPEED TO EXCEED THE MAXIMUM

SEARCH SPEED SPECIFIED ON THE CONTROL SPECIFICATION
2. Note the speed at which the overspeed bolt operates. If the trip
does not operate within the limit specified, readjust the pre-load on
the spring and overspeed bolt.
Before making adjustments, remove the inspection cover and visually

inspect the condition of the overspeed trip assembly trigger. Check
the clearance between the trigger and both the shaft and overspeed
bolt assembly when the overspeed trip assembly is in the reset posi-
tion. This clearance specified on the overspeed trip assembly drawing
in the Parts Lists and Drawings volume of the Service Manual. In-
spect the end of the overspeed bolt for severe brinelling or mushroom-
ing. Some flattening of the overspeed bolt occurs on initial contact
with the trigger. If the overspeed bolt has rotated within its sleeve,
further flattening or brinelling occurs in the new position. Additional
trips and contacts cause a negligible flattening effect.
However, mushrooming effect should not be sufficient to cause an in-
crease in diameter of the overspeed bolt in the area of the spring seat
fit. It may be necessary to rotate the shaft until the spring seat and the
end of the overspeed bolt can be observed.
Upon completion of the visual inspection, adjust the trip speed, if nec-
essary, as follows:
1. Use the special wrench provided. Turn the spring seat clockwise to
increase, and counterclockwise to decrease the trip speed setting.
) NOTE
HIGH PRESSURE OVERSPEED BOLT = ONE TURN (360 DEGREES) WILL CHANGE
THE TRIP SPEED APPROXIMATELY 157 RPM. LOW PRESSURE OVERSPEED BOLT
= ONE TURN (360 DEGREES) WILL CHANGE THE TRIP SPEED APPROXIMATELY
630 RPM.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-55

2. A trial run should be made to check the trip setting. If the spring
seat is locked in the overspeed bolt sleeve by staking or penning,
the original staking of the spring seat may be sufficiently tight for a
trial run.
If the trip speed does not fall within the required limits, make a fur-
ther adjustment and repeat the trail run as described.
3. When the correct trip speed is obtained, stake the spring seat firmly
into the slots of the sleeve.
! WARNING
IF THE SPRING SEAT IS NOT LOCKED PROPERLY AFTER FINAL ADJUST-

MENT, IT MAY WORK OUTWARD AND CAUSE THE GAS TURBINE TO TRIP
OUT PREMATURELY.
4. Since burrs or binding, caused by the final locking and staking op-
eration, may affect the final setting, the overspeed bolt trip must be
checked again.
5. The clearance between the overspeed bolt and trigger should be

checked before closing the inspection cover. When the clearance is
satisfactory, the ovespeed bolt will positively disengage the trigger
of the overspeed trip assembly.
6. If frequent adjustment of the bolt is required, it should be replaced

with a completely new, and pretested assembly.
The overspeed bolt assembly normally does not require maintenance,

if properly installed. Flattening of the overspeed bolt tip at the ap-
proximate angle of contact with the trigger is expected. However, if
mushrooming, or roll-over of the bolt material occurs, install a new
assembly. The damaged overspeed bolt assembly should be returned
to the factory.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-56

The new overspeed bolt assembly should be pretested before installa-

tion. See the turbine Control Specification for the particular trip speed
setting. New, or reconditioned, overspeed bolt assemblies are pre-
tested for a specific turbine installation.
On installation, it is very important to assure that the new or recondi-

tioned bolt assembly is seated firmly against the shoulder in the shaft
hole, and that the bolt is locked in place. After the bolt assembly has
been properly seated and locked, check the clearance between the trig-
ger and overspeed bolt.
) NOTE
IF THE NEW OVERSPEED BOLT ASSEMBLY IS OF THE SAME CONFIGURATION

AND TRIP SPEED SETTING, THE DYNAMIC BALANCE OF THE COMPLETE SHAFT
AND OVERSPEED BOLT ASSEMBLY IS NOT REQUIRED.
Even though the overspeed bolt assembly has been pretested, the trip
speed setting must be checked with the turbine running and if neces-
sary, readjusted to the specified setting. This check is due to machin-
ing tolerances and temperature and vibration effects on the shaft and
bolt assembly. A machining error, of as little as 0.001 inch in the lo-
cation of the shoulder in the overspeed bolt hole, could cause a low, or
high, trip speed. This would depend upon whether the error permitted
the center of gravity of the overspeed bolt to be closer to, or farther
away from, the shaft center line.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-57

8.3.13 Temperature control system
Exhaust thermocouples (control and over-temperature)
Daily reading of the exhaust thermocouples will aid in monitoring the

combustion system and in detecting faulty thermocouples. Changes in
the combustion system will be detected easily after a normal pattern of
temperature has been established. Diverging temperatures in the ex-
haust system usually indicate deterioration of the combustion cham-
ber, or poor fuel distribution (dirty fuel nozzles). Below normal ther-
mocouple readings indicate thermocouple deterioration. On the
MS5001 unit, the expected range of exhaust temperature spread is
35°F + 25°F.
Investigation is recommended if the exhaust temperature readings

have a spread of 70°F or have changed 25°F from initial or last read-
ing. It is important when reviewing exhaust temperature readings to
observe any trend which may indicate deterioration of the combustion
system.
Gradual and/or sudden temperature excursions should be investigated
as soon as possible to determine validity of the readings. Faulty ther-
mocouples should be replaced as soon as possible.
Wheelspace thermocouple temperature limits
Turbine wheelspace temperature of 800°F (430°C) indicates the abso-

lute maximum value permissible during steady state operation.
The thermocouples, identified together with their nomenclatures, are

on the Device Summary. The wheelspace temperature readings
should be the average reading of at least two thermocouples which are
located nearly diametrically opposite each other in the wheelspace. If
there is a good reason to doubt the reading of a thermocouple, the
reading should be rejected. A reading from another thermocouple
should be taken (if more than two thermocouples are installed). The
faulty thermocouple should be replaced at the earliest convenience.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-58

8.3.14 Flame detection & protection system
Flame detectors
The flame detection system has two basic functional requirements:
a. It must detect the "presence-of-flame" during startup. A "presence-

of-flame" signal is a prerequisite to continuation of the startup se-
quence.
b. During operation, the system must detect the "absence-of-flame" to

trip the gas turbine. The "absence-of-flame" signal is very critical
to the protection of the gas turbine and of associated heat-recovery
equipment (when furnished).
c. The system is designed to detect the presence of ultraviolet radia-

tion which is emitted by a hydrocarbon flame and to provide a sig-
nal when the radiation is sensed for a sufficient time period.
The flame detector system is composed of an amplifier and two

sensors. The amplifier supplies voltage to drive the sensors and
provides an output logic signal for flame and no-flame conditions.
The sensors respond to ultraviolet radiation from the flame in the
combustor and conducts pulses of current. The current pulses are
integrated at the input on a voltage level detecting and switching
amplifier. The resulting dc voltage signal, proportional to the sen-
sor current, is the "flame condition" signal.
! WARNING
THE SENSORS ARE POLARITY SENSITIVE. REVERSE POLARITY WILL DE-

STROY THE DETECTOR!!!
1 With the detector amplifier power on, verify base wiring po-
larity at the sensor junction box by reading 290 VDC (MIN.)
across lead pair.
2. Turn power off and connect the black detector lead to plus
(+) and the white lead to minus (-).
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-59

d. With the system connected place an ultraviolet source in front of

the sensors and check that the internal relays operate as indicated
by using an ohmmeter or equivalent at the contact. Note that a pa-
per match flame should be detected at approximately 18 inches and
the sensor should provide an orange flickering glow. If the flicker-
ing glow persists after removal of the flame, the sensor has failed
and should be replaced. If no flickering glow occurs in the pres-
ence of flame, the sensor may have failed but proper operation of
the electronics should be assured
Scanner lens
The scanner lens should be cleaned with a dry cloth as often as neces-
sary on a regular schedule. No repair of any sort should be attempted
on the scanner, or switch assembly. If damaged , or defective, it
should be replaced and returned to the factory.
The flame detection system has no Speedtronic cards and requires no

adjustments. Refer to the Control Specification - Control System Ad-
justments for testing of flame detectors with the unit in operation. Re-
fer to the Control Specification for logic signal output explanation.
8.3.15 Overspeed protection system (electronic)
Magnetic pickups
The clearances between the O D of the toothed wheel and the tip of
the magnetic pickup should be checked annually and at each removal
and installation. The clearances should be within the limits specified
in the Control Arrangement Drawing, Model List Item 0501 or the
Device Summary.
Calibration checks
These calibration checks of the overspeed protection system should be

performed annually and after each major inspection, or at any time
wiring has been disconnected, or when a replacement overspeed card
has been installed.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-60

8.3.16 Speedtronic controls and equipment
Power supply components
Any indication of corrosion or discoloration, due to heat, should be

investigated and the equipment repaired or replaced as necessary.
In atmospheres that contain contaminants, such as hydrogen sulfide,

sulfuric acid, sulfur dioxide, chlorine, and chloringe dioxide, the rela-
tive humidity of the SPEEDTRONIC control card location should be
maintained at 50 percent or less to minimize any possible corrosion
problems.
Conformal coatings are used to protect electronic equipment; how-
ever, high relative humidity can cause accelerated corrosion in any
area not properly protected.
Circuit boards, card guides & sockets
Circuit board cleaning
1. Immerse the board in a lukewarm (approximately 38°C) solution of

mild household detergent, such as "Lux" or "Vel". With the aid of
a soft bristled brush (an ordinary paint brush will be sufficient),
scrub thoroughly.
) NOTE
LABORATORY DETERGENTS, SUCH AS "ALCONOX" OR "NEUTRA-CLEAN", ARE

EVEN MORE DESIRABLE WHEN DILUTED TO A VERY MILD SOLUTION. DO NOT
USE DISHWASH DETERGENT.
2. After cleaning, rinse thoroughly in several baths of lukewarm, run-

ning fresh water.
3. Shake off the excess water and immerse in isopropyl alcohol; mov-
ing the board rapidly back an forth in the bath.
4. Visually inspect the board for cleanliness and repeat step 3, if nec-
essary.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-61

5. Thoroughly air dry for several hours, then test the board in an op-
erating panel. Do not use compressed air
! WARNING
DO NOT USE AN ULTRASONIC CLEANER FOR BOARD CLEANING. IT CAN

CAUSE POSSIBLE DAMAGE TO SEMICONDUCTORS. IT CAN ALSO TEND TO
DISPLACE LUBRICANTS (SUCH AS THOSE USED IN POTENTIOMETERS)
WHICH ARE NOT EASILY REPLACED IN THE FIELD.
Cleaning card guides & sockets
1. Using a hand-pump type spray container, apply TF or TE Freon

only to the area to be cleaned
! WARNING
THE USE OF ANY OTHER SOLVENT/CLEANER EXCEPT TF OR TE FREON CAN

RESULT IN DESTRUCTION OF THE LEXAN. BELOW IS A PARTIAL LIST OF
CHEMICAL MATERIALS WHICH CANNOT BE USED.
1. ALDEHYDES (BUTYRALDEHYDE)
2. ALKALIES (SODIUM HYDROXIDE)
3. AMINES (DTA)
4. AROMATIC HYDROCARBONS (BENZENE)
5. ESTERS (ETHYL ACETATE)
6. HALOGENATED HYDROCARBONS
(METHYLENE CHLORIDE)
7. KETONS (MEK)
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-62

2. Wait two or three minutes to allow the solvent to work, then wipe
off the dirt with a soft cloth
! WARNING
IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED THAT THE WIRING SIDE OF THE CARD SOCKETS

BE CLEANED, DUE TO THE DIFFICULTY IN REMOVING THE SOLVENT AF-
TER IT IS APPLIED.
Relay contacts
Contact cleaning
The relay contact(s) must be clean and free from dust to energize the
load device. The main source of problems with relays is dirty load
contacts. Many industrial relays are furnished with a dust-tight cover.
Open-type relays, particularly in a dust-laden atmosphere, should be
cleaned at regular intervals. The removable contact carriage should
also be checked for mechanical freedom and alignment with the sta-
tionary contacts. It is applicable to MARK VI; they have relay on
digital exit.
A common error in maintenance is the belief that service-roughened

contacts must be filed smooth. A roughenend contact will carry cur-
rent as well as a smooth contact; therefore, a contact roughened by
normal arcing should not be serviced. However, if a contact is de-
formed by unusual arcing and has developed a large projection, it
should be repaired as described below.
Silver contacts oxidize more slowly than copper ones and form a self-
reducing oxide. Filing is, therefore, not recommended, since it can
completely destroy the silver contact's usefulness.
If it is necessary to clean the silver contact, use a burnishing tool.

This tool consists of a flexible strip of metal, with an etched (rough-
ened) surface, similar to a superfine file. Do not clean the contact
with knives, files, or abrasive paper or cloth.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-63

Copper contacts oxidize rapidly at elevated temperature, forming a

very high resistance oxide. A few strokes with a file will remove the
oxide and reduce the resistance. Usually, it is not necessary to file
contacts if the device is operated often. The slight abrasion produced
by an ordinary closing operation is sufficient to keep the oxide
cleaned off.
Contact replacement & pressure
Since short-circuit currents, that flow through a relay's contacts, can

completely melt or weld them closed, relays, or relay contacts, should
be replaced if evidence requires it.
As the contact wears, the pressure of the movable contact (when

closed) is maintained against the stationary one by the wiping springs.
Inspection of the spring is necessary, since heating may cause temper-
ing and eventually reduce the pressure. The correct spring pressure is
usually shown in the instruction sheet accompanying the relay (see
volume V of the Service Manual). Also, the contact spring pressure
on one pole can be compared to the pressure on the other poles of the
same contact. The spring pressure on all poles should be approxi-
mately the same.
If one is considerably lower, the contact should be replaced.
Contact arcing
Another problem, associated with the relay load contacts, is excessive

arcing. This arcing occurs when the contacts open an inductive load,
such as an ignition transformer, or a small dc motor field. The result-
ing voltage ionizes, or breaks down, the air between the contacts and
an arc is established. This arc is extinguished when the contacts are
fully open. However, it may be established and extinguished several
times due to contact bounce. The arc may be a glow discharge, or
even a small metallic bridge, which becomes hot enough to vaporize a
small portion of the contact metal. Repeated arcing causes erosion,
pitting, and general deterioration, and results in high contact resis-
tance.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-64

Where arcing is a problem, two or more contacts can be connected in

series. The voltage induced across each contact is reduced accord-
ingly. This in turn reduces or entirely eliminates arcing. Other solu-
tions are:
1. Connect a capacitor and resistor across the contacts.
2. Connect a diode across the contact load.
Speedtronic control panels
Remove dust, dirt, grease, and oil accumulated on, or in the control
panel. Remove heavy dirt, or dust with stiff brush. Vacuum or blow
out dry, or light dust with dry compressed air (low pressure). Clean-
ing fluid, such as trichloroethylene, can be used to remove oil or
grease.
! DANGER
CLEANING FLUID SHOULD BE USED ONLY WHEN THOROUGH VENTILA-

TION IS POSSIBLE, AND ONLY IN LIMITED QUANTITIES TO AVOID DAN-
GER TO PERSONNEL OR DAMAGE TO INSULATION.
) NOTE
DUST, DIRT, GREASE AND OIL PREVENT NORMAL OPERATION BY CAUSING

WEDGING OF MOVING PARTS, INCOMPLETE CONTACT, AND OCCASIONAL
SHORT CIRCUITS
CHECK AND TIGHTEN ALL LOOSE CONNECTIONS. EXCESSIVE HEATING OF
PARTS CAN BE IDENTIFIED BY METAL DISCOLORATION, CHARRED INSULATION,
AND ODOR. A COPPER OXIDE FILM FORMS ON COPPER CONTACTS WHEN THEY
HAVE BEEN OVERHEATED. THE CAUSE OF THE OVERHEATING MUST BE LO-
CATED AND CORRECTED. REPLACE ANY DAMAGED PARTS, IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE DEVICE SERVICE INFORMATION BULLETIN AND THE APPROPRIATE
CONNECTION DIAGRAM.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-65

Speedtronic instrumentation
Unless a competent instrument mechanic is available, it is recom-

mended that the instrument be returned to the manufacturer, or labora-
tory, for calibration and for repairs.
In general, instruments should be on "zero". Whenever possible, cor-

rections should be made with the "zero" adjustment. If a pointer can-
not be zeroed, it is probably bent, or the "zero" adjuster crank arm is
out of the regular slot.
Inspect for sticking, or jerky pointers. The most common causes of

sticking (or jerkiness) are dirt on scale, pointer touching glass, dirt in a
gap of moving element or damping magnet, and damaged bearing.
Correct as necessary.
8.3.17 Station Auxiliaries & Service:
Battery system
! DANGER
BATTERIES GIVE OFF HAZARDOUS FUMES DURING NORMAL OPERA-

TION. DO NOT SMOKE, USE OPEN LIGHTS OR ALLOW OPEN FLAMES
NEAR BATTERIES. EXERCISE EXTREME CARE IF USING METALLIC
TOOLS OR OTHER EQUIPMENT WHICH COULD SHORT OUT BATTERY
TERMINALS CAUSING SPARKING OR ARCING AND COULD RESULT IN AN
EXPLOSION. ELECTROLYTE IS AN ACID AND CAN CAUSE SEVERE BURNS.
ALWAYS WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING SUCH AS A RUBBER APRON,
SAFETY GOGGLES AND RUBBER GLOVES WHEN PERFORMING ANY
MAINTENANCE OR INSPECTIONS ON BATTERIES.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-66

Battery
Clean the outside of the battery with a water-dampened cloth. Neu-

tralize any acid on the covers or connectors with a cloth moistened
with a solution of baking soda and water. Wipe off all traces of the
baking soda.
Distilled (or approved) water should be added with a battery cell filler
when the electrolyte level is low.
When checking the specific gravity of the electrolyte, correct the read-
ing to 77°F in order to read 1.230/1.250 for a 56-cell battery, or
1.200/1.220 for a 60-cell battery. Deviations from these readings indi-
cate a partially charged battery.
Record the specific gravity, temperature and electrolyte level of the

battery periodically. See that all connections are tight and clean.
Check the battery and battery compartment for signs of loss of electro-
lyte, which may be due to overfilling, damaged containers or cell cov-
ers, faulty sealing or missing vent plugs.
In addition to the above, every month, record the amount of water

added, if any. Semi-annually, check and record the specific gravity
and electrolyte level of each cell.
Check and record the temperature of each pilot cell. If the specific
gravity readings are more than 20-30 points, or if repairs to the covers
or containers are indicated, make repairs immediately.
Battery charger
Clean the charger panel of all dirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner or
with low-pressure, dry, compressed air. Every six months, check the
floating voltage on the charger panel voltmeter, using a portable stan-
dard voltmeter. If necessary, adjust the panel voltmeter to agree with
the standard by using the zero adjustment.
Capacitor trouble can be spotted by a ruptured or broken can; an open

capacitor will look normal. To check capacitors, first open the ac cir-
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-67

cuit breaker and disconnect the battery from the charger. All capaci-
tors in the charger will then bleed to zero voltage. Second, isolate the
capacitor to be tested, and with an ohmmeter on its highest scale (ap-
ply the test prods to the capacitor terminals). If the capacitor is good,
it will show a definite meter deflection, followed by a decay to zero.
If it is bad, it will show meter deflection but no decay, or it will show
no deflection at all.
Replace faulty capacitors with the same rating as stamped on the

original. See parts list on the charger layout drawing received with
the charger. Filter capacitors are connected in parallel and polarities
must be observed. The red dot indicates positive.
To detect faulty diodes, disconnect the ac and the battery from the
charger. Then, with an insulated screw driver, short circuit each indi-
vidual capacitor. For each transformer in the charger, disconnect one
of the secondary windings. With the ohmmeter, measure the resis-
tance across each diode in both directions. Place one prod on the
positive and one on the negative rectifier terminals; note the resis-
tance, then reverse the prods and again note the resistance. If the two
resistances are about the same, either high or low, the diode is faulty
and should be replaced. A good diode will show high resistance in
one direction and low resistance in the opposite direction
Motor control center
Circuit breakers
Check the circuit breakers for physical damage to the switching unit.
Check the switching unit for accumulation of dust, dirt and the secu-
rity of all connections.
Magnetic contactors & starters
Check to see if the relay contacts are welded together by depressing

the brown operator (actuator), located at the top of the overload relay
contact housing. When the relay is in a reset condition, an audible
click will be heard when the operator is depressed. This indicates that
the contacts are operating normally.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-68

A continuity check can also be made by disconnecting the control wir-

ing from the terminals of the relay and placing a bell set, or a resis-
tance measuring instrument, in the circuit. Connecting either of these
across the relay terminals, will indicate the relay contact is closed un-
til the contact-check operator is depressed, interrupting the circuit.
Check the magnet mating surfaces and assure they are free from dust,
dirt, oil and grease. Check the silver contacts for wear. If the silver
tip is worn, and the contact tip support is exposed, replace the con-
tacts. DO NOT FILL THE SILVER CONTACTS to clean off projec-
tions, nicks, scratches, etc.
Magnetic relays
Check the contact surfaces for cleanliness, dirt, dust oil and grease,
etc. Check the silver contacts for wear and replace them before the
silver is completely gone. DO NOT FILE THE SILVER CONTACTS
to clean off projections, nicks, scratches, etc.
General purpose contactors
Inspect the arc chute for physical damage. Check the arcing horn
clearances. Check the armature spring adjustments, contact force, tie
gaps and wires.
Inlet air systems maintenance and system equipment
Inlet screen
Inlet screens are provided immediately upstream of the inertial separa-

tors to prevent the entry of birds, leaves, twigs, papers and other simi-
lar objects. These screens must be kept free from any excess accumu-
lation of such debris to assure free air flow.
Inertial separators
The inertial separators are normally self-cleaning and do not require

the routine service typical of air filters which collect and hold dust
particles. However, the system should be inspected at regular inter-
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-69

vals for integrity of the sealing connections or accidental damage.

Once a year the inertial separator cells should be examined for a build
up of deposits. A light dust coating is normal and will not impair the
operation or efficiency of the cells. In some installations, however,
the cells may occasionally accumulate a thicker deposit of surface dirt
due to the presence of oil mist or other similar vapors in the air.
Such buildup on the separators causes either a cleaning efficiency de-

crease or an increased restriction or both. In such cases the-cells
should be cleaned.
Cells may be cleaned in place by brushing the surfaces of the blades

and/or blowing down with compressed air. Removable inertial sepa-
rators may be cleaned in a detergent solution or other suitable solvent.
The bleed blowers must be turned on whenever the turbine is operat-

ing. If the bleed blowers are not operating when the turbine is running
then there is no cleaning efficiency in the inertial separators.
Media pre-filters
A bank of media pre-filters may be located downstream of the inertial

separators and immediately upstream of the high efficiency media fil-
ters. The purpose of the media pre-filters is to extend the useful life of
the high efficiency filters.
The most accurate method to determine when the media requires re-
placement is to measure the increase in restriction due to contaminant
buildup through this section. To determine this, the unit should be
operated with only clean high efficiency filters installed. The differ-
ential pressure should be measured and recorded. This is now the
combined pressure drop across all stages of filtration. When the pres-
sure gauge shows an increase in pressure loss corresponding to the
manufacturer's recommendation, the pre-filters shall be removed and
discarded.
Prior to installing new pre-filters the pressure loss across the high ef-
ficiency filters should be recorded and compared with the original the
above procedure should be repeated until the pressure drop across the
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-70

high efficiency filters has increased to the limits specified by the

manufacturer. At this time the high efficiency filters should be re-
placed.
! DANGER
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE ACROSS THE INLET FILTER COMPART-

MENT DOOR WHILE THE GAS TURBINE IS OPERATING MAY CAUSE
RAPID CLOSURE OF THE DOOR OR DIFFICULTY IN OPENING THE
DOOR FROM INSIDE THE COMPARTMENT. ENTRY INTO THE FILTER
COMPARTMENT SHOULD NOT BE ATTEMPTED WHILE THE TURBINE
IS OPERATING UNLESS SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR SAFE ENTRY HAVE
BEEN MADE.
The media pre-filters may be changed while the gas turbine is operat-
ing. When performing this operation:
1. Observe warning listed above.
2. Remove all loose items from pockets, secure eyeglasses and hard
hats.
3. Remove the pre-filters, starting with the top row of filters.
4. Remove all dirty pre-filters and then begin installation of clean fil-
ters.
5. Clean filters should be installed with the bottom row of filters.
High efficiency media filters
The high efficiency filters are located downstream of the inertial sepa-
rators and comprise the last stage of filtration. They have efficiencies
of approximatively 99.7% on a.c. fine test dust. The most accurate
method to determine when the media requires replacement is to meas-
ure the increase in restriction due to contaminant buildup through this
section. To determine this, the unit should be operated with only clean
high efficiency filters installed. The differential pressure should be
measured and recorded. This is the combined pressure drop across all
stages of filtration.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-71

When the pressure gauge shows an increase in pressure loss corre-

sponding to the manufacturers recommendation, the filters should be
removed and new filters installed. When installing new filters, care
should be taken to assure that all gaskets are in good condition and in
the proper location. There should be no dust leaks past the edge of
the filters and the holding frame.
! DANGER
REPLACEMENT OF HIGH EFFICIENCY FILTER ELEMENTS SHOULD NOT

BE ATTEMPTED WHILE THE GAS TURBINE IS IN OPERATION.
By-pass door
Downstream of the filter element is the by-pass door(s). These doors

are designed to open at a predetermined static pressure depression,
typically 5" w.g. The doors should normally never open. They are
designed as a safety measure to prevent turbine shutdown and/or inlet
duct implosion due to a sudden or abnormal blockage of the inlet sys-
tem. Therefore, it is important that the air cleaning system is serviced
before the static depression builds up to the point of by-pass opening.
The turbine is unprotected and will be ingesting unaltered air when

the bypass door is open. The by-pass door is gasketed to prevent air
leaks. This gasket should be checked periodically and repaired if pos-
sible leaks are found.
lie by-pass door is supplied with a switch to alarm upon opening of

the door. In the event of such an alarm, action should be taken imme-
diately to determine and rectify the cause.
Once a year the limit switch should be manually activated to deter-

mine proper circuit operation.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-72

Inlet compartment, inlet duct-work & silencer
During periods of shutdown the inertial separators are not in opera-

tion. This allows any blowing dust to pass through and enter the inlet
compartment. Before starting the unit after periods of shutdown the
compartment must be inspected and cleaned out if necessary.
The inlet ductwork and silencer should be inspected at least once a

year for leakage or any entrapped material. Leaks can be sealed with
an appropriate caulking compound. Entrapped material should be re-
moved to prevent possible foreign object damage. Any rust or oxida-
tion spots on other than Cor-Ten material should be scraped and re-
paired.
Inlet guide vanes
Inspect the inlet guide vanes for corrosions pitting. Pay special atten-
tion to the fillet area of the inlet guide vane. If pitting is seen in this
area, it may be assumed that there is also pitting on the underside of
the vane/platform junction. Liquid penetrant inspection should be
made in the fillet area.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 8-73

Technical Information Section 9
TECHNICAL INFORMATION LETTER
CONTENTS SECT
VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE (INNER BUSHING IN- TIL 1068-2 9.1
SPECTION)
INSTALLATION OF COMBUSTION SYSTEM GASKETS TIL 1069-3 9.2
REPAIR CRITERIA FOR ALL GAS TURBINE CAST SEG- TIL 1108-3 9.3
MENTED TURBINE NOZZLE
VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE INSPECTION THRUST TIL 1132-2 9.4

WASHER CORROSION
OFF-LINE COMPRESSOR WASH EFFLUENT TIL 1137-3 9.5
COLD-WEATHER ON-LINE COMPRESSOR WASH TIL 1153-3 9.6
PRECAUTION FOR WORKING IN OR NEAR THE TUR- TIL 1159-2 9.7

BINE COMPARTMENT OR FUEL HANDLING SYSTEM
OF AN OPERATING GAS TURBINE
OFF-LINE COMPRESSOR WATER WASHING PRECAU- TIL 1179-2 9.8

TIONS
PROCEDURE FOR REMOVAL OR REPLACEMENT OF TIL 1215-3 9.9

SHROUDED BUCKETS
9TH STAGE STATOR CASING HOOK FIT (EXTRACTION TIL 1304-3 9.10
SLOT) CRACKING
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

Technical Information Section 9
9. TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.1 Variable Inlet Guide Vane - Inner bushing inspection.......................................... TIL 1068-2
............................................................................................................TIL 1068-2R1
9.2 Installation of combustion system gaskets ..............................................TIL 1069-3
9.3 Repair criteria for all gas turbine cast segmented turbine nozzles .......TIL 1108-3A
.................................................................................................................TIL 1108-3
9.4 Variable Inlet Guide Vane inspection, thrust washer corrosion..............TIL 1132-2
9.5 Off-line compressor wash effluents.........................................................TIL 1137-3
9.6 Cold-weather on-line compressor wash ..................................................TIL 1153-3
9.7 Precaution for working in or near the turbine compartment

or fuel handling system of an operating turbine ......................................TIL 1159-2
9.8 Off-line compressor water washing precautions ................................TIL 1179-2R1
9.9 Procedure for removal or replacement of shrouded buckets ...................TIL 1215-3
9.10 9th Stage Stator Casing Hook Fit (Extraction Slot) Cracking..................TIL 1304-3
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 9-1

Preservation of Gas Turbine Section 10
PRESERVATION OF GAS TURBINE
CONTENTS SECT
PRESERVATION OF THE GAS TURBINE FOR SHIPMENT 10.1
PRESERVATION OF THE GAS TURBINE AND AUXILIARY 10.2

EQUIPMENT AFTER SHIPMENT
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

10 PRESERVATION OF GAS TURBINE
10.1 PRESERVATION OF THE GAS TURBINE FOR SHIPMENT
The gas turbine after having been tested in factory, is inspected, cleaned up and
sealed according to the ITN02175.12 (preservation of the Gas Turbine and its
accessories for shipment and storing) enclosed herein.
The structural work packed according to ITN02175.04 (preservation of the me-
tallic carpentry for shipment and storing) enclosed herein.
The components of the gas turbine suction systems (filter chambers, ducts and
conveyor) must be in conformity with the packing, shipment and assembly
rules contained in document SOM44953/4 (Prescription for storing, shipping
and assembling the Gas turbine suction systems) enclosed in the following.
The machine and its auxiliary components are therefore sent with the above
protections installed.
10.2 PRESERVATION OF THE GAS TURBINE AND AUXILIARY EQUIP-

MENT AFTER SHIPMENT
The protection applied by the NP Manufacturer is designed to guarantee the

preservation of the materials (kept in their original sealed packs) for a period of
6 months, at the end of which the protections must be renewed for other 6
months, following the instructions of NP personnel who must be present for the
inspection.
Storing must be carried out in a closet environment or under roofing.
The original protections must be maintained as long as possible, because the
contact of air and atmospheric humidity with the machine inner parts and aux-
iliary components cancels the protecting effect and can cause the formation of
rust on the metallic surfaces.
Before starting the gas turbine all VPI bags (vapour phase inhibitor) must be
taken off from the internal part of the machine and cabinet (if provided). If, in
order to execute the assembly operations, the sealing covers present on the gas
turbine discharge and suction connections must be removed, it will be neces-
sary to keep the covers for next use and apply the measures contained in
document SOM44953/4 in order to guarantee the cleaning of the suction sys-
tems.
This phase must be as short as possible because the contact of the machine in-
ner parts with the atmospheric humidity can cause the formation of rust on the
metallic surfaces.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 10-1

When possible, reinstall the discharge and suction covers complete with their
guards after having reinserted the VPI bags according to the instructions given
on paragraph 3.3 of ITN02175.12
In order to preserve bearings and the lubrication system, oil must be circulated
in the turbogroup two hours weekly.
Every month, turn the rotor by 90° manually or by starting the ratchet, if in-
stalled.
If available, switch on the heaters inside the cabinet.
If the gas turbine must remain in conditions of “ready to start” for long periods
(more than one month), it will be necessary to carry out the following opera-
tions:
• Put the oil into circulation weekly.
• Twice a month, start up the turbocompressor at its minimum load and keep
it in this condition for one hour. Before doing this in a Gas Turbine drag-
ging a Centrifugal Compressor, make sure that the process gas can be
cooled and that the Centrifugal Compressor delivery temperature never ex-
ceeds 150°C.
• In the Generator Drive unit with single-shaft Gas turbine (and with double-
shaft gas turbines, after ascertaining that the load provided is sufficient to
guarantee the stability of the low pressure shaft), it is necessary twice a
month to make the turbo-unit run for one hour in conditions of Full Speed
No Load.
If the gas turbine has to remain inactive for long periods (more than 6 months),
it will be necessary to disconnect the machine from the discharge and suction
systems and to protect it, its auxiliary components and the discharge and suc-
tion systems according to the instructions given in previous paragraphs.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 10-2

Decommissioning and Environmental Impact Section 11
DECOMMISSIONING AND ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
CONTENTS SECT
ENVIROMENTAL IMPACT 11.1
DECOMMISSIONING 11.2
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

11. DECOMMISSIONING AND ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
11.1 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
During operation, the Turbine produces various exhaust gases due to combus-
tion, being approximately: 15% O2, 6% H2O, 2.5% CO2, N2 for the rest; and
also minimal quantities of polluting substances, due to the type of fuel em-
ployed, are present.
When the fuel employed is a natural gas the main polluting substances are ni-
tric oxides (NO) and carbon monoxide (CO).
Turbine combustion chambers have been designed to reduce to a minimum
the formation of such oxides by acting on the mixing of fuel and air and by
means of low flame temperature combustion (weak combustion).
Generally, nitric oxides tend to increase (also in percentage) with the turbine
power, while carbon monoxide (CO) acts in the opposite way. Carbon mon-
oxide, in fact, is less significant than NO but it remarkably increases in low
load conditions (inferior to 30%) and for this reason it is necessary, if possi-
ble, to avoid running in such conditions.
Sulfur oxides (SO) derive from sulfur present in fuel and generally gas oil
contains more sulfur than other fuels.
Besides exhaust gases, other emissions are oil vapors due to the lubricating
liquids used.
Once the plant is operational and during its whole life, the maintenance of
emissions within levels indicated by relevant applicable regulations is the re-
sponsibility of the user, who must follow instructions given herein after:
- Perform all the maintenance operations listed in this manual, according to

the recommended schedule;
- Do not modify settings made by the Manufacturer upon installation;
- Rectify without delay any malfunction which might cause an increase in

emissions (if necessary, refer to GEPS GE OIL & GAS Nuovo Pignone Assis-
tance Service).
Waste, resulting from maintenance operations, must be stored and treated ac-
cording to local applicable law and by referring, if necessary, to the safety
card of the product itself. This concerns lube oils in particular and the associ-
ated filters in order to prevent any personal and environmental risks.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 11-1

11.2 DECOMMISSIONING
According to the principles of the EN ISO 14000 standard and ISO EN

14040, in particular, about Life Cycle Assessment, GE Oil & Gas Nuovo Pig-
none, in the planning stage, has created a number of devices to facilitate the
reutilization and recycling of the materials and components of the Turbine
and its auxiliary systems, and reduce the environmental impact of the product
in each one of its life cycles.
In case of turbine decommissioning, perform the following operations:
Reduce the material for disposal to the minimum by reutilization and recy-
cling (according to the relevant local applicable laws and regulations). GE Oil
& Gas Nuovo Pignone is specialized in the recovery, reconditioning and re-
utilization of machines.
Contact GE Nuovo Pignone qualified technical personnel for turbine disas-

sembly procedures.
- Recover oils and other liquids from the respective tanks/circuits and dispose of
them according to local applicable laws and regulations.
11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 11-2

GE Oil & Gas

TRAINING MANUAL
INDEX
VOL .2 MS5001PA
Job Drawings

GE
Oil & Gas
GE
Oil & Gas
Drawing’s Index
MS5001PA GAS TURBINE JOB’S 1705713
TURBO MACHINERY FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (P&ID) SOM5105801

FIELD INTRUMENT LIST SOM6623260
G.T. DATA SHEET SOK0928986
G.T PERFORMANCE CURVE SOM6623187
G.T FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SOM5461188
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT SOM6622614
PURCHASER’S CONNECTION DRAWING SOM6666634
G.T SECTIONAL DRAWING
G.T WEIGHT AND CENTER OF GRAVITY SOM6675078
G.T UTILITY CONSUPTION LIST SOM6623069
SHAFT ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATION SOM6625596

946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT01-F001-C SOM5105801/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT02-F001-B SOM5105801/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT03-F001-C SOM5105810/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT04-F001-A SOM5105810/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT05-F001-C SOM5105820/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT06-F001-A SOM5105821/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT07-F001-A SOM5105830/1
Electronically approved draw. GE NuovoPignone Internal DT-'N'

946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT08-F001-C SOM5105831/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT09-F001-C SOM5105831/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT10-F001-C SOM5105832/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT11-F001-C SOM5105832/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT12-F001-B SOM5105834/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT13-F001-B SOM5105836/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT14-F001-A SOM5105840/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT15-F001-B SOM5105871/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT16-F001-A SOM5105880/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT17-F001-A SOM5105881/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT18-F001-B SOM5105890/1
946X-ECA-DC-C-81DT19-F001-A SOM5105894/1
Quartieri E. Seghi A.
Quartieri E.
Seghi A.

Quartieri E.
Seghi A.

Quartieri E.
Seghi A.

Quartieri E.
Seghi A.

Quartieri E.
Seghi A.

Quartieri E.
Seghi A.

Quartieri E.
Seghi A.

Quartieri E.
Seghi A.

Quartieri E.
Seghi A.

Quartieri E.
Seghi A.

Quartieri E.
Seghi A.

Quartieri E.
Seghi A.

GAS TURBINE MODEL MS 5001 DLN + LOAD GEAR + GENERATOR
FIELD INSTRUMENT LIST
CUSTOMER : SONATRACH
PLANT LOCATION : ALGERIA
PLANT : ALRAR POWER PLANT EXTENSION PROJECT
NP JOB : 1705713÷15
REFERENCE DRAWING:
P&ID DIAGRAMS : SOM51058.01-94
TOTAL SHEETS: 25
TITLE FIELD INSTRUMENT LIST DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
SOM6623260 3
REVISION DESCRIPTION:
APPROVED Electronically Stored
AS BUILT: REVISED SH.1,2,9,22 AND 23 WHERE INDICATED <3> DATE SECURITY CODE
11.06.13 CHECKED Electronically Stored N
EXECUTED AXIEM
AS BUILT
SCALE REPLACES/DERIVED FROM 1st EXECUTED ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
<3> N/A N/A 16.02.09 1705713-15 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, SHEET
EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. UNPUBLISHED WORK © 2013 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
1 of 25
JOB TAG GE TAG INSTRUMENT SERVICE LOC. NP CODE MANUFACTURER INST. CALIB. SET ALARM / TRIP EU ELECTR. P&ID NOTE REV
DESCRIPTION REF. DOC. MODEL RANGE RANGE EU FLAG EXEC.
MIN MIN
FCV -110 GCV-1 FLOW CONTROL VALVE GAS CONTROL VALVE LOC RVO308010202B N.P. STD None N.A. SOM5105810-001 2
ITM42011.01 STD MNF
FO -118 FLOW ORIFICE WARM-UP LINE VENT LOC N.P. STD 21.5 mm N.A. SOM5105810-001 2
STD MNF
FV -108 VG-2 ON/OFF VALVE WARM-UP LINE VENT VALVE LOC RVO30831 FISHER None N.A. SOM5105810-001 2
RV 30831 667-34
FV -109 20VG-1 SOLENOID VALVE FUEL GAS VENT LOC REO044990201 ASCO None Ex-d IIC SOM5105810-001 1
ITN62305.21 B223 T2/T4/T5
FV -110 20VG-2 SOLENOID VALVE WARM-UP LINE VENT VALVE LOC SUPPLY WITH ASCO None Ex-d SOM5105810-001
VG-2 B223
FV -117 SRV-1 ON/OFF VALVE STOP/RATIO CONTROL GAS VALVE LOC RVO308010202B N.P. STD None N.A. SOM5105810-001 2
ITM42011.01 STD MNF
FV -337 20FG-1 SOLENOID VALVE STOP/RATIO VALVE CONTROL OIL LOC NIC401401539 ATOS None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105810-001 1
TRIP ITM42011.01 DHA-063 1/2
FV -338 20FG-2 SOLENOID VALVE GAS CONTROL VALVE CONTROL OIL LOC NIC401401539 ATOS None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105810-001 1
TRIP ITM42011.01 DHA-063 1/2
PI -107 PI-8 PRESSURE INDICATOR UPSTREAM SRGC VALVE PRESSURE GB RMO446040103 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105810-001
ITN66433 MB 800 40 Gage
PI -110 PI-9 PRESSURE INDICATOR INTERSTAGE FUEL GAS GB RMO446040103 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105810-001
ITN66433 MB 800 40 Gage
PI -112 PI-12 PRESSURE INDICATOR SRGC VALVE DOWNSTREAM GB RMO446040103 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105810-001
PRESSURE ITN66433 MB 800 40 Gage
PI -115 PI-10 PRESSURE INDICATOR SRGC VALVE DOWNSTREAM GB RMO446040103 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105810-001
PRESSURE ITN66433 MB 800 40 Gage
PT -108 96FG-1 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER UPSTREAM SRGC VALVE PRESSURE LOC RTO916761092 HONEYWELL 0.35 0 L=17.5 H=0.25 bar Ex-n/d IIC SOM5105810-001 1
ITN66624 STG 140 35 30 Gage T4
PT -109 A 96FG-2A PRESSURE TRANSMITTER INTERSTAGE FUEL GAS LOC RTO919581700 DRUCK 0 0 H=0.25 bar Ex-d IIC T4 SOM5105810-001 1
SOM5085761 PTX7900 SERIES 24.1 20 Gage
PT -109 B 96FG-2B PRESSURE TRANSMITTER INTERSTAGE FUEL GAS LOC RTO919581700 DRUCK 0 0 H=0.25 bar Ex-d IIC T4 SOM5105810-001 1
PT -109 C 96FG-2C PRESSURE TRANSMITTER INTERSTAGE FUEL GAS LOC RTO919581700 DRUCK 0 0 H=0.25 bar Ex-d IIC T4 SOM5105810-001 1
TE -104 A TG-FG-1 RTD FUEL GAS TEMPERATURE INLET LOC RPO263981000 THERMOENGINEERING -20 0 L=25 H=70 LL=20 I1=30 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105810-001 REV. AS PER SR#90060669 3
ITN62698 RTD Pt100 3 WIRES 120 100 I2=25 I3=20
TE -104 B TG-FG-2 RTD FUEL GAS TEMPERATURE INLET LOC RPO263981000 THERMOENGINEERING -20 0 L=25 H=70 LL=20 I1=30 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105810-001 REV. AS PER SR#90060669 3
TE -104 C TG-FG-3 RTD FUEL GAS TEMPERATURE INLET LOC RPO263981000 THERMOENGINEERING -20 0 L=25 H=70 LL=20 I1=30 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105810-001 REV. AS PER SR#90060669 3
TW -104 A THERMOWELL FUEL GAS TEMPERATURE INLET LOC SUPPLY WITH THERMOENGINEERING N.A. SOM5105810-001 1
ITN66436
TW -104 B THERMOWELL FUEL GAS TEMPERATURE INLET LOC SUPPLY WITH THERMOENGINEERING N.A. SOM5105810-001 1
TG-FG-2
TW -104 C THERMOWELL FUEL GAS TEMPERATURE INLET LOC SUPPLY WITH THERMOENGINEERING N.A. SOM5105810-001 1
TG-FG-3
ZCV -306 65GC SERVOVALVE GAS CONTROL VALVE LOC RVO29264 MOOG None Ex-i SOM5105810-001 1
SOM25168 771K200
ZCV -307 90SR SERVOVALVE STOP/SPEED RATIO VALVE LOC RVO29264 MOOG None Ex-i SOM5105810-001 1
SOM25168 G771K200
ZSL -100 33VG-2 LIMIT SWITCH WARM-UP LINE VENT VALVE LOC SUPPLY WITH HONEYWELL L=CLOSED None Ex-d SOM5105810-001
VG-2
ZT -101 A 96SR-1 LVDT STOP/RATIO VALVE LVDT LOC RTO72504 KAVLICO % Ex-nA II T3 SOM5105810-001 1
SOM14388 GM 7112
ZT -101 B 96SR-2 LVDT STOP/RATIO VALVE LVDT LOC RTO72504 KAVLICO % Ex-nA II T3 SOM5105810-001 1
SOM14388 GM 7112
ZT -102 A 96GC-1 LVDT GAS CONTROL VALVE LVDT LOC RTO72504 KAVLICO % Ex-nA II T3 SOM5105810-001 1
SOM14388 GM 7112
TITLE DOCUMENT CODE REVISION

FIELD INSTRUMENT LIST SOM6623260 3
REVISION DESCRIPTION PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE

AS BUILT: REVISED WHERE INDICATED <3> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1705713÷15 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF NUOVO PIGNONE S.R.L. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED SHEET
TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF NUOVO PIGNONE S.R.L.. UNPUBLISHED WORK © 2013 NUOVO PIGNONE S.R.L. ALL RIGHT RESERVED 2 of 25
MIN MIN
ZT -102 B 96GC-2 LVDT GAS CONTROL VALVE LVDT LOC RTO72504 KAVLICO % Ex-nA II T3 SOM5105810-001 1
SOM14388 GM 7112
FCV -120 VGS-3 FLOW CONTROL VALVE FUEL GAS VALVE LOC RVO55155 MOOG None N.A. SOM5105810-002 1
SOM58838 80-090-2
PDI -114 PDI-18 D.P. INDICATOR FUEL GAS TEMPORARY FILTER LOC RMO446140001 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105810-002 1
ITN66434 MDM 1205/200 0.4
PDI -117 PDI-17 D.P. INDICATOR FUEL GAS TEMPORARY FILTER LOC RMO446140001 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105810-002 1
ITN66434 MDM 1205/200 0.4
PI -118 PI-22 PRESSURE INDICATOR PRIMARY LINE GB RMO446030103 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105810-002
ITN66433 MB 800 25 Gage
PI -119 PI-16 PRESSURE INDICATOR SECONDARY LINE GB RMO446030103 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105810-002
ITN66433 MB 800 25 Gage
ZCV -316 65GS SERVOVALVE GAS CONTROL VALVE SERVO VALVE LOC REO04973 MOOG None Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105810-002 1
SOM25168 G771K226
ZT -106 A 96GS-1 LVDT FUEL GAS VALVE LOC SUPPLY WITH MOOG % Ex-n SOM5105810-002 1
VGS-3
ZT -106 B 96GS-2 LVDT (DV) GAS FUEL SPLITTER VALVE LOC SUPPLY WITH MOOG % Ex-n SOM5105810-002 1
LVDT VGS-3
FCV -206 VA2-2 ANTISURGE CONTROL AXIAL COMPRESSOR ANTISURGE LOC RVO27443 MASONEILAN None N.A. SOM5105820-001
VALVE CONTROL VALVE RV 27221 36000 SERIES
FCV -208 VA2-1 ANTISURGE CONTROL AXIAL COMPRESSOR ANTISURGE LOC RVO27443 MASONEILAN None N.A. SOM5105820-001
VALVE CONTROL VALVE RV 27221 36000 SERIES
FO -203 FLOW ORIFICE PURGE LINE ORIFICE LOC N.P. STD 56 mm N.A. SOM5105820-001 2
STD MNF
FO -204 FLOW ORIFICE WHEEL SPACE COOLING LINE LOC N.P. STD 53.9 mm N.A. SOM5105820-001 2
ORIFICE STD MNF
FO -205 FLOW ORIFICE AXIAL COMPRESSOR ANTISURGE LOC N.P. STD 105.4 mm N.A. SOM5105820-001 2
LINE ORIFICE STD MNF
FO -207 FLOW ORIFICE BEARING #2 SEAL LINE ORIFICE LOC N.P. STD 4.7 mm N.A. SOM5105820-001 2
STD MNF
FO -209 FLOW ORIFICE AXIAL COMPRESSOR ANTISURGE LOC N.P. STD 105.4 mm N.A. SOM5105820-001 2
LINE ORIFICE STD MNF
FO -210 FLOW ORIFICE WHEEL SPACE COOLING LINE LOC N.P. STD 53.9 mm N.A. SOM5105820-001 2
ORIFICE STD MNF
FO -211 FLOW ORIFICE PURGE LINE ORIFICE LOC N.P. STD 56 mm N.A. SOM5105820-001 2
STD MNF
FO -213 FLOW ORIFICE BRG#1 SEALING AIR LINE ORIFICE LOC N.P. STD 7.2 mm N.A. SOM5105820-001 2
STD MNF
FO -214 FLOW ORIFICE AIR SEPARATOR DRAIN LINE LOC N.P. STD 5.5 mm N.A. SOM5105820-001 2
ORIFICE STD MNF
FO -215 FLOW ORIFICE BEARING #2 B.N. PROBE COOLING LOC N.P. STD 4.5 mm N.A. SOM5105820-001 2
STD MNF
FO -365 FLOW ORIFICE BLEED AIR LOCAL DRAIN LOC N.P. STD 0.8 mm N.A. SOM5105820-001 2
STD MNF
FV -212 20CB-1 SOLENOID VALVE VA2-1/2 VALVES ACTUATION LOC REO05301 LAURENCE None Ex-nA II T4 SOM5105820-001 1
SOM6617686 AE3315788002CE
FV -348 VA20-1 FLOW CONTROL VALVE COMPRESSOR BLEED CONTROL LOC RVO0022386 MASONEILAN None N.A. SOM5105820-001 2
VALVE RV 0022386 87-41435
FY -351 65EP-3 I/P CONVERTER COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE I/P LOC SUPPLY WITH MASONEILAN None Ex-d SOM5105820-001 2
CONVERTER VA20-1 SVI
PCV -357 VPR41-1 PRESS. SELF REGULATING INSTRUMENT AIR REGULATION LOC RVO0022386 HERION 1.4 bar N.A. SOM5105820-001 2
VALVE RV 0022386 V100 Gage
PDT -216 A 96BD-1 D.P. TRANSMITTER TOTAL BELL MOUTH DIFFERENTIAL LOC RTO827531092 HONEYWELL 2.5 0 mbar Ex-n/d SOM5105820-001 1
PRESSURE ITN66622 STD 120 1000 100
PDT -216 B 96BD-2 D.P. TRANSMITTER TOTAL BELL MOUTH DIFFERENTIAL LOC RTO827531092 HONEYWELL 2.5 0 mbar Ex-n/d SOM5105820-001 1


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
PDT -216 C 96BD-3 D.P. TRANSMITTER TOTAL BELL MOUTH DIFFERENTIAL LOC RTO827531092 HONEYWELL 2.5 0 mbar Ex-n/d SOM5105820-001 1
PDT -217 96CS-1 D.P. TRANSMITTER INLET PLENUM DIFFERENTIAL LOC RTO827531092 HONEYWELL 0.0025 0.005 bar Ex-n/d SOM5105820-001 1
PI -357 PRESSURE INDICATOR INSTRUMENT AIR REGULATION LOC SUPPLY WITH MASONEILAN bar N.A. SOM5105820-001 2
VA20-1 Gage
PT -355 96BH-1 PRESSURE INDICATOR BLEED AIR PRESSURE UPSTREAM LOC RTO916761092 HONEYWELL 0 bar Ex-d SOM5105820-001 2
TRANSMITTER VA20-1 ITN66624 STG 140 20 Gage
PT -356 96BH-2 PRESSURE INDICATOR BLEED AIR PRESSURE LOC RTO916761092 HONEYWELL 0 bar Ex-d SOM5105820-001 2
TRANSMITTER DOWNSTREAM VA20-1 ITN66624 STG 140 20 Gage
SOV -216 SOLENOID VALVE AIR EIECTOR CONTROL VALVE LOC REO05426 COAX None Ex-me II T4 SOM5105820-001 2
RE-05426 MK 25 DR NC Ex
TE -340 CT-BD-1 THERMOCOUPLE BLEED AIR TEMPERATURE LOC RPO263991560 THERMOENGINEERING 0 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105820-001 2
ITN62698 TC/K 600
TW -340 THERMOWELL BLEED AIR TEMPERATURE LOC SUPPLY WITH THERMOENGINEERING N.A. SOM5105820-001
TE-340
XV -216 ON/OFF VALVE AIR EIECTOR FLOW CONTROL VALVE LOC RVO60682 EMERSON PROCESS None Ex-d SOM5105820-001 2
RV-68682
XV -217 ON/OFF VALVE AIR EIECTOR FLOW CONTROL VALVE LOC RVO60682 EMERSON PROCESS None Ex-d SOM5105820-001 2
RV-68682
XY -350 20TH-1 SOLENOID VALVE TRIP SOLENOID BLEED CONTROL LOC RVO0022386 ASCO None Ex-d SOM5105820-001 2
VALVE RV 0022386 NF8327B002
ZSH -200 33CB-2 LIMIT SWITCH VA2-2 ANTISURGE VALVE OPEN LOC SUPPLY WITH TOPWORX/GO SWITCH H=OPEN None Ex-d IIC T3 SOM5105820-001
VA2-2 SERIES 7
ZSH -201 33CB-1 LIMIT SWITCH VA2-1 ANTISURGE VALVE OPEN LOC SUPPLY WITH TOPWORX/GO SWITCH H=OPEN None Ex-d IIC T3 SOM5105820-001
VA2-1 SERIES 7
ZSH -216 LIMIT SWITCH AIR EIECTOR CONTROL VALVE - LOC RVO60682 GO-SWITCH H=OPEN None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105820-001 2
VALVE OPEN RV 60682 C73-1SB
ZSH -217 LIMIT SWITCH AIR EIECTOR CONTROL VALVE - LOC RVO60682 GO-SWITCH H=OPEN None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105820-001 2
VALVE OPEN RV 60682 C73-1SB
ZT -349 96TH-1 POSITION TRANSMITTER COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE LOC RVO0022386 MASONEILAN % Ex-d SOM5105820-001 2
POSITION RV 0022386 BY MNF
BE -200 P 28FD-2P FLAME DETECTOR FLAME DETECTOR COMB. CHAMB. #2 LOC RRO63369 HONEYWELL LL=SEE CTR'L SPEC. % Ex-d IIA T3 SOM5105821-001
PRIMARY SOM18067 LG 1093AA44
BE -200 S 28FD-2S FLAME DETECTOR FLAME DETECTOR COMB. CHAMB. #2 LOC RRO63369 HONEYWELL LL=SEE CTR'L SPEC. % Ex-d IIA T3 SOM5105821-001
SECONDARY SOM18067 LG 1093AA44
KE -200 XPH KEY PHASOR PROBE KEY PHASOR LOC RJO06418 BENTLY NEVADA None Ex-n SOM5105821-001 1
ITN63002 3300XL
KT -200 KEY PHASOR PROBE KEY PHASOR LOC RJO05385 BENTLY NEVADA None Ex-n SOM5105821-001 1
PROXIMITOR ITN63002 330180-91-05
PDT -213 96EA-1 D.P. TRANSMITTER EXHAUST DUCT BACK- PRESSURE LOC RTO82748 HONEYWELL 25 0 H=400 mmH2O Ex-n/d SOM5105821-001 1
ITN66622 STD 120 10000 1000
PI -215 PI-3 PRESSURE INDICATOR AXIAL COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE GB RMO446030103 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105821-001 2
ITN66433 MB 800 25 Gage


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
PT -214 A 96CD-1 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER AXIAL COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE LOC RTO721653333 ROSEMOUNT 1.3 0 CTRL_SET=set Damping bar Ex-d SOM5105821-001 1
ITN66186 3051 CG 144 30 Time = 0 sec. Gage
PT -214 B 96CD-2 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER AXIAL COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE LOC RTO721653333 ROSEMOUNT 1.3 0 CTRL_SET=set Damping bar Ex-d SOM5105821-001 1
PT -214 C 96CD-3 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER AXIAL COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE LOC RTO721653333 ROSEMOUNT 1.3 0 CTRL_SET=set Damping bar Ex-d SOM5105821-001 1
SE -200 A 77NH-1 SPEED PROBE MAGNETIC PICKUP - TURBINE LOC RJO04868 AI-TEK 0 HH=5610 rpm Ex-nA SOM5105821-001 1
SPEED (OVSP) SOM14463 70085-1010235 6000
SE -200 B 77NH-2 SPEED PROBE MAGNETIC PICKUP - TURBINE LOC RJO04868 AI-TEK 0 HH=5610 rpm Ex-nA SOM5105821-001 1
SPEED (OVSP) SOM14463 70085-1010235 6000
SE -200 C 77NH-3 SPEED PROBE MAGNETIC PICKUP - TURBINE LOC RJO04868 AI-TEK 0 HH=5610 rpm Ex-nA SOM5105821-001 1
SPEED (OVSP) SOM14463 70085-1010235 6000
TE -203 A BT-TA-1A THERMOCOUPLE BEARING METAL TEMP.-THRUST LOC RTO65735 THERMOENGINEERING -17.7 0 H=115 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
ACTIVE SIDE SOM6608034 TC/K 260 150
TE -203 B BT-TA-1B THERMOCOUPLE BEARING METAL TEMP.-THRUST LOC RTO65735 THERMOENGINEERING -17.7 0 H=115 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
ACTIVE SIDE SOM6608034 TC/K 260 150
TE -204 A BT-TI-1A THERMOCOUPLE BEARING METAL TEMP.-THRUST LOC RTO68333 THERMOENGINEERING -17.7 0 H=115 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
INACTIVE SIDE RT 68333 TC/K 260 150
TE -204 B BT-TI-1B THERMOCOUPLE BEARING METAL TEMP.-THRUST LOC RTO68333 THERMOENGINEERING -17.7 0 H=115 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
INACTIVE SIDE RT 68333 TC/K 260 150
TE -205 A BT-JI-1A THERMOCOUPLE BEARING METAL TEMP.-TURBINE LOC RTO65735 THERMOENGINEERING -17.7 0 H=115 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
BEARING #1 SOM6608034 TC/K 260 150
TE -205 B BT-JI-1B THERMOCOUPLE BEARING METAL TEMP.-TURBINE LOC RTO65735 THERMOENGINEERING -17.7 0 H=115 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
BEARING #1 SOM6608034 TC/K 260 150
TE -206 A CT-IA-1 THERMOCOUPLE AXIAL COMPRESSOR INLET LOC RTO63829 THERMOENGINEERING -40 -40 None Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
TEMPERATURE ITN66522 TC/K 150 100
TE -206 B CT-IA-2 THERMOCOUPLE AXIAL COMPRESSOR INLET LOC RTO63829 THERMOENGINEERING -40 -40 None Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
TE -206 C CT-IA-3 THERMOCOUPLE AXIAL COMPRESSOR INLET LOC RTO63829 THERMOENGINEERING -40 -40 None Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001 2
TE -207 A CT-DA-1 THERMOCOUPLE AXIAL COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE LOC RTO65016 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
TE -207 B CT-DA-2 THERMOCOUPLE AXIAL COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE LOC RTO65016 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
TE -208 A TT-WS1FO-1 THERMOCOUPLE WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 1st STAGE LOC RTO65014 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=427 HH=457 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
FWD OUTER #1 ITN66521 TC/K 1250 600
TE -208 B TT-WS1FO-2 THERMOCOUPLE WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 1st STAGE LOC RTO65014 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=427 HH=457 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
FWD OUTER #2 ITN66521 TC/K 1250 600
TE -209 A TT-WS2FO-1 THERMOCOUPLE WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 2nd STAGE LOC RTO65880 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=427 HH=457 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
FWD OUTER #1 SOM25869 TC/K 1250 600
TE -209 B TT-WS2FO-2 THERMOCOUPLE WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 2nd STAGE LOC RTO65880 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=427 HH=457 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
FWD OUTER #2 SOM25869 TC/K 1250 600
TE -210 A BT-J2-1A THERMOCOUPLE BEARING METAL TEMP.-TURBINE LOC RTO65735 THERMOENGINEERING -17.7 0 H=115 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
BEARING #2 SOM6608034 TC/K 260 150
TE -210 B BT-J2-1B THERMOCOUPLE BEARING METAL TEMP.-TURBINE LOC RTO65735 THERMOENGINEERING -17.7 0 H=115 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
BEARING #2 SOM6608034 TC/K 260 150
TE -211 A TT-XD-1 THERMOCOUPLE EXHAUST TEMPERATURE LOC RTO65970 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=574 HH=582 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001 1
THERMOCOUPLE ITN66520 TC/K 760 600
TE -211 B TT-XD-2 THERMOCOUPLE EXHAUST TEMPERATURE LOC RTO65970 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=574 HH=582 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001 1
TE -211 C TT-XD-3 THERMOCOUPLE EXHAUST TEMPERATURE LOC RTO65970 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=574 HH=582 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001 1
TE -211 D TT-XD-4 THERMOCOUPLE EXHAUST TEMPERATURE LOC RTO65970 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=574 HH=582 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001 1
TE -211 E TT-XD-5 THERMOCOUPLE EXHAUST TEMPERATURE LOC RTO65970 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=574 HH=582 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001 1


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
TE -211 F TT-XD-6 THERMOCOUPLE EXHAUST TEMPERATURE LOC RTO65970 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=574 HH=582 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001 1
TE -211 G TT-XD-7 THERMOCOUPLE EXHAUST TEMPERATURE LOC RTO65970 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=574 HH=582 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001 1
TE -211 H TT-XD-8 THERMOCOUPLE EXHAUST TEMPERATURE LOC RTO65970 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=574 HH=582 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001 1
TE -211 I TT-XD-9 THERMOCOUPLE EXHAUST TEMPERATURE LOC RTO65970 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=574 HH=582 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001 1
TE -211 J TT-XD-10 THERMOCOUPLE EXHAUST TEMPERATURE LOC RTO65970 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=574 HH=582 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001 1
TE -211 K TT-XD-11 THERMOCOUPLE EXHAUST TEMPERATURE LOC RTO65970 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=574 HH=582 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001 1
TE -211 L TT-XD-12 THERMOCOUPLE EXHAUST TEMPERATURE LOC RTO65970 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=574 HH=582 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001 1
TE -211 M TT-XD-13 THERMOCOUPLE EXHAUST TEMPERATURE LOC RTO65970 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=574 HH=582 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001 1
TE -212 A BT-J2-2A THERMOCOUPLE BEARING METAL TEMP.-TURBINE LOC RTO65735 THERMOENGINEERING -17.7 0 H=115 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
BEARING #2 SOM6608034 TC/K 260 150
TE -212 B BT-J2-2B THERMOCOUPLE BEARING METAL TEMP.-TURBINE LOC RTO65735 THERMOENGINEERING -17.7 0 H=115 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
BEARING #2 SOM6608034 TC/K 260 150
TE -213 A TT-WS2AO-1 THERMOCOUPLE WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 2nd STAGE LOC RTO65015 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=427 HH=457 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
AFT OUTER #1 ITN66521 TC/K 1250 600
TE -213 B TT-WS2AO-2 THERMOCOUPLE WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 2nd STAGE LOC RTO65015 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=427 HH=457 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
AFT OUTER #2 ITN66521 TC/K 1250 600
TE -214 A TT-WS1AO-1 THERMOCOUPLE WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 1st STAGE AFT LOC RTO65880 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=427 HH=457 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
OUTER #1 SOM25869 TC/K 1250 600
TE -214 B TT-WS1AO-2 THERMOCOUPLE WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 1st STAGE AFT LOC RTO65880 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 H=427 HH=457 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
OUTER #2 SOM25869 TC/K 1250 600
TE -215 A BT-JI-2A THERMOCOUPLE BEARING METAL TEMP.-TURBINE LOC RTO65735 THERMOENGINEERING -17.7 0 H=115 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
BEARING #1 SOM6608034 TC/K 260 150
TE -215 B BT-JI-2B THERMOCOUPLE BEARING METAL TEMP.-TURBINE LOC RTO65735 THERMOENGINEERING -17.7 0 H=115 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
BEARING #1 SOM6608034 TC/K 260 150
TE -216 A BT-TA-2A THERMOCOUPLE BEARING METAL TEMP.-THRUST LOC RTO68333 THERMOENGINEERING -17.7 0 H=115 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
ACTIVE SIDE RT 68333 TC/K 260 150
TE -216 B BT-TA-2B THERMOCOUPLE BEARING METAL TEMP.-THRUST LOC RTO68333 THERMOENGINEERING -17.7 0 H=115 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105821-001
ACTIVE SIDE RT 68333 TC/K 260 150
VE -209 A 39V-1A SEISMIC PROBE TURBINE BRG.#1 VIBRATION LOC RTO00319 METRIX 2.54 2.54 H=12.7 HH=25.4 mm/s Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 2
SOM13051 5485C 006 25.4 25.4
VE -209 B 39V-1B SEISMIC PROBE TURBINE BRG.#1 VIBRATION LOC RTO00319 METRIX 2.54 2.54 H=12.7 HH=25.4 mm/s Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 2
SOM13051 5485C 006 25.4 25.4
VE -210 A 39V-2A SEISMIC PROBE TURBINE CASING VIBRATION LOC RTO00319 METRIX 2.54 2.54 H=12.7 HH=25.4 mm/s Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 2
SOM13051 5485C 006 25.4 25.4
VE -210 B 39V-2B SEISMIC PROBE TURBINE CASING VIBRATION LOC RTO00319 METRIX 2.54 2.54 H=12.7 HH=25.4 mm/s Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 2
SOM13051 5485C 006 25.4 25.4
XE -206 XE-1X VIBRATION PROBE TURBINE BRG.#1 RADIAL LOC RJO06419 BENTLY NEVADA 0 0 H=110 micron Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 2
DISPLACEMENT ITN63002 3300XL 2000 200
XE -207 XE-2X VIBRATION PROBE TURBINE BRG.#2 RADIAL LOC RJO20858 BENTLY NEVADA 0 0 H=110 micron Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 2
XE -208 XE-2Y VIBRATION PROBE TURBINE BRG.#2 RADIAL LOC RJO20858 BENTLY NEVADA 0 0 H=110 micron Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 2
XE -213 XE-1Y VIBRATION PROBE TURBINE BRG.#1 RADIAL LOC RJO06419 BENTLY NEVADA 0 0 H=110 micron Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 2
XT -206 XT-1X VIBRATION PROBE TURBINE BRG.#1 RADIAL LOC RJO05385 BENTLY NEVADA 0 0 H=110 micron Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 2
PROXIMITOR DISPLACEMENT ITN63002 330180-91-05 2000 200
XT -207 XT-2X VIBRATION PROBE TURBINE BRG.#2 RADIAL LOC RJO05385 BENTLY NEVADA 0 0 H=110 micron Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 2


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
XT -208 XT-2Y VIBRATION PROBE TURBINE BRG.#2 RADIAL LOC RJO05385 BENTLY NEVADA 0 0 H=110 micron Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 2
XT -213 XT-1Y VIBRATION PROBE TURBINE BRG.#1 RADIAL LOC RJO05385 BENTLY NEVADA 0 0 H=110 micron Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 2
XX -209 B 95SP-10 POWER SUPPLY SPARK PLUG COMBUSTION LOC SMO31101 N.P. STD None N.A SOM5105821-001
CHAMBER #10 SM 31101
XX -210 B 95TR-10 POWER SUPPLY IGNITION TRANSFORMER COMB. LOC RTO44400 ALTA None Ex-d IIB T6 SOM5105821-001 1
CHAMBER #10 SOM6607765
XX -211 A 95SP-1 POWER SUPPLY SPARK PLUG-COMBUSTION LOC SMO31101 N.P. STD None N.A SOM5105821-001
CHAMBER #1 SM 31101
XX -212 A 95TR-1 POWER SUPPLY IGNITION TRANSFORMER COMB. LOC RTO44400 ALTA None Ex-d IIB T6 SOM5105821-001 1
CHAMBER #1 SOM6607765
ZE -203 XZ-1 DISPLACEMENT PROBE HP ROTOR AXIAL DISPLACEMENT LOC RJO06417 BENTLY NEVADA 0 -1 H=±0.6 mm Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 1
ITN63002 3300XL 2 1
ZE -204 XZ-2 DISPLACEMENT PROBE HP ROTOR AXIAL DISPLACEMENT LOC RJO06417 BENTLY NEVADA 0 -1 H=±0.6 mm Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 1
ITN63002 3300XL 2 1
ZT -203 XT-1 DISPLACEMENT PROBE HP ROTOR AXIAL DISPLACEMENT LOC RJO05385 BENTLY NEVADA 0 -1 H=±0.6 mm Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 1
PROXIMITOR ITN63002 330180-91-05 2 1
ZT -204 XT-2 DISPLACEMENT PROBE HP ROTOR AXIAL DISPLACEMENT LOC RJO05385 BENTLY NEVADA 0 -1 H=±0.6 mm Ex-nA IIC SOM5105821-001 1
PROXIMITOR ITN63002 330180-91-05 2 1
FCV -324 90TV-1 SERVOVALVE TURBINE IGV ACTUATION LOC RVO29264 MOOG Ex-nA IIC SOM5105830-001 1
SOM25168 G771K200 T3/T4
FCV -325 VC-1 FLOW CONTROL VALVE IGV SPEED CLOSURE CONTROL LOC RVO59192 REXROTH HOLD bar N.A. SOM5105830-001 1
RV-59192 2FRMIO-3X/10L Gage
FO -323 FLOW ORIFICE HYDRAULIC OIL FILTERS BY-PASS LOC N.P. STD 3 mm N.A. SOM5105830-001 2
N.A.
FV -326 20HR-1 SOLENOID VALVE HYDRAULIC RATCHET SELF LOC REO04400 ATOS None Ex-d IIC SOM5105830-001 1
SEQUENCING VALVES SOM33068 DHA-063 1/2 PA/NPT/PE T6/T4/T3
HS -300 43HR HAND SWITCH HYDRAULIC RATCHET CONTROL LOC RPO43014 STAHL None Ex-d SOM5105830-001 1
SWITCH RP-43014 EFD T3/T4/T5
PCV -320 VPR3-1 PRESS. SELF REGULATING COMPENSATOR-HYDRAULIC OIL LOC RVO09412 YOUNG & FRANKLIN 80 bar N.A. SOM5105830-001 1
VALVE PUMP DISCHARGE SOM47506 YF1290100-4 Gage
PDI -322 PDI-4 D.P. INDICATOR HYDR. OIL FILTERS DIFFERENTIAL GB RMO446200101 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105830-001
PRESSURE ITN66434 MDM 1205/200 10
PDT -323 96HF-1 D.P. TRANSMITTER HYDR. OIL FILTERS DIFFERENTIAL GB RTO827540390 HONEYWELL 0.35 0 H=5 bar Ex-n/d SOM5105830-001
PRESSURE ITN66622 STD 130 6.89 6
PI -325 PI-11 PRESSURE INDICATOR HYDRAULIC OIL HEADER PRESSURE GB RMO446070103 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105830-001
ITN66433 MB 800 160 Gage
PSV -318 VR-22 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE AUX. HYDRAULIC PUMP DISCHARGE LOC RVO45002 ABEX DENISON 75 bar N.A. SOM5105830-001 2
RELIEF SOM25279 R2V12-333 Gage
PSV -321 VR-21 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMP DISCHARGE LOC RVO45002 ABEX DENISON 90 bar N.A. SOM5105830-001 2
RELIEF SOM25279 R2V12-333 Gage
PSV -326 VRS-1 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE HYDRAULIC RATCHET PUMP LOC RVO15999 TELEDYNE 55 bar N.A. SOM5105830-001 2
DELIVERY RV-15999 665-9 1-1/4-SS-28 Gage
PT -324 96HQ-1 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER HYDRAULIC OIL HEADER PRESSURE GB RTO916770390 HONEYWELL 7 0 L=65 bar Ex-n/d SOM5105830-001
ITN66624 STG 170 210 100 Gage
ZSL - 300 33HR1 LIMIT SWITCH HYDRAULLIC RATCHET VALVE SUPPLY WITH TELEDYNE Ex-d SOM5105830-001 2
POSITION PCV-327
ZT -301 A 96TV-1 LVDT TURBINE IGV POSITION LOC SUPPLY WITH KAVLICO None Ex-nA SOM5105830-001
IGV GM 7208
ZT -301 B 96TV-2 LVDT TURBINE IGV POSITION LOC SUPPLY WITH KAVLICO None Ex-nA SOM5105830-001
IGV GM 7208
FG -301 A FLOW GLASS LUBE OIL FL-1A FILTER DRAIN LOC SUPPLY WITH N.P. STD N.A. SOM5105831-001 2
FL-1A N.A.
FG -301 B FLOW GLASS LUBE OIL FL-1B FILTER DRAIN LOC SUPPLY WITH N.P. STD N.A. SOM5105831-001 2
FL-1B N.A.


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
FO -300 A FLOW ORIFICE LUBE OIL FL-1A FILTER DRAIN LOC SUPPLY WITH N.P. STD 2.5 mm N.A. SOM5105831-001 2
FL-1A N.A.
FO -300 B FLOW ORIFICE LUBE OIL FL-1B FILTER DRAIN LOC SUPPLY WITH N.P. STD 2.5 mm N.A. SOM5105831-001 2
FL-1B N.A.
FO -300 C FLOW ORIFICE LUBE OIL FILTERS - BY-PASS LINE LOC N.P. STD 3 mm N.A. SOM5105831-001 2
N.A.
FO -302 FLOW ORIFICE LUBE OIL AFTER FILTERS LOC N.P. STD 62 mm N.A. SOM5105831-001 2
N.A.
FO -328 FLOW ORIFICE LUBE OIL FILTERS VENT LOC N.P. STD HOLD mm N.A. SOM5105831-001 2
N.A.
FO -333 FLOW ORIFICE LUBE OIL FILTERS VENT LOC N.P. STD 2 mm N.A. SOM5105831-001 2
N.A.
LG -300 LEVEL GLASS LUBE OIL TANK LEVEL LOC RJO230340900 BONETTI 0 mm N.A. SOM5105831-001
ITN66024 BR23-G12 318
LT -301 96QL1 LEVEL TRANSMITTER LUBE OIL TANK LOC RTO827530390 HONEYWELL 0 L=450 H=100 mm Ex-n/d SOM5105831-001
ITN66622 STD 120 600
PCV -303 VR-1 BACK PRESS.CONTROL LUBE OIL MAIN PUMP DRAIN LOC RVO42095 O.C. KECKLEY 7.5 bar N.A. SOM5105831-001 2
VALVE SOM18380/4 NO. 135 Gage
PCV -306 VPR-2 BACK PRESS.CONTROL LUBE OIL PRESSURE REGULATOR LOC RVO45763 MASONEILAN CTRL_SET=1.72 bar N.A. SOM5105831-001 2
VALVE SOM19387/4 526 Gage
PDI -301 PDI-2 D.P. INDICATOR LUBE OIL TANK INTERNAL GB RMO46550 TE.MA. -125 mmH2O N.A. SOM5105831-001
PRESSURE SOM6607493 MDM 1205 125
PDI -307 PDI-1 D.P. INDICATOR LUBE OIL FILTERS HEADER GB RMO446170101 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105831-001
ITN66434 MDM 1205/200 2.5
PDT -300 A 96QV-1A D.P. TRANSMITTER LUBE OIL TANK INTERNAL GB RTO827570390 HONEYWELL 10 0 H=20 HH=50 mmH2O Ex-n/d SOM5105831-001
PDT -300 B 96QV-1B D.P. TRANSMITTER LUBE OIL TANK INTERNAL GB RTO827570390 HONEYWELL 10 0 H=20 HH=50 mmH2O Ex-n/d SOM5105831-001
PDT -300 C 96QV-1C D.P. TRANSMITTER LUBE OIL TANK INTERNAL GB RTO827570390 HONEYWELL 10 0 H=20 HH=50 mmH2O Ex-n/d SOM5105831-001
PDT -308 96QQ-1 D.P. TRANSMITTER LUBE OIL FILTERS HEADER GB RTO827540390 HONEYWELL 0.35 0 H=1.7 bar Ex-n/d SOM5105831-001
ITN66622 STD 130 6.89 2.5
PI -302 PI-1 PRESSURE INDICATOR LUBE OIL MAIN PUMP GB RMO446020103 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105831-001
ITN66433 MB 800 16 Gage
PI -304 PI-4 PRESSURE INDICATOR LUBE OIL EMERGENCY PUMP GB RMO446000103 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105831-001 1
ITN66433 MB 800 6 Gage
PI -305 PI-2 PRESSURE INDICATOR LUBE OIL STAND-BY PUMP GB RMO446020103 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105831-001
ITN66433 MB 800 16 Gage
TE -305 A LT-TH-1A THERMOCOUPLE LUBE OIL HEADER LOC RPO26927 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 L=50 H=65 HH=70 I1=55 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105831-001
SOM6607866 TC/K 1260 100
TE -305 B LT-TH-1B THERMOCOUPLE LUBE OIL HEADER LOC RPO26927 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 L=50 H=65 HH=70 I1=55 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105831-001
SOM6607866 TC/K 1260 100
TE -305 C LT-TH-1C THERMOCOUPLE LUBE OIL HEADER LOC RPO26927 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 L=50 H=65 HH=70 I1=55 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105831-001
SOM6607866 TC/K 1260 100
TE -307 LT-OT-1 THERMOCOUPLE LUBE OIL TANK LOC RPO26928 THERMOENGINEERING 0 0 L=20 I1=25 I2=30 ºC Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105831-001
SOM6607866 TC/K 1260 100
TSHH -300 49QT-1 TEMPERATURE SWITCH LUBE OIL TANK HEATER CUT OUT LOC RRO275442851E FATI 85 ºC Ex-d IIB T3 SOM5105831-001
ITN61522.02 RM 85
ITN61522.02 RM 85
ITN61522.02 RM 85
ITN61522.02 RM 85
TW -305 A THERMOWELL LUBE OIL HEADER LOC SUPPLY WITH THERMOENGINEERING N.A. SOM5105831-001 2
TE 305 A N.P. STD


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
TW -305 B THERMOWELL LUBE OIL HEADER LOC SUPPLY WITH THERMOENGINEERING N.A. SOM5105831-001 2
TE 305 B N.P. STD
TW -305 C THERMOWELL LUBE OIL HEADER LOC SUPPLY WITH THERMOENGINEERING N.A. SOM5105831-001 2
TE 305 C N.P. STD
TW -307 THERMOWELL LUBE OIL TANK LOC SUPPLY WITH THERMOENGINEERING N.A. SOM5105831-001 2
TE 307 N.P. STD
FG -305 FLOW GLASS ACCESSORY GEAR COUPLING LOC N.P. STD None N.A. SOM5105831-002 2
DRAIN N.A.
FG -306 FLOW GLASS LUBE SYSTEM THRUST/JOURNAL LOC N.P. STD None N.A. SOM5105831-002 2
BRG. DRAIN N.A.
FG -307 FLOW GLASS LUBE SYSTEM JOURNAL BRG. #2 LOC N.P. STD N.A. SOM5105831-002 2
DRAIN N.A.
TE -311 LTBT1D-1 THERMOCOUPLE LUBE SYSTEM THRUST BRG. DRAIN LOC RTO63487 THERMOENGINEERING -20 0 H=100 None Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105831-002
ITN66522 TC/K 120 120
TE -312 LTB1D-A THERMOCOUPLE LUBE SYSTEM JOURNAL BRG. #1 LOC RTO69361 THERMOENGINEERING -20 0 H=100 None Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105831-002
DRAIN ITN66522 TC/K 120 120
TE -313 LTB2D-1 THERMOCOUPLE LUBE SYSTEM JOURNAL BRG. #2 LOC RPO26926 THERMOENGINEERING -20 0 H=100 None Ex-nA IIC T4 SOM5105831-002
DRAIN SOM6607866 TC/K 120 120
TW -313 THERMOWELL LUBE SYSTEM JOURNAL BRG. #2 LOC SUPPLY WITH THERMOENGINEERING N.A. SOM5105831-002 2
DRAIN TE 313 N.P. STD
FG -352 FLOW GLASS LOAD GEAR LUBE OIL DISCHARGE LOC SUPPLY BY None N.A. SOM5105832-001 2
LOAD GEAR MFR
FG -355 FG-803 FLOW GLASS GENERATOR D.E. BEARING OIL LOC SUPPLY BY BRUSH-HMA None N.A. SOM5105832-001 2
DISCHARGE GENERATOR MFR
FG -356 FG-804 FLOW GLASS GENERATOR N.D.E. BEARING OIL LOC SUPPLY BY BRUSH-HMA None N.A. SOM5105832-001 2
DISCHARGE GENERATOR MFR
FO -351 FLOW ORIFICE LOAD GEAR LUBE OIL INLET LOC SUPPLY BY FULL mm N.A. SOM5105832-001 2
LOAD GEAR MFR BORE
FO -353 FO-802 FLOW ORIFICE LUBE OIL TO GENERATOR BEARING LOC SUPPLY BY BRUSH-HMA 6 mm N.A. SOM5105832-001 2
GENERATOR MFR
FO -354 FO-801 FLOW ORIFICE LUBE OIL TO GENERATOR BEARING LOC SUPPLY BY BRUSH-HMA 6 mm N.A. SOM5105832-001 2
GENERATOR MFR
KE -351 KEY PHASOR PROBE LOAD GEAR WHEEL SHAFT LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA None Ex-nA IIC SOM5105832-001 2
LOAD GEAR MFR 330105 02-12-05-02-05
KT -351 KEY PHASOR PROBE LOAD GEAR WHEEL SHAFT LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA None Ex-nA IIC SOM5105832-001 2
PROXIMITOR LOAD GEAR MFR 330180 51-05
PI -309 PI-5 PRESSURE INDICATOR LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE GB SUPPLY BY bar N.A. SOM5105832-001 2
GENERATOR MFR Gage
PT -310 A 96QT-2A PRESSURE TRANSMITTER LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE GB SUPPLY BY ROSEMOUNT 0 L=1.2 LL=0.9 I1=1.4 I2=1.2 bar Ex-n SOM5105832-001 REV. AS PER SR#90049024 3
GENERATOR MFR 3051 TG 2 I3=0.9 Gage
PT -310 B 96QT-2B PRESSURE TRANSMITTER LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE GB SUPPLY BY ROSEMOUNT 0 L=1.2 LL=0.9 I1=1.4 I2=1.2 bar Ex-n SOM5105832-001 REV. AS PER SR#90049024 3
PT -310 C 96QT-2C PRESSURE TRANSMITTER LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE GB SUPPLY BY ROSEMOUNT 0 L=1.2 LL=0.9 I1=1.4 I2=1.2 bar Ex-n SOM5105832-001 REV. AS PER SR#90049024 3
TE -341 A26GJ-1A RTD LOAD GEAR PINION D.E. JOURNAL LOC SUPPLY BY THERMO EST H=120 HH=125 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105832-001 2
BRG LOAD GEAR MFR 08T020
TE -342 A26GJ-1B RTD LOAD GEAR PINION D.E. JOURNAL LOC SUPPLY BY THERMO EST H=120 HH=125 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105832-001 2
TE -343 A26GJ-2A RTD LOAD GEAR PINION N.D.E. JOURNAL LOC SUPPLY BY THERMO EST H=120 HH=125 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105832-001 2
TE -344 A26GJ-2B RTD LOAD GEAR PINION N.D.E. JOURNAL LOC SUPPLY BY THERMO EST H=120 HH=125 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105832-001 2
TE -345 RTD LOAD GEAR PINION THRUST BRG LOC SUPPLY BY THERMO EST H=120 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105832-001 2
INACT. SIDE LOAD GEAR MFR 08T020
TE -346 RTD LOAD GEAR PINION THRUST BRG LOC SUPPLY BY THERMO EST H=120 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105832-001 2
ACTIVE SIDE LOAD GEAR MFR 08T020


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
TE -347 RTD LOAD GEAR PINION THRUST BRG LOC SUPPLY BY THERMO EST ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105832-001 2
INACT. SIDE LOAD GEAR MFR 08T020
TE -348 RTD LOAD GEAR PINION THRUST BRG LOC SUPPLY BY THERMO EST ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105832-001 2
ACTIVE SIDE LOAD GEAR MFR 08T020
TE -350 A26GJ-3A RTD LOAD GEAR WHEEL N.G.E. JOURNAL LOC SUPPLY BY THERMO EST H=120 HH=125 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105832-001 2
TE -351 A26GJ-3B RTD LOAD GEAR WHEEL N.G.E. JOURNAL LOC SUPPLY BY THERMO EST H=120 HH=125 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105832-001 2
TE -352 A26GJ-4A RTD LOAD GEAR WHEEL G.E. JOURNAL LOC SUPPLY BY THERMO EST H=120 HH=125 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105832-001 2
TE -353 A26GJ-4B RTD LOAD GEAR WHEEL G.E. JOURNAL LOC SUPPLY BY THERMO EST H=120 HH=125 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105832-001 2
TE -358 A GEP-1 RTD GENERATOR EXCITATION PANEL LOC SUPPLY BY LANGKAMP TECH. -100 ºC Ex-nA SOM5105832-001 2
TEMPERATURE GENERATOR MFR INSERT 200
TE -358 B GEP-2 RTD GENERATOR EXCITATION PANEL LOC SUPPLY BY LANGKAMP TECH. -100 ºC Ex-nA SOM5105832-001 2
TEMPERATURE GENERATOR MFR INSERT 200
TE -370 A A26EG-1A DOUBLE RTD GENERATOR D.E. JOURNAL LOC SUPPLY BY LANGKAMP TECH. -100 H=95 HH=110 ºC Ex-nA SOM5105832-001 2
BEARING GENERATOR MFR INSERT 200
TE -370 B A26EG-1B DOUBLE RTD GENERATOR D.E. JOURNAL LOC SUPPLY BY LANGKAMP TECH. -100 H=95 HH=110 ºC Ex-nA SOM5105832-001 2
BEARING GENERATOR MFR INSERT 200
TE -371 A26GAC1 RTD GENERATOR COOLING AIR - COLD LOC SUPPLY BY LANGKAMP TECH. -100 H=71 ºC Ex-nA SOM5105832-001 2
D.E. GENERATOR MFR INSERT 200
TE -372 A26GAW RTD GENERATOR COOLING AIR - WARM LOC SUPPLY BY LANGKAMP TECH. -100 H=105 ºC Ex-nA SOM5105832-001 2
GENERATOR MFR INSERT 200
TE -373 A26GAC2 RTD GENERATOR COOLING AIR - COLD LOC SUPPLY BY LANGKAMP TECH. -100 H=70 ºC Ex-nA SOM5105832-001 2
N.D.E. GENERATOR MFR INSERT 200
TE -374 A A26EG-2A DOUBLE RTD GENERATOR JOURNAL BEARING LOC SUPPLY BY LANGKAMP TECH. -100 H=95 HH=110 ºC Ex-nA SOM5105832-001 2
TEMP. GENERATOR MFR INSERT 200
TE -374 B A26EG-2B DOUBLE RTD JOURNAL BEARING GENERATOR LOC SUPPLY BY LANGKAMP TECH. -100 H=95 HH=110 ºC Ex-nA SOM5105832-001 2
GENERATOR MFR INSERT 200
TE -375 A26GWU-1 RTD WINDING GENERATOR PHASE U LOC SUPPLY BY ROSSEL -100 H=130 HH=150 ºC Ex-e SOM5105832-001 2
GENERATOR MFR STICK 200
TE -378 A26GWV-1 RTD WINDING GENERATOR PHASE V LOC SUPPLY BY ROSSEL -100 H=130 HH=150 ºC Ex-e SOM5105832-001 2
TE -381 A26GWW-1 RTD WINDING GENERATOR PHASE W LOC SUPPLY BY ROSSEL -100 H=130 HH=150 ºC Ex-e SOM5105832-001 2
TI -359 TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LOAD GEAR LUBE OIL DISCHARGE LCP SUPPLY BY ºC N.A. SOM5105832-001 2
LOAD GEAR MFR
VE -351 A18VG-1 ACCELEROMETER LOAD GEAR CASING ACCELER. LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA H=18 G Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
LOAD GEAR MFR 330500
VE -352 39V-4A ACCELEROMETER GENERATOR D.E. CASING ACCELER. LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA 0 0 H=4.5 HH=7.1 mm/s Ex-n SOM5105832-001 1
GENERATOR MFR 330500 1270 10
VE -353 39V-5A ACCELEROMETER GENERATOR N.D.E. CASING LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA 0 0 H=4.5 HH=7.1 mm/s Ex-n SOM5105832-001 1
ACCELER. GENERATOR MFR 330500 1270 10


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
XE -351 X A39VG-1X VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR PINION D.E. SHAFT X LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
RADIAL LOAD GEAR MFR 330105 02-12-05-02-05
XE -351 Y A39VG-1Y VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR PINION D.E. SHAFT Y LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
XE -352 X A39VG-2X VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR PINION N.D.E. SHAFT X LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
XE -352 Y A39VG-2Y VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR PINION N.D.E. SHAFT Y LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
XE -353 X A39VG-3X VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR WHEEL N.G.E. SHAFT X LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
XE -353 Y A39VG-3Y VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR WHEEL N.G.E. SHAFT Y LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
XE -354 X A39VG-4X VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR WHEEL G.E. SHAFT X LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
XE -354 Y A39VG-4Y VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR WHEEL G.E. SHAFT Y LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
XE -355 X A39VEG-1X VIBRATION PROBE GENERATOR D.E. JOURNAL BRG. X LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA 0 H=160 HH=240 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 1
DISPL. GENERATOR MFR 21000 SERIES 2000
XE -355 Y A39VEG-1Y VIBRATION PROBE GENERATOR D.E. JOURNAL BRG. Y LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA 0 H=160 HH=240 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 1
XE -356 X A39VEG-2X VIBRATION PROBE GENERATOR N.D.E. JOURNAL BRG. X LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA 0 H=160 HH=240 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 1
XE -356 Y A39VEG-2Y VIBRATION PROBE GENERATOR N.D.E. JOURNAL BRG. Y LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA 0 H=160 HH=240 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 1
XT -351 X VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR PINION D.E. SHAFT X LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA H=72 HH=107 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
PROXIMITOR RADIAL LOAD GEAR MFR 330180-51-05
XT -351 Y VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR PINION D.E. SHAFT Y LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA H=72 HH=107 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
XT -352 X VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR PINION N.D.E. SHAFT X LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA H=72 HH=107 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
XT -352 Y VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR PINION N.D.E. SHAFT Y LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA H=72 HH=107 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
XT -353 X VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR WHEEL N.G.E. SHAFT X LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA H=93 HH=138 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
XT -353 Y VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR WHEEL N.G.E. SHAFT Y LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA H=93 HH=138 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
XT -354 X VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR WHEEL G.E. SHAFT X LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA H=93 HH=138 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
XT -354 Y VIBRATION PROBE LOAD GEAR WHEEL G.E. SHAFT Y LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA H=93 HH=138 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
XT -355 X VIBRATION PROBE GENERATOR D.E. JOURNAL BRG. X LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA 0 H=160 HH=240 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 1
PROXIMITOR DISPL. GENERATOR MFR 330801 2000
XT -355 Y VIBRATION PROBE GENERATOR D.E. JOURNAL BRG. Y LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA 0 H=160 HH=240 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 1
XT -356 X VIBRATION PROBE GENERATOR N.D.E. JOURNAL BRG. X LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA 0 H=160 HH=240 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 1
XT -356 Y VIBRATION PROBE GENERATOR N.D.E. JOURNAL BRG. Y LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA 0 H=160 HH=240 micron Ex-n SOM5105832-001 1
ZE -351 A DISPLACEMENT PROBE LOAD GEAR PINION SHAFT AXIAL LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA mm Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
DISPLACEM. LOAD GEAR MFR 330105 02-12-05-02-05
ZE -351 B DISPLACEMENT PROBE LOAD GEAR PINION SHAFT AXIAL LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA mm Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
DISPLACEM. LOAD GEAR MFR 330105 02-12-05-02-05
ZT -351 A DISPLACEMENT PROBE LOAD GEAR PINION SHAFT AXIAL LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA H=+/- 0.40 HH=+/- 0.45 mm Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
PROXIMITOR DISPLACEM. LOAD GEAR MFR 330180 51-05
ZT -351 B DISPLACEMENT PROBE LOAD GEAR PINION SHAFT AXIAL LOC SUPPLY BY BENTLY NEVADA H=+/- 0.40 HH=+/- 0.45 mm Ex-n SOM5105832-001 2
PROXIMITOR DISPLACEM. LOAD GEAR MFR 330180 51-05


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
HS -391 A PUSH BUTTON ALARM RESET BUTTON LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
HS -391 B PUSH BUTTON ALARM RESET BUTTON LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
HS -392 A PUSH BUTTON LAMP TEST BUTTON LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
HS -392 B PUSH BUTTON LAMP TEST BUTTON LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
HS -393 A PUSH BUTTON START STOP BUTTON LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
HS -393 B PUSH BUTTON START STOP BUTTON LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
LSH -394 A LEVEL SWITCH WASTE WATER LEVEL TANK LOC SUPPLY BY PALL mm Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
LSH -394 B LEVEL SWITCH WASTE WATER LEVEL TANK LOC SUPPLY BY PALL mm Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
LSL -390 A LEVEL SWITCH OIL TANK LOW LEVEL ALARM LOC SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
LSL -390 B LEVEL SWITCH OIL TANK LOW LEVEL ALARM LOC SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
PDSH -395 A D.P. SWITCH FLUID OUTLET DIFF PRESSURE LOC SUPPLY BY PALL HH=2.4 bar Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SWITCH SKID MFR MFR. STD.
PDSH -395 B D.P. SWITCH FLUID OUTLET DIFF PRESSURE LOC SUPPLY BY PALL HH=2.4 bar Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SWITCH SKID MFR MFR. STD.
PI -390 A PRESSURE INDICATOR AIR EXHAUST PRESSURE GAUGE LP SUPPLY BY PALL None N.A. SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
PI -390 B PRESSURE INDICATOR AIR EXHAUST PRESSURE GAUGE LP SUPPLY BY PALL None N.A. SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
PI -392 A PRESSURE INDICATOR FLUID INLET PRESSURE GAUGE LP SUPPLY BY PALL None N.A. SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
PI -392 B PRESSURE INDICATOR FLUID INLET PRESSURE GAUGE LP SUPPLY BY PALL None N.A. SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
PI -394 A PRESSURE INDICATOR FLUID OUTLET PRESSURE GAUGE LP SUPPLY BY PALL None N.A. SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
PI -394 B PRESSURE INDICATOR FLUID OUTLET PRESSURE GAUGE LP SUPPLY BY PALL None N.A. SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
PSL -391 A PRESSURE SWITCH AIR EXHAUST PRESSURE SWITCH LOC SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
PSL -391 B PRESSURE SWITCH AIR EXHAUST PRESSURE SWITCH LOC SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
PSL -393 A PRESSURE SWITCH FLUID INLET PRESSURE SWITCH LOC SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
PSL -393 B PRESSURE SWITCH FLUID INLET PRESSURE SWITCH LOC SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
TI -390 A TEMPERATURE INDICATOR FLUID INLET TEMPERATURE LP SUPPLY BY PALL ºC N.A. SOM5105832-002 2
INDICATOR SKID MFR MFR. STD.
TI -390 B TEMPERATURE INDICATOR FLUID INLET TEMPERATURE LP SUPPLY BY PALL ºC N.A. SOM5105832-002 2
INDICATOR SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XL -391 A LAMP GREEN LAMP ELEC. POWER ON LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XL -391 B LAMP GREEN LAMP ELEC. POWER ON LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XL -392 A LAMP CLARIFIER GREEN LAMP UNIT LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
RUNNING SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XL -392 B LAMP CLARIFIER GREEN LAMP UNIT LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
RUNNING SKID MFR MFR. STD.


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
XL -393 A LAMP RED LAMP VESSEL VACUUM LOW LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XL -393 B LAMP RED LAMP VESSEL VACUUM LOW LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XL -394 A LAMP RED LAMP TANK FLUID LEVEL LOW LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XL -394 B LAMP RED LAMP TANK FLUID LEVEL LOW LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XL -395 A LAMP RED LAMP TANK FLUID LEVEL HIGH LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XL -395 B LAMP RED LAMP TANK FLUID LEVEL HIGH LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XL -396 A LAMP RED LAMP INLET VACUUM HIGH LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XL -396 B LAMP RED LAMP INLET VACUUM HIGH LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XL -397 A LAMP RED LAMP OUTLET FILTER BLOCKED LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XL -397 B LAMP RED LAMP OUTLET FILTER BLOCKED LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XL -398 A LAMP RED LAMP DIP TRAY FULL LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XL -398 B LAMP RED LAMP DIP TRAY FULL LP SUPPLY BY PALL None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR MFR. STD.
XY -390 A SOLENOID VALVE FLUID OUTLET SOLENOID VALVE LOC SUPPLY BY PARKER LUCIFER None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR
XY -390 B SOLENOID VALVE FLUID OUTLET SOLENOID VALVE LOC SUPPLY BY PARKER LUCIFER None Ex-d SOM5105832-002 2
SKID MFR
PI -380 PI-38 PRESSURE INDICATOR VAPOUR SEPARATOR INLET GB SUPPLY BY TE.MA. -600 mmH2O N.A. SOM5105834-001 2
PRESSURE SKID MFR 0
PI -381 PI-39 D.P. INDICATOR VAPOUR SEPARATOR OUTLET GB SUPPLY BY TE.MA. -150 mmH2O N.A. SOM5105834-001 1
PRESSURE SKID MFR 150
SG -382 LEVEL INDICATOR SIGHT GLASS VAPOUR SEPARATOR LOC SUPPLY BY None N.A. SOM5105834-001 1
OUTLET SKID MFR
INLET SKID MFR
SG -384 LEVEL INDICATOR SIGHT GLASS VAP. SEP. WASTE LOC SUPPLY BY None N.A. SOM5105834-001 1
LIQUID TANK SKID MFR
DRAIN BOX SKID MFR
FO -338 FLOW ORIFICE COOLER BY-PASS LOC SUPPLY BY 36 mm N.A. SOM5105836-001 1
SKID MFR
TCV -306 VTR-1 TEMPER. SELF THERMOSTATIC VALVE LOC RVO31097 ROBERT SHAW 55 ºC N.A. SOM5105836-001 2
REGULATING VALVE SOM19255 1010-A2
VSH -200 39QFC-1 VIBROSWITCH AIR COOLER MOTOR FAN VIBR. LOC SGO819248801 METRIX 0 0 H=2 G Ex-d IIB+H2 SOM5105836-001 2
MONITORING SG-8192488 5550 5 4.5 T6
MONITORING SG-8192488 5550 5 4.5 T6
MONITORING SG-8192488 5550 5 4.5 T6
XY -200 20QFC-1 RELAY UNIT AIR COOLER MOTOR FAN REMOTE LOC SGO819248801 METRIX None Ex-d IIB+H2 SOM5105836-001 2
RESET SG-8192488 5550 T6
RESET SG-8192488 5550 T6
RESET SG-8192488 5550 T6


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
FCV -330 20TU FLOW CONTROL VALVE TORQUE CONVERTER UNLOADING LOC REO04679 ATKOMATIC N.A. SOM5105840-001 1
SOM19499 31460
FO -331 FLOW ORIFICE STARTING CLUTCH LUBE OIL LOC N.P. STD 3.6 mm N.A. SOM5105840-001 2
SUPPLY N.A.
FO -332 FLOW ORIFICE TORQUE CONVERTER OIL DRAIN LOC N.P. STD 14 mm N.A. SOM5105840-001 2
N.A.
FV -329 20TU-1 SOLENOID VALVE TORQUE CONVERTER FILL/DRAIN LOC SUPPLY WITH ATKOMATIC None Ex-d SOM5105840-001 1
20TU 31460
PSV -330 VR23-1 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE TORQUE CONVERTER CHARGE LINE LOC SUPPLY WITH KEPNER 0.43 bar N.A. SOM5105840-001 1
RELIEF PUMP 2060-18-5 Gage
PSV -331 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE TORQUE CONVERTER CHARGE LINE LOC SUPPLY BY 7 bar N.A. SOM5105840-001 1
SKID MFR Gage
ZSL -304 33CS-1 LIMIT SWITCH STARTING CLUTCH POSITION - LOC SUPPLY WITH VOITH None Ex-d SOM5105840-001 1
ENGAGED RTO42144
AE -213 A 45HF-1 IR GAS DETECTOR GAS DETECTOR INLET AIR FILTER LOC SUPPLY BY DET-TRONICS 0 H=5 HH=10 % Ex-d SOM5105871-001 2
FILTER H. MFR PIRECL 100
AE -213 B 45HF-2 IR GAS DETECTOR GAS DETECTOR INLET AIR FILTER LOC SUPPLY BY DET-TRONICS 0 H=5 HH=10 % Ex-d SOM5105871-001 2
AE -213 C 45HF-3 IR GAS DETECTOR GAS DETECTOR INLET AIR FILTER LOC SUPPLY BY DET-TRONICS 0 H=5 HH=10 % Ex-d SOM5105871-001 2
FY -226 20PJ-1 SOLENOID VALVE CLEANING PROCEDURE LOC SUPPLY BY GOYEN None Ex-d IIB SOM5105871-001 2
SERVOVALVE FILTER H. MFR 3-6VFD6T6/3433 T6÷T3
FY -227 CL. 1 ZONE 2 SOLENOID VALVE CLEANING PROCEDURE LOC SUPPLY BY GOYEN None Ex-d IIB SOM5105871-001 2
IIB T3 SERVOVALVE FILTER H. MFR 3-6VFD6T6/3433 T6÷T3


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
PDIT -252 A 96TF-1A D.P. INDICATOR TURBINE AIR INLET FILTER CTRL LP SUPPLY BY HONEYWELL 0 H=12 HH=18 mbar Ex-d SOM5105871-001 2
TRANSMITTER PRESS. FILTER H. MFR STD 110 20
PDIT -252 B 96TF-1B D.P. INDICATOR TURBINE AIR INLET FILTER CTRL LP SUPPLY BY HONEYWELL 0 H=12 HH=18 mbar Ex-d SOM5105871-001 2
PDIT -252 C 96TF-1C D.P. INDICATOR TURBINE AIR INLET FILTER CTRL LP SUPPLY BY HONEYWELL 0 H=12 HH=18 mbar Ex-d SOM5105871-001 2
PDSH -226 63PJ-1 D.P. SWITCH TURBINE AIR INLET FILTER CTRL LP SUPPLY BY DWYER 0 I1=5.5 START CLEANING mbar Ex-d SOM5105871-001 2
PRESS. FILTER H. MFR 3000-20CM 200 PROCEDURE I2=4.5 STOP
CLEANING PROCEDURE
PI -200 PRESSURE INDICATOR INSTRUMENT AIR FOR PULSE-JET LOC RMO44635003 TE.MA. 0 0 bar N.A. SOM5105871-001 2
ITN66436 TB 800 10 10 Gage
PT -212 A 96AP-1A PRESSURE TRANSMITTER AMBIENT PRESSURE LOC SUPPLY BY HONEYWELL 0.8 bar Ex-d SOM5105871-001 2
FILTER H. MFR STA 122 1.2 Absolute
PT -212 B 96AP-1B PRESSURE TRANSMITTER AMBIENT PRESSURE LOC SUPPLY BY HONEYWELL 0.8 bar Ex-d SOM5105871-001 2
PT -212 C 96AP-1C PRESSURE TRANSMITTER AMBIENT PRESSURE LOC SUPPLY BY HONEYWELL 0.8 bar Ex-d SOM5105871-001 2
TE -217 A AT-IA-1 RTD FILTER HOUSE INLET AIR LOC RPO263981000 THERMOENGINEERING -220 None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105871-001 1
TEMPERATURE ITN62698 RTD Pt100 3 WIRES 750
TE -217 B AT-IA-2 RTD FILTER HOUSE INLET AIR LOC RPO263981000 THERMOENGINEERING -220 None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105871-001 1
TE -217 C AT-IA-3 RTD FILTER HOUSE INLET AIR LOC RPO263981000 THERMOENGINEERING -220 None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105871-001 1
XV -226 DV-1 ON/OFF VALVE PULSE JET AIR LOC SUPPLY BY GOYEN None N.A. SOM5105871-001 2
FILTER H. MFR 3-6VFD6T6/3433


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
AE -211 A 45HD-1A CATHAL. GAS DETECTOR GT COMPART. VENTIL. OUTLET GAS LOC RFO341331611 DET-TRONICS 0 0 H=5 HH=10 % Ex-d IIC T5 SOM5105880-001 1
DETECTOR ITN66370.01 CGS+505 CGT 100 100
AE -211 B 45HD-1B CATHAL. GAS DETECTOR GT COMPART. VENTIL. OUTLET GAS LOC RFO341331611 DET-TRONICS 0 0 H=5 HH=10 % Ex-d IIC T5 SOM5105880-001 1
AE -211 C 45HD-1C CATHAL. GAS DETECTOR GT COMPART. VENTIL. OUTLET GAS LOC RFO341331611 DET-TRONICS 0 0 H=5 HH=10 % Ex-d IIC T5 SOM5105880-001 1
PDT -205 A 96SV-1A D.P. TRANSMITTER VENTILATION FANS SWITCH-OVER LOC RTO827521092 HONEYWELL 0 0 H=5 mmH2O Ex-n/d SOM5105880-001 1
ITN66622 STD 110 250 10
PDT -205 B 96SV-1B D.P. TRANSMITTER VENTILATION FANS SWITCH-OVER LOC RTO827521092 HONEYWELL 0 0 H=5 mmH2O Ex-n/d SOM5105880-001 1
ITN66622 STD 110 250 10
PDT -205 C 96SV-1C D.P. TRANSMITTER VENTILATION FANS SWITCH-OVER LOC RTO827521092 HONEYWELL 0 0 H=5 mmH2O Ex-n/d SOM5105880-001 1
ITN66622 STD 110 250 10
TE -296 A TT-BA-2A RTD TURBINE COMPARTMENT INTERNAL LOC RTO02664 THERMOENGINEERING -20 0 H=85 HH=90 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 REV. AS PER SR#90038329 & 3
TEMP. SOM5462511 RTD Pt100 3 WIRES 120 100 SR#90038397


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
TE -296 B TT-BA-2B RTD TURBINE COMPARTMENT INTERNAL LOC RTO02664 THERMOENGINEERING -20 0 H=85 HH=90 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 REV. AS PER SR#90038329 & 3
TE -296 C TT-BA-2C RTD TURBINE COMPARTMENT INTERNAL LOC RTO02664 THERMOENGINEERING -20 0 H=85 HH=90 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 REV. AS PER SR#90038329 & 3
ZSH -202 A 33OD-1 LIMIT SWITCH TURBINE COMP. VENTILATION LOC SUPPLY WITH GO-SWITCH H=OPEN None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 2
OUTLET OPEN DAMPER C73-1SB
ZSH -202 B 33OD-2 LIMIT SWITCH COUPLING COMP. VENTILATION LOC SUPPLY WITH BARTEC H=OPEN None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 2
OUTLET OPEN DAMPER 07-2951
ZSH -207 A 33ID-1 LIMIT SWITCH VENTILATION INLET DAMPER OPEN LOC SUPPLY WITH GO-SWITCH H=OPEN None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 2
DAMPER C73-1SB
ZSH -207 B 33ID-2 LIMIT SWITCH VENTILATION INLET DAMPER OPEN LOC SUPPLY WITH GO-SWITCH H=OPEN None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 2
DAMPER C73-1SB
ZSL -206 A 33DT-1 LIMIT SWITCH ACCESS DOORS LIMIT SWITCH LOC RJO21203 GO-SWITCH L=CLOSED None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 1
ITN66080 C11-1SB
ZSL -206 B 33DT-2 LIMIT SWITCH ACCESS DOORS LIMIT SWITCH LOC RJO21203 GO-SWITCH L=CLOSED Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 1
ITN66080 C11-1SB
ZSL -206 C 33DT-3 LIMIT SWITCH ACCESS DOORS LIMIT SWITCH LOC RJO21203 GO-SWITCH L=CLOSED Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 1
ITN66080 C11-1SB
ZSL -206 D 33DT-4 LIMIT SWITCH ACCESS DOORS LIMIT SWITCH LOC RJO21203 GO-SWITCH L=CLOSED Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 1
ITN66080 C11-1SB
ZSL -206 E 33DT-5 LIMIT SWITCH ACCESS DOORS LIMIT SWITCH LOC RJO21203 GO-SWITCH L=CLOSED Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 1
ITN66080 C11-1SB
ZSL -206 F 33DT-6 LIMIT SWITCH ACCESS DOORS LIMIT SWITCH LOC RJO21203 GO-SWITCH L=CLOSED Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 1
ITN66080 C11-1SB
ZSL -206 G 33DT-7 LIMIT SWITCH ACCESS DOORS LIMIT SWITCH LOC RJO21203 GO-SWITCH L=CLOSED Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 1
ITN66080 C11-1SB
ZSL -206 H 33DT-8 LIMIT SWITCH ACCESS DOORS LIMIT SWITCH LOC RJO21203 GO-SWITCH L=CLOSED Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 1
ITN66080 C11-1SB
ZSL -206 I 33DT-9 LIMIT SWITCH ACCESS DOORS LIMIT SWITCH LOC RJO21203 GO-SWITCH L=CLOSED Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 1
ITN66080 C11-1SB
ZSL -206 J 33DT-10 LIMIT SWITCH ACCESS DOORS LIMIT SWITCH LOC RJO21203 GO-SWITCH L=CLOSED None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105880-001 1
ITN66080 C11-1SB
HS -220 5ESD-2 PUSH BUTTON TURBO UNIT EMERGENCY LOC RPO43110 NUOVA ASP None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105881-001 1
SHUTDOWN BUTTON RP-43110 EFSC
HS -221 5ESD-1 PUSH BUTTON TURBO UNIT EMERGENCY LOC RPO43110 NUOVA ASP None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105881-001 1
SHUTDOWN BUTTON RP-43110 EFSC
HS -700 C EDS-1 PUSH BUTTON TURBO UNIT EMERG. SHUTDOWN LP RPO43478 COELBO None Ex-d IIB+H2 SOM5105881-001 1
BUTTON RP-43478 EFD1 T6
HS -701 C EDS-2 PUSH BUTTON TURBO UNIT EMERG. SHUTDOWN LP RPO43478 COELBO None Ex-d IIB+H2 SOM5105881-001 1
BUTTON RP-43478 EFD1 T6
TSHH -700 A 45FA-1 HEAT RISE DETECTOR ACCESSORY COMPARTMENT FIRE LOC RTO211720100 FENWAL -73 0 HH=160 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105881-001 2
DETECTOR ITN66546 20000 SERIES 316 316
TSHH -700 B 45FA-2 HEAT RISE DETECTOR ACCESSORY COMPARTMENT FIRE LOC RTO211720100 FENWAL -73 0 HH=160 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105881-001 2
TSHH -700 C 45FA-3 HEAT RISE DETECTOR ACCESSORY COMPARTMENT FIRE LOC RTO211720100 FENWAL -73 0 HH=160 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105881-001 2
TSHH -700 D 45FA-4 HEAT RISE DETECTOR ACCESSORY COMPARTMENT FIRE LOC RTO211720100 FENWAL -73 0 HH=160 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105881-001 2
TSHH -701 A 45FT-1 HEAT RISE DETECTOR TURBINE COMPARTMENT FIRE LOC RTO211750100 FENWAL -73 0 HH=315 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105881-001 2
TSHH -701 B 45FT-2 HEAT RISE DETECTOR TURBINE COMPARTMENT FIRE LOC RTO211750100 FENWAL -73 0 HH=315 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105881-001 2
TSHH -701 C 45FT-3 HEAT RISE DETECTOR TURBINE COMPARTMENT FIRE LOC RTO211750100 FENWAL -73 0 HH=315 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105881-001 2
TSHH -701 D 45FT-4 HEAT RISE DETECTOR TURBINE COMPARTMENT FIRE LOC RTO211750100 FENWAL -73 0 HH=315 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105881-001 2


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
TSHH -702 A 45FT-5 HEAT RISE DETECTOR LOAD COUPLING COMP. FIRE LOC RTO211750100 FENWAL -73 0 HH=315 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105881-001 2
TSHH -702 B 45FT-6 HEAT RISE DETECTOR LOAD COUPLING COMP. FIRE LOC RTO211750100 FENWAL -73 0 HH=315 ºC Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105881-001 2
XA -700 B XA-1 HORN TURBINE PACKAGE LATERAL SIDE LP RAO26718 MEDC None Ex-d IIC T4 SOM5105881-001 1
HORN RA-26718 DB3
XA -701 B XA-2 HORN TURBINE PACKAGE LATERAL SIDE LP RAO26018 MEDC None Ex-d IIC T4 SOM5105881-001 1
HORN RA-26718 DB3
XL -700 A XL-1 LAMP TURBINE PACKAGE LATERAL SIDE LP RAO26719 MEDC None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105881-001 1
RED LAMP RA-26719 HXB
XL -701 A XL-2 LAMP TURBINE PACKAGE LATERAL RED LP RAO26719 MEDC None Ex-d IIC T6 SOM5105881-001 1
LAMP RA-26719 HXB
FV -703 45CR-5 SOLENOID VALVE BATTERY "A" CO2 INITIAL DISCH. LOC SUPPLY BY ATAM None Ex-d SOM5105890-001 2
ACTUATION CO2 SKID MFR 2710A100
HS -232 43FFB-1 HAND SWITCH FIRE FIGHTING SYST. MANUAL LOC SUPPLY BY STAHL None Ex-d SOM5105890-001 2
SELECTOR CO2 SKID MFR 8003 SERIES
PSHH -712 63CP-2 PRESSURE SWITCH CO2 DISCHARGE ACTIVATED LOC SUPPLY BY DELTA 10 HH=4 bar Ex-d SOM5105890-001 2
CO2 SKID MFR S 21 100 Gage
PSV -403 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE FIRE FIGTHING QUICK DISCHARGE LOC SUPPLY BY LESER 193 bar N.A. SOM5105890-001 2
CO2 SKID MFR D0 10-D/G0.5F0.35 Gage
PSV -404 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE FIRE FIGTHING SLOW DISCHARGE LOC SUPPLY BY LESER 193 bar N.A. SOM5105890-001 1
CO2 SKID MFR D0 10-D/G0.5F0.35 Gage
WSL -703 1 33CR-20/1 WEIGHT SWITCH BATT. "A" INIT. DISCH. CO2 BOTTLE LOC SUPPLY BY HONEYWELL L=10 % Ex-d SOM5105890-001 2
EMPTY CO2 SKID MFR BXC3K
WSL -705 1 33CR-21/1 WEIGHT SWITCH BATT. "A" EXT. DISCH. CO2 BOTTLE LOC SUPPLY BY HONEYWELL L=10 % Ex-d SOM5105890-001 2


1705713÷15 3 A
MIN MIN
ZSH -702 A 33CP-4A LIMIT SWITCH CO2 EXTENDED DISCH. ISOL. VALVE LOC SUPPLY BY HONEYWELL None Ex-d SOM5105890-001 2
- OPEN CO2 SKID MFR BXC3K
ZSH -702 B 33CP-4B LIMIT SWITCH CO2 INITIAL DISCH. ISOL. VALVE - LOC SUPPLY BY HONEYWELL None Ex-d SOM5105890-001 2
OPEN CO2 SKID MFR BXC3K
ZSL -701 A 33CP-3A LIMIT SWITCH CO2 EXTENDED DISCH. ISOL. VALVE LOC SUPPLY BY HONEYWELL None Ex-d SOM5105890-001 2
- CLOSED CO2 SKID MFR BXC3K
ZSL -701 B 33CP-3B LIMIT SWITCH CO2 INITIAL DISCH. ISOL. VALVE - LOC SUPPLY BY HONEYWELL None Ex-d SOM5105890-001 2
CLOSED CO2 SKID MFR BXC3K
LG -431 LG-1 LEVEL GLASS ON/OFF-LINE WASHING TANK LEVEL LOC SUPPLY BY W.W. BONETTI None N.A. SOM5105894-001 2
GLASS TROLLEY MFR BR23-GP12
LSL -433 LI-400 LEVEL SWITCH ON/OFF-LINE WASHING TANK LOW LOC SUPPLY BY W.W. MAGNETROL L Ex-d IIB T3 SOM5105894-001 2
LEVEL ALARM TROLLEY MFR XA15-DG3B-CU5
PI -406 PI-351 PRESSURE INDICATOR ON-LINE WASHING WATER LOC RMO446010003 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105894-001 1
ITN66433 MB 800 10 Gage
PI -409 PI-350 PRESSURE INDICATOR OFF-LINE WASHING WATER LOC RMO446010003 TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105894-001 1
ITN66433 MB 800 10 Gage
PI -430 PI-13 PRESSURE INDICATOR ON/OFF-LINE WASHING DELIVERY LOC SUPPLY BY W.W. TE.MA. 0 bar N.A. SOM5105894-001 2
PRESSURE TROLLEY MFR MB 801 10 Gage
RO -405 FO-350 FLOW ORIFICE OFF-LINE WASHING WATER ORIFICE LOC SUPPLY BY W.W. MFR. STD. FULL mm N.A. SOM5105894-001 2
TROLLEY MFR N.A. BORE
RO -409 FO-351 FLOW ORIFICE ON-LINE WASHING WATER ORIFICE LOC SUPPLY BY W.W. MFR. STD. FULL mm N.A. SOM5105894-001 2
TROLLEY MFR N.A. BORE
TI -432 TI-5 TEMPERATURE INDICATOR ON/OFF-LINE WASHING TANK LOC SUPPLY BY W.W. TE.MA. 0 ºC N.A. SOM5105894-001 2
TEMPERATURE TROLLEY MFR TB 910 100
TSHH -434 49TW-1 TEMPERATURE SWITCH ON/OFF-LINE WASHING TANK LP SUPPLY BY W.W. FATI 0 85 ºC Ex-d IIB T6 SOM5105894-001 2
HEATER CUT-OFF TROLLEY MFR 23TW-1 120
TSHL -434 26TW-1 TEMPERATURE SWITCH ON/OFF-LINE WASHING TANK LP SUPPLY BY W.W. FATI 0 L=60 H=65 ºC Ex-d SOM5105894-001 2
HEATER CONTROL TROLLEY MFR 23TW-1 80
XY -406 20TW-2 SOLENOID VALVE OFF LINE WASHING WATER LOC REO053310222 NORGREN None Ex-d IIC SOM5105894-001 1
SOLENOID VALVE ITN62306.21 849zzzz.8920.11000 T4/T5
XY -407 20TW-1 SOLENOID VALVE ON LINE WASHING WATER LOC REO053310222 NORGREN None Ex-d IIC SOM5105894-001 1
SOLENOID VALVE ITN62306.21 849zzzz.8920.11000 T4/T5


1705713÷15 3 A
CLIENTE - CUSTOMER
Nuovo Pignone LOCALITA' - PLANT LOCATION

SONATRACH
FIRENZE ALGERIA
COMMESSA - JOB IMPIANTO - PLANT
1705713-14-15 ALRAR POWER PLANT EXTENSION PROJECT

GAS TURBINE DATA SHEET
MS5001 DLN
ITEM
2 REVISED WHERE INDICATED <2> U.T.E. Seghi A. Andreini V. 21/07/2009

1 REV. WHERE SHOWN <1> U.T.E. Seghi A. Andreini V. 28/05/09 N. SOK0928986 /4
0 EMISSIONE - ISSUED U.T.E. SEGHI CALCATERRA 27/01/09 LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
REV. DESCRIZIONE – DESCRIPTION PREP'D CONT-CHK'D APPR.-APPR'D DATA-DATE A 1 / 2
Il presente documento è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termine di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law.
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
PROJECT 1705713-14-15 <1>
CLIENT BONATTI ITALY / SONATRACH - ALGERIA <1>
COMBUSTION GAS TURBINE (API 616-4TH) Project No. Unit Type of Doc. Code & Progressive Rev Sheet
DATA SHEET
S I UNITS 1 of 11
1 APPLICABLE TO: PROPOSAL X PURCHASE AS BUILT ITEM
x
2 FOR SONATRACH UNIT GT-3201D MR
3 SITE ALRAR POWER PLANT EXTENSION PROJECT SERIAL NUMBER
4 SERVICE DRIVER FOR MAIN POWER GENERATOR NUMBER REQUIRED
5 X CONTINUOUS INTERMITTENT STANDBY DRIVEN EQUIPMENT AC GENERATOR <1>
6 MANUFACTURER Nuovo Pignone X MODEL MS5001 DLN ISO RATING (3.17) 26300kW 5100 RPM
7 NOTE: INFORMATION TO BE COMPLETED: BY PURCHASER BY MANUFACTURER BY MFR IF NOT BY PURCHASER
8 GENERAL
9 CYCLE: REGEN X SIMPLE EXHAUST HEAT RECOVERY TYPE: X SINGLE SHAFT MULTI SHAFT
10 DRIVEN EQUIPMENT: NORMAL SHAFT, kW @ RPM RATED SHAFT kW @ RPMRPM
11 OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED RANGE (4.1.5) X MIN 4998 X MAX 5202 RPM
12 DESIRED MINIMUM SITE POWER kW @ RPM
13 OPERATION ATTENDED X UNATTENDED POTENTIAL MAXIMUM POWER (3.33) kW
14 PERFORMANCE WITH FUEL GAS #1 LOCATION (4.1.19)

15 GAS TURBINE INCLUDING ALL LOSSES X INDOOR OUTDOOR GRADE
16 SITE SITE SITE HEATED UNDER ROOF MEZZANINE
17 RATED MAX MIN UNHEATED PARTIAL SIDES
18 (3.45) TEMP TEMP ELECTRICAL AREA CLASSIFICATION(4.1.14)
19 X DRY BULB TEMP, °C 45 50 -5 X
X NON-HAZARDOUS HAZARDOUS
20 X RELATIVE HUMIDITY % 20 20 50 APPLICABLE CODE: NEC 500 NEC 505 X IEC
21 X BAROMETER, BAR 0,9334 0,9334 0,9334 CLASS: GROUP: TEMPERATURE CODE:
22 X OUTPUT,kW (1) <1> 18380 17500 27270 AREA CLASSIFICATION DIVISION ZONE
23 X HEAT RATE,LHV, <1> 13975 14290 12170 THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION REQUIRED
24 KJ/kW-HR WINTERIZATION REQD
25 X OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED, RPM 5100 5100 5100 TROPICALIZATION REQD (5.4.6.6)
26 AIR FLOW kg/SEC UNUSUAL CONDITIONS: X DUST FUMES
27 EXHAUST FLOW kg/SEC (1) CORROSIVE AGENTS (4.10.1.1)
28 FIRING TEMPERATURE, °C
29 GAS GEN. EXHAUST TEMP., °C X OTHER (5.5.3.4) SAND
30 PT EXHAUST TEMP., °C NOISE SPECIFICATIONS: (4.1.10)
31 CERTIFIED POINT (3.26) X<2> X APPLICABLE TO MACHINE: (5.7.4.1) (*1)
32 (1) INCLUDING STEAM WATER EFFECTS FOR SEE SPECIFICATION
33 EMISSION CONTROL AUGMENTATION (4.1.9) APPLICABLE TO NEIGHBORHOOD: (5.7.4.2)
34 STEAM FLOW, kg/HR SEE SPECIFICATION
3
35 WATER FLOW, m /HR
36 PAINTING:
37 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS: X MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD
38 x API 616 GAS TURBINES FOR THE PETROLEUM, CHEMICAL, OTHER
39 & GAS INDUSTRY SERVICES INCLUDING GE/NP COMMENT<2>
40 GOVERNING SPECIFICATION (IF DIFFERENT) NOTE: All Data Sheets References to GG=Gas Generator,
41 SS = Single Shaft, and PT = Power Turbine
42 VENDOR HAVING UNIT RESPONSIBILITY (4.1.2) GENP <1> REMARKS: ,(*1) Expec aver. Sound level is 85 dB (A)<2>
43 press. Level @ 1 m. From G.T. enclosure
44 SHIPMENT: (6.4)
45 DOMESTIC X EXPORT EXPORT BOXING REQUIRED
46 X OUTDOOR STORAGE MORE THAN 6 MONTHS (6.4.1) (SEE GE O&G STORAGE
47 SPARE ROTOR ASSEMBLY PACKAGED FOR (6.4.3.10) PROCEDURE)
48 DOMESTIC X EXPORT SHIPMENT
49 COMMENTS:
50
ITEM
2 REVISED WHERE INDICATED <2>

1 REV. WHERE SHOWN <1> N. SOK0928986 /4
0 ISSUED LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
REV. DESCRIZIONE – DESCRIPTION A 2 / 3
Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
PROJECT 1705713-14-15 <1>
DATA SHEET
S I UNITS 2 of 11
1 APPLICABLE TO: PROPOSAL X PURCHASE AS BUILT ITEM
x
2 FOR SONATRACH UNIT GT-3201D MR
3 SITE ALRAR POWER PLANT EXTENSION PROJECT SERIAL NUMBER
4 SERVICE DRIVER FOR MAIN POWER GENERATOR NUMBER REQUIRED
5 X CONTINUOUS INTERMITTENT STANDBY DRIVEN EQUIPMENT AC GENERATOR <1>
6 MANUFACTURER Nuovo Pignone X MODEL MS5001 DLN ISO RATING (3.17) 26300kW 5100 RPM
7 NOTE: INFORMATION TO BE COMPLETED: BY PURCHASER BY MANUFACTURER BY MFR IF NOT BY PURCHASER
8 GENERAL
9 CYCLE: REGEN X SIMPLE EXHAUST HEAT RECOVERY TYPE: X SINGLE SHAFT MULTI SHAFT
10 DRIVEN EQUIPMENT: NORMAL SHAFT, kW @ RPM RATED SHAFT kW @ RPMRPM
11 OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED RANGE (4.1.5) X MIN 4998 X MAX 5202 RPM
12 DESIRED MINIMUM SITE POWER kW @ RPM
13 OPERATION ATTENDED X UNATTENDED POTENTIAL MAXIMUM POWER (3.33) kW
14 PERFORMANCE WITH FUEL GAS #2 LOCATION (4.1.19)

15 GAS TURBINE INCLUDING ALL LOSSES X INDOOR OUTDOOR GRADE
16 SITE SITE SITE HEATED UNDER ROOF MEZZANINE
17 RATED MAX MIN UNHEATED PARTIAL SIDES
18 (3.45) TEMP TEMP ELECTRICAL AREA CLASSIFICATION(4.1.14)
19 X DRY BULB TEMP, °C 45 50 -5 X
X NON-HAZARDOUS HAZARDOUS
20 X RELATIVE HUMIDITY % 20 20 50 APPLICABLE CODE: NEC 500 NEC 505 X IEC
21 X BAROMETER, BAR 0,9334 0,9334 0,9334 CLASS: GROUP: TEMPERATURE CODE:
22 X OUTPUT,kW (1) <1> 18360 17480 27240 AREA CLASSIFICATION DIVISION ZONE
23 X HEAT RATE,LHV, <1> 13985 14295 12180 THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION REQUIRED
24 KJ/kW-HR WINTERIZATION REQD
25 X OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED, RPM 5100 5100 5100 TROPICALIZATION REQD (5.4.6.6)
26 AIR FLOW kg/SEC UNUSUAL CONDITIONS: X DUST FUMES
27 EXHAUST FLOW kg/SEC (1) CORROSIVE AGENTS (4.10.1.1)
28 FIRING TEMPERATURE, °C
29 GAS GEN. EXHAUST TEMP., °C X OTHER (5.5.3.4) SAND
30 PT EXHAUST TEMP., °C NOISE SPECIFICATIONS: (4.1.10)
31 CERTIFIED POINT (3.26) X APPLICABLE TO MACHINE: (5.7.4.1) (*1)
32 (1) INCLUDING STEAM WATER EFFECTS FOR SEE SPECIFICATION
33 EMISSION CONTROL AUGMENTATION (4.1.9) APPLICABLE TO NEIGHBORHOOD: (5.7.4.2)
34 STEAM FLOW, kg/HR SEE SPECIFICATION
3
35 WATER FLOW, m /HR
36 PAINTING:
37 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS: X MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD
38 x API 616 GAS TURBINES FOR THE PETROLEUM, CHEMICAL, OTHER
39 & GAS INDUSTRY SERVICES INCLUDING GE/NP COMMENT <2>
40 GOVERNING SPECIFICATION (IF DIFFERENT) NOTE: All Data Sheets References to GG=Gas Generator,
41 SS = Single Shaft, and PT = Power Turbine
42 VENDOR HAVING UNIT RESPONSIBILITY (4.1.2) GENP <1> REMARKS: ,(*1) Expec aver. Sound level is 85 dB (A)<2>
43 press. Level @ 1 m. From G.T. enclosure <1>
44 SHIPMENT: (6.4)
45 DOMESTIC X EXPORT EXPORT BOXING REQUIRED
46 X OUTDOOR STORAGE MORE THAN 6 MONTHS (6.4.1) (SEE GE O&G STORAGE
47 SPARE ROTOR ASSEMBLY PACKAGED FOR (6.4.3.10) PROCEDURE)
48 DOMESTIC X EXPORT SHIPMENT
49 COMMENTS:
50
ITEM

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
PROJECT 1705713-14-15 <1>
DATA SHEET
S I UNITS 0 0 SP 0 3 of 11
1 FUEL SYSTEM (5.8)
2 TYPE X GAS (5.8.2) LIQUID (5.8.3) DUAL (5.8.1.5.1)
3 DUAL SYSTEM REQMTS (5.8.1.5.1) GAS/GAS GAS/LIQUID LIQUID/LIQUID
4 COMPLETE FUEL RECEIVING SYSTEM (5.8.1.1) MAXIMUM TIME ALLOWED TO COMPLETE TRANSFER SECONDS
5
6 GAS FUELS (5.8.2) LIQUID FUELS (5.8.3)
7 FUEL GRADE (5.8.3.3)
8 <1> <1> ASTM D1655 ASTM 0GT 1GT
9 X FUEL ANALYSIS - MOL % (5.8.2.1) JET A A-1 B D2880 2GT 3GT 4GT
10 COMPOSITION: M.W. GAS #1 GAS #2 ALT OTHER, INDICATE ANALYSIS BELOW (5.8.3.3 c)
11 AIR 29 (1) (2) LIQUID FUEL TREATMENT REQUIRED YES NO
12 OXYGEN 32 TREATMENT SYSTEM BY VENDOR OTHER
13 NITROGEN 38 0,44 0,4 FUEL TRANSFER EQUIP REQUIRED (5.8.1.4.5) YES NO
14 WATER VAPOR 18 HEATER REQUIRED (5.8.1.4.4) YES NO
15 CARBON MONOXIDE 28 LIQUID FUEL PRESS REQUIRED, MAX/MIN, BARg
16 CARBON DIOXIDE 44 4,14 4,17 FUEL ANALYSIS DATA (5.8.3.3) ASTM MEASURED
17 HYDROGEN 2 PROPERTY METHOD VALUE
18 METHANE 16 87,16 82,79 VISCOSITY, SSU @ 38°C D-445

19 ETHYLENE 26 DISTILLATION DATA D-86
20 ETHANE 30 6,92 9,98 50% RECOVERY, °C MAX
21 PROPYLENE 42 END POINT, °C MAX
22 PROPANE 44 1,19 2,28 SULFUR CONTENT %WEIGHT, MAX. (SELECT APPL. METHOD)
23 I-BUTANE 58 0,07 0,15 BOMB METHOD D-129
24 n-BUTANE 58 0,08 0,2 LAMP METHOD D-1266
25 I-PENTANE 72 0,02 HIGH-TEMP METHOD D-1552
26 n-PENTANE 72 0,01 CARBON RESIDUE (ON 10%
27 HEXANE PLUS BOTTOMS) % WT. MAX.
28 CONRADSON D-189
29 TOTAL RAMSBOTTOM D-524
30 AVG. MOL. WT. COPPER STRIP CORROSION PLATE D-130
31 CORS AGNTS (5.8.2.3) PPM 3 HOURS AT 100°C MAXIMUM
32 CONTMNTS (5.8.2.2.1) PPM AROMATIC CONTENT D-1319
33 LHV MJ/Nm³ (5.8.2.4) ASH CONTENT D-482
34 FUEL PRESS.MAX/MIN, BARg 24 / 22 24 / 22 (4)<2> SPECIFIC GRAVITY, 15°C D-1298
35 FUEL TEMPERATURE MAX/MIN,(4) °C+70 / +20 +70 / +20 (4)<2> FLASH POINT, °C D-56
36 FUEL PRESSURE REQUIRED POUR POINT, °C D-97
37 MAXIMUM/MINIMUM, BARg WATER D-95
38 COMPRESSION SYS REQD (5.8.1.2.2) YES NO FILTERABLE DIRT, MG/100ML D-2276
39 HEATER REQD (5.8.2.1) X YES NO (3) TRACE METALS (ATOMIC
40 RATE OF CHANGE OF LHV (5.8.2.4) ABSORPTION PREFERRED) D-3605
41 SODIUM
42 REMARKS: POTASSIUM
43 1) MAIN SOURCE <1> VANADIUM
44 2) "GAZ DEVENTE" <1> CALCIUM
45 3) THE HEATER IN PURCHASER SCOPE <1> LEAD
46 4) @ TP100, BATTERY LIMIT GT <1> OTHER METALS
47 LOWER HEATING VALUE, MJ/kg D-2382
48 FUEL SYSTEM PIPING
49 BY PASS AND VENT VALVE (3.7.1.3) X ISOLATION BLOCK VALVES X ANSI FLANGE RATING #300
50 TWIN Y-TYPE STRAINER WITH CONTINUOUS FLOW NACE MATERIAL STANDARDS (4.10.1.8)
51 TRANSFER VALVE (5.8.1.2.4)
52
ITEM

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
PROJECT 1705713-14-15 <1>
DATA SHEET
1 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES (NOTE 1)
2 X SPEEDS: MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION (4.10)
3 MAX. CONT. 5100 RPM TRIP 5610 RPM COMPRESSOR ROTOR BLADES Stg 0-1 C450 Stg 2-16 AISI403Cb
4 X LATERAL CRITICAL SPEEDS (DAMPED) (2) COMPRESSOR STATOR VANES Igv Stg-1C450 Stg2-16AISI403Cb
5 FIRST CRITICAL 1360 RPM Bouncing MODE SHAFT Ni Cr Mo V BLADE/VANE COATING GECC1 (Stg 2-6)
6 SECOND CRITICAL 2273 RPM Roching MODE TURBINE WHEELS OR
7 THIRD CRITICAL 7132 RPM 1°Bending MODE STAGE NOZZLES BLADES DISCS
8 FOURTH CRITICAL RPM MODE 1 FSX 414 GTD 111 (*) Cr Mo V

9 PROTOTYPE OR MODIFIED ROTOR SUPPORT (4.7.3.5) 2 FSX 414 Inconel 738 Cr Mo V
10 TRAIN LATERAL ANALYSIS REQUIRED (D.1.3) 3
11 X TRAIN TORSIONAL ANALYSIS REQUIRED (2.7.4.5) 4
12 X TORSIONAL CRITICAL SPEEDS:
13 FIRST CRITICAL During job activities RPM
14 SECOND CRITICAL During job activities RPM
15 THIRD CRITICAL During job activities RPM
16 FOURTH CRITICAL During job activities RPM COMBUSTORS LINER HAST. X (TBC Coating) TRANS. HAST.X
17 VIBRATION: (4.7.4.5) (7.2.3 o): COMPRESSOR CASING ASTM A48 / ASTM A536
18 ALLOWABLE TEST LEVEL: SHAFT MICRONS P/P COMBUSTOR CASING ASTM A516-gr.70
19 CASE mm/SEC TURBINE CASING Nodular Cast Iron ASTM A395
20 X ROTATION, VIEWED FROM DRIVE END X CW CCW GAUGE BOARDS AND CONTROL PANELS
21 AIR COMPRESSOR:
22 STAGES 17 MAXIMUM TIP SPEED 332 m/s GAUGE BOARDS
23 TYPE Axial PRESSURE RATIO 10.5:1 X LOCATION BASE PLATE
24 CASING SPLIT (2.2.3) X AXIAL RADIAL CONTROL CONSOLES (5.4.5.1.1) ON-SKID OFF SKID LOCAL
25 ROTOR SOLID X BUILT UP X OFF SKID REMOTE
26 TURBINE: WEATHER PROTECTION REQUIRED YES X NO
27 STAGES 2 MAX. TIP SPEED 438 m/s X SPECIFICATION G.E. / N.P. Standard (IP10)
28 CASING SPLIT (4.2.3) X AXIAL RADIAL ANNUNCIATOR REQUIRED (5.4.4.8.5)
29 ROTOR SOLID X BUILT UP X VISUAL DISPLAY UNIT (VDU) X KEYBOARD
30 COMBUSTORS: (4.3.2)
31 SINGLE X MULTIPLE, NUMBER 10
32 X GAS LIQUID DUAL FUEL
33 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE TEMP. VARIATION 94 °C CONTROL SYSTEMS
34 APPLICABLE PLANE TYPE (5.4.1.5)
35 FUEL NOZZLES PER COMBUSTOR ONE MECH PNEU HYDRA ELECTRIC X ELECTRONIC
52.09 47.10 X MICROPROCESSOR BASED
36 MODIFIED WOBBE INDEX (4.3.7) MAX MIN COMBINED
BTU/SCF*R^0. BTU/SCF*R^0.
37 5 <2> 5 <2>
38 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS, HOURS (1) X SIGNAL SOURCE 4-20 mA <1>

39 HOT GAS PATH INSPECTIONS SENSITIVITY RANGE TO
40 X MAJOR OVERHAULS 48000 TIME OF AC OUTAGE PROTECTION MIN (5.4.1.6)
41 X COMBUSTION INSPECTION 12000 only LINER SHUT OFF VALVES FOR SHUT DOWN SENSORS (5.4.4.9)
42 X COMBUSTION INSPECTION 24000 LINER and TRANSITION STARTING SYSTEM (5.4.2.1)
43 GOVERNOR (5.4.3) X MANUAL X SEMI AUTOMATIC X AUTOMATIC
44 X MFR'S STD. OTHER X MAKE GE X MODEL MK VI e X PURGE (5.4.2.2) MINUTES
45 X CONSTANT SPEED VARIABLE SPEED <1> SEPARATE SHUTDOWN VALVE TEST DURING OPERATION
46 ISOCHRONOUS X DROOP NOTE (1) FOR MULTIPLE SHAFT TURBINES, COMPLETE ALL APPLICABLE
47 REMOTE SHUTDOWN SIGNAL X ELECTRIC PORTIONS FOR EACH SHAFT.
48 PNEUMATIC HYDRAULIC NONE REMARKS: (*) WITH COATING GT29PLUS
49 MANUAL SPEED CHANGER, RPM MAX. MIN. (1) Gas operation and STD Combustion
50 X MAINTAIN TURBINE SPEED UPON FAILURE OF CONTROL (2) SEE GT LATERAL ANALYSIS SOM5460544 <1>
51 SIGNAL OR ACTUATOR
ITEM

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
PROJECT 1705713-14-15 <1>
DATA SHEET
1 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES CONTINUED (NOTE 1)
2 BEARINGS AND BEARING HOUSINGS (4.8)
3 RADIAL (NOTES 2 AND 3) BRG #1 BRG #2 THRUST (NOTE 3) ACTIV INACTIV
4 X TYPE Elliptical Elliptical X TYPE Tilting Pad Tilting Pad
5 X MANUFACTURER Kingsbury Kingsbury X MANUFACTURER Kingsbury Kingsbury
6 X LENGTH, mm 152.14 152.14 X UNIT LOAD (ULTIMATE), BAR >54
7 X SHAFT DIAMETER, mm 202.5 202.5 UNIT LOAD (SITE RATED), Kg
8 X UNIT LOAD (ACT/ALLOW), BAR >30 >30 UNIT LOAD (MAX POTEN.), Kg
9 X BASE MATERIAL C.S. C.S. X NO. OF PADS/AREA, (cm2) 6 720 18 270
10 X BABBITT THICKNESS, mm MFR STD MFR STD X BASE MATERIAL C.S. C.S.
11 NO. PADS X BABBITT THICKNESS, mm MFR STD MFR STD
12 LOAD: BETWEEN/ON PAD X PIVOT: CENTER/OFFSET, % 10% Center
13 PIVOT: CENTER/OFFSET, % LUBRICATION: FLOODED X DIRECTED
14 DAMPER BEARING THRUST COLLAR: X INTEGRAL REPLACEABLE
15 BEARING MATERIAL
16 BEARING TEMPERATURE DEVICES SEE ATTACHED API-670 VIBRATION DETECTORS (4.8.5.3) SEE ATTACHED API-670
17 (4.8.5.5) DATA SHEET RADIAL VIBRATION DETECTORS: DATA SHEET
18 THERMOCOUPLES X TYPE No-Contact X MODEL 3300 series

19 SELECTOR SWITCH & IND. BY: PURCH MFR X MFR BENTLY NEVADA
20 X RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS X NO. AT EACH SHAFT BEARING 2@ 90° <2> TOTAL NO. 4
21 X RESISTANCE MATERIAL PT X 100 OHMS X OSCILLATOR-DEMODULATOR SUPPLIED BY G.T. Vendor
22 SELECTOR SWITCH & IND. BY: PURCH MFR X MFR BENTLY NEVADA X MODEL 3300 series
23 X LOCATION-JOURNAL BEARING 2 TC'S Brg1 and on Brg2 X MONITOR SUPPLIED BY (5.4.7.8.2) G.T. Vendor
24 NUMBER 2 EA PD EVERY OTH PAD PER EACH BRG X LOCATION UCP VDU ENCLOSURE
25 OTHER TOTAL 4 TC'S X MFR GE X MODEL ON MK VIe VDU <1>
26 X LOCATION-THRUST BEARING X SCALE RGE 0 ÷ 2000 Microns X ALARM SET @ 110 MICRONS <1>
27 NO. (ACT) 2 EA PD EVERY OTH PAD 1 PER BRG SHUTDOWN SET @ N/A MICRONS TIME DLY SEC
28 OTHER TOTAL 2 TC'S AXIAL POSITION DETECTOR (4.8.5.3):
29 NO.(INACT) 1 EA PD EVERY OTH PAD 1 PER BRG SEE ATTACHED API-670 DATA SHEETS
30 OTHER TOTAL 1 TC'S X Non contact Proximity X MODEL 3300 series
31 X MONITOR SUPPLIED BY (5.4.7.5) G.T. Vendor X MFR BENTLY NEVADA X NO. REQUIRED 2
32 X LOCATION Control Panel ENCLOSURE X OSCILLATOR-DEMODULATOR SUPPLIED BY G.T. Vendor
33 X MFR GE/NP X MODEL MK VIe X MFR BENTLY NEVADA X MODEL 3300 series
34 SCALE RANGE 0÷150<2> X ALARM SET @ 115 °C X MONITOR SUPPLIED BY (3.4.7.8.2) G.T. Vendor
35 SHTDWN X SET @ 130 °C TIME DLY SEC X LOCATION TCP VDU ENCLOSURE
36 REMARKS: X MFR GE X MODEL ON MK VIe VDU <1>
37 X SCALE RGE ±1 mm X ALARM SET @ ±0,6 mm <1>
38 SHTDWN SET @ N/A MICRONS TIME DLY SEC

39 VELOCIMETER TRANSDUCERS
40 SEE ATTACHED API-670 DATA SHEETS
41 X MFR VITEC X MODEL 4033
42 X LOCATION Brg Casin.#1/2 X NUMBER 2+2
43 X MONITOR SUPPLIED BY (3.4.7.8.4) G.T. Vendor
44 X LOCATION UCP ENCLOSURE
45 X MFR MK VIe PANEL<2> X MODEL ON MK VIe VDU<2>
46 X SCALE RGE 2.54-25.4 mm/s<2> X ALARM SET @ 12.5 mm/s
47 X SHTDWN X SET @ 25.4 mm/s TIME DELAY SEC
48 NOTES: (1) VENDOR SHALL INSTALL SEISMIC TRANSDUCERS ON CASING OF GAS TURBINE, GEARBOX AND GENERATOR
49 (2) FOR THREE BEARING SHAFTS, USE A SEPARATE SHEET FOR THE EXTRA BEARING.
50 (3) FOR ROLLING ELEMENT BEARINGS, MODIFY ENTRIES AS REQUIRED. SHOW L-10 BEARING LIFE.
ITEM

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
PROJECT 1705713-14-15 <1>
DATA SHEET
1 UTILITIES: CONNECTIONS
2 UTILITY CONDITIONS: N/A <1> X TOTAL UTILITY CONSUMPTION:
3 STEAM: AUXILIARY DRIVERS HEATING COOLING WATER m3/HR
4 INLET MIN BARg °C BARg °C STEAM LEVEL BARg BARg BARg
5 NORM BARg °C BARg °C STEAM, NORMAL kg/HR
6 MAX BARg °C BARg °C STEAM, MAX kg/HR
7 EXHST MIN. BARg °C BARg °C INSTRUMENT AIR SEE UTILITY CONSUMPTION LIST Nm3/HR
8 NORM BARg °C BARg °C MOTORS (AUXILIARIES) N° 946X-ECA-LM-C-81DT01-F001 kW
9 MAX BARg °C BARg °C BATTERY CHARGERS SOM6623069 kW
10 STARTING INJECTION HEATERS kW
11 INLET MIN BARg °C BARg °C PURGE (AIR OR N2) Nm3/HR
12 NORM BARg °C BARg °C TURBINE AIR EXTRACTION REQUIRED: (4.1.22)

13 MAX BARg °C BARg °C NM3/HR @ BARg
14 EXHST MIN. BARg °C MAXIMUM PRESSURE AVAILABLE AT MINIMUM SPEED: BARg
15 NORM BARg °C MINIMUM SPEED: RPM
16 MAX BARg °C DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE: °C
17 ELECTRICITY: (5.4.6.1) PILOT LIGHT INDICATORS COMPRESSOR EXTRACTION STAGE NUMBER:
18 MOTORS HEATING CONTROL SHUTDOWN REMARKS:
19 VOLTAGE SEE ELECTRICAL LOAD LIST
20 HERTZ N° 946X-ECA-LE-C-81DT02-F001
21 PHASE (SOM6623070)
22 COOLING WATER: N/A <1>
23 INLET TEMPERATURE °C MAX RETURN °C
24 DESIGN TEMPERATURE °C
25 NORM PRESS BARg MIN RETURN BARg
26 DESIGN PRESS BARg MAX ALLOW D P BAR
27 WATER SOURCE
28 INSTRUMENT AIR PRESSURE DESIGN, BARg
29 MAX 8 NORMAL 6,5 MIN 5,5
30 REMARKS:
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38 PURCHASER CONNECTIONS
39
40 DESIGN FACING FLANGED MATING FLG GAS
41 CONNECTION APPROVAL SIZE and POSITION OR & GASKET VELOCITY
42 REQUIRED RATING (4.4.1) STUDDED BY VENDOR M/SEC
43 (4.10.4.6.4) (4.4.1) (4.4.5.4)
44 INLET
45 EXHAUST
SEE PURCHASER CONNECTION DWG AND LIST
46 FUEL SUPPLY
47 STEAM
DWG N° 946X-ECA-DP-M-81DT01-F001 (SOM6666634)
48 WATER
49
50
51
52
ITEM

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
PROJECT 1705713-14-15 <1>
DATA SHEET
1 INSTRUMENTS
2 INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT TRANS- CONTROL
3 TYPE LOCATION MITTERS ROOM
4 DESCRIPTION (Function) (Indication location) FURNISHED RECEIVERS
Local gauge or MKVIe VDU
CONTROL ROOM
LOCAL PANEL (*)
RECORDING
INDICATING
MK VI UCP
Switch or trasmitter
VENDOR
VENDOR
OTHERS
OTHERS
LOCAL
(GAUGE BOARD)
6
.. 7
..8
..9
10
11 GAS GENERATOR OR SINGLE SHAFT GAS TURBINE
12 TACHOMETER(S) (NO. 3 )
13 Δ P AIR INLET SYSTEM
14 COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE
15 FUEL FILTER Δ P (BNT SCOPE)
16 FUEL SUPPLY PRESSURE
17 STARTING GAS SUPPLY PRESSURE
18 STARTING GAS EXHAUST PRESSURE
19 TEMP COMBUSTOR MEASUREMENT (6 PTS MIN) (4.3.2)
20 TEMP GAS TURB CONTROL PLANE (6 PTS MIN)
21 INLET AIR TEMPERATURE
22 TEMPERATURE, GG COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE
23 TEMPERATURE, THRUST BEARING OIL DRAIN (Common With Journal)
24 TEMPERATURE, EACH JOURNAL BEARING DRAIN
25 TEMPERATURE, FUEL MANIFOLD
26 TEMPERATURE, LUBE OIL RESERVOIR
27 FIRED HOUR METER
28 A) NUMBER STARTS COUNTER
29 B) START SEQUENCE TIMER
30 LUBE OIL RESERVOIR LEVEL
31 LUBE OIL PUMP PRESSURE INDICATORS (NO )
32 LUBE OIL COOLER OIL INLET TEMPERATURE
33 LUBE OIL COOLER OIL OUTLET TEMPERATURE
34 LUBE OIL COOLER COOLANT INLET TEMPERATURE
35 LUBE OIL COOLER COOLANT OUTLET TEMPERATURE
36 LUBE OIL FILTER Δ P
37 LUBE OIL PRESSURE EACH LEVEL (NO. 2 )
38 CONTROL OIL PRESSURE
39 SITE FLOW INDICATOR EACH DRAIN (NO. )
40 INLET GUIDE VANE POSITION INDICATOR
41 EXHAUST DUCT DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE INDICATOR
42 ENCLOSURE COOLING AIR EXHAUST TEMPERATURE
43 POWER TURBINE
44 TACHOMETER(S) (NO. ) NA
45 EXHAUST TEMPRTATURE (2 PTS MIN) (GT Exhaust)
46 JOURNAL BEARING TEMPERATURE (BRG 1&2)
47 THRUST BEARING TEMPERATURE (BRG 1)
48 BEARING DRAIN TEMPERATURE SEE LINE 24
49 SITE FLOW INDICATOR EACH DRAIN (NO. SEE LINE 39
50 LUBE OIL INLET PRESSURE (OIL HEADER)
51 LUBE OIL INLET TEMPERATURE (OIL HEADER)
(*) LOCAL PANEL MEANS "MKVI CONTROL PANEL"
ITEM

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
PROJECT 1705713-14-15 <1>
DATA SHEET
1 ALARMS AND SHUTDOWNS (5.4.4)
2
APPLIES TO: (5.4.4.8.5) SENSING DEVICES
LIGHT ONLY
INDICATING
ANNUNCIATOR POINT TO BE
3 IN VENDOR FURNISHED
..4 FURNISHED CONTROL BY
5 DESCRIPTION PANEL
6 SINGLE SEP (1)
7 SHAFT PWR ALARM SHUT- VENDOR OTHERS
8 OR G.G. TURB. DOWN (2)
9 RADIAL SHAFT VIBRATION (NO. 2 Each BRG-Option )
10 AXIAL THRUST POSITION (NO. 2 )
11 OVERSPEED (1) (NO. 3 ) (Pick-Up sensors)
12 CASING VIBRATION (NO. 2 )
13 HIGH THRUST BEARING TEMPERATURE
14 HIGH RADIAL BEARING TEMPERATURE
15 LOW FUEL SUPPLY PRESSURE
16 HIGH FUEL FILTER Δ P
17 GAS TURBINE TEMPERATURE SPREAD HIGH
18 EXHAUST OVER TEMPERATURE
19 FAILURE OF OVER-TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN DEVICE
20 HIGH INLET AIR Δ P EACH FILTER
21 COMBUSTOR FLAME-OUT (1)
22 CHIP DETECTOR, ANTI FRICTION BEARING
23 FAILURE STARTING CLUTCH TO ENGAGE OR DISENGAGE
24 LOW OIL PRESSURE (NO. 2 )
25 HIGH LUBE OIL TEMPERATURE
26 LOW LUBE OIL RESERVOIR LEVEL
27 HIGH LUBE OIL RESERVOIR LEVEL
28 HIGH OIL FILTER Δ P (NO. 1 )
29 LUBE OIL SPARE PUMP OPERATING
30 LOW CONTROL OIL PRESSURE
31 LOW STARTING GAS PRESSURE
32 ANTI-ICING SYSTEM - NOT OPERATING
33 LOW D.C. VOLTAGE
34 EMERGENCY D.C. PUMP OPERATING
35 RESERVOIR HEATER "ON"
36 IMPLOSION DOOR OPEN
37 EXTERNAL PERMISSIVE START SIGNAL
38 EXTERNAL SHUTDOWN SIGNAL
39 LOSS OF AUXILIARY COOLING AIR
40 LAMP TEST PUSH BUTTON
41 ENCLOSURE HIGH TEMPERATURE
42 CONTROL SIGNAL FAILURE
43 CONTROL SYSTEM ACTUATOR FAILURE
44 GOVERNOR FAILURE
45 ENCLOSURE VENT FAN FAILURE
46
47
48
49 NOTES: (1) VENDOR TO ADVISE METHOD OF ANNUNCIATION
50 (2) VDU MAY USE MESSAGE INDICATOR
ITEM

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
PROJECT 1705713-14-15 <1>
DATA SHEET
1 ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED BY GAS TURBINE MANUFACTURER
2 STARTING AND HELPER DRIVERS (5.1) X GEARS: SEE SEPARATE API 613 GEAR DATA SHEETS (5.2.1.1)
X
3 X STARTER ONLY (5.1.1.2) STARTER/HELPER (5.1.1.3) X DRIVEN EQUIPMENT, SEE SEPARATE API DATA SHEETS
4 TYPE (5.1.1.1) X MOTOR STEAM TURBINE X FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT (5.7.3.1)
5 GAS EXPANDER IC ENGINE HYDRAULIC TYPE HALON 1301 HALON 1211 X CO2
6 GAS TURBINE X STARTER IS CLUTCHED (5.1.1.7) X TYPE OF SENSOR X NUMBER OF DETECTORS
7 HELPER RATING (5.1.2.2) kW X CATALITIC Gas Detectors (*) NUMBER 4
8 X STARTER RATING (5.1.2.1) 450 kW X HEAT RISE NUMBER 10
9 X SHAFT TURNING DEVICE REQUIRED (5.1.3.1) ADDITIONAL LEVELS (5.7.3.2)
10 X MOTOR:
11 TYPE Induction (400V 50Hz) <2> RATING 450 kW MOUNTING PLATES (5.3)
12 MFR GE MOTOR MODEL K-450 K85 <1> TYPE (5.3.1.1) SOLEPLATE X BASEPLATE
13 STEAM TURBINE (REFERENCE API DATA SHEETS) X SHIM PACK THICKNESS 44 mm (5.3.1.2.9)
14 MFR MODEL
15 KW MAX. STEAM FLOW kg/HR BASEPLATE (5.3.2)
16 TOTAL/START kg X FURNISHED BY G.T. Vendor (5.3.2.1)
(5.3.2.1)
17 GAS EXPANDER X GAS TURBINE ONLY X EXTENDED FOR Auxiliaries
18 APPLICABLE SPEC. (5.1.1.6) SUB-SOLEPLATES REQUIRED (5.3.2.7) DRIP RIM
19 MFR MODEL COLUMN MOUNTING (5.3.2.4) (3-POINT) LEVELING PADS (5.3.2.3)
20 kW MAX. GAS FLOW kg/HR ENCLOSURES (5.7.5)
21 TOTAL/START KG X ENCLOSURE REQUIRED
22 GAS FOR EXPANSION TURBINE: REQUIREMENTS (5.7.5.1):
23 MIN MAX NORMAL X ACOUSTICAL
24 INLET PRESSURE, BAR X WEATHERPROOF
25 EXHAUST PRESS, BAR X SAFETY
26 GAS TEMPERATURE, °C INLET X FIREPROTECTION
27 GAS TEMPERATURE, °C EXHAUST X ADDITIONAL VENTILATION (5.7.5.6.3)
28 MOLECULAR WEIGHT LOAD COUPLINGS AND GUARDS (5.2.2)
29 SPEED CONTROL GOVERNOR PRESSURE REGULATOR SEE ATTACHED API-671 DATA SHEETS
30 YES NO X MANUFACTURER Goodrich <2> X TYPE Diaphragm
31 INLET CONTROL VALVE FURNISHED X MODEL 96F<2> X GUARD SUPPLIED BY NP <1>
32 STAINLESS STEEL PIPING MANIFOLD X MAXIMUM OUTSIDE DIAMETER 470<2> mm
33 CARBON STEEL FLANGES HUB WEIGHT <2> kg
34 Y-STRAINER W/BREAKOUT FLANGES SPACER LENGTH mm SPACER WEIGHT kg
35 LOW SPEED CAPABILITY IDLING ADAPTER REQUIRED SOLO PLATE REQUIRED
36 (FOR COMPRESSOR CLEANING) X GUARD SUPPLIED BY G.T. Vendor
37 RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE SET POINT BARg TYPE: X FULLY ENCLOSED SEMI-OPEN OTHER
38 CASING MATERIAL LUBRICATING REQUIREMENTS:
39 SEAL TYPE X NON-LUBE GREASE CONT. OIL LUBE
3
40 QUANTITY PER HUB kg or m /HR
41 INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE REMARKS: <2>
42 TYPE SPARK IGNITED DIESEL
43 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION (5.1.1.6)
44 MANUFACTURER MODEL
45 SPEED RPM POWER kW
46
47 COMBUSTION GAS TURBINE
48 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION (5.1.1.6)
49 MANUFACTURER MODEL
50 SPEED RPM POWER kW
ITEM

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
PROJECT 1705713-14-15 <1>
DATA SHEET
1 ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED BY GAS TURBINE MANUFACTURER
2 INLET SYSTEM EXHAUST SYSTEM
3 X AIR FILTER (5.5.4.1) EXTENT OF FURNISHED INSULATION (SEE SKETCH) (5.7.1.2)
4 INERTIAL TYPE SEPARATOR MEDIA FILTERS (RELIEF) (DIVERSION) VALVE (5.5.6.8)
5 PAD TYPE PREFILTERS COMBINATION EXHAUST HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM (5.5.3.1)
6 X SELF CLEANING (JET PULSE TYPE) EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (5.5.3.1)
7 SINGLE STAGE WITH PROVISION FOR EXHAUST SILENCER PLATE ELEMENT MATERIAL (5.5.5.2.3)
8 FUTURE EXTRA STAGES YES NO
9 NORMAL DUST LOADING kg/Nm3/HR EMISSIONS SAMPLING SYSTEM (5.5.6.10)
10 WIND DESIGN VELOCITY km/HR X EXPANSION JOINT MFR GE TYPE Tex. Compens.
11 SNOW LOAD kg/m² DUCTING GAUGE/MATERIAL
12 SEISMIC ZONE SILENCER MFR ΔP mm H2O
13 LOCATION: GROUND LEVEL X ELEVATED (5.5.4.6) HEAT RECOVERY DEVICE
14 X FILTRATION EFFICIENCY 98 % (5.5.4.3) MFR TYPE Δ P mm H2O
15 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL MONTHS STEAM GEN: PRESS BARg TEMP °C
16 CLEANING FREQUENCY DAYS RATE kg/HR
17 IMPLOSION DOOR (5.5.4.5) MANOMETER MFR MODEL RANGE mm H2O
18 EVAPORATIVE COOLER (5.6.1.1) ANTI-ICING (5.5.3.10) ATMOSPHERIC RELIEF DEVICE (5.5.6.8)
19 LIQUID TO AIR EXCHANGER (5.6.2.2) TYPE MFR LOCATION
20 WALKWAY, LADDERS, HANDRAILS REQUIRED (5.6.1.5) X SYSTEM SITE RATED PRESSURE DROP 102 Expected mm H2O
21 X COMPRESSOR CLEANING SYSTEM, TYPE Crank W. (5.5.3.9)
22 X SILENCER PLATE ELEMENT MAT'L (5.5.5.1.4) C.S. <1> ATMOSPHERIC EMISSIONS (2)
23 X FILTER MFR. DONALDSON <2> MODEL TTD <1> EMISSION SUPPRESSION SYSTEM REQUIRED (5.8.4.1)
24 @ 110% RATED AIR FLOW Δ P 30<2> mm H2O X NOx REQUIREMENTS (5.5.3.1.1) GUARANTEED MAX 25ppm @15%O2
25 CLEAN <1> 35 mm H2O ALARM <1> 55 mm H2O NOx EMITTED
26 COOLER MFR. MODEL ΔP mm H2O EMISSIONS REDUCTION METHOD (IF REQUIRED)(5.8.4.2)
27 EXCHANGER MFR (5.6.2.3) WATER INJECTION (5.8.4.4) SCR

28 MODEL ΔP mm H2O STEAM (5.8.4.4) DRY COMBUSTOR
29 X DUCTING GAUGE / MATERIAL 5 mm Epoxy paint C.S. OTHER
30 X EXPANSION JOINT MFR GE TYPE Compens SOx REQUIREMENTS
31 X SILENCER MFR GE ΔP mm H2O SULFUR CONTENT OF FUEL
32 MANOMETER MFR MODEL SOx EMITTED (BASED ON STATED SULFUR CONTENT)
33 RANGE mm H2O
34 X SYSTEM SITE RATED PRESSURE DROP 102 Expected mm H2O X CO REQUIREMENTS GUARANTEED 25 ppmvd < 150 mg/Nm3
35 @ 110% RATED AIR FLOW CO EMITTED
36 REMARKS: PARTICULATE REQUIREMENTS
37 PARTICULATE EMITTED
38 UNBURNED HC REQUIREMENTS
39 UNBURNED HC EMITTED
40 APPLICABLE EMISSION CODES OR REGULATIONS
41 EPA - TITLE 40 - CFR OTHERS
42
43
44 SPECIALIZED INSTRUMENTS
45 TACHOMETERS: (5.4.7.2.2) SWITCHES: (5.4.4.8.2)
46 TYPE ELECTRICAL ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT SHALL
47 ANALOG X DIGITAL ENERGIZE X DEENERGIZE TO ALARM
48 X MANUFACTURER AIRPAX <1> ENERGIZE X DEENERGIZE TO SHUTDOWN
49 OIL FILLED PRESSURE GAUGES (5.4.7.6) ENCLOSURES
50 EXPLOSION PROOF WEATHER PROOF
ITEM

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
PROJECT 1705713-14-15 <1>
DATA SHEET
1 INSPECTION AND TESTING; LUBRICATION, WEIGHTS
2 SHOP INSPECTION AND TESTS: (6.1.1) (1) WIT- OBSER- LUBRICATION SYSTEMS (4.9)
3 REQ NESSED VED X SEE API 614 (With NP comments/Exceptions)
4 SHOP INSPECTION (6.1.2) X X LUBE OIL VISCOSITY (4.9.8) ISO GRADE VG 32
5 CLEANLINESS (6.2.3.3) X COMMON TO GAS GENERATOR/SINGLE SHAFT TURBINE
6 HYDROSTATIC (6.3.2) (2) X FREE POWER TURBINE X LOAD GEAR
7 MECHANICAL RUN (6.3.3) X X DRIVEN EQUIPMENT X AUXILIARIES
X
8 CONTRACT IDLING (COMBINED) (SEPARATE) LUBE/SEAL SYSTEM (4.9.5)
9 COUPLING ADAPTOR(S) SYSTEM DESIGNED FOR SYNTHETIC LUBRICANT (4.9.2)
10 X CONTRACT SHOP LUBE SPECIFICATION SOM 17366
11 PROBES PROBES COMMON TO GAS GENERATOR POWER TURBINE
12 VIBRATION PLOTS(6.3.3.3.4) X LOAD GEAR DRIVEN EQUIPMENT
13 TAPE RECORD VIB DATA (6.3.3.3.6) X AUXILIARIES
14 PERFORMANCE TEST (6.3.4.1)
15 COMPLETE UNIT TEST (6.3.4.2) FLOW PRESSURE HEAT LOAD
3 BARg MJ/HR
16 PACKAGE TEST(6.3.4.2.1) X OIL REQUIREMENTS m /HR
17 LOAD GEAR TEST (6.3.4.3) SEE NOTE 2 X GG OR SS TURBINE 32,2 1,7
18 SOUND LEVEL TEST (6.3.4.4) DRIVEN EQUIPMENT 5,7 1,7
19 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (6.3.4.5) X X GEAR 32,5 1,7
20 POST TEST INSPECTION (6.3.4.6) COUPLINGS
21 HYDRAULIC COUPLING INSP (6.3.4.7) POWER TURBINE
22 GOVERNOR RESPONSE TEST (6.3.4.8) TOTAL
23 SPARE PARTS (6.3.4.9)
24 FIRE PROTECTION (6.3.4.10) MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
25 OTHER (6.3.4.11) UCP CONSOLE COLUMN X BASEPLATE
26
27 MATERIALS INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS (6.2.1.3) (1) X WEIGHTS DRY
28 SPECIAL CHARPY TESTING (4.10.5.3) <1> INSTALLED SHIPPING DIMEN
29 RADIOGRAPHY REQUIRED FOR REFER TO QCP SOM6623070 WT. (kg) WT. (kg) LxWxH (m)
30 MAGNETIC PARTICLE REQUIRED FOR REFER TO QCP SOM6623070 WHEELS TURBINE 4568 91000 (3 )<2> 11700x3200x3500 (4) <2>
31 LIQUID PENETRANT REQUIRED FOR REFER TO QCP SOM6623070 COMPRESSOR ROTOR 4536 91000 (3 )<2> 11700x3200x3500 (4) <2>
32 ULTRASONIC REQUIRED FOR REFER TO QCP SOM6623070 COOLERS (QTY 2) 2858 11900<2> 10500x3100x2600<2>
33 WELD INSPECTION (4.10.4.6.1) REFER TO QCP SOM6623070 BASE AND PIPING 30844
34 WELDING HARDNESS TESTING (6.2.3.4) REFER TO QCP SOM6623070 COMBUS. WRAPPER 6350
35 STRTG. MEAN.& ACC. 9390
36 MISCELLANEOUS: (1) FILTER 363
37 VENDOR'S REVIEW & COMMENTS ON PURCHASER'S INLET PLENUM 1134
38 PIPING & FOUNDATION (4.1.18) EXHAUST PLENUM 3629
39 FINAL ASSEMBLY CLEARANCES (6.2.1.1 e) ATOM. AIR COM. 250
40 COORDINATION MEETING SITE (7.1.3) PIPING ARRANG. 862
41 SPEED-TORQUE CURVE (7.2.4-a) ON BASE ENCLOS. 8000
42 INCREASE POWER FOR STEAM/WATER (7.2.4 b) TOTAL WEIGHT 95430
43 EFFECTS OF AMB. COND. ON EXHAUST FLOW (7.2.4 c) MAX ERECTION
44 RUN DOWN CURVES (7.2.4 d) WEIGHT (kg) 75614 ITEM G.T. SKID
45 PURCHASER REVIEW OF CAMP./GOODMAN DIAG. (4.5.3.3) MAX MAINTENANCE
46 VENDOR WITNESS ALIGNMENT (4.1.18) WEIGHT (kg) 9000 ITEM
47 TECHNICAL DATA MANUAL (7.3.6.4) REMARKS:

48 NUMBER OF PROPOSAL COPIES (7.2.1) (1) SEE QUALITY CONTROL PLAN SOM6623070
49 (2) AT SUB-SUPPLIER'S FACTORY (ACCORDING TO SUB-SUPPLIER PROC,)
50 (2) ON PIPING SPEEDS ONLY. NOT APPLICABLE TO GT
(3) G.T. SKID DIMENSIONS. <2> (4) IT ISN'T THE CASE DIMENSION <2>
ITEM

Nuovo Pignone
CLIENTE – CUSTOMER
BONATTI – ITALY / SONATRACH ALGERIA
FIRENZE
LOCALITA’ – PLANT LOCATION
ALRAR ALGERIA
COMMESSA - JOB
IMPIANTO – PLANT
1705713/14/15
MS5001 DLN – POWER GENERATION
TITOLO - TITLE
MS5001PA Gas Turbine

DLN-1 Combustor
Inlet Bleed Heating Implemented
Power Generation - Performance Curves
Electronically approved draw. GE NuovoPignone Confidential DT-'C'

25/06/09 Carta Miliani Seghi
B 2. EMISSION
28/01/09 1. EMISSION Mossi Carta Seghi
A
TURBINE A GAZ – COURBES DES PRESTATIONS DU GENERATION DE PUISSANCE

GAS TURBINE – POWER GENERATION PERFORMANCE CURVES
DZ 0233
A4
N/A 946 X 946X–ECA–RT–M-81DT01-F001-B B
ITEM 0052
1 Revised Pages 1 and 16 Carta R. Miliani A. Seghi A. 25/06/09 N. SOM6623187/4

0 EMISSIONE – ISSUED A. Mossi Carta R. Seghi A. 28/01/09 LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
REV. DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION PREP’D CONT-CHK’D APP-APPR’D DATA-DATE A 1/2
Il presente documento è di proprietà Nuovo Pignone. A termine di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES
This document is the of Nuovo Pignone. All right are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA – REPLACES BY
Nuovo Pignone MS5001PA DLN-1 Gas Turbine
FIRENZE
Power Generation
General Electric Model PG5371PA Gas Turbine

Estimated Performance - Configuration: DLN-1 Combustor
ISO Design Conditions: Ambient Temperature 15 °C, 60% Relative Humidity
Atmospheric Pressure 1.013 bar
Fuel Type 100% CH4

Design Generator Power kW 26800
Design Heat Rate (LHV) kJ/kWh 12470
Design Heat Consumption MW 92.7
Design Exhaust Temper. °C 482.3
Design Exhaust Flow kg/sec 125.4
Shaft Des.Speed RPM 5100
Notes:
1. Generator system used is D165T (5N)
2. Power factor is 0.8
3. Inlet and exhaust pressure drop 0/0 mm H2O
120
110
100
90
80
Heat Consumption [MW]
70
TAMB-45°C
60 TAMB-30°C
TAMB-15°C
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20
Electrical Generator Output [Design Fraction]
Note: Cycle Deck Model PG5371-1189 DLN-1 Combustor with Inlet Bleed Heating.
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
REV DESCRIZIONE – DESCRIPTION A 2 / 3
Il presente documento è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termine di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES
This document is the of Nuovo Pignone. All right are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA – REPLACED BY
FIRENZE
Power Generation

Fuel Type 100% CH4

Notes:
110
100
90
80
70
Heat Consumption [MW]
60 TAMB0°C
TAMB15°C
TAMB30°C
50 TAMB45°C
40
30
20
10
0
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
FIRENZE
Power Generation

Fuel Type 100% CH4

Notes:
600
550
500
450
400 TAMB-45°C
Exhaust Temp [°C]
TAMB-30°C
TAMB-15°C
350 TAMB0°C
TAMB15°C
TAMB30°C
300 TAMB45°C
250
200
150
100
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
FIRENZE
Power Generation

Fuel Type 100% CH4

Notes:
150
140
130
120
Exhaust Flow [kg/sec]
110 TAMB-45°C
TAMB-30°C
TAMB-15°C
100 TAMB0°C
TAMB15°C
TAMB30°C
90 TAMB45°C
80
70
60
50
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
FIRENZE
Power Generation

Configuration: DLN-1 Combustor
Fuel Type 100% CH4

Notes:
Ambient Temperature Effect on Gas Turbine Electric Power
1.20
1.15
1.10
Generator Power (Fraction of ISO Base Load)
1.05
1.00
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.80
0.75
0.70
-45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
Ambient Temperature [°C]
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
FIRENZE
Power Generation

Fuel Type 100% CH4

Notes:
Ambient Temperature Effect on Gas Turbine Electric Heat Rate
1.15
1.10
Elec Heat Rate (Fraction of ISO Base Load)
1.05
1.00
0.95
0.90
-45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
FIRENZE
Power Generation

Fuel Type 100% CH4

Ambient Temperature Effect on Gas Turbine Heat Consumption
1.20
1.15
Heat Consumption (Fraction of ISO Base Load)
1.10
1.05
1.00
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.80
-45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
FIRENZE
Power Generation

Fuel Type 100% CH4

Ambient Temperature Effect on Gas Turbine Exhaust Temperature
520
510
500
Exhaust Temperature [°C]
490
480
470
460
450
440
-45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
FIRENZE
Power Generation

Fuel Type 100% CH4

Ambient Temperature Effect on Gas Turbine Exhaust Flow
1.15
1.10
Exhaust Flow (Fraction of ISO Base Load)
1.05
1.00
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.80
-45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
FIRENZE
Power Generation

Fuel Type 100% CH4

Compressor Speed Effect on Gas Turbine Power
Gas Turbine Power Factor vs. Compressor Speed Ratio

1.06
1.04
1.02
Correction Factor
1
0.98
0.96
0.94
0.92
0.9
0.94 0.96 0.98 1 1.02 1.04 1.06
Compressor Speed Ratio
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
FIRENZE
Power Generation

Fuel Type 100% CH4

Ambient Pressure Effect on Gas Turbine Power

NOTES :
1. Exhuast Temperature, Heat Rate and Thermal Efficiency are not affected by ambient press (Altitude)
2.Correction Factor = P(psia)/14.7 or P(bar)/1.013529
Gas Turbine Power Factor vs. Atmospheric Pressure Ratio
1.00
0.98
0.96
Correction Factor
0.94
0.92
0.90
0.88
0.86
0.84
0.82
0.80
0.8 0.85 0.9 0.95 1
Atmospheric Pressure Ratio
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
FIRENZE
Power Generation

Fuel Type 100% CH4

Inlet Pressure Drop Effect on Gas Turbine Power
Gas Turbine Pow er Factor vs. Inlet Pressure Drop
1.010
1.000
0.990
Correction Factor
0.980
0.970
0.960
0.950
0.940
0.930
0.920
0.910
0.900
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
Inlet Pressure Drop [m m H2O]
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
FIRENZE
Power Generation

Fuel Type 100% CH4

Exhaust Pressure Drop Effect on Gas Turbine Power
Gas Turbine Pow er Factor vs. Exhaust Pressure Drop
1.005
1
Correction Factor
0.995
0.99
0.985
0.98
0.975
0.97
0.965
0.96
0 100 200 300 400 500
Exhaust Pressure Drop [m m H2O]
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
FIRENZE
Power Generation

Fuel Type 100% CH4

Inlet Pressure Drop Effect on Gas Turbine Heat Rate
Gas Turbine Heat Rate Factor vs Inlet Pressure Drop
1.045
1.040
1.035
Correction Factor
1.030
1.025
1.020
1.015
1.010
1.005
1.000
0.995
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
Inlet Pressure Drop [mm H2O]
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
FIRENZE
Power Generation

Fuel Type 100% CH4s

Exhaust Pressure Drop Effect on Gas Turbine Heat Rate
Gas Turbine
Gas Heat
Turbine Rate
Heat vs. Exhaust
Rate vs. Inlet Pressure Drop
Drop
1.045
1.04
1.035
Correction Factor
1.03
1.025
1.02
1.015
1.01
1.005
1
0.995
0 100 200 300 400 500
Output Pressure Drop [mm H2O]
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
FIRENZE
Power Generation

Fuel Type 100% CH4

Specific Humidity vs. Power and Heat Rate Correction Factor
Specific Humidity vs Power and Heat Rate Correction Factors
1.0100
1.0090
1.0080
1.0070 ISO SPECIFIC HUMIDITY
0.0029 Kg water vapor/Kg dry air
1.0060
1.0050
C o rre c tio n F a c to r
1.0040
1.0030 HEAT RATE
1.0020
1.0010
1.0000 POWER OUTPUT
0.9990
0.9980
0.9970
0.9960
0.000 0.005 0.010 0.015 0.020 0.025 0.030 0.035
Specific Humidity [Kg water vapor/Kg dry air]
ITEM 0052
N. SOM6623187/4
0 ISSUED - EMESSO
NuovoPignone CLIENTE – CUSTOMER
SONATRACH
LOCALITA' - PLANT LOCATION

FIRENZE
ALGERIA
COMMESSA - JOB IMPIANTO – PLANT

TITOLO - TITLE
CONTROL SYSTEM
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
AS-SHIPPED
REVISED SH. 1, 6 , 8, 15 ,16, 50 ,55 , 56, 57 FOR Giovanardi L. Seghi A.

4 RADHIKA J. 15/03/10
AS-SHIPPED
3 REVISED FOR AS-SHIPPED RADHIKA J. GIOVANARDI L.. SEGHI A. 24/12/09 ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION RADHIKA J. LUSINI S. SEGHI A. 12/11/09
1 GENERAL REVISION RADHIKA J. LUSINI S. SEGHI A. 08/07/09 N. SOM5461188 /4

ISSUE PRITAM P. ORGERO F. SEGHI A. 30/04/09 LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
0
RE DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION PREP'D CONT-CHK'D APP-APPR'D DATA - A 1/2
Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NuovoPignone INDEX
FIRENZE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
START/STOP SEQUENCING .................................................................................................................... 5
1.1 READY TO START 5
1.2 AUXILIARIES STARTING 6
1.3 CRANK 7
1.4 IGNITION AND WARMUP 8
1.5 ACCELERATION TO OPERATIVE SPEED 9
1.6 COMPLETE SEQUENCE AND SYNCRONIZATION 10
1.7 LOAD MANAGEMENT 11
1.8 SHUTDOWN REQUEST 12
1.9 TRIP REQUEST 13
1.10 COOLDOWN SEQUENCE 14
1.11 SHUTDOWN AND TRIP SEQUENCE 15
2 STATUS DEFINITION ....................................................................................................................... 16
2.1 AUXILIARIES START READY 16
2.2 START PASSED 18
2.3 CRANK READY 19
2.4 FIRE READY 20
2.5 LOAD READY 21
2.6 SYNCRONIZATION PERMISSIVES 22
2.7 SHUTDOWN 23
2.8 TRIP 24
3 AUXILIARIES SEQUENCING............................................................................................................ 26
3.1 MINERAL LUBE OIL 26
3.2 OIL VAPOUR SEPARATOR 29
3.3 LUBE OIL HEATER 30
3.4 LUBE OIL COOLER 31
3.5 HYDRAULIC OIL<1> 33
3.6 STARTING SYSTEM 35
3.7 HYDRAULIC RATCHETING 37
3.8 WHEELSPACES 39
3.9 SEISMIC VIBRATION 40
3.10 WATER WASH 41
3.11 VENTILATION 43
3.12 INLET AND FILTRATION 46
3.13 FUEL GAS<1> 47
ITEM
3 REVISED WHERE SHOWN AS <3>
2 GENERAL REVISION
1 GENERAL REVISION N. SOM5461188 /4

0 ISSUE LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
REV DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION A 2 /3

NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.14 FIRE FIGHTING AND GAS DETECTION MONITORING 49

3.15 GENERATOR HEATER AND COOLING FANS SYSTEM 50
3.16 GENERATOR SYNCHRONIZATION SEQUENCES 51
3.17 DROOP AND ISOCHRONOUS CONTROL MODE 53
3.18 BASE LOAD 55
3.19 EJECTOR LOGIC <4> 55
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS:
MKVIe MARK VIe

DCP DIRECT CURRENT PANEL
MCC MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
QMT MEDIUM VOLTAGE PANEL
PMS POWER MANGEMENT SYSTEM
F&G FIRE AND GAS
DCS DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM
UCP UNIT CONTROL PANEL
GCPP GENERATOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION PANEL
GEP GENERATOR EXCITATION PANEL
GT GAS TURBINE
CRS CUSTOMER READY TO START<2>
HMI HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE <2>
ARS AUXILLIARY READY TO START <2>
PRS PROCESS READY TO START <2>
FSNL FULL SPEED NO LOAD <2>
SHT SHEET <2>
NOTE:
The scope of this specification is to give a flow chart description of the main gas turbine sequences and a
functional description of its auxiliaries sequences.
This document does not cover the description of CORE ENGINE LOGIC FUNCTIONS.
The CORE ENGINE LOGIC FUNCTIONS software section contains algorithms for combustion chambers
flame detection, firing temperature calculation, speed/load regulator/protection, acceleration regulators,
exhaust temperature averaging regulator and protection, inter stage pressure regulator. These algorithms
shall be considered GE proprietary information and are excluded from this specification.
Reference Documents <2>
P&Ids SOM5105800
SOM5105801
SOM5105810
SOM5105820
SOM5105821
SOM5105830
SOM5105831
SOM5105832
SOM5105834
SOM5105836
SOM5105840
SOM5105871
SOM5105880
SOM5105881
SOM5105890
SOM5105894
UCS I/O LIST : SOM5461006
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
START/STOP SEQUENCING
1.1 READY TO START
External Process Turbine and Auxiliaries

Sequences Sequences Sequences
Start
Sequence
F Yes
from
Shutdown or
Shutdown sequence
Trip ?
SHT 10 active
Process ready To No
start No Auxiliaries ready to start
H
(L3ARS) includes the
GT zero following software
from Trip speed Cumulative signals
sequence ?
detected - Miscellaneous
SHT 13 (L3ARS_MSC)
Yes - Lube Oil(L3ARS_LO)
- Hydraulic Ratchet
(L3ARS_RAT)
AND -Enclosure Vent
L3PRS (L3ARS_ENC)
Customer ready to start 3 CRS(2) =1 AND
-Fire&Gas monitor
XS-120 (from DCS) (L3ARS_FGM )
No
- Fuel gas(L3ARS_FG)
OR Water wash on
Aux. Selected (L43BW)
permissive See 2.1 “AUXILIARIES
OK? START READY” for
details
Yes
(L3ARS (2))
No
Core
Engine and
- diagnosti
OK?
c
Yes
- Off
Master
NOTES: Selector(1)
- Crank
(1) HMI -Fire
Software switch - Manual
(2) Internal Software - Auto
Signal - Remote
Unit Ready to
Start
(L3 RS=1 (2))
A
SHT 6
Figure 1 - Ready to start

ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
1.2 AUXILIARIES STARTING

A SHT 5
Remote Manual
Master Sel
No
Start
Start Command And Push
XS-116 ( From DCS) Button on
HMI?
Yes Yes
Yes
Turbine start
sequence
initiated - Start
auxiliaries
(L1X= 1(3))
Mineral Lube Oil Oil mist eliminator Ventilation System

system (1) activated
activated started
Auxiliaries Start Passed

N (L3ASP) include s the
o following software cumulative
Auxiliarie signals
s
Start Passed ? - : Oil( L3ASP_ LO)
Lube
Ventilation(L3ASP_ENC )
NOTES See 2.2 “START PASSED”
(1) Can be already activated for details.
Yes
( seecooldown sequence )
(2) HMI software switch . Master protective signal

enabled (L4= 1(3) )
(3) Internal Software
Signal <3> Open Fuel Block Valve 20FB-2(SOV01002B)
Close Fuel vent Valve 20FV-1(SOV01001A )
<4>
Close Fuel vent Valve 20FV-2(SOV01001B)
B SHT 7
Figure 2 - Auxiliaries starting
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
1.3 CRANK
E xternal Process Turbine and Auxiliaries
Sequences S equences Sequences
B
SHT 6
Off-line
water wash sel. Yes
on HMI
Water Wash
system Start (1)
No
End of sequence
Auxiliaries Ready to crank

(L3ARC) includes the
following software
cumulative signals:
No -Process (L3PRC)
-Lube Oil (L3ARC_LO)
-Fuel Gas (L3ARC_FG )
Aux. Ready to
crank?
See 2.3 “CRANK READY”
for details
Yes
-Ratchet system activation

-Starting system activation
No
GT speed
above zero
speed?
Yes
Ratchet system de-activation
No
GTspeed
above Crank
speed?
NOTES : Yes
(1) Note that if water
wash is selected, CRANK
ready to start and
start passed
conditions change
from the above No
Crank Time
described
Elapsed?
Yes
C
SHT 8
Figure 3 –Crank
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
1.4 IGNITION AND WARMUP
E x te r n a l P ro c e s s T u r b in e a n d A u x ilia r ie s
S equences S equences S equences
C SHT 7
C ra n k
M a s te r
s e l e c to r
(2 )
A u x ilia r ie s R e a d y to f ir e
- F ir e
(L3 A R F) I n c lu d e s th e
- M anual
f o llo w i n g s o f tw a r e
- A u to
No c u m u la tiv e s ig n: a ls
- R e m o te
- H y d r a u lic O( ilL 3 A R F_ H Y D)
- F u e l G a(sL 3 A R F_ F G )
A. u x - W a t e r W a s h( L 3 A R F_ W W )
r efiar d y to
?
e S e e2 . 4 “ F IR E R E A D Y ” f o r
d e t.a ils
Y es
No
C o r e E n g in e
r e a d y t o f ir e?
Y es
I g n itio n T r a s f o r m e r c o m m a n( d
L 2 T V X= 1 (3 ))
O n S k id V a lv e s
C lo a e F u e l g a s V e n t v a lv e s 2 0 V G - 1 ( F V - 1 0 9)
O p e n F u e l g a s B lo c k v a lv e s 2 0 F G - 1 ( F V - 3 3 7 ) & 2 0 F G - 2 ( F V - 3 3 8)
No
F la m e
D e te c te d F ir in g tim e
No
e la p s e d?
( L 2 8 F D X) ?
Y es
Yes
- L u b e O il C o o lin g s y s te m
a c t iv a t io n
M a s te
r
S e le c t o r( 2 )
- F ire
- M anual
N O T E S:
- R e m o te - A u to
( 1 ) T u r b in e r e m a in s in W ARMUP
C R AN K m od . eT o D is a b le i g n it io n t r a n s fo r m e r
-
s t a r t a n e w f ir in g O n S k id V a lv e s
a t te m p t, t h e o p e r a to r No C lo a e F- u e l g a s V e n t v a lv e s
h a s to m o v e 2 0 V G - 1 ( F V - 1 0 9)
t e m p o r a r i ly m a s t e r
O p e n F u e l g a s B lo c k v a lv e s
s e le c t o r i n C R A N K W a r m u p t im e 2 0 F G -1 ( F V- 3 3 7 ) &
p o s i tio n
e la p s e d? 2 0 F G - 2 ( F V - 3 3 8)
(2 ) H M I s o f tw a r e
O ff s k id V a lv e s
s w it
. ch C lo s e F u e l B lo c k V a lv e
( 3 ) I n t e r n l S o f tw a r e 2 0 F B - 2 ( S O V 0 1 0 0 2B ) < 1 >
S ig n a l Y es
O p e n F u e l V e n t V a lv e
2 0 F V - 1 ( S O V 0 1 0 0 1A ) < 1 >
2 0 F V - 2 ( S O V 0 1 0 0 1B ) < 1 > < 4 >
G
D
SHT 9 To S h u td o w n (1 )
End
se que nce
SH T 15
Figure 4 - Ignition and warmup

4 R E V IS E D W H E R E S H O W N A S < 4 > ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
1.5 ACCELERATION TO OPERATIVE SPEED

SHT 8 D
Master selector
(2) -Fire
-Manual
-Auto
-Remote
ACCELERATING
No
Turbine speed
above self sustaining
speed?
Yes
Starting system de-activated
No
Turbine speed
above min operative
speed?
GCPP
Excitation (41 FX )
enabled XS-212 Yes
Auxiliary lube oil pump de-activation (1)

NOTES:
(1) Mechanical Pump
is operative
(2) HMI software
switch. E
SHT 10
Figure 5 - Acceleration to operative speed
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
1.6 COMPLETE SEQUENCE AND SYNCRONIZATION

SHT 9
E
No Auxiliaries Ready to Load

(L3ARL) software signal
details are described in 2.5
Aux. Ready to “LOAD READY”
load?
Yes
Turbine start sequence ended-

turbine is running
(L3=1(1) )
Note
(1) Software Signal
No
GT speed =
100.3%?
Yes
FSNL
GCPP
Turbine ready to
syncronize (52SX)
XS-209
No
Off
GCPP Auto Syncronization
Sync. (GCPP-AUTO)
permissives OK?
selector XS-202
For details see 2.6
Manual Yes “SYNCRONIZATION
PERMISSIVES”
Auto sync.
In progress
GCPP No
GCPP manual
syncronization
Yes
Auto sync. Resynch.
No
OK? requested?
(25 ) Yes
XS-215 HMI
GCPP
generator circuit Resynch.
breaker close push button
command
F SHT 11
SHT 5
Figure 6 - Complete sequence and Syncronization
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
1.7 LOAD MANAGEMENT

External Turbine and Auxiliaries
Sequences Sequences
F SHT 10
PMS
Master
HMI Master
Yes Selector (1) in No
selector in Remote ( LOC -REM)
Remote
position XS-222 position
HMI ISO/
DROOP mode
PMS
selection
ISO/DROOP
mode ISO/
selection DROOP
XS-219
ISO/DROOP
mode selected
Master
Remote Selector (1)
PMS Manual
Active Power
Raise PMS-RS)
XS-175
Active Power Output Active Power Output
increased/decreased increased/decreased
through to Raise/ Auto through to Raise/Lower
PMS
Lower on PMS push buttons on HMI
Active Power
(PMS-LS)
Lower XS-176 Active Power Output
according to Base
Load or Preselected
Load input on HMI
PMS (PMS- R-RF)
Reactive XS-224
Power Raise
PMS GCPP
Reactive Power
Reactive Output increased/
Power Lower decreased through
(PMS- R-LS) to Raise/Lower on
XS-225 PMS End Sequence
Notes:
(1) HMI software
switch.
Figure 7 – Load Management
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
1.8 SHUTDOWN REQUEST

Start sequence
DCS -Crank
Stop push
DCS Stop -Fire
button on
Command -Manual
(DCS- STOP) HMI
Master -Auto
XS-115 -Remote
Selector (1)
PMS
Customer Yes Yes
PMS Stop OR G HMI STOP?
STOP ?
Command (PMS-94X)
XS-227 SHT 15
No No
Auxiliaries shutdown request

includes requests from the following
systems:
Aux.STOP ?
-Wheelspaces (L94ASHD_WHE) Yes
-Seismic Vibration (L94ASHD_VIB)
-Inlet Air and Filtr. (L94ASHD_IAF)
- Ventilation L 3ASP_ENC )
- GCPP No
See 2.7 “SHUTDOWN” for details.
GCPP
Generator
Lockout Relay (K86G2)
de-energized Process
XS-182 AND Yes G
STOP ?
TRUE L94PSHD (3)
SHT 15
No
Notes Core Engine

Yes
STOP(2)?
(1) HMI software switch.
(2) Core engine stop and trip are
generated by core engine standard
No
software, developed to manage fuel gas
valves and speed control.
(3) Software Signal
End sequence
Figure 8 - Shutdown request
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
1.9 TRIP REQUEST

Start sequence
GCPP
Trip to driver
from (K4-TRIP) GCPP Trip?
protections Yes
XS-183
No
DCS
Customer trip (L4CTRIP) Customer
command XS-177 Trip?
Auxiliaries trip request includes No

the following software requests: Yes
-Process (L4PTRIP)
-Lube Oil (L4ATRIP_LO)
-Seismic Vibration
(L4ATRIP_VIB)
-Starting Device (L4ATRIP_SD) Aux Trip?
-Enc.Ventilation (L4ATRIP_ENC) Yes
No
See 2.8 “TRIP” for details.
Core Engine
Yes H
Trip?
No SHT 15
SHT 5
End sequence
Figure 9 - Trip request
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
1.10 COOLDOWN SEQUENCE

I
SHT 15
No
GT zero speed
reached?
Yes
Hydraulic Ratchet
system start
No
Cooldown
timer expired?
Yes
L62CD=1
- Lube oil system stop

- Hydraulic ratchet system stop
- Oil vapour separator stop
End Sequence
Figure 10 – Cooldown Sequence
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
1.11 SHUTDOWN AND TRIP SEQUENCE

Sequences Sequences Sequences SHT
G 12
GCPP Off Skid Valves
Turbine Normal ( 94X) Close Fuel gas Block valves
Stop 20FG-1( FV- 337 ) &20FG- 2( FV- 338)
XS- 211
Open Fuel gas Vent valves
20VG- 1( FV- 109) Shutdown in
Progress
L 94X(3)
PMS
( PM S - 94X)
Turbine Normal
Stop L3= 0(3)
XS- 227
UNLOADING
No
Reverse
GCPP Power
? (1)
Gen. Circuit
Breaker ( 52GT)
opening
command XS- 216 Yes
Yes HMI No DECELERATING
RELOADING ?
START
Shutdown From Sht 1 3 No
sequence GT under
aborted H minimum
speed
operative
?
Unit Summary Trip Yes

On Skid Valves
Close Fuel gas Block valves
20FG-1( FV- 337 ) &20FG- 2( FV- 338)
L 14 HS= 0(3)
Open Fuel gas Vent valves
- Mineral Lube Oil system
20VG- 1( FV- 109) d
activate
GCPP L4=0(3)
4X- 32
Trip from
driver XS- 210 No
No
GT FlameOut
?
minimum
operative OR
speed ? Yes
L4= 0(3)
Yes
Ventilation Timer Lube Oil Cooler
- Mineral Lube Oil activated
system timer activated
activated
No No
No
Flame Out? Timer Timer

expired? expired ?
Yes
Yes Yes
NOTES:
(1) MKVIe Reverse Power - Ventilation System Lube oil
-
Limit to be set higher Stop Cooler
OR system Stop
Then GCPP Reverse power
Protection
. value
Offskid Valves
(2) TNH– Turbine Speed Close Fuel Block Valve
. L 62 CD= 0(3)
(3 ) Software Signal 20FB-2( SOV 01002 B)
Open Fuel Vent Valve End
20FV-1( SOV 01001A)
I 20FV-2( SOV 01001B)<4>
To
Cooldown
SHT14
Figure 11 - Shutdown and Trip sequence
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
2 STATUS DEFINITION
The main checks performed by the MKVIe software before starting different turbine sequences are listed in the
following tables.
Signals descriptions shall be considered related to software signals in the first columns.
2.1 AUXILIARIES START READY
SOFTWARE TAG JOB TAG (GE TAG) DESCRIPTION SYSTEM

LOGIC TAG AG
NOT L71QL_W NOT LT -301 (96QL1) LUBE OIL TANK LEVEL LOW MINERAL LUBE OIL
LUBE OIL EMERGENCY PUMP
NOT l27qel NOT XS -101 (27QE) MINERAL LUBE OIL
UNDERVOLTAGE ALM
LUBE OIL EMERGENCY PUMP
NOT l49qe NOT XS -102 (49QE) MINERAL LUBE OIL
OVERLOAD ALARM
L26QN_W NOT TE -307 (LT-OT-1) LUBE OIL TANK TEMP LOW <2> MINERAL LUBE OIL
HYDRAULIC RATCHET PUMP
NOT l49hr1a NOT XS -106 (49HR) HYDRAULIC RATCHETING
OVERLOAD ALARM
HYDRAULLIC RATCHET PUMP
NOT L27hr NOT XS -105 (27HR) HYDRAULIC RATCHETING
MOTOR MINIMUM VOLTAGE
AIR EIECTOR CONTROL VALVE - COOLING & SEALING AIR
L33EA1AO<4> ZSH -216 (---) <4>
VALVE OPEN<4> SYSTEM<4>
AIR EIECTOR CONTROL VALVE - COOLING & SEALING AIR
L33EA1BO<4> ZSH -217 (---) <4>
VALVE OPEN <4> SYSTEM<4>
TE -296 A (TT-BA-
2A)
NAN TE -296 B (TT-BA- TURBINE COMPARTMENT
NOT L26BA¹ VENTILATION
D 2B) INTERNAL TEMP.
TE -296 C (TT-BA-
2C)
TURBINE ENCLOSURE ACCESS
L33dtc<2> VENTILATION
DOORS CLOSED
ZSL -206 A (33DT-1)
GEARBOX ENCLOSURE ACCESS VENTILATION
NOT -ZSL -206 J (33DT-
DOOR CLOSED
10)
GEARBOX ENCLOSURE ACCESS VENTILATION
DOOR CLOSED
l33ido1¹ NOT ZSH -207 A (33ID-1) VENTILATION INLET DAMPER OPEN VENTILATION
l33ido2¹ NOT ZSH -207 B (33ID-2) VENTILATION INLET DAMPER OPEN VENTILATION
TURBINE COMP. VENTILATION
l33odo1¹ NOT ZSH -202 A (33OD-1) VENTILATION
OUTLET OPEN
COUPLING COMP. VENTILATION
l33odo2¹ NOT ZSH -202 B (33OD-2) VENTILATION
OUTLET OPEN
l33cb1o<2>
ZSH -201 (33CB-1) VA2-1 ANTISURGE VALVE OPEN
l33cb2o<2> VENTILATION
ZSH -200 (33CB-2) VA2-2 ANTISURGE VALVE OPEN
PT -109 A (96FG-2A)
INTERSTAGE FUEL GAS PRESSURE
NOT L63FGH_W 1 NOT PT -109 B (96FG-2B) FUEL GAS
HIGH
PT -109 C (96FG-2C)
PT -109 A (96FG-2A)
INTERSTAGE FUEL GAS PRESSURE
NOT L63FGL_W 2<2> NOT PT -109 B (96FG-2B) FUEL GAS
LOW
PT -109 C (96FG-2C)
L33vg2_c<2> ZSL -100 (33VG-2) WARM-UP LINE VENT VALVE FUEL GAS
--- FUEL BLOCK VALVE AND FUEL
NAN
L33P2 VENT VALVE IN CORRECT VALVES SEQUENCING
D ---
SEQUENCE
NOT TURBINE ENCLOSURE GAS FIRE FIGHTING & GAS
l45hta NOT XS -167 (45HTA)
DETECTED ALARM DETECTION
1
Start permissive enabled after line depressurization.
2
Start permissive enabled after line depressurization.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE

LOGIC TAG AG
CO2 BOTTLE LIMIT SWITCH BANK- FIRE FIGHTING & GAS
NOT l33cr_a1 NOT WSL -703 (33CR-A)
A COMMON ALARM DETECTION
CO2 BOTTLE LIMIT SWITC BANK-B FIRE FIGHTING & GAS
NOT l33cr_b³ NOT WSL -706 (33CR-B)
COMMON ALARM DETECTION
ZSH -702 A (33CP- FIRE FIGHTING & GAS
l33cp_a <3> 4A) DETECTION
FIRE FIGHTING CO2 DISCHARGE
l33cp_b <3> AND
ZSH -702 B (33CP- VALVES OPEN FIRE FIGHTING & GAS
4B) DETECTION
FIRE FIGHT.CO2 DISCH.VALVES FIRE FIGHTING & GAS
NOT l33cp_c NOT XS -160 (33CP-1)
CLOSED ALM DETECTION
FIRE FIGHTING & GAS
NOT l86fg NOT XS -172 (86FG) FIRE & GAS SYSTEMS FAULT
DETECTION
FIRE FIGHTING ELECTRIC FIRE FIGHTING & GAS
NOT l43cp_i NOT
DISCHARGE DISABLED ALARM DETECTION
FIRE FIGHTING SYST. MANUAL FIRE FIGHTING & GAS
L43ffb<2> HS -232 (43FFB-1)
SELECTOR DETECTION
VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM
NOT l86vmn<2> NOT XS -233 (86VM) VIBRATION MONITOR
FAULT
24 VDC POWER SUPPLY FAILURE
XS -154 (86PS-1)
110VDC/24VDC
NOT l86ps AND UCP
XS -121 (86PS-2)
l27mc1n XS -152 (27MC) MCC VOLTAGE NORMAL MCC
DRAWERS TRIP COMMON
XS -155 (74X-MCC) MCC
ALARM(K74X)
MINIMUM BATTERY VOLTAGE
NOT l80x NOT XS -108 (DCP-80X) DCP
ALARM
DCP-RECTIFIER 'A' COMMON
NOT l30ra NOT XS -110 (DCP-30RA) DCP
ALARM
DCP-RECTIFIER 'B' COMMON
NOT l30rb NOT XS -109 (DCP-30RB) DCP
ALARM
NOT NOT XS -111 (DCP-BD) DCP-BATTERY DISCHARGING DCP
l3comm_io<2> I/Os pack communicating
NOT l86mp NOT Master Protective Startup Lockout
1
If the corresponding CO2 bottles bank is selected through selector HS-700 (43HS-1).
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
2.2 START PASSED

LOGIC TAG LOGIC TAG
l52qa XS -135 (52QA) LUBE OIL AUXILIARY PUMP RUNNING MINERAL LUBE OIL
NOT XS -133 HYDRAULIC OIL AUXILIARY PUMP HYDRAULLIC OIL
NOT
L52hq (52HQ)<1> RUNNING
LUBE OIL VAPOUR SEPARATOR #1
L52qv XS -151 (52QV) MINERAL LUBE OIL
RUNNING
PT -310 A (96QT-
2A)
PT -310 B (96QT-
NOT L63QA2L_W NOT LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW MINERAL LUBE OIL
2B)
PT -310 C (96QT-
2C)
PT -310 A (96QT-
2A)
PT -310 B (96QT- LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW
NOT L63QT NOT MINERAL LUBE OIL
2B) LOW
PT -310 C (96QT-
2C)
TURB.ENCLOSURE VENT.FAN #1
l52bt11 XS -124 (52BA-1) VENTILATION
RUNNING
OR OR
TURB.ENCLOSURE VENT.FAN #2
l52bt2¹ XS -127 (52BA-2) VENTILATION
RUNNING
PDT -205 A
(96SV-1A)
PDT -205 B TURBINE ENCLOSURE PRESSURE
NOT L63BT_W¹ NOT VENTILATION
(96SV-1B) LOW
PDT -205 C
(96SV-1C)
LUBE OIL EMERGENCY TEST
L3QE_TEST<2> VENTILATION
PASSED
1
Bypassed if water wash is selected (software signal L83BW)
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
2.3 CRANK READY

LOGIC TAG LOGIC TAG
NOT L71QL_W NOT LT -301 (96QL1) LUBE OIL TANK LEVEL LOW MINERAL LUBE OIL
LUBE OIL AUXILIARY PUMP
l52qa XS -135 (52QA) MINERAL LUBE OIL
RUNNING
PT -310 A (96QT-2A)
LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW
NOT L63QA2L_W NOT PT -310 B (96QT-2B) MINERAL LUBE OIL
PT -310 C (96QT-2C)
L26QN_W NOT TE -307 (LT-OT-1) LUBE OIL TANK NORMAL MINERAL LUBE OIL
1 UPSTREAM SRGC VALVE
NOT L63FGL_W NOT PT -108 (96FG-1) FUEL GAS
PRESSURE LOW
TE -104 A (TG-FG-1)
FUEL GAS TEMPERATURE INLET
TE -104 B (TG-FG-2)
NOT L26FGL_W 1 NOT LOW FUEL GAS
TE -104 C (TG-FG-3)
MASTER SELECTOR IN CRANK

L43C FUEL GAS
POSITION
1
L33VG2_C ZSL -100 (33VG-2) WARM-UP LINE VENT VALVE FUEL GAS
--- FUEL BLOCK VALVE AND FUEL
VALVES
L3PRC NAND VENT VALVE IN CORRECT
--- SEQUENCING
SEQUENCE
NOT HYDRAULIC OIL AUXILIARY PUMP HYDRAULLIC OIL
XS -133 (52HQ) <1>
L52hq RUNNING
1
Bypassed if water wash is selected (software signal L83BW)
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
2.4 FIRE READY

LOGIC TAG LOGIC TAG
HYDRAULIC OIL HEADER
NOT L63HQ1L_W NOT PT -324 (96HQ-1) HYDRAULIC OIL
PRESSURE LOW
NOT L43BW - WATER WASH ON SELECTED WATER WASH
TURBINE/COMPRESSOR WATER
NOT L83BW - WATER WASH
WASH CONTROL
UPSTREAM SRGC VALVE
NOT L63FGL_W NOT PT -108 (96FG-1) FUEL GAS
PRESSURE LOW
TE -104 A (TG-FG-1)
FUEL GAS TEMPERATURE INLET
TE -104 B (TG-FG-2)
NOT L26FGL_W NOT LOW FUEL GAS
TE -104 C (TG-FG-3)
l33vg2_c ZSL -100 (33VG-2) WARM-UP LINE VENT VALVE FUEL GAS
NOT l27gcpp1 NOT XS -194 (27GCPP) GCPP POWER WATCH DOG GCPP
GENERATOR CKT BREAKER 52G
NOT l86g1¹ NOT XS -184 (K86G1) GCPP
LOCKOUT RELAY
METERING REFERENCE
NOT l8vtm¹ NOT XS -198 (K-8VT-M) GCPP
VOLTAGE-FAULT
NOT l86g2¹ XS -182 (K86G2) GENERATOR LOCK OUT RELAY GCPP
PROTECT REFERENCE VOLTAGE -
NOT l8vtp¹ XS -197 (K-8VT-P) GCPP
FAULT
PROTECTION RELAY COMMON
NOT l27pr¹ NOT XS -193 (27PR) GCPP
FAULT
AVR REFERENCE VOLTAGE-
NOT l8vtavr¹ NOT XS -199 (K-8VT-AVR) GCPP
FAULT
BUS REFERENCE VOLTAGE -
NOT l8vtb1¹ NOT XS -200 (K-8VT-B1) GCPP
FAULT
ON/OFF-LINE WASHING TANK
NOT l26tw¹ NOT TSHL -434 (26TW-1) GCPP
HEATER CONTROL
1
These signals are cumulated in “Process Ready to Fire” condition signal.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
2.5 LOAD READY

LOGIC TAG LOGIC TAG
l52qa NOT LUBE OIL AUXILIARY PUMP RUNNING MINERAL LUBE
NOT XS -135 (52QA)
OIL
l72qez NOT LUBE OIL EMERGENCY PUMP STOP MINERAL LUBE
XS -100 (4QE)
COMMAND OIL
L52hq NOT HYDRAULIC OIL AUXILIARY PUMP HYDRAULLIC OIL
NOT XS -133 (52HQ) <1>
RUNNING
L3prl<2> PROCESS READY TO LOAD PROCESS
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
2.6 SYNCRONIZATION PERMISSIVES
SOFTWARE TAG LOGIC DESCRIPTION SYSTEM

LOGIC TAG LOGIC TAG
AVR AUTOMATIC CONTROL
l43avr XS -196 (AVR-43X-A) GCPP
SELECTED
AVR LOCAL CONTROL
NOT l43avrlc XS -195 (AVR-43-LC) GCPP
NOT SELECTED
AUTOMATIC SYNCHRONISING
l3gg XS -187 (3GG-25A) GCPP
ENABLED TO UCP
GEN CIRCUIT BREAKER 52G
NOT l52gx1 NOT XS -188 (K52GX-1A) GCPP
CLOSED
EXCITATION CONTACTOR
l41x XS -192 (41X-1) GCPP
CLOSED
METERING REFERENCE
NOT l8vtm NOT XS -198 (K-8VT-M) GCPP
VOLTAGE-FAULT
PROTECT REFERENCE
NOT l8vtp NOT XS -197 (K-8VT-P) GCPP
VOLTAGE -FAULT
AVR REFERENCE VOLTAGE-
NOT l8vtavr NOT XS -199 (K-8VT-AVR) GCPP
FAULT
BUS REFERENCE VOLTAGE -
NOT l8vtb1 NOT XS -200 (K-8VT-B1) GCPP
FAULT
NOT lavr43lc<3> NOT Gen. AVR local control selected GCPP
l43gcpp-m<3> Gen.GCPP selector in manual
NOT NOT GCPP
mode
NOT l86g1<3> NOT Gen. Circuit Breaker lockout relay GCPP
NOT l25m<3> NOT Gen. Manual sync. In progress GCPP
lavr43xa<3> Gen. AVR automatic control
GCPP
selected
l43gcpp-a<3> Gen.GCPP selector in auto mode GCPP
l25-enab<3> Gen. K25a relay enable status GCPP
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
2.7 SHUTDOWN

LOGIC TAG LOGIC TAG
TAHH-208
TAHH-209 WHEELSPACE TEMPERATURE HIGH
WHEELSPACE
TAHH-213 HIGH SHUTDOWN
TAHH-214
L30WSA_SD1 OR
TAH-208
TAH-209 WHEELSPACE TEMPERATURE HIGH
WHEELSPACE
TAH-213 ALARM1
TAH-214
TURB.INLET FILTER DIFFERENTIAL
INLET AND
L63TF PDAHH252 PRESSURE HIGH HIGH MEDIAN
FILTRATION
SHUTDOWN LOGIC
L94gshd<2> (26CT + K86G2) GENERATOR SHITDOWN COMMAND GCPP
L39vd2<3> VE -209 A (39V-1A) CONTROL &
VE -209 B (39V-1B) TURBINE BRG.#1 VIBRATION PROTECTION
VE -210 A (39V-2A) TURBINE CASING VIBRATION
VE -210 B (39V-2B)
1
Shutdown is started if wheel space temp. is detected high for 24 hours
2
Shutdown is started if ventilation pressure is not restored within 30s.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
2.8 TRIP
SOFTWARE TAG JOB TAG ( GE TAG) DESCRIPTION SYSTEM
LOGIC TAG LOGIC TAG
LUBE OIL HEADER TEMP HIGH HIGH MINERAL LUBE
L26QT TAHH-305
MEDIAN TRIP LOGIC OIL
LUBE OIL PRESSURE LOW LOW MINERAL LUBE
L63QTX PALL-310
MEDIAN TRIP LOGIC OIL
LUBE OIL TANK PRESSURE HIGH HIGH MINERAL LUBE
L63QVT PDAHH-300
TRIP OIL
LUBE OIL EMERGENCY PUMP TRIP MINERAL LUBE
L4QE_TRP
SIGNAL OIL
L3SMTX 86DS2 STARTING DEVICE TRIP LOGIC STARTING DEVICE
TURBINE COMPARTMENT
L26BT TAHH- 296 VENTILATION
TEMPERATURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
TURBINE ENCLOSURE GAS DETECTED FIRE FIGHTING &
l45htt XS -168 (45HTT)
TRIP GAS DETECTION
TURBINE AIR FILTER GAS FIRE FIGHTING &
l45hft XS -166 (45HFT)
DETECT.TRIP GAS DETECTION
TURBINE ENCLOSURE FIRE DETECTED FIRE FIGHTING &
l45ftt XS -163 (45FTT)
TRIP GAS DETECTI
FIRE FIGHTING &
l63cpd PAHH-712 CO2 DISCHARGE ACTIVATED
GAS DETECTION
ENCLOSURE
TURBO UNIT EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN
l5esdv1 HS -221 (5ESD-1) EMERGENCY
BUTTON
SHUTDOWN
ENCLOSURE
TURBO UNIT EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN
l5esdv2 HS -220 (5ESD-2) EMERGENCY
BUTTON
SHUTDOWN
EMERGENGCY SHUTDOWN PB ON UCP EMERGENCY
NOT l4_fb3 NOT XS -153 (5ESD-1) 3
UCP SHUTDOWN
UCP
L3SFLT - CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT TRIP
PROTECTIONS
4
l4tesd PSS-TRIP TRIP COMMAND FROM PSS PSS
l4prot4 XS -183 (K4-TRIP) TRIP DRIVER FROM PROTECTION GCPP
XS -210 (4X-32) TRIP FROM DRIVER GCPP
BEARING
TAHH-374 GENERATOR BEARINGS METAL
l26gbtx4 TEMPERATURE
TAHH-370 TEMPERATURE HIGH TRIP
MONITOR
XAHH - 351 (XAHH-351) GB HS SHAFT RADIAL VIBRATION TRIP BN
XAHH -352 (XAHH-352) GB LS SHAFT RADIAL VIBRATION TRIP BN
BN
XAHH -354 (XAHH-354) GB HS SHAFT RADIAL VIBRATION TRIP
XAHH -353 (XAHH-353) BN

GB LS SHAFT RADIAL VIBRATION TRIP
<3>
XAHH-355 (XAHH -355) GENERATOR RADIAL VIBRATION TRIP BN
XAHH-356 (XAHH -356) GENERATOR RADIAL VIBRATION TRIP BN
L39gvtx<3> GEN. SEISMIC VIBRATION BN
VAHH-352 (VAHH -352)
CUMULATIVE TRIP
L39gvtx<3> GEN. SEISMIC VIBRATION BN
VAHH-353 (VAHH -353)
CUMULATIVE TRIP
GEAR BOX LS SHAFT AXIAL DISP. BN
ZAHH -351 (ZAHH-351)
TRIP
TE -211 A (TT-XD-1) --- EXHAUST TEMPERATURE CONTROL &
TE -211 M (TT-XD-13) THERMOCOUPLE PROTECTION
1
Trip signal enabled if no flame is detected (NOT L28FDX).
2
Trip enabled if the turbinie shaft speed is below minimum operative speed (95% of rated speed).
3
UCP emergency shutdown pushbutton has double contacts; l5esd1 signal is inverted.
4
Signals cumulated in Process shuitdown software signal.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
SOFTWARE TAG JOB TAG ( GE TAG) DESCRIPTION SYSTEM

LOGIC TAG LOGIC TAG
NOT L28FDT NOT BE -200 P (28FD-2P) 1 CONTROL &
BE -201 P (28FD-3P) PROTECTION
FLAME DETECTORS
BE -202 P (28FD-7P)
BE -203 P (28FD-8P)
SE -200 A (77NH-1) 2 CONTROL &
SE -200 B (77NH-2) MAGNETIC SPEED PICK UP PROTECTION
SE -200 C (77NH-3)
XAHH -355 (XAHH-355) GENERATOR RADIAL VIBRATION TRIP BN
XAHH -356 (XAHH-356) GENERATOR RADIAL VIBRATION TRIP BN
L39vt<2> VE -209 A (39V-1A) CONTROL &
VE -209 B (39V-1B) TURBINE BRG.#1 VIBRATION PROTECTION
VE -210 A (39V-2A) TURBINE CASING VIBRATION
VE -210 B (39V-2B)
1
Trip signal enabled if no flame is detected (NOT L28FDX).
2
Trip enabled if the turbinie shaft speed is below minimum operative speed (95% of rated speed).
3
UCP emergency shutdown pushbutton has double contacts; l5esd1 signal is inverted.
4
Signals cumulated in Process shuitdown software signal.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3 AUXILIARIES SEQUENCING
3.1 MINERAL LUBE OIL
3.1.1 DEVICE SUMMARY
DEVICE NAME CUSTOMER TAG DESCRIPTION

TL-1 --- LUBE OIL TANK
PL-1 --- MAIN LUBE OIL PUMP
PL-2 --- LUBE OIL AUXILIARY PUMP
PL-3 --- EMERGENCY PUMP
88QA --- LUBE OIL AUXILIARY PUMP MOTOR
88QE --- EMERGENCY PUMP MOTOR
96QL1 LT -301 LUBE OIL TANK LEVEL
FL-1A/1B --- LUBE OIL DUPLEX FILTER
96QQ-1 PDT -308 LUBE OIL FILTERS HEADER
LT-TH-1A TE -305 A LUBE OIL HEADER TEMP.
LT-TH-1B TE -305 B
LT-TH-1C TE -305 C
LTBT1D-1 TE -311 LUBE SYSTEM THRUST BRG. DRAIN
96QT-2A <1> PT -310 A LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE
96QT-2B PT -310 B
96QT-2C PT -310 C
LTB1D-A TE -312 LUBE SYSTEM JOURNAL BRG. #1 DRAIN
LTB2D-1 TE -313 LUBE SYSTEM JOURNAL BRG. #2 DRAIN
--- PI -357 B INSTRUMENT AIR REGULATION
PI-38 PI -380 VAPOUR SEPARATOR INLET PRESSURE
96QV-1A <1> PDT -300 A <1> LUBE OIL TANK INTERNAL PRESSURE
96QV-1B PDT -300 B
96QV-1C PDT -300 C
LT-OT-1 <1> TE -307 LUBE OIL TANK TEMPERATURE
PI-351 PI -406 ON-LINE WASHING WATER
3.1.2 SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION
Cooldown
Cooldown phase starts after flame loss detection and machine stop; it is the time period during which the
machine is cooled and the lube oil is provided using auxiliary pump or emergency pump (only if auxiliary
pump is damaged or the MKVIe is powered off).
Cooldown sequence is enabled by the MKVIe two seconds after loss of flame in combustion chamber
(L28FDZ software signal is false). This timer is started as soon as the shaft is detected at zero speed
(L14HR internal MKVIe software signal) and remains active for total cooldown duration of 10 hours.
Cooldown end is detected by software signal L62CD, generated by MKVIe logic after receiving the ZSL -
300 (33HR1), HYDRAULIC RATCHET LIMIT SWITCH signal.
Auxiliary pump logic

Request during unit startup
During unit startup (L14HSX internal software signal is false), the auxiliary pump is started (with l4qaz
software command and XS -134 (4QA) hardwired signal to MCC) when the turbine start sequence is
activated (software signal L1Z is false). It continues to work until the shaft reaches minimum operative
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
speed that is 95% of rated speed (L14HSX is true). After that, the main mechanical lube oil pump
becomes sufficient to provide the needed oil pressure by itself.
Request during normal operation

When the shaft is above minimum operative speed, the auxiliary pump is started if the lube oil header
pressure is detected low by L63QA2L_W voted software signal (corresponding to PAL-308 alarm) and this
condition is verified for more then K63QALY software constant (typically 2.5 s)
Software alarm L52QA_ALM is generated upon auxiliary pump running detection operated by software
signal l52qa and hardwired signal XS -135 (52QA).
Stop during normal operation

If the pump was started during normal operation, it remains running also if starting conditions are reset,
due to the motor feedback latching the run command. The pump can be stopped manually by the operator
from the HMI (L43QAS_CPB command) or from MCC (motor feedback l52qa drops down).
Request during shutdown

After unit shutdown request, the auxiliary pump is started when the shaft speed decreases below the
minimum operative speed and keep on running till cooldown completion.
Manual control
If lube oil tank level is not low (L71QL_W software signal and LAL-301 alarm are not raised), auxiliary
pump can be manually started from the HMI with L43QA_CMD command. If manual manual operation is
de-selected, the pump returns under automatic control and can be stopped as described above.
Emergency pump logic

The emergency pump provides lube oil pressure in case of failure of auxiliary pump or during the
emergency cooldown. It is started by DCP after receiving XS -100 (4QE) signal.
The pump is then stopped if lube oil pressure is restored (L63QNX) or if the cooldown time is ended.
Lube oil alarms and trips

If lube oil header temperature (ltth1 software signal) is detected higher than threshold K26QA (typically
72°C), software output L26QA_W and alarm L26QA_ALM, corresponding to TAH -305 alarm, are
generated.
If lube oil header temperature is detected higher than K26QT constant (80°C) by trip logic, trip L26QT and
alarm L26QT_ALM (related to P&Id TAHH -305 alarm) are generated if unit is running (L4 =1).
If lube oil header pressure (software signal A63QA_W) is higher then the threshold K63QN (typically 1.4
barg), L63QN_W software signal is generated.
If lube oil header pressure is lower than the threshold K63QA2L (typically 1.2 barg), software output
L63QA2L_W and alarm L63QA2L_ALM is generated.
If lube oil header pressure is detected lower than K63QT threshold (typically 0.96 barg) by trip logic,
software output L63QT is generated. Also trip L63QTX and alarm L63QT_ALM (PALL-310 P&Id alarm)
are generated if unit is running (L4=1).
If lube oil filter differential pressure is detected higher than 1.7 bar (K63QQ1H threshold) by a63qq1
software signal for more than K63QQ1H_ALM (typically 1 s), software alarm L63QQ1H_ALM,
corresponding to PDAH-308, is generated
If lube oil tank level (a71qt software signal) is detected high, alarm LAH-301 and software alarm
L71QH_ALM are generated.
If lube oil tank level is detected low, software output L71QL_W and alarm L71QL_ALM, corresponding to
LAL-301, are generated.
If at least one bearing drain oil temperature is detected higher than its threshold, summarized software
alarm L30LOA_ALM is generated; the related P&Id alarms are TAH-311, TAH-312, TAH-313.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
Instrumentation fault logic

TAH-305 is also generated if median failures are detected by healthy signal from TE -305 A (LT-TH-1A),
TE -305 B (LT-TH-1B) & TE -305 C (LT-TH-1C).
If lube oil temperature measurements spread is higher then maximum spread allowed K26QA_FLT for
more then K26QT_SENSR (typically 60s), then software alarm L26QT_SENSR is generated.
If lube oil header pressure measurements spread is higher then maximum spread allowed K63QA_FLT
for more then K63QT_SENSR (typically 10s), then alarm L63QT_SENSR is generated.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.2 OIL VAPOUR SEPARATOR
DEVICE SUMMARY

QV-1 --- VAPOUR EXTRACTOR
88QV-1 --- LUBE OIL MIST SEPARATOR MOTOR
PDS-1 --- MINERAL OIL MIST ELIMINATOR
96QV-1A PDT -300 A LUBE OIL TANK INTERNAL PRESSURE
96QV-1B PDT -300 B
96QV-1C<1> PDT -300 C
SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION
Oil vapour separator fan control sequence

The lube oil vapour separator fan motor is started (with l4qv software command converted into XS -150
(4QV) hardwired command to the MCC) when the start sequence is initiated (software signal L1). The fan
continues to run until the enclosure ventilation remains active.
The fan is also started if the following conditions are all verified:
Lube oil heaters ON command (L4QTX software signals that generates XS -145 (4QT-1) , XS -147 (4QT-
2), hardwired commands sent to the MCC)
Normal temperature in oil tank (L26QN_W software signal).
Oil vapour separator fan manual operation

When fan extractor is not required running by automatic control sequence described above, the lube oil
vapour separator fan motor 88QV-1 can be manually started (L43QV_CMD) and stopped (NOT
L43QV_CMD OR L43QVS_CPB) by the operator in front of the HMI.
Oil vapour separator fan emergency stop

The lube oil vapour separator fan motor can be manually stopped via MCC, activating LO MIST SEP FAN
ESD in field; a relevant alarm will be displayed on HMI.
Lube oil tank pressure alarms and trips

If lube oil tank pressure (A63QV_W software signal) is detected high, L63QVA_W signal picks up and
software alarm L63QVA_ALM, complementary to PDAH-300, is generated.
If the same signal value is detected high by trip logic, trip L63QVT and alarm L63QVT_ALM,
complementary to PDAHH-300 P&Id alarm, is generated.

If the maximum lube oil tank pressure measurements spread exceeds the K63QV_FLT threshold for more
than K63QVT_SENSR (10s), L63QVT_SENSR alarm is generated.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.3 LUBE OIL HEATER
DEVICE SUMMARY

23QT-1 --- LUBE OIL ELECTRIC HEATER
LT-OT-1 TE -307 LUBE OIL TANK
49QT-1 TSHH -300 LUBE OIL TANK HEATER CUT OUT
Heater cutout logic

Cutout conditions for lube oil heater on command auxiliary software signal (L4QTX) are listed below:
Lube oil tank level low (LAL-301)
Flame detected (L28FDX = 1)
Over-temperature detected by all lube oil tank heaters switches [l26qth1\ 2\3 &4 software signals; TSHH -
300 (49QT-1), TSHH -301 (49QT-2), TSHH -302 (49QT-3), TSHH -303 (49QT-4) are hardwired signals].
Each heater command [l4qt1-4 software signals 4QT-1-4 are hardwired signals] can be also singularly
cutout if the associated switch [l26qth1\2\3 & 4; detects over-temperature and the lube oil tank level low
alarm is raised (LAL-301). In this condition, a single switch cutout command is repeated to the MCC
through one of the l4qt1\2\3 & 4_c software signals [contacts open on cutout].
If over-temperature is detected by at least one lube oil tank heater switch, L26QTH_ALM software alarm is
generated.
Heater control logic

If no cutout condition is active, the heater-on auxiliary signal L4QTX picks-up when the lube oil tank
temperature (software signal ltot generated by TE -307 (LT-OT-1) is detected lower than threshold K26QL
(typically 25°C).
Then, L4QTX drops down when the oil temperature is detected moderate by the threshold K26QM
(typically 30°C). Between the two thresholds, L4QTX can be manually dropped down also through a
dedicated HMI pushbutton L5QT_S_CPB.
If manual command is active (L43QT_CMD command from HMI), L4QTX can be picked-up and dropped-
down manually using L5QT_R_CPB and L5QT_S_CPB HMI pushbuttons. Also, if manual operation is
active, L43QT_ALM software alarm is generated.
If not singularly cutout, each heater is turned on and off, according to L4QTX status, through MCC
commands signals 4QT-1-C, 4QT-2-C, 4QT-3-C & 4QT-4-C [l4qt1\2\3 & 4 software signals].
Alarms
If lube oil tank temperature is found below a third threshold K26QN (typically 20°C), signal L26QN_W
drops down and software alarm L26QN_ALM, related to TAL-307 P&Id alarm, is generated.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.4 LUBE OIL COOLER
DEVICE SUMMARY

88QFC-1 --- AIR COOLER FAN MOTOR
23QFC-1<1> --- COOLER FAN MOTOR SPACE HEATER
39QFC-1 VSH -200 AIR COOLER MOTOR FAN VIBR.
MONITORING
MONITORING
MONITORING
VTR-1 <1> TCV -306 THERMOSTATIC VALVE
20QFC-1 <1> XY -200 AIR COOLER MOTOR FAN REMOTE
RESET
RESET
RESET
Air cooling (3x50%) control sequence

The described sequence actuates three fans (main, auxiliary and stand-by); each fan is designed to
provide 50% of rated airflow.
Auxiliary fan selection

Auxiliary fan selection is done by HMI dedicated pushbutton through signal SC43QFC, normally when all
fans are stopped.
Main fan Start/Stop logic

The lube oil cooler main fan is started when flame is detected in combustion chamber (L28FDX=1).
The main fan is stopped K4QFCM (typically 120 minutes) after flameout (L28FDX=0).
o <1>
Lube Oil Tank temperature should be greater Than K26QM (Typically 86 F )
Stand-by fan Start/Stop logic

Stand-by fan control is driven by LTTH1_W voted software signal, generated TE -305 A (LT-TH-1A) , TE -
305 B (LT-TH-1B) , TE -305 C (LT-TH-1C) thermocouple outputs.
When the lube oil cooler main fan is running, the stand-by fan is started if the lube oil header temperature
LTTH1_W reaches the stand-by fan starting value K26QFCH.
The fan is then stopped if LTTH1_W value decreases below the stand-by stop value K26QFCL.
After its stop, the stand-by fan can’t be restarted until K4QFCS_INH_R (typically 120s) time is elapsed.
Similarly, Stand-by stop is not permitted for K4QFCS_INH_S (typically 240s) from its start.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
In case of failure of two out of the three lube oil header thermocouples, a backup start/stop logic is
provided: regardless of main fan state, the stand-by fan is started and then stopped when the failure
condition is no more detected.
The standby cooling fan can only be started during machine running or during the cooldown period.
Auxiliary fan Start/Stop logic

The lube oil cooler auxiliary fan is started when temperature high software alarm is generated (L26QA_W)
due to AAH-211, LTTH1_W signal high value (TAH-305) or to the above described thermocouples failure
condition.
When this high temperature alarm is reset, the auxiliary fan keeps on running and can be stopped
manually by the operator in front of the HMI (L5QFC1÷3_S_CPB commands) or of the MCC.
If auxiliary fan is running, L52QFC_ALM software alarm is generated.
Lube Oil temperature control

The oil temperature control is accomplished by varying the oil flow through the cooler with the three way
valveTCV -306 (VTR-1) . This valve is regulated through an integrated IP converter by the MKVIe
temperature indication control; the reference temperature used for this control is the mean lube oil header
temperature LTTH1_W.
Cooler fans control sequence and changeover

Lube oil cooler high vibration, detected by VSH -200 (39QFC-1) , VSH -201 (39QFC-2) , VSH -202
(39QFC-3) (l39qfc1÷3 software signals), is the cutout condition for the related fan (active in both automatic
and manual mode) and generates VAH-200, VAH-201 & VAH-202 alarm. This cutout condition is also
repeated to the MCC (l4qfc1÷3_c software signals:XS -137 (4QFC-1-C) , XS -140 (4QFC-2-C) , XS -143
(4QFC-3-C) hardwired signals), in order to disable any possible start condition activation.
Every time the cooler fan motor is detected running by the feedback (l52qfc1÷3), the cooler fan high
vibration alarm is inhibited for the time K52QFCZ (10s), by energizing the XY -200 (20QFC-1) , XY -201
(20QFC-2) , XY -202 (20QFC-3) remote reset (l4qfc1÷3_inh software outputs).
The cooler fans start and stop according to the current main/stand-by/auxiliary state and their respective
start/stop logic.
While the auxiliary fan is selected manually by the operator, the main and the stand-by fans are selected
by internal changeover logic:
Auxiliary selection change cause main and stand-by change preserving cyclic order;
Main/stand-by are exchanged each time the stand-by fan is required to run (inversion of cyclic order);
If the running fan becomes the auxiliary or stand-by one and has to be stopped, its stop is delayed of 10
seconds;
The changeover doesn't activate auxiliary fan running alarm L52QFC_ALM;
If changeover is done when all fans are running or stopped, nothing changes except the selection.
Manual control
Every lube oil cooler fan can be controlled in manual mode. When manual mode is selected, each cooler
fan maintains its previous status and the summarized software alarm L43QFC_ALM is generated.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.5 HYDRAULIC OIL<1>
DEVICE SUMMARY

PH-1 --- HYDRAULIC OIL MAIN PUMP
PH-2 88HQ HYDRAULIC OIL AUXILLIARY PUMP
FH1-1÷2 --- HYDRAULIC OIL DUPLEX FILTER
FH-B --- HYDRAULIC RATCHET OIL FILTER
96HF-1 <1> PDT -323 HYDR. OIL FILTERS DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE
96HQ-1 <1> PT -324 HYDRAULIC OIL HEADER PRESSURE
VPR3-1 <!> PCV -320 COMPENSATOR-HYDRAULIC OIL PUMP
DISCHARGE
VR-21 <1> PSV -321 MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMP DISCHARGE
RELIEF
VR-22 <1> PSV -318 AUX. HYDRAULIC PUMP DISCHARGE
RELIEF
Hydraulic oil system takes oil from lube oil system. Oil pressure is increased by the mechanically driven
pump PH-1. PH-1 delivery pressure is controlled by PCV -320 (VPR3-1) regulator.
The auxiliary pump PH-2, driven by an AC electric motor 88HQ, provides necessary oil pressure during
startup and shutdown phases. Moreover, during turbine normal operation, it provides a backup function on
main pump PH-1.
Relief valves PSV -318 (VR-22) &PSV -321 (VR-21) are provided respectively at PH-1and PH-2 delivery
to protect the system against overpressure.
FH1-1 and FH1-2 twin filter system supplies clean oil to the downstream equipment. High differential
pressure across filters is detected by differential pressure trasmitter PDT -323 (96HF-1) .
Hydraulic oil pressure is monitored by pressure trasmitter PT -324 (96HQ-1) installed downstream the
filtration system.
Hydraulic pump logic

Cutout condition
If lube oil header pressure is detected not normal, cutout is performed on the hydraulic pump requests
described below.
When unit is stopped, if the cutout condition is active for more than typically 10s from hydraulic pump start
request, alarm is generated.
When unit is running, if the cutout condition is active, alarm is generated.
In case of lube oil pressure is detected low by PDT -300 A (96QV-1A)
PDT -300 B (96QV-1B) PDT -300 C (96QV-1C) cutout to MCC is generated XS -132 (4HQ-C) .
Request during unit stopped

If cutout condition is not active, during unit stopped the pump can be started by process hydraulic oil
request.
Request during unit startup
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
If cutout condition is not active, during startup the auxiliary pump starts when the turbine start sequence is
activated. It continues to operate until the HP shaft reaches minimum operating speed. From this point,
the main mechanical hydraulic oil pump will provide the necessary oil pressure.
Request during normal operation

When HP shaft is above minimum operating speed, if cutout condition is not active, the auxiliary pump
starts if one of the following condition is verified:
Hydraulic oil pressure detected low by pressure switch PT -324 (96HQ-1)
Process hydraulic oil request.
During normal operation when hydraulic pump start detected by XS -133 (52HQ) alarm is generated.
Stop during normal operation

If during normal operation the pump has been started, detected by by XS -133 (52HQ)the pump remains
running also when the starting condition is reset. It can be stopped manually by operator from HMI or
MCC.
Request during shutdown

If cutout condition is not active, when a normal shutdown occurs, the auxiliary pump is started when the
HP shaft decreases below the minimum operating speed. The pump will keep running till the master relay
is de-energized unless the pump is requested running from process.
Request during emergency shutdown (trip)

If emergency shutdown (trip) is detected, the hydraulic pump is not started. If the pump was already
running before the trip event (see request during normal operation), the pump stops typically 10s after the
trip.
Manual control
If cutout condition is not active, auxiliary pump can be manually started. If manual operation is deselected,
the pump returns to automatic control.
Alarms logic
If hydraulic oil pressure is detected low by PT -324 (96HQ-1)for more then typically 3s, alarm is generated
if following conditions are all verified:
Above crank speed
After start passed and before shutdown
Alarm is also disabled 1.5s after that operative speed is reached to account for the stop of auxiliary pump.
If hydraulic oil filter differential pressure is detected high by PDT -323 (96HF-1) .for more then typically 1s,
alarm is generated.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.6 STARTING SYSTEM

DEVICE SUMMARY

20TU FCV -330 TORQUE CONVERTER UNLOADING
33CS-1 ZSL -304 STARTING CLUTCH POSITION -
ENGAGED
PS-1 CHARGE PUMP FOR TORQUE
CONVERTOR
23CR-1 ANTICONDENSATION HEATER
88CR-1 STARTING MOTOR
Starting system provides necessary torque to drive the gas turbine to its self-sustaining speed, at which
the energy produced by the HP turbine expansion equals the energy required by the compression.
The system consists of the AC three phase electric motor 88CR-1, a torque converter and a Self
Synchronizing Starting (SSS) clutch.
Torque converter, connected between electric motor and turbine HP shaft through the SSS clutch, is
provided to modify torque features of the motor to fit the starting requirements.
The variable orifice assembly FCV -330 (20TU) is installed on the torque converter drain. The torque
converter drain flow can be modified, through the solenoid valve FCV -330 (20TU), to match the
cranking/firing speed. The oil flow is also adjustable through a manual variable orifice for calibration
purposes.
The clutch limit switch ZSL -304 (33CS-1) is installed in order to detect the engaged status.
Hydraulic ratchet interface logic

When the unit is ready to crank, hydraulic ratchet system energizes the starting clutch solenoid. If the
starting clutch is not detected engaged in 10 seconds by ZSL -304 (33CS-1), alarm is generated.
The turbine shaft breakaway is helped by hydraulic ratchet system that is stopped as soon as shaft
moves.
Torque converter drain valve FCV -330 (20TU) ) control sequence

Before shaft breakaway the valve is closed to maximize the torque during breakaway phase.
After shaft breakaway, when the minimum cranking speed is achieved, the torque converter oil drain valve
is opened (energized), in order to reduce the torque and to maintain the specified speed to accomplish
purge, ignition and warm-up steps. The valve will be closed again after warm-up step completes, in order
to have the maximum torque for accelerating phase.
Electric motor (88CR-1) command permissive

Auxiliaries ready to crank (L3ARC);
Electric motor stopped for more than 20 s XS -129 (52CR) .
Electric motor (88CR-1) turn-on command logic

When starting clutch is detected engaged by ZSL -304 (33CS-1), cranking motor 88CR-1 is started
through XS -128 (4CR) signal.
If motor feedback from MCC XS -129 (52CR) .is not detected within 2 seconds, trip and alarm are
generated (sequence aborted).
If motor feedback is detected but HP shaft doesn’t overcome zero speed within 30 seconds, trip and alarm
are generated (sequence aborted).
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
Cranking speed logic

After shaft break away, when the minimum cranking speed is achieved, the torque converter oil drain
valve is opened, in order to reduce the torque and to maintain the specified speed to accomplish purge,
ignition and warm-up steps. Signal OPENING is enabled by L4 to avoid the opening of the valve during
coastdown. The valve will be closed again after warm-up step completes, in order to have the maximum
torque for accelerating phase.
If motor feedbackXS -129 (52CR) .or clutch engaged limit switch ZSL -304 (33CS-1) signals are lost, trip
and alarm are generated. Alarm and trip are enabled below accelerating speed and are disabled above
the operative speed and in case of trip.
Bog down detection

After 2s pick up delayed flame detection, if speed decreases below a threshold of 5% for more than 1 s,
trip and alarm are generated. This trip is active until the HP shaft speed is below the minimum operative
speed and it is not active in case of shutdown or trip.
Electric motor (88CR-1) turn-off logic

After warm-up sequence, unit accelerates to full speed. At approx. 50÷60% of rating speed, the inversion
of the torque on starting clutch causes its mechanical disengagement (the turbine can sustain itself). This
condition is detected by ZSL -304 (33CS-1) limit switch signal and the starting electric motor is turned off.
The motor is anyway turned off if HP shaft speed is above self-sustaining speed (60%).
Motor turn-off is also achieved if one of the following conditions is verified:
Electric motor system trip;
unit trip (L4)
Unit shutdown (L94X)
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.7 HYDRAULIC RATCHETING

DEVICE SUMMARY

PH-3 --- RATCHET PUMP
88HR --- RATCHET MOTOR
43HR HS -300 HYDRAULIC RATCHET CONTROL
SWITCH
20HR-1 FV -326 HYDRAULIC RATCHET SELF
SEQUENCING VALVES
FH-B --- HYDRAULIC RATCHET OIL FILTER
33HR1 ZSL - 300 HYDRAULLIC RATCHET VALVE
POSITION
33CS-1 ZSL -304 STARTING CLUTCH POSITION -
ENGAGED
The hydraulic ratchet system provides:
breakaway torque to the unit shaft during unit startup;
slow rotations during unit cool down in order to avoid shaft bowing due to non-uniform heat radiation from
turbine casings combined with rotor weight;
slow rotations during long-term storage periods.
The sequence described is used to build ratchet pump 88HR command XS -104 (4HR) and starting
clutch engage valve open command FV -326 (20HR-1) .The two ratcheting commands are generated at
the same time by the same logic. The clutch engaged is detected by limit switch ZSL -304 (33CS-1) signal
that cause the cranking motor to start.
Ratcheting commands permissive

Electric cranking motor stopped delayed XS -129 (52CR)
Ratcheting commands cutout conditions

Lube oil pressure low voting trip logic
HP zero speed detected for more than 60s.
HP shaft control speed signal loss
HP shaft above crank speed
Unit start-up ratcheting sequence

During the unit starting sequence, if no cutout and all permissive conditions verified, the ratcheting begin
as soon as the ready to crank is detected (L3ARC). It continues to operate until the HP shaft zero speed is
detected (L14HR).
Ratcheting cycles during cooldown

During a stop sequence, the ratchet pump is started 60 seconds after the HP shaft is detected at zero
speed; independently from the state of limit switch ZSL -304 (33CS-1) the pump remains running and
rotating the shaft until the ZSL -304 (33CS-1)limit switch drop down delayed by 2s is detected. At this point
the pump is kept stopped for 180 s, and then the cycle is repeated. Cooldown ratcheting cycles are
stopped when cooldown sequence is completed
Manual ratcheting (Jogging)

If HP shaft is below cranking speed the ratcheting cycle can be started manually (jogging) by the local
push-button mounted on the ratchet pump skid HS -300 (43HR) or by HMI push button. The local push
button has to be closed for more then 2 s to rise the starting jogging command.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
The jogging sequence stops 2s after the drop down of limit switch (l33hrf)
Alarms, trips and monitoring

If, during cooldown ratcheting, limit switch ZSL -304 (33CS-1)is not detected for 6 minutes, alarm is
generated.
If ratcheting cycle is longer than 30s, alarm is generated.
If hydraulic ratchet motor overload is detected XS -106 (49HR) alarm is generated.
Hydraulic ratchet pump running is detected XS -107 (42HR) for monitoring purposes.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.8 WHEELSPACES
DEVICE SUMMARY

TT-WS1FO-1 TE -208 A WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 1st STAGE FWD OUTER #1
TT-WS1FO-2 TE -208 B WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 1st STAGE FWD OUTER #2
TT-WS1AO-1 TE -214 A WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 1st STAGE AFT OUTER #1
TT-WS1AO-2 TE -214 B WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 1st STAGE AFT OUTER #2
TT-WS2FO-1 TE -209 A WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 2nd STAGE FWD OUTER #1
TT-WS2FO-2 TE -209 B WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 2nd STAGE FWD OUTER #2
TT-WS2AO-1 TE -213 A WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 2nd STAGE AFT OUTER #1
TT-WS2AO-2 TE -213 B WHEEL SPACE TEMP. 2nd STAGE AFT OUTER #2
Alarms and Shutdown logic

There are two single element thermocouples (TC) in each measurement section to monitor the
wheelspace temperatures.
If the average temperature of TCs located in one measurement section exceeds the related alarm level
for more than 10s, a common software alarm L30WSA2_ALM is generated. This alarm corresponds to
TAH-208, TAH-209, TAH-213, TAH-214 P&Id alarms.
If this common alarm remains active for more than 24 hours, L30WSA4_ALM software alarm signal is
generated and shutdown sequence is started (L30WSA_SD software shutdown request).
If the average temperature exceeds the shutdown level for more than 10s, a common software alarm
L30WSA3_ALM (corresponding to TAHH-208, TAHH-209, TAHH-213, TAHH-214 P&Id alarms) is
generated and the shutdown sequence is immediately activated (L30WSA_SD).
For the first hour of operation after the end of starting sequence (L3 is true), WSKALM9 constant (21°C) is
added to both alarm and shutdown levels to avoid shutdown due to a transient thermal distribution.

Outputs from the two thermocouples located in a same measurement section are compared against each
other. If they differ by more than WSKALM8 constant (65.5°C), the high spread software alarm
L30WSA1_ALM is generated and the maximum temperature value is considered for control functions.
A thermocouple signal is detected faulty when at least one of the following conditions are verified:
Thermocouple output is out of range (-26.5°C, 649°C);
Signal fault detected by hardware diagnostic.
If a thermocouple signal is detected faulty, its value is discarded and temperature value is given by the
other thermocouple on the same section.
If two thermocouple signals on the same section are faulty for more then 10s, alarm signal
L30WSAF_ALM is generated and shutdown sequence is started (L30WSA_SD).
Water Wash Permissive

All of the average wheelspace temperature values are compared against each other and the highest value
is selected. This value is then compared to K69TWW constant (149°C), to provide water wash permissive
signal (L69TWW).
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.9 SEISMIC VIBRATION
DEVICE SUMMARY

39V-1A VE -209 A TURBINE BRG.#1 VIBRATION
39V-1B VE -209 B TURBINE BRG.#1 VIBRATION
39V-2A VE -210 A TURBINE CASING VIBRATION
39V-2B VE -210 B TURBINE CASING VIBRATION
Alarm and trip logic

If the signal coming from one of the four sensors exceeds its alarm level for more then LK39ATD (typically
5s), software common alarm L39VA_ALM is generated (VAH-209, VAH-210 in the P&Id).
If a sensor signal reaches its trip level and maintains this value for more than LK39TTD (typically 0.5s)
while a second sensor value is above alarm level, trip L39VT and alarm L39VT_ALM are generated
(VAHH-209, VAHH-210 P&Id alarms).
Trip signal L39VT is latched and can be reset with master reset command from the HMI.
If the difference between the two signals of a pair of sensors is higher than the threshold LK39DIFF for
more than LK39DFTDT (typically 0.5s), software alarm L39VDIFF_ALM is generated.
Instrumentation fault and disable logic

Sensor readings can be faulty, detected by hardware diagnostic, or disabled, by forcing to 0 the enable
input.
If at least one sensor fault is detected for more than LK39FTD time (typically 500ms), alarm L39VF_ALM
is generated.
If at least one sensor is disabled, alarm L39VD1_ALM is generated.
When two or more sensors are disabled or detected above alarm threshold, if at least one enabled sensor
reaches the trip level for more than LK39TTD (typically .5s), trip L39VT and alarm L39VT_ALM are
generated.
If three sensors are faulty or disabled, inhibit to start signal L39VD3 is generated. Also, L39VD3_ALM
alarm is generated if master protective signal L4 is low (starting condition).
If two paired sensors are faulty or disabled, L39VD2 shutdown signal and L39VD2_ALM alarm are
generated.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.10 WATER WASH
DEVICE SUMMARY

20TW-1 XY -407 ON LINE WASHING WATER SOLENOID
VALVE
20TW-2 XY -406 OFF LINE WASHING WATER SOLENOID
VALVE
On line water wash sequence
Water wash cutout conditions:

Turbine start sequence not ended - turbine is not running (L3 is false)
Compressor inlet temperature (CTIM software signal) lower than the threshold LKWCTIM (typically 10°C).
Water wash selection:

On line water wash is selected using HMI pushbutton L83WWON_CPB.
When the turbine start sequence is ended (L3 is true), if the on line water wash is selected and
temperature cutout condition is verified, the software alarm L3WCTIM_ALM is generated.
Water wash activation:

If the operator selects on line water wash and temperature cutout condition is not verified, on line water
wash sequence is activated. After K83WWZ (typically 3 seconds) the solenoid valve XY -407 (20TW-1) is
energized by l20bw2 software output.
Water wash stop:

Water wash is de-activated (and solenoid valve XY -407 (20TW-1) is de-energized) when on line water
wash is de-selected due to:
HMI pushbutton L83WWOFF_CPB activation
Cut-out condition.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
Off line water wash sequence
Water wash activation enabling conditions:

Master selector not in CRANK mode (L43C is true)
Shaft zero speed not detected (L14HR is false)
Off line water wash not selected (L43BW is false)
Water wash selection:

Off-line water wash is selected using HMI pushbutton L43BWON_CPB. The selection is detected by
L43BW MKVIe signal.
When the water wash is selected, if wheelspaces temperature permissive is not active (L69TWW is false),
alarm L30TWW_ALM is generated.
Water wash activation:

If enabling conditions are verified, the water wash sequence is activated when the unit is started (L1X is
true).
Activation is detected by L83BW software signal.
Water wash cutout:

Wheelspaces temperature high (L69TWW is false);
Master protective signal not activated (L4 is false)
Flame detected (L28FDX is true)
HP shaft below crank speed (L14HM is false)
Water wash start:

If all cutout conditions are not verified and water wash sequence is activated (L83BW is true), the IGV
open command is generated (L83GVMAX software signal) and the cleaning solution intercept valveXY -
406 (20TW-2) is opened by software output l20bw1.
Water wash stop:

Water wash sequence is stopped during its execution in case of unit normal stop.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.11 VENTILATION
DEVICE SUMMARY

FNVF1÷2 --- CENTRIFUGAL VENTILATION FAN
88BA-1÷2 --- VENTILATION FAN AC MOTOR
DVF-1÷6 --- DAMPERS
33ID-1 ZSH -207 A VENTILATION INLET DAMPER OPEN
33ID-2 ZSH -207 B VENTILATION INLET DAMPER OPEN
33OD-1 ZSH -202 A TURBINE COMP. VENTILATION OUTLET
OPEN
33OD-2 ZSH -202 B COUPLING COMP. VENTILATION
OUTLET OPEN
96SV-1A PDT -205 A VENTILATION FANS SWITCH-OVER
96SV-1B PDT -205 B VENTILATION FANS SWITCH-OVER
96SV-1C PDT -205 C VENTILATION FANS SWITCH-OVER
TT-BA-2A TE -296 A TURBINE COMPARTMENT INTERNAL
TEMP.
TT-BA-2B TE -296 B TURBINE COMPARTMENT INTERNAL
TEMP.
TT-BA-2C TE -296 C TURBINE COMPARTMENT INTERNAL
TEMP.
33DT-1 ÷ 33DT-10 ZSL -206 A ÷ ZSL -206 J ACCESS DOORS LIMIT SWITCH
Ventilation fan ready to run (L3BT)
The Turbine enclosure ventilation fan ready to run status flag (L3BT) shall be set if all the following
conditions are satisfied:
The turbine enclosure inlet fire damper is fully open(33ID-1, 33ID-2)
The turbine enclosure outlet fire dampers are fully open (33OD-1, 33OD-2)
This condition is checked at the automatic start of fans and enables manual operation.
Ventilation cutoff condition (L4BT):

The turbine enclosure ventilation cutoff status flag (L4BT) shall be set if at least one of the following
conditions are satisfied:
The turbine enclosure fire detected trip, detected by F&G system interface signal l45ftt
The turbine enclosure CO2 discharged trip, detected by F&G system interface signal l63cpd
The turbine enclosure inlet air gas detect trip, detected by F&G system interface signal l45hft.
If cutoff condition is verified, the running fans are stopped, regardless any manual or automatic request.
Main/Stand-by fan selection

Main and Stand-by fan selection is done by HMI dedicated pushbutton (through signal L43BT_CMD).
Main fan start/stop logic

The main fan request signal (L4BTON) is active during ventilation operative period, that is from the turbine
starting sequence initiated (L1X) up to the turbine enclosure cool-down end.
Main fan is started if:
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
Turbine starting sequence is initiated (L1X is true)

All start permissive conditions are verified (L3BT is true)
All cutoffs conditions are not verified (L4BT is false)
Offline water wash not selected (L83BW is false)
Main fan is then stopped:
K4BTON (typically 120 min) after flameout (L28FDX is false).
If Auxiliary fan is started due to the detection of one of its start conditions.
Auxiliary fan command

Auxiliary fan is started if:
One of auxiliary fan start conditions is verified (L2BT is true)
All cutoffs conditions are not verified (L4BT is false)
When auxiliary fan start conditions are not verified, the fan is stopped if one of the following conditions is
true:
K4BTON (typically120 min) after flameout (L28FDX is false)
Manually by HMI pushbutton (L43BT1÷2S_CPB command)
- From MCC drawers
Switchover Sequence
A switchover event is defined as an automatic or manual change of the fan selected to run.
An automatic switchover to Stand-by is requested (L2BT) if the main fan has a decrease in performance,
sensed by low enclosure differential pressure (L63BT).
At automatic switchover, the Stand-by fan starts immediately and the main fan is kept running for a
switchover delay time (typically 10 s), and than is stopped.
If the stand-by fan is running due to an automatic switchover, than the stand-by fan running alarm is
activated (L52BT_ALM) and further automatic switchover are disabled.
If low alarm persists after a changeover, shutdown is generated.
Automatic switchover is bypassed if one of the following condition is verified:

Loss of ventilation due to open door
Admission to enclosure procedure activated
After the automatic switchover to stand-by, if the operative differential pressure has been recovered, after
proper inspection of main fan failures, the operator can reset the stand-by running alarm, by selecting as
main the running fan through L43BT_CMD command.
Note that if otherwise the operative differential pressure has not been recovered, acting on L43BT_CMD
doesn’t cause the stand-by alarm reset but causes a manual switchover to new selected stand-by fan.
The operator can force a manual fan switchover through HMI pushbutton L43BT_CMD.
If the operator requests a (manual) fan switchover when the main fan is running, than the new selected
main fan starts immediately and the deselected fan continues to run for the switchover delay time, than is
stopped. Manual fan switchover does not activate any stand-by fan running alarm.
If the operator requests a manual fan switchover when both fans are running or both are stopped, nothing
changes except the main vs. stand-by fan selection.
Manual fans command

If all start permissive conditions are verified and all cutoffs conditions are not verified, each fan can be
manually started (HMI command L43BT1÷2_CMD) and stopped (HMI command L43BT1÷2S_CPB)
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
Alarms and trips logic

The turbine compartment outlet temperatures are used to calculate the median value. Temperature
alarms and trips are generated as follows:
If voted signal is detected higher than threshold K26BA, software output L26BA and alarm L26BA_ALM
are generated. The related P&Id alarm is TAH -296
If voted signal is detected higher than threshold K26BT, software trip signal L26BT and alarm L26BT_ALM
are generated. The related P&Id trip is. TAHH -296
Moreover, if turbine compartment differential pressure is detected low by MKVIe signal A63BT_W,
software alarm L63BT_ALM is generated and, if auxiliary fan has been running for more than 30 sec.,
shutdown is started.
If at least one turbine/gearbox enclosure door limit switch between 33DT-1 To 33DT-10 is not closed,
L33DT_ALM alarm is generated by the MKVIe.
If dampers are not fully open, the following software alarms are generated:
L33ID1_ALM from ZSH -207 A (33ID-1) limit switch
L33ID2_ALM from ZSH -207 B (33ID-2) limit switch
L33OD1_ALM from ZSH -202 A (33OD-1) limit switch located in the turbine compartment
L33OD2_ALM from ZSH -202 B (33OD-2) limit switch located in the gearbox compartment.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.12 INLET AND FILTRATION
DEVICE SUMMARY

96TF-1A PDIT -252 A TURBINE AIR INLET FILTER CTRL
PRESS.
96TF-1B PDIT -252 B TURBINE AIR INLET FILTER CTRL
PRESS.
96TF-1C PDIT -252 C TURBINE AIR INLET FILTER CTRL
PRESS.
AT-IA-1 TE -217 A FILTER HOUSE INLET AIR
TEMPERATURE
AT-IA-2 TE -217 B FILTER HOUSE INLET AIR
TEMPERATURE
AT-IA-3 TE -217 C FILTER HOUSE INLET AIR
TEMPERATURE
96AP-1A PT -212 A AMBIENT PRESSURE
96AP-1B PT -212 B AMBIENT PRESSURE
96AP-1C PT -212 C AMBIENT PRESSURE
Alarms and trips logic

If inlet air filter differential pressure is detected high by L63TF1H_W software signal for more then
K63TF1_ALM (typically 2 s), alarm L63TF1_ALM is generated by the MKVIe; the related P&Id alarm is
PDAH-4054.
If inlet air filter differential pressure is detected high by shutdown logic, shutdown signal L63TF and alarm
L63TF_ALM are generated by the MKVIe. The related P&Id alarm is PDAHH-4054.
If air pressure into pulse jet system is detected low by a63ca software signal, alarm L63CA_ALM is
generated by the MKVIe.
High pulse jet filter differential pressure detected by PDSH -226 (63PJ-1) is annunciated with PDAH-4053
alarm.

If absolute value of difference between the highest and the lowest of the three pressure values given PDIT
-252 A (96TF-1A), PDIT -252 B (96TF-1B) , PDIT -252 C (96TF-1C) is higher than threshold K63TF_FLT
for more than time delay K63TF_SENSR (typically 60 s) software alarm L63TF_SENSR is generated.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.13 FUEL GAS<1>
DEVICE SUMMARY

20VG-1 FV -109 FUEL GAS VENT
96FG-2A PT -109 A INTERSTAGE FUEL GAS
96FG-2B PT -109 B INTERSTAGE FUEL GAS
96FG-2C PT -109 C INTERSTAGE FUEL GAS
90SR ZCV -307 STOP/SPEED RATIO VALVE
20FG-1 FV -337 STOP/RATIO VALVE CONTROL OIL TRIP
20FG-2 FV -338 GAS CONTROL VALVE CONTROL OIL
TRIP
TG-FG-1 TE -104 A FUEL GAS TEMPERATURE INLET
TG-FG-2 TE -104 B FUEL GAS TEMPERATURE INLET
TG-FG-3 TE -104 C FUEL GAS TEMPERATURE INLET
96FG-1 PT -108 UPSTREAM SRGC VALVE PRESSURE
96SR-1 ZT -101 A STOP/RATIO VALVE LVDT
96SR-2 ZT -101 B STOP/RATIO VALVE LVDT
65GC ZCV -306 GAS CONTROL VALVE
96GC-1 ZT -102 A GAS CONTROL VALVE LVDT
96GC-2 ZT -102 B GAS CONTROL VALVE LVDT
Alarms logic.
Vent valve control sequence
Vent valve opening is enabled if the following conditions are all verified:
Water wash off-line not active (~L83BW)
Flame not detected (~L28FDX)
Ignition command not detected (~L2TVX)
After start passed (L4)
Conditions above select an enabling window between start passed and igniting events (see figure 1). Also,
venting is disabled in case of off -line water wash sequence.
L4
L2TVX
L28FDX
Opening enabling window
Alarm enabling
Figure 1 - Vent valve enabling
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
If vent valve opening is enabled, open command (l20vg2) is generated if fuel gas temperature is less than
K26FGL_VG2 (typically 4°F) above alarm threshold K26FGL. Then it closes again with an hysteresis of
K26FGL_VG2_H (typically 8°F).
After an opening command (l20vg2), if valve is not open, detected by ~l33vg2_c, within 3s, alarm
L86VG2_ALM is generated.
After a closing command (~l20vg2), if valve is not completely closed, detected by l33vg2_c, within
K20VG2_C (typically 30s), alarm L86VG2_ALM is generated.
If valve is not completely closed, detected by ~l33vg2_c, alarm L33VG2_ALM is generated if at least one
of the following conditions is true:
Water wash off-line active (L83BW)
Ignition active (L2TVX)
Before start passed and after K20VG2_C seconds from loss of L4.
After flame detection and before 1.1 * K20VG2_C seconds after loss of flame (~L28FDX).
Conditions above select the complementary to the enabling opening window (see figure 1). Note that in
case of trip event before ignition, the alarm is also disabled during maximum closing time (K20VG2_C) to
allow vent valve to close.
Alarms logic.
If the fuel gas pressure is low, detected by l63fgl, during ignition L2TVX or with flame detected L28FDX,
alarm L63FGL_ALM is generated.
If the fuel gas temperature ftg2 is lower than K26FGL (typically 86°F) during ignition L2TVX or with flame
detected L28FDX , then alarm L26FGL_ALM is generated.
If the fuel gas temperature ftg2 is higher than K26FGH (typically 284°F), alarm L26FGH_ALM is
generated.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.14 FIRE FIGHTING AND GAS DETECTION MONITORING
DEVICE SUMMARY

33CR-20/1 ÷33CR-20/n WSL -703 1 ÷WSL -703 N BATT. "A" INIT. DISCH. CO2
BOTTLE EMPTY
33CR-21/1 ÷33CR-21/n WSL -705 1 ÷WSL -705 N BATT. "A" EXT. DISCH. CO2
BOTTLE EMPTY
33CR-30/1 ÷33CR-30/n WSL -706 1 ÷WSL -706 N BATT. "A" INIT. DISCH. CO2
BOTTLE EMPTY
33CR-31/1 ÷33CR-31/n WSL -708 1 ÷WSL -708 N BATT. "A" EXT. DISCH. CO2
BOTTLE EMPTY
33CP-4A ZSH -702 A CO2 EXTENDED DISCH. ISOL.
VALVE - OPEN
33CP-4B ZSH -702 B CO2 INITIAL DISCH. ISOL. VALVE -
OPEN
Fire Fighting &Gas detection logic:

Kindly refer the F&G PLC Logic Digram (SOM5461015)
Field Interface:
If at least one fire fighting CO2 discharge valve is detected not open (L33CP is false) by the limit switch
ZSH -702 A (33CP-4A) or the limit switch ZSH -702 B (33CP-4B) , MKVIe alarm L33CP_ALM is
generated; the related P&Id alarm is ZAK-701A.
If at least one fire fighting CO2 discharge valve is detected closed, XS -160 (33CP-1) signal (software
signal l33cp_c) is received from F&G monitor and MKVIe alarm L33CPC_ALM, complementary XS -160
(33CP-1), is generated.
If at least one fire fighting bottle in bank A is empty, WSL -703 (33CR-A) MKVIe alarm L33CR_A_ALM
(P&Id alarm WAL-700) is generated.
If at least one fire fighting bottle in bank B is empty, WSL -706 (33CR-B) MKVIe alarm L33CR_B_ALM
(P&Id alarm WAL-701) is generated.
CO2 discharge logic:

The fire and gas monitor can be set in Automatic or Inhibited mode.
In Automatic Mode the extinguishant shall be released, after a 30 seconds delay, upon automatic
detection of fire or manual activation of discharge pushbuttons. This condition is immediately notified
through horns and red flashing lights close to the enclosure.
In Inhibited mode, only manual CO2 release activation is available.
If fire trip is generated and notified to MKVIe through XS -163 (45FTT) hardwired signal (l45ftt MKVIe
software signal) by the F&G panel, and, after an appropriate delay1, no CO2 discharge positive feedback
is detected (XS -171 (63CPD) hardwired signal from F&G panel to MKVIe; l63cpd MKVIe software signal),
MKVIe alarm L30CPD_ALM –CO2DISCHARGE FAILED- is raised.
1
This delay is the sum of safety CO2 discharge command delay (30sec) and actual discharge time on quick discharge header (this
value – K96CP- is set to 30sec with a conservative approach. To be adjusted at site if needed).
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.15 GENERATOR HEATER AND COOLING FANS SYSTEM
DEVICE SUMMARY

88QG-1 --- GENERATOR VENTILATION FAN
MOTOR
MOTOR
MOTOR
MOTOR SPACE HEATER
MOTOR SPACE HEATER
MOTOR SPACE HEATER
23EG1-4 --- GENERATOR SPACE HEATER<4>
A26GAC1 TE -371 GENERATOR COOLING AIR - COLD D.E.
A26GAW TE -372 GENERATOR COOLING AIR - WARM
A26GAC2 TE -373 GENERATOR COOLING AIR - COLD
N.D.E.
A26GWU-1 TE -375 WINDING GENERATOR PHASE U
A26GWU-3 TE -377 WINDING GENERATOR PHASE U
A26GWV-1 TE -378 WINDING GENERATOR PHASE V
A26GWV-3 TE -380 WINDING GENERATOR PHASE V
A26GWW-1 TE -381 WINDING GENERATOR PHASE W
A26GWW-3 TE -383 WINDING GENERATOR PHASE W
The generator is equipped with 3 fans and 3 heaters.
Generator fans are started and generator heaters are stopped at generator breaker closure.
On the opposite side, generator fans are stopped, and generator heaters are started when generator
breaker opening occurs.
Cooling fans are designed for continuous operation. It is sufficient to have two of the three cooling fans in
service to provide generator full output power; this is the reason why, during normal operation, two
o
generator fans are activated, while the third one (auxiliary fan) starts only if a threshold of 95 C is reached
by TE -371 (A26GAC1) , TE -372 (A26GAW) , TE -373 (A26GAC2) output values (a26bg1, a26bg2,
a26bg3 software signals).
The auxiliary fan is selected by the operator and is started when one high temperature alarm between
TAH-371, TAH-372, and TAH-373 is displayed.
When the high temperature alarm condition is reset, the auxiliary fan remains running and can be stopped
manually by the operator from HMI or MCC. If auxiliary fan is started an alarm is generated. During normal
GT operation, the operator can choose a different auxiliary fan, starting it and stopping one of the previous
selected main fans; anyway two of three cooling fans are always required in service.
The generator is also equipped with four anticondensate heaters 23EG-1-4 which are switched on after
the cool-down period (L62CD) and during off line water washing sequence and switched off on flame
detected.<4>
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.16 GENERATOR SYNCHRONIZATION SEQUENCES
DEVICE SUMMARY

77NH-1 SE -200 A MAGNETIC PICKUP - TURBINE SPEED
(OVSP)
77NH-2 SE -200 B MAGNETIC PICKUP - TURBINE SPEED
(OVSP)
77NH-3 SE -200 C MAGNETIC PICKUP - TURBINE SPEED
(OVSP)
20CB-1 FV -212 VA2-1/2 VALVES ACTUATION
All the instrumentation involved is controlled by the Mark VIe.

When the turbine shaft speed is detected at 95% of rated speed by SE -200 A (77NH-1) , SE -200 B
(77NH-2) and SE -200 C (77NH-3) , the turbine axial compressor bleed valves are operated closed
through FV -212 (20CB-1) solenoid valve, and the turbine is ready to synchronize.
The complete sequence flag (software signal L3) will be reset in case of trip sequence initiated (software
signal L4 = 0) or shutdown sequence initiated (software signal L94X=1).
On the HMI synchronization display, the the following operating modes are available:
OFF This selection disables all MARK VIe synchronizing functions. This selection is forced if GCPP
manual synchronization is enabled.
AUTO This selection enables the automatic synchronization using the MKVIe internal functions; it is set
to true if GCPP permissive –XS -202 (GCPP-AUTO) - is true.
With auto-synchronization selected, when the turbine shaft speed is detected equal to minimum operating
speed (95% of rated speed), the signal XS -212 (41FX) – “EXCITATION ENABLED 95% SPEED” is sent
from MARK VIe to the GCPP and then replicated from this panel to the GEP. If all the following
synchronization permissive conditions are satisfied, turbine shaft speed reference is set to 100.3 %:
Generator breaker open status (software signal L52GX is false);
BUS reference voltage fault not detected (software signal l8vtb1 is false);
AVR reference voltage fault not detected (software signal l8vtavr is false);
Metering reference voltage fault not detected (software signal l8vtm is false);
Protections reference voltage fault not detected (software signal l8vtp is false);
AVR Automatic mode selected (software signal l43avr is true);
AVR Local mode not selected (software signal l43avrlc is false);
Field contactor closed (software signal l41x is true);
Complete start sequence ended (L3 is true)
Automatic synchronizing permissive (l3gg is true)
See also section 2.6.
When 100.3% of turbine rated shaft speed is reached, the unit is ready to synchronize.
Upon “ready to synchronize” condition detection and “Start Autosync” HMI pushbutton activation,
generator breaker closure command XS -215 (25) is sent from the MKVIe to the GCPP.
Speed and voltage matching permissive signal raise is required to allow circuit breaker closing command
to be sent; this permissive signal is obtained as a cumulative signal composed of:
Synchronization permissives;
Software signal L3SVL notifying that bus voltage is between 95 and 105 % of rated voltage;
Software signal displaying that generator frequency differs less than 1Hz from rated frequency;
Software signal displaying that line frequency differs less than 1Hz from rated frequency.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
The voltage-matching algorithm generates raise/lower signals l83rv/l83lv, sent by the MKVIe to the GCPP
voltage regulator XS -213 (83-RV), XS -214 (83-LV) hardwired signal).
The speed-matching algorithm generates raise/lower signals used to change turbine speed reference.
Speed matching is designed to bring the generator frequency slightly (0.15 Hz) above the line frequency.
The generator breaker is closed when the synchro-check contact is closed.
After generator breaker closure, the MKVIe increases the quantity of fuel provided to the turbine by
regulating fuel gas valves position, in order to reach the “partial load” level of active power, if preselected
load or base load is set.
In case of a generator breaker trip the turbine speed reference is restored to 100.3 % and the unit
becomes again ready to be synchronized. Unit start command, available through a pushbutton on the
HMI, is required to restart the synchronization process.
Load management control logics

Load management is performed selecting “Droop” or “Isochronous” mode. This selection is available on
the HMI, if the main selector is in “Local” (software signal L43R is false) position. If the main selector
position is “Remote” (software signal L43R is true), load management mode selection is performed by the
Power Management System..
Manual load management control logics

If main selector on HMI is in “Local” position (software signal L43R is false), the operator is allowed to
change current active power value, using raise and lower HMI push buttons.
If “pre-selected” load selection is configured, load management is automatically transferred to manual
mode upon raise or lower push button selection.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.17 DROOP AND ISOCHRONOUS CONTROL MODE

In normal procedure the MARK VIe governor control is automatically switched in Constant Settable
DROOP mode, as soon as the generator breaker is closed; in this operative mode, the load control is
performed via “Power Raise/Lower” signals by the HMI or the PMS (if master selector is in “Remote”
position).
This Speed/Load control method considers gas turbine megawatt output as a control parameter to
formulate the turbine droop response to electrical grid perturbations and consequently adjust it in order to
maintain grid frequency at a constant value.
The following chart shows how the turbine power supplied to the load (horizontal axis) varies with
reference to turbine speed set point. This set point, called TNR, is the gas turbine speed reference in
terms of percent of the nominal speed, and maintains a constant value on each diagonal line in the chart.
As clearly displayed, if TNR value is fixed (i.e. TNR=104% - see the bold diagonal line in the graph), any
load demand reduction of 25% makes the turbine speed to increase of 1% and the corresponding grid
frequency (shown on the left vertical axis) to rise up of 0.5Hz. Conversely, if a 25% additional load is
connected to the grid, a complementary 1% speed and 0.5 grid frequency reduction occurs, moving along
“TNR=104%” diagonal line.
Constant Settable Droop Control manages TNR constant adjustments, based on load demand variations,
to prevent the grid frequency from changinig as described.
After synchronization to an electrical power grid with 60Hz frequency, the TNR value has to be changed
between 100% and 104% to modify the load output from 0% to 100% (consider the chart below moving
from point (A) to point (B)).
For different fixed values of grid frequency, as displayed in the chart, the Constant Settable Droop load
control mode makes a 4% variation of turbine speed set-point correspond to a 100% variation of the
power supplied to the load.
Droop Governor
Response (4% Droop)
62.5 TN 105
R
=1
05
62 TN 104
R
=1
04
61.5 TNR 103

=1
03
61 TN
R Ra 102
=1 ted
02 Ba
se
60.5 TN Lo
R ad 101
=1
01
TN
60 R B 100
Grid Frequency [Hz]
=1
Turbine Speed [%]
A 00 25 50 75 100 125 150

% Load
59.5 99
59 98
58.5 97
58 96
57.5 95
FIG.1 -DROOP REGULATION
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
ISOCHRONOUS control mode is also possible in this kind of units. In this load control mode, the unit is
driven to maintain a constant speed regardless of the load requirements and therefore of the output
delivered.
Consequently, in this load control mode, the value of the active power supplied to the load can’t be set and
the machine faces to all load variations; i.e., if an increase in load power demand occurs, gas turbine
consequent response is a speed reduction, immediately corrected by the speed controller increasing the
gas quantity supplied to the machine.
For this reason, if two or more interconnected units are working together, each load variation causes a
fuel gas flow adjustment in the unit running in isochronous mode, while the other units (in DROOP mode)
are set to deliver a fixed power output.
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
3.18 BASE LOAD

DEVICE SUMMARY

TT-XD-1  TT-XD-13 TE -211 A  TE -211 M EXHAUST TEMPERATURE
THERMOCOUPLE
96CD-1 PT -214 A AXIAL COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE
96CD-2 PT -214 B AXIAL COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE
96CD-3 PT -214 C AXIAL COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE
When BASE LOAD is selected the unit is automatically loaded after synchronization and output power is
increased until maximum rated exhaust temperature detection (notified by TE -211 A (TT-XD-1) TE -211
M (TT-XD-13)). After any ambient conditions change, delivered power is automatically adjusted to hold the
highest allowable MWatt output. The reference of the exhaust temperature is biased by MEDIAN
compressor discharge pressure to maintain a constant firing temperature even when the ambient
conditions are changing.
PRESELECTED LOAD
The operator is allowed to set a certain MWatt output value as an HMI input; the Mark VIe will use this
value as a pre-selected load control constant. When PRESELECTED load control mode is set, the unit will
automatically load or unload till the required MWatt output is reached. The control system will regulate the
MWatt output within the allowed operating values.
MANUAL LOAD CONTROL
Manual load selection is performed on the HMI. Any different selected mode (i.e. Pre-Selected) will be
reset to manual control if the operator activates RAISE/LOWER commands on HMI or if the governor
control is transferred from DROOP to ISOCHRONOUS.
Frequency adjustment is also permitted to the operator through raise/lower push buttons.
3.19 EJECTOR LOGIC <4>

DEVICE SUMMARY

--- SOV -216 AIR EIECTOR CONTROL VALVE
--- ZSH -216 AIR EIECTOR CONTROL VALVE - VALVE
OPEN
--- ZSH -217 AIR EIECTOR CONTROL VALVE - VALVE
OPEN
All units equipped with IBH system show high temperature in the second wheel space after when running
at very low load (approx 30%) and IGV angle set at 42 deg. In some case high temperature alarm set
point (427 °C) was reached.
4 R E V IS E D W H E R E S H O W N A S < 4 > ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
To mitigate the high wheel space temperature issue, the GT cooling system has been
redesigned and made more efficient by means of the ejector installed at the 4th stage
compressor extraction.
Design Criteria
th
Ejector system will improve the cooling through the 4 stage during partial load operation.
th
Ejector will commutate to close position when the pressure on 4 stage will reach the value of 1.3 – 1.4
barA.
The valve selected for the ejector control is an Electro-Pneumatic valve. A solenoid controlled by a Mark
VI signal direct the pneumatic actuator to open or close the ejector valve.
The control signal is the IGV feedback and the pneumatic actuator is put into action by instrument air.
Test performed on field shown the ejector capability to provide the right cooling flow during partial load
operation.
450
400
3.1 350
Wheelspace temperature remain well 300

Ejector valve close below the alarm in all IGV range
when P4 reaches 1.3 - 1.4
Bara
250
2.3 barA
200
150
1.4 100
50
0.6 0
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
P4 upper P10 upper IGVTTWS2AO1 TTWS2AO2
Valve Setting
The valve shall commutate the ejector opening/closing with the following logic:
if
IGV > IGVclose valve closed;
if
IGV < IGVopen valve open;
Where:
IGVclose = 60 DEG
IGVopen = 57 DEG
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


NuovoPignone
FIRENZE
Valve closed
Valve open
IGV
IGVopen IGVclose
Signal
The ejector valve will be controlled by IGV position signal in order to guarantee the
correlation Extraction Pressure – IGV – Cooling Flow;
Conclusion
An electro-pneumatic valve will control ejector through the IGV position based on the logic:
if
IGV > IGVclose valve closed;
if
IGV < IGVopen valve open;
Where:
IGVclose = 60 DEG
IGVopen = 57 DEG
ITEM
2 GENERAL REVISION


Marchini M.
Seghi A.

Marchini M.
Seghi A.

Signore R.
Seghi A.

CLIENTE – CUSTOMER
Nuovo Pignone SONATRACH
FIRENZE LOCALITA’ - PLANT LOCATION
ALGERIA
COMMESSA - JOB IMPIANTO – PLANT
TITOLO – TITLE
UTILITY LIST
3 Revised sheets 3,4 QuEST Quartieri E. Seghi A. 26/11/09 ITEM

2 Revised sheets 1, 2, 3, 4 QuEST QUARTIERI SEGHI 14/07/09
1 Revised sheets 1, 3, 4 QUARTIERI VALENTINI SEGHI 29/04/09 N. SOM6623069 /4
0 EMISSIONE-ISSUE QuEST QUARTIERI SEGHI 06/02/09 LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
REV. DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION PREP'D CONT-CHK'D APP-APPR'D DATA-DATE A 1 / 2
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
© 2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A ., all rights reserved SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone UTILITY CONSUMPTION LIST
FIRENZE
INDEX
1. FUEL GAS.
2. INSTRUMENT AIR.
3. DEMINERALISED WATER.
4. OIL.
• Standard requirements for fuel gas : GEI 41040 issue k <2>
• Standard requirements for washing water/ detergent : GEK103623c
• Standard requirements for mineral lubricating oil : GEK 28143 issue b
SOM 17366 rev. 5
General - This list is referred to the consumption required from a turbo generator unit to
achieve the required performance. Requirements are expressed in terms of Flow, Pressure,
T emperature and Quality limits for each media; compliance within specified limits is required.
ITEM
N. SOM6623069 /4
2 Revised where <2> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
REV. DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION A 2 / 3

FIRENZE
SECTION 1: FUEL GAS
FUEL GAS FOR TURBINE

PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
FLOW
TYPE CONDITION [barg] @ TP100 [°C] @ TP100 QUALITY
[Nm3/h]
(note 3) <2> (note 3) <2>
9150.5 (note 1)
@ -5°C
2689 (note 2)
Ambient T emp
GAS#1 <1> <2> Min: 22 <1> Min. : 20 <1>
7024.7 (note 1) Max: 24 Max : 70 <1>
@ 50°C
2344.8 (note 2) As per GE
Ambient T emp
<1> <2> spec:
@ -5°C 8755.5 (note 1) GEI-41040
Ambient T emp 2573 (note 2)
GAS#2 <1> <1> <2> Min: 22 <1> Min. : 20 <1>
@ 50°C 6719 (note 1) Max: 24 <1> Max : 70 <1>
<1>
Ambient T emp 2233 (note 2)
<1> <1> <2>
NOTE 1: Gas turbine operating at base load <1>

NOTE 2: Gas turbine operating at full speed no load <1>
NOTE 3: TP100 is Nuovo Pignone’s Gas Turbine battery limit <2>
FUEL GAS COMPOSITION (see note 4) <2>

GAS#1 <1> GAS#2 <1>
FUEL GAS NAME
[mole %] [mole %]
Methane
87.16 <1> 82.79 <1>
CH4
Ethane
6.92 <1> 9.98 <1>
C2H6
Propane
1.19 <1> 2.28 <1>
C3H8
i-Butane
0.07 <1> 0.15 <1>
C4H10
n-Butane
0.08 <1> 0.2 <1>
C4H10
i-Pentane
0 <1> 0.02 <1>
C5H12
n-Pentane
0 <1> 0.01 <1>
C5H12
Carbon Dioxide
4.14 <1> 4.17 <1>
CO2
Nitrogen
0.44 <1> 0.40 <1>
N2
NOTE 4: For references see document number OO17/ENC/ECA-OB “Nombre des points de piquages et
composition de gaz” <2> <3>
ITEM
3 Revised where <3>

2 Revised where <2> N. SOM6623069 /4

FIRENZE
SECTION 2: INSTRUMENT AIR
INSTRUMENT AIR
Air quality shall be clean, dry and oil free as per ISO8573.1 Class 3.3.3
SUPPLY SUPPLY
FLOW
SERVICE PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
[Nm³/h]
[barg] <2> [°C]
Min: 5.5
Pulse jet system @TP201 (note 2) <2> 54 Max: 80 <1>
Max: 8
Min:4
Bleed heat valve @TP550 (note 3) <2> 1.5 Max: 80 <1>
Max: 7
Fuel Gas warm-up vent valve actuation @TP226 (note4) Min:6.5 <1>
1 <1> Max: 80 <1>
<1><2> Max: 8 <1>
Min:6.5 <3>
Air ejector flow control valves @TP551 <3> 1 <3> Max: 80 <3>
Max: 8 <3>
SECTION 3: DEMINERALISED WATER

ON/OFF-LINE WASHING WATER + DETERGENT (PER ONE WASHING)
QUANTITY
DESCRIPTION QUALITY
[l]
MS5001 DLN Axial compressor on-line & off-line
1000 According to GEK103623c
washing
NOTES:
1. List of detergents (commercial description) according ITN07831.01:
• Rochem “Fyrewash F2” or “Fyrewash F3”
• Ivar Rivaenas “R-MC”
• Airworthly “ZOK 27”
•Kent Chemical “Turboclean”
• Turbotect “Turbotect 920/1020”
2. TP201: Tie-in of air filter, see DWG SOM 5105871/1 <2>
3. TP550: Tie-in of bleed valve, see DWG SOM 5105820/1 <2>
4. TP226: Vent point, see DWG SOM 5105810/1 <2>
5. MP300: Oil feed connection, see DWG SOM 5105831/1 <2>
SECTION 4: OIL
LUBRICATING OIL
RESERVOIR EXPECTED
DESCRIPTION QUALITY
VOLUME [ l ] CONSUMPTION [l/day]
Mineral oil ISO VG32 According to SOM17366
9420 0.1
@MP300 (note 5) and GEK28143b
ITEM
3 Revised where <3>

2 Revised where <2> N. SOM6623069 /4

SHAFT ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATION
CUSTOMER : SONATRACH
PLANT LOCATION : ALRAR ALGERIA
PLANT : ALRAR POWER PLANT EXTENSION PROJECT

VERSION 02/2009 ASE/GEAR
Nuovo Pignone FIRENZE
COMMESSA – JOB.
1705713-14-15
SHAFT ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATION N° SOM6625596 /3

LINGUA - LANGUAGE TAVOLA - SHEET
0 EMESSO - ISSUED SB/MP Maragioglio G. Milani G. 3-11-09 A 1/2

PREP’D CHK’D APPR’D DATE
REV. DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION  2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
PREP CONT APPR. DATA SOSTITUITO DA – REPLACED BY
1. SCOPE
This specification supplies the data necessary to perform the site shaft alignment and misalignment maps. 3.2 AXIAL ALIGNMENT MEASUREMENT
Axial alignment (angular alignment) of the shafts, is measured by means of two dial indicators set at zero
2. ALIGNMENT CONSIDERATION when they are positioned at 12 and 6 o'clock.
Alignment must be accomplished prior to initial starting after the equipment has been installed on its permanent site, and
whenever any change has been made in the relative position of the driving to driven equipment. Improper alignment may cause Rotate both shafts and record measurements at every 90° intervals, as shown on fig. 2.
vibration and, at worst, premature bearing failure. Always check alignment after replacement of the driving or driven equipment. Assuming that both indicators are attached to the shaft P, the indicator button will track on shaft Q, the results
Alignment must be checked before and after suction and discharge pipes are assembled to the compressor. are:
Cold alignment compensates for the thermal growth of operating equipment by correctly offsetting the driving and driven -on vertical plane (av), axial misalignment is expressed as:
equipment. The offset allows the equipment to grow into alignment at normal operating conditions. av = (d – g) / 2
Ideal full load (hot) alignment occurs when all drive train member centerlines exactly coincide. It is intended to position the cold
centerline of each drive train component such that at full load temperature, each member of the drive train will move to the ideal (+ or - signs should be considered)
position. - on horizontal plane (ao), axial misalignment is expressed as:
3. ALIGNMENT MEASUREMENT ao = ((c – e) – (f – h)) / 2
3.1 RADIAL ALIGNMENT MEASUREMENT (+ or - signs should be considered)
Zero the radial dial with reference to vertical, as shown on the figure 1. Fig. 2
Rotate both shafts in the direction expected for operation and record measurements at every at 90° intervals.
Dial indicator reads minus when the plunger moves outward and plus when the plunger moves inward.
Vertical misalignment (rv) is expressed as:
rv = b / 2
where "b" is the reading of the dial indicator a 180°

Apart from slight errors, the algebraic sum of 90° (w) and 270° (z) readings coincides with the 180° reading
b=w+z
whereas their algebraic semi-difference indicates horizontal radial misalignment (ro):
ro = (w – z) / 2
it’s imperative to take into account the plus and minus signs of w and z
Fig.1 0
rv
z w 3.3 LASER TOOL READINGS
In the next pages are shown the values relative to the mechanical tool radial and axial readings. If a laser tool
is used for the alignment, the laser values shall be obtained starting from the data in the figures, in the
following way:
- Radial - Vertical reading : refer to dimension A or B depending on the direction of the reading (from
machine 1 to 2 or vice-versa)
b - Radial – horizontal reading: refer to dimension C
- Axial –vertical reading: refer to the acceptable values range in the axial readings dial gauge at six
o’clock, and multiply each value by the ratio 100/D where D is the axial reading diameter for the
mechanical tool.
- Axial – horizontal reading: should be always in the range of +- 0.01 mm.
COMMESSA – JOB.
1705713-14-15
SHAFT ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATION N° SOM6625596/3

0 EMESSO - ISSUED A 2/3

SOSTITUITO DA – REPLACED BY
For the alignment between Gear and Generator
follow the Brush alignment instruction
COMMESSA – JOB.
1705713-14-15
SHAFT ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATION N° SOM6625596/3

0 EMESSO - ISSUED A 3/3

SOSTITUITO DA – REPLACED BY

Sonatrach - Training - Manual - Tuga - 5001pa

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sonatrach - Training - Manual - Tuga - 5001pa

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE

Oil & Gas

GAS TURBINE MS5001PA

Customized for: SONATRACH (ALGERIA)

Customer Training Job: 0621834

Customer : SONATRACH (ALGERIA)

Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise that

Reviewed Verified Validate

GAS TURBINE MS5001PA

Customized for: SONATRACH (ALGERIA)

GAS TURBINE MS5001PA

Customized for: SONATRACH (ALGERIA)

N.P. Job: 170.5713÷15

GAS TURBINE DESCRIPTION & OPERATION

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-2

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00

TURBINE BUCKETS 6.6

STARTING SYSTEM (ELECTRIC STARTING MOTOR) 10

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 2-3

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00

GAS FUEL SYSTEM "DLN" 11.6

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 3-4

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00

OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITY 18.1

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 4-4

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00

GAS TURBINE UNITS 1.2

ENCLOSURE (COMPARTMENTS) 1.3

SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL 1.4

GAS TURBINE DATA SHEET 1.5

GAS TURBINE PERFORMANCE CURVES 1.6

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00

Turbine reliability is ensured by personnel who practice good operating and

1.2 GAS TURBINE UNITS

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00

1.3 ENCLOSURES (COMPARTMENTS)

Gas turbine enclosures, referred to in this manual as compartments, are those

Compartment construction includes removable panels, hinged doors, and a

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-2

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00

1.4 SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL

THIS SYMBOL EVIDENCES A PROCEDURE, A PRECAUTION OR A CONDI-

THIS SYMBOL EVIDENCES A PROCEDURE, PRECAUTION OR CONDITION

THIS SYMBOL EVIDENCES ONE OR MORE DATA NECESSARY TO PERSONNEL TO

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-3

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00

1.5 GAS TURBINE DATA SHEET

1.6 GAS TURBINE PERFORMANCE CURVES

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-4

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00

GAS TURBINE DESCRIPTION

DETAIL ORIENTATION 2.2

GAS PATH DESCRIPTION 2.3

GENERAL LAYOUT AND MAIN WEIGHTS 2.4

11-09-E 170.5713÷15 P. 1-1

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00

2. GAS TURBINE DESCRIPTION

The MS5001 PA is a simple-cycle, single-shaft gas turbine with a ten combus-

The descriptions in this manual apply directly to turbine Models N, P and R.

Presented here is a functional description of each major gas turbine section as

2.2 DETAIL ORIENTATION